Accuvix XQ User Manual v1 English

(Empty Page)
(Empty Page)
MAN_AXQ-E10800-00
PROPRIETRAY INFORMATION AND SOFTWARE LICENSE
The Customer shall keep confidential all proprietary information furnished or disclosed to the
Customer by MEDISON, unless such information has become part of the public domain through
no fault of the Customer. The Customer shall not use such proprietary information, without the
prior written consent of MEDISON, for any purpose other than the maintenance, repair or
operation of the goods.
MEDISON’s systems contain MEDISON’s proprietary software in machine-readable form.

MEDISON retains all its rights, title and interest in the software except that purchase of this
product includes a license to use the machine-readable software contained in it. The Customer
shall not copy, trace, disassemble or modify the software. Transfer of this product by the
Customer shall constitute a transfer of this license that shall not be otherwise transferable. Upon
cancellation or termination of this contract or return of the goods for reasons other than repair or
modification, the Customer shall return to MEDISON all such proprietary information.
Declarations
This is CSA symbol for Canada and United States of America
This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with

applicable EEC directive(s) and the European notified body.
This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with

applicable EEC directive(s).
.
Safety Requirements
* Classifications:
- Type of protection against electrical shock: Class I
- Degree of protection against electrical shock (Patient connection): Type BF equipment
- Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment
- Degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anesthetic material with
air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a
flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
- Mode of operation: Continuous operation
* Electromechanical safety standards met:
- IEC/EN 60601-1 Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General Requirements for Safety.
- IEC/EN 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for medical electrical systems.
- IEC/EN 60601-1-2 Electromagnetic compatibility -Requirements and tests.
- IEC 61157 Declaration of acoustic output parameters.
- ISO 10993-1 Biological evaluation of medical devices.
- UL 2601-1 Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General Requirements for Safety.
- CSA 22.2, 601.1 Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1, General Requirements for Safety.
READ THIS FIRST
▌ How to Use Your Manual
This manual addresses the reader who is familiar with ultrasound techniques. Only medical
doctors or persons supervised by medical doctors should use this system. Sonography training
and clinical procedures are not included here. This manual is not intended to be used as training
material for the principles of ultrasound, anatomy, scanning techniques, or applications. You
should be familiar with all of these areas before attempting to use this manual or your
ultrasound system.
This manual does not include diagnosis results or opinions. Also, check the measurement
reference for each application’s result measurement before the final diagnosis.
It is useless to make constant or complex adjustments to the equipment controls. The system
has been preset at the factory to produce an optimum image in the majority of patients. User
adjustments are not usually required. If the user wishes to change image settings, the variables
may be set as desired. Optimal images are obtained with little difficulty.
We are not responsible for errors that occur when the system is run on a user’s PC.
Please keep this user guide close to the product as a reference when using the system.
For safe use of this product, you should read ‘Chapter1. Safety’ in this manual, prior to
starting to use this system.
Some features are not available in some countries. The features with
NOTE options, and specifications that this manual present can be changed
without notice. Government approval is still pending in some nations.
Conventions Used in This Manual
Describes precautions necessary to prevent user hazards of great

DANGER
urgency. Ignoring a DANGER warning will risk life-threatening injury.
Used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause serious personal
WARNING
injury, or substantial property damage.
CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause equipment damage.
A piece of information useful for installing, operating and maintaining a

NOTE
system. Not related to any hazard.
System Upgrades and Manual Set Updates

MEDISON Ultrasound is committed to innovation and continued improvement. Upgrades may
be announced that consist of hardware or software improvements. Updated manuals will
accompany those system upgrades.
Verify that this version of the manual is correct for the system version. If not, please contact the
Customer Service Department.
If You Need Assistance

If you need any assistance with the equipment, please contact the MEDISON Customer Service
Department or one of their worldwide customer service representatives, immediately.
Table of Contents 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1. SAFETY
SAFETY SIGNS......................................................................................................... 1-2

SAFETY SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................... 1-2
LABELS ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
ELECTRICAL SAFETY.............................................................................................. 1-5
PREVENTION OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ........................................................................................... 1-5
ECG-RELATED INFORMATION .................................................................................................. 1-6
ESD....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
EMI........................................................................................................................................ 1-7
EMC ...................................................................................................................................... 1-8
MECHANICAL SAFETY .......................................................................................... 1-14
MOVING THE EQUIPMENT....................................................................................................... 1-14
SAFETY NOTE ....................................................................................................................... 1-14
BIOLOGICAL SAFETY ............................................................................................ 1-15
ALARA PRINCIPLE ................................................................................................................ 1-15
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ......................................................................... 1-26
CHAPTER 2. INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION
WHAT IS ACCUVIX XQ?........................................................................................... 2-2

FEATURES AND ADVANTAGES OF ACCUVIX XQ ....................................................................... 2-2
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... 2-3
PRODUCT CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION............................................... 2-7
MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
CONTROL PANEL ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
CONSOLE ............................................................................................................................. 2-17
PERIPHERALS ....................................................................................................................... 2-21
PROBES ............................................................................................................................... 2-23
ACCESSORIES....................................................................................................................... 2-24
OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 2-25
2 ACCUVIX XQ Operation Manual
CHAPTER 3. SETTINGS
SELECTING PROBE AND APPLICATION ................................................................3-3

SELECTING PROBE, APPLICATION AND PRESET VALUES .............................................................3-3
EDITING PROBE PRESET VALUES..............................................................................................3-4
ENTERING PATIENT INFORMATION ......................................................................3-5
REGISTERING NEW PATIENT .....................................................................................................3-5
SEARCHING PATIENT INFORMATION ...........................................................................................3-6
EDITING PATIENT INFORMATION ................................................................................................3-8
MODIFYING MEASURE DATA .....................................................................................................3-8
GENERAL SETUP ...................................................................................................3-11
TITLE .................................................................................................................................... 3-11
DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................3-12
PERIPHERALS SETUP ...........................................................................................3-13
OPTION SETUP.......................................................................................................3-16
INFORMATION SETUP ...........................................................................................3-17
MISCELLANEOUS SETUP......................................................................................3-18
3D SETUP................................................................................................................3-21
LIVE 3D SETUP .......................................................................................................3-22
DICOM SETUP ........................................................................................................3-24
DICOM SETUP PROCEDURES ................................................................................................3-24
DICOM DEVICE SETUP .........................................................................................................3-25
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS SETUP...........................................................................3-26
AUTO CALC SETUP................................................................................................3-27
STRESS ECHO SETUP...........................................................................................3-28
GENERAL SETTINGS FOR STRESS ECHO .................................................................................3-28
ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR STRESS ECHO ...............................................................................3-30
MEASUREMENT SETUP ........................................................................................3-31
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................3-32
OBSTETRICS (OB) MEASUREMENT SETTINGS .........................................................................3-36
CARDIAC MEASUREMENT SETTINGS .......................................................................................3-41
VASCULAR MEASUREMENT SETTINGS .....................................................................................3-42
UROLOGY MEASUREMENT SETTINGS ......................................................................................3-43
Table of Contents 3
UTILITY SETUP ...................................................................................................... 3-44

B/W POST ............................................................................................................................ 3-44
COLOR POST ........................................................................................................................ 3-47
IMAGE PRESET...................................................................................................................... 3-48
PANORAMIC IMAGING ............................................................................................................. 3-49
ECG .................................................................................................................................... 3-51
ETC..................................................................................................................................... 3-52
VCR PLAY ............................................................................................................................ 3-54
DYNAMICMR ........................................................................................................................ 3-55
STRESS ECHO ...................................................................................................................... 3-57
BIOPSY ................................................................................................................................. 3-72
IMAGE STORE ....................................................................................................................... 3-73
CHAPTER 4. DIAGNOSIS MODES
DIAGNOSIS MODE TYPES AND CONTROL ........................................................... 4-3

DIAGNOSIS MODES ................................................................................................................. 4-3
DIAGNOSIS MODE SCREENS AND IMAGE INFORMATION .............................................................. 4-3
CHANGING DIAGNOSIS MODE FORMATS ................................................................................... 4-4
OPTIMIZING DIAGNOSIS MODE ................................................................................................. 4-5
BASIC MODES .......................................................................................................... 4-7
2D MODE ............................................................................................................................... 4-7
M MODE ............................................................................................................................... 4-13
COLOR DOPPLER MODE ........................................................................................................ 4-16
POWER DOPPLER MODE ....................................................................................................... 4-19
PW (PULSE WAVE) SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE...................................................................... 4-21
CW (CONTINUOUS WAVE) SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE ........................................................... 4-26
AUTOMATIC CALCULATOR ...................................................................................................... 4-28
COMBINED MODES ............................................................................................... 4-29
2D/C/PW MODE ................................................................................................................... 4-29
2D/PD/PW MODE ................................................................................................................ 4-29
2D/C/CW MODE................................................................................................................... 4-30
2D/PD/CW MODE ................................................................................................................ 4-30
2D/C/M MODE...................................................................................................................... 4-31
DUAL LIVE MODE .................................................................................................................. 4-31
MULTI-IMAGE MODES............................................................................................4-32
DUAL-2D MODE ....................................................................................................................4-32
DUAL-2D/C MODE .................................................................................................................4-32
DUAL-2D/PD MODE ..............................................................................................................4-33
MULTI-DIMENSIONAL MODES ..............................................................................4-34
MULTI-DIMENSIONAL ..............................................................................................................4-34
ACQUIRING 3D IMAGES ..........................................................................................................4-35
3D VIEW ...............................................................................................................................4-37
OPTIMIZING 3D IMAGES .........................................................................................................4-55
3D XI™ MODE ......................................................................................................................4-64
XI STIC (OPTIONAL) ..............................................................................................................4-76
CHAPTER 5. MEASUREMENTS AND CALCULATIONS
MEASUREMENT RANGE AND ACCURACY ............................................................................5-2

BASIC MEASUREMENTS...........................................................................................5-4
ACTIVATING BASIC MEASUREMENT MODE ..................................................................5-4
BASIC MEASUREMENT MENU.........................................................................................5-5
DISTANCE MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................5-7
CIRCUMFERENCE AND AREA MEASUREMENT ............................................................5-8
VOLUME MEASUREMENT................................................................................................5-9
MEASUREMENT IN M MODE.......................................................................................... 5-11
MEASUREMENT IN SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE ....................................................... 5-11
CALCULATIONS BY APPLICATION..........................................................................5-13
BASICS OF CALCULATIONS BY APPLICATION ............................................................5-13
OB CALCULATIONS ........................................................................................................5-19
FETAL ECHO CALCULATIONS .......................................................................................5-25
GYN CALCULATIONS......................................................................................................5-30
UROLOGY CALCULATIONS............................................................................................5-32
VASCULAR CALCULATIONS ..........................................................................................5-36
CARDIAC CALCULATIONS .............................................................................................5-40
RADIOLOGY CALCULATION...........................................................................................5-49
REPORT ....................................................................................................................5-51
REPORT FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................................5-51
GRAPH FUNCTION..........................................................................................................5-52
Table of Contents 5
CHAPTER 6. IMAGE MANAGEMENT
REVIEWING IMAGES ............................................................................................... 6-2

SAVING AND VIEWING CINE IMAGES .......................................................................................... 6-2
REVIEWING CINE IMAGES IN DUAL LIVE MODE .......................................................................... 6-3
CINE IMAGE FUNCTION IN MULTI-IMAGE .................................................................................... 6-3
SAVING AND VIEWING LOOP IMAGES ......................................................................................... 6-4
ANNOTATING IMAGES ............................................................................................ 6-5
TYPING TEXT .......................................................................................................................... 6-5
DISPLAYING BODY MARKER ..................................................................................................... 6-8
DISPLAYING INDICATOR............................................................................................................ 6-9
SAVING AND TRANSFERRING IMAGES .............................................................. 6-11
SAVING IMAGES .....................................................................................................................6-11
TRANSFERRING IMAGES .........................................................................................................6-11
PRINTING AND RECORDING IMAGES ................................................................. 6-12
PRINTING IMAGES ................................................................................................................. 6-12
RECORDING IMAGES ............................................................................................................. 6-12
SONOVIEW ............................................................................................................. 6-14
USING SONOVIEW................................................................................................................. 6-14
PATIENT EXAM LIST ............................................................................................................... 6-15
VIEWING IMAGES – VIEW MODE ............................................................................................. 6-20
TOOLS .................................................................................................................................. 6-22
CHAPTER 7. MAINTENANCE
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 7-2

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 7-2
CLEANING AND DISINFECTION................................................................................................... 7-2
FUSE REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................................... 7-3
ADMINISTRATION OF INFORMATION .................................................................... 7-5
USER SETTING BACK UP.......................................................................................................... 7-5
PATIENT INFORMATION BACK-UP............................................................................................... 7-5
SOFTWARE.......................................................................................................................... 7-5
CHAPTER 8. PROBES
PROBES ....................................................................................................................8-2
DETERGENT, DISINFECTANT, AND ULTRASOUND GEL..................................................................8-4
SHEATHS.................................................................................................................................8-5
PROBE PRECAUTIONS ..............................................................................................................8-6
CLEANING AND DISINFECTING THE PROBE .................................................................................8-7
BIOPSY ....................................................................................................................8-12
BIOPSY KIT COMPONENTS .....................................................................................................8-12
USING THE BIOPSY KIT ..........................................................................................................8-13
CLEANING AND DISINFECTING BIOPSY KIT ...............................................................................8-14
ASSEMBLING THE BIOPSY KIT .................................................................................................8-15
REFERENCE MANUAL
MEDISON IS PROVIDING AN ADDITIONAL ACCUVIX XQ REFERENCE MANUAL. GA TABLES AND

REFERENCES FOR EACH APPLICATION ARE INCLUDED IN THE REFERENCE MANUAL.
OB REFERENCE .......................................................................................................... 4
VASCULAR REFERENCE........................................................................................ 155
UROLOGY REFERENCE ......................................................................................... 157
FETAL ECHO REFERENCE..................................................................................... 159
CARDIOLOGY REFERENCE ................................................................................... 162
ACOUSTIC POWER TABLES .................................................................................. 177
Chapter 1
Safety
SAFETY SIGNS ............................................................................................................. 2
Safety Symbols ......................................................................................................................... 2
Labels ....................................................................................................................................... 4
ELECTRICAL SAFETY .................................................................................................. 5

Prevention of Electric Shock..................................................................................................... 5
ECG-Related Information ......................................................................................................... 6
ESD........................................................................................................................................... 7
EMI............................................................................................................................................ 7
EMC .......................................................................................................................................... 8
MECHANICAL SAFETY ............................................................................................... 14

Moving the Equipment ............................................................................................................ 14
Safety Note ............................................................................................................................. 14
BIOLOGICAL SAFETY................................................................................................. 15
ALARA Principle ..................................................................................................................... 15
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .............................................................................. 26

1-2 ACCUVIX XQ Operation Manual
Safety Signs
Please read this chapter before using the MEDISON ultrasound system. It is relevant to the
ultrasound system, the probes, the recording devices, and any of the optional equipment.
ACCUVIX XQ is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of, a licensed
physician who is qualified for direct use of the device.
Safety Symbols
The International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols for
medical electronic equipment, which classify a connection or warn of potential hazards. The
classifications and symbols are shown below.
Symbols Description
AC (alternating current) voltage source
Indicates a caution for risk of electric shock.
Isolated patient connection (Type BF applied part).
Power switch (Supplies/cuts the power for product)
Refer to the User Manual.
Identifies an equipotential ground.
Indicates dangerous voltages over 1000V AC or over 1500V DC.
Identifies the point where the system safety ground is fastened to

the chassis. Protective earth connected to conductive parts of
Class I equipment for safety purposes.
Output port
Chapter 1. Safety 1- 3
Input port
Input/Output (I/O) port
Left and right Audio / Video input
Left and right Audio / Video output
Remote print output
Foot switch connector
ECG connector
Protection against the effects of immersion.
Protection against dripping water.
Probe connector
Labels
To protect the system, you may see ‘Warning’ or ‘Caution’ marked on the surface of the product.
[Label 1. Marked on the sides of the product]
[Label 2. Marked on the bottom of the product]
[Label 3. Marked below OUTLET]

Electrical Safety
This equipment has been verified as a Class I device with Type BF applied parts.
As for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured

from a center-tapped circuit when the equipment connects in the United
CAUTION States to 240V supply system.
To help assure grounding reliability, connect to a “hospital grade” or
“hospital only” grounded power outlet.
Prevention of Electric Shock

In a hospital, dangerous currents are due to the potential differences between connected
equipment and touchable conducting parts found in medical rooms. The solution to the problem
is consistent equipotential bonding. Medical equipment is connected with connecting leads
made up of angled sockets to the equipotential bonding network in medical rooms.
[Figure 1.1 Equipotential bonding]

All accessory equipment connected to the digital interfaces must be certified according to the
representative IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950/EN60950 for data processing equipment and
IEC60601-1/EN60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations should comply
with the system standard IEC60601-1-1/EN60601-1-1. Anybody who connects additional
equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configurations of a medical system is
therefore responsible for the system complying with the requirements of IEC60601-1-
1/EN60601-1-1.
■ Electric shock may exist result if this system, including and all of its
externally mounted recording and monitoring devices, is not properly
grounded.
■ Do not remove the covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present
inside. Cabinet panels must be in place while the system is in use. All
internal adjustments and replacements must be made by a qualified
MEDISON Customer Service Department.
■ Check the face, housing, and cable before use. Do not use, if the face is
cracked, chipped, or torn, the housing is damaged, or if the cable is
abraded.
WARNING
■ Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the
system.
■ All patient contact devices, such as probes and ECG leads, must be
removed from the patient prior to application of a high voltage defibrillation
pulse.
■ Do not touch patient and the SIP/SOP on the rear panel simultaneously.
Doing so may cause a leakage current exceeding the maximum allowable
values.
■ The use of flammable anesthetic gas or oxidizing gases (N20) should be
avoided.
■ The system has been designed for 100-120VAC and 200-240VAC; you
should select the input voltage of monitor, printer and VCR. Prior to
connecting an OEM power cord, verify that the voltage indicated on the
power cord matches the voltage rating of the OEM device.
CAUITON
■ An isolation transformer protects the system from power surges. The
isolation transformer continues to operate when the system is in standby.
■ Do not immerse the cable in liquids. Cables are not waterproof.
ECG-Related Information
■ This device is not intended to provide a primary ECG monitoring function,
and therefore does not have means of indicating an inoperative
electrocardiograph.
■ Do not use ECG electrodes of HF surgical equipment. Any malfunctions in
WARNING the HF surgical equipment may result in burns to the patient.
■ Do not use ECG electrodes during cardiac pacemaker procedures or
other electrical stimulators.
■ Do not use ECG leads and electrodes in an operating room.
ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), commonly referred to as a static shock, is a naturally occurring
phenomenon. ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by
heating or air conditioning. During low humidity conditions, electrical charges naturally build up
on individuals, creating static electricity. An ESD occurs when an individual with an electrical
energy build-up comes in contact with conductive objects such as metal doorknobs, file
cabinets, computer equipment, and even other individuals. The static shock or ESD is a
discharge of the electrical energy build-up from a charged individual to a lesser or non-charged
individual or object.
■ The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to

an ultrasound system can be significant enough to cause damage to the
system or probes.
■ The following precautions can help to reduce ESD:
CAUITON
- Anti-static spray on carpets or linoleum
- Anti-static mats
- A ground wire connection between the system and the patient table or
bed.
EMI
Although this system has been manufactured in compliance with existing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI) requirements, use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field
can cause momentary degradation of the ultrasound image.
If this occurs often, MEDISON suggests a review of the environment in which the system is
being used, to identify possible sources of radiated emissions. These emissions could be from
other electrical devices used within the same room or an adjacent room. Communication
devices such as cellular phones and pagers can cause these emissions. The existence of
radios, TVs, or microwave transmission equipment nearby can also cause interference.
In cases where EMI is causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate

CAUTION
this system.
EMC
The testing for EMC((Electromagnetic Compatibility)) of this system has been performed
according to the international standard for EMC with medical devices (IEC60601-1-2). This IEC
standard was adopted in Europe as the European norm (EN60601-1-2).
▐ Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emission

This product is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of this product should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment -guidance
The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its

RF Emission internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very
Group 1
CISPR 11 low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF Emission
Class A
CISPR 11 The Ultrasound System is suitable for use in all
Harmonic Emission establishments, other than domestic and those directrly
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
Flicker Emission that supplies buildings used for domestic purpose.
Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
▐ Approved Cables, Transducers and Accessories for EMC

1. Approved Cable for Electromagnetic Compliance
Cables connected to this product may affect its emissions;

Use only the cable types and lengths listed below table.
Cable Type Length
VGA Shielded Normal

Parallel Shielded Normal
RS232C Shielded Normal
USB Shielded Normal
LAN(RJ45) Twisted pair Any
S-Video Shielded Normal
Foot Switch Shielded 2.5m
B/W Printer Unshielded Coaxial Normal
MIC Unshielded Any
Printer Remote Unshielded Any
Audio R.L Shielded Normal
VHS Shielded Normal
ECG AUX input Shielded < 3m
2. Approved Transducer for Electromagnetic Compliance
The image transducer used with the ACCUVIX XQ Ultrasound System may affect its
emission. The transducer listed in ‘Chapter 8. Probes’ when used with this product,
have been tested to comply with the group1 class A emission as required by
International Standard CISPR 11.
3. Approved Accessories for Electromagnetic Compliance

Accessories used with the ACCUVIX XQ Ultrasound System may effect its emissions.
When connecting other customer-supplied accessories to the system, such as

a remote printer or VCR, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure the
CAUTION
electromagnetic compatibility of the system. Use only CISPR 11 or CISPR 22,
CLASS B compliant devices.
The use of cables, transducers, and accessories other than those specified
WARNING may result in increased emission or decreased Immunity of the Ultrasound
System.
1 - 10 ACCUVIX XQ Operation Manual
Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601 Test level Compliance level
environment -guidance
Floors should be wood,

Electrotatic concrete or ceramic tile.
±6 KV Contact ±6KV Contact
discharge (ESD) If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relat-
±8K KV air ±8KV air
IEC 61000-4-2 ive humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 KV ±2KV

Mains power quality should
transient/burst for power supply lines for power supply lines
be that of a typical commer-
±1 KV ±1 KV
cial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 for input/output lines for input/output lines
±1 KV differential
Surge ±1KV differential mode Mains power quality should
mode
be that of a typical commer-
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2KV common mode cial or hospital environment.
±2KV common mode
<5% Uт for 0.5cycle <5% Uт for 0.5cycle

Mains power quality should
(>95% dip in Uт) (>95% dip in Uт)
Voltage dips, be that of a typical commer-
short cial or hospital environment.
40% Uт for 5 cycle 40% Uт for 5 cycle
interruptions and If the user of this product
(60% dip in Uт ) (60% dip in Uт )
voltage variations requires continued operation
on power supply during power mains interrup-
70% Uт for 25 cycle 70% Uт for 25 cycle
input lines tions, it is recommended that
(30% dip in Uт) (30% dip in Uт)
this product is powered from
IEC 61000-4-11 an uninterruptible power
<5% Uт for 5 s <5% Uт for 5 s
supply or a battery.
(<95% dip in Uт ) (<95% dip in Uт )
Power frequency Power frequency magnetic

(50/60Hz) fields should be at levels
magnetic field 3 A/m 3 A/m characteristic of a typical
location in a typical commer-
IEC 61000-4-8 cial or hospital environment.
NOTE Uт is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic

test Test level level environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications

Conducted RF 3 Vrms 0.01V equipment should be used no closer to any
IEC 61000-4-6 part of the Ultrasound System, including
150 kHz to 80MHz
cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
80MHz to 800MHZ
800MHz to 2.5GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3V/m
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5GHz transmitter manufacturer and d is the recomm-
ended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey, a
should be less than the compliance level in
each frequency range. b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of

equipment marked with the following symbol :
NOTE 1) At 80MHz and 800MHz, the higher frequency range applies.

NOTE 2) These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the Ultrasound System is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, the Ultrasound System should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating
the Ultrasound System or using a shielded location with a higher RF shielding effectiveness and filter
attenuation.
b
Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than [V1] V/m.
▐ Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF

communications equipment and the ACCUVIX XQ
This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the this product can help Prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and this product as recommended
below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter [m]
Rated maximum 150kHz to 80MHz 80MHz to 800MHz 800MHz to 2.5GHz

output power of
transmitter
[W]
V1=0.01Vrms E1=3 V/m E1=3V/m
0.01 35.00 0.11 0.23

0.1 110.68 0.36 0.73
1 350.00 1.16 2.33
10 1106.80 3.68 7.37
100 3500.00 11.66 23.33
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1) At 80MHz and 800MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2) These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
▐ Electromagnetic environment – guidance
The Ultrasound System must be used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF
shielding effectiveness and, for each cable that enters the shielded location. Field strengths
outside the shielded location from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3V/m.
It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded
location be verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
If the system is connected to other customer-supplied equipment, such as a

local area network (LAN) or a remote printer, Medison cannot guarantee that
CAUTION
the remote equipment will work correctly in the presence of electromagnetic
phenomena.
▐ Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference

A medical device can either generate or receive electromagnetic interference.
The EMC standards describe tests for both emitted and received interference.
Medison Ultrasound System do not generate interference in excess of the referenced
standards.
An Ultrasound System is designed to receive signals at radio frequency and is therefore
susceptible to interference generated by RF energy sources. Examples of other source of
interference are medical device, information technology products, and radio and television
transmission towers. Tracing the source of radiated interference can be a difficult task.
Customers should consider the following in an attempt to locate the source:
Is the interference intermittent or constant?
Does the interference show up only with one transducers operating at the same
frequency or with several transducer?
Do two different transducer operating at the same frequency have the same problem?
Is the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility?
The answers to these questions will help determine if the problem reside with the system or
the scanning environment. After you answer the question, contact your Medison service
representative.
Mechanical Safety
Moving the Equipment

Only the front wheels of the system can be used for steering. Therefore to maneuver the
system in tight spaces, use repeated back-and-forth movements to position the system into the
desired space. On rare occasions a component may become disconnected inside the system.
The components are installed securely and can withstand considerable shock, but excessive
shock may cause system failure.
If the system operates abnormally after repositioning, please contact the MEDISON Customer
Service Department.
The brakes are on the front wheels of the console. Press the brakes with your feet to lock or
release them. You can use the brakes to control the movement of the product such as by
preventing its movement while scanning.
■ The system can weigh approximately 101kg (202lb), depending upon
configuration, and could cause injury should it topple over.
■ Be aware of the castors, especially when moving the system. MEDISON
WARNING recommends that you exercise caution when moving the product up or
down ramps.
■ The monitor can be separated and easily removed from the unit if
necessary.
Safety Note
■ Never attempt to modify the product in any way.
■ Please wait at least 10 seconds before rebooting the product. Otherwise, it
may not function properly.
■ Check the operational safety when using the product after a prolonged
break in service.
■ Make sure that other objects, such as metal pieces, do not enter the
system.
CAUTION
■ Do not block the ventilation slots.
■ To prevent damage to the power cord, be sure to grip the plug head – not
the cord – when unplugging.
■ Excessive bending or twisting of cables on patient-applied parts may
cause failure or intermittent operation of the system.
■ Improper cleaning or sterilization of a patient-applied part may cause
permanent damage.
Please refer to “Chapter 7. Maintenance” for detailed information on protecting, cleaning and
disinfecting the equipment.
Biological Safety
Verify the alignment of the biopsy guide before use. See the “Chapter 8. Probes” section of this
manual.
■ Ultrasound waves may have damaging effects on cells and, therefore,

may be harmful to the patient. If there is no medical benefit, minimize the
exposure time and maintain the ultrasound wave output level at low.
Please refer to the ALARA principle.
■ Do not use the system if an error message appears on the video display
indicating that a hazardous condition exists. Note the error code, turn off
WARNING the power to the system, and call your local MEDISON Customer Service
Department.
■ Do not use a system that exhibits erratic or inconsistent updating.
Discontinuities in the scanning sequence are indicative of a hardware
failure that should be corrected before use.
■ The system limits the maximum contact temperature to 43 degree Celsius,
and the ultrasonic waves output observes American FDA regulations.
ALARA Principle
Guidance for the use of diagnostic ultrasound is defined by the “as low as reasonably achievable” (ALARA)
principle. The decision as to what is reasonable has been left to the judgment and insight of qualified
personnel. No set of rules can be formulated that would be sufficiently complete to dictate the correct
response for every circumstance. By keeping ultrasound exposure as low as possible, while obtaining
diagnostic images, users can minimize ultrasonic bioeffects.
Since the threshold for diagnostic ultrasound bioeffects is undetermined, it is the sonographer’s
responsibility to control the total energy transmitted into the patient. The sonographer must reconcile
exposure time with diagnostic image quality. To ensure diagnostic image quality and limit exposure time,
the ultrasound system provides controls that can be manipulated during the exam to optimize the results of
the exam.
The ability of the user to abide by the ALARA principle is important. Advances in diagnostic ultrasound not
only in the technology but also in the applications of the technology, have resulted in the need for more and
better information to guide the user. The output indices are designed to provide that important information
There are a number of variables, which affect the way in which the output display indices can be used to
implement the ALARA principle. These variables include mass, body size, location of the bone relative to
the focal point, attenuation in the body, and ultrasound exposure time. Exposure time is an especially
useful variable, because the user controls it. The ability to limit the index values over time support the
ALARA principle.
▐ Applying ALARA
The system-imaging mode used depends upon the information needed. 2D-mode and M-mode imaging
provide anatomical information, while Doppler, Power, and Color imaging provide information about blood
flow. Scanned modes, like 2D-mode, Power, or Color, disperse or scatter the ultrasonic energy over an
area, while an unscanned mode, like M-mode or Doppler, concentrates ultrasonic energy. Understanding
the nature of the imaging mode being used allows the sonographer to apply the ALARA principle with
informed judgment. The probe frequency, system set-up values, scanning techniques, and operator
experience aid the sonographer in meeting the definition of the ALARA principle.
The decision as to the amount of acoustic output is, in the final analysis, up to the system operator. This
decision must be based on the following factors: type of patient, type of exam, patient history, ease or
difficulty of obtaining diagnostically useful information, and the potential localized heating of the patient due
to probe surface temperatures. Prudent use of the system occurs when patient exposure is limited to the
lowest index reading for the shortest amount of time necessary to achieve acceptable diagnostic results.
Although a high index reading does not mean that a bioeffect is actually occurring, a high index reading
should be taken seriously. Every effort should be made to reduce the possible effects of a high index
reading. Limiting exposure time is an effective way to accomplish this goal.
There are several system controls that the operator can use to adjust the image quality and limit the
acoustic intensity. These controls are related to the techniques that an operator might use to implement
ALARA. These controls can be divided into three categories: direct, indirect, and receiver control.
▐ Direct Controls
Application selection and the output intensity control directly affect acoustic intensity. There are different
ranges of allowable intensity or output based on your selection. Selecting the correct range of acoustic
intensity for the application is one of the first things required during any exam. For example, peripheral
vascular intensity levels are not recommended for fetal exams. Some systems automatically select the
proper range for a particular procedure, while others require manual selection. Ultimately, the user bears
the responsibility for proper clinical use. The MEDISON system provides both automatic and user-definable
settings.
Output has direct impact on acoustic intensity. Once the application has been established, the output
control can be used to increase or decrease the intensity output. The output control allows you to select
intensity levels less than the defined maximum. Prudent use dictates that you select the lowest output
intensity consistent with good image quality.
▐ Indirect Controls
The indirect controls are those that have an indirect effect on acoustic intensity. These controls affect
imaging mode, pulse repetition frequency, focus depth, pulse length, and probe selection.
The choice of imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. 2D-mode is a scanning mode,
Doppler is a stationary or unscanned mode. A stationary ultrasound beam concentrates energy on a single
location. A moving or scanned ultrasound beam disperses the energy over a wide area and the beam is
only concentrated on a given area for a fraction of the time necessary in unscanned mode.
Pulse repetition frequency or rate refers to the number of ultrasound bursts of energy over a specific period
of time. The higher the pulse repetition frequency, the more pulses of energy in a given period of time.
Several controls affect pulse repetition frequency: focal depth, display depth, sample volume depth, color
sensitivity, number of focal zones, and sector width controls.
Focus of the ultrasound beam affects the image resolution. To maintain or increase resolution at a different
focus requires a variation in output over the focal zone. This variation of output is a function of system
optimization. Different exams require different focal depths. Setting the focus to the proper depth improves
the resolution of the structure of interest.
Pulse length is the time during which the ultrasonic burst is turned on. The longer the pulse, the greater the
time-average intensity value. The greater the time-average intensity, the greater the likelihood of
temperature increase and cavitations. Pulse length or burst length or pulse duration is the output pulse
duration in pulsed Doppler. Increasing the Doppler sample volume increases the pulse length.
Probe selection affects intensity indirectly. Tissue attenuation changes with frequency. The higher the
probe operating frequency, the greater the attenuation of the ultrasonic energy. Higher probe operating
frequencies require higher output intensity to scan at a deeper depth. To scan deeper at the same output
intensity, a lower probe frequency is required. Using more gain and output beyond a point, without
corresponding increases in image quality, can mean that a lower frequency probe is needed.
Receiver Controls
Receiver controls are used by the operator to improve image quality. These controls have no effect on
output. Receiver controls only affect how the ultrasound echo is received. These controls include gain,
TGC, dynamic range, and image processing. The important thing to remember, relative to output, is
that receiver controls should be optimized before increasing output. For example; before increasing
output, optimize gain to improve image quality.
▐ Additional Considerations
Ensure that scanning time is kept to a minimum, and ensure that only medically required
scanning is performed. Never compromise quality by rushing through an exam. A poor exam
will require a follow-up, which ultimately increases the time. Diagnostic ultrasound is an
important tool in medicine, and, like any tool, should be used efficiently and effectively.
▐ Output Display Features
The system output display comprises two basic indices: a mechanical index and a thermal index. The
thermal index consists of the following indices: soft tissue (TIs), cranial bone (Tic) and bone (TIb). One of
these three thermal indices will be displayed at all times. Which one depends upon the system preset or
user choice, depending upon the application at hand.
The mechanical index is continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to 1.9, in increments of 0.1.
The thermal index consists of the three indices, and only one of these is displayed at any one time. Each
probe application has a default selection that is appropriate for that combination. The TIb or TIs is
continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to maximum output, based on the probe and application, in
increments of 0.1.
The application-specific nature of the default setting is also an important factor of index behavior. A default
setting is a system control state which is preset by the manufacturer or the operator. The system has
default index settings for the probe application. The default settings are invoked automatically by the
ultrasound system when power is turned on, new patient data is entered into the system database, or a
change in application takes place.
The decision as to which of the three thermal indices to display should be based on the following criteria:
Appropriate index for the application: TIs is used for imaging soft tissue; and TIb for a focus at or near
bone.
Some factors might create artificially high or low thermal index readings e.g. presence of fluid or bone, or
the flow of blood. A highly attenuating tissue path, for example, will cause the potential for local zone
heating to be less than the thermal index displays.
Scanned modes versus unscanned modes of operation affect the thermal index. For scanned modes,
heating tends to be near the surface; for unscanned modes, the potential for heating tends to be deeper in
the focal zone.
Always limit ultrasound exposure time. Do not rush the exam. Ensure that the indices are kept to a
minimum and that exposure time is limited without compromising diagnostic sensitivity.
Mechanical Index (MI) Display

Mechanical bioeffects are threshold phenomena that occur when a certain level of output
is exceeded. The threshold level varies, however, with the type of tissue. The potential for
mechanical bioeffects varies with peak pressure and ultrasound frequency. The MI
accounts for these two factors. The higher the MI value, the greater the likelihood of
mechanical bioeffects occurring but there is no specific MI value that means that a
mechanical effect will actually occur. The MI should be used as a guide for implementing
the ALARA principle.
Thermal Index (TI) Display

The TI informs the user about the potential for temperature increase occuring at the body surface,
within body tissue, or at the point of focus of the ultrasound beam on bone. The TI is an estimate of
the temperature increase in specific body tissues. The actual amount of any temperature rise is
influenced by factors such as tissue type, vascularity, and mode of operation etc. The TI should be
used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle.
The bone thermal index (TIb) informs the user about potential heating at or near the focus after the
ultrasound beam has passed through soft tissue or fluid, for example, at or near second or third
trimester fetal bone.
The cranial bone thermal index (TIc) informs the user about the potential heating of bone at or near
the surface, for example, cranial bone.
The soft tissue thermal index (TIs) informs the user about the potential for heating within soft
homogeneous tissue.
You can select either TIs or TIb using the TIs/TIb selection on the Miscellaneous system
setups. TIc is displayed when you select a trans-cranial application.
Mechanical and Thermal indices Display Precision and Accuracy

The Mechanical and Thermal Indices on the system are precise to 0.1 units.
The MI and TI display accuracy estimates for the system are given in the Acoustic Output Tables
manual. These accuracy estimates are based on the variability range of probes and systems,
inherent acoustic output modeling errors and measurement variability, as described below.
The displayed values should be interpreted as relative information to help the system operator
achieve the ALARA principle through prudent use of the system. The values should not be
interpreted as actual physical values investigated tissue or organs. The initial data that is used to
support the output display is derived from laboratory measurements based on the AIUM
measurement standard. The measurements are then put into algorithms for calculating the displayed
output values.
Many of the assumptions used in the process of measurement and calculation are conservative in
nature. Over-estimation of actual in situ exposure, for the vast majority of tissue paths, is built into
the measurement and calculation process. For example:
The measured water tank values are de-rated using a conservative, industry standard, attenuation
coefficient of 0.3dB/cm-MHz.
Conservative values for tissue characteristics were selected for use in the TI models. Conservative
values for tissue or bone absorption rates, blood perfusion rates, blood heat capacity, and tissue
thermal conductivity were selected.
Steady state temperature rise is assumed in the industry standard TI models, and the assumption is
made that the ultrasound probe is held steady in one position long enough for steady state to be
reached.
A number of factors are considered when estimating the accuracy of display values: hardware
variations, algorithm accuracy estimation and measurement variability. Variability among probes and
systems is a significant factor. Probe variability results from piezoelectric crystal efficiencies,
process-related impedance differences, and sensitive lens focusing parameter variations.
Differences in the system pulse voltage control and efficiencies are also a contributor to variability.
There are inherent uncertainties in the algorithms used for estimating acoustic output values over the
range of possible system operating conditions and pulse voltages. Inaccuracies in laboratory
measurements are related to differences in hydrophone calibration and performance, positioning,
alignment and digitization tolerances, and variability among test operators.
The conservative assumptions of the output estimation algorithms of linear propagation, at all depths,
through a 0.3dB/cm-MHz attenuated medium are not taken into account in calculation of the
accuracy estimate displayed. Neither linear propagation, nor uniform attenuation at the 0.3dB/cm-
MHz rate, occur in water tank measurements or in most tissue paths in the body. In the body,
different tissues and organs have dissimilar attenuation characteristics. In water, there is almost no
attenuation. In the body, and particularly in water tank measurements, non-linear propagation and
saturation losses occur as pulse voltages increase.
The display accuracy estimates take into account the variability ranges of probes and systems,
inherent acoustic output modeling errors, and measurement variability. Display accuracy estimates
are not based on errors in, or caused by measuring according to, the AIUM measurement standards.
They are also independent of the effects of non-linear loss on the measured values.
▐ Control affecting the indices

As various system controls are adjusted, the TI and MI values may change. This will be most apparent as
the POWER control is adjusted; however, other system controls will affect the on-screen output values.
Power
Power controls the system acoustic output. Two real-time output values are on the screen: a TI and a
MI. They change as the system responds to POWER adjustments.
In combined modes, such as simultaneous Color, 2D-mode and pulsed Doppler, the individual modes
each add to the total TI. One mode will be the dominant contributor to this total. The displayed MI will
be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.
▐ 2D mode Controls
2D-mode size
Narrowing the sector angle may increase the frame rate. This action will increase the TI. Pulse voltage
may be automatically adjusted down with software controls to keep the TI below the system
maximums. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.
Zoom
Increasing the zoom magnification may increase frame rate. This action will increase the TI. The
number of focal zones may also increase automatically to improve resolution. This action may change
MI since the peak intensity can occur at a different depth.
Persistence
A lower persistence will decrease the TI. Pulse voltage may be automatically increased. An increase in
pulse voltage will increase MI.
Focal no.
More focal zones may change both the TI and MI by changing frame rate or focal depth automatically.
Lower frame rates decrease the TI. MI displayed will correspond to the zone with the largest peak
intensity.
Focus
Changing the focal depth will change the MI. Generally, higher MI values will occur when the focal
depth is near the natural focus of the transducer.
▐ Color and Power Controls

Color Sensitivity
Increasing the color sensitivity may increase the TI. More time is spent scanning for color images.
Color pulses are the dominant pulse type in this mode.
Color Sector Width

Narrower color sector width will increase color frame rate and the TI will increase. The system may
automatically decrease pulse voltage to stay below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage
will decrease the MI. If pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will remain the dominant
mode and the TI change will be small.
Color Sector Depth

Deeper color sector depth may automatically decrease color frame rate or select a new color focal
zone or color pulse length. The TI will change due to the combination of these effects. Generally, the
TI will decrease with increased color sector depth. MI will correspond to the peak intensity of the
dominant pulse type, which is a color pulse. However, if pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed
Doppler will remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be small.
Scale
Using the SCALE control to increase the color velocity range may increase the TI. The system will
automatically adjust pulse voltage to stay below the system maximums. A decrease in pulse voltage
will also decrease MI.
Sec Width
A narrower 2D-mode sector width in Color imaging will increase color frame rate. The TI will increase.
MI will not change. If pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then pulsed Doppler will remain as the primary
mode and the TI change will be small.
▐ M-mode and Doppler Controls

Speed
M-mode and Doppler sweep speed adjustments will not affect the MI. When M-mode sweep speed
changes, TI changes.
Simultaneous and Update Methods

Use of combination modes affects both the TI and MI through the combination of pulse types. During
simultaneous mode, the TI is additive. During auto-update and duplex, the TI will display the dominant
pulse type. The displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.
Sample Volume Depth

When Doppler sample volume depth is increased the Doppler PRF may automatically decrease. A
decrease in PRF will decrease the TI. The system may also automatically decrease the pulse voltage
to remain below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.
▐ Doppler, CW, M-mode, and Color Imaging Controls

When a new imaging mode is selected, both the TI and the MI will change to default settings. Each mode
has a corresponding pulse repetition frequency and maximum intensity point. In combined or simultaneous
modes, the TI is the sum of the contribution from the modes enabled and MI is the MI for the focal zone
and mode with the largest derated intensity. If a mode is turned off and then reselected, the system will
return to the previously selected settings.
Probe
Each probe model available has unique specifications for contact area, beam shape, and
center frequency. Defaults are initialized when you select a probe. MEDISON factory
defaults vary with probe, application, and selected mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA
limits for intended use.
Depth
An increase in 2D-mode depth will automatically decrease the 2D-mode frame rate. This would
decrease the TI. The system may also automatically choose a deeper 2D-mode focal depth. A change
of focal depth may change the MI. The MI displayed is that of the zone with the largest peak intensity.
Application
Acoustic output defaults are set when you select an application. MEDISON factory defaults vary with
probe, application, and mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for intended use.
▐ Related Guidance Documents

For more information about ultrasonic bioeffects and related topics refer to the following;
AIUM Report, January 28, 1993, “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound”
Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept.
1998: Vol. 7, No. 9 Supplement
Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment. (AIUM, NEMA.
1998)
Acoustic Output Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM, 1998)
Second Edition of the AIUM Output Display Standard Brochure, Dated March 10, 1994. (A copy
of this document is shipped with each system.)
Information for Manufacturer Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems
and Transducers. FDA. September 1997. FDA.
Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on
Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment. (Revision 1, AIUM, NEMA. 1998)
WFUMB. Symposium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine: Conclusions and Recommendations
on Thermal and Non-Thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects of Ultrasound, Ultrasound in
Medicine and Biology, 1998: Vol. 24, Supplement1.
▐ Acoustic Output and Measurement

Since the first usage of diagnostic ultrasound, the possible human biological effects (bioeffects) of
ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical institutions. In October 1987, the
American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine(AIUM) ratified a report prepared by its Bioeffects Committee
(Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1988: Vol.7,
No.9 Supplement), sometimes referred to as the Stowe Report, which reviewed available data on possible
effects of ultrasound exposure. Another report “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound,” dated
January 28, 1993 provides more up to date information.
The acoustic output for this system has been measured and calculated in accordance with the December
1985 “510(K) Guide for Measuring and Reporting Acoustic Output of Diagnostic Ultrasound Medical
Devices,” except that the hydrophone meets the requirements of “Acoustic Output Measurement Standard
for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment” (NEMA UD 2-1992)
▐ In Situ, Derated, and Water Value Intensities

All intensity parameters are measured in water. Since water does not absorb acoustic energy, these water
measurements represent a worst case value. Biological tissue does absorb acoustic energy. The true
value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount and type of tissue and the frequency of the
ultrasound that passes through the tissue. The intensity value in the tissue, In Situ, has been estimated
using the following formula:
− ( 0.23 alf )
In Situ = Water [ e ]
where: In Situ = In Situ Intensity Value
Water = Water Value Intensity
e = 2.7183
a = Attenuation Factor
Tissue a(dB/cm-MHz)
Brain .53
Heart .66
Kidney .79
Liver .43
Muscle .55
l = skin line to measurement depth (cm)
f = Center frequency of the transducer/system/mode combination(MHz)
Since the ultrasonic path during an examination is likely to pass through varying lengths and types of tissue,
it is difficult to estimate the true In Situ intensity. An attenuation factor of 0.3 is used for general reporting
purpose; therefore, the In Situ value which is commonly reported uses the formula:
− ( 0.069 lf )
In Situ (derated) = Water [ e ]
Since this value is not the true In Situ intensity, the term “derated” is used.
The maximum derated and the maximum water values do not always occur at the same operating
condition; therefore, the reported maximum water and derated values may not be related to the In Situ
(derated) formula. Take for example a multi-zone array transducer that has maximum water value
intensities in its deepest zone: the same transducer may have its largest derated intensity in one if its
shallowest focal zones.
▐ Acoustic Output and Measurement

The terms and symbols used in the acoustic output tables are defined in the following paragraphs.
ISPTA.3 The derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity (milliwatts per square centimeter).
ISPPA.3 The derated spatial-peak pulse-average intensity (watts per square centimeter). The
value of IPA.3 at the position of global maximum MI (IPA.3@MI) may be reported instead
of ISPPA.3 if the global maximum MI is reported.
MI The Mechanical Index. The value of MI at the position of ISPPA.3, (MI@ISPPA.3) may
be reported instead of MI (global maximum value) if ISPPA.3 is 190W/cm2
Pr.3 The derated peak rarefactional pressure (megapascals) associated with the transmit
pattern giving rise to the reported MI value.
WO The ultrasonic power (milliwatts). For the operating condition giving rise to ISPTA.3, WO
is the total time-average power;. For operating conditions subject to reporting under
ISPPA.3, WO is the ultrasonic power associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to
the value reported under ISPPA.3
fc The center frequency (MHz). For MI and ISPPA.3, Fc is the center frequency
associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the global maximum value of the
respective parameter. For ISPTA.3, for combined modes involving beam types of unequal
center frequency, Fc is defined as the overall range of center frequencies of the
respective transmit patterns.
ZSP The axial distance at which the reported parameter is measured (centimeters).
x-6,y-6 are respectively the in-plane (azimuth) and out-of-plane (elevation) -6 dimensions in the
x-y plane where ZSP is found (centimeters).
PD The pulse duration (microseconds) associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the
reported value of the respective parameter.
PRF The pulse repetition frequency (Hz) associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to
the reported value of the respective parameter.
EBD The entrance beam dimensions for the azimuth and elevation planes (centimeters).
EDS The entrance dimensions of the scan for the azimuth and elevation planes (centimeters).
▐ Acoustic Measurement Precision and Uncertainty

The Acoustic Measurement Precision and Acoustic Measurement Uncertainty are described below.
Quantity Precision Total Uncertainty
PII.3 (derated pulse intensity integral) 3.2 % +21 % to - 24 %

Wo (acoustic power) 6.2 % +/- 19 %
Pr.3 (derated rarefaction pressure) 5.4 % +/- 15 %
Fc (center frequency) <1% +/- 4.5 %
Systematic Uncertainties.
For the pulse intensity integral, derated rarefaction pressure Pr.3, center frequency and pulse
duration, the analysis includes considerations of the effects on accuracy of:
Hydrophone calibration drift or errors.
Hydrophone / Amp frequency response.
Spatial averaging.
Alignment errors.
Voltage measurement accuracy, including.
- Oscilloscope vertical accuracy.
- Oscilloscope offset accuracy.
- Oscilloscope clock accuracy.
- Oscilloscope Digitization rates.
- Noise.
The systematic uncertainties Acoustic power measurements using a Radiation Force are measured
through the use of calibrated NIST acoustic power sources.
We also refer to a September 1993 analysis done by a working group of the IEC technical
committee 87 and prepared by K. Beissner, as a first supplement to IEC publication 1161.
The document includes analysis and discussion of the sources of error / measurement effects due
to:
Balance system calibration.
Absorbing (or reflecting) target suspension mechanisms.
Linearity of the balance system.
Extrapolation to the moment of switching the ultrasonic transducer (compensation for ringing and
thermal drift).
Target imperfections.
Absorbing (reflecting) target geometry and finite target size.

Target misalignment.
Ultrasonic transducer misalignment.
Water temperature.
Ultrasonic attenuation and acoustic streaming.
Coupling or shielding foil properties.
Plane-wave assumption.
Environmental influences.
Excitation voltage measurement.
Ultrasonic transducer temperature.
Effects due to nonlinear propagation and saturation loss.
The overall findings of the analysis give a rough Acoustic Power accuracy figure of +/- 10% for the
frequency range of 1 - 10 MHz.
Environmental Protection
■ The console and peripherals could be sent back to manufacturers for

recycling or proper disposal after their useful lives.
CAUTION ■ Disposal of waste shall be disposed in accordance with national laws.
■ The waste sheaths are to be disposed of safely and national regulations

must be observed.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
This symbol is applied in the European Union and other European countries.
This symbol on the product indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste.
Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical
and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could
otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials
will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling of this
product, please contact your local city office, your electrical and electronic waste disposal
service or the shop where you purchased the product.
Chapter 2
Introduction and
Installation
What is ACCUVIX XQ? ...................................................................................................2
FEATURES AND ADVANTAGES OF ACCUVIX XQ ....................................................................... 2
Specifications ..................................................................................................................3
Product Configuration and Installation ............................................................................7
MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 7
CONTROL PANEL ..................................................................................................................... 9
CONSOLE .............................................................................................................................. 17
PERIPHERALS ........................................................................................................................ 21
PROBES ................................................................................................................................ 23
ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................................................... 24
OPTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 25
What is ACCUVIX XQ?
ACCUVIX XQ is color ultrasonic diagnostic equipment with high resolution and high penetration.
It provides a wide variety of easy-to-use measurement functions.
Features and Advantages of ACCUVIX XQ

■ Cutting-Edge Digital Beam Forming Technology – ACCUVIX XQ leverages on MEDISON’s
independently developed technology.
■ Various Applications – ACCUVIX XQ can be used in a wide variety of applications,

including in the abdomen, obstetrics, gynecology, the vascular system, cardiology, and
urology.
■ Various Diagnosis Modes – ACCUVIX XQ provides various diagnosis modes, including 2D

mode, M mode, Color Doppler mode, Power Doppler mode, PW Spectral Doppler mode,
and CW Spectral Doppler mode.
■ 3D Imaging Function – ACCUVIX XQ is capable of acquiring three-dimensional images of

superior quality by using the mechanical scan type 3D probe for its 3D imaging function.
■ VOCAL (Virtual Organ Computer Aided anaLysis) - ACCUVIX XQ can express internal
organs in 3D images.
■ Measurement and Reporting Function – ACCUVIX XQ provides not only the basic
measurement functions such as distance, area, circumference, and volume but a wide
variety of different measurement functions for each application. Also, a reporting function
based on measurement results is available.
■ Scanned Image Examination Function - ACCUVIX XQ provides 2,048 frames of Cine

memory, and 4,096 lines of Loop imaging.
■ SonoView Function - SonoView is an integrated image filing program that enables users to
store, load and share images
■ DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine) Function – Images can be saved,
transmitted, and printed out over the network.
■ Good connectivity - ACCUVIX XQ provides good connectivity to Peripheral Devices

Chapter2. Introduction And Installation 2-3
Specifications
Height: 1499.3mm (with monitor)

Physical Width: 657.1mm
Dimensions Depth: 1102mm
Weight: 134kg for fully configured system
2D real-time
Dual 2D real-time
2D/M mode
Color Doppler
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Continuous Wave Doppler
Imaging modes
Power Doppler
3D mode
Free Angle M mode
Dual Live mode
Simultaneous
Real-time zoom
Dynamic transmit focusing, maximum of eight points (four points

Focusing simultaneously selectable)
Digital dynamic receive focusing (continuous)
Displayed Levels of 256 shades of gray, 8 bits

Gray and Color 16,777,216 colors, 8 bits for each RGB component
C3-7IM
C2-6IC
Curved
Probes C5-2EL (Domestic market only)
Linear Array
C4-9ED
C1-4EC
Endocavity Curved EC4-9IS

Linear Array EC4-9ES
L5-12IM
L6-12IS
Linear Array L8-15IS
L5-9EE
L4-7EL
VAW3-5
VAW4-7
VNA6-12
VDW5-8B
Volume Probe 3D3-5EK
3D4-7EK
3D4-8ET
3D5-8EK
3D2-6ET
P2-4AC
Phased Array P3-5AC
P3-7AC
CW2.0
Static CW
CW4.0
Probe connections 5 probe connectors (including CW probe connector)
- Dedicated keyboard controls and Touch panel soft-keys

- Central home position controls
- Shortcuts for many functions
- Functional grouping of keys
- Positive feedback on control actuation
Control Panel - Indicator lights identify activated keys
- Lighting of control panel labels
- Peripherals controlled through the system keyboard
- 2-button footswitch
- Audio volume control
- Side access to system power On/Off button
- 15 inch high resolution non-interlaced color monitor

- Resolution: 800 x 600 x 24bit
- Brightness control with quick return to a pre-set calibrated level
Monitor
- Contrast control with quick return to a pre-set calibrated level
- Degauss control
- High brightness & contrast
General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Urology, Pediatric,

Vascular, Small Parts, Fetal Heart, Cardiac, Breast, Neonatal, OB
Application Early, TCD, Musculoskeletal, Pediatric Cardiology, Pediatric Abdomen,
Contrast Agent
TGC control
Mode-independent gain control
Acoustic power control (adjustable)
Signal processing Dynamic aperture
(Pre-processing) Dynamic apodization
Dynamic range control (adjustable)
Image view area control
M-mode sweep speed control
Frame average
Gamma-scale windowing
Signal processing Histogram
(Post-processing) Image orientation (left/right and up/down)
White on black / Black on white
Real-time zoom
Obstetrics
Gynecology
Cardiology
Measurement Fetal Echo
Vascular (Carotid, Upper Extremity, Lower Extremity, Varicose)
Packages
Urology
Radiology
* Refer the Chapter 5 for additional information
Trackball operation of multiple cursors

Calipers and 2D: Linear measurements and area measurements using elliptical
General approximation or trace
Measurements M-mode: Continuous readout of distance, time, and slope rate
Doppler: Velocity and trace
Cineloop memory (maximum 2048 frames)

Image Storage
Image filing system
- Live 3D, Static 3D, Freehand 3D
- System Maximum Volume Frame Rate: 18Hz
- Multi-planar view display
- VolumeCT, VOCAL, SHELL, Magicut plus, 3D Measure
- Optimum volume resolution
Volume Mode
- Various 3D rendering algorithm
- Gray & Color mode
- 3D Smart Controller (to be updated)
- 3D XI™
- STIC (Optional)
Ultrasound Pentium IV, Hard Drive: 40GB or 80GB, RAM size: max.2GB, Windows
Workstation 2000, 1.3GB magneto-optical disc drive
- VCR: Panasonic AG-MD835 SVHC (NTSC & PAL), SONY

SVO-9500MD (NTSC & PAL)
- Video Page Printer: Mitsubishi M90E B/W page printer
(120V/240V, NTSC & PAL, 3” x 4” format)
- Color Video Page Printer: Mitsubishi CP700U color page
Optional Devices
printer (120V NTSC), Mitsubishi CP700E color page printer (240V
PAL)
- Foot Switch: The functions of Left & Right Foot Pedals can be
selected in Setup Mode. Freeze, Update, Record, Print, Store,
Volume Start
RGB Sync, S-VHS and VHS, Video Patient Monitor, Audio left & right,
Peripheral Signals VGA, RS-232C, Parallel port, DICOM, USB port, Microphone, Patient
Monitor 9V dc power, Printer B/W and Print Remote
Electrical
100-120VAC/200-240VAC, 15A/8A, 50/60Hz
Parameters
Operating: 700hPa to 1060hPa

Pressure Limits
Storage: 700hPa to 1060hPa
Operating: 30% to 75%

Humidity Limits
Storage & Shipping: 20% to 95%
Operating: 10℃ ~ 35℃

Temperature Limits
Storage & Shipping: -25 ℃ ~ 60℃
Product Configuration and Installation
This product consists of the monitor, control panel, console, peripheral devices, and probes.
Monitor
The VGA monitor displays ultrasound images and other related information. The monitor is
connected to the console by an arm so that it can be moved to any desired position.
▌ Monitor Display
The monitor displays ultrasound images, related information, and menu items that allow the
user to control the system. The screen consists of the title, the image area, and the
feedback area as illustrated below.
[Figure 2.1 Monitor Display]

Title
The title displays the logo, patient information, institution name, application, frame rate,
frame depth, probe information, acoustic output information, and date and time.
[Figure 2.2 Title]

Image Area
The image area displays the ultrasound image, image information, annotation, and
measurement information.
[Figure 2.3 Image Area]
Feedback Area
The feedback area displays the currently selected mode, the status of the trackball
function, and the image freeze indication.
Feedback Information: Displays a variety of system information, such as the

current system status, available items, and body marker, while using the system.
[Figure 2.4 Body Marker Feedback]

Control Panel
The user controls the system by using the control panel. The control panel includes the touch
screen and the keyboard for added convenience.
The touch screen, in particular, allows easy setting of menu values for each mode.
When installing the product or using it for the first time, please make sure
NOTE
that the alpha-numeric keyboard cover is removed before use.
[Figure 2.5 Control Panel]
The user can manipulate the control panel using ① Touch Screen, ② Knob-Button, ③ Up down
Switch, ④ Button, ⑤ Slide and ⑥ Track Ball.
Knob-buttons can not only be turned clockwise and counterclockwise to

NOTE
change values but can also be pressed to perform certain functions.
▌ Using Touch Screen

The touch screen displays the image adjustment menu, measurement menu and utility
menu. The user can make necessary adjustments by pressing the menu items on the touch
screen.
Values for the menu items across the bottom of the touch screen can be adjusted using the
Knob-buttons and the Up-down switches on the control panel.
SonoView and other functions displayed on the monitor screen can be selected by using
the touch screen or by using the Trackball and the Set button.
[Figure 2.6 Control Panel]
▌ Control Panel Functions

The following are descriptions and usage instructions for the controls on the control panel.
For detailed information on controls with multiple functions, please refer to “Chapter 3” and
later parts of this manual.
Saving and Printing
Press this to freeze the image being scanned.

Frozen images can be saved, printed, measured, or used
in the Cine function. Press the button again to return to
Freeze
Scan mode.
This button is used as the Volume Start button in 3D View
mode.
Chapter2. Introduction And Installation 2 - 11
Press this to save the report for the current image and
Save measurement results into the database. Saved images and
reports are easily managed by SonoView.
Press this to print the current image using the echo printer
Echo Print
configured.
Press this to perform the available option for the current

diagnosis mode. For example, this button selects the
image to activate in Dual mode. In this case, pressing the
button once activates the image on the right, and pressing
Update it once again freezes the image on the right and activates
the image on the left.
This button holds the 2D image and releases it in Spectral
Doppler mode.
Press this to activate the Report program that shows

Report
measurement results, etc. for the selected application.
Press this to record the currently displayed images onto the

Record
VCR. Press the button once again stop recording.
Selecting Diagnosis Mode and Adjusting Gain
For detailed information on modes, please refer to “Chapter 4.

NOTE
Diagnosis Modes.”
Use this to observe the anatomy by real-time images in the depth direction
of the scanned surface.
Once the 2D knob-button is set to On, it cannot be set to Off by pressing it
2D & 2D Gain
again. You can return from any image mode to 2D mode by pressing the
2D button.
Turn the knob-button to adjust 2D Gain.
This is used for M mode. It specifies the observation line on the 2D image
and shows the changes on the line as time passes. Press the button
again to set it to Off.
M & 2D Gain
Turn the knob-button to adjust 2D Gain.
This button is used to rotate the image by the X-axis in 3D View mode.
This is used for Color mode. It shows the real-time blood flow pattern on
2D images. Press the button again to set it to Off.
C & C Gain Turn the knob-button to adjust Color Doppler Gain.
This button is used to move the reference image forward/backward in
3D View mode.
This is used for PW Spectral Doppler mode. It shows the blood flow in
vessels or in the heart. This is very useful as it can be used
simultaneously with 2D mode. Press the button again to set it to Off.
PW & PW Gain
Turn the knob-button to adjust PW Spectral Doppler Gain.
This button is used to rotate the image by the Z-axis in 3D View
mode.
This is used for Power Doppler mode. It shows the presence of blood flow
and information on the blood flow amount on the 2D screen.
PD & PD Gain Press the button again to set it to Off.

Turn the knob-button to adjust Power Doppler Gain.
This button is used to rotate the image by the Y-axis in 3D View mode.
This is used for Dual mode. Two 2D images can be
compared against each other. The Set button, the Dual
Dual button and the Update button can be used to select the left
image or the right image in Dual mode. Press the 2D
button again to set it to Off.
This is used for 2D mode, Color mode, and Power Doppler
mode. Press the button to display the mode image on the
left/right-hand side of the screen.
Selecting it in 2D mode or Color mode displays a 2D image
Dual Live
or Color Doppler image on the screen, and selecting it in
Power Doppler mode displays a Power Doppler image and
2D image on the screen.
Press the button again to set it to Off.
This is used for Harmonic Imaging mode.
Harmonic Press the button again to set it to Off. Functionality of this
button is optional.
This is used for CW Spectral Doppler mode. This is
available only for Phased Array probe and Static CW
CW probe.
Press this to execute the Tissue Doppler Image function.

This is used for Color mode, Power Doppler mode, and
PW Spectral Doppler mode. This is available only for the
TDI
Phased Array probe under the Cardiac or Pediatric
Cardiology applications.
This is used for 3D mode. This is available in 2D mode. 3D

3D/4D is not available while in Cine status. Press the button again
to set it to Off.
Image Adjustments
Use this to move the focal point to the target position. Lift
Focus the switch to move the focal point up and depress the
switch to move the focal point down.
Use this to adjust the depth of the image being observed.

Depth Lift the switch to decrease the depth of the image and
depress the switch to increase the depth of the image.
Lifting the switch brings up the Zoom box. Use the Change
button and the Trackball to resize the Zoom box, and then
Zoom press the Set button to apply the size. To quit Zoom mode,
press the Exit button or adjust the Depth up-down switch.
Use the Trackball to move around the zoomed area.
TGC (Time Gain Control)
TGC The 8 slides are used to adjust TGC for

(Time Gain Control) each depth level.
Take note that the image may show lines if the Gain values for
CAUTION
adjacent slides are set at too great a difference.
Measurements and Annotations
Press this to display on the touch screen the available

measurement menu items for each application and
diagnosis mode. You can select a menu item and take
relevant measurements.
Measurement
Press the Caliper button on the touch screen to take
basic measurements such as distance and
circumference. For detailed information, please refer to
“Chapter 5. Measurements.”
Press this to display the Body Marker list on the touch

Body Marker screen. This function draws specified Body Markers on
the image.
Press this to display arrow-shaped Indicators on the

Indicator
image.
Text Use this function to place text on the image.
Press this to delete the text, indicators, body markers

Clear
and measurement results from the image.
For detailed information, please refer to “Chapter 6. Image

NOTE
Management.”
Trackball and Its Controls
Use this to move the cursor around the screen.

Trackball In Cine Display mode, the Trackball can be used for
Navigating around images.
Press this to change the current Trackball function.

For example, when specifying two points
Change
for measurements, this button can be used to modify
the previously selected point.
Press this to quit the current function and returns to the

Exit
previous state.
Press this to select the items or values specified by the

Set
Trackball.
Utility
SonoView Press this to execute the image filing program, SonoView.
Press the knob-button to set Sound On/Off, or turn the

knob-button to adjust the volume.
Sound
This is used for Spectral Doppler mode and other similar
modes.
Press the knob-button to execute ECG. Pressing the knob-

button while ECG is running sets the Trigger On/Off.
When the Trigger is On, turn the knob-button to adjust
ECG Trigger Time, and when the Trigger is Off, turn the knob-
button to adjust ECG Position.
ECG-related setting values can be specified through the
touch screen.
Press this to execute the function assigned to the User

User button. The User value can be specified through the touch
screen.
The last saved image is transmitted to the e-mail address

specified in the patient information. An alert message will
appear if there is a problem in the network configuration or
E-Mail connection.
If the e-mail information has not been entered, pressing the
E-Mail button brings up the patient information screen.
This button is used for 2D mode and Spectral Doppler

AIO mode. The Auto Image Optimization function will be
executed to provide optimized images to the user.
The Full Spectrum Image function will be executed to

provide a sharper display of images being scanned. There
FSI
are three levels of FSI, which is indicated on the screen as
“FSI 0” and so on.
Setup
Press this to display on the touch screen the screen where

Probe
the probe or the application can be selected or changed.
Press this to display the Setting screen where system

Setup preset values can be changed. The values can also be
selected from the touch screen.
Press this to display the screen where an existing patient

ID can be selected from the list or information for a new
Patient
patient can be entered. The values can also be selected
from the touch screen.
Press this to end the examination for the current patient

End Exam
and resets all related data.
Alpha-numeric Keyboard
The keyboard is used for entering text and other functions. Press the F1 key to execute
the Help Manual. Press the F1 key again or press the Exit button on the touch screen to
exit. For more detailed help on specific functions, please refer to the instructions on the
functions in this manual.
[Figure 2.7 Alpha-numeric Keyboard]

Console
The console consists of internal devices that acquire and process ultrasound images and
external devices that facilitate connection and installation of peripheral devices. External
devices include the probe connectors, ports for monitor and other peripheral devices, input and
output devices such as a HDD, probe holders, wheels for portability, space for peripheral
devices, and the system power switch.
[Figure 2.8 Console]

▌ Rear Panel
A monitor, printer, VCR and other devices can be connected to the rear panel of the product.
A monitor, printer, VCR and other

devices can be connected to the
rear panel of the product.
VGA1 / VGA2 (Output)

The VGA output signal is sent to
the monitor through this port.
PARALLEL (Output)
Normal PC printers can be connected
on the parallel port.
RS-232C (Input/Output)
This is an RS-232C input/output port. RS-232C
allows VCR controls, Open Line Transfer and so
on.
LINE (Input/Output)
The modem can be connected on this port.
(Reserved)
USB (Input/Output)
USB (Universal Serial Bus) devices can be
connected on this port. (Reserved)
DICOM (Input/Output)
DICOM can be connected on this port. Patient
information can be transmitted to other servers
over the DICOM network.
[Figure 2.9 Rear Panel]

AUDIO (Input/Output)
Audio devices can be connected on this port.
Audio Input on the rear panel and Audio Input on the front panel may
NOTE not be used simultaneously. Only Output on both panels may be
used simultaneously.
VHS (Input/Output)
VHS type VCRs can be connected on this port.
VHS Input on the rear panel and VHS Input on the front panel may not
NOTE be used simultaneously. Only Output on both panels may be used
simultaneously.
S-VHS (Input/Output)
S-VHS type VCRs can be connected on this port.
S-VHS Input on the rear panel and S-VHS Input on the front panel
NOTE may not be used simultaneously. Only Output on both panels may
be used simultaneously.
PATIENT MONITOR (Output)

A separate monitor for the patient can be connected on this port. It supports external
power of 9V.
PRINTER (Output)
Echo printers can be connected on this port.
PRINT REMOTE (Output)

Echo printers for remote printing can be connected on this port.
INTERLACE RGB (Output)

This port sends Interlace RGB signals. Color video printer, etc .can be connected here.
MIC (Input)
The microphone can be connected on this port.
DVD (Input)
The DVD can be connected on this port. (Reserved)
▌ Microsoft Windows Printer

Microsoft Windows 2000 compatible printers can be used. Connect the printer to the Printer
port on the rear panel.
For information on installing printer drivers, please direct your inquiries to

the MEDISON Customer Service Center.
CAUTION
When connecting the printer, make sure that the printer model matches the
printer specified on the Windows or system settings screen.
▌ Probe Holder
The front part of the console features holders where probes can be rested.
Peripherals
These are the devices that can be used in conjunction with the console. Common peripherals
include VCR, echo printer, microphone, foot switch, and lamp.
▌ Lamp
The lamp illuminates the keyboard in dark rooms or other dark places. The lamp connector is located
under the control panel. Use the switch on the lamp housing to power the lamp On/Off.
[Figure 2.10 Lamp Switch On/Off]
Using the product in wet or high-humidity places may result in electric

WARNING
shock.
Assembling or disassembling the lamp while the power is on may result in

CAUTION abnormal operation of the product. Be careful not to damage the lamp by
dropping it or applying excessive force to it.
▌ Foot Switch
The user can press the left and right pedals with a foot to control simple functions.
The foot switch connector is located at the front of the base of the product.
[Figure 2.11 Foot Switch]

Probes
Probes are devices that transmit ultrasound and collect data for generating ultrasound images.
NOTE For detailed information, please refer to “Chapter 8. Probes.”
▌ Connecting Probes
Installation or removal of probes to or from the probe connectors must be performed only
when the system power is OFF.
1. Connect probes to the probe connectors on the front panel of the console. Including the
Static CW probe, a maximum of 5 probes can be connected to the console.
2. After connecting the probe to the connector, turn the dial on the connector clockwise to
secure it.
3. When the system restarts, the probe used before the last shut down will be activated
again.
[Figure 2.12 Probe Connectors]

Accessories
The following accessories are provided with this product.
Main cord set, separately certified according to the relevant standards,

CAUTION is to be used when supplied to EU and USA/CAN.
[Figure 2.13 Accessories]
NOTE Accessories can be different according to the country.

Options
ACCUVIX XQ provides the following options. These options are available only when selected
by the user.
■ Live 3D
■ DICOM
■ SONOATLAS
■ 3D XI™
■ Stress Echo
■ Panoramic Imaging
■ DynamicMR
■ SCI (Spatial Compound Image)
■ STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)
■ XI STIC
■ XI VOCAL
■ DICOM SR
For more information on the options above, please refer to the respective sections in this
manual.
Chapter 3
Settings
SELECTING PROBE AND APPLICATION .................................................................... 3
Selecting Probe, Application and Preset Values ...................................................................... 3
Editing Probe Preset Values..................................................................................................... 4
ENTERING PATIENT INFORMATION........................................................................... 5

Registering New Patient ........................................................................................................... 5
Searching Patient Information .................................................................................................. 6
Editing Patient Information........................................................................................................ 8
Modifying Measure Data........................................................................................................... 8
GENERAL SETUP ....................................................................................................... 11

Title ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Display .................................................................................................................................... 12
PERIPHERALS SETUP ............................................................................................... 13

OPTION SETUP........................................................................................................... 16
INFORMATION SETUP ............................................................................................... 17
MISCELLANEOUS SETUP .......................................................................................... 18
3D SETUP .................................................................................................................... 21
LIVE 3D SETUP ........................................................................................................... 22
DICOM SETUP............................................................................................................. 24
DICOM Setup Procedures ...................................................................................................... 24
DICOM Device Setup ............................................................................................................. 25
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS SETUP ............................................................................... 26

AUTO CALC SETUP .................................................................................................... 27
STRESS ECHO SETUP ...............................................................................................28

General Settings for Stress Echo............................................................................................ 28
Advanced Settings for Stress Echo......................................................................................... 30
MEASUREMENT SETUP .............................................................................................31

General.................................................................................................................................... 32
Obstetrics (OB) Measurement Settings .................................................................................. 36
Cardiac Measurement Settings............................................................................................... 41
Vascular Measurement Settings ............................................................................................. 42
Urology Measurement Settings............................................................................................... 43
UTILITY SETUP............................................................................................................44
B/W Post.................................................................................................................................. 44
Color Post................................................................................................................................ 47
Image Preset ........................................................................................................................... 48
Panoramic Imaging ................................................................................................................. 49
ECG......................................................................................................................................... 51
ETC ......................................................................................................................................... 52
VCR Play ................................................................................................................................. 54
DynamicMR ............................................................................................................................. 55
Stress Echo ............................................................................................................................. 57
Biopsy...................................................................................................................................... 72
Image Store ............................................................................................................................. 73

Chapter 3 Settings 3 - 3
Selecting Probe and Application
Before scanning, select a probe and an application. For information on the probes and
applications supported by this system, please refer to “Chapter 8. Probes”. Trackball
A set of different applications is pre-assigned to each probe type, and the probe settings are
optimized for each application. The user may change the settings as needed.
Press the Probe button on the control panel and the Probe Selection screen will appear on the
touch screen. You can select or change probes and applications, and edit probe preset values
at this screen.
[Figure 3.1 Probe Selection Screen]
Selecting Probe, Application and Preset Values

Selecting a probe displays the list of applications supported by the probe, and selecting an
application displays the current preset values.
1. Select a probe.
2. Verify the probe selection and select an application.
3. Select appropriate preset values according to the probe and application selected.
4. Exit the Probe Selection screen. Press the Cancel/Exit button to cancel any changes
made.
Editing Probe Preset Values

While probes settings are optimized for each application, the user may change the settings as
needed. For information on editing probe preset values, please refer to the “Utility Settings”
section of this chapter.
Probe preset values are optimized for probes and applications as shown below.
For L5-12IM, L6-12IS, L8-12IS, L5-9EE, and VN6-12:
Breast – ‘Breast1’
Small Parts – ‘Thyroid’, ‘Testicle’, ‘Bowel’
Musculoskeletal – ‘Shoulder Knee’, ‘Hand Foot’
Vascular – ‘Cerebr.Carotid’, ‘Periph.Arterial’, ‘Periph.Venous’
For C2-6IC:
Fetal Heart – ‘Fetal Heart1’
Entering Patient Information
You can enter the patient’s information before scanning. Patient information includes basic
information such as the patient ID, name, DOB, and gender and additional information for
applications. Diag. Physician, Ref. The Diag. Physician, Ref. Physician, and Sonographer fields
contain up to four recent data entries each.
You must enter both the ID and the name when registering a patient for the
NOTE
first time.
All patient data is identified by the patient ID. The ID must be entered at all times, and other
information can be entered additional as needed. The OK button remains disabled if the ID has
not been entered.
Press the Patient button on the control panel and the Patient Information screen will appear on
the touch screen.
You can register information for a new patient or edit information for an existing patient at this
screen. You can also use the touch screen. Press the menu button on the touch screen to move
the input cursor on the Patient Information screen to the selected position.
[Figure 3.2 Patient Information]
Registering New Patient

1. Press the New button on the Patient Information screen and then use the Trackball,
the Set button and the keyboard to enter the patient’s name, ID and other information.
- Press the New button while “Auto ID Creation” is selected to automatically
assign a new patient ID.
- If a duplicate ID is entered, the icon next to the ID input field changes to .
- Press the Study Info. button to enter detailed information required for
examination.
2. Press the OK button when you have finished entering the patient information. Press
Cancel to cancel the process.
Searching Patient Information

▌ Searching by ID
Enter the ID of the patient to search and the patient information will be displayed on the screen.
▌ Using the Search Function

1. Press the Search button at the Patient Information screen and the patient search
screen will appear.
[Figure 3.3 Patient Search Screen]
2. Enter a patient ID or name on the Patient Search screen and the list of registered
patients will appear, sorted by the ID.
3. The Select button and the OK button remain disabled if no patient matches the search
condition.
4. Press the Show All button to search all patients without specifying the ID or name.
5. Press the Select All button to select all the patients on the list.
6. Select a patient and press the Delete button to delete the ID and information for a
registered patient.
7. Press the Close button to quit searching patients and close the Patient Search
window.
Deleting a patient ID results in deletion of all the saved images in

WARNING
SonoView and as well as all the relevant data for the patient.
▌ Using the Worklist button

1. Press the Worklist button at the Modality Worklist screen and the patient search
screen will appear.
[Figure 3.4 Modality Worklist Screen]
2. Select Worklist Server, enter the patient’s information in one or more input fields, and
then press the Search button. Scheduled patients that match the search conditions
will appear. Searching without entering any patient information displays the entire list
of scheduled patients.
3. Select a patient to examine and press the OK button. The Patient Information screen
will appear.
4. Press the Close button to quit searching patients and close the Modality Worklist
window.
Worklist Server is configured under DICOM Setup and it connects to the institution’s DICOM
Modality Worklist Server and retrieves information on scheduled patients and examinations.
Selecting a patient on Worklist automatically enters the patient information.
Station AE Title shows the AE (Application Entity) Title value as specified under DICOM Setup.
When no value has been entered, this field shows the model number of the ultrasonic
equipment. Selecting “* (asterisk)” displays information for all patients registered in Worklist
Server.
Editing Patient Information

You can add or edit desired information at the Patient Information screen.
1. Use the Trackball, the Set button and the keyboard to add or edit desired information.
2. Press the OK button when you have finished adding or editing the patient information.
Press Cancel to cancel any changes.
If you open the Patient Information screen to enter the patient ID after obtaining Measure values,
the Resume Exam button will be activated. Here, enter the patient ID and press the Resume
Exam button to add the measurement results to the patient ID entered. Pressing the OK button
instead of the Resume Exam button discards the measurement results.
The Resume Exam button is activated only when there are calculated results. When the patient
information has not yet been entered, use this button to add the calculated results to the
information for another patient or a new patient.
For information on backing up patient information, please refer to “Chapter

NOTE
6. Image Management.”
Modifying Measure Data

This function is used for entering the patient’s obstetrics measurement values or viewing
measurement values. It is accessible by pressing the Measure Data button at the Patient
Information screen. The Measure Data button is activated only when the patient ID has been
entered for adding or modifying the patient information.
The Measure Data screen consists of the Insert screen, where measurement values can be
entered, and the View screen, where the measurement values entered can be viewed.
▌ Insert Screen
[Figure 3.5 Measure Data – Insert]

1. Press the Measure Data button. The Insert screen will appear where you can enter
obstetrics measurement values. Maximum of 8 sets of measurement values (8
examinations) can be entered per date.
2. Press the Cancel button to cancel entering measurement values. Press the New Data
button to cancel measurement values for other examinations.
3. Press the Insert button at the bottom of the screen after entering the measurement
values. You can view the measurement values entered at the View screen of the
Measure Data screen.
4. Press the view>> button on the left-hand side of the Insert screen. The View screen
will appear where you can view the measure data or save it as an Excel file.
▌ View Screen
[Figure 3.6 Measure Data – View]
1. At the View screen you can select the “Package” item and view measurement values
entered by applications.
2. The exam date marked with an asterisk (*), such as 2005/05/15 *, indicates the current
measurement data.
3. Press the Refresh button to refresh the screen with measurement values that have
newly been measured or entered.
4. Press the Save button. The View screen will appear where you can save the
information on the screen as an Excel file. The patient ID will be used as the file name,
which can be modified.
5. You can use the buttons on the Save measured data to Excel window to create or delete
folders for saving the file, save file or cancel the process.
6. Press the Insert>> button on the left-hand side of the screen to move to the Insert
screen.
General Setup
This section includes instructions on general system settings and their verification. Settings can
be changed to suit various needs and preferences of the user.
1. Press the Setup button on the control panel and the setting screen grouped by
functional categories will appear. Buttons for the categories will appear on the touch
screen.
2. You can select a category from the monitor or the touch screen, or select it by turning
the Select Setting knob-button below the touch screen.
3. Select the General tab at the Setting screen. Make adequate settings for each item.
4. To close the screen, select the Close button or press the Exit button on the touch
screen.
[Figure 3.7 Setting – General]
Title
Sets the institution name, date and time which are displayed on the title area of the screen.
Institution:
Enter the hospital/institution name.
Date
Set the current date and display format.
Time
Set the current time and display format.
Boot up caps lock status
This menu sets the initial status of Caps Lock
after system boot-up. This Caps Lock enables capital letter entry without the need to
press the Shift key.
Display
Sets display-related options. Pressing the checkbox toggles the corresponding option on or off.
Auto Freeze
If turned on, scan mode automatically freezes after 5 minutes. This setting does not
apply to Live 3D Scan mode, where automatic freeze occurs after 20 minutes.
TGC Line
If turned on, TGC Line is displayed on the screen at all times. If turned off, TGC Line
appears briefly when adjusting TGC.
Image Info
Sets whether to display the image information in the image zone.
Post Map
Sets whether to display Post Map in the feedback area.
VCR Counter
By default, VCR Counter is displayed at all times when Panasonic MD835 is
connected on Serial Port. Turning this option off displays the counter only while
recording.
Name + Age
If turned on, the patient’s age is displayed in the title area in the format of “23y 3m.”
Additional Info. (Complex Mode)
If turned on, six recently saved images in SonoView are displayed on the left-hand
side of the screen.
TI (Thermal Index) Display

Sets whether to display TIs, Tib or Tic as TI in the title area. The TI value is set
automatically and does not require user settings.
2D Image Size
Selects 100%, 95% or 90% as the display size of the 2D image. New setting takes
effect after the system restarts.
Measurement
If the GA/EDD Display checkbox is selected, the GA and EDD values entered in the
patient’s information are displayed as measurement values on the screen.
If the Show additional Doppler in image region checkbox is selected, Doppler-
related measurement results are displayed in the image zone. If the checkbox is not
selected, the measurement results are displayed in the feedback area.
Peripherals Setup
You can make settings for VCR, printer, foot switch, etc. that are connected to the system.
Select the Peripherals tab at the Setting screen.
[Figure 3.8 Setting – Peripherals]
VCR Type
Sets the output type of VCR Port as NTSC or PAL. This setting cannot be changed by
the user.
VCR Source
Sets the input type of VCR Port as VHS or S-VHS.
Foot Switch
Sets the left/right pedal of the foot switch for Freeze, Update, Record, Print, Store, or
Volume Start.
Serial Port
Selects a device connected to Serial Port. Available options include Panasonic MD835,
Sony SVO 9500MD, Open Line Transfer, etc. Open Line Transfer allows you to specify the
transfer method for report data.
Windows Printer
Selects the printer to use.
Touch Screen OSD

This is the environment configuration menu for the touch screen. Press the OSD
Setting button and the OSD Menu, Select, and Up/Down menus will appear on the touch
screen. Each menu can be selected using the knob-button or up-down switch below the
touch screen.
[Figure 3.9 LCD OSD Control Menu]
- Press the OSD Menu knob-button and the menu will appear. To change the
menu, use the Up/Down up-down switch and the Select knob-button to make
selections.
- After selecting a menu, use the Up/Down up-down switch to change the value.
When necessary changes are made, press the Select knob-button to finish
settings.
- Once the touch screen settings are complete, the Information window will appear
as illustrated below. Press the OK button.
Touch Screen Calibration

This is the menu for calibrating coordinates on the touch screen. The touch screen
needs to be calibrated if its button selection is out of range. The possible range of
error for calibration is between 2.032 mm and 4.572 mm.
Press the Calibration button on the monitor screen. The Base, End, Init., and Exit
buttons will become active and the Calibration screen will appear on the touch screen.
To calibrate coordinates for the touch screen:

1. Press the Init. button to reset the coordinates.
2. Press the Base button. When the “+” sign appears at the upper left-hand corner
of the touch screen, press the “+” sign to set its position.
3. Press the End button. When the “+” sign appears at the lower right-hand corner
of the touch screen, press the “+” sign to set its position.
4. Use a blunt object to press the “+” signs. Take note that using sharp objects
may damage the touch screen.
5. If you wish to re-calibrate, press the Init. button and repeat the procedures
above.
6. When setting is complete, press the Exit button to finish. New settings will not
be saved if you do not press the Exit button.
[Figure 3.10 Touch Screen Calibration]

System error(s) may occur if you do not follow the instructions above. In
case of system error(s), perform the calibration again by pressing Init. >
WARNING
Exit > Calibration. If the problem is not resolved, please contact the
customer service center.
Do not use sharp or metallic objects when calibrating coordinates for the
touch screen. This may damage the touch screen when setting the “+”
CAUTION
points. If possible, use a stylus pen specially designed for PDAs or touch
screens.
Option Setup
This screen displays the serial number of the system software and the list of optional software
items. Only the software items with “Password” displayed on the right-hand column are
available for use. Optional software items cannot be installed or removed by the user.
Select the Option tab at the Setting screen.
[Figure 3.11 Setting – Option]
* The actual options may be different from the ones shown in this illustration.
Information Setup
This function displays the version information of the system software. Select the Information
tab at the Setting screen. Press the Detail button to view the system version.
[Figure 3.12 Setting – Information]
* The actual system version may be different from the version information shown in this
illustration.
Miscellaneous Setup
Select the Misc. tab on the Setting screen.
[Figure 3.13 Setting – Misc.]
Language
Languages supported by the system include English, German, Spanish, French,
Italian and Russian. Language cannot be changed by the user.
Test Pattern
Press the Start button to display the images that demonstrate the monitor display.
Buzzer Control
Toggles on/off the buzzer that sounds when buttons on the control panel and the
touch screen are pressed.
Text Setup
You can set the text starting position and Brief mode (abbreviated words function).
To set the text starting position, move the cursor to the position where the text will
appear for the first time when entering text, and then press the Set button on the
control panel to specify the position.
Brief mode is the function that automatically enters the terms used in the system.
Select “Brief” under Text Setup.
For editing Brief mode, press the Brief Edit button to add or delete the terms used in
the system. For detailed information on this function, please refer to “Chapter 6. Image
Management.”
Bodymark Manager
You can set, delete or reorder commonly used Bodymarkers.
Pressing the Bodymarker button in the control panel displays Bodymarkers.
Pressing the Setting button displays the Bodymarker Manager screen, bringing up the
Bodymark-Preview screen on the touch screen.

In the Bodymark Manager screen, all bodymarkers are displayed by probe, application
and group. In this screen, you can search for a bodymarker to use, based on criteria
such as probe, and set it.
The Bodymark -Preview screen on the touch screen shows bodymarkers set by the
user. When the list of bodymarkers spans more than one page, use the Up/Down
switch below Page to select a desired page. In this screen, you can delete or reorder
bodymarkers.
[Figure 3.14 Bodymark Manager]

- Adding a bodymarker
In the Bodymark Manager screen, search for bodymarker-based criteria such as
probe and select a desired bodymarker with the trackball in the control panel.
Pressing the Setting button adds the bodymarker to the Bodymark -Preview screen
on the touch screen.
- Deleting a bodymarker
In the Bodymark -Preview screen in the control panel, select a bodymarker and
press the Up/Down switch below Delete. The selected bodymarker will be deleted.
- Reordering bodymarkers
In the Bodymark-Preview screen in the control panel, select a bodymarker and
press the knob-button below Image Move. The selected bodymarker will be moved
forward or backward.
- Saving a bodymarker
The Bodymark-Preview screen on the touch screen, press Save. The selected
bodymarker will be saved. Pressing the Bodymarker button in the control panel
displays the list of bodymarkers. Press Cancel to cancel any settings.
Image Filing Parameters
B/W (Black & White) images can be saved either as Grayscale or as RGB (color).
Color images are saved as RGB regardless of this setting.

Simultaneous Mode
Determines whether to activate simultaneous functions in Spectral Doppler Mode.
- Off: Select this if not using simultaneous mode.
- Allow 2D/PW: Select this if using simultaneous mode for 2D/PW but not for
2D/C/PW.
- Allow 2D/C/PW: Select this if using simultaneous mode both for 2D/PW and for
2D/C/PW.
Patient Information
Checking the box of ‘ID History On/Off’ shows ID lists for auto complete in the Patient
Information screen.
Screen Saver
This function starts after a certain period of time to protect the screen. You can set
Screen Saver to start automatically when the system is not in use. The idle time for
starting Screen Saver can be set anywhere between 20 minutes and 60 minutes.
E-mail Setting
Configures the mail server settings.
VOI LUT
When saving DICOM images, adjust the brightness and contrast values for gray
images by changing the “Window Center” and “Window Width” values. Adjusted
images can be viewed on PACS devices that use DICOM-standard VOI LUT.
- Window Center: For gray images, if its value is greater than 128, the brightness
increases and, otherwise, the brightness decreases.
- Window Width: For gray images, if its value is greater than 256, the contrast
decreases and, otherwise, the contrast increases.
Clip Save
Determines how clips are saved. Clips can be saved by beat only when ECG is
running; clips will not be saved when ECG beats do not appear even if the setting is
selected for clips to be saved by beat. When Low MI is activated, clips are saved by
time only. Available setting range is 1 beat - 4 beat or 1 sec - 10 sec, respectively.
3D Setup
This sets the initial screen for 3D View and 3D XI View. Select the 3D tab at the Setting screen.
[Figure 3.15 Setting – 3D (3D)]
[Figure 3.16 Setting – 3D (3D XI)]
3D: You can change Display Format, Render Direction, Orientation, Misc., Gray Mode, Color
Mode, etc. for 3D View.
3D XI: You can change Layout, Cut Depth, Threshold, Sharpen, Gradient mask, etc. for 3D XI
View.
Select User1, User2, etc. under Preset, enter the user-specific values and press the Save
button to save the preset values. To load the preset values assigned to each User button, select
a User button and press the Load button. If “Auto Load” is selected, preset values are loaded
as soon as a User button is pressed. Press the Default button to revert to the initial preset
values.
Live 3D Setup
This sets the initial screen for Live 3D View and Live 3D XI View. Select the Live 3D tab at the
Setting screen.
[Figure 3.17 Setting – Live 3D (3D)]
[Figure 3.18 Setting – Live 3D (3D XI)]
3D: You can change Display Format, Render Direction, Orientation, Gray Mode, Misc., Live 3D
Scan, etc. under the Live 3D tab.
3D XI: You can change Layout, Cut Depth, Threshold, Sharpen, Gradient mask, etc. under the
Live 3D XI tab.
Select User1, User2, etc. under Preset, enter the user-specific values and press the Save
button to save the preset values. To load the preset values assigned to each User button, select
a User button and press the Load button. If “Auto Load” is selected, preset values are loaded
as soon as a User button is pressed. Press the Default button to revert to the initial preset
values.
Setting Live 3D Scan Type
The scan type for Live 3D is set as “Extreme Res.” by default. Other scan types can be
set using User1 through User5 settings.
- Extreme Res.: This scan type has priority over image quality in Mid / High /
Extreme mode of scan quality. While achieving high image quality, the frame rate
is low.
- General: This scan type has priority over frame rate in Low / Mid mode of scan
quality and priority over image quality in High / Extreme mode of scan quality.
- Fast Frame: This scan type has priority over frame rate in Low / Mid / High mode
of scan quality. While achieving high frame rate, the image quality is low.
(Extreme mode excluded)
Probes that support Live 3D Scan Type settings are “3D3-5EK” and “3D4-
7EK.”
NOTE Since the Live 3D Scan Type value is not reflected when changing preset
in Live 3D View mode of 3D mode, please acquire images after selecting a
desired preset in image scan mode.
DICOM Setup
This section contains instructions for operating DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communication in
Medicine) and setting DICOM servers. Select the DICOM tab at the Setting screen.
For detailed information, refer to the user manual of the server equipment
NOTE
or the DICOM Conformance Statement.
[Figure 3.19 Setting – DICOM]
DICOM Setup Procedures

Configure the DICOM information for the system. After entering information for the items below,
select “Acquisition in Progress” for automatically transmitting the DICOM information. Also,
select “Print After Each Image” for automatic printing.
- AE Title: Enter the DICOM AE (Application Entity) title.
- Station Name: Enter a unique name for the system (e.g. US1, US2, etc.).
- Retry Count: Enter the number of transmission retries in case of transmission failures.
- Retry Interval: Enter the length of time (unit: minutes) during which the transmission
will be retried in case of transmission failures.
DICOM Device Setup

Press the Add button to configure information on DICOM, PRINT, WORKLIST, and STORE SR
servers. Press the Edit button to edit the current server information, or press the Delete button
to delete the current server information.
- Service: Enter the name of the server to configure.
- Alias: Enter the name of the server to use.
- AE Title: Enter AE Title for the server to use.
- IP Address: Enter the IP address for the server to use.
- Port: Enter the port number for the server to use.
[Figure 3.20 Setting – DICOM Device Setup]

Service Diagnostics Setup
Select the Service Diagnostics tab at the Setting screen.

Provided for inspecting the system status, Remote Service is a function designed for use by the
Medison Customer Service Center for after-sales service purposes. Related settings are
inaccessible to the user.
[Figure 3.21 Setting – Service Diagnostics]

Auto Calc Setup
Here, you can select measurement result menus that are displayed on the screen in Spectral
Doppler Mode.
Please note that the menu items here are displayed only when the Automatic Calculator
function in Spectral Doppler Mode is in use. Select the AutoCalc tab at the Setting screen.
[Figure 3.22 Setting – AutoCalc]
Maximum of 6 menus can be selected. When the Mean Trace menu is turned off under the
Automatic Calculator function, the TAM (time averaged mean velocity) menu will not be
displayed on the screen.
Also, when the PSA (peak systolic velocity) and EDV (end diastolic velocity) values are 0,
results of all menus will not be displayed on the screen.
Stress Echo Setup
Set the Stress Echo measurement method and its menu. Select the StressEcho tab at the
Setting screen.
Stress Echo settings consist of General settings and Advanced settings.
General Settings for Stress Echo

Shows the Protocol, Stage, and View lists registered on the system. Press the General>>
button at the Advanced screen, and the General screen will appear.
[Figure 3.23 Setting – Stress Echo (General)]
Protocols
- Basic protocols supported include Two Stage Full Disclosure, Two Stage
Continuous, Pharmacologic, and Three Stage Bicycle, and the user may create
custom Protocols.
- Press the Up/Down arrows on the right to change the order of the Stages on the
list.
- Select a Protocol to view the “Compression” and “Best Beat Select at” values for
the Protocol.
- New: Protocols with the same names cannot be created. A new protocol does
not have any Stage value. By default, the “Compression” value is set as
“Uncompressed” and the “Best Beat Select at” value as “End of View.”
- Delete & Edit: Protocols can be deleted or renamed. Note that default protocols
cannot be deleted or renamed.
- Copy: An existing Protocol can be copied for use. Note that the copied protocol
may not use the same name.
- Default: Resets the 4 default Protocols with the initial system preset values
(Stage, View, etc.).
Stages
- Maximum of 5 Stages can be created for each Protocol. Press the Up/Down
arrows on the right to change the order of the Stages on the list.
- New: Stages with the same names cannot be created. A new Stage is initialized
with “PLAX, PSAX, A4C, and A2C” as Views. By default, “Capture Method” is
set as “Perspective” and “Accept Prior to Store” as “On.”
- Delete & Edit: Stages can be deleted or renamed.
Views
- Maximum of 8 Views can be created for each Stage. Press the Up/Down arrows
on the right to change the order of the Views on the list.
- New: Views with the same names cannot be created. The default values for a
new View are “1” for “Beats Per Image” and “1” for “Images Per View.”
- Delete & Edit: Views can be deleted or renamed.
Compression
This function is responsible for compressing images. It controls the file size of the
images used in Stress Exam in SonoView.
Best Beat Select at
Sets the stage for selecting images for inspection from the images acquired.
Capture Method
This is the method for acquiring images. “Full Disclosure” acquires images and then
allocates them in each View, and “Perspective” selects Views and then acquires
images.
Accept Prior to Store

This menu sets whether to confirm the acquired images before proceeding to the next
View. This option becomes available if it is set to “On” and “Capture Method” is set to
“Perspective.”
Capture Length
This menu sets the range for image acquisition. “Beats Per Image” sets the number of
heart beats for the images acquired, and “Image Per View” sets the number of images
contained in a View.
Advanced Settings for Stress Echo

Press the Advanced>> button at the General screen, and the Advanced screen will appear.
[Figure 3.24 Setting – Stress Echo (Advanced)]
Foot Switch
Sets the Foot Switch functions at each stage when performing Stress Echo. Foot
Switch functions can be set for three stages: Acquisition, Accept Prior to Store, and
Best Beat Select.
Acquisition Details
If “Automatically start timer when acquisition begin” is selected, timer starts
automatically when acquisition begins. If “Enable Image Parameter Save” is selected,
image parameters are saved in a selected View.
Measurement Setup
Select the Measurement button at the Setting screen, or press the Measure button on the
touch screen. Measurement menus will appear on the monitor and the touch screen.
Turn the knob-buttons below the touch screen to select Select Pkg. and Select Page.
[Figure 3.25 Measure Setup]
Select Pkg. at the bottom of the touch screen is for selecting general measurement settings,
and OB (obstetrics), cardiac, vascular, and urology measurement settings.
Select Page is for selecting the setup menu categories for each measurement setting.
General
▌ General: Basic Measurement Settings
2D Circumference and Area Method
Sets the method for measuring circumference and area.
Measurement Unit
Sets the basic measurement unit (velocity, distance or area) used in screen displays
and reports. Make sure you press the Clear button before changing this setting as this
affects all previous measurement results.
Doppler Mode Y-Axis Unit
Sets the unit to display on the Y-axis in Spectral Doppler Mode.
Caliper Ratio, Average Display
Specify whether to display addition information such as ratios and average as well as
measurement data during basic measurements.
[Figure 3.26 Measure Setup – General]
▌ Display: Measurement Screen Settings

Caliper Line Type
Sets Caliper Line displayed on the screen. The dotted line can be set to show always
or hide. It can also be set to hide when the cursor position has been confirmed.
Caliper Line Marker Type
Sets the shape of the caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Either “Cross Hair” or
“Arrow Head” can be selected.
Doppler Trace Direction Type

When Auto Trace / Limited Trace functions are used in Spectral Doppler Mode, this
menu sets the range of the measurement values.
Mean Trace Line
Determines whether to apply Mean Trace Line on the screen when Automatic
Calculator is in use.
[Figure 3.27 Measure Setup - Display]
▌ Report
[Figure 3.28 Measure Setup – Report]
Report Header / OB, Fetal Echo Header Page Layout Option

You can select what kind of information is displayed on the report screen (Report
Header).
Result Method
Sets the calculation method for the measurement result value displayed on the report.
When Average Value is selected, the average value of the last three measurement
results is displayed. When Last Measured Value is selected, the last measurement
value is shown.
- Average: Shows the average of the last three measurement values.
- Last: Shows the last measurement value.

- Max: Shows the largest measurement value.
- Min: Shows the smallest measurement value.
▌ Backup/Restore: Backup and Restore Settings

User Table Backup & Restore
Backs up or restores user tables set by the user. Press the Backup button to save OB
Table Reference in the selected media, or press the Restore button to load Reference
from the selected media.
Checking the Measured Data checkbox backs up or restores measurement results for
a specified period.
Measured Data
This menu is for backing up measurement results. If “Write to File” is selected,
measurement results can be backed up by pressing the Transfer button on the report
screen.
Measurement results are backed up in a text file. You can specify whether to overwrite
or append to the existing file of the same name. The backup file name can be
specified by the user or else the system assigns it a name automatically.
[Figure 3.29 Measure Setup – Backup/Restore]
▌ Measure Package
Item Customize
Set items using on the measurement menu and report. ‘Factory Items’ applies factory
setting, and ‘Custom Items’ applies user-designed setting in the system.
Custom Items
1. Select the application in ‘Selection’, and items will show up in the ‘Group Order’.
2. Select the check box in ‘Group Order’. The selected items are showed in the
‘Menu’ and ‘Report’ on the right side of the screen.
3. Use the up-down arrow to arrange the order. It applies to the ‘Menu’ and ‘Report’.
[Figure 3.30 Measure Setup – Measure Package]
When switch Velocity mode and Frequence mode, applications except

NOTE Cardiac, Gynecology, OB, and Urology can set group spartely.
All changes are applied to the system after rebooting.
Obstetrics (OB) Measurement Settings

▌ General Settings for Obstetrics Measurement
[Figure 3.31 Obstetrics Setup – General]
Preset
Sets obstetrics measurement menus used in examination. Select desired Presets from
“Selection.” If General is selected, all items can be used. If Fetal Biometry is selected,
only Fetal Biometry-related items can be used.
User Preset
Press the button next to the Selection field to

set a new Preset. Enter a title in the Preset Name
field and a brief explanation in the Description field.
Press the OK button to create a new Preset.
Once the Preset is created, select menu items to

use in obstetrics measurement.
Select items from the entire list on the right and

press the button to move them to the list on
the left. This specifies the items to use in User
Preset.
To remove them from the list on the left, select
items and then press the button.
To delete User Preset, select User Preset and then press the button. General
and Fetal Biometry cannot be deleted because they are default Presets.
Rank Info.
Select SD or Percentile for displaying Growth Range in the Result Display area. This
is displayed as both SD and Percentile in reports.
Percentile Criteria
Select a value to use for percentile calculation.
Fetal Weight Unit Selection

Sets the unit for Fetal Weight used in obstetrics measurement. Select gram (g) or
pound (lb).
Fetal Weight Additional Info. Unit Selection
Use this to select the basic unit and to display additional information for EFW. Select
None, Gram (g), Ounce (oz), Pound (lb) or lb+oz.
▌ Table Settings for Obstetrics Measurement

Sets Tables and Equations used in the measurement menu.
[Figure 3.32 Obstetrics Setup – Tables]

Table & Equation
Press the button to view the details for Table or Equation.
[Figure 3.33 Obstetrics Setup – Table 보기]
- GA Table and Fetal Growth Table are displayed on the screen as below.
- Press the “Show in Days” checkbox to display Output in d (days) instead of wd

(week and days).
- The numeric units in Table are displayed under Unit Information, and Table
format is displayed under Table Type. Fetal Growth Table displays the SD
(Standard Deviation) information. SD information can also be entered when
adding User Tables.
- Equation Table shows Value Ranges and the Tolerance information.
User Table & User Equation
Press the button to set a new Table or a new

Equation. Enter the name and brief description in
the “Name” and “Description” fields and then
select the type of Table. Press the OK button, and
User Table will appear.
[Figure 3.34 Obstetrics Setup – User Table]
Press the button to add a row to Table, or press the button to delete a row.
To enter a value, click the input box with the
Trackball. After entering a value, press the
Tab key or the Enter key on the keyboard to
save it.
Select Table Type to display the input screen
according to the table type. “Range Type”
allows input for Min/Max values, “SD Type”
allows input for SD value, and “Value Only”
allows input for Measure and Age values.
Press the Save button to save the Table
content, or press the Back button to return to
the previous screen.
Press the button to delete User Table.

▌ Calc & Graph Settings
[Figure 3.35 Obstetrics Setup – Clac & Graph]
Fetal PI, RI Trend Graph

In obstetrics measurement, PI and RI can be measured from the fetal blood flow to
check state of the fetus. Select Fetal PI or RI Trend as the reference table for
measurement.
Auto calculations
Specify an item that will be calculated automatically. For example, if the MAD
checkbox is selected as shown below, when APD and TAD are measured, the
measurements are used to calculate MAD automatically and display the result on the
screen. The results of automatic calculation may affect GA and EDD information.
Ratio calculations
Specify a measurement item for which a ratio will be calculated. For example, if the
FL/BPD checkbox is selected, when FL and BPD are measured, the ratio between
them is calculated and displayed on the screen. This ratio also appears in a report.
OB Trend Graph Print

Sets the print format for report screen with graphs as follows:
- Only Current Page: Only the current screen is printed.
- All Pages (1x1): The printable graphs from the list on the left-hand side of the
report screen are printed one per page.
- All Pages (3x2): The printable graphs from the list on the left-hand side of the
report screen are printed six per page.
Trend Graph
Specify whether to include a graph for a certain item or ratio in an obstetrics report.
Press and the Editor screen for the selected graph will appear.
▌ Fetal Echo Measurement Setup

During obstetrics measurement, the LV (Left Ventricle) volume of the fetus is measured. Here,
the volume is calculated using the option under “LV Volume Calculation Method.”
[Figure 3.36 Obstetrics Setup – Fetal Echo]
Cardiac Measurement Settings

Select the Cardiac button at the Measure Setup screen to set cardiac measurement settings.
[Figure 3.37 Measure Setup – Cardiac]
2D Circumference and Area Method

Select either the Ellipse or Trace as the measurement method for measuring 2D
circumference and area in cardiac measurement.
LV Volume Calculation Method
Select the method for calculating the LV volume in M mode.
Vascular Measurement Settings

Select the Vascular button at the Measure Setup screen to set vascular measurement settings.
At the Vascular Setup screen below, you can set the Peak Velocity item used in automatic
calculation of the “A/B Ratio” or “ICA/CCA Ratio”.
[Figure 3.38 Measure Setup – Vascular]

Urology Measurement Settings

Select the Urology button at the Measure Setup screen to configure the settings related to
urology measurements. Set the equations used for calculating volumes in urology
measurements.
[Figure 3.39 Measure Setup – Urology]
Volume Method
- 3 Distance: The volume value is calculated using three diameters in the
longitudinal and transverse planes. (4 / 3 x 3.14 x A x B x C / 8)
- 3 Distance x Factor: The volume value is calculated using three diameters from
the longitudinal plane and transversal plane and a factor (F) value entered by a
user. ( A x B x C x F)
- Ellipsoid: The volume value is calculated using the length of the main axis and
the length of the beside axis on 2D plane. (4 / 3 x 3.14 x Main / 2 x (Beside /
2)Λ2)
- Sum of 20 Disks: The volume value is calculated by adding the areas on the 20
parallel planes. (d / 20 x (A1 + A2 + ... A20), d : the sum of distances between
disks)
3 Distances: A = 1st Dia. ; B = 2nd Dia. ; C = 3rd Dia.
Ellipsoid: A = Main Dia. ; B = Beside Dia.
NOTE
The factor value is set as “0.523” by default. When changing the value it must
be within the range of “0 < factor < 1.”
PSA Density
Enter values for measuring Prostate Spec. Antigen Density (PSAD), Predicted PSA by
WG and Predicted PSA by T-Zone.
- PSA: Enter the PSA value for measuring Prostate Spec. Antigen Density (PSAD).
- PSA Correction Factor: Enter PSA Correction Factor for measuring Predicted
PSA by WG and Predicted PSA by T-Zone.
Utility Setup
Various utilities are provided for facilitate optimal use of the system.
Touch the Utility button on the touch screen and the Utility menu will appear.
[Figure 3.40 Utility Menu]
B/W Post
Post map is a function that shows gray scale in separated areas of low echo, mid echo and high
echo. It enhances or suppresses the discriminating power for each area.
Gray scale curves available for selection in post map are as follows.
This curve suppresses the overall echo while enhancing the

discriminating power for the high echo area.
This curve enhances the discriminating power for the low echo
area.
This curve softens the screen.

This curve improves distinction for the low echo and high echo
areas.
This curve contains no changes.
Use the BW Post button at the Utility menu to set post maps and their Gamma settings. There
are 5 Type Curves and 2 User Curves that can be set for post maps.
Press the Exit button on the touch screen to close BW Post settings.
Please refer to the post map setup information displayed in the feedback area.
- TB: Pos – Use the Trackball to adjust the position of the curve.
- CHG: Point – Press the CHANGE button to select a Point to move.
- SET: Apply – Press the SET button to apply the preset values to the screen.
- S: Save curve – Press the S key on the keyboard to save the preset values.
[Figure 3.41 Utility – B/W Post(2D Post)]

▌ 2D Post Map Settings

Press the 2D Post button and press the up/down buttons on the touch screen to select a
desired curve.
If a User Curve is selected, you can select the Edit button to make a custom curve.
[Figure 3.42 Utility – B/W Post(Edit)]
Press the Change button, select points on the curve, and then use the Trackball and
the Set button to change the shape.
Press the Save button and then save the changed curve.
Press the 2D Pseudo button to change the color of the screen. The screen color is
changed by turning the knob-button below the touch screen.
▌ M Post Map Settings

Press the M Post button.
Curve and Pseudo settings are performed in the same way as 2D Post Map settings.
▌ PW Post Map Settings

Press the PW Post button.
Curve and Pseudo settings are performed in the same way as 2D Post Map settings.
▌ Gamma Setting
At 2D post map setup, use the Gamma up/down buttons to set the brightness and contrast
settings for the image.
Color Post
Press the Color Post button at the Utility menu to set C Post Map, PD Post Map, the Color
Capture function, and the Color Tag function. There are 12 Type Curves and 4 User Curves
that can be set for post maps.
Press the Exit button on the touch screen to close Color Post settings.
[Figure 3.43 Utility – Color Post]
▌ C Post Map Setting

Press the C Post button and set the curve.
Note that C Post Map cannot be set when Directional Power Doppler Mode is in use.
▌ PD Post Map Setting

Press the PD Post button and set the curve.
Note that PD Post Map cannot be set when Directional Power Doppler Mode is in use.
▌ Setting color capture function

Press the Capture button to toggle the Capture function on/off, and then use the touch
screen to set the Frame value.
▌ Setting color tag function

Press the Tag button to toggle the Tag function on/off, and then use the knob-buttons
below the touch screen to set the Tag Position and Tag Width values.
Image Preset
Preset allows the user to adjust Image Settings and select a saved setting to apply to the
system.
Press the Image Preset button at the Utility menu.
[Figure 3.44 Utility – Image Preset]
▌ Settings
Default is the default system image setting, and User 1 through User 4 are custom preset
values that can be saved by the user.
▌ Restore
Press the Restore button to apply the selected preset values to the current screen.
▌ Save
Press the Save button to save the preset values applied to the current screen.
▌ User Name Edit

Select the User Name Edit button to rename the User settings. Press the corresponding
User button to activate the setting.
Panoramic Imaging
Panoramic Imaging is the function that acquires images for a wider range by using continuous
ultrasonographic images. This function is available in 2D mode for L5-12IM, L6-12IS, and L8-
15IS probes only. Up to 1,000 frames of images can be acquired. The function automatically
stops when it exceeds 1,000 frames.
Panoramic images can be viewed on VCR. The Measure function can also be
CAUTION used on Panoramic images. Please note that measurements of Panoramic
image on VCR recordings may not be accurate.
▌ Running Panoramic Imaging
[Figure 3.45 Utility – Panoramic Imaging]
1. Select the Panoramic button at the Utility menu.

2. Press the START/STOP button on the touch screen or the SET button on the control
panel. Panoramic Imaging will begin.
- When scanning a curved surface, ensure that the scan surface and the contact
surface of the probe are always at a right angle.
- Moving in the opposite direction while acquiring images erases the previous frames
and saves new frames.
- To exit Panoramic Imaging, press the START/STOP button or the SET button.
The image quality may deteriorate if the contact surface of the probe
loses contact with the scan surface while acquiring images.
NOTE
Artifacts may also occur if scanning is done too rapidly or there are
changes in the angle of the contact surface.
▌ Review State
When get the panoramic image, the touch screen will be changed as ‘Review State’.
[Figure 3.46 Panoramic-Review State]

Ready: It returns to the first step of Panoramic Imaging.
Ruler: A ruler will show up or off on the panoramic image.
Caliper: A simple measurement menu will show up or off.
Exit: It terminates Panoramic Imaging.
Layout
- Full Screen: It displays only panoramic image.
- : It displays 2D image and panoramic image side by side.
- : It displays 2D image and panoramic image top and down.

Flip Image: It will show up on the touch screen when you select the layout as ‘Full
Screen’.
- : It switches the panoramic image right and left.
- It switches the panoramic image up and down.

Save: It saves the image according to selected layout.
When you select the layout as ‘Full Screen’, you cannot use ‘Cine
NOTE
Save’.
Rotating: It rotates 2D image from0 to 340°by 20°.

Magnifying: It magnifies 2D image from 1.0~2.8 times by 0.2 times. This button will be
showed up when you select the layout as ‘Full Screen’.
T/B Move: Review the Cine of the panoramic image using the trackball. You cannot
use this function when you select the layout as ‘Full Screen’.
ECG
Shows the image of heart beat. This is available when the application is Cardiac.
In Dual mode, the ECG Cine function can be used for both the images.
To turn ECG on:
1. Select the ECG button at the Utility menu or press the ECG knob-button on the control
panel. The ECG function will start.
2. Adjust ECG menus on the touch screen.
[Figure 3.47 Utility – ECG]

ECG: Set ECG on or off.
Large, Normal, Small: Select the ECG size.
Trigger: Set a numeric value for the Trigger interval or turn it off. The function
can be toggled on/off also by pressing the ECG knob-button on the control
panel.
Position: Turn the knob-button below the touch screen to adjust the ECG
position. ECG moves toward the top as the number increases. This can be
adjusted also by turning the ECG knob-button on the control panel while Trigger
is turned off. Pressing the knob-button toggles the value between 0 and 300.
Trigger Time: Turn the knob-button below the touch screen while Trigger is
turned on to adjust the time for showing Trigger. This can be adjusted also by
turning the ECG knob-button on the control panel.
If the ECG is less then 30Hz, the Heart Rate (HR) function may not operate
properly.
CAUTION
The error rate for the Heart Rate (HR) value in CW mode when ECG is in use
is within 2%.
ETC
Select the ETC button at the Utility menu.
[Figure 3. 48 Utility – ETC]
▌ Histogram
Histogram is the function that shows the gray level histogram for the selected area. This is
based on the notion that symptoms of a certain condition can be expressed by observing
echo distribution.
[Figure 3.49 Utility – ETC(Histogram)]

Select Histogram and the point for selecting area will appear on the screen.
Select area by using the Trackball and the Set button. The graph will appear on the
touch screen showing the echo distribution for the selected area.
Press the Histogram On Screen button on the touch screen and the graph on the
touch screen will also appear on the monitor.

Press the Transparent to delete the background of the histogram.
Transparent function is not available when the histogram moved on
NOTE
the area like measurement data.
Use the Move Hist. 1, Move Hist. 2 and Move Hist. 3 buttons on the touch screen to
move the graphs on the screen.
Press the Change button on the control panel to change the area shape to ellipse.
▌ Demo
Displays Demo images saved in SonoView.
Menu is displayed on the touch screen. You can use the buttons to navigate through
desired Demo images.
[Figure 3.50 Utility – ETC(Demo]]
▌ UserKey
Sequences of frequently used functions can be recorded to User Keys. The sequences can
be performed by pressing the corresponding User Key.
To record a sequence to a User Key:

Select the User Key button at the ETC menu or press the User button on the control
panel.
Select a desired button from User 1 Record… through User 4 Record….
When the message below appears, perform the desired functions in a sequence.
User key Recording
Once the recording is complete, press the User Key button at the ETC menu or press
the User button on the control panel to finish.
User key registration success
[Figure 3.51 Utility – ETC (UserKey)]
▌ SONOATLAS
This is an ultrasound training program (option menu) with instructions on scan methods
and pathology.
Press the Med button or the Ob&Gyn button on the touch screen and the program will
appear on the screen.
[Figure 3.52 Utility – ETC (SONOATLAS)]
VCR Play
This function is for playing back recorded video. Before using the VCR Play function, make sure
that the VCR is properly connected to the system.
For more information on the VCR function, refer to “Chapter 6. Image Management.”
[Figure 3.53 Utility – VCR]
DynamicMR
DynamicMR is the function that removes speckle noise and strengthens edges for 2D images
for higher image accuracy. This optional function is available in 2D modes only. It cannot be
used when the Phased Array probe is in use.
The function consists of 6 presets. The index value can be specified for each preset for
acquiring desired images.
Press the DynamicMR button at the Utility menu and the screen below will appear on the touch
screen.
[Figure 3.54 Utility – DynamicMR]

▌ DynamicMR Preset
Press the button for the DynamicMR Preset to setup. Each of the following 6 Presets
have different DynamicMR properties.
- OB: Expresses amniotic fluid as black, bones (spine, head, etc.) as thin,
boundary of the brain as clear, and placenta/fetal organs as soft.
- General: Removes noise and expresses soft images when examining liver,
thyroid, prostate, etc.
- Breast: Clearly expresses the distinction between fat tissues and breast tissues.
- Vascular: Expresses the inside of vessels as black so that the vascular walls are
seen clearly.
- Musculos. (Musculoskeletal): Clearly expresses muscles, ligaments, etc.
- GYN: Clearly expresses the boundaries of outside of uterus, endometrium, and
ovaries.
Turn the knob-button below Index Degree to set the Index value for the selected
Preset. The saved Index value is kept until the next setup.
Press the Exit button to exit the DynamicMR setup function.
You can press the DynamicMR button at the 2D menu to select or deselect the
settings.
Default Index for DunamicMR Presets.
DynamicMR Preset Default Index (1~5)
OB 5
General 3
Breast 4
Vascular 4
Musculos. 4
GYN 3
Default DynamicMR Presets for Probe Applications.

Probe Application DynamicMR Preset
OB, OB Early, Fetal heart OB
General, Abdomen, Renal, Small part, Pediatric General
Breast Breast
Vascular Vascular
Musculoskeletal Musculos.
Gynecology, Urology GYN
The following functions are not available while DynamicMR is in use.

- StressEcho
- Histogram
- User Key
- BW post, Color post
- Panoramic Imaging
- Setup
- Screen Saver
- Auto Freeze
- Text in Real state
- Read Zoom in Freeze state
- PGC (Post Gain Control) in Freeze state
- Spacebar function in Freeze state: On/Off toggle for Image Information and Gray
Scale Bar
- Patient, Report, Email, VCR, Image Preset, Demo, SONOATLAS: DynamicMR
stops automatically when any of these functions are performed.
The following 2D functions are available while DynamicMR is in use.

- Gain, TGC, Focus position, Depth, Zoom, Read Zoom, Direction, M-line
Stress Echo
Stress Echo is conducted for examining heart failures. There are two methods: exercise stress
test and pharmacological stress test.
By default, this system supports Two Stage Full Disclosure, Two Stage Continuous,
Pharmacologic, and Three Stage Bicycle. The user may also create custom protocols as
needed.
This function works only with Phase Array Probe and ECG must be turned on.
Stress Echo measurement is measuring a protocol on the patient. Protocols to use in Stress
Echo measurement can be selected at the Settings screen.
Æ Default protocols supported by the system
Protocol type Stage View sequence Loops view
Rest PLAX,PSAX,A4C,A2C
Two Stage Full Disclosure 1 or 4
Post PLAX,PSAX,A4C,A2C
Two Stage Continuous 1 or 4
Post A4C,A2C,PLAX,PSAX
Stage1 PLAX,PSAX,A4C,A2C
Pharmacologic 1 or 4
Three Stage Bicycle Peak A4C,A2C 1 or 4
Post A4C,A2C,PLAX,PSAX
▌ Exercise Stress Echo Program
This method conducts examination while the patient is exercising. Follow the procedures
below.
Press the Stress Echo button at the Utility menu.
The Stress Echo Protocol selection screen will appear on the touch screen. If the
patient information has not been entered, the Patient Information screen will appear.
[Figure 3.55 Selecting Stress Echo Protocols]
Use the up/down buttons on the touch screen to select the protocol to use and then
press the OK button.
Press the Cancel or the Exit button to cancel measurement.
The system will return to the Acquisition screen, where ROI box and ECG waveform
will appear. While the ROI box cannot be resized, you can use the Trackball to move
it around.
Image acquisition menu items will vary depending on the protocol selected.
Pharmacologic: This method injects medication instead of using exercise stress. The
method involves using Exercise Stress Echo Program and acquiring images.
Pharmacologic is same with other protocols except for Stages. Pharmacologic has 4
Stages.
[Figure 3.56 Acquisition Screen]
▌ Image Acquisition
Acquisition Ready
Select Stages and Views for acquiring images on the touch screen. Stages and Views
with acquired images are marked by checks.
Press the Acquire button after acquiring the desired images to save them to View.
Examination cannot be carried out if heart rate is below 20 or above 300.
Do not repeatedly press the Acquire button while “Acquisition in Progress”

CAUTION
is progressing toward 100%. This may result in system error(s).
Select Stages and Views for acquiring images on the touch screen. Stages and Views
with acquired images are marked by checks.
Press the Review button to run Stress Exam of SonoView and view acquired images.
Press the Stage button to move on to the next Stage without acquiring images for the
current Stage.
Press the Suspend button to return to the 2D screen, where Stress Echo can be re-
run so that the examination can continue from the previous Stage.
Press the Exit button to exit Stress Echo measurement.

The method for acquiring images for View of each Stage varies depending on the
Capture Method selected at the Setting screen.
- Full Disclosure
Allocates images to each View after acquiring images.
Heart Beat Counter appears in Full Disclosure to indicate the number of “Beats”
acquired.
- Perspective
Selects desired Views and then acquires appropriate images for each View.
- Image acquisition stops when Heart Beat Counter reaches 320 since pressing
the Acquire button or when the Exit button is pressed. The Stop button and the
Pause button are also available during the examination. The ROI box can be
moved when paused.
[Figure 3.57 Stress Echo Review]
Select “Enable Image Parameter Save” at the Setting screen, and the “Change Image
Param” menu will appear on the touch screen. This menu is available when there are
3 or more Stages.
- Preset values for the View images acquired in the previous Stage are applied to
the View images to be acquired in the next Stage. Preset values saved are “Gain,
Depth, ROI Position, Sector Size, and Sector Invert (L/R).”
- This function is not available for the first Stage and the last Stage. The menu
items appear only for the second or third Stage. Start Acquire after selecting the
menu.
Accept Prior to Store

The Accept Prior to Store function allows the user to confirm acquired images before
proceeding to the next View. This function id available only when the Capture Method at
the Setting screen is set to Perspective and Accept Prior to Store is set to on.
[Figure 3.58 Stress Echo Review]

Selecting the Accept button accepts the acquired images as candidates and
proceeds to the next stage, Best Beat Select.
To cancel the acquired images and return to the previous Acquisition Ready state,
select the Reject button.
Best Beat Select

Once image acquisition is complete, the next stage is Best Beat Select. This stage is for
selecting optimal beat images for examination.
[Figure 3.59 Best Beat Select]

Use the Trackball to select desired images on the screen and then press the Select
button.
Press the Store button to save the selected images. The screen moves to a View with
images yet to be saved. Use the Page Up and Page Down buttons to view the
images not shown on the current screen.
You may not select images saved in other Views.
End of Protocol
Once the image acquisition and image selection are complete, press the Review button to
move to Stress Exam. Or, select the Exit button to exit Stress Echo Program.
[Figure 3.60 Stress Echo End]
▌ SonoView Stress Exam Screen
This program retrieves and manages the images saved during Stress Echo examinations.
After all examinations are complete, press the Review button on the touch screen to move
to the screen where you can view Stages and Views of the patient examined.
Alternatively, exit Stress Echo Program and press the SonoView button on the control
panel to run SonoView.
In SonoView, press the Stress Exam button to view the patient list. Selecting a patient
moves to Review mode where you can retrieve the patient’s Stress Echo examination
images.
Review Mode Monitor Display
[Figure 3.61 Stress Exam – Review Mode]
Patient information such as ID, name, Age, Gender, Protocol, and Page are displayed
across the top of the screen.
Image Information
Stage Name, View Name, and Heart
Rate are displayed at the upper left-
hand corner of the screen, and ECG
and Frame position information is
displayed at the lower left-hand corner
of the screen.
The number of the current frame is
displayed if you stop the image while
viewing it.
Selecting Image
Use the Trackball and the Set button to
select or deselect images. To select multiple images, select images while pressing the
CTRL key on the keyboard.
Selecting Menu
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select the menu on the left-hand side of the
screen.
Mode: Repeatedly press the Mode button at the bottom of the screen or use the up-
down switch below the touch screen to select modes.
- Review: This reviewing mode displays 4 images at a time.
- WMS: Wall Motion Scoring function is available. Two images are displayed at the
top and Wall Motion Diagrams matching the images at the top are displayed at
the bottom. WMS is available only for 4 Views (PLAX, PSAX, A4C and A2C).
- Meas/Calc: 2D Measure (Distance, Area, Trace) and Calculation (Simpson

Method) functions are available.
Display: Repeatedly press the Display button to sort images by Stage or View.
Play Mode: Repeatedly press the Play Mode button to select Play Mode for the
image. Depending on the mode selected, certain zones are repeated when playing
save images.
R to R
As Acquired
Systole
Functionality:
Image playback speed can be controlled in 5 steps.

Speed Playback speed can also be selected using the up-down
Control switch below the touch screen. This applies to all
images.
Stop image playback, select the image, and then select

the Shuttle function. This allows you to use the Trackball
Trace
to scroll back and forth the image frames. The Trackball
Shuttle
cursor disappears when using the Trace Shuttle function.
Press the button again to deactivate it.
Plays or stops the image. This is also accessible through

Play / Stop the Play / Stop button on the touch screen. This applies
to all images.
An “R to R” section is counted as 1 Beat. This function is

Beat
used for skipping certain Beats in images with multiple
Navigation
Beats. This applies to selected images only.
This is used for navigating to other images when there

are multiple images in the same Stage or the same View.
Image
Index of the image is displayed at the lower right-hand
Navigation
corner of the image. This applies to selected images
only.
Comments This opens the screen for entering comments.
This shows Patient Info, WMS, Calculation, and

Report Comments on the screen. This is also accessible
through the Report button on the touch screen.
Use this to remove the first or the last frame for an image
clip. Frames removed vary depending on Play Mode.
Trim
Changing Play Mode after performing Trim restores the
setting. This applies to selected images only.
Select an image and press the Change Label button to

Change
change Stage and View for the image. Label can also be
Label
changed by using the Label button on the touch screen.
Select multiple images and then select the Mix & Match
function to view selected images only. Select it again to
Mix & return to the previous state. Mode or Display cannot be
Match changed while the Mix & Match function is in use. This is
also accessible through the M&M button on the touch
screen.
Change Page: When there are more than 4 images, they cannot fit into one page. In
this case, press the Page Up button and the Page Down button to navigate through
pages to view different images. Pages can also be selected using the up-down switch
below the touch screen.
Index of the current page is displayed at the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
WMS (Wall Motion Scoring) Mode

WMS Mode performs color mapping on the various parts of the heart suspected of muscle
failures for Wall Motion Scoring.
The image clips appear at the top, and WMS Diagrams matching the image clips appear
at the bottom.
Select a desired Score button from the menu on the left or on the touch screen, and then
click the WMS Diagram area to perform WMS.
WMS Diagrams are available only for 4 Views (PLAX, PSAX, A4C and A2C).
[Figure 3.62 Stress Exam – WMS Mode]

Score Definition
Description Numeric Score Color
Not Scored X White

Normal 1 Green
Hypokinetic 2 Brown
Akinetic 3 Cyan
Dyskinetic 4 Yellow
Aneurysmal 5 Magenta
Akinetic with Scar 6 Blue
Dyskinetic with Scar 7 Mustard
Segment Definition
Left Ventricular Segment Segment #
Basal Anterior Septum 1

Basal Anterior 2
Basal Lateral 3
Basal Posterior 4
Basal Inferior 5
Basal Septum 6
Mid Anterior Septum 7
Mid Anterior 8
Mid Lateral 9
Mid Posterior 10
Mid Inferior 11
Mid Septum 12
Apical Septum 13
Apical Anterior 14
Apical Lateral 15
Apical Inferior 16
Meas/Calc Mode
2D Measure
- 2D Distance: This method measures the distance between two points on the image.
Press the Distance button, and then use the Trackball and the Set button to select
the start point and the end point and measure their distance. Press the Change
button again to reposition the start point and the end point.
- Ellipse: This method draws an ellipse on the image and measures its circumference
and area. Press the Ellipse button, and then use the Trackball and the Set button
to select the start point and the end point. Use the Trackball to adjust the size of
the ellipse and measure its circumference and area. Press the Change button
again to reposition the start point and the end point.
- Trace: This method draws a closed curve on the image and measures its
circumference and area. Press the Trace button, and then use the Trackball and
the Set button to draw a freehand curve in desired area. Draw a closed line that
links the start point with the end point and measure its circumference and area.
[Figure 3.63 Stress Exam – 2D Measure Mode]

- In 2D Measure, you can press the Exit button to cancel measurement, or use the
Clear button to erase the results.
- There are two methods for displaying Measure Data. The first is to display
measure data in all frames. This allows viewing of measure data from all frames.
The second is to display measure data only in the frames measured. You can
view measured frames one by one by pressing the R key on the keyboard. Press
Space Bar on the keyboard to select between the two display methods.
Calculation
- EDV: This method calculates Diastolic Volume on image. The measurement
method is the same as Trace.
- ESV: This method calculates Systolic Volume on image. The measurement
method is the same as Trace.
[Figure 3.64 Stress Exam – Calculation Mode]

- You can press the Exit button to cancel calculation, or use the Clear button to
erase the results.
- Calculation can be performed for A2C and A4C Views only. Each View can
contain one EDV and one ESV measurements.
- There are two modes for displaying Calculation Data. Mode1 displays Calculation
on all calculated frames, and Mode2 displays Calculation only in the frames where
calculations were performed.
Press Space Bar to toggle the modes.
Report
Select the “ (Comments)” button or the “ (Report)” button, and the menu will
appear on the monitor and the touch screen.
Patient Info: Displays the information of the patient receiving the Stress Echo
examination.
[Figure 3.65 Report – Patient Info]

WMS: Displays Wall Motion Score and Diagram for each Stage.
- Select the Overall tab at the bottom of the screen to view Wall Motion Score for
the entire Stage.
[Figure 3.66 Report – WMS]
- Diagrams can be modified at the WMS Report screen. Place the cursor over the
segment to modify and double-click the Set button. At the Score selection
window as illustrated below, select a desired Score.
Calculation: Displays EDV and ESV measurement values for each Stage.
- Stroke Volume, Cardiac output and EF for A2C and A4C can be calculated only
if Dias Vol and Sys Vol values have been measured before and if the Dias Vol
value is greater than the Sys Vol value. Dias Vol of Bi Plane can be calculated
only if Dias Vol of A2C and A4C is measured before, and Sys Vol can be
calculated only if Sys Vol of A2C and A4C is measured before.
- Calculation equations are as follows.

n
π L
Diastolic Volume EDV =
4 ∑a
i =1
2
i ⋅
n
cc(ml) where n = 20
n
π L
4∑
2
Systolic Volume EDV = a i ⋅ cc(ml) where n = 20
i =1
n
Stroke Volume SV = EDV – ESV cc(ml)

Cardiac Output CO = (SV × HR) / 1000 m./min
Ejection Fraction EF = (EDV – ESV) / EDV × 100 %
[Figure 3.67 Report – Calculation]
- Calculation values can be modified at the Calculation Report screen. Place the
cursor over the item to modify and double-click the Set button. Enter the new
value and press the Enter key on the keyboard to save the new Calculation
value.
- Editable values are “Dias Vol” and “Sys Vol.” Values modified at the Report
screen are marked with “ .” Once the volume values are changed, “Stroke
Volume”, “Cardiac output” and “EF” values are automatically re-calculated. Note
that the volume value for Bi-plane retains the original value even if the A4C and
A2C volumes are modified. Re-performing measurement in Meas/Calc mode
discards the modified values at the Report screen.
Comments: You can enter comments or descriptions for the Stress Echo examination.
[Figure 3.68 Report – Comments]

Print
- Press the Print button on the monitor or the touch screen, and the Print Setup
window will appear.
- WMS, Calculation, and Comments can be selected for printing and the number
of print copies can be specified.
Biopsy
Biopsy is the method used for acquiring cells of abnormal tissue by Biopsy Needle. Press the
Biopsy button at the Utility menu.
[Figure 3.69 Utility – Biopsy]
▌ Displaying Biopsy Guideline

1. Press the Biopsy button to toggle on/off the Biopsy Guideline displayed on the screen.
Turn Biopsy on and the following message will appear.
2. Check the needle path by referring to the Biopsy Guideline on the screen. If the needle
path is correct, click the OK button. If it is not correct, adjust the Biopsy Guideline.
▌ Biopsy Guideline Setup

1. Press the Edit button to edit the Biopsy Guideline. The following message will appear
on the screen.
2. If you press the OK button, the Biopsy Edit screen will appear. Or, press the Cancel
button to close the Biopsy menu. To restore the settings while editing the Biopsy
Guideline, reboot the system.
3. Press the Save button when editing is complete. The following message will appear on
the screen.
4. Press the OK button to save the edited Biopsy Guideline. Note that the previous Biopsy
Guideline is deleted and it cannot be recovered.
Image Store
Pressing the Image Store button on the touch screen saves the scan mode images on the
system. The last save image can be sent by e-mail.
Chapter 4
Diagnosis Modes
DIAGNOSIS MODE TYPES AND CONTROL ................................................................ 3
DIAGNOSIS MODES.......................................................................................................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSIS MODE SCREENS AND IMAGE INFORMATION........................................................................................................................3
CHANGING DIAGNOSIS MODE FORMATS..................................................................................................................................................4
OPTIMIZING DIAGNOSIS MODE....................................................................................................................................................................5
BASIC MODES............................................................................................................... 7
2D MODE........................................................................................................................................................................................................7
M MODE........................................................................................................................................................................................................13
COLOR DOPPLER MODE ...........................................................................................................................................................................16
POWER DOPPLER MODE ..........................................................................................................................................................................19
PW (PULSE WAVE) SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE.................................................................................................................................21
CW (CONTINUOUS WAVE) SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE....................................................................................................................26
AUTOMATIC CALCULATOR.........................................................................................................................................................................28
COMBINED MODES .................................................................................................... 29

2D/C/PW MODE.........................................................................................................................................................................................29
2D/PD/PW MODE .....................................................................................................................................................................................29
2D/C/CW MODE ........................................................................................................................................................................................30
2D/PD/CW MODE.....................................................................................................................................................................................30
2D/C/M MODE ............................................................................................................................................................................................31
DUAL LIVE MODE.........................................................................................................................................................................................31
MULTI-IMAGE MODES................................................................................................ 32
DUAL-2D MODE..........................................................................................................................................................................................32
DUAL-2D/C MODE.....................................................................................................................................................................................32
DUAL-2D/PD MODE..................................................................................................................................................................................33
MULTI-DIMENSIONAL MODES ...................................................................................34

MULTI-DIMENSIONAL..................................................................................................................................................................................34
ACQUIRING 3D IMAGES..............................................................................................................................................................................35
3D VIEW .......................................................................................................................................................................................................37
OPTIMIZING 3D IMAGES .............................................................................................................................................................................55
3D XI™ MODE ...........................................................................................................................................................................................64
XI STIC MODE (OPTIONAL)......................................................................................................................................................................76

Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes 4-3
Diagnosis Mode Types and Control
Diagnosis Modes
This product supports a variety of diagnosis modes including Basic modes, Combined modes,
Multi-Image modes, and 3D modes.
Basic Modes: Include 2D Mode, Color Doppler Mode, Power Doppler Mode, M Mode,
PW Spectral Doppler Mode, and CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Combined Modes: These modes are Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler Mode
combined with M Mode, PW Spectral Doppler Mode, or CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Dual Live Mode, which features Color Doppler Mode and 2D Mode in single screen, is
also one of the Combined Modes.
Multi-Image Modes: In Dual Modes you can view two images side by side
simultaneously and compare them.
3D Modes: These modes provide 3D images.
Functionalities for each mode are restricted by the probes selected. For example, Freehand 3D
Mode supports all probes except for Static CW probe, and Volume 3D Mode supports 3D probe
only.
Diagnosis Mode Screens and Image Information

The following table shows the information appearing on different diagnosis mode screens.
2D M C PD PW 3D
Monitor Display
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
2D Image and Image Information ● ● ● ● ● ●
M Image and Image Information ●
Color Doppler Image and Image Information ●
Power Doppler Image and Image Information ●
Spectral Doppler Image and Image Information ●
M Line ●
D Line and Sample Volume ●
ROI (Region of Interest) Box ● ● ●
Title Bar ● ● ● ● ● ●
Depth Marker ● ● ● ● ● ●
Focusing Point & Number ● ● ● ● ● ●
Gray Scale Bar ● ● ● ● ● ●
Color Bar ● ●
TGC Curve ● ● ● ● ● ●
The following table shows the image information appearing for each mode. Note that image
information for 2D mode appears in all modes.
2D M C PD PW
Image Information
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
Gain ● ● ● ● ●
Dynamic Range ● ●
Frame Average ● ● ● ●
Power ● ●
PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) ● ● ●
Wall Filter ● ● ●
Sensitivity ● ●
Sample Volume Depth ●
Sample Volume Size ●
Angle ●
Image information and gray scale bar disappear from the screen by pressing Spacebar.
Changing Diagnosis Mode Formats

The following section explains how to change the display format that is common to all diagnosis
modes.
▌ Changing Active Image Mode

All diagnosis modes except for 2D mode provide two or more modes simultaneously. You
can press the button for each mode on the touch screen to select the active image mode
and control its menus.
▌ Changing Active Image in Multi-Image Modes

Use the Update button, the Set button and the Dual button on the control panel to change
the active image. For example, press the Update button, the Set button or the Dual button
in Dual-2D mode to freeze the image being scanned on the left-hand side of the screen and
show the image being scanned on the right.
▌ Freezing 2D Image in Spectral Doppler Mode

When the simultaneous function is turned on and 2D image and spectral Doppler image are
displayed real-time, you can freeze the 2D image to view more accurate spectral Doppler
image.
Press the Update button on the control panel to freeze the 2D image. Press the button
again to display the 2D image again.
If the simultaneous function is turned off, the current image mode is indicated as “PW Only”
or “2D Only” at the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
You can determine the use of simultaneous modes by setting “Simultaneous Mode” under
the Misc. tab on the Settings screen. If this option is set to “Off”, the Simultaneous button
on the PW Spectral Doppler menu remains inactive.
You can also freezing 2D image by the Update button in 2D/C/PW Mode, 2D/PD/PW Mode,
2D/C/CW Mode, 2D/PD/CW Mode, and 2D/C/M Mode.
▌ Image Depth Control

Use the Depth switch on the control panel. Raise the Depth switch to decrease view depth,
or lower the Depth switch to increase the view depth. Maximum depth and minimum depth
vary depending on the probe.
▌ Zooming Image
Use the Zoom switch on the control panel to zoom the image. Raise the Zoom switch and
the Zoom box will appear. Use the Change button and the Trackball to move and resize
the Zoom box. Repeatedly pressing the Change button toggles the “Zoom Pos.” and
“Zoom size” indication on the screen.
Zoom position: Press the Change button to make the HD Zoom box appear with solid
lines. Use the Trackball to move the box to any desired position.
Zoom size: Press the Change button to make the HD Zoom box appear with dotted
lines. Use the Trackball to resize the HD Zoom box.
Adjust the size and the position of the Zoom box and then press the Set button to zoom the
image. The Zoom Navigation box on the screen shows the relative position of the zoomed
area.
When using the Zoom function, press the Z button on the control panel to hide the Zoom
Navigation box and deactivate Zoom Position. Press the Z button again and the Zoom
Navigation box will appear.
Change Depth or press the Exit button on the control panel to cancel the image zoom.
Read Zoom
This function is for zooming the image saved in the memory. Note that this is not available
in Dual mode or Loop mode.
The RD Zoom menu appears on the touch screen when the image is frozen by pressing the
Freeze button or when adjusting the Zoom switch on the control panel.
Turn the knob-button below the RD Zoom menu to run the Read Zoom function and zoom
the image. When Read Zoom is activated, the Zoom switch will not work. (Write Zoom
cannot be activated.)
Optimizing Diagnosis Mode

The following are instructions for optimizing images in all diagnosis modes.
▌ Gain Control
Use the mode knob-button on the control panel to adjust the brightness of the image. Turn it
clockwise to increase Gain or turn it counter-clockwise to decrease Gain.
▌ Adjusting Post Gain

When the image is frozen by pressing the Freeze button on the control panel, you can
adjust the mode knob-button to adjust Gain. Turn it clockwise to increase Gain or turn it
counter-clockwise to decrease Gain.
Post Gain can be adjusted to any values between +10 and -10. The Post Gain value is
displayed on the screen in the format of “*PG:0.” The Gain value is restored to the value
before freezing when the image becomes active again.
▌ TGC Control
When ultrasound is transmitted through the human body, the lucency of ultrasound
weakens as it travels deeper into the body. TGC (Time Gain Compensation) can be used to
supplement this. For obtaining the best image quality, TGC is divided into 8 regions which
can be used to adjust Gain by different depths.
Move the TGC slide to the right (+) to increase Gain (brightening the image) or move the TGC
slide to the left (-) to decrease Gain (darkening the image).
▌ Harmonic Function
This product provides the OHI (Optimal Harmonic Imaging) function. In 2D mode, press the
HAR button on the control panel to activate the function.
▌ Focus Position Control

Use the Focus switch on the control panel to focus on specific regions for clearer view.
Raise the switch to move the focus position up and lower the switch to move the focus
position down.
▌ Focus Number Control

Press the Focus up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the number of focusing
points. Check on the screen as focusing points are added or removed.
▌ Frequency Change
Each probe provides a wide range of frequencies for obtaining images of best quality. Use
the Frequency up/down button on the touch screen to change the probe frequency.
This function is available for linear probes (L5-12IM, L6-12IS) only.
▌ Power Control
Power is the intensity of the acoustic output.
Use the up-down switch below Power on the touch screen to adjust the value.
Basic Modes
2D Mode
This basic mode, also referred to as B Mode (Brightness mode), provides scan planes of
organs.
[Figure 4.1 2D Mode]
▌ 2D Mode Selection
Since 2D mode is always turned on except for special cases, the 2D button does not
function as a toggle. In any diagnosis mode, just press the 2D button to switch to 2D mode
which is the basic diagnosis mode.
▌ 2D Menu
[Figure 4.2 2D Menu]

▌ Changing 2D Image Format

Changing Image Direction
- Changing Left/Right Orientation (Horizontal Orientation, Direction): Press the
Direction button on the touch screen.
- Changing Up/down Direction (Vertical Orientation, Apex): Press the Apex button on
the touch screen.
- Changing View Area
Turn the knob-button below Scan Area on the touch screen to adjust the size of the
Area to be anywhere between 60% and 100%. After changing the view area, turn the
knob-button below Scan Angle left/right to move View Area left/right and view other
regions. Scan Angle is unavailable for linear probes.
The frame rate (FPS) drops as the view area becomes larger and the frame rate
increases as the view area becomes smaller.
Showing M Line
M Line indicates the relative position of the M Mode image or the Spectral Doppler Mode
image in the 2D image.
Press the M line button on the touch screen to show M Line, and press the M line button
again to hide M Line.
▌ Optimizing 2D Images
Adjusting Frame Average
The Frame Average function obtains the average for the previous frame and the current
frame and displays it on the screen in order to reduce speckles on continuous images on
the same examination regions. Adjusting this function to High will result in a relatively
smooth display of the image, but the user may get the impression that the display is slower
(the actual frame rate does not drop). It is recommended that this function be turned off
when examining OB, cardiac and other movement-intense organs. It is useful to set this
function to High when examining internal medicine and organs with little movements.
Use the Frame Average up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Edge Enhance

This clearly displays the boundaries between tissues or organs. Edges appear clearer if the
Edge Enhance value is set high. Use the Edge Enhance up/down button on the touch
screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Reject Level

This function is used to eliminate noise or low level echoes for clearer signals. Use the
Reject Level up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Tissue Property

You can select the ultrasound velocity according to the patient’s physique. Physique menu
contains Cystic, Adipose, Normal and Solid. Use the Tissue up/down button on the touch
Smooth Function
This is available for Convex probe. It shows smoother 2D images by eliminating noise. Use
the up-down switch below Smooth on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Pulsed Inversion Function

When Harmonic mode is in use, press the Pulsed Inversion button on the touch screen to
activate this function. This shows sharp images with clear edges. This function is not
available for L5-12IM, VNA6-12, L6-12IS, and L8-15IS probes.
Trapezoid Function
When using Linear probe, you can stretch the 2D image into a trapezoid and examine it in a
larger area. Press the Trapez. button on the touch screen to run this function.
When adjusting the image depth, the Trapezoid function may not be available at certain
depth values. Note that using the Zoom function turns the Trapezoid function off.
DynamicMR Function
This optional function removes speckle noise and strengthens edges for 2D images for
higher image accuracy.
Press the DynamicMR button on the touch screen to run it. The previous configuration will
be applied to the image.
DynamicMR has 6 Presets, each of which has 5 Indexes. To select new

NOTE values or make other settings, press the DynamicMR button on the Utility
menu and make the settings.
Steer Function
This function adjusts the angle of the ultrasound beam in order to prevent loss of
ultrasound information. This function is available for Linear probe only. Use the Steer
button on the touch screen to run this function.
Adjusting Dynamic Range

You can adjust the minimum value and maximum ratio of the input signal and display
images by changes in contrast. Images appear soft at higher ratios and coarse at lower
ratios.
Turn the knob-button below DR on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Density
Use the up-down switch below Density on the touch screen to adjust the image scan line.
This is useful for quickly examining images with low values.
While density can be adjusted to Low, Middle, or High, it is available in 4 steps — Low,
Middle1, Middle2 and High — for Color Doppler Mode.
Adjusting Frame Rate

Frame rate is the number of images generated per second. Frame rate should be set to
high when viewing fast moving organs.
Use the up-down switch below Frame Rate on the touch screen to make adjustments.
AIO (Auto Image Optimization) Function

This function optimizes 2D images by adjusting 2D Gain, Dynamic Range and TGC
automatically.
Press the AIO button on the control panel to activate it and the Reset AIO button on the
touch screen to deactivate it. It deactivates when Harmonic Mode or Pulse Inversion is
activated.
Pressing and holding the AIO button executes the AIO function repeatedly.
The probes and applications in the following table are applied with the new AIO function to
obtain more optimized images.
Abdomen OB SmallPart Vascular Cardiac

L6-12IS ● ●
C5-2EL ●
C2-6IC ●
3D4-7EK ●
P2-4AC ●
Clip Save Function

This function saves the screen image into a clip. It is provided for Cardiac application with
Phased Array probe or Contrast Agent application with C5-2EL or C1-4EC probe (only
Low MI).
Press the Clip Save button on the touch screen to activate it. Specify the unit and value(s)
to be used for saving a clip under the Misc. tab on the Setting screen.
While saving a clip, press the Set button on the control panel to complete the saving
process or the Exit button to cancel the saving process.
Clips can be saved by beat only when ECG is running; clips will not be
saved when ECG beats do not appear even if the setting is selected for
NOTE clips to be saved by beat.
If 10 seconds of a color image are saved, the screen will be updated 3
seconds after saving is completed.
Spatial Compound Image (SCI) Function

This function displays more smooth 2D images by eliminating speckle noises and is
available only in 2D Mode for the L6-12IS probe.
Press the SCI button on the touch screen to activate it. Its value(s) can be adjusted with
the SCI Filter up/down button that appears when it is running.
When the SCI function is in use, Frame Average, ECG Trigger, AIO and Write Zoom
functions become unavailable.
The SCI function deactivates when 3D Mode, M Mode, C Mode, PD Mode, PW Mode,
Pulse Inversion or Trapezoid is activated.
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes 4 - 11
[Figure 4.3 Spatial Compound Image]
Low MI Function
This function displays clearer contrast images and is available for Contrast Agent
application with the C5-2EL or C1-4EC probe.
Press the Low MI button on the touch screen to activate it. Images can be adjusted via the
menu displayed on the touch screen. Press the Low MI Off button to deactivate Low MI
and switch to 2D Mode. Press the 2D Menu button to keep Low MI activated and switch to
2D Mode.
Use of the Low MI menu is similar to that of the 2D Mode Menu.
[Figure 4.4 Low MI]

- Pressing the Timer 1 Start button resets and activates
Timer. The elapsed time after an agent is injected can
be measured with a counter displayed on the screen. If
an image becomes frozen, Timer 2 is activated to show
the time for which it is frozen. Press the Return Low MI
button to return to the Low MI function.
- Pressing the Timer All Reset button resets both Timer 1 & 2.
- Flash Trigger is a function that breaks the agent bubbles injected by bursting flashes
at the maximum MI Power of the system and probe for the specified Flash Time. Flash
Time can be specified with the up/down switch under Flash Time on the touch screen.
- Use the knob-button under MI Control to adjust the MI Power value. Available setting
ranges are between 0 – 100.
- Color Type and 2D Post Curve change the color of the image applied with Pseudo.
While Low MI is in use, you may not switch to any mode other than Dual
Mode.
NOTE
Trying to activate Low MI in Harmonic Mode results in activation of Pulse
Inversion.
M Mode
This mode provides images that change over time at certain regions of 2D mode scan planes,
such as the movement of a heart valve. A 2D image is also displayed to indicate the relative
position of the selected region and allow the user to change the position.
[Figure 4.4 M Mode]
▌ M Mode Selection
Press the M button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
▌ 2D/M Menu
M Mode and 2D Mode have the same menus for image optimization.
[Figure 4.5 2D/M Menu]

▌ Changing M Mode Format

Adjusting M Line
M Line indicates the relative position of the M Mode image in the 2D image. Use the
Trackball on the control panel to move M Line left and right and view different regions.
Adjusting Sweep Speed

Use the Speed up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the sweep speed of M image
in steps.
Changing Loop Format

Use the up-down switch below LoopFormat on the touch screen to change the position
where 2D image and M image appear. Top Down Format places 2D image and M image
at the top and the bottom, and Side by Side Format places them on the left and the right.
Changing M Image Size

Use the up-down switch below Disp Format on the touch screen to change the size of 2D
image and M image. Available options are “50/50”, “40/60”, and “60/40” which indicate the
image size ratio between 2D image and M image.
▌ Free Angle M Mode

This mode allows the user to rotate or move M Line—which normally moves horizontally—
for viewing 2D images. Adjusting the depth for 2D image initializes M Line.
This mode is available for Phased Array probe. It is unavailable in Color

NOTE
Doppler Mode or Zoom Mode.
Starting and Adjusting Free Angle M Mode

Press the Free Angle button on the touch screen to run it. The menu is illustrated in the
figure below.
[Figure 4.6 Free Angle M Mode]

Turn the knob-buttons below Length and Angle on the touch screen to adjust the length
and angle of M Line.
Use the Length Step and Angle Step up/down buttons on the touch screen to adjust the
steps for “Length” and “Angle.” If Step is set to “3,” the value can be adjusted in multiples
of 3.
Position of M Line can be adjusted by moving the Trackball. Start point and end point of M
Line cannot be outside the 2D image.
Things to Consider When Using Free Angle M Mode

Selecting another mode (2D Mode, etc.) while using Free Angle M Mode exists Free Angle
M Mode and activates the selected mode.
The Patient, End Exam, Indicator, Text, Body marker, and Measure buttons function
normally in Free Angle M Mode.
If you selecting the User, E-mail, Mic or SonoView button in Free Angle M Mode, the
selected button functions after shifting to the normal M Mode.
The buttons on the control panel other than those mentioned above (those with LED off) do
not function.
NOTE For information on optimizing M image, refer to “2D Mode.”

Color Doppler Mode

In this mode you can obtain a variety of information about blood flow within the 2D Image such
as the existence of blood flow, its average speed and its direction within the ROI (Region of
Interest).
[Figure 4.7 Color Doppler Mode]
▌ Color Doppler Mode Selection

Press the C button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
▌ C Menu
[Figure 4.8 C Menu]

▌ Changing Color Image Format

Color Bar is a color map that shows the direction and velocity of blood flow.
Colors above the baseline across the center of the color bar indicate blood
NOTE
flowing toward the probe and colors below the baseline indicate blood flowing
away from the probe.
Adjusting Color Bar Baseline

Press the Baseline up/down button on the touch screen. Press the up button to move the
baseline up on the color bar, or press the down button to move the baseline down.
Baseline can be adjusted only when Color Mode is set to “Velocity.”
Inverting Color Bar

Press the Invert button on the touch screen. Inverting the color bar also inverts the colors
displayed on the image.
Changing Color Display Information

Use the up-down switch below Color Mode on the touch screen to select Velocity, Power,
Variance, or Vel + Var. If “Velocity” or “Vel + Var” is selected, numbers will be displayed
above and below the color bar indicating the color scale values. If “Variance” is selected,
+1 and -1 will be displayed. If “Power” is selected, no numbers will be displayed.
▌ Color Image Optimization

Adjusting Balance
Adjust the range of color image display by comparing Gray Level of the 2D image with
Doppler signal values of the color image. As the Balance value increases, color image
appears even in regions with high Gray Level in 2D image (bright regions), expanding the
range of color image.
Use the Balance up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Sensitivity
Use the Sensitivity up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Increasing the Sensitivity value increases Sensitivity, and decreasing the Sensitivity value
decreases Sensitivity. As color sensitivity increases, frame rate drops.
Adjusting Scale (PRF)

Use the Scale up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments. Increasing the
Scale value increases PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency), expanding the range of blood
flow velocity displayed, and decreasing the value decreases PRF, narrowing the range of
blood flow velocity displayed.
Changing ROI Box

Color Pos: ROI (Region Of Interest) indicates the area of the 2D image where color (blood
flow) information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode. Use the Trackball to change the
position of the box.

Color Size: Press the ROI Size up/down button on the touch screen. Alternatively,
repeatedly press the Change button on the control panel to change the function of the
Trackball and use the Trackball when its appropriate function is displayed on the screen.
Adjusting Wall Filter

Wall Filter is an electric filter that removes low-frequency Doppler signals from movement of
the vessel wall. Adjust Cutoff Frequency to remove from the screen Doppler signals with
frequencies that are lower than the Cutoff Frequency.
Use the Filter up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments. Increasing the
Filter value increases the Cutoff Frequency for Wall Filter, and decreasing the value
decreases the Cutoff Frequency for Wall Filter.
Fast Frame Function

This function increases the frame rate when the application is set to Fetal Heart. The image
moves approximately 70% faster than the actual speed.
Press the Fast Frame button on the touch screen to run this function.
Steer Function
When using Linear probe, this function adjusts the ultrasound beam angle to prevent the
loss of color information caused by the ultrasound beam angle.
Use the Steer button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Display Function
Use the up-down switch below Display on the touch screen to select the Display format.
Color Doppler Mode supports Color + B/W Image, Color Only, and B/W Only display.
TDI (Tissue Doppler Image) Function

When the application Cardiac or Pediatric Cardiology and the Phased Array probe is in use,
movements of cardiac tissues can be viewed in Doppler modes.
Cardiac tissues can be viewed by color information in Color Doppler Mode and Power
Doppler Mode, and time-dependent changes of cardiac tissues can be viewed by spectral
Doppler images in PW Spectral Doppler mode.
Press the TDI button on the control panel. “TDI on” will be indicated on the screen.
NOTE For information on other menu items, refer to “2D Mode.”

Power Doppler Mode

Instead of the speed or direction of blood flow, Power Doppler Mode displays the overall
strength of blood flow, thereby showing information about the existence and amount of blood
flow in the sample area.
[Figure 4.9 Power Doppler Mode]
▌ Power Doppler Mode Selection

Press the PD button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
▌ PD Menu
Use of the Power Doppler Mode menu is similar to the Color Doppler Mode menu.
[Figure 4.10 PD Menu]

▌ Optimizing Power Doppler Image

Directional Function
This function displays the amount (power) of blood flow and direction of blood flow. Press
the Directional button on the touch screen to activate it.
■ Color Bar is a color map that displays the existence of blood flow and
its amount. Brighter colors on the color bar indicate high amount of
NOTE blood flow.
■ For information on other menu items, refer to “Color Doppler Mode.”
PW (Pulse Wave) Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode shows the velocity of blood flow at a specific position within blood vessel. Distance
(depth) information can be obtained by transmitting pulses over time frames. This mode is
useful for measuring low-speed blood flow such as in abdomen and peripheral vessels. A 2D
image is also displayed to indicate the relative position of the selected region in blood vessel
and allow the user to change the position.
On the PW Spectral Doppler Mode image, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical
axis represents speed (or frequency).
[Figure 4.11 PW Spectral Doppler Mode]
▌ PW Spectral Doppler Mode Selection

▌ D Menu
[Figure 4.12 PW Menu]

▌ PW Spectral Doppler Mode Format Change

Use the Speed up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the sweep speed of Spectral
Doppler image in steps.
Adjusting Doppler Baseline

Use the up-down switch below Baseline on the touch screen. Raise the switch button to
move the baseline up, or lower the switch to move the baseline down.

Use the up-down switch below Loop Format on the touch screen to change the position
where 2D image and Spectral Doppler image appear. Top Down Format places 2D image
and Spectral Doppler image at the top and the bottom, and Side by Side Format places
them on the left and the right.
Changing Spectral Doppler Image Size

Use the up/down button Disp Format on the touch screen to change the size of 2D image
and Spectral Doppler image. Available options are “50/50”, “40/60”, and “60/40” which
indicate the image size ratio between 2D image and Spectral Doppler image.
Activating Simultaneous Mode

The PW Spectral Doppler image and 2D image can be displayed simultaneously or
separately.
Press the Simult. button on the touch screen to activate Simultaneous Mode. When
Simultaneous Mode is on, selecting the button again to deactivate Simultaneous Mode.
Simultaneous Mode decreases Doppler PRF, thus decreasing the measurable speed range.
Activate the Simultaneous Mode option by setting Simultaneous Mode as “Allow 2D/PW” or
“Allow 2D/C/PW” in the Misc. tab at the Setting screen.
Inverting Doppler Axis

Press the Invert button on the touch screen. Positions of the + and – speed indications will
be inverted.
▌ Optimizing PW Spectral Doppler Image

Sample Volume
Located on the 2D image, it indicates the position of the Spectral Doppler image. Displayed
in the format of xx.x@yy.y mm, it indicates that the size of the sample volume is “xx.x mm”
and the depth is “yy.y mm.” For example, 2.0@16.7 mm means that the Sample Volume of
2.0mm size is located at a depth of 16.7mm.
Changing Position: Use the Trackball on the control panel.
Changing Size: Press the SV Size up/down button on the touch screen. Alternatively,
Trackball. “SV Pos” and “SV Size” will appear on the screen in one after another.
Changing Angle: Use the knob-button below Angle on the touch screen to make
adjustments. Turn the knob-button to change the angle by 1°, or press it to change the
angle to -60°, 0°, or 60°. Adjusting the sample volume angle allows more accurate
measurement of velocity.
Adjusting Doppler Sound Volume

Use the Sound knob-button on the control panel. Pressing the knob-button toggles sound
on/off. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume and turn it counter-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
Adjusting Spectrum Enhancement

This function enhances sensitivity of Spectral Doppler images by adjusting brightness and
sensitivity of Spectral Doppler images. Press the Spectrum Enh. up/down button on the
touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Spectrum Type

Use the Spectrum Type up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the Spectral Doppler
image to a desired type. You can obtain soft spectral Doppler images.
Adjusting Doppler Average

This function determines availability (on/off) of FDRP (Fast DRP). It can enhance
expression of Spectral Doppler images. Press the Dop Avg up/down button on the touch
HPRF (High PRF) Function

This function measures blood flow beyond the speed limit at specific depths. It doubles or
triples the original scale. This function is available only in PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Starting HPRF
Continuously increase the scale value at a specific depth to start HPRF. Phantom Gate will
appear on D Line at the position higher than the sample volume. Once HPRF starts, PRF
does not increase even if you increase the scale value.
Finishing HPRF
While HPRF is in use, decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF. The PRF value
will be the maximum value for the current PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Adjusting Sample Volume Position

If you adjust the sample volume in PW only state, the system calculates the PRF value and
the Phantom Gate position and updates them on the Spectral Doppler image. If HPRF
cannot start, HPRF will terminate.
If you adjust the sample volume in 2D only state, the PRF value does not change.
[Figure 4.13 Starting HPRF]
HPRF is not available in Simultaneous Mode. Also, if the twice the PRF value
NOTE
is 23kHz or above before starting HPRF, HPRF will not start.
■ The Phantom Gate position can be located outside the 2D image area
in Zoom Mode.
■ Make sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed
CAUTION
together in the measuring area. If there are two or more sample
volumes placed on vessels, the Spectral Doppler image may have
excessive noise due to the unwanted Doppler substances.

This function allows increasing of the scale and/or automatic change of the baseline for
unaliasing of Spectral Doppler images. Press the AIO button on the control panel.
When AIO is in use, scale can increase by twofold at maximum. If the

NOTE
current scale is at the maximum, the AIO function will not start.
Things to Consider for Auto Image Optimization

This algorithm manipulates Automatic Calculator (Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace).
Please refer to “Things to Consider for Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace.”
AIO can function properly if the Spectral Doppler image repeats for 2 cycles or more.
Spectral Doppler images that are not aliased may be recognized as optimal images and the
AIO function may not be available. If the Spectral Doppler image is small because the scale
value is high (even though not aliased), the AIO function automatically adjusts the scale
value and displays the optimal Spectral Doppler image.
For information on Wall Filter, Scale, Dynamic Range, Steer, Frequency,

and TDI Adjustment, refer to “2D Mode” and “Color Doppler Mode.”
NOTE
Methods for using the menus may be different, but the functions are
identical.
CW (Continuous Wave) Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode shows the velocity of blood flow within blood vessel. It can measure high-speed
blood flow by continuously transmitting pulses. However, this is not useful for viewing
information for specific areas.
A 2D image is also displayed to indicate the relative position of the vessel and allow the user to
change the position. Note that 2D image is not displayed when using Static CW probes (CW2.0,
CW4.0).
▌ Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode

When using Phased Array probe, press the CW button on the control panel to activate the
function. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
[Figure 4.14 Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode]
▌ Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode is available only for Static CW probes. At the Probe Selection screen, select
Static CW probe on the touch screen to activate the mode.
[Figure 4.15 Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode]

▌ CW Menu
Methods for using the menu are the same as in PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
[Figure 4.16 CW Menu]
For information on optimizing CW images, refer to “PW Spectral Doppler

NOTE
Mode.”
Automatic Calculator
▌ Adjusting Frequency
The Automatic Calculator function, also called Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace, can
be activated by selecting the AutoCalc button on the touch screen. When Automatic
Calculator is in use, peak trace on the Spectral Doppler image is highlighted in green.
Real-time Doppler signals are traced and their measurement values are displayed. PSA,
EDV, TAP, RI, PI, S/D, VTI, Gpeak, Gmean, and Vmean values can be obtained in Cardiac
Package, and PSA, EDV, TAP, TAM, RI, PI, S/D, and Vmean values can be obtained in
Non-Cardiac Packages.
Press the Mean Trace button on the touch screen to run the Mean Trace function. Mean
Trace is highlighted in black on the Spectral Doppler image. This is not available when the
application is Cardiac.
Auto Trace measurement values in measurement mode and Automatic

Calculator measurement values may not be identical. This is because
CAUTION
each function uses different algorithms. For more accurate measurement,
use Auto Trace in measurement mode.
▌ Auto Trace Direction

This function selects the areas that are traced by Doppler signals. Use the up-down switch
below Auto Trace Dir on the touch screen to select All, Up, or Down. You can select either
Up or Down when the application is Cardiac.
▌ Things to Consider for Automatic Calculator

Results will not be displayed if the function is run against inaccurate values.
Trace and/or results may not be accurate in the following situations.
- Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed, or the
Spectral Doppler image is clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high.
- Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral Doppler images for veins.
- It is difficult to identify the Spectral Doppler image because Doppler Gain Setting is too
high or too low.
- Index Display immediately after moving the sample volume with the Trackball.
- Certain portions of major Spectral Doppler image signals are cut off because the Wall
Filter value is too high.
- Peak Trace is interfered with abnormal noise or artefact of Doppler signals.
- Heart rate is 140bpm or above.
Combined Modes
2D/C/PW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. To use the
2D/C/PW Mode, under the Misc. tab on the Setting screen, set Simultaneous Mode to “Allow
2D/C/PW.”
In Color Doppler Mode, press the M button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the C button on the control panel.
[Figure 4.17 2D/C/PW Mode]
2D/PD/PW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. To use the
2D/C/PW.”
In Power Doppler Mode, press the M button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the PD button on the control panel.
[Figure 4.18 2D/PD/PW Mode]

2D/C/CW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. Note that
this mode is available for Phased Array probe only.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the CW button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler
[Figure 4.19 2D/C/CW Mode]
2D/PD/CW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. Note that
In Power Doppler Mode, press the CW button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler
[Figure 4.20 2D/PD/CW Mode]

2D/C/M Mode
Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously. Note that this mode is available
only when the application is “Fetal Heart” or when the application is “Cardiac”, “General” or
“Pediatric” for Phased Array probe.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the M button on the control panel. Or, in M Mode, press the C
button on the control panel.
[Figure 4.21 2D/C/M Mode]
Dual Live Mode

This mode displays 2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode simultaneously. 2D image is displayed
on the right and Color Doppler image is displayed on the left. If run in Power Doppler Mode, it
displays 2D image and Power Doppler image.
Press the DUAL LIVE button on the control panel to activate it, and use the Color Doppler
menu to optimize the image. Use the Cine Save function for more effective viewing.
[Figure 4.22 Dual Live Mode]

Multi-Image Modes
The multi-image viewing function is only available when the images and conditions on both
sides are identical.
Dual-2D Mode
This mode allows you to compare 2D images side by side.
In 2D Mode, 3D Mode, or Spectral Doppler Mode, press the Dual button on the control panel to
select the function. Press the Dual button to close Dual-2D Mode and return to 2D Mode which
is the default mode.
Use the Dual button, the Update button and the Set button to change the left/right images.
[Figure 4.23 Dual-2D Mode]
Dual-2D/C Mode
This mode allows you to compare Color Doppler Mode images side by side.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the Dual button on the control panel. Or, in Dual-2D Mode, press
the C button on the control panel.
[Figure 4.24 Dual-2D / Color Doppler Mode]

Dual-2D/PD Mode
This mode allows you to compare PD Mode images side by side.
In PD Mode, press the Dual button on the control panel. Or, in Dual-2D Mode, press the PD
[Figure 4.25 Dual-2D/PD Mode]

Multi-Dimensional Modes
Multi-Dimensional
Multi-Dimensional Modes display tissues or organs as 3-dimensional images. Multi-Dimensional
Modes continuously obtain 2-dimentional surface images from the probe and render the volume
data for displaying 3-dimensional images.
▌ Multi-Dimensional Mode Types

Types by Image Information
- 3D Mode: This is the default 3D Mode. Press the 3D/4D button in 2D Mode to access it.
- 3D Color Doppler Mode: This mode displays blood flow velocity and direction
information on 3D image by color. Press the 3D/4D button in Color Doppler Mode to
access it.
- 3D Power Doppler Mode: This mode displays existence of blood flow and its amount
information on 3D image by color. Press the 3D/4D button in Power Doppler Mode to
access it.
Types by Scan Methods
- Static 3D Mode: This mode obtains a 3-dimensional image by rendering continuous
2D images once. 3D probes obtain volume data by mechanical scanning, and 2D
probes obtain volume data by freehand scanning.
- Live 3D Mode: This mode obtains a 3-dimensional image by rendering continuous 2D
images multiple times. It processes volume data real-time and it is available for 3D
probes only.
- XI STIC Mode: Use a 3D probe to obtain the fetal cardiac cycle and STIC volume data
▌ How to Improve 3D Image Quality

Consider the direction, division and size of the viewpoint, as well as the visibility of an
object.
Before 3D scanning, adjust the contrast of the specific textures in 2D Mode.
The ROI (Region of Interest) box determines the image being rendered. Portions of image
outside the ROI box are not included in the rendering process.
Bigger the ROI box, slower is the rendering speed. Therefore, set an appropriate ROI
box size.
To determine the contour of objects, surface of objects should be insulated with hypo-
echoic tissues—such as amniotic fluid—which do not generate echoes.
To obtain a high quality 3D surface, adjust the low-threshold value.
Set the noise gray value lower than the surface value in order to obtain clearer images
from edges of the ROI box to the surface of the objects.
In general, do not adjust High-Threshold; set it to the maximum value of 255. If the
surface render algorithm is higher than the Threshold value, this value indicates the
boundary of the surface. Therefore, use High-Threshold to adjust the boundary
manually.
Acquiring 3D Images
▌ Image Scan Mode
This mode allows acquisition of 3D and Live 3D images. Press the 3D/4D button on the
control panel to access it. Set the menu items and then press the Freeze button to start
scanning.
Press the Exit button or the 3D/4D button on the control panel to exit Image Scan Mode.
You may also select a button for another mode to exit.
If 3D image is acquired by changing the left/right direction (by selecting the Direction menu),
it is displayed on View Mode. But if 3D image is acquired by changing the up/down direction
(by selecting the Apex menu), it is not displayed on View Mode.
Volume Box
Multi-Dimensional Modes contain two volume boxes. The volume box with cyan lines
indicates the scanning area on the 2D image, and the volume box with yellow lines
indicates the area of the rendered 3D image. The yellow box is also called the ROI box.
- Changing Position: Use the Trackball to change the position of the volume box. Press the
Change button on the control panel to change the function of the Trackball to “Move” and
then change the position. The function of the Trackball is displayed in the feedback area.
- Changing Size: Turn the knob-buttons below ROI Width and ROI Height on the touch
screen to make adjustments. Alternatively, press the Change button on the control panel to
change the function of the Trackball to “Resize” and then change the size.
Setting Auto Calc

This function is available when the application is OB. It automatically sets up the volume box.
Press the Auto ROI Off button on the touch screen to change it to Auto ROI On. The
volume box will appear in the desired area of the image.
This is not available in 3D Color Doppler Mode or 3D Power Doppler Mode.
The Auto ROI function is available only when the fetal body is displayed
NOTE on the screen. This function manipulates brightness and contrast of the
image.
Adjusting Vol. Angle

Use the up-down switch below Vol. Angle on the touch screen to adjust the scanning angle
of the 3D probe.
Adjusting Scan Quality

Use the up-down switch below Scan quality on the touch screen to adjust the quality of the
3D image.
Low: The image quality is low but the 3D image speed (or rendering speed) is fast.
Mid: The image quality is better than Low Quality but the speed is slower than Low
Quality.
High: The image quality and expression are good. Speed is slower than Mid Quality.
Extreme: The image quality is excellent. Use this to obtain detailed images regardless of
the speed.
▌ Image Acquisition Procedures

Static 3D Image Acquisition Procedures
1. Press the 3D/4D button on the control panel to move to Image Scan Mode, and then
select the 3D button on the touch screen.
2. Adjust “Scan Quality” and “Vol. Angle” on the touch screen.
3. Use the volume box on the screen to set the position and size of the 3D image to
acquire.
4. Press the Freeze button on the control panel. A 3D image will be acquired for the area
within the volume box and then View Mode will appear.
[Figure 4.26 3D Acquisition – 3D]

Live 3D Image Acquisition Procedures
select the Live 3D button on the touch screen.
3. Use the volume box on the screen to set the position and size of the 3D image to acquire.
4. Press the Freeze button on the control panel. A Live 3D image will be acquired for the
area within the volume box and then View Mode will appear.
[Figure 4.27 3D Acquisition – Live 3D]

■ To obtain a direct view of the face of the fetus on the screen when
acquiring the 3D image, place the head of the fetus in the direction of
the Direction Mark, put the fetus in the Coronal Plane, and then scan
NOTE the fetus from the back toward the abdomen.
■ The 3D image of the fetal face is more easily found in the coronal
plane than in the sagital plane.
3D View
▌ 3D View Mode
This mode allows adjusting and/or viewing of the 3D or Live 3D image that was acquired in
Image Scan Mode.
In 3D View Mode, press the Exit button or the 3D/4D button on the control panel to move to
Image Scan Mode. Press the 2D button to completely exit 3D Mode. Note that pressing the
Exit button on the control panel in Live 3D View Mode switches to Live Cine Mode.
A B
Axial plane Sagital plane

C
Coronal plane 3D plan
[Figure 4.28 Static 3D View]

The default 3D View screen consists of Axial Section, Sagital Section and Coronal Section
surface images—which are volume data cut by anatomical positions—and 3D images.
Figure 4.28 illustrates a screen displaying Axial Section as “A plane,” Sagital Section as “B
plane,” and Coronal Section as “C plane.”
In ABC-ROI 3D Mode, the ROI box displayed in each section can be adjusted for obtaining
desired 3D images.
View Mode Control Menu
Control menus for 3D or Live 3D images appear on the touch screen depending on the
characteristics of each mode.
When operating images, the ‘ ’ icon and the Trackball function icon appear at the bottom
of the screen.
The following icons are available.

- Icons in 3D View Mode:
- Icons in 3D XI Mode:
▌ Selecting 3D View Mode

Static 3D View Mode
For better viewing of 3D images, view modes are categorized into 2D Mode and 3D Mode
depending on rendering methods.
At the View Mode Control menu, press a button on the touch screen to access the
corresponding view mode.
To exit the selected view mode or return to the previous menu, press the Exit button on the
touch screen or the Exit button on the control panel.
2D Mode for Static 3D View
[Figure 4.29 Static 3D – 2D]
Menu Description
ABC Mode does not display 3D image; it displays multi-planar images

only. Use Full Mode for a more detailed view.
ABC Mode Selection
Volume CT Mode displays a 3D view of the plane position of the

examination image.
Hold down the Change button on the control panel for a few seconds and
the mouse pointer will appear. Use the Trackball and the Set button to
Volume CT Mode adjust the 3D space. Use the Niche Zoom menu on the touch screen to
Selection zoom in or zoom out the Volume CT image. Use the Zoom menu to zoom
in or zoom out the surface image and apply it on the Volume CT image.
OH (Orientation Help) Function

OH (Orientation Help) image displays the relative position of the currently selected
reference image in regards to the volume data.
The A, B, and C buttons of the reference image move the plane of OH, and rotating each
reference image also rotates the plane of OH. OH image is shown only in 2D Mode for Static 3D.
If the plane of OH is not properly expressed for the volume data, press the
NOTE
Init button.
Coronal plane OH image
[Figure 4.30 OH Screen]

[A plane] [B plane] [C plane]

Menu Description
ABC-3D Mode projects a 3D image on the Volume data plane

without setting an ROI. Detailed examination is possible as
3D image is projected without using an ROI.
ABC-3D Mode Selection
In ABC-ROI 3D Mode, desired 3D images can be examined

by adjusting the surface images and the ROI box on 3D
images.
ABC-ROI 3D Mode Selection
Fits the 3D image on the entire screen in View Modes.
Full Screen View (Full Mode)
Initializes the current image back to the state it was at the

beginning of 3D View Mode or to the Preset state.
Reset to Initial Position
Each multi-planar has its own standard coordinate system

and rotates or moves according to the coordinate system.
The image selected as a reference image rotates or moves
according to the reference image coordinate system, and
other images rotate or move according to their own standard
Change Reference Plane coordinate systems.
(Reference Plane Selection) Press a desired button to change the reference image.
Rotates the 3D image against the Z-axis in the 3D standard

coordinate system by the rotation value selected.
3D Orientation
Turn the X knob-button to rotate the selected reference image
in the direction of the X-axis. In Full Mode where the
reference image is not shown, the selected image acts as the
Rotate Image by X-axis (() reference image and the Full Mode image rotates by the X-
axis.
The M knob-button on the control panel acts as the X knob-
button.
Turn the Y knob-button to rotate the selected reference image

Rotate Image by Y-axis (') or the Full Mode image in the direction of the Y-axis. The PD
knob-button on the control panel acts as the Y knob-button.
Turn the Z knob-button to rotate the selected reference image

Rotate Image by Z-axis (43) or the Full Mode image in the direction of the Z-axis. The PW
knob-button on the control panel acts as the Z knob-button.
Press the Change button on the control panel and use the
Trackball to move the selected reference image or the Full
Mode image up/down/left/right. Press the Change button
again to resize the ROI box.
Here, hold down the Change button for 2 seconds to change
Move and Resize Image the function of the Trackball.
(ROI Box Adjustment)
Press the Set button and the icon will appear on the
screen. Move the Trackball while holding down the Set
button to rotate the image. Also, press the Exit button and the
icon will appear on the screen. This function is for

moving the image.
To zoom the selected reference image in ABC-ROI 3D Mode,

Image Zoom adjust the Zoom value on the touch screen. Use the up-down
switch below Zoom to adjust the value.
Auto Contour (ACT) Function

This function locates the fetal face area automatically in a fetus image scanned in Sagital
plane. In the ROI box on A Plane, a contour line appears and a 3D image is contoured.
Press ACT Edit button to edit the contour line. Adjust it with the Set button on the control
panel and the Trackball.
Except in the 3D Convex probe, a contour line appears as a straight

line.
NOTE
This function is available only in Static 3D Mode where Render
Direction is ‘C+’.
[Figure 4.32 Static 3D – ACT]
Live 3D View Mode

For more detailed viewing of Live 3D images, the modes are divided according to rendering
methods.
[Figure 4.33 Live 3D – 2D-3D Mode]
Menu Description
Plane of the image and Live 3D image can be examined.

In 2D-3D Mode, adjust the ROI box to view a desired 3D
image. The selected reference image is displayed in 2D
2D-3D Mode Selection image.
NOTE For information on other menu items, refer to “Static 3D View.”
* 3D Coordinate System
- Multi-planar Standard Coordinate Systems
A Standard Coordinate System B Standard Coordinate System
C Standard Coordinate System 3D Standard Coordinate System
- Full Mode Coordinate System
- Reference Image Coordinate System

▌ Cine Mode
3D Cine Mode
This mode provides Cine function for examining the rendered 3D image. Press the Cine
button on the touch screen. The menu illustrated below will appear and the 3D Cine Mode
will start.
[Figure 4.34 3D Cine Mode]
- Cine Settings: Before viewing images by Cine, make appropriate settings for viewing
images on the touch screen.
Menu Description
Rotation Angle Set ranges for 3D Cine rotation.

Selected Rotation Angle rotates by the Step Angle value. If the Step
Step Angle Angle is set to 15°, the 3D Cine set to 360° rotates in 25 steps, and the
3D Cine set to 90° rotates in 7 steps.
Rotation Axis Select the rotation axis for 3D Cine.
Start, End Angle Set the start and end angle values for the rotation range.
Zoom the 3D Cine image by 25% - 400%. Use the up-down switch below
Zoom
the touch screen to adjust the value.
Mix Use the up-down switch below the touch screen to adjust the Mix value.
- Running Cine: Press the Calculate button on the touch screen to run 3D Cine. The
Cine image generation process will be displayed on the screen and then 3D Cine will
start. The menu below will appear on the touch screen. Press the button to
stop or start 3D Cine.
[Figure 4.35 3D Cine]
Menu Description
While 3D Cine is in use, press the New Cine button to acquire a new
New Cine
Cine image.
Select the button to continuously rotate in one direction, or

Rotate
select the button to rotate in one direction and then rotate in
the opposite direction.
Adjust the Speed value to adjust the rotation speed of the 3D Cine image.
Speed
Use the up-down switch below Speed.
Adjust the Cine Frame value on the touch screen to view the 3D Cine
Cine Frame
image by each desired frame.
Adjust the Zoom value on the touch screen to zoom the image. Turn the
Zoom
knob-button below Zoom to adjust the value.
Adjust the MIX value below the touch screen to adjust the mix of Render
Mix
Mode. Use the knob-button below MIX.
Live 3D Cine Mode

Live 3D Mode provides the Cine function for saving or viewing the recently scanned 3D
images. Up to 128 Live 3D images can be saved.
- Running Cine: While scanning Live 3D image, press the Freeze button or the Exit
button on the control panel to start Live 3D Cine Mode. Or, press the Tools button on
the touch screen to move to the Tool menu and select the Live Cine button.
When Live 3D Cine starts, the menu below will appear on the touch screen.
Press the button to stop or start Live 3D Cine.

[Figure 4.36 Live 3D Cine]
Menu Description
While 3D Cine is in use, press the Freeze button to acquire a new Cine
New Cine
image.
When saving Live Cine images, you can specify the save range for Cine
images in the same way as in 2D Mode.
Adjust the First Frame and the Last Frame values on the touch screen to
adjust the Cine image save range. The progress bar indicating the save
Save range will appear on the screen. Use the up-down switches below the menus
to adjust the menus.
After selecting the save range, press the Save button on the control panel.
When the Save Volume screen appears on the touch screen, select the
Save button to save Live Cine image.
NOTE For information on other menu items, refer to “3D Cine Mode.”
▌ VOCAL (Virtual Organ Computer Aided anaLysis) Mode
Select the VOCAL button on the touch screen to start VOCAL Mode. VOCAL is a very
useful tool for measuring volumes of tissues within the human body.
[Figure 4.37 VOCAL Mode]
Setting Reference Image

A reference image must be set up in order to obtain the volume of a desired object. Press a
button on the touch screen to specify which plane should be used for contouring.
Note that contouring is done as the image rotates by the vertical axis in A Plane and B
Plane and as the image rotates by the horizontal axis in C Plane.
Setting VOCAL Parameter (Rotation Step)

You can set the step angle for image rotation. Available ranges are 12°, 18° and 30°. Press
the corresponding button on the touch screen to select the range.
15 contour images are generated for 12°, 10 images for 18°, and 6 images for 30°. The
default rotation angle is 30°.
Setting Range
Adjust the Pole1 and Pole2 values on the touch screen to set the contour range. Use the
knob-buttons below Pole1 and Pole2 to set the position of the arrow. Turn the knob-button
to position the arrow at the vertical or horizontal edge of the object to measure.
VOCAL Automatic Start

Select Contour Type on the touch screen to automatically generate the object for acquiring
volume value.
Menu Description
Solid Type Press the Solid button to contour when there are many echoes within the object.
Cystic Type Press the Cystic button to contour when there are few echoes within the object.
Prostate Type Press the Prostate button to contour when using prostate-related objects.
Press the General button to contour according to characteristics of general
General Type objects. General Type is faster than other automatic Contour Types but is slightly
less accurate.
Press the Sphere button to automatically generate a basic spheric object. After
Sphere Type making the spheric object, modify the contour image to make it into a desired
shape.
VOCAL Manual Start (Manual Type)

Press the Manual button on the touch screen and you can manually contour frame by
frame. The menu below will appear on the touch screen when you press the Manual button.
[Figure 4.38 VOCAL Mode – Manual Type]
1. Move the Trackball while holding down the Set button to determine the shape of the
object. After determining the shape of the object, press the Set button again to
complete frame generation.
2. Press the ▶ button or press the number button on the touch screen to move to the
next frame and determine the shape of the object.
3. To determine the shape of the object again, press the ◀ button or press the number
button on the touch screen to move to the previous frame.
4. Use the up-down switch below Ref. Slice to move to different frames.
5. To cancel contour, press the Cancel button on the touch screen.
6. Repeat the steps above to contour all the frames and then press the Done button.
Edit Contour
When contour is complete, the system switches to Edit Contour Mode. In this mode, use the
up-down switch below Ref. Slice to select contour obtained in the previous step.
[Figure 4.39 VOCAL Mode – Edit Contour]
- Shell Mode
Menu Description
Off Shell Thickness is not applied.

Shell is drawn inside the contour generated by Shell Thickness
Inside
specified.
Shell is drawn outside the contour generated by Shell Thickness
Outside
specified.
Half the shell is drawn inside the contour by half the Shell
Symmetric Thickness specified and the other half of the shell is drawn
outside the contour by half the Shell Thickness specified.
- Ref. Slice
Use the up-down switch below the touch screen to move to different frames and re-
contour the object.
- Zoom
Use the up-down switch below Zoom to adjust the value for zooming image.
- Shell Thickness
Adjust the Thickness value to set the thickness of the shell. Use the up-down switch
below Thickness to adjust the value. Note that the value cannot be adjusted when
Shell Mode is OFF.
- Multi-Edit View
Draw a line to edit up to 6 slices at a time.
[Figure 4.40 Multi Edit View]

1. Select a slice to edit.
2. Change the position of pole points.
Every slice in the screen has two pole points indicated with red dots at the same
positions as each other. Use the Pole 1 and Pole 2 knob-buttons on the touch
screen. Changing the position of a pole point simultaneously changes the
position of the pole points in all slices.
3. Edit a contour line.
A contour line is shown in yellow. Use the Set button and the trackball to edit the
left or right portion around a notional vertical line connecting pole points 1 and 2.
Here, you may not edit it so that it crosses the notional vertical line connecting
pole points 1 and 2. A contour line being edited is shown in red.
4. Press Ok on the touch screen to finish editing. The changes are applied and
The Slice buttons activated on the touch screen vary depending on the
number of slices. The number of slices is determined based on the slice
angle. For example, when 6 slices have been created through a 30˚
rotation, only slice buttons 1–6 are activated. However, For example,
NOTE when 15 slices have been created through a 12˚ rotation, slice buttons
1–6, 7-12 and 13-15 are activated.
When Multi-Edit View is in use, Zoom and Rotation functions are not
available.
- Clear Contour
Press the Clear Contour button to cancel the currently set contour, exit VOCAL Mode
and return to 3D View Mode.
- New Contour
Press the New Contour button to cancel the currently set contour, return to the
VOCAL Mode screen and generate new contour.
- Accept Contour
Press the Accept Contour button to apply the contour specified.
- Result Display
Volume information will be displayed at the lower right-hand corner of the monitor and
Menu Description
Shell Volume size Outside Shell Volume – Inside Shell Volume

Reference Volume size Volume size of the generated object using the initial contour.
Inside Volume size Volume size inside the generated object when Shell Mode is Inside.
Outside Volume size Volume size outside the generated object when Shell Mode is Outside.
VOCAL – Volume CT Mode

After generating the VOCAL object, press the Volume CT button in VOCAL Mode to insert
the A, B, and C Plane images in the VOCAL object for examination.
[Figure 4.40 VOCAL – Volume CT]
VOCAL – Volume CT View Mode Settings

Adjust the Niche menu on the touch screen to set up View
Mode for Volume CT. There are eight (1-8) Volume CT
View Modes, each of which shows one-eighth of the
VOCAL object.
The eighth View Mode is not shown in the illustration above
because it is located at the back.
* VOCAL object has been removed from the illustration
above for demonstration purposes.
VOCAL – Volume CT Operation

VOCAL – Volume CT Mode allows object rotation and axis movement.
- Object Rotation: Object rotation involves VOCAL rotation and Volume CT rotation.
VOCAL rotation is rotating the VOCAL object along with the Volume data with the
center of the VOCAL object as the rotation axis. Volume CT rotation is rotating only
the VOCAL object but not A, B, or C planes. To perform the Volume CT rotation
function, hold down the Change button on the control panel for a few seconds. When
the mouse pointer appears on the screen, use the Trackball and the Set button to
rotate the object.
- Axis Movement: Turn the C knob-button on the control panel to move the rotation
axis for the selected reference image. For example, if the A button is selected in the
reference image, the central axis moves toward the depth direction of A plane.
VOCAL Histogram
VOCAL Histogram shows distribution of the gray value of the black and white image within
the VOCAL object and the gray value of the Power Doppler image, and the relevant MG
(Mean Gray), VI (Vascularization Index), FI (Flow Index), and VFI (Vascularization-Flow
Index).
VOCAL Histogram is only available for 3D images and Power Doppler 3D images that are
in black and white.
Equations used are as follows.
- MG: average value of gray voxel brightness (gray)
= total brightness (gray) / all voxel number
- VI: ratio of color voxels against all voxels within the shell
= color voxel number / all voxel number
- FI: average value of brightness (color) for color voxels within the shell
= total brightness (color) / color voxel number
- VFI: average value of brightness (color) for all voxels within the shell
= total brightness (color) / all voxel number
VOCAL ABC-3D Mode

After accepting the contour in VOCAL Mode, press the ABC-3D button on the touch
screen to view images in VOCAL ABC-3D Mode.
ABC-3D in VOCAL Mode cuts out the contoured surface images and reconstructs a 3D
image based on them. 3D image is displayed in the position of the contour image shown
on A plane. This mode allows viewing of organs in their actual images. In particular,
SeeThru Mode is useful for clinical purposes as it provides color position and distribution
of organs.
▌ 3D Measure
In 3D View Mode, you can press the Measure button on the control panel to perform 3D
Measure functions (Caliper, Slice, and Calculation).
Since 3D Measure involves measurements on 3D images that are constructed with 2D
images, measurement menu items supported by M Mode or Spectral Doppler Mode are not
available here. Also, measurements that require multiple images such as the AFI menu
under OB measurement are not available.
3D Measure has an error rate of 5% in addition to the measurement error rate in 2D Mode.
Press the Close button on the touch screen to exit the 3D Measure function. You can also
exit by pressing the Measure button or the Exit button on the control panel.
Caliper 3D / Calc 3D
Caliper 3D and Calc 3D measurement menus are identical to 2D Mode and use the same
measurement methods in 2D Mode. For detailed information on measurement methods,
refer to “Basic Measurements” and “Application Measurements” sections in this manual.
[Figure 4.41 3D Measure – Caliper 3D]
[Figure 4.42 3D Measure – Calc 3D]

Slice 3D
Press the Slice 3D button on the touch screen and the menu below will appear on the touch
screen.
[Figure 4.43 3D Measure – Slice 3D]
Slice 3D slices a single Volume into multiple planes and measures them.
Under Select Plane, select a measure plane to measure and use the knob-button below
Slice Move to move to the slice image to measure.
Use the trace method to measure. To cancel a part of the measuring line while tracing,
press the Delete button or turn the knob-button below Trace Back. Press the Clear button
on the touch screen to delete the measurement result.
If measuring multiple slice images, the measured slices are displayed on the bar on the
touch screen. To move to different slice images, use the Previous button and the Next
button, or use the up-down switch below Previous/Next.
To return to the initial image before measuring, select the Initial button on the touch screen.
Trace Back
To delete a part of the measuring line while using Trace, use the Trace Back function. Turn
the knob-button below Trace Back left or right to delete the Trace measuring line.
Trackball Speed
The Trackball Speed function adjusts the speed of the Trackball on the control panel.
Turn the knob-button below Trackball Speed to select Slow, Normal or Fast.
▌ 3D Notation
Text Input
Press the Text button on the control panel to input texts on the screen. The Text Brief
function is not supported.
Press the Clear button on the control panel or on the touch screen to clear all texts on the
screen.
Indicator Input
Press the Indicator button on the control panel to input indicators on the screen. Use the
Set button and the Trackball to place indicators.
Press the Clear button on the control panel or on the touch screen to clear all indicators.
Press the Undo button on the touch screen to delete indicators one by one in the order they
are placed.
Indicators in Live 3D View and Live 3D XI™ can be moved within the screen only.
[Figure 4.44 3D Notation]
Optimizing 3D Images
To set the image parameters in View Mode, select the Tools button on the touch screen. The
screen below will appear on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.45 Tool Menu]

▌ Image Setting
Press the Image Setting button on the touch screen to set the Gamma value and Chroma
Map for images. Used Chroma Map preset values can be saved in Preset.
[Figure 4.46 Tool Menu – Image Setting (2D & Color)]
Select the 2D button on the touch screen to set the Gamma value, etc. for 2D images.
Select the 3D button to make settings for 3D images.
Adjusting Post Curve

To adjust Post Curve, adjust the Pos value and the Bias value at the bottom of the touch
screen. Use the knob-buttons below Pos and Bias.
Setting Palette
Select a desired color button on the touch screen.
Setting Transparency
Adjust the Transparency value to adjust the transparency of 3D images. Use the up-down
switch below Transparency on the touch screen. The value range is from 20 to 250.
The lowest Transparency value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest
Transparency value (250) is for complete opacity. The default Transparency value is 100.
Setting Preset
Use this function to set up Post Curve, Palette, current Threshold value, and other
parameters for the current image and save them as user preset values.
Select a button from User 1 through User 5 and press the Save button to save the user
preset values under the selected button.
[Figure 4.48 Tool Menu – Image Setting (Preset)]
▌ Setting Render Mode

Press the Render Mode button on the touch screen to set Render Mode. The last used
Render Mode preset values are automatically saved.
Render Mode includes four modes: Gray, Color, SeeThru and VOCAL.
Gray Render Mode

This mode shows volume data acquired by gray method as a 3D rendering image.
Rendering values can be set for Mode1 and Mode2. A total of 11 combinations are
available.
Menu Description
Surface Mode This is the default mode. It displays a 3D image by ray-casting.
Surface Smooth This is similar to the default mode. It displays a 3D image by ray-casting
Mode softer than Surface Mode.
This mode displays the maximum value of intensity. This is useful for
Max Mode
viewing bones within the body.
This mode displays the minimum value of intensity. This is useful for
Min Mode
viewing vessels and hollow parts within the body.
Light Mode This mode displays the depth information of 3D image by brightness.
This mode displays the average value of intensity. It has the same effect as
X-Ray Mode
X-ray images.
[Figure 4.49 Tool Menu – Render Mode (Gray)]

Color Render Mode
This mode shows volume data acquired by Angio/CFM method as a 3D rendering image. It
supports three combinations: Surface-Light, Surface-Max, and Surface-X-Ray.
The modes are accessed in the same way as Gray Render Mode.
[Figure 4.50 Tool Menu – Render Mode (Color)]

SeeThru Render Mode

This mode shows Gray + Angio or Gray + CFM combination of data as a 3D rendering
image. It supports four combinations: Transp-Surface, Transp-Transp, Max-Surface, and
Max-Transp. When you survey color data, the system runs SeeThru Render mode as
default.
[Figure 4.51 Tool Menu – Render Mode (SeeThru)]
Menu Description
View the color data within the gray data while adjusting the transparency of
Transp+Surface
the gray data (use the MIX knob-button). Parts hidden by the gray data may
Combination
appear slightly darker.
Transp+Transp
the gray data and the color data (use the MIX knob-button). Parts hidden
Combination
by the gray data may appear slightly darker.
View the color data according to the MIX ratio of the gray data in Max Mode
Max+Surface
and the color data from Surface Mode (use the MIX knob-button). Parts
Combination
hidden by the gray data may appear slightly brighter.
Max+Transp
and the color data from Transp Mode (use the MIX knob-button). Parts
Combination
VOCAL Render Mode

You can set the color of the object shown in VOCAL Mode. Select desired colors for
Surface and Wire.
[Figure 4.52 Tool Menu – Render Mode (VOCAL)]
Adjusting Rendering Mode Mix

Adjust the Mix value below the touch screen to adjust the mix of Render Mode. Use the
knob-button below MIX.
Adjusting Threshold (Low, High)

Adjust the Th.Low and Th.High values at the bottom of the touch screen to adjust the
Threshold values. Use the knob-buttons or the up-down switches below the menus.
Adjust the Th.Low value and the Th.High value to hide information below and above the
values from the 3D image. Only the information between the Th.Low value and the Th.High
value is shown as the 3D image.
Image Zoom
To zoom the image, adjust the Zoom value at the bottom of the touch screen. Use the up-
down switch below Zoom.
▌ MagiCut Mode
This function cuts out a desired portion from the entire image for viewing. Press the
MagiCut button on the touch screen.
Setting Cut Mode

Select the Cut Mode type on the touch screen.
- Inside Contour: Cuts the inside of the selected area.
- Outside Contour: Cuts the outside of the selected area.
- Inside Box: Cuts the inside of the box.
- Outside Box: Cuts the outside of the box.

- Small Eraser: Cuts using a small eraser.
- Big Eraser: Cuts using a big eraser.
[Figure 4.53 Tool Menu – MagiCut]

Setting Cutting Area
To set the cutting area in MagiCut Mode, use the Trackball and the Set button on the
control panel.
You may also cut the image by adjusting the depth of the cutting area. Select the Full
button on the touch screen delete the entire area selected, or select the Defined button to
delete by the value specified. Press the Define button and the Cut Depth menu will appear.
Use the knob-button below Cut Depth to specify the depth for the area to delete.
Canceling MagiCut
To restore the cut area from the full image, select the Undo button on the touch screen.
Press the Undo button to restore the last cut area. Press the Undo All button to restore the
entire image.
After restoring the image by pressing the Undo button or the Undo All button, select the
Redo button to cut the same area again.
▌ Render Direction Settings

To change the camera position for viewing 3D images, select the Render Direction button
Standard coordinate systems change according to the changes in position (refer to the
section on changing reference image).
[Figure 4.54 Tool Menu – Render Direction]

A＋: Moves to the direction currently looking at A plane.
A－: Moves to the back of the direction currently looking at A plane.
B＋: Moves to the direction currently looking at B plane.

B－: Moves to the back of the direction currently looking at B plane.
C＋: Moves to the direction currently looking at C plane.

C－: Moves to the back of the direction currently looking at C plane.
▌ Image Store
Pressing the Image Store button on the touch screen saves the 3D image on the system.
The last saved image can be sent by using the E-Mail function.
Saving Images
Press the Save button on the control panel to save 3D images in View Mode. Saved
images are managed by SonoView.
[Figure 4.55 Tool Menu – Image Store]

Menu Description
Saves 3D image including volume data. If volume data and

Save Cine images are saved together, new 3D rendering images and
Cine/Live images can be reproduced at a later time.
Image Only Saves only the image displayed on the screen.
This is available when 3D Cine images are generated. Select the
Include Cine button and press the Save button to save Cine images
Include Cine
and volume data. If the Include Cine button is not selected, only the
volume data is saved.
This is available when Live 3D Cine images are generated. The
Include Live Cine
function is the same as Include Cine.
Coordinate systems for 3D data saved in this system are
Save Volume Format different from coordinate systems for 3D data used in CT or
- Default MRI. Save by selecting the Default button if you plan to use the
data in SonoView only.
Save the 3D image by selecting the Cartesian button if you
plan to use it in other 3D programs such as CT or MRI. If the
Save Volume Format Cartesian format is selected only the A plane image is saved.
- Cartesian Because data format cannot be verified in SonoView, you must
indicate the format in the save name when saving a SonoView
image.
When saving Live 3D Cine images, you can specify the save
Setting Save Range range for Cine images in the same way as in 2D Mode. Refer to
“Live 3D Cine Mode.”
Printing Image
Press the Echo Print button on the control panel to print 3D images in View Mode.
3D XI™ Mode
Procedures for acquiring images in 3D XI™ is the same for Static 3D images.
Press the 3D XI button on the touch screen to switch to 3D XI™, or press the 3D button to scan
and then press the 3D XI button at the 3D View screen to switch to 3D XI™.
3D XI™ supports three modes: Multi Slice View, Volume CT, and Oblique View.
[Figure 4.56 3D Acquisition – 3D XI™]
In Live 3D XI™, press the Live 3D button and the 3D XI button simultaneously to acquire image.
Live 3D XI™ provides Multi Slice View Mode only.
[Figure 4.57 3D Acquisition – Live 3D XI™]

▌ Multi Slice View

This function enhances usefulness of examination by using neighboring multi slice images.
To use the functions related to Multi Slice View, press the Multi Slice View button on the
touch screen and use the menu displayed.
[Figure 4.58 Multi Slice View]

Init: Resets all settings for Multi Slice View.
Display Layout (1×1, 2×1, 3×2, 4×3, 6×4)

This function sets the display layout. You can select one from the five layouts. 1 x 1
supports large image size but does not show slice images. 6 x 4 has small images but
supports slice images. The default display layout is 3 x 2.
Each time a new layout is selected, the currently selected image moves to the first position
on the screen.
Ref. Image (A/B/C Plane)

Shows the selected reference image in Multi Slice View.
Rot. Z (0/90/180/270)
To rotate Multi Slice image, press the button for the desired rotation value. Here, the
coordinate system rotate by the Z-axis in the “3D standard coordinate system.”
Each time the mode changes or the reference plane changes, the current Rot. Z is reset to
0.

Like the OH function in 3D view, this function shows the relative position of the currently
selected slice image in volume data for Multi Slice View images.
Press the OH button on the touch screen to activate or deactivate it.
- Reference Plane: Shows the relative position of the slices displayed in other sections.
In this image, a scout marker appears indicating the position of each slice image.
- Pressing the Set button on the control panel zooms the selected slice image to the 1 X
1 layout to enable more detailed observation.
[Figure 4.59 Multi Slice View – OH]
Rotation
Turn the X, Y, and Z knob-buttons to freely rotate the Multi Slice image. When the selected
reference image is rotated, the results are reflected in all planes.
Translation
Move the Multi Slice image to a new position. Use the Change button on the control panel
and the Trackball to move the image. The image moves along the X-axis and the Y-axis.
Zoom (x1.0 ~ x4.0)

The Multi Slice image can be zoomed by 4 times. Use the knob-button below Zoom on the
Image Index
Shows the index of the currently selected image. The selected image is highlighted with
yellow borders. Use the knob-button below Image Index on the touch screen or the
Trackball to select an image. If the image index is outside the range of the current page,
the screen moves to the previous or next index as the page index changes accordingly.
Magnification
Press the Set button at the selected image index to magnify the selected image as in the 1
x 1 layout. Press the Exit button to return to the original layout. Here, the position of Image
Index is restored to the previously selected position. Images are not saved in the
Magnification state.
Page Index
Shows the range of the current page index according to the display layout. Use the up-
down switch below Page Index on the touch screen to adjust the value.
Cut Depth
Set the gap between Multi Slice images. The gap between Slice images can be set by the
user. It is marked as an internal calculation value by default. The unit is mm. Use the up-
down switch below Cut Depth on the touch screen to adjust the value.
Here, Cut Depth indicates the gap between the slices for the volume data. It does not refer
to the actual anatomical position of the scanned objects.
Post Processing
This function is responsible for post-processing Multi Slice images. You can produce
various images using this function. Post-processed images are not applied in Volume CT.
The table below lists the functions provided. Each function can be repeated or used in
combination with other functions. Note that only the Flip Image function may be repeated in
the color display area (image acquired in 3D/C or 3D/PD Mode).
[그림 4.60 Multi Slice View – Post Processing]
Menu Description
Invert Inverts the brightness of Multi Slice images.
Automatically adjusts the brightness of Multi Slice images. This function

calculates the histogram of the image and stretches the contrast
Auto Contrast
distribution. The change may be marginal if the image already has well-
spread contrast.
Eliminates noises and enhances image quality by compounding images.

Compound
Set the distance between images to be used for 3D CI by using 3D CI
Imaging (3D CI)
Offset on the touch screen.
Sets the Gamma value for the image. Use the knob-buttons below Pos
Image Setting and Bias to adjust Post Curve. The Gamma value and Chroma map are
reset if a new scan is performed or Multi Slice View is reset.
Sharpens the boundary of Multi Slice images. Higher the preset value,
clearer the boundary becomes. Use the knob-button below Sharpen on
the touch screen to make adjustments. When the function overlaps with
the Th.Low and Th.High functions, you can press the knob-buttons to
change the control state.
Operation by Button State:
Sharpen
When button is not pressed: The Sharpen value is not applied on the
image.
When button is pressed and check mark is present: The Sharpen value is
applied, and the value can be adjusted by the knob-button.
When button is pressed and check mark is not present: The Sharpen
value is applied, and the value cannot be adjusted by the knob-button.
Set the threshold for Multi Slice images. This removes the brightness of
levels that are not wanted in images. Use the knob-buttons below Th.Low
and Th.High on the touch screen to make adjustments. When the
Th.Low / Th.High
function overlaps with the Sharpen function, you can press the knob-
buttons to change the control state. Button controls are the same as
Sharpen.
Set the brightness of Multi Slice images. You may select

up/down/left/right or none for Gradient Mask. Bright areas on buttons
Gradient Mask
represent image areas that will be processed as bright and dark areas on
Image
buttons represent image areas that will be processed as dark. Button
selection determines the image brightness adjustment.
Flip Image Flips the position of Multi Slice images vertically or horizontally.
Setting Preset
XI MR
This function improves the image quality by stressing the contrast and edges of Multi Slice
images. The function is applied only to the selected images with yellow borders.
Measurement
Like 3D Measure in 3D View, simple measurements can be performed in Multi Slice View.
Refer to the section on “3D Measure.” (The volume value can be measured using 1
Distance.)
This function is not available in Volume CT and Oblique of 3D XI™ Mode, and the Slice
3D function remains inactive.
[Figure 4.61 3D Measure]
Notation
Like 3D Notation in 3D View, texts and indicators can be entered 3D XI™ also. For more
information, refer to the section on “3D Notation.”
▌ Volume CT
This function provides relational view of surface images by expressing coronal, sagital and
axial images in appropriate positions in the 3D space. Volume CT supports two modes:
Cube Volume CT and Cross Volume CT. Press the Volume CT button on the touch screen.
Cube Volume CT
Provides information of external surface images neighboring the cube.
[Figure 4.62 Cube Volume CT]

Menu Description
Shows the selected surface according to the position of the image

selected in Multi Slice View. If the position is close to the front/top/left
direction of the volume, the image is shown in the same direction as the
multi slice image because the image is shown from the selected position.
If the position is close to the back/bottom/right direction of the volume, the
Default Setting
image is then shown in the opposite direction as the multi slice image
because the image is shown from the selected position. The position of
the selected slice is shown with the image slightly slanting. This is for
showing other plane images simultaneously when looking at them from
different directions.
Ref. Surface Sets Reference Surface. You can select any of the six surfaces.
When the user selects one of the six surfaces as the desired view
View Direction
direction, the selected surface is placed toward the front.
Moves the offset position of the selected Reference Surface. Use the
Ref. Surface
knob-button below Surface Offset on the touch screen to make
Offset
adjustments.
Use the X/Y/Z knob-button on the control panel to rotate Cube Volume CT
Rotation
image by the X/Y/X-axis.
Zooms in/out the Cube Volume CT image. Use the knob-button below
Zoom
Zoom on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Sets or clears the additional boundary lines for Cube Volume CT.
Boundary
Additional boundary lines indicate the external area for the entire volume.
Cross Volume CT
Provides information of images inside the planes crossing over each other.
[Figure 4.63 Cross Volume CT]

Menu Description
Ref. Plane Sets Reference Plane.

Moves Reference Plane. Use the knob-button below Plane Offset on the
Ref. Plane Offset
Use the X/Y/Z knob-button on the control panel to rotate Cross Volume
Rotation
CT image by the X/Y/X-axis.
Zooms in/out the Cross Volume CT image. Use the knob-button below
Zoom
Sets or clears the additional boundary line for Cross Volume CT.
Boundary
▌ Oblique View
Surface images can be viewed by applying line/contour on desired surfaces in anatomical
positions of coronal/sagital/axial images. Press the Oblique button on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.64 Oblique View]

Select Cut Type
Provides the following Cut Types:
i) Single Line: Applies a single line to an image for a surface view. A reference image and
a line are displayed on the left side of the screen and an oblique image for the line on
the right side of the screen.
Menu Description
Single Obtains information for a vertical surface image using the default line. Use
Static Line the knob-button below Line Rotation on the touch screen to rotate the
default line.
Obtains information for a vertical surface image by editing a line. Press the
Single Dynamic Line button and then use the trackball and the Set button
Single to specify a start point. Then, draw a line and press the Set button again to
Dynamic Line specify an end point. A surface image perpendicular to the line will be shown.
Use the knob-button below Line Rotation on the touch screen to rotate the
line and press the Change button on the control panel to move it.
Obtains information for a vertical surface image by editing a contour. Press

the Single Contour button and then use the trackball and the Set button to
Single specify a start point. Then draw a contour and press the Set button again to
Contour (Edit) specify an end point. A surface image perpendicular to the contour will be
shown. Because there is a restriction on the volume of data with contours, a
surface image cannot be viewed if the volume of data has exceeded its limit.
ii) Multi Line: Applies up to 5 lines to a reference image for a surface view. Lines are shown in
different colors for easier identification.
A reference image is shown at the upper left-hand corner of the screen, containing all lines.
The oblique image of a line is shown by color in the screen. However, If the reference ima
ge is changed, all of the existing lines will disappear.
Menu Description
Applies five lines to a reference image and displays an oblique image for
these. Press the Multi Dynamic Line button and then use the trackball and
Multi
the Set button to draw a line. Then a surface image perpendicular to the line
Dynamic Line
will appear separated with line colours. Five dynamic lines can be drawn.
Use the Rotation knob-button to rotate a line.
Applies five random contour lines to a reference image and displays an

Multi oblique image for these. Press the Multi Contour button and then use the
Contour trackball and the Set button to draw a curve. Then an oblique image will
appear separated with curve colours. Five curves can be drawn.
Applies lines parallel with a random line to a reference image and displays
an oblique image for these. Press the Multi Parallel button and then use the
trackball and the Set button to draw a reference line. Then a parallel line will
Multi
be drawn automatically. An oblique image for each line is displayed. Use the
Parallel
Line Rotation knob-button to rotate a reference line. The changes are
applied to all parallel lines. Use the Line Offset knob-button to adjust the
spacing between parallel lines.
Applies lines perpendicular to a random dynamic line to a reference image

and displays oblique image for these. Press the Multi Plumb button and
then use the trackball and the Set button to draw a reference line. Then a
Multi
perpendicular line will be drawn automatically. An oblique image for each line
Plumb
is displayed. Use the Line Rotation knob-button to rotate a reference line.
The changes are applied to all perpendicular lines. Use the Line Offset
knob-button to adjust the spacing between perpendicular lines.
View direction of Vertical Surface Image

As illustrated below, the view direction is perpendicular to the cutting direction of the volume
data.
[Figure 4.23 3D View]
▌ 3D DMR
In 3D, Live 3D or 3D XI Mode, you can apply Dynamic MR to enhance images.
3D DMR in 3D / Live 3D Modes
[Figure 4.65 3D DMR in 3D / Live 3D Modes]

1. Press the Tools button on the touch screen. The Tool Menu screen will
appear.
2. Press Dynamic MR.

3. With the 3D DMR switch at the bottom of the touch screen, set the DMR type
to DMR 1-4. The DMR type set is immediately applied.
3D DMR in 3D XI™ Mode
[Figure 4.66 3D DMR in 3D XI™ Mode]

1. In the Multi Slice View screen on the touch screen, press 3D DMR. Dynamic
MR is applied.
2. Press Post Processing to change the DMR type. The Post Processing
screen will appear.
to DMR 1-4. Press Exit to complete the changes.
Because Dynamic MR is optional, it becomes available only when a

dongle for Dynamic MR is attached.
When the dongle is not attached, the 3D DMR button on the touch
screen is shown as XI MR in 3D XI Mode and does the same job as
NOTE
XI MR in Post Processing.
If an image is saved after Dynamic MR is applied and it is viewed
without the dongle attached, it appears without the effect of Dynamic
MR.
▌ XI VOCAL
Unlike in VOCAL, which uses the rotation surface method, XI VOCAL slices an object using
a parallel surface method to calculate its volume. Press XI VOCAL on the touch screen for
3D XI.
[Figure 4.67 XI VOCAL]
The reference image specified in Multi Slice View appears in the screen. When the Rotation
or Zoom function has been used with the reference image in Multi Slice View, the effects
still remains with the reference image for XI VOCAL.
Perform XI VOCAL by following the steps below. In each step, pressing Exit on the touch
screen aborts XI VOCAL and returns to Multi Slice View for 3D XI.
1. Select an image to use as a reference on the touch screen.

2. Specify Start and End Lines. Use the Set button and the trackball on the control panel.
The distance between two lines along with Start and End Planes are displayed in the
screen. Once the lines are specified, press Done.
3. A message appears on the touch screen, asking whether to contour the reference
image. Press Done to proceed.
4. Specify Contour Type. Solid, Cystic and General allows you to retrieve a contour
automatically and Manual allows you to retrieve a contour manually. For more
information, refer to ‘VOCAL.'
5. Specify the number of images to contour. Press Make to move to the next step.
6. Specify the position of Seed Point in the screen.
– When automatic contour retrieval is selected, two Pole Points appear in different
positions in all slices and the contour of an object is retrieved based on them.
The position of the Pole Points for each slice can be moved independently. To change
the position of Pole Points, use the Pole 1 and Pole 2 buttons or the Set button and
trackball on the control panel.
- When manual contour retrieval is selected, draw a contour line manually to retrieve a
contour. When finished, press Done.
7. Contour is executed. A progress bar appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating the
progress. Press Stop to finish contour and execute the same contour for the others.
8. When Contour is completed, you can press All Slice Show to review the completed
slices. To edit a contour, press Edit Contour and use the Set button and the trackball
on the control panel to edit a contour line.
Press Exit to finish XI VOCAL. To create a new contour, press New Contour and repeat the
above steps.
▌ Live 3D XI™ Mode

Live 3D XI™ supports Multi Slice View only.
Procedures for running Multi Slice View for Live 3D XI™ are the same as running Multi
Slice View for 3D XI™.
[Figure 4.68 Live 3D XI™ - Multi Slice View]
XI STIC Mode (Optional)

STIC stands for Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation. It calculates a heartbeat cycle with the
volume data for a fetal cardiac area, and reconstructs and displays the volume data.
STC is divided into regular STIC and XI STIC depending on whether 3D XI™ is used.
XI STIC Mode is available only with a 3D Probe.
XI STIC Mode is available in 3D Color Doppler mode and 3D Power
NOTE
Doppler mode.
XI STIC Mode is not available in Live 3D Mode.
1. In Image Scan Mode, press 3D and XI STIC. To access in 3D XI Mode, press 3D, 3D
XI and XI STIC.
2. Specify each menu on the touch screen.
- For settings in STIC Mode, refer to Live 3D.

- For settings in XI STIC Mode, refer to 3D XI.
3. Specify Scan Time, STIC Angle and Trimester.
- Scan Time: Specify the scan time between 7 – 20 seconds in 1 second increments.
- STIC Angle: Specify an angle between 15 - 60˚ in 5˚ increments.
- Trimester: Specify the pregnancy trimester to 1st, 2nd, 3rd or User Set. If it is set to 1st
- 3rd, the Scan Time and STIC Angle for that trimester are automatically set. Please
refer to the following table:
1st 2nd 3rd
Scan Time 10 sec. 12 sec. 15 sec.

STIC Angle 20˚ 25˚ 30˚
If Scan Time or STIC Angle is set out of the specified range, Trimester appears as
User Set.
4. Press the Freeze button on the control panel. The system begins to acquire the STIC
volume data.
5. The number of heartbeats for a fetus is calculated and displayed on the touch screen.
Press Yes to proceed. Press No to cancel and scan again.
When the number of heartbeats cannot be calculated due to severe

NOTE Motion Artifact or no heartbeat cycle, the system returns to the
Acquire STIC Volume Data screen.
6. Once volume data scan is completed, a STIC image appears. Adjust the image with
the touch screen.
- With STIC Speed, the image playback speed can be adjusted. Available options are
All CINE, 25%, 33%, 50% and 100%. If it is set to All CINE, all Volume CINE saved
are reviewed regardless of the speed. If it is set to a percentage, an image is played
at the speed of the specified percentage to the number of fetal heartbeats (100%).
7. Press the 3D/4D button on the control panel to finish. Press Exit to return to the
previous step.
※ Tip! To obtain good STIC volume data:
- STIC Angle: For smaller fetal hearts, specify a smaller Scan Angle.
- Scan Position: Make sure that the centers of the specified Scan Angle and the fetal
heart are aligned with each other.
- Volume Box: Adjust it to match the size of a fetal heart.
※ To obtain good Color STIC volume data:

- Control the fps at least 15 during scanning.
- Set the application with Fetal Heart.
- During Cine, control the gain for good color view.
▌ STIC
This is STIC Mode without 3D XI™. STIC information such as Image Angle, Vol.Angle,
Scan Time, Heart Rate and Cine are displayed in the right hand side of the screen.
The touch screen menus for STIC Mode can be used in the same way
NOTE
as in Live 3D View.
In STIC Mode, STIC Volume CINE performs tasks by default. Pressing the Yoyo button on
the touch screen changes the CINE play type from Loop to Yoyo.
Pressing the Freeze button on the touch screen stops CINE play and switches to Static 3D
Mode. In the Static 3D screen, you can use Vol.Index to move to the volume data for the
corresponding index. Pressing the Freeze button again returns to STIC Mode and enables
CINE play.
To run 3D View or 3D XI, or save a STIC image, press the corresponding button after
stopping CINE Play.
[Figure 4.69 STIC]

▌ XI STIC
This is STIC Mode with 3D XI™. The XI STIC logo appears at the lower right corner of the
screen.
The touch screen menus for XI STIC Mode can be used in the same way
NOTE
as in 3D XI Mode.
In XI STIC Mode, you can review slice images. However, features such as Volume CT, XI
VOCAL or 3D View are not available in this mode. Press the Freeze button on the touch
screen to switch to 3D XI Mode. In the 3D XI screen, you can use Vol.Index to move to the
volume data for the corresponding index. Pressing the Freeze button again returns to XI
STIC Mode.
To run 3D View or save a XI STIC image, press the corresponding button after switching to
3D XI Mode.
[Figure 4.70 XI STIC]

Chapter 4
Diagnosis Modes
DIAGNOSIS MODE TYPES AND CONTROL ................................................................ 3
DIAGNOSIS MODES.......................................................................................................................................................................................3
DIAGNOSIS MODE SCREENS AND IMAGE INFORMATION........................................................................................................................3
CHANGING DIAGNOSIS MODE FORMATS..................................................................................................................................................4
OPTIMIZING DIAGNOSIS MODE....................................................................................................................................................................5
BASIC MODES............................................................................................................... 7
2D MODE........................................................................................................................................................................................................7
M MODE........................................................................................................................................................................................................13
COLOR DOPPLER MODE ...........................................................................................................................................................................16
POWER DOPPLER MODE ..........................................................................................................................................................................19
PW (PULSE WAVE) SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE.................................................................................................................................21
CW (CONTINUOUS WAVE) SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE....................................................................................................................26
AUTOMATIC CALCULATOR.........................................................................................................................................................................28
COMBINED MODES .................................................................................................... 29

2D/C/PW MODE.........................................................................................................................................................................................29
2D/PD/PW MODE .....................................................................................................................................................................................29
2D/C/CW MODE ........................................................................................................................................................................................30
2D/PD/CW MODE.....................................................................................................................................................................................30
2D/C/M MODE ............................................................................................................................................................................................31
DUAL LIVE MODE.........................................................................................................................................................................................31
MULTI-IMAGE MODES................................................................................................ 32
DUAL-2D MODE..........................................................................................................................................................................................32
DUAL-2D/C MODE.....................................................................................................................................................................................32
DUAL-2D/PD MODE..................................................................................................................................................................................33
MULTI-DIMENSIONAL MODES ...................................................................................34

MULTI-DIMENSIONAL..................................................................................................................................................................................34
ACQUIRING 3D IMAGES..............................................................................................................................................................................35
3D VIEW .......................................................................................................................................................................................................37
OPTIMIZING 3D IMAGES .............................................................................................................................................................................55
3D XI™ MODE ...........................................................................................................................................................................................64
XI STIC MODE (OPTIONAL)......................................................................................................................................................................76

Diagnosis Mode Types and Control
Diagnosis Modes
This product supports a variety of diagnosis modes including Basic modes, Combined modes,
Multi-Image modes, and 3D modes.
Basic Modes: Include 2D Mode, Color Doppler Mode, Power Doppler Mode, M Mode,
PW Spectral Doppler Mode, and CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Combined Modes: These modes are Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler Mode
combined with M Mode, PW Spectral Doppler Mode, or CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Dual Live Mode, which features Color Doppler Mode and 2D Mode in single screen, is
also one of the Combined Modes.
Multi-Image Modes: In Dual Modes you can view two images side by side
simultaneously and compare them.
3D Modes: These modes provide 3D images.
Functionalities for each mode are restricted by the probes selected. For example, Freehand 3D
Mode supports all probes except for Static CW probe, and Volume 3D Mode supports 3D probe
only.
Diagnosis Mode Screens and Image Information

The following table shows the information appearing on different diagnosis mode screens.
2D M C PD PW 3D
Monitor Display
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
2D Image and Image Information ● ● ● ● ● ●
M Image and Image Information ●
Color Doppler Image and Image Information ●
Power Doppler Image and Image Information ●
Spectral Doppler Image and Image Information ●
M Line ●
D Line and Sample Volume ●
ROI (Region of Interest) Box ● ● ●
Title Bar ● ● ● ● ● ●
Depth Marker ● ● ● ● ● ●
Focusing Point & Number ● ● ● ● ● ●
Gray Scale Bar ● ● ● ● ● ●
Color Bar ● ●
TGC Curve ● ● ● ● ● ●
The following table shows the image information appearing for each mode. Note that image
information for 2D mode appears in all modes.
2D M C PD PW
Image Information
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
Gain ● ● ● ● ●
Dynamic Range ● ●
Frame Average ● ● ● ●
Power ● ●
PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) ● ● ●
Wall Filter ● ● ●
Sensitivity ● ●
Sample Volume Depth ●
Sample Volume Size ●
Angle ●
Image information and gray scale bar disappear from the screen by pressing Spacebar.
Changing Diagnosis Mode Formats

The following section explains how to change the display format that is common to all diagnosis
modes.
▌ Changing Active Image Mode

All diagnosis modes except for 2D mode provide two or more modes simultaneously. You
can press the button for each mode on the touch screen to select the active image mode
and control its menus.
▌ Changing Active Image in Multi-Image Modes

Use the Update button, the Set button and the Dual button on the control panel to change
the active image. For example, press the Update button, the Set button or the Dual button
in Dual-2D mode to freeze the image being scanned on the left-hand side of the screen and
show the image being scanned on the right.
▌ Freezing 2D Image in Spectral Doppler Mode

When the simultaneous function is turned on and 2D image and spectral Doppler image are
displayed real-time, you can freeze the 2D image to view more accurate spectral Doppler
image.
Press the Update button on the control panel to freeze the 2D image. Press the button
again to display the 2D image again.
If the simultaneous function is turned off, the current image mode is indicated as “PW Only”
or “2D Only” at the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
You can determine the use of simultaneous modes by setting “Simultaneous Mode” under
the Misc. tab on the Settings screen. If this option is set to “Off”, the Simultaneous button
on the PW Spectral Doppler menu remains inactive.
You can also freezing 2D image by the Update button in 2D/C/PW Mode, 2D/PD/PW Mode,
2D/C/CW Mode, 2D/PD/CW Mode, and 2D/C/M Mode.
▌ Image Depth Control

Use the Depth switch on the control panel. Raise the Depth switch to decrease view depth,
or lower the Depth switch to increase the view depth. Maximum depth and minimum depth
vary depending on the probe.
▌ Zooming Image
Use the Zoom switch on the control panel to zoom the image. Raise the Zoom switch and
the Zoom box will appear. Use the Change button and the Trackball to move and resize
the Zoom box. Repeatedly pressing the Change button toggles the “Zoom Pos.” and
“Zoom size” indication on the screen.
Zoom position: Press the Change button to make the HD Zoom box appear with solid
lines. Use the Trackball to move the box to any desired position.
Zoom size: Press the Change button to make the HD Zoom box appear with dotted
lines. Use the Trackball to resize the HD Zoom box.
Adjust the size and the position of the Zoom box and then press the Set button to zoom the
image. The Zoom Navigation box on the screen shows the relative position of the zoomed
area.
When using the Zoom function, press the Z button on the control panel to hide the Zoom
Navigation box and deactivate Zoom Position. Press the Z button again and the Zoom
Navigation box will appear.
Change Depth or press the Exit button on the control panel to cancel the image zoom.
Read Zoom
This function is for zooming the image saved in the memory. Note that this is not available
in Dual mode or Loop mode.
The RD Zoom menu appears on the touch screen when the image is frozen by pressing the
Freeze button or when adjusting the Zoom switch on the control panel.
Turn the knob-button below the RD Zoom menu to run the Read Zoom function and zoom
the image. When Read Zoom is activated, the Zoom switch will not work. (Write Zoom
cannot be activated.)
Optimizing Diagnosis Mode

The following are instructions for optimizing images in all diagnosis modes.
▌ Gain Control
Use the mode knob-button on the control panel to adjust the brightness of the image. Turn it
clockwise to increase Gain or turn it counter-clockwise to decrease Gain.
▌ Adjusting Post Gain

When the image is frozen by pressing the Freeze button on the control panel, you can
adjust the mode knob-button to adjust Gain. Turn it clockwise to increase Gain or turn it
counter-clockwise to decrease Gain.
Post Gain can be adjusted to any values between +10 and -10. The Post Gain value is
displayed on the screen in the format of “*PG:0.” The Gain value is restored to the value
before freezing when the image becomes active again.
▌ TGC Control
When ultrasound is transmitted through the human body, the lucency of ultrasound
weakens as it travels deeper into the body. TGC (Time Gain Compensation) can be used to
supplement this. For obtaining the best image quality, TGC is divided into 8 regions which
can be used to adjust Gain by different depths.
Move the TGC slide to the right (+) to increase Gain (brightening the image) or move the TGC
slide to the left (-) to decrease Gain (darkening the image).
▌ Harmonic Function
This product provides the OHI (Optimal Harmonic Imaging) function. In 2D mode, press the
HAR button on the control panel to activate the function.
▌ Focus Position Control

Use the Focus switch on the control panel to focus on specific regions for clearer view.
Raise the switch to move the focus position up and lower the switch to move the focus
position down.
▌ Focus Number Control

Press the Focus up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the number of focusing
points. Check on the screen as focusing points are added or removed.
▌ Frequency Change
Each probe provides a wide range of frequencies for obtaining images of best quality. Use
the Frequency up/down button on the touch screen to change the probe frequency.
This function is available for linear probes (L5-12IM, L6-12IS) only.
▌ Power Control
Power is the intensity of the acoustic output.
Use the up-down switch below Power on the touch screen to adjust the value.
Basic Modes
2D Mode
This basic mode, also referred to as B Mode (Brightness mode), provides scan planes of
organs.
[Figure 4.1 2D Mode]
▌ 2D Mode Selection
Since 2D mode is always turned on except for special cases, the 2D button does not
function as a toggle. In any diagnosis mode, just press the 2D button to switch to 2D mode
which is the basic diagnosis mode.
▌ 2D Menu
[Figure 4.2 2D Menu]

▌ Changing 2D Image Format

Changing Image Direction
- Changing Left/Right Orientation (Horizontal Orientation, Direction): Press the
Direction button on the touch screen.
- Changing Up/down Direction (Vertical Orientation, Apex): Press the Apex button on
the touch screen.
- Changing View Area
Turn the knob-button below Scan Area on the touch screen to adjust the size of the
Area to be anywhere between 60% and 100%. After changing the view area, turn the
knob-button below Scan Angle left/right to move View Area left/right and view other
regions. Scan Angle is unavailable for linear probes.
The frame rate (FPS) drops as the view area becomes larger and the frame rate
increases as the view area becomes smaller.
Showing M Line
M Line indicates the relative position of the M Mode image or the Spectral Doppler Mode
image in the 2D image.
Press the M line button on the touch screen to show M Line, and press the M line button
again to hide M Line.
▌ Optimizing 2D Images
Adjusting Frame Average
The Frame Average function obtains the average for the previous frame and the current
frame and displays it on the screen in order to reduce speckles on continuous images on
the same examination regions. Adjusting this function to High will result in a relatively
smooth display of the image, but the user may get the impression that the display is slower
(the actual frame rate does not drop). It is recommended that this function be turned off
when examining OB, cardiac and other movement-intense organs. It is useful to set this
function to High when examining internal medicine and organs with little movements.
Use the Frame Average up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Edge Enhance

This clearly displays the boundaries between tissues or organs. Edges appear clearer if the
Edge Enhance value is set high. Use the Edge Enhance up/down button on the touch
Adjusting Reject Level

This function is used to eliminate noise or low level echoes for clearer signals. Use the
Reject Level up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Tissue Property

You can select the ultrasound velocity according to the patient’s physique. Physique menu
contains Cystic, Adipose, Normal and Solid. Use the Tissue up/down button on the touch
Smooth Function
This is available for Convex probe. It shows smoother 2D images by eliminating noise. Use
the up-down switch below Smooth on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Pulsed Inversion Function

When Harmonic mode is in use, press the Pulsed Inversion button on the touch screen to
activate this function. This shows sharp images with clear edges. This function is not
available for L5-12IM, VNA6-12, L6-12IS, and L8-15IS probes.
Trapezoid Function
When using Linear probe, you can stretch the 2D image into a trapezoid and examine it in a
larger area. Press the Trapez. button on the touch screen to run this function.
When adjusting the image depth, the Trapezoid function may not be available at certain
depth values. Note that using the Zoom function turns the Trapezoid function off.
DynamicMR Function
This optional function removes speckle noise and strengthens edges for 2D images for
higher image accuracy.
Press the DynamicMR button on the touch screen to run it. The previous configuration will
be applied to the image.
DynamicMR has 6 Presets, each of which has 5 Indexes. To select new

NOTE values or make other settings, press the DynamicMR button on the Utility
menu and make the settings.
Steer Function
This function adjusts the angle of the ultrasound beam in order to prevent loss of
ultrasound information. This function is available for Linear probe only. Use the Steer
button on the touch screen to run this function.
Adjusting Dynamic Range

You can adjust the minimum value and maximum ratio of the input signal and display
images by changes in contrast. Images appear soft at higher ratios and coarse at lower
ratios.
Turn the knob-button below DR on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Density
Use the up-down switch below Density on the touch screen to adjust the image scan line.
This is useful for quickly examining images with low values.
While density can be adjusted to Low, Middle, or High, it is available in 4 steps — Low,
Middle1, Middle2 and High — for Color Doppler Mode.
Adjusting Frame Rate

Frame rate is the number of images generated per second. Frame rate should be set to
high when viewing fast moving organs.
Use the up-down switch below Frame Rate on the touch screen to make adjustments.

This function optimizes 2D images by adjusting 2D Gain, Dynamic Range and TGC
automatically.
Press the AIO button on the control panel to activate it and the Reset AIO button on the
touch screen to deactivate it. It deactivates when Harmonic Mode or Pulse Inversion is
activated.
Pressing and holding the AIO button executes the AIO function repeatedly.
The probes and applications in the following table are applied with the new AIO function to
obtain more optimized images.
Abdomen OB SmallPart Vascular Cardiac

L6-12IS ● ●
C5-2EL ●
C2-6IC ●
3D4-7EK ●
P2-4AC ●
Clip Save Function

This function saves the screen image into a clip. It is provided for Cardiac application with
Phased Array probe or Contrast Agent application with C5-2EL or C1-4EC probe (only
Low MI).
Press the Clip Save button on the touch screen to activate it. Specify the unit and value(s)
to be used for saving a clip under the Misc. tab on the Setting screen.
While saving a clip, press the Set button on the control panel to complete the saving
process or the Exit button to cancel the saving process.
Clips can be saved by beat only when ECG is running; clips will not be
saved when ECG beats do not appear even if the setting is selected for
NOTE clips to be saved by beat.
If 10 seconds of a color image are saved, the screen will be updated 3
seconds after saving is completed.
Spatial Compound Image (SCI) Function

This function displays more smooth 2D images by eliminating speckle noises and is
available only in 2D Mode for the L6-12IS probe.
Press the SCI button on the touch screen to activate it. Its value(s) can be adjusted with
the SCI Filter up/down button that appears when it is running.
When the SCI function is in use, Frame Average, ECG Trigger, AIO and Write Zoom
functions become unavailable.
The SCI function deactivates when 3D Mode, M Mode, C Mode, PD Mode, PW Mode,
Pulse Inversion or Trapezoid is activated.
[Figure 4.3 Spatial Compound Image]
Low MI Function
This function displays clearer contrast images and is available for Contrast Agent
application with the C5-2EL or C1-4EC probe.
Press the Low MI button on the touch screen to activate it. Images can be adjusted via the
menu displayed on the touch screen. Press the Low MI Off button to deactivate Low MI
and switch to 2D Mode. Press the 2D Menu button to keep Low MI activated and switch to
2D Mode.
Use of the Low MI menu is similar to that of the 2D Mode Menu.
[Figure 4.4 Low MI]

- Pressing the Timer 1 Start button resets and activates
Timer. The elapsed time after an agent is injected can
be measured with a counter displayed on the screen. If
an image becomes frozen, Timer 2 is activated to show
the time for which it is frozen. Press the Return Low MI
button to return to the Low MI function.
- Pressing the Timer All Reset button resets both Timer 1 & 2.
- Flash Trigger is a function that breaks the agent bubbles injected by bursting flashes
at the maximum MI Power of the system and probe for the specified Flash Time. Flash
Time can be specified with the up/down switch under Flash Time on the touch screen.
- Use the knob-button under MI Control to adjust the MI Power value. Available setting
ranges are between 0 – 100.
- Color Type and 2D Post Curve change the color of the image applied with Pseudo.
While Low MI is in use, you may not switch to any mode other than Dual
Mode.
NOTE
Trying to activate Low MI in Harmonic Mode results in activation of Pulse
Inversion.
M Mode
This mode provides images that change over time at certain regions of 2D mode scan planes,
such as the movement of a heart valve. A 2D image is also displayed to indicate the relative
position of the selected region and allow the user to change the position.
[Figure 4.4 M Mode]
▌ M Mode Selection
Press the M button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
▌ 2D/M Menu
M Mode and 2D Mode have the same menus for image optimization.
[Figure 4.5 2D/M Menu]

▌ Changing M Mode Format

Adjusting M Line
M Line indicates the relative position of the M Mode image in the 2D image. Use the
Trackball on the control panel to move M Line left and right and view different regions.

Use the Speed up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the sweep speed of M image
in steps.

Use the up-down switch below LoopFormat on the touch screen to change the position
where 2D image and M image appear. Top Down Format places 2D image and M image
at the top and the bottom, and Side by Side Format places them on the left and the right.
Changing M Image Size

Use the up-down switch below Disp Format on the touch screen to change the size of 2D
image and M image. Available options are “50/50”, “40/60”, and “60/40” which indicate the
image size ratio between 2D image and M image.
▌ Free Angle M Mode

This mode allows the user to rotate or move M Line—which normally moves horizontally—
for viewing 2D images. Adjusting the depth for 2D image initializes M Line.
This mode is available for Phased Array probe. It is unavailable in Color

NOTE
Doppler Mode or Zoom Mode.
Starting and Adjusting Free Angle M Mode

Press the Free Angle button on the touch screen to run it. The menu is illustrated in the
figure below.
[Figure 4.6 Free Angle M Mode]

Turn the knob-buttons below Length and Angle on the touch screen to adjust the length
and angle of M Line.
Use the Length Step and Angle Step up/down buttons on the touch screen to adjust the
steps for “Length” and “Angle.” If Step is set to “3,” the value can be adjusted in multiples
of 3.
Position of M Line can be adjusted by moving the Trackball. Start point and end point of M
Line cannot be outside the 2D image.
Things to Consider When Using Free Angle M Mode

Selecting another mode (2D Mode, etc.) while using Free Angle M Mode exists Free Angle
M Mode and activates the selected mode.
The Patient, End Exam, Indicator, Text, Body marker, and Measure buttons function
normally in Free Angle M Mode.
If you selecting the User, E-mail, Mic or SonoView button in Free Angle M Mode, the
selected button functions after shifting to the normal M Mode.
The buttons on the control panel other than those mentioned above (those with LED off) do
not function.
NOTE For information on optimizing M image, refer to “2D Mode.”

Color Doppler Mode

In this mode you can obtain a variety of information about blood flow within the 2D Image such
as the existence of blood flow, its average speed and its direction within the ROI (Region of
Interest).
[Figure 4.7 Color Doppler Mode]
▌ Color Doppler Mode Selection

Press the C button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
▌ C Menu
[Figure 4.8 C Menu]

▌ Changing Color Image Format

Color Bar is a color map that shows the direction and velocity of blood flow.
Colors above the baseline across the center of the color bar indicate blood
NOTE
flowing toward the probe and colors below the baseline indicate blood flowing
away from the probe.
Adjusting Color Bar Baseline

Press the Baseline up/down button on the touch screen. Press the up button to move the
baseline up on the color bar, or press the down button to move the baseline down.
Baseline can be adjusted only when Color Mode is set to “Velocity.”
Inverting Color Bar

Press the Invert button on the touch screen. Inverting the color bar also inverts the colors
displayed on the image.
Changing Color Display Information

Use the up-down switch below Color Mode on the touch screen to select Velocity, Power,
Variance, or Vel + Var. If “Velocity” or “Vel + Var” is selected, numbers will be displayed
above and below the color bar indicating the color scale values. If “Variance” is selected,
+1 and -1 will be displayed. If “Power” is selected, no numbers will be displayed.
▌ Color Image Optimization

Adjusting Balance
Adjust the range of color image display by comparing Gray Level of the 2D image with
Doppler signal values of the color image. As the Balance value increases, color image
appears even in regions with high Gray Level in 2D image (bright regions), expanding the
range of color image.
Use the Balance up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Adjusting Sensitivity
Use the Sensitivity up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Increasing the Sensitivity value increases Sensitivity, and decreasing the Sensitivity value
decreases Sensitivity. As color sensitivity increases, frame rate drops.
Adjusting Scale (PRF)

Use the Scale up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments. Increasing the
Scale value increases PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency), expanding the range of blood
flow velocity displayed, and decreasing the value decreases PRF, narrowing the range of
blood flow velocity displayed.
Changing ROI Box

Color Pos: ROI (Region Of Interest) indicates the area of the 2D image where color (blood
flow) information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode. Use the Trackball to change the
position of the box.

Color Size: Press the ROI Size up/down button on the touch screen. Alternatively,
Trackball and use the Trackball when its appropriate function is displayed on the screen.
Adjusting Wall Filter

Wall Filter is an electric filter that removes low-frequency Doppler signals from movement of
the vessel wall. Adjust Cutoff Frequency to remove from the screen Doppler signals with
frequencies that are lower than the Cutoff Frequency.
Use the Filter up/down button on the touch screen to make adjustments. Increasing the
Filter value increases the Cutoff Frequency for Wall Filter, and decreasing the value
decreases the Cutoff Frequency for Wall Filter.
Fast Frame Function

This function increases the frame rate when the application is set to Fetal Heart. The image
moves approximately 70% faster than the actual speed.
Press the Fast Frame button on the touch screen to run this function.
Steer Function
When using Linear probe, this function adjusts the ultrasound beam angle to prevent the
loss of color information caused by the ultrasound beam angle.
Use the Steer button on the touch screen to make adjustments.
Display Function
Use the up-down switch below Display on the touch screen to select the Display format.
Color Doppler Mode supports Color + B/W Image, Color Only, and B/W Only display.
TDI (Tissue Doppler Image) Function

When the application Cardiac or Pediatric Cardiology and the Phased Array probe is in use,
movements of cardiac tissues can be viewed in Doppler modes.
Cardiac tissues can be viewed by color information in Color Doppler Mode and Power
Doppler Mode, and time-dependent changes of cardiac tissues can be viewed by spectral
Doppler images in PW Spectral Doppler mode.
Press the TDI button on the control panel. “TDI on” will be indicated on the screen.
NOTE For information on other menu items, refer to “2D Mode.”

Power Doppler Mode

Instead of the speed or direction of blood flow, Power Doppler Mode displays the overall
strength of blood flow, thereby showing information about the existence and amount of blood
flow in the sample area.
[Figure 4.9 Power Doppler Mode]
▌ Power Doppler Mode Selection

▌ PD Menu
Use of the Power Doppler Mode menu is similar to the Color Doppler Mode menu.
[Figure 4.10 PD Menu]

▌ Optimizing Power Doppler Image

Directional Function
This function displays the amount (power) of blood flow and direction of blood flow. Press
the Directional button on the touch screen to activate it.
■ Color Bar is a color map that displays the existence of blood flow and
its amount. Brighter colors on the color bar indicate high amount of
NOTE blood flow.
■ For information on other menu items, refer to “Color Doppler Mode.”
PW (Pulse Wave) Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode shows the velocity of blood flow at a specific position within blood vessel. Distance
(depth) information can be obtained by transmitting pulses over time frames. This mode is
useful for measuring low-speed blood flow such as in abdomen and peripheral vessels. A 2D
image is also displayed to indicate the relative position of the selected region in blood vessel
and allow the user to change the position.
On the PW Spectral Doppler Mode image, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical
axis represents speed (or frequency).
[Figure 4.11 PW Spectral Doppler Mode]
▌ PW Spectral Doppler Mode Selection

▌ D Menu
[Figure 4.12 PW Menu]

▌ PW Spectral Doppler Mode Format Change

Use the Speed up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the sweep speed of Spectral
Doppler image in steps.
Adjusting Doppler Baseline

Use the up-down switch below Baseline on the touch screen. Raise the switch button to
move the baseline up, or lower the switch to move the baseline down.

Use the up-down switch below Loop Format on the touch screen to change the position
where 2D image and Spectral Doppler image appear. Top Down Format places 2D image
and Spectral Doppler image at the top and the bottom, and Side by Side Format places
them on the left and the right.
Changing Spectral Doppler Image Size

Use the up/down button Disp Format on the touch screen to change the size of 2D image
and Spectral Doppler image. Available options are “50/50”, “40/60”, and “60/40” which
indicate the image size ratio between 2D image and Spectral Doppler image.
Activating Simultaneous Mode

The PW Spectral Doppler image and 2D image can be displayed simultaneously or
separately.
Press the Simult. button on the touch screen to activate Simultaneous Mode. When
Simultaneous Mode is on, selecting the button again to deactivate Simultaneous Mode.
Simultaneous Mode decreases Doppler PRF, thus decreasing the measurable speed range.
Activate the Simultaneous Mode option by setting Simultaneous Mode as “Allow 2D/PW” or
“Allow 2D/C/PW” in the Misc. tab at the Setting screen.
Inverting Doppler Axis

Press the Invert button on the touch screen. Positions of the + and – speed indications will
be inverted.
▌ Optimizing PW Spectral Doppler Image

Sample Volume
Located on the 2D image, it indicates the position of the Spectral Doppler image. Displayed
in the format of xx.x@yy.y mm, it indicates that the size of the sample volume is “xx.x mm”
and the depth is “yy.y mm.” For example, 2.0@16.7 mm means that the Sample Volume of
2.0mm size is located at a depth of 16.7mm.
Changing Position: Use the Trackball on the control panel.
Changing Size: Press the SV Size up/down button on the touch screen. Alternatively,
Trackball. “SV Pos” and “SV Size” will appear on the screen in one after another.
Changing Angle: Use the knob-button below Angle on the touch screen to make
adjustments. Turn the knob-button to change the angle by 1°, or press it to change the
angle to -60°, 0°, or 60°. Adjusting the sample volume angle allows more accurate
measurement of velocity.
Adjusting Doppler Sound Volume

Use the Sound knob-button on the control panel. Pressing the knob-button toggles sound
on/off. Turn it clockwise to increase the volume and turn it counter-clockwise to decrease
the volume.
Adjusting Spectrum Enhancement

This function enhances sensitivity of Spectral Doppler images by adjusting brightness and
sensitivity of Spectral Doppler images. Press the Spectrum Enh. up/down button on the
Adjusting Spectrum Type

Use the Spectrum Type up/down button on the touch screen to adjust the Spectral Doppler
image to a desired type. You can obtain soft spectral Doppler images.
Adjusting Doppler Average

This function determines availability (on/off) of FDRP (Fast DRP). It can enhance
expression of Spectral Doppler images. Press the Dop Avg up/down button on the touch
HPRF (High PRF) Function

This function measures blood flow beyond the speed limit at specific depths. It doubles or
triples the original scale. This function is available only in PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Starting HPRF
Continuously increase the scale value at a specific depth to start HPRF. Phantom Gate will
appear on D Line at the position higher than the sample volume. Once HPRF starts, PRF
does not increase even if you increase the scale value.
Finishing HPRF
While HPRF is in use, decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF. The PRF value
will be the maximum value for the current PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Adjusting Sample Volume Position

If you adjust the sample volume in PW only state, the system calculates the PRF value and
the Phantom Gate position and updates them on the Spectral Doppler image. If HPRF
cannot start, HPRF will terminate.
If you adjust the sample volume in 2D only state, the PRF value does not change.
[Figure 4.13 Starting HPRF]
HPRF is not available in Simultaneous Mode. Also, if the twice the PRF value
NOTE
is 23kHz or above before starting HPRF, HPRF will not start.
■ The Phantom Gate position can be located outside the 2D image area
in Zoom Mode.
■ Make sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed
CAUTION
together in the measuring area. If there are two or more sample
volumes placed on vessels, the Spectral Doppler image may have
excessive noise due to the unwanted Doppler substances.

This function allows increasing of the scale and/or automatic change of the baseline for
unaliasing of Spectral Doppler images. Press the AIO button on the control panel.
When AIO is in use, scale can increase by twofold at maximum. If the

NOTE
current scale is at the maximum, the AIO function will not start.
Things to Consider for Auto Image Optimization

This algorithm manipulates Automatic Calculator (Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace).
Please refer to “Things to Consider for Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace.”
AIO can function properly if the Spectral Doppler image repeats for 2 cycles or more.
Spectral Doppler images that are not aliased may be recognized as optimal images and the
AIO function may not be available. If the Spectral Doppler image is small because the scale
value is high (even though not aliased), the AIO function automatically adjusts the scale
value and displays the optimal Spectral Doppler image.
For information on Wall Filter, Scale, Dynamic Range, Steer, Frequency,

and TDI Adjustment, refer to “2D Mode” and “Color Doppler Mode.”
NOTE
Methods for using the menus may be different, but the functions are
identical.
CW (Continuous Wave) Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode shows the velocity of blood flow within blood vessel. It can measure high-speed
blood flow by continuously transmitting pulses. However, this is not useful for viewing
information for specific areas.
A 2D image is also displayed to indicate the relative position of the vessel and allow the user to
change the position. Note that 2D image is not displayed when using Static CW probes (CW2.0,
CW4.0).
▌ Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode

When using Phased Array probe, press the CW button on the control panel to activate the
function. Press it again to return to 2D mode.
[Figure 4.14 Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode]
▌ Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode is available only for Static CW probes. At the Probe Selection screen, select
Static CW probe on the touch screen to activate the mode.
[Figure 4.15 Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode]

▌ CW Menu
Methods for using the menu are the same as in PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
[Figure 4.16 CW Menu]
For information on optimizing CW images, refer to “PW Spectral Doppler

NOTE
Mode.”
Automatic Calculator
▌ Adjusting Frequency
The Automatic Calculator function, also called Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace, can
be activated by selecting the AutoCalc button on the touch screen. When Automatic
Calculator is in use, peak trace on the Spectral Doppler image is highlighted in green.
Real-time Doppler signals are traced and their measurement values are displayed. PSA,
EDV, TAP, RI, PI, S/D, VTI, Gpeak, Gmean, and Vmean values can be obtained in Cardiac
Package, and PSA, EDV, TAP, TAM, RI, PI, S/D, and Vmean values can be obtained in
Non-Cardiac Packages.
Press the Mean Trace button on the touch screen to run the Mean Trace function. Mean
Trace is highlighted in black on the Spectral Doppler image. This is not available when the
application is Cardiac.
Auto Trace measurement values in measurement mode and Automatic

Calculator measurement values may not be identical. This is because
CAUTION
each function uses different algorithms. For more accurate measurement,
use Auto Trace in measurement mode.
▌ Auto Trace Direction

This function selects the areas that are traced by Doppler signals. Use the up-down switch
below Auto Trace Dir on the touch screen to select All, Up, or Down. You can select either
Up or Down when the application is Cardiac.
▌ Things to Consider for Automatic Calculator

Results will not be displayed if the function is run against inaccurate values.
Trace and/or results may not be accurate in the following situations.
- Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed, or the
Spectral Doppler image is clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high.
- Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral Doppler images for veins.
- It is difficult to identify the Spectral Doppler image because Doppler Gain Setting is too
high or too low.
- Index Display immediately after moving the sample volume with the Trackball.
- Certain portions of major Spectral Doppler image signals are cut off because the Wall
Filter value is too high.
- Peak Trace is interfered with abnormal noise or artefact of Doppler signals.
- Heart rate is 140bpm or above.
Combined Modes
2D/C/PW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. To use the
2D/C/PW.”
In Color Doppler Mode, press the M button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
[Figure 4.17 2D/C/PW Mode]
2D/PD/PW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. To use the
2D/C/PW.”
In Power Doppler Mode, press the M button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
[Figure 4.18 2D/PD/PW Mode]

2D/C/CW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. Note that
In Color Doppler Mode, press the CW button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler
[Figure 4.19 2D/C/CW Mode]
2D/PD/CW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. Note that
In Power Doppler Mode, press the CW button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler
[Figure 4.20 2D/PD/CW Mode]

2D/C/M Mode
Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously. Note that this mode is available
only when the application is “Fetal Heart” or when the application is “Cardiac”, “General” or
“Pediatric” for Phased Array probe.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the M button on the control panel. Or, in M Mode, press the C
[Figure 4.21 2D/C/M Mode]
Dual Live Mode

This mode displays 2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode simultaneously. 2D image is displayed
on the right and Color Doppler image is displayed on the left. If run in Power Doppler Mode, it
displays 2D image and Power Doppler image.
Press the DUAL LIVE button on the control panel to activate it, and use the Color Doppler
menu to optimize the image. Use the Cine Save function for more effective viewing.
[Figure 4.22 Dual Live Mode]

Multi-Image Modes
The multi-image viewing function is only available when the images and conditions on both
sides are identical.
Dual-2D Mode
This mode allows you to compare 2D images side by side.
In 2D Mode, 3D Mode, or Spectral Doppler Mode, press the Dual button on the control panel to
select the function. Press the Dual button to close Dual-2D Mode and return to 2D Mode which
is the default mode.
Use the Dual button, the Update button and the Set button to change the left/right images.
[Figure 4.23 Dual-2D Mode]
Dual-2D/C Mode
This mode allows you to compare Color Doppler Mode images side by side.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the Dual button on the control panel. Or, in Dual-2D Mode, press
the C button on the control panel.
[Figure 4.24 Dual-2D / Color Doppler Mode]

Dual-2D/PD Mode
This mode allows you to compare PD Mode images side by side.
In PD Mode, press the Dual button on the control panel. Or, in Dual-2D Mode, press the PD
[Figure 4.25 Dual-2D/PD Mode]

Multi-Dimensional Modes
Multi-Dimensional
Multi-Dimensional Modes display tissues or organs as 3-dimensional images. Multi-Dimensional
Modes continuously obtain 2-dimentional surface images from the probe and render the volume
data for displaying 3-dimensional images.
▌ Multi-Dimensional Mode Types

Types by Image Information
- 3D Mode: This is the default 3D Mode. Press the 3D/4D button in 2D Mode to access it.
- 3D Color Doppler Mode: This mode displays blood flow velocity and direction
information on 3D image by color. Press the 3D/4D button in Color Doppler Mode to
access it.
- 3D Power Doppler Mode: This mode displays existence of blood flow and its amount
information on 3D image by color. Press the 3D/4D button in Power Doppler Mode to
access it.
Types by Scan Methods
- Static 3D Mode: This mode obtains a 3-dimensional image by rendering continuous
2D images once. 3D probes obtain volume data by mechanical scanning, and 2D
probes obtain volume data by freehand scanning.
- Live 3D Mode: This mode obtains a 3-dimensional image by rendering continuous 2D
images multiple times. It processes volume data real-time and it is available for 3D
probes only.
- XI STIC Mode: Use a 3D probe to obtain the fetal cardiac cycle and STIC volume data
▌ How to Improve 3D Image Quality

Consider the direction, division and size of the viewpoint, as well as the visibility of an
object.
Before 3D scanning, adjust the contrast of the specific textures in 2D Mode.
The ROI (Region of Interest) box determines the image being rendered. Portions of image
outside the ROI box are not included in the rendering process.
Bigger the ROI box, slower is the rendering speed. Therefore, set an appropriate ROI
box size.
To determine the contour of objects, surface of objects should be insulated with hypo-
echoic tissues—such as amniotic fluid—which do not generate echoes.
To obtain a high quality 3D surface, adjust the low-threshold value.
Set the noise gray value lower than the surface value in order to obtain clearer images
from edges of the ROI box to the surface of the objects.
In general, do not adjust High-Threshold; set it to the maximum value of 255. If the
surface render algorithm is higher than the Threshold value, this value indicates the
boundary of the surface. Therefore, use High-Threshold to adjust the boundary
manually.
Acquiring 3D Images
▌ Image Scan Mode
This mode allows acquisition of 3D and Live 3D images. Press the 3D/4D button on the
control panel to access it. Set the menu items and then press the Freeze button to start
scanning.
Press the Exit button or the 3D/4D button on the control panel to exit Image Scan Mode.
You may also select a button for another mode to exit.
If 3D image is acquired by changing the left/right direction (by selecting the Direction menu),
it is displayed on View Mode. But if 3D image is acquired by changing the up/down direction
(by selecting the Apex menu), it is not displayed on View Mode.
Volume Box
Multi-Dimensional Modes contain two volume boxes. The volume box with cyan lines
indicates the scanning area on the 2D image, and the volume box with yellow lines
indicates the area of the rendered 3D image. The yellow box is also called the ROI box.
- Changing Position: Use the Trackball to change the position of the volume box. Press the
Change button on the control panel to change the function of the Trackball to “Move” and
then change the position. The function of the Trackball is displayed in the feedback area.
- Changing Size: Turn the knob-buttons below ROI Width and ROI Height on the touch
screen to make adjustments. Alternatively, press the Change button on the control panel to
change the function of the Trackball to “Resize” and then change the size.
Setting Auto Calc

This function is available when the application is OB. It automatically sets up the volume box.
Press the Auto ROI Off button on the touch screen to change it to Auto ROI On. The
volume box will appear in the desired area of the image.
This is not available in 3D Color Doppler Mode or 3D Power Doppler Mode.
The Auto ROI function is available only when the fetal body is displayed
NOTE on the screen. This function manipulates brightness and contrast of the
image.
Adjusting Vol. Angle

Use the up-down switch below Vol. Angle on the touch screen to adjust the scanning angle
of the 3D probe.
Adjusting Scan Quality

Use the up-down switch below Scan quality on the touch screen to adjust the quality of the
3D image.
Low: The image quality is low but the 3D image speed (or rendering speed) is fast.
Mid: The image quality is better than Low Quality but the speed is slower than Low
Quality.
High: The image quality and expression are good. Speed is slower than Mid Quality.
Extreme: The image quality is excellent. Use this to obtain detailed images regardless of
the speed.
▌ Image Acquisition Procedures

Static 3D Image Acquisition Procedures
select the 3D button on the touch screen.
3. Use the volume box on the screen to set the position and size of the 3D image to
acquire.
4. Press the Freeze button on the control panel. A 3D image will be acquired for the area
within the volume box and then View Mode will appear.
[Figure 4.26 3D Acquisition – 3D]

Live 3D Image Acquisition Procedures
select the Live 3D button on the touch screen.
3. Use the volume box on the screen to set the position and size of the 3D image to acquire.
4. Press the Freeze button on the control panel. A Live 3D image will be acquired for the
area within the volume box and then View Mode will appear.
[Figure 4.27 3D Acquisition – Live 3D]

■ To obtain a direct view of the face of the fetus on the screen when
acquiring the 3D image, place the head of the fetus in the direction of
the Direction Mark, put the fetus in the Coronal Plane, and then scan
NOTE the fetus from the back toward the abdomen.
■ The 3D image of the fetal face is more easily found in the coronal
plane than in the sagital plane.
3D View
▌ 3D View Mode
This mode allows adjusting and/or viewing of the 3D or Live 3D image that was acquired in
Image Scan Mode.
In 3D View Mode, press the Exit button or the 3D/4D button on the control panel to move to
Image Scan Mode. Press the 2D button to completely exit 3D Mode. Note that pressing the
Exit button on the control panel in Live 3D View Mode switches to Live Cine Mode.
A B

C
Coronal plane 3D plan
[Figure 4.28 Static 3D View]

The default 3D View screen consists of Axial Section, Sagital Section and Coronal Section
surface images—which are volume data cut by anatomical positions—and 3D images.
Figure 4.28 illustrates a screen displaying Axial Section as “A plane,” Sagital Section as “B
plane,” and Coronal Section as “C plane.”
In ABC-ROI 3D Mode, the ROI box displayed in each section can be adjusted for obtaining
desired 3D images.
View Mode Control Menu
Control menus for 3D or Live 3D images appear on the touch screen depending on the
characteristics of each mode.
When operating images, the ‘ ’ icon and the Trackball function icon appear at the bottom
of the screen.
The following icons are available.

- Icons in 3D View Mode:
- Icons in 3D XI Mode:
▌ Selecting 3D View Mode

Static 3D View Mode
For better viewing of 3D images, view modes are categorized into 2D Mode and 3D Mode
depending on rendering methods.
Menu Description
ABC Mode does not display 3D image; it displays multi-planar images

only. Use Full Mode for a more detailed view.
ABC Mode Selection
Volume CT Mode displays a 3D view of the plane position of the

examination image.
Hold down the Change button on the control panel for a few seconds and
the mouse pointer will appear. Use the Trackball and the Set button to
Volume CT Mode adjust the 3D space. Use the Niche Zoom menu on the touch screen to
Selection zoom in or zoom out the Volume CT image. Use the Zoom menu to zoom
in or zoom out the surface image and apply it on the Volume CT image.

OH (Orientation Help) image displays the relative position of the currently selected
reference image in regards to the volume data.
The A, B, and C buttons of the reference image move the plane of OH, and rotating each
reference image also rotates the plane of OH. OH image is shown only in 2D Mode for Static 3D.
If the plane of OH is not properly expressed for the volume data, press the
NOTE
Init button.
Coronal plane OH image
[Figure 4.30 OH Screen]

[A plane] [B plane] [C plane]

Menu Description
ABC-3D Mode projects a 3D image on the Volume data plane

without setting an ROI. Detailed examination is possible as
3D image is projected without using an ROI.
ABC-3D Mode Selection
In ABC-ROI 3D Mode, desired 3D images can be examined

by adjusting the surface images and the ROI box on 3D
images.
ABC-ROI 3D Mode Selection
Fits the 3D image on the entire screen in View Modes.
Full Screen View (Full Mode)
Initializes the current image back to the state it was at the

beginning of 3D View Mode or to the Preset state.
Reset to Initial Position
Each multi-planar has its own standard coordinate system

and rotates or moves according to the coordinate system.
The image selected as a reference image rotates or moves
according to the reference image coordinate system, and
other images rotate or move according to their own standard
Change Reference Plane coordinate systems.
(Reference Plane Selection) Press a desired button to change the reference image.
Rotates the 3D image against the Z-axis in the 3D standard

coordinate system by the rotation value selected.
3D Orientation
Turn the X knob-button to rotate the selected reference image
in the direction of the X-axis. In Full Mode where the
reference image is not shown, the selected image acts as the
Rotate Image by X-axis (() reference image and the Full Mode image rotates by the X-
axis.
The M knob-button on the control panel acts as the X knob-
button.
Turn the Y knob-button to rotate the selected reference image

Rotate Image by Y-axis (') or the Full Mode image in the direction of the Y-axis. The PD
knob-button on the control panel acts as the Y knob-button.
Turn the Z knob-button to rotate the selected reference image

Rotate Image by Z-axis (43) or the Full Mode image in the direction of the Z-axis. The PW
knob-button on the control panel acts as the Z knob-button.
Press the Change button on the control panel and use the
Trackball to move the selected reference image or the Full
Mode image up/down/left/right. Press the Change button
again to resize the ROI box.
Here, hold down the Change button for 2 seconds to change
Move and Resize Image the function of the Trackball.
(ROI Box Adjustment)
Press the Set button and the icon will appear on the
screen. Move the Trackball while holding down the Set
button to rotate the image. Also, press the Exit button and the
icon will appear on the screen. This function is for

moving the image.
To zoom the selected reference image in ABC-ROI 3D Mode,

Image Zoom adjust the Zoom value on the touch screen. Use the up-down
switch below Zoom to adjust the value.
Auto Contour (ACT) Function

This function locates the fetal face area automatically in a fetus image scanned in Sagital
plane. In the ROI box on A Plane, a contour line appears and a 3D image is contoured.
Press ACT Edit button to edit the contour line. Adjust it with the Set button on the control
panel and the Trackball.
Except in the 3D Convex probe, a contour line appears as a straight

line.
NOTE
This function is available only in Static 3D Mode where Render
Direction is ‘C+’.
[Figure 4.32 Static 3D – ACT]
Live 3D View Mode

For more detailed viewing of Live 3D images, the modes are divided according to rendering
methods.
[Figure 4.33 Live 3D – 2D-3D Mode]
Menu Description
Plane of the image and Live 3D image can be examined.

In 2D-3D Mode, adjust the ROI box to view a desired 3D
image. The selected reference image is displayed in 2D
2D-3D Mode Selection image.
NOTE For information on other menu items, refer to “Static 3D View.”
* 3D Coordinate System
- Multi-planar Standard Coordinate Systems
A Standard Coordinate System B Standard Coordinate System
C Standard Coordinate System 3D Standard Coordinate System
- Full Mode Coordinate System
- Reference Image Coordinate System

▌ Cine Mode
3D Cine Mode
This mode provides Cine function for examining the rendered 3D image. Press the Cine
button on the touch screen. The menu illustrated below will appear and the 3D Cine Mode
will start.
[Figure 4.34 3D Cine Mode]
- Cine Settings: Before viewing images by Cine, make appropriate settings for viewing
images on the touch screen.
Menu Description
Rotation Angle Set ranges for 3D Cine rotation.

Selected Rotation Angle rotates by the Step Angle value. If the Step
Step Angle Angle is set to 15°, the 3D Cine set to 360° rotates in 25 steps, and the
3D Cine set to 90° rotates in 7 steps.
Rotation Axis Select the rotation axis for 3D Cine.
Start, End Angle Set the start and end angle values for the rotation range.
Zoom the 3D Cine image by 25% - 400%. Use the up-down switch below
Zoom
the touch screen to adjust the value.
Mix Use the up-down switch below the touch screen to adjust the Mix value.
- Running Cine: Press the Calculate button on the touch screen to run 3D Cine. The
Cine image generation process will be displayed on the screen and then 3D Cine will
start. The menu below will appear on the touch screen. Press the button to
stop or start 3D Cine.
[Figure 4.35 3D Cine]
Menu Description
While 3D Cine is in use, press the New Cine button to acquire a new
New Cine
Cine image.
Select the button to continuously rotate in one direction, or

Rotate
select the button to rotate in one direction and then rotate in
the opposite direction.
Adjust the Speed value to adjust the rotation speed of the 3D Cine image.
Speed
Use the up-down switch below Speed.
Adjust the Cine Frame value on the touch screen to view the 3D Cine
Cine Frame
image by each desired frame.
Adjust the Zoom value on the touch screen to zoom the image. Turn the
Zoom
knob-button below Zoom to adjust the value.
Adjust the MIX value below the touch screen to adjust the mix of Render
Mix
Mode. Use the knob-button below MIX.
Live 3D Cine Mode

Live 3D Mode provides the Cine function for saving or viewing the recently scanned 3D
images. Up to 128 Live 3D images can be saved.
- Running Cine: While scanning Live 3D image, press the Freeze button or the Exit
button on the control panel to start Live 3D Cine Mode. Or, press the Tools button on
the touch screen to move to the Tool menu and select the Live Cine button.
When Live 3D Cine starts, the menu below will appear on the touch screen.
Press the button to stop or start Live 3D Cine.

[Figure 4.36 Live 3D Cine]
Menu Description
While 3D Cine is in use, press the Freeze button to acquire a new Cine
New Cine
image.
When saving Live Cine images, you can specify the save range for Cine
images in the same way as in 2D Mode.
Adjust the First Frame and the Last Frame values on the touch screen to
adjust the Cine image save range. The progress bar indicating the save
Save range will appear on the screen. Use the up-down switches below the menus
to adjust the menus.
After selecting the save range, press the Save button on the control panel.
When the Save Volume screen appears on the touch screen, select the
Save button to save Live Cine image.
NOTE For information on other menu items, refer to “3D Cine Mode.”
▌ VOCAL (Virtual Organ Computer Aided anaLysis) Mode
Select the VOCAL button on the touch screen to start VOCAL Mode. VOCAL is a very
useful tool for measuring volumes of tissues within the human body.
[Figure 4.37 VOCAL Mode]
Setting Reference Image

A reference image must be set up in order to obtain the volume of a desired object. Press a
button on the touch screen to specify which plane should be used for contouring.
Note that contouring is done as the image rotates by the vertical axis in A Plane and B
Plane and as the image rotates by the horizontal axis in C Plane.
Setting VOCAL Parameter (Rotation Step)

You can set the step angle for image rotation. Available ranges are 12°, 18° and 30°. Press
the corresponding button on the touch screen to select the range.
15 contour images are generated for 12°, 10 images for 18°, and 6 images for 30°. The
default rotation angle is 30°.
Setting Range
Adjust the Pole1 and Pole2 values on the touch screen to set the contour range. Use the
knob-buttons below Pole1 and Pole2 to set the position of the arrow. Turn the knob-button
to position the arrow at the vertical or horizontal edge of the object to measure.
VOCAL Automatic Start

Select Contour Type on the touch screen to automatically generate the object for acquiring
volume value.
Menu Description
Solid Type Press the Solid button to contour when there are many echoes within the object.
Cystic Type Press the Cystic button to contour when there are few echoes within the object.
Prostate Type Press the Prostate button to contour when using prostate-related objects.
Press the General button to contour according to characteristics of general
General Type objects. General Type is faster than other automatic Contour Types but is slightly
less accurate.
Press the Sphere button to automatically generate a basic spheric object. After
Sphere Type making the spheric object, modify the contour image to make it into a desired
shape.
VOCAL Manual Start (Manual Type)

Press the Manual button on the touch screen and you can manually contour frame by
frame. The menu below will appear on the touch screen when you press the Manual button.
[Figure 4.38 VOCAL Mode – Manual Type]
1. Move the Trackball while holding down the Set button to determine the shape of the
object. After determining the shape of the object, press the Set button again to
complete frame generation.
2. Press the ▶ button or press the number button on the touch screen to move to the
next frame and determine the shape of the object.
3. To determine the shape of the object again, press the ◀ button or press the number
button on the touch screen to move to the previous frame.
4. Use the up-down switch below Ref. Slice to move to different frames.
5. To cancel contour, press the Cancel button on the touch screen.
6. Repeat the steps above to contour all the frames and then press the Done button.
Edit Contour
When contour is complete, the system switches to Edit Contour Mode. In this mode, use the
up-down switch below Ref. Slice to select contour obtained in the previous step.
[Figure 4.39 VOCAL Mode – Edit Contour]
- Shell Mode
Menu Description
Off Shell Thickness is not applied.

Shell is drawn inside the contour generated by Shell Thickness
Inside
specified.
Shell is drawn outside the contour generated by Shell Thickness
Outside
specified.
Half the shell is drawn inside the contour by half the Shell
Symmetric Thickness specified and the other half of the shell is drawn
outside the contour by half the Shell Thickness specified.
- Ref. Slice
Use the up-down switch below the touch screen to move to different frames and re-
contour the object.
- Zoom
Use the up-down switch below Zoom to adjust the value for zooming image.
- Shell Thickness
Adjust the Thickness value to set the thickness of the shell. Use the up-down switch
below Thickness to adjust the value. Note that the value cannot be adjusted when
Shell Mode is OFF.
- Multi-Edit View
Draw a line to edit up to 6 slices at a time.
[Figure 4.40 Multi Edit View]

1. Select a slice to edit.
2. Change the position of pole points.
Every slice in the screen has two pole points indicated with red dots at the same
positions as each other. Use the Pole 1 and Pole 2 knob-buttons on the touch
screen. Changing the position of a pole point simultaneously changes the
position of the pole points in all slices.
3. Edit a contour line.
A contour line is shown in yellow. Use the Set button and the trackball to edit the
left or right portion around a notional vertical line connecting pole points 1 and 2.
Here, you may not edit it so that it crosses the notional vertical line connecting
pole points 1 and 2. A contour line being edited is shown in red.
4. Press Ok on the touch screen to finish editing. The changes are applied and
The Slice buttons activated on the touch screen vary depending on the
number of slices. The number of slices is determined based on the slice
angle. For example, when 6 slices have been created through a 30˚
rotation, only slice buttons 1–6 are activated. However, For example,
NOTE when 15 slices have been created through a 12˚ rotation, slice buttons
1–6, 7-12 and 13-15 are activated.
When Multi-Edit View is in use, Zoom and Rotation functions are not
available.
- Clear Contour
Press the Clear Contour button to cancel the currently set contour, exit VOCAL Mode
and return to 3D View Mode.
- New Contour
Press the New Contour button to cancel the currently set contour, return to the
VOCAL Mode screen and generate new contour.
- Accept Contour
Press the Accept Contour button to apply the contour specified.
- Result Display
Volume information will be displayed at the lower right-hand corner of the monitor and
Menu Description
Shell Volume size Outside Shell Volume – Inside Shell Volume

Reference Volume size Volume size of the generated object using the initial contour.
Inside Volume size Volume size inside the generated object when Shell Mode is Inside.
Outside Volume size Volume size outside the generated object when Shell Mode is Outside.
VOCAL – Volume CT Mode

After generating the VOCAL object, press the Volume CT button in VOCAL Mode to insert
the A, B, and C Plane images in the VOCAL object for examination.
[Figure 4.40 VOCAL – Volume CT]
VOCAL – Volume CT View Mode Settings

Adjust the Niche menu on the touch screen to set up View
Mode for Volume CT. There are eight (1-8) Volume CT
View Modes, each of which shows one-eighth of the
VOCAL object.
The eighth View Mode is not shown in the illustration above
because it is located at the back.
* VOCAL object has been removed from the illustration
above for demonstration purposes.
VOCAL – Volume CT Operation

VOCAL – Volume CT Mode allows object rotation and axis movement.
- Object Rotation: Object rotation involves VOCAL rotation and Volume CT rotation.
VOCAL rotation is rotating the VOCAL object along with the Volume data with the
center of the VOCAL object as the rotation axis. Volume CT rotation is rotating only
the VOCAL object but not A, B, or C planes. To perform the Volume CT rotation
function, hold down the Change button on the control panel for a few seconds. When
the mouse pointer appears on the screen, use the Trackball and the Set button to
rotate the object.
- Axis Movement: Turn the C knob-button on the control panel to move the rotation
axis for the selected reference image. For example, if the A button is selected in the
reference image, the central axis moves toward the depth direction of A plane.
VOCAL Histogram
VOCAL Histogram shows distribution of the gray value of the black and white image within
the VOCAL object and the gray value of the Power Doppler image, and the relevant MG
(Mean Gray), VI (Vascularization Index), FI (Flow Index), and VFI (Vascularization-Flow
Index).
VOCAL Histogram is only available for 3D images and Power Doppler 3D images that are
in black and white.
Equations used are as follows.
- MG: average value of gray voxel brightness (gray)
= total brightness (gray) / all voxel number
- VI: ratio of color voxels against all voxels within the shell
= color voxel number / all voxel number
- FI: average value of brightness (color) for color voxels within the shell
= total brightness (color) / color voxel number
- VFI: average value of brightness (color) for all voxels within the shell
= total brightness (color) / all voxel number
VOCAL ABC-3D Mode

After accepting the contour in VOCAL Mode, press the ABC-3D button on the touch
screen to view images in VOCAL ABC-3D Mode.
ABC-3D in VOCAL Mode cuts out the contoured surface images and reconstructs a 3D
image based on them. 3D image is displayed in the position of the contour image shown
on A plane. This mode allows viewing of organs in their actual images. In particular,
SeeThru Mode is useful for clinical purposes as it provides color position and distribution
of organs.
▌ 3D Measure
In 3D View Mode, you can press the Measure button on the control panel to perform 3D
Measure functions (Caliper, Slice, and Calculation).
Since 3D Measure involves measurements on 3D images that are constructed with 2D
images, measurement menu items supported by M Mode or Spectral Doppler Mode are not
available here. Also, measurements that require multiple images such as the AFI menu
under OB measurement are not available.
3D Measure has an error rate of 5% in addition to the measurement error rate in 2D Mode.
Press the Close button on the touch screen to exit the 3D Measure function. You can also
exit by pressing the Measure button or the Exit button on the control panel.
Caliper 3D / Calc 3D
Caliper 3D and Calc 3D measurement menus are identical to 2D Mode and use the same
measurement methods in 2D Mode. For detailed information on measurement methods,
refer to “Basic Measurements” and “Application Measurements” sections in this manual.
[Figure 4.41 3D Measure – Caliper 3D]
[Figure 4.42 3D Measure – Calc 3D]

Slice 3D
Press the Slice 3D button on the touch screen and the menu below will appear on the touch
screen.
[Figure 4.43 3D Measure – Slice 3D]
Slice 3D slices a single Volume into multiple planes and measures them.
Under Select Plane, select a measure plane to measure and use the knob-button below
Slice Move to move to the slice image to measure.
Use the trace method to measure. To cancel a part of the measuring line while tracing,
press the Delete button or turn the knob-button below Trace Back. Press the Clear button
on the touch screen to delete the measurement result.
If measuring multiple slice images, the measured slices are displayed on the bar on the
touch screen. To move to different slice images, use the Previous button and the Next
button, or use the up-down switch below Previous/Next.
To return to the initial image before measuring, select the Initial button on the touch screen.
Trace Back
Trackball Speed
▌ 3D Notation
Text Input
Press the Text button on the control panel to input texts on the screen. The Text Brief
function is not supported.
Press the Clear button on the control panel or on the touch screen to clear all texts on the
screen.
Indicator Input
Press the Indicator button on the control panel to input indicators on the screen. Use the
Set button and the Trackball to place indicators.
Press the Clear button on the control panel or on the touch screen to clear all indicators.
Press the Undo button on the touch screen to delete indicators one by one in the order they
are placed.
Indicators in Live 3D View and Live 3D XI™ can be moved within the screen only.
[Figure 4.44 3D Notation]
Optimizing 3D Images
To set the image parameters in View Mode, select the Tools button on the touch screen. The
screen below will appear on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.45 Tool Menu]

▌ Image Setting
Press the Image Setting button on the touch screen to set the Gamma value and Chroma
Map for images. Used Chroma Map preset values can be saved in Preset.
Select the 2D button on the touch screen to set the Gamma value, etc. for 2D images.
Select the 3D button to make settings for 3D images.
Adjusting Post Curve

To adjust Post Curve, adjust the Pos value and the Bias value at the bottom of the touch
screen. Use the knob-buttons below Pos and Bias.
Setting Palette
Select a desired color button on the touch screen.
Setting Transparency
Adjust the Transparency value to adjust the transparency of 3D images. Use the up-down
switch below Transparency on the touch screen. The value range is from 20 to 250.
The lowest Transparency value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest
Transparency value (250) is for complete opacity. The default Transparency value is 100.
Setting Preset
[Figure 4.48 Tool Menu – Image Setting (Preset)]
▌ Setting Render Mode

Press the Render Mode button on the touch screen to set Render Mode. The last used
Render Mode preset values are automatically saved.
Render Mode includes four modes: Gray, Color, SeeThru and VOCAL.
Gray Render Mode

This mode shows volume data acquired by gray method as a 3D rendering image.
Rendering values can be set for Mode1 and Mode2. A total of 11 combinations are
available.
Menu Description
Surface Mode This is the default mode. It displays a 3D image by ray-casting.
Surface Smooth This is similar to the default mode. It displays a 3D image by ray-casting
Mode softer than Surface Mode.
This mode displays the maximum value of intensity. This is useful for
Max Mode
viewing bones within the body.
This mode displays the minimum value of intensity. This is useful for
Min Mode
viewing vessels and hollow parts within the body.
Light Mode This mode displays the depth information of 3D image by brightness.
This mode displays the average value of intensity. It has the same effect as
X-Ray Mode
X-ray images.
[Figure 4.49 Tool Menu – Render Mode (Gray)]

Color Render Mode
This mode shows volume data acquired by Angio/CFM method as a 3D rendering image. It
supports three combinations: Surface-Light, Surface-Max, and Surface-X-Ray.
The modes are accessed in the same way as Gray Render Mode.
[Figure 4.50 Tool Menu – Render Mode (Color)]

SeeThru Render Mode

This mode shows Gray + Angio or Gray + CFM combination of data as a 3D rendering
image. It supports four combinations: Transp-Surface, Transp-Transp, Max-Surface, and
Max-Transp. When you survey color data, the system runs SeeThru Render mode as
default.
[Figure 4.51 Tool Menu – Render Mode (SeeThru)]
Menu Description
Transp+Surface
the gray data (use the MIX knob-button). Parts hidden by the gray data may
Combination
appear slightly darker.
Transp+Transp
the gray data and the color data (use the MIX knob-button). Parts hidden
Combination
by the gray data may appear slightly darker.
Max+Surface
and the color data from Surface Mode (use the MIX knob-button). Parts
Combination
Max+Transp
and the color data from Transp Mode (use the MIX knob-button). Parts
Combination
VOCAL Render Mode

You can set the color of the object shown in VOCAL Mode. Select desired colors for
Surface and Wire.
[Figure 4.52 Tool Menu – Render Mode (VOCAL)]
Adjusting Rendering Mode Mix

Adjust the Mix value below the touch screen to adjust the mix of Render Mode. Use the
knob-button below MIX.
Adjusting Threshold (Low, High)

Adjust the Th.Low and Th.High values at the bottom of the touch screen to adjust the
Threshold values. Use the knob-buttons or the up-down switches below the menus.
Adjust the Th.Low value and the Th.High value to hide information below and above the
values from the 3D image. Only the information between the Th.Low value and the Th.High
value is shown as the 3D image.
Image Zoom
To zoom the image, adjust the Zoom value at the bottom of the touch screen. Use the up-
down switch below Zoom.
▌ MagiCut Mode
This function cuts out a desired portion from the entire image for viewing. Press the
MagiCut button on the touch screen.
Setting Cut Mode

Select the Cut Mode type on the touch screen.
- Inside Contour: Cuts the inside of the selected area.
- Outside Contour: Cuts the outside of the selected area.
- Inside Box: Cuts the inside of the box.
- Outside Box: Cuts the outside of the box.

- Small Eraser: Cuts using a small eraser.
- Big Eraser: Cuts using a big eraser.
[Figure 4.53 Tool Menu – MagiCut]

Setting Cutting Area
To set the cutting area in MagiCut Mode, use the Trackball and the Set button on the
control panel.
You may also cut the image by adjusting the depth of the cutting area. Select the Full
button on the touch screen delete the entire area selected, or select the Defined button to
delete by the value specified. Press the Define button and the Cut Depth menu will appear.
Use the knob-button below Cut Depth to specify the depth for the area to delete.
Canceling MagiCut
To restore the cut area from the full image, select the Undo button on the touch screen.
Press the Undo button to restore the last cut area. Press the Undo All button to restore the
entire image.
After restoring the image by pressing the Undo button or the Undo All button, select the
Redo button to cut the same area again.
▌ Render Direction Settings

To change the camera position for viewing 3D images, select the Render Direction button
Standard coordinate systems change according to the changes in position (refer to the
section on changing reference image).
[Figure 4.54 Tool Menu – Render Direction]

A＋: Moves to the direction currently looking at A plane.
A－: Moves to the back of the direction currently looking at A plane.
B＋: Moves to the direction currently looking at B plane.

B－: Moves to the back of the direction currently looking at B plane.
C＋: Moves to the direction currently looking at C plane.

C－: Moves to the back of the direction currently looking at C plane.
▌ Image Store
Pressing the Image Store button on the touch screen saves the 3D image on the system.
The last saved image can be sent by using the E-Mail function.
Saving Images
Press the Save button on the control panel to save 3D images in View Mode. Saved
images are managed by SonoView.
[Figure 4.55 Tool Menu – Image Store]

Menu Description
Saves 3D image including volume data. If volume data and

Save Cine images are saved together, new 3D rendering images and
Cine/Live images can be reproduced at a later time.
Image Only Saves only the image displayed on the screen.
This is available when 3D Cine images are generated. Select the
Include Cine button and press the Save button to save Cine images
Include Cine
and volume data. If the Include Cine button is not selected, only the
volume data is saved.
This is available when Live 3D Cine images are generated. The
Include Live Cine
function is the same as Include Cine.
Coordinate systems for 3D data saved in this system are
Save Volume Format different from coordinate systems for 3D data used in CT or
- Default MRI. Save by selecting the Default button if you plan to use the
data in SonoView only.
Save the 3D image by selecting the Cartesian button if you
plan to use it in other 3D programs such as CT or MRI. If the
Save Volume Format Cartesian format is selected only the A plane image is saved.
- Cartesian Because data format cannot be verified in SonoView, you must
indicate the format in the save name when saving a SonoView
image.
When saving Live 3D Cine images, you can specify the save
Setting Save Range range for Cine images in the same way as in 2D Mode. Refer to
“Live 3D Cine Mode.”
Printing Image
Press the Echo Print button on the control panel to print 3D images in View Mode.
3D XI™ Mode
Procedures for acquiring images in 3D XI™ is the same for Static 3D images.
Press the 3D XI button on the touch screen to switch to 3D XI™, or press the 3D button to scan
and then press the 3D XI button at the 3D View screen to switch to 3D XI™.
3D XI™ supports three modes: Multi Slice View, Volume CT, and Oblique View.
[Figure 4.56 3D Acquisition – 3D XI™]
In Live 3D XI™, press the Live 3D button and the 3D XI button simultaneously to acquire image.
Live 3D XI™ provides Multi Slice View Mode only.
[Figure 4.57 3D Acquisition – Live 3D XI™]

▌ Multi Slice View

This function enhances usefulness of examination by using neighboring multi slice images.
To use the functions related to Multi Slice View, press the Multi Slice View button on the
touch screen and use the menu displayed.
[Figure 4.58 Multi Slice View]

Init: Resets all settings for Multi Slice View.
Display Layout (1×1, 2×1, 3×2, 4×3, 6×4)

This function sets the display layout. You can select one from the five layouts. 1 x 1
supports large image size but does not show slice images. 6 x 4 has small images but
supports slice images. The default display layout is 3 x 2.
Each time a new layout is selected, the currently selected image moves to the first position
on the screen.
Ref. Image (A/B/C Plane)

Shows the selected reference image in Multi Slice View.
Rot. Z (0/90/180/270)
To rotate Multi Slice image, press the button for the desired rotation value. Here, the
coordinate system rotate by the Z-axis in the “3D standard coordinate system.”
Each time the mode changes or the reference plane changes, the current Rot. Z is reset to
0.

Like the OH function in 3D view, this function shows the relative position of the currently
selected slice image in volume data for Multi Slice View images.
Press the OH button on the touch screen to activate or deactivate it.
- Reference Plane: Shows the relative position of the slices displayed in other sections.
In this image, a scout marker appears indicating the position of each slice image.
- Pressing the Set button on the control panel zooms the selected slice image to the 1 X
1 layout to enable more detailed observation.
[Figure 4.59 Multi Slice View – OH]
Rotation
Turn the X, Y, and Z knob-buttons to freely rotate the Multi Slice image. When the selected
reference image is rotated, the results are reflected in all planes.
Translation
Move the Multi Slice image to a new position. Use the Change button on the control panel
and the Trackball to move the image. The image moves along the X-axis and the Y-axis.
Zoom (x1.0 ~ x4.0)

The Multi Slice image can be zoomed by 4 times. Use the knob-button below Zoom on the
Image Index
Shows the index of the currently selected image. The selected image is highlighted with
yellow borders. Use the knob-button below Image Index on the touch screen or the
Trackball to select an image. If the image index is outside the range of the current page,
the screen moves to the previous or next index as the page index changes accordingly.
Magnification
Press the Set button at the selected image index to magnify the selected image as in the 1
x 1 layout. Press the Exit button to return to the original layout. Here, the position of Image
Index is restored to the previously selected position. Images are not saved in the
Magnification state.
Page Index
Shows the range of the current page index according to the display layout. Use the up-
down switch below Page Index on the touch screen to adjust the value.
Cut Depth
Set the gap between Multi Slice images. The gap between Slice images can be set by the
user. It is marked as an internal calculation value by default. The unit is mm. Use the up-
down switch below Cut Depth on the touch screen to adjust the value.
Here, Cut Depth indicates the gap between the slices for the volume data. It does not refer
to the actual anatomical position of the scanned objects.
Post Processing
This function is responsible for post-processing Multi Slice images. You can produce
various images using this function. Post-processed images are not applied in Volume CT.
The table below lists the functions provided. Each function can be repeated or used in
combination with other functions. Note that only the Flip Image function may be repeated in
the color display area (image acquired in 3D/C or 3D/PD Mode).
[그림 4.60 Multi Slice View – Post Processing]
Menu Description
Invert Inverts the brightness of Multi Slice images.
Automatically adjusts the brightness of Multi Slice images. This function

calculates the histogram of the image and stretches the contrast
Auto Contrast
distribution. The change may be marginal if the image already has well-
spread contrast.
Eliminates noises and enhances image quality by compounding images.

Compound
Set the distance between images to be used for 3D CI by using 3D CI
Imaging (3D CI)
Offset on the touch screen.
Sets the Gamma value for the image. Use the knob-buttons below Pos
Image Setting and Bias to adjust Post Curve. The Gamma value and Chroma map are
reset if a new scan is performed or Multi Slice View is reset.
Sharpens the boundary of Multi Slice images. Higher the preset value,
clearer the boundary becomes. Use the knob-button below Sharpen on
the touch screen to make adjustments. When the function overlaps with
the Th.Low and Th.High functions, you can press the knob-buttons to
change the control state.
Operation by Button State:
Sharpen
When button is not pressed: The Sharpen value is not applied on the
image.
When button is pressed and check mark is present: The Sharpen value is
applied, and the value can be adjusted by the knob-button.
When button is pressed and check mark is not present: The Sharpen
value is applied, and the value cannot be adjusted by the knob-button.
Set the threshold for Multi Slice images. This removes the brightness of
levels that are not wanted in images. Use the knob-buttons below Th.Low
and Th.High on the touch screen to make adjustments. When the
Th.Low / Th.High
function overlaps with the Sharpen function, you can press the knob-
buttons to change the control state. Button controls are the same as
Sharpen.
Set the brightness of Multi Slice images. You may select

up/down/left/right or none for Gradient Mask. Bright areas on buttons
Gradient Mask
represent image areas that will be processed as bright and dark areas on
Image
buttons represent image areas that will be processed as dark. Button
selection determines the image brightness adjustment.
Flip Image Flips the position of Multi Slice images vertically or horizontally.
Setting Preset
XI MR
This function improves the image quality by stressing the contrast and edges of Multi Slice
images. The function is applied only to the selected images with yellow borders.
Measurement
Like 3D Measure in 3D View, simple measurements can be performed in Multi Slice View.
Refer to the section on “3D Measure.” (The volume value can be measured using 1
Distance.)
This function is not available in Volume CT and Oblique of 3D XI™ Mode, and the Slice
3D function remains inactive.
[Figure 4.61 3D Measure]
Notation
Like 3D Notation in 3D View, texts and indicators can be entered 3D XI™ also. For more
information, refer to the section on “3D Notation.”
▌ Volume CT
This function provides relational view of surface images by expressing coronal, sagital and
axial images in appropriate positions in the 3D space. Volume CT supports two modes:
Cube Volume CT and Cross Volume CT. Press the Volume CT button on the touch screen.
Cube Volume CT
Provides information of external surface images neighboring the cube.
[Figure 4.62 Cube Volume CT]

Menu Description
Shows the selected surface according to the position of the image

selected in Multi Slice View. If the position is close to the front/top/left
direction of the volume, the image is shown in the same direction as the
multi slice image because the image is shown from the selected position.
If the position is close to the back/bottom/right direction of the volume, the
Default Setting
image is then shown in the opposite direction as the multi slice image
because the image is shown from the selected position. The position of
the selected slice is shown with the image slightly slanting. This is for
showing other plane images simultaneously when looking at them from
different directions.
Ref. Surface Sets Reference Surface. You can select any of the six surfaces.
When the user selects one of the six surfaces as the desired view
View Direction
direction, the selected surface is placed toward the front.
Moves the offset position of the selected Reference Surface. Use the
Ref. Surface
knob-button below Surface Offset on the touch screen to make
Offset
adjustments.
Use the X/Y/Z knob-button on the control panel to rotate Cube Volume CT
Rotation
image by the X/Y/X-axis.
Zooms in/out the Cube Volume CT image. Use the knob-button below
Zoom
Sets or clears the additional boundary lines for Cube Volume CT.
Boundary
Cross Volume CT
Provides information of images inside the planes crossing over each other.
[Figure 4.63 Cross Volume CT]

Menu Description
Ref. Plane Sets Reference Plane.

Moves Reference Plane. Use the knob-button below Plane Offset on the
Ref. Plane Offset
Use the X/Y/Z knob-button on the control panel to rotate Cross Volume
Rotation
CT image by the X/Y/X-axis.
Zooms in/out the Cross Volume CT image. Use the knob-button below
Zoom
Sets or clears the additional boundary line for Cross Volume CT.
Boundary
▌ Oblique View
Surface images can be viewed by applying line/contour on desired surfaces in anatomical
positions of coronal/sagital/axial images. Press the Oblique button on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.64 Oblique View]

Select Cut Type
Provides the following Cut Types:
i) Single Line: Applies a single line to an image for a surface view. A reference image and
a line are displayed on the left side of the screen and an oblique image for the line on
the right side of the screen.
Menu Description
Single Obtains information for a vertical surface image using the default line. Use
Static Line the knob-button below Line Rotation on the touch screen to rotate the
default line.
Obtains information for a vertical surface image by editing a line. Press the
Single Dynamic Line button and then use the trackball and the Set button
Single to specify a start point. Then, draw a line and press the Set button again to
Dynamic Line specify an end point. A surface image perpendicular to the line will be shown.
Use the knob-button below Line Rotation on the touch screen to rotate the
line and press the Change button on the control panel to move it.
Obtains information for a vertical surface image by editing a contour. Press

the Single Contour button and then use the trackball and the Set button to
Single specify a start point. Then draw a contour and press the Set button again to
Contour (Edit) specify an end point. A surface image perpendicular to the contour will be
shown. Because there is a restriction on the volume of data with contours, a
surface image cannot be viewed if the volume of data has exceeded its limit.
ii) Multi Line: Applies up to 5 lines to a reference image for a surface view. Lines are shown in
different colors for easier identification.
A reference image is shown at the upper left-hand corner of the screen, containing all lines.
The oblique image of a line is shown by color in the screen. However, If the reference ima
ge is changed, all of the existing lines will disappear.
Menu Description
Applies five lines to a reference image and displays an oblique image for
these. Press the Multi Dynamic Line button and then use the trackball and
Multi
the Set button to draw a line. Then a surface image perpendicular to the line
Dynamic Line
will appear separated with line colours. Five dynamic lines can be drawn.
Use the Rotation knob-button to rotate a line.
Applies five random contour lines to a reference image and displays an

Multi oblique image for these. Press the Multi Contour button and then use the
Contour trackball and the Set button to draw a curve. Then an oblique image will
appear separated with curve colours. Five curves can be drawn.
Applies lines parallel with a random line to a reference image and displays
an oblique image for these. Press the Multi Parallel button and then use the
trackball and the Set button to draw a reference line. Then a parallel line will
Multi
be drawn automatically. An oblique image for each line is displayed. Use the
Parallel
Line Rotation knob-button to rotate a reference line. The changes are
applied to all parallel lines. Use the Line Offset knob-button to adjust the
spacing between parallel lines.
Applies lines perpendicular to a random dynamic line to a reference image

and displays oblique image for these. Press the Multi Plumb button and
then use the trackball and the Set button to draw a reference line. Then a
Multi
perpendicular line will be drawn automatically. An oblique image for each line
Plumb
is displayed. Use the Line Rotation knob-button to rotate a reference line.
The changes are applied to all perpendicular lines. Use the Line Offset
knob-button to adjust the spacing between perpendicular lines.
View direction of Vertical Surface Image

As illustrated below, the view direction is perpendicular to the cutting direction of the volume
data.
[Figure 4.23 3D View]
▌ 3D DMR
In 3D, Live 3D or 3D XI Mode, you can apply Dynamic MR to enhance images.
3D DMR in 3D / Live 3D Modes
[Figure 4.65 3D DMR in 3D / Live 3D Modes]

1. Press the Tools button on the touch screen. The Tool Menu screen will
appear.
2. Press Dynamic MR.

to DMR 1-4. The DMR type set is immediately applied.
3D DMR in 3D XI™ Mode
[Figure 4.66 3D DMR in 3D XI™ Mode]

1. In the Multi Slice View screen on the touch screen, press 3D DMR. Dynamic
MR is applied.
2. Press Post Processing to change the DMR type. The Post Processing
screen will appear.
to DMR 1-4. Press Exit to complete the changes.
Because Dynamic MR is optional, it becomes available only when a

dongle for Dynamic MR is attached.
When the dongle is not attached, the 3D DMR button on the touch
screen is shown as XI MR in 3D XI Mode and does the same job as
NOTE
XI MR in Post Processing.
If an image is saved after Dynamic MR is applied and it is viewed
without the dongle attached, it appears without the effect of Dynamic
MR.
▌ XI VOCAL
Unlike in VOCAL, which uses the rotation surface method, XI VOCAL slices an object using
a parallel surface method to calculate its volume. Press XI VOCAL on the touch screen for
3D XI.
[Figure 4.67 XI VOCAL]
The reference image specified in Multi Slice View appears in the screen. When the Rotation
or Zoom function has been used with the reference image in Multi Slice View, the effects
still remains with the reference image for XI VOCAL.
Perform XI VOCAL by following the steps below. In each step, pressing Exit on the touch
screen aborts XI VOCAL and returns to Multi Slice View for 3D XI.
1. Select an image to use as a reference on the touch screen.

2. Specify Start and End Lines. Use the Set button and the trackball on the control panel.
The distance between two lines along with Start and End Planes are displayed in the
screen. Once the lines are specified, press Done.
3. A message appears on the touch screen, asking whether to contour the reference
image. Press Done to proceed.
4. Specify Contour Type. Solid, Cystic and General allows you to retrieve a contour
automatically and Manual allows you to retrieve a contour manually. For more
information, refer to ‘VOCAL.'
5. Specify the number of images to contour. Press Make to move to the next step.
6. Specify the position of Seed Point in the screen.
– When automatic contour retrieval is selected, two Pole Points appear in different
positions in all slices and the contour of an object is retrieved based on them.
The position of the Pole Points for each slice can be moved independently. To change
the position of Pole Points, use the Pole 1 and Pole 2 buttons or the Set button and
trackball on the control panel.
- When manual contour retrieval is selected, draw a contour line manually to retrieve a
contour. When finished, press Done.
7. Contour is executed. A progress bar appears at the bottom of the screen, indicating the
progress. Press Stop to finish contour and execute the same contour for the others.
8. When Contour is completed, you can press All Slice Show to review the completed
slices. To edit a contour, press Edit Contour and use the Set button and the trackball
on the control panel to edit a contour line.
Press Exit to finish XI VOCAL. To create a new contour, press New Contour and repeat the
above steps.
▌ Live 3D XI™ Mode

Live 3D XI™ supports Multi Slice View only.
Procedures for running Multi Slice View for Live 3D XI™ are the same as running Multi
Slice View for 3D XI™.
[Figure 4.68 Live 3D XI™ - Multi Slice View]
XI STIC Mode (Optional)

STIC stands for Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation. It calculates a heartbeat cycle with the
volume data for a fetal cardiac area, and reconstructs and displays the volume data.
STC is divided into regular STIC and XI STIC depending on whether 3D XI™ is used.
XI STIC Mode is available only with a 3D Probe.
XI STIC Mode is available in 3D Color Doppler mode and 3D Power
NOTE
Doppler mode.
XI STIC Mode is not available in Live 3D Mode.
1. In Image Scan Mode, press 3D and XI STIC. To access in 3D XI Mode, press 3D, 3D
XI and XI STIC.
2. Specify each menu on the touch screen.
- For settings in STIC Mode, refer to Live 3D.

- For settings in XI STIC Mode, refer to 3D XI.
3. Specify Scan Time, STIC Angle and Trimester.
- Scan Time: Specify the scan time between 7 – 20 seconds in 1 second increments.
- STIC Angle: Specify an angle between 15 - 60˚ in 5˚ increments.
- Trimester: Specify the pregnancy trimester to 1st, 2nd, 3rd or User Set. If it is set to 1st
- 3rd, the Scan Time and STIC Angle for that trimester are automatically set. Please
refer to the following table:
1st 2nd 3rd
Scan Time 10 sec. 12 sec. 15 sec.

STIC Angle 20˚ 25˚ 30˚
If Scan Time or STIC Angle is set out of the specified range, Trimester appears as
User Set.
4. Press the Freeze button on the control panel. The system begins to acquire the STIC
volume data.
5. The number of heartbeats for a fetus is calculated and displayed on the touch screen.
Press Yes to proceed. Press No to cancel and scan again.
When the number of heartbeats cannot be calculated due to severe

NOTE Motion Artifact or no heartbeat cycle, the system returns to the
Acquire STIC Volume Data screen.
6. Once volume data scan is completed, a STIC image appears. Adjust the image with
the touch screen.
- With STIC Speed, the image playback speed can be adjusted. Available options are
All CINE, 25%, 33%, 50% and 100%. If it is set to All CINE, all Volume CINE saved
are reviewed regardless of the speed. If it is set to a percentage, an image is played
at the speed of the specified percentage to the number of fetal heartbeats (100%).
7. Press the 3D/4D button on the control panel to finish. Press Exit to return to the
previous step.
※ Tip! To obtain good STIC volume data:
- STIC Angle: For smaller fetal hearts, specify a smaller Scan Angle.
- Scan Position: Make sure that the centers of the specified Scan Angle and the fetal
heart are aligned with each other.
- Volume Box: Adjust it to match the size of a fetal heart.
※ To obtain good Color STIC volume data:

- Control the fps at least 15 during scanning.
- Set the application with Fetal Heart.
- During Cine, control the gain for good color view.
▌ STIC
This is STIC Mode without 3D XI™. STIC information such as Image Angle, Vol.Angle,
Scan Time, Heart Rate and Cine are displayed in the right hand side of the screen.
The touch screen menus for STIC Mode can be used in the same way
NOTE
as in Live 3D View.
In STIC Mode, STIC Volume CINE performs tasks by default. Pressing the Yoyo button on
the touch screen changes the CINE play type from Loop to Yoyo.
Pressing the Freeze button on the touch screen stops CINE play and switches to Static 3D
Mode. In the Static 3D screen, you can use Vol.Index to move to the volume data for the
corresponding index. Pressing the Freeze button again returns to STIC Mode and enables
CINE play.
To run 3D View or 3D XI, or save a STIC image, press the corresponding button after
stopping CINE Play.
[Figure 4.69 STIC]

▌ XI STIC
This is STIC Mode with 3D XI™. The XI STIC logo appears at the lower right corner of the
screen.
The touch screen menus for XI STIC Mode can be used in the same way
NOTE
as in 3D XI Mode.
In XI STIC Mode, you can review slice images. However, features such as Volume CT, XI
VOCAL or 3D View are not available in this mode. Press the Freeze button on the touch
screen to switch to 3D XI Mode. In the 3D XI screen, you can use Vol.Index to move to the
volume data for the corresponding index. Pressing the Freeze button again returns to XI
STIC Mode.
To run 3D View or save a XI STIC image, press the corresponding button after switching to
3D XI Mode.
[Figure 4.70 XI STIC]

Chapter 5
Measurements and
Calculations
MEASUREMENT RANGE AND ACCURACY .................................................................2
BASIC MEASUREMENTS ..............................................................................................4

ACTIVATING BASIC MEASUREMENT MODE ..................................................................................... 4
BASIC MEASUREMENT MENU ........................................................................................................ 5
DISTANCE MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................................ 7
CIRCUMFERENCE AND AREA MEASUREMENT ................................................................................. 8
VOLUME MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................................. 9
MEASUREMENT IN M MODE ........................................................................................................ 11
MEASUREMENT IN SPECTRAL DOPPLER MODE ............................................................................ 11
CALCULATIONS BY APPLICATION ............................................................................13

BASICS OF CALCULATIONS BY APPLICATION ................................................................................. 13
OB CALCULATIONS .................................................................................................................... 19
FETAL ECHO CALCULATIONS....................................................................................................... 25
GYN CALCULATIONS .................................................................................................................. 30
UROLOGY CALCULATIONS ........................................................................................................... 32
VASCULAR CALCULATIONS.......................................................................................................... 36
CARDIAC CALCULATIONS ............................................................................................................ 40
RADIOLOGY CALCULATION .......................................................................................................... 49
REPORT........................................................................................................................51
REPORT FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................. 51
GRAPH FUNCTION ...................................................................................................................... 52
Measurement Range and Accuracy
The measurements provided by the system do not define a specific physiological or anatomic pa
rameter. Rather, what is provided is a measurement of a physical property such as distance or v
elocity for evaluation by the clinician.
For each of the measurements available on the system, the measurement accuracy and range o
ver which that accuracy is valid is shown in the following tables. Measurement accuracy is also
constrained by the caliper placement capability limit. Unless specified by a probe or an applicati
on, all linear distance measurements have the following accuracy requirements.
The RMI413 phantom is used for all 2D and M-mode measurement accuracy tests.
The RMI1425A phantom is used for the Doppler measurement accuracy tests.
Unless specified otherwise by a probe or application, all linear distance movements have the foll
owing accuracy limits.
▐ 2D Mode
Measurement Type Range Accuracy Notes
Axial Distance 0.01-24.91 cm +/- 2% or +/- 2 mm
Lateral Distance 0.01-30.37 cm +/- 2% or +/- 2 mm
Diagonal Distance 0.01-39.28 cm +/- 2% or +/- 2 mm
Area 0.01-756.52 cm2 +/- 4%
Circumstance 0.03-110.56 cm +/- 3% or +/- 5 mm
Volume 0.01-60601.51 cm3 +/- 8%
1. The accuracies are calculated using the following equations:

Distance error (2% or 2mm) = Image Pixel error (1% or 1mm) +
Hardware error (1% or 1mm)
Area error (4%)= Distance 1 x Distance 2
NOTE Volume error (8%)= Distance 1 x Distance 2 x Distance 3
Circumference error (3% or 5mm)= Distance error ( 2% or 2mm) +
Calculation precision ( 1% or 3mm)
2. The phantom used is Multi-purpose phantom, RMI 413, from GAMMAX,
Inc. USA.
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 5-3
▐ M Mode
Depth 0.01-24.00 cm +/- 2% or +/- 2 mm
Time 0.01-4.26 sec +/- 2% or 0.2 sec
Velocity 0.01-2400.00 cm /sec +/- 4 %
1. The accuracies are calculated using following equations:
Distance error (2% or 2mm ) = Image Pixel error (1% or 1mm) + Hardware error
(1% or 1mm)
NOTE Time error (2% or 0.2 sec )= Image Pixel error (1% or 0.1 sec) + Hardware error
(1% or 0.1 sec)
Velocity error (4%)= Distance / Time
2. The phantom used is Multi-purpose phantom, RMI 413, from GAMMAX, Inc. USA
▐ Doppler Mode
Time 0.01-4.26 sec +/- 2% or 0.2 sec
Velocity 0.15-200.00 cm /sec +/- 15 %
1. The phantom used is Doppler phantom, RMI 1425A, from GAMMAX, Inc., USA.
2. The accuracies cited in the above table arise from the positioning of the cursors
NOTE on the Doppler display and subsequent measurements made. The velocity
tests can therefore be used to check these values since these are not
indicators of the underlying absolute velocity assurance. The absolute velocity
accuracy is tested using a series of phantom measurements.
Absolute Doppler Velocity Accuracy:

Accuracy is defined as the difference between a calibrated phantom velocity and that annotated as the tim
e-averaged mean by the system. The time-averaged mean is calculated as the average over a determined
period of time of the intensity-weighted mean of the spectrum. All probes have been tested to ensure that th
e time-averaged mean velocity falls within +/- 15% of that annotated on the phantom. Due to Doppler phant
om constraints, these tests have been conducted in the range 15 cm/sec to 110 cm/sec.
Basic Measurements
A specific distance, area, etc. can be measured by using scanned images or Freeze Mode.
Measurement methods may differ depending on the mode used.
Measurements Measurement Methods

2D Distance (Line)
2D Distance (Trace)
2D Hip Joint
Distance Measurement M Distance
Doppler Velocity
Doppler Velocity (A/B)
Doppler Trace
Circumference and Area 2D Ellipse
Measurement 2D Trace
3D Volume: 3 Distance
Volume Measurement 3D Volume: 1 Distance
3D Volume: Distance + Ellipse
Activating Basic Measurement Mode

Pressing the Measure button or the Freeze button on the control panel and the Measurement
by Application Menu will appear. Press the Caliper button on the touch screen to run the basic
measurement mode.
How to Activate Touch Screen Menu
Press the Measure

button. When the
Measurement by
Application Menu
appears press the Caliper
button.
Press the Freeze button.

When the Cine menu or
the Loop menu appears
press the Set button on
the control panel.
Press the Caliper button,

and the basic
measurement mode menu
will appear.
Basic Measurement Menu

You can change configurations regarding basic measurements. For more information, refer to
“Chapter 3 Settings” in this manual.
▌ Trace Back
When using the Manual Trace menu in Spectral Doppler Mode, you can perform the same
function by turning the Trackball to the left.
▌ Trackball Speed
The Trackball Speed menu is used for adjusting the speed of the Trackball on the control
panel.
▌ Exiting Measurement Mode

To finish measuring and return to diagnosis mode, press the Exit button on the control
panel or the Close button on the touch screen.
▌ Measurement Results
Printing Measurement Results
Press the Echo Print button on the control panel to print the results via an echo-printer.
Displaying Measurement Results
To move the measurement results, select the Result Set. up-down switch below the touch
screen in Measurement by Application Mode or Basic Measurement Mode.
[Figure 5.1 Displaying Measurement Results]

- Move Result
Moves the measurement results. Press the Set button to confirm the position.
- Save Settings
Saves the changed position of the measurement results. All subsequent measurement
results will appear in the saved position.
- Restore Default
Resets to the system default position.
Deleting Measurement Results
Press the Clear button on the control panel.
Distance Measurement
▌ 2D Distance: Measures the distance between two points
This measurement function can be performed in all diagnosis modes. The results are
displayed in cm (or mm). A maximum of four sets of measurements can be displayed
simultaneously.
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the 2D Distance button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the start point of the area to measure and
then press the Set button. Use the same method to assign the end point.
3. You can reset the position of the measurement area by pressing the Change button before
pressing the Set button.
4. After position setup, distance and average are displayed on the screen.
5. A new cursor will appear for a new measurement. If measuring distances more than
four times, the oldest distance measurement results will be replaced first.
The ratio of the first distance to the second, and the ratio of the third to the fourth are
calculated and displayed as percentages.
▌ Line Trace: Measures a non-straight distance between two points

This measurement function can be performed in all diagnosis modes. The results are
displayed in cm (or mm). A maximum of four sets of measurements can be displayed
simultaneously.
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the Line Trace button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at a point on the contour of the area to measure
and then press the Set button. Use the Trackball to draw the contour and then press
the Set button.
3. You can reset the position of the measurement area by pressing the Change button
before pressing the Set button. You can erase parts of the trace line by pressing the
Del key on the keyboard before pressing the Set button or by using Trace Back on the
touch screen.
4. After position setup, distance and average are displayed on the screen.
5. A new cursor will appear for a new measurement. If measuring distances more than
four times, the oldest distance measurement results will be replaced first.
The ratio of the first distance to the second, and the ratio of the third to the fourth are calculated
and displayed as percentages.
▌ 2D Hip Joint Measurement

This measurement is available in all diagnosis modes.
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the Hip Joint button on the touch screen.
before pressing the Set button.
4. Set the second and third lines of the Hip Joint in the same way.
5. After position setup, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.
6. A new cursor will appear for a new volume measurement. If measuring lines more than
four times, the oldest line measurement results will be recalculated first.
Apply the alpha angle (α) between the first line and the second line, and the beta angle (β)
between the first and the third to the table shown below, and calculate the type. Refer to the
table below for Hip Joint measurement results.
TYPE α β
1a 60 ≤ α＜ 90 0 ＜ β＜ 55
1b 60 ≤ α＜ 90 55 ≤ β＜ 90
2a/b 50 ≤ α＜ 60 0 ＜ β＜ 90
2c 43 ≤ α＜ 50 77 ≤ β＜ 90
d 43 ≤ α＜ 50 0 ＜ β＜ 77
3/4 0 ＜ α＜ 43
Circumference and Area Measurement

▌ Ellipse: Measures elliptical objects
This measurement function is available in all diagnosis modes. The measurement results
are displayed in cm or mm (circumference) or cm2 or mm2 (area). A maximum of four sets of
measurements can be displayed at one time. Average circumference and average area are
shown together. This tool is especially useful for bladder and prostate measurement. The
following shows the measurement formula and procedures.
1 ⎧⎪⎛ A ⎞ ⎛ B ⎞ ⎫⎪
2 2
Circ = 2π ⋅ ⋅ ⎨⎜ ⎟ + ⎜ ⎟ ⎬ , (A: Long axis, B : Short axis)

2 ⎪⎩⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎪⎭
Area = π × a × b , (a, b: Axis)
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the Ellipse button on the touch screen.
before pressing the Set button.
4. After the ellipse appears with the two points as an axis, adjust the shape (or another
axis) of the ellipse using the Trackball. Then, press the Set button.
6. A new cursor will appear for a new circumference or area measurement.
▌ Trace: Measures objects with irregular shapes

are displayed in cm or mm (circumference) or cm2 or mm2 (area). A maximum of four sets of
measurements can be displayed at one time. Average circumference and average area are
shown together. The following shows the measurement formula and procedures.
Circ = sum {X (n ) − X (n − 1)}2 + {Y (n ) − Y (n − 1)}2 , (N = 1,2… last point)

[ ]
Area = sum X (n − 1) × Y (n) − X (n) × Y (n − 1) , (N = 1,2… last point)
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the Trace button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at a point on the contour of the area to measure
and then press the Set button. Use the Trackball to draw the contour and then press
the Set button.
before pressing the Set button. You can erase parts of the trace line by pressing the
Del key on the keyboard before pressing the Set button or by using Trace Back on the
touch screen.
4. Trace ends when the cursor returns to the start point or when the Set button is
pressed. The measurement results will be displayed on the screen.
5. A new cursor will appear for a new circumference or area measurement.
Volume Measurement
▌ 3D Volume: 3 Distance: Measures using three distances (axes)
are displayed in cm3 (or mm3). The following shows the measurement formula and
procedures.
4 D D D
Vol = π ⋅ 1 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 3 , (D: distance)
3 2 2 2
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the 3 Dist button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball and Set button to measure three lines. Method for measuring a line
is the same as in “2D Distance Measurement.”
3. After measuring the length of the three lines, the measurement results are shown on
the screen.
4. A new cursor will appear for a new volume measurement.
▌ 3D Volume: 1 Distance: Measures using one distance (diameter)

are displayed in cm3 (or mm3). A maximum of four sets of measurements can be displayed
simultaneously. The following shows the measurement formula and procedures.
3
4 ⎛ D⎞
Vol = π ⋅ ⎜ ⎟ , (D: distance)
3 ⎝2⎠
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the 1 Dist button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball and Set button to measure one line. Method for measuring a line is
the same as in “2D Distance Measurement.”
3. Based on the line measured, the volume will be calculated and then be displayed.
▌ 3D Volume: Distance + Ellipse: Measures using one ellipse and one

distance
are displayed in cm3 (or mm3). A maximum of two sets of measurements can be displayed
simultaneously. The following shows the measurement formula and procedures.
π
Vol = × a × b × d , (a : Short axis , b : Long axis , d : Distance )
6
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the 1 Dist + 1 Ellipse button on the touch
screen.
2. Use the Trackball and Set button to measure one line. Method for measuring a line is
the same as in “2D Distance Measurement.”
3. After measuring one line, draw one ellipse. Method for drawing an ellipse is the same
as in “Ellipse Measurement.”
4. Based on the line and ellipse measured, the volume of the ellipse will be calculated
and then be displayed.
6. To measure the line and the ellipse from different perspectives,
- After measuring the line, press the Freeze button on the control panel to return to
diagnosis mode.
- Scan a new image and then press the Freeze button again to return to
measurement mode.
- When a new cursor appears on the screen, measure the ellipse.
- When in Dual Mode, which simultaneously displays two images on the screen,
the user can measure the volume without having to return to the diagnosis mode.
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations 5 - 11
Measurement in M Mode
▌ M Distance: Measures the distance, time interval, speed between two
points
Method for measuring distance in M Mode is the same as in “2D Mode.”
M Mode shows the changes occurring in the image according to time. If the distance (cm or
mm) between two points is measured, the time interval (sec), speed (cm/s or mm/s), etc.
can be checked. A maximum of four sets of measurements can be displayed simultaneously.
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the M Distance button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball and the Set button to measure the distance. Method for measuring
distance is the same as in “2D Distance (Line) Measurement.”
4. A new cursor will appear for a new measurement.
Measurement in Spectral Doppler Mode

Since a Spectral Doppler image is displayed in terms of time (X-axis) and
velocity (Y-axis), setting one point above the image will allow the velocity
NOTE to be checked.
Also, an additional line will appear to help more accurate positioning when
measuring a point.
Method for measuring distance in Spectral Doppler Mode is the same as in “2D Mode.”
▌ Doppler Velocity: Measures acceleration using the distance between

two points
The velocity (cm/s or mm/s), RI (Resistivity Index), velocity ratio (V1/V2), velocity change
(dV: cm/s or mm/s), time interval between two points (sec), and acceleration (Acc: cm/s2 or
mm/s2) are displayed.
A maximum of four sets of measurements can be displayed simultaneously. The following
shows the measurement formula and procedures.
V1 − V2
RI =
V1
dV = V2 − V1
(V2 − V1 ) dV
Acceleration = =
(T2 − T1 ) dT
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the Velocity button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball and the Set button to measure the distance. Method for measuring
distance is the same as in “2D Distance Measurement.”

4. A new cursor will appear for a velocity measurement.
▌ Doppler Velocity (A/B): Measures velocity ratio between two points

The velocity (cm/s or mm/s), the RI (Resistivity Index), and the velocity ratio between two
points (A/B) are displayed.
shows the measurement method.
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the A/B button on the touch screen.
before pressing the Set button. Here, the names of Point A and Point B may be
changed.
4. After the position setup, the velocity at each point and the velocity ratio between the
two points are displayed on the screen.
5. A new cursor will appear for a velocity measurement.
▌ Manual Trace: Measures average velocity using trace

The time duration value (dT: sec), integration value of blood flow velocity (VTI: cm or mm),
maximum velocity (Peak V: cm/s or mm/s), Mean G (mmHg), average velocity (Mean V:
cm/s or mm/s) are displayed.
shows the measurement formula and procedures.
dT = T2 − T1
VTI = ∫ v × dt , (VTI : Velocity Time Integral )
VTI
Mean V =
Duration of flow
1. Press the Caliper button and then press the Manual Trace button on the touch screen.
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the start point of the area to measure velocity
and then press the Set button. Use the Trackball to draw the contour on waveform to
measure velocity and then press the Set button.
3. You can erase parts of the trace line by turning the Trackball to the left before
pressing the Set button or by using Trace Back on the touch screen.
5. A new cursor will appear for a new measurement.
Calculations by Application
This product provides measurement packages according to each application such as Obstetrics,
Gynecology, Cardiology, Vascular, Urology and Fetal Echo.
Basics of Calculations by Application

▌ Before Taking Measurements
■ Check that the patient information has been entered. If not entered, press the Patient
button and enter the patient data.
■ Check that correct application and probe are selected for measurement. To change
the settings, press the Probe button to change the probe or application.
The calculation range of each measurement package varies with the

NOTE selected probe and application, so the correct probe and application must
be selected.
▌ Selecting Measurement Items

Use the up-down switch below Other Calc’s on the touch screen to change the application
and measurement item.
Press the button for the application to measure and then press the Return button or the
Return up-down switch to change the measurement item.
[Figure 5.2 Selecting Measurement Items]
Press the Set button on the control panel to select the obstetrics
NOTE measurement item or the fetal echo measurement item. Note that this
function is not available while taking measurements.
▌ Measurement Results
Printing Measurement Results
Press the Echo Print button on the control panel to print the results via an echo-printer.
Displaying Measurement Results
To move the measurement results, select the Result Set. up-down switch below the touch
screen in Measurement by Application Mode or Basic Measurement Mode.
[Figure 5.3 Displaying Measurement Results]
- Move Result
Moves the measurement results. Press the Set button to confirm the position.
- Save Settings
Saves the changed position of the measurement results. All subsequent measurement
results will appear in the saved position.
- Restore Default
Resets to the system default position.
Deleting Measurement Results
Press the Clear button on the control panel.
▌ Closing Measurement Menu

■ Press the Exit button on the control panel to exit the measurement menu.
■ Press the End Exam button and complete the measurement to save the results for
data management. Search for and select the information of the next patient. To
register a new patient and continue taking measurements for the patient, finish the
current measurements and then register a new patient.
▌ Trace Back
the knob-button below Trace Back on the touch screen left or right to delete the Trace
measuring line.
▌ Trackball Speed
Turn the knob-button below Trackball Speed on the touch screen to select Slow, Normal or
Fast.
▌ Undo
While taking measurements, press the Exit button on the control panel to cancel the
measurement process. To cancel a completed measurement process, select the up-down
switch below Undo on the touch screen. The last measured item will be deleted from the
screen.
▌ Distance Measurement
While using the Measure function, you can measure the distance between two points on
scanned images at any time. This function is identical to “2D Distance” in “Basic
Measurement Mode.” Press the Distance button on the touch screen to access it.
▌ Heart Rate Calculations

This can be measured in M Mode or Spectral Doppler Mode.
■ Press the Heart Rate button on the touch screen menu in measurement mode to
calculate the heart rate.
■ When the first baseline appears, place it at the starting position of the waveform and
press the Set button.
■ Turn the knob-button below HR Cycle to adjust the Cycle value. The Cycle value is
used for calculating the average value of the heart rate; the result becomes more
accurate for higher Cycle values.
■ When the second baseline appears, place it at the ending position of the waveform
and press the Set button.
■ The result will be calculated and be displayed on the screen.
▌ Measuring Doppler Spectrum

Trace the spectral waveform to measure PSV (Peak Systolic Velocity), EDV (End Diastolic
Velocity), Vmean, Gmean, Gpeak, S/D, PI (Pulsatility Index), RI (Resistivity Index), etc. in
Spectral Doppler Mode.
Methods for tracing spectral waveforms include Auto Trace, Limited Trace, and Manual
Trace. The value can also be obtained through itemized measurements.
Auto Trace: Automatically calculates Doppler Spectrum Cycle

1. Press the Measure button on the control panel after obtaining a desired image.
2. Press the Auto Trace button in the measurement menu. The spectral waveform will be
traced automatically and the measurement value will be calculated.
3. Various values such as PSV, EDV, TAM, Vmean, Gmean, Gpeak, S/D, PI, and RI will be
measured and be displayed on the screen.
Things to Consider for Frozen Doppler Spectrum Auto Trace

Under “Doppler trace mode” in Measure Setup, select All, Above or Below to specify the
direction of the spectrum to trace.
Take the following precautions when using the Frozen Automatic Doppler Trace function.
- If aliasing occurs because the PRF is too low in comparison to the velocity of the area
examined, the aliasing spectrum can be traced. Note that the distinction from non-
aliased spectrums must be clear.
- If peaks are uncertain or intermittent as in the spectral waveform in veins, tracing for
the waveform is possible, but peak values such as PSV cannot be obtained.
In this case, Max Velocity will be shown as the PSV and the “Doppler Spectrum Trace
Failed!” message will appear on the screen.
- If Doppler Gain is set too high or too low, meaningful spectrum distinction becomes
difficult and errors may occur in measurement results.
- If the spectrum is interfered by abnormal Doppler noise or artifact, tracing may fail. Adjust the
Threshold value on the touch screen to obtain appropriate contour.
- If PW Gain is changed for an image in the Freeze state, tracing may fail. Adjust the
Threshold value on the touch screen to obtain appropriate contour.
- If the CW 4M or CW 2M probe is in use, error(s) may occur in the results.
- When the application is set to Cardiac, Auto Trace is not supported for two-peak
spectrums such as Mitral Valve Inflow and Tricuspid Valve Inflow.
Limited Trace: Calculates Doppler Spectrum Cycle in Designated Range

2. Press the Limited Trace button in the measurement menu. The baseline will appear
on the spectral waveform.
3. Use the Trackball to place the baseline at the start point of the area to measure, and
press the Set button.
4. When the second baseline appears, place it at the ending position of the measurement
range and press the Set button.
5. To move the baseline, press the Change button to select the baseline. Reposition it
and then press the Set button.
6. “Limited Trace” will finish and the measurement value will be calculated.
7. Various values such as PSV, EDV, TAM, Vmean, Gmean, Gpeak, S/D, PI, and RI will
be measured and be displayed on the screen.

Manual Trace: Manually calculates Doppler Spectrum Cycle
2. Press the Manual Trace button in the measurement menu, and a + cursor will appear
3. Place the cursor at the start point of the spectrum to measure. Press the Set button
and then use the Trackball to trace the spectral waveform.
4. Press the Set button to finish Manual Trace. You can erase parts of the trace line by
turning the Trackball to the left before pressing the Set button or by using Trace Back
5. Various values such as PSV, EDV, Vmean, Gmean, Gpeak, S/D, PI, and RI will be
measured and be displayed on the screen.
Itemized Measurement: Calculates Doppler Spectrum Cycle by measuring PSV and

EDV
2. Select the PSV and EDV items in the measurement menu, and a + cursor will appear
3. Move the cursor to the systolic velocity point, and press Set button. Then, another +
cursor will appear.
4. Move the + cursor to the diastolic velocity point and press Set button.
5. Various values such as PSV, EDV, S/D and RI will be measured and be displayed on
the screen.
Doppler Measurement Items
Result Calculation Date Equation
PSV (Peak Systolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s

EDV (End Diastolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s
Vmean (Mean Velocity) Velocity Calculated cm/s
Gmean (Mean Gradient) Gradient mmHg
Gpeak (Peak Gradient) Calculation mmHg 4 Ｘ PSV Ｘ PSV
RI (Resistively Index) Calculation Ratio (PSV – EDV) / PSV
S/D (PSV/EDV) Calculation Ratio PSV / EDV
PI (Pulsatility Index) Calculation Ratio (PSV – EDV) / Vmean
TAM(Time Average Mean) Velocity cm/s
Fetal HR HR BPM HR = #beats Ｘ 60 / Time
▌ Volume Flow Measurement Method

■ Select Volume Flow in the measurement menu to measure related items and
calculate the volume flow value. The Volume Flow value can also be calculated by
measuring other items.
■ The following are formula for measuring Volume Flow.
- VolumeFlow( A) = Area × TAM × 60
π ×d2
- VolumeFlow( D) = × TAM × 60
4
■ Vessel Area and TAM values are used for calculating Volume Flow.
- There are two ways to measure Vessel Area: one uses the circumference
(Vessel Area) and the other uses the distance (Vessel Dist). For more
information on measurements, refer to “Basic Measurements.”
- The TAM (Time Avg. Mean Velocity) value is automatically calculated only when
using Auto trace or Limited trace. For more information on measurements, refer to
“Measuring Doppler Spectrum.”
▌ Measuring Stenosis %
■ There are two ways to obtain Stenosis %: %StA using the area and %StD using the
distance.
- %Stenosis Area. : Calculates stenosis ratio using the area of vessel.
1. Press the %StA button and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the area of the vessel outer wall using the Circ/Area measurement
method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the vessel inner wall
under stenosis.
4. %Stenosis Area. = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area × 100
- %Stenosis Dist. : Calculates stenosis ratio using the diameter of vessel
1. Press the %StD button and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the total diameter of the vessel using the Distance measurement
method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel inner
wall under stenosis.
4. %Stenosis Dist. = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance × 100
OB Calculations
▌ Before Obtaining OB Calculations
Entering Basic OB Information
Enter the information required for OB diagnosis in the Patient Information screen. The basic
OB information include LMP (Last Menstrual Period) and Gestations.
■ Once LMP is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are
calculated automatically. LMP is required for the calculation of values such as EDD
and SD in obstetrics measurement.
- EDD(LMP) = LMP + 280days
- GA(LMP) = Current System Date - LMP
■ A maximum of four fetuses can be entered in the Gestations menu. The default value
is '1'. In the case of twins, enter '2'.
For more information on the patient information menu items and method for entering patient
information, refer to “Entering Patient Information” in “Chapter 3 Settings” in this manual.
OB Measurement Menu Setup

Set up GA Equation, GA Table and OB measurement menus that are used in obstetrics
measurements. The user can manually write, back up and restore GA Tables. For more
information on GA Equation and Table, refer to the Reference Manual.
For more information on other measurement menu items and setup methods, refer to
'Setting Measurements' in "Chapter 3. Settings" in this manual.
▌ Measurement Items
Measurement items include Fetal Biometry, Fetal Cranium, Fetal Long Bones, AFI, etc.
■ Fetal Biometry includes GS, CRL, YS, BPD, OFD, HC, APD, TAD, MAD, AC, FTA, FL,
SL, TTD, APTD, and APTD * TTD, ThC.
■ Fetal Long Bones includes HUM, ULNA, TIB, RAD, FIB, CLAV, Vertebral and NB.
■ Fetal Cranium includes CEREB, OOD, IOD, CM, NF, NT, and Lateral Ventricle.
■ Fetal Others includes FOOT, EAR, MP, Left Kidney, Right Kidney, and Pelvis.
■ Doppler includes Umbilical Artery, MCA (Mid Cerebral Artery), Placenta Artery, Left
Uterine Artery, Right Uterine Artery, Left Fetal Carotids, Right Fetal Carotids, Fetal
Aorta, Ductus Venous, Volume Flow, and Fetal HR. Measurement items also include
PSV, EDV, Trace, Vmean, S/D, PI, RI, Gpeak, and Gmean. The Fetal HR item is also
included.
■ Measurement methods are the same as the basic measurement methods.
[Figure 5.4 OB Measurement Menu]
▌ Pregnancy Calculation
1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the obstetrics measurement menu
will appear on the touch screen.
2. Select the group for the desired measurement item or the measurement item itself. For
example, to measure BPD, select Biometry and then press the BPD button on the
sub-menu that appears.
3. Use the Trackball and the Set button on the control panel to take measurements.
Fetal Biometry and Fetal Long Bones extensively make use of distance measurements. HC
and AC utilize circumference measurements and FTA utilizes area measurements.
Measured items are automatically recorded in the report. The report contains the mean
value for the new GA value, and the recently measured values (up to separate 3 values).
(The value may not be accurate if the measurements were taken less than three times.) The
mean values are used for GA and EDD calculation, and are displayed on graphs.
Measuring Distance Measurement Item

■ BPD: Measures the maximum transverse diameter value when the thalamus appears
symmetrical against the midline.
■ OFD: Measures the distance between the front and the back of the head in the same condition
as in BPD.
■ CRL: Measures the long axis of the embryo from the head to the rump.
■ FL: Measures the length of the femur; measures the long axis of the femur closer to the probe.
■ MAD: Calculates the average values of transverse and anterior-posterior lengths of the fetal
abdomen.
MAD = (APD + TAD) / 2
Measuring Circumference Measurement Items

■ HC: Measures the circumference of the head when in the same condition as in BPD.
The HC measurement value is calculated automatically when the BPD and OFD items
are measured.
HC = π * ( BPD 2 + OFD 2 ) / 2
However, when Merz Reference is used, the following formula is used for calculation.
HC = 2.325 × BPD 2 + OFD 2
■ AC: Calculates abdominal circumference on the fetal transverse image when the
stomach and the DV (ductus venosus) are shown clearly. The AC measurement value
is calculated automatically when the APD and TAD items are measured. At this time,
position the cursor on the outside including the skin.
AC = π * ( APD 2 + TAD 2 ) / 2
However, when Merz Reference is used, the following formula is used for calculation.
AC = π × ( APD + TAD) / 2
■ FTA: Measures the fetal trunk area (chest or abdomen) on the fetal transverse image.
This value is calculated automatically when a circle is drawn using trace or ellipse.
FTA = AC 2 / 4 / π
For more information on measuring methods, refer to “Basic
NOTE
Measurements.”
Measurement Points
BPD, OFD, HC –fetal head
BPD HC
OFD
APD, TAD, APTD, TTD – fetal abdomen or fetal trunk
TTD, AC
TAD
APTD,
APD
FTA –fetal trunk
FL – fetal femur
Vertebral – fetal vertebrae
▌ Calculating Fetal Weight

■ The fetal weight is shown in units of g (Gram), oz (ounce) or Ib (pound) in 2D Mode
and Dual Mode.
■ The user can calculate the fetal weight by measuring one set from (BPD, AC), (BPD,
FL, FTA), (BPD, APTD, TTD, FL), (BPD, APTD, TTD, SL), (BPD, TTD), (AC, FL),
(BPD, AC, FL), (HC, AC, FL), (BPD, HC, AC, FL), (AC) or (BPD, APTD, TTD). For
example, if Obstetrics Setup (at the Measure Setup screen) is set to the Tokyo1
University method, measuring BPD, APTD and TTD displays the fetal weight on the
screen. For your information, the Osaka University and Tokyo University methods are
generally used in Asia, the Merz method in Europe, and the Shepard and Hadlock
methods in Americas.
■ Once all the GA values are measured, the fetal weight is automatically calculated and
displayed on the report. For information on formula for calculating the fetal weight,
refer to 'Estimated Fetal Weight Formula' in the Reference Manual.

▌ AFI Calculation Method
AFI is calculated by measuring each quadrant (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) from four images.
Measurements are performed by dividing the pregnant woman's abdomen into four
1.
quadrants. The distance between the fetus and the farthest point of each area is
measured.
2. Select and measure each quadrant, or press the All button to measure all the
quadrants in one instance.
3. To obtain the specific image from each quadrant plane, press the Freeze button to go
to the diagnosis mode. After obtaining the image, press Freeze button again to return
to the measurement mode.
4. The measurement values taken from each plane are added and displayed on the
screen.
MVP (Maximum Vertical Pocket) measures the diameter of an Amniotic Fluid Pocket.
[Figure 5.5 OB Measurement Menu – AFI]
▌ OB Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode

Measurements can be obtained by tracing or marking points over spectral waveforms in
Spectral Doppler images.
All of the measurement items are measured using the same method. The Volume Flow and
Stenosis of each area can be obtained. For more information on measurement methods,
refer to “Measuring Volume Flow.”
Menu Sub menu Result
Volume Flow Trace – Auto, Limited, Manual Doppler Waveform Trace

PSV Velocity
EDV Velocity
%StA Calculation
%StD Calculation
Vessel Area Area
Vessel Distance Distance

Umbilical Artery Same as above Same as above
MCA(Mid Cereb Artery) Same as above Same as above
Placenta Artery Same as above Same as above
Rt. / Lt. Uterine Artery Same as above Same as above
Renal Artery Same as above Same as above
Rt. / Lt. Fetal Carotids Same as above Same as above
Fetal Aorta Same as above Same as above
Ductus Venous Same as above Same as above
[Figure 5.6 OB Measurement Menu – Spectral Doppler Mode]
▌ Fetal HR Calculation
■ Press the Fetal HR button to calculate the heart rate.
press the Set button on the control panel.
■ Turn the knob-button below HR Cycle on the touch screen to adjust the Cycle value.
The Cycle value is used for calculating the average value of the heart rate; the result
becomes more accurate for higher Cycle values.
Fetal HR Fetal Heart Rate Time interval & No. of beats

Fetal Echo Calculations

▌ Before Obtaining Fetal Echo Calculations
For easier calculation processes, the method for calculating the volume of the fetus in M
Mode can be configured.
This measurement examines the fetal heart. Measurement methods are the same as the
basic measurement methods.
2D Mode 2D Echo, CTAR (Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio)
M Mode Fetal M Mode
MPA (Main Pulmonary Artery), Duct.Art (Ductus Arteriosus), IVC (Inferior

PW Spectral
Vena Cava), Duct.Vein (Ductus Venosus), Ascending Aorta, Descending
Doppler Mode
Aorta, MV Inflow, MV Regurg, TV Inflow, TV Regurg, PLI (Preload Index)
[Figure 5.7 Fetal Echo Measurement Menu]
▌ Fetal Echo Measurements in 2D Mode

1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the fetal echo measurement menu
2. Select the menu to measure, and a cursor appears on the screen.
The measurement methods of each menu are shown in the table below.
Menu Sub menu Input Meas.

Asc. Aorta (Ascending Aorta) Distance
MPA (Main Pulmonary Artery) Distance
Duct. Art (Ductus Arteriosus) Distance
Left Atrium Distance
Right Atrium Distance
Right Ventricle Distance
2D Echo
Inter Ventricular Septum Distance
Lt. Ventricle Dia.(Diastole) Distance
Lt. Ventricle Sys.(Systole) Distance
LVPW (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall) Distance
Heart Circ. (Circumference) Circ/Area
Thoracic Circ. (Circumference) Circ/Area
All (Distance)
ThAPD (Thorax Anteroposterior Diameter) Distance
ThTD (Thorax Transverse Diameter) Distance
HAPD (Heart AP Diameter) Distance
CTAR (Cardio-
HTD (Heart Transverse Diameter) Distance
Thorax Area Ratio)
All (Area)
ThA (Thorax Area) Area
HrtA (Heart Area) Area
CTAR (A) (Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio by Area) Area
■ Asc. Aorta (Ascending Aorta), MPA (Main Pulmonary Artery), Duct. Art (Ductus
Arteriosus), Lt. Atrium (Left Atrium), Rt. Atrium (Right Atrium), Rt. Ventricle (Right
Ventricle), IVS (Inter Ventricular Septum), LVDd (Left Ventricle Diameter Diastole),
LVDs (Left Ventricle Diameter Systole), and LVPW (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall) use
distance measuring methods.
■ Heart Circ. (Heart Circumference), and Thora Circ. (Thoracic Circumference) use
Circ/Area measuring methods.
■ The CTAR menu measures and compares the size of the fetal chest and heart. You
can obtain the comparison values by obtaining the Thorax AP Diameter, Thorax
Transverse Diameter, Heart AP Diameter, Heart Transverse Diameter values.
▌ Fetal Echo Measurements in M Mode

3. Use the Trackball and the Set button on the control panel to take measurements. The
user can measure all items in one instance or select and measure the specific items in
M Mode.
[Figure 5.8 Fetal Echo Measurement Menu – M Mode]
The table below shows measurement methods for menu items.
IVSd (Inter Ventricular Septal Thickness Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)

LVDd (Left Ventricle Diameter Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)
LVPWd (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension
Distance (Thickness)
Diastolic)
IVSs (Inter Ventricular Septal Thickness Systolic) Distance (Thickness)
Fetal M Mode
LVDs (Left Ventricle Diameter Systolic) Distance (Thickness)
LVPWs (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension
Distance (Thickness)
Systolic)
RVDd (Right Ventricle Diameter Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)
All (IVSd, LVDd, LVPWd, IVSs, LVDs, LVPWs) Same as above
■ The sub-menus of Fetal M-mode are measured as shown below.

- IVSd and IVSs measure AIVS and PIVS at the diastolic and systolic phases
respectively.
- LVDd and LVDs measure ENDO at the diastolic and systolic phases respectively.
- LVPWd and LVPWs measure EPI at the diastolic and systolic phases
respectively.
- AIVS: Anterior Interventricular Septum
PIVS: Posterior Interventricular Septum
ENDO: End cardinal Surface of Left Ventricular Wall
EPI: Epicardial Surface of Left Ventricular Wall
- RVDd is measured in the same way as in LVDd.
▌ Fetal Echo Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode

4. There are four measurement methods to measure MPA, Duct.Art, IVC, Duct.Vein,
Asc.Aorta, and Dsc.Aorta: Auto Trace, Limited Trace, Manual Trace, and
Measurement Each Item One by One.
Trace – Auto, Limited, Manual Doppler Waveform Trace

MPA (Main Pulmonary Artery) PSV Velocity
EDV Velocity
Ductua Arteriosus Same as above Same as above
Inferior Vena Cava Same as above Same as above
Ductus Venosus Same as above Same as above
Ascending Aorta Same as above Same as above
Descending Aorta Same as above Same as above
Peak E Velocity
MV (Mitral Valve) Inflow
Peak A Velocity
MV (Mitral Valve) Regurgitation Velocity Velocity
Peak E Velocity
Tricuspid Valve Inflow
Peak A Velocity
Tricuspid Valve Regurgitation Velocity Velocity
Systolic Flow Velocity
PLI (PreLoad Index) Diastolic Flow Velocity
Atrial Reversal Flow Velocity
■ Select Auto Trace to trace the image and calculate the measurement values
automatically.
■ Select Limited Trace, and the baseline will appear on the image. Set the start and end
points of the spectral waveform using the baseline, and the measurement value is
calculated automatically. The user can reposition the baseline by pressing the Change
button.
■ Select Manual Trace, and a cursor will appear on the image. Trace the Doppler
waveform, and the measurement value is calculated automatically.
■ The user can select and measure each item manually.
- PSV measures the Peak Systolic velocity.
- EDV measures the End Diastolic velocity.
- Peak E measures the Ventricular Systolic peak.
- Peak A measures the Atrial Systolic peak.
[Figure 5.9 Fetal Echo Measurement Menu – Spectral Doppler Mode]
▌ Fetal HR Calculation
■ Press the Fetal HR button to calculate the heart rate.
press the Set button on the control panel.
■ Turn the knob-button below HR Cycle on the touch screen to adjust the Cycle value.
The Cycle value is used for calculating the average value of the heart rate; the result
becomes more accurate for higher Cycle values.
Fetal HR Fetal Heart Rate Time interval & No. of beats

GYN Calculations
▌ Before Obtaining GYN Calculations
Enter the information required for GYN diagnosis in the Patient Information screen. Basic
Information for gynecology includes GRAVIDA, PARA, ABORTA, Exp. Ovul. and Day of
Cycle.
Measurement items include Uterus, Lt. Ovary, Rt. Ovary, Lt. Follicles, Rt. Follicles, Lt.
Ovarian A., Rt. Ovarian A., Lt. Uterine Artery, Rt. Uterine Artery, Cyst, and Mass. Lt. Ovarian
A., Rt. Ovarian A., Lt. Uterine Artery, Rt. Uterine Artery items are measured in Spectral
Doppler Mode and other items are measured in 2D Mode.
Measurement methods are the same as the basic measurement methods.
[Figure 5.10 GYN Measurement Menu]
▌ GYN Measurements
1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the gynecology measurement menu
Measurements can be obtained by tracing or marking points over spectral waveforms in

Spectral Doppler images.
The user can obtain various values such as PSV, EDV, Vmean, Gmean, Gpeak, S/D, PI
and RI from the spectral waveform. For more information on measurement methods, refer to
“Measuring Doppler Spectrum”.

Uterus Length, Height, Width 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Uterus Volume 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Uterus Endo. Thickness Distance
Cervix Length, Height, Width 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Cervix Volume 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Length, Height, Width 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Cyst
Volume 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Right / Left Ovary Same as above Same as above
Right / Left Follicle Required for One to 12 Follicles Distance
Length, Height, Width 3 Distance Volume Meas.
Mass 1/ 2/ 3
PSV Velocity
EDV Velocity
Endometrial Polyp Same as above Same as above
Right / Left
Same as above Same as above
Ovarian Tumor
Uterine Tumor 1/ 2/ 3 Same as above Same as above
Cervical Tumor Same as above Same as above
Ectopic Pregnancy Same as above Same as above
Right / Left Ovarian
PSV Velocity
Artery
EDV Velocity
Right / Left Uterine
Artery
Pericystic Flow Same as above Same as above
Endometrial Flow Same as above Same as above
When the Long axis image and Transverse axis image of the uterus are needed for
measuring volume, press the Freeze button on the control panel to return to scan mode and
obtain an image from another perspective.
Urology Calculations
▌ Before Obtaining Urololgy Calculations
For easier calculation processes, set Volume Method for use in calculations.
There are four Volume Methods, and the user can set the factor value for formulae that
require factor values.
■ Measures BLVOL (Bladder Volume), WGVOL (Whole Gland Prostate Volume), TZVOL
(Transitional Zone Prostate Volume), Residual Volume, Lt. Kidney Vol. and Rt. Kidney
Vol. in 2D Mode.
Also measures Vessel Area and Vessel Distance for calculating Volume Flow.
■ Residual Pre/Post and PSA Density Volume can be measured.
■ Measurement items in Spectral Doppler Mode are divided into Auto Trace, Limited
Trace and Manual Trace depending on the measurement method.
■ Measurement methods are the same as the basic measurement methods.
[Figure 5.11 Urology Measurement Menu]
▌ Volume Measurements
1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the urology measurement menu will
appear on the touch screen.
2. Select the required measurement item and menu, and a cursor appears on the screen.
There are two ways to measure in each menu: one is measuring the item values from one
image, and the other is measuring the item values from several images. The measurement
methods of each menu vary with the Volume Method set at the Setting screen.
■ If 3Distance or 3Distance * Factor is set in Urology Setup, three diameter values can
be obtained in order.

All
st
1 Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Bladder Volume nd
rd
3 Dia (Diameter) Distance
All
st
Whole Gland Prostate 1 Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Volume nd
3rd Dia (Diameter) Distance
Pre All
st
Pre 1 Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Pre 2nd Dia. (Diameter) Distance
rd
Pre 3 Dia (Diameter) Distance
Residual Volume
Post All
st
Post 1 Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Post 2nd Dia. (Diameter) Distance
rd
Post 3 Dia (Diameter) Distance
All
Transitional Zone 1st Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Prostate Volume nd
rd
All
1st Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Left (Right) Kidney nd
Volume
rd
Renal Pelvis Distance
■ If Ellipsoid is set in Urology Setup, Main Diameter and Beside Diameter values can be
obtained in order.

All
Bladder Volume Main Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Beside Dia. (Diameter) Distance
All
Whole Gland Prostate
Main Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Volume

Pre All
Pre Main Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Pre Beside Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Residual Volume
Post All
Post Main Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Post Beside Dia. (Diameter) Distance
All
Transitional Zone
Main Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Prostate Volume
All
Left (Right) Kidney Main Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Volume Beside Dia. (Diameter) Distance
Renal Pelvis Distance
■ If Sum of 20 Disks is set in Urology Setup, the user can calculate the measurement
values below by using the Trackball and the Set button to measure the prostate axis
after measuring the prostate circumference.

Bladder Volume Bladder Vol. 20 Diameter & Area
Whole Gland Prostate
Whole Gland Prostate Vol. 20 Diameter & Area
Volume
Pre Vol. 20 Diameter & Area
Residual Volume
Post Vol. 20 Diameter & Area
Transitional Zone
Transitional Zone Prostate Vol. 20 Diameter & Area
Prostate Volume
Left (Right) Kidney Left (Right) Kidney Vol. 20 Diameter & Area
Volume Renal Pelvis Distance
▌ Volume Flow Measurements

The Volume Flow menu is shown below. For more information, refer to “Measuring Volume
Flow.”

PSV Velocity
EDV Velocity
Volume Flow %StA Calculation
%StD Calculation
Vessel Area Area
▌ Measurements in Reports
Items such as Predicted PSA by WG, Predicted PSA by T-Zone, and Prostate Spec.
Antigen Density can be measured by entering PSA (Prostate Specific Antigen). PSA and
other values can be entered at “urology measurement settings” also.
Each measurement item can be measured while editing a report by pressing the Edit button
at a urology report.
Measuring Predicted PSA by WG
■ In the Predicted PSA by WG menu, enter the “PSA Correction factor” value.
■ PREDPSA will be calculated and be displayed on the screen.
■ PREDPSA = PSA correction factor×WGVOL
Measuring Predicted PSA by T-Zone

■ In the Predicted PSA by T-Zone menu, enter the “PSA Correction factor” value.
■ TZPSA will be calculated and be displayed on the screen.
■ TZPSA = PSA correction factor×TZVOL
Measuring Prostate Spec. Antigen Density

■ In the Prostate Spec. Antigen Density menu, enter the “PSA” value.
■ PSAD will be calculated and be displayed on the screen.
■ PSAD = PSA / WGVOL
Vascular Calculations
▌ Before Obtaining Vascular Calculations
For easier calculation processes, you can also set the Peak Velocity used in calculating 'A/B
Ratio' and 'ICA/CCA Ratio'.
The vascular measure package contains measurement items for each measurement area.
Vascular / Carotid Artery Measurement Menu
The Carotid Artery vascular measurement menu contains Subclavian, Proximal CCA, Mid
CCA, Distal CCA, Bulb, Proximal ICA, Mid ICA, Distal ICA, ECA, Vertebral, Volume Flow,
Heart Rate, etc.
Lower Extremities Measurement Menu
The Lower Extremities vascular measurement menu provides a measure package that
examines CIA (common iliac artery), IIA (internal iliac artery), EIA (external iliac artery), CFA
(common femoral artery), SFA (superficial femoral artery), DFA (deep femoral artery), POP
A (poplitieal artery), ATA (anterior tibial artery), PTA (posterior tibial artery), PA (peroneal
artery), DPA (dorsalis pedis artery), General, Volume Flow, Heart Rate, etc.
Upper Extremities Measurement Menu
The Upper Extremities vascular measurement menu provides a measure package that
examines Subclavian, Cephalic, Auxiliary, Brachial, Basilic, Radial, Ulnar, SPA, General,
Volume Flow, Heart Rate, etc.
Varicose Measurement Menu

The Varicose vascular measurement menu provides a measure package that examines FV
(Femoral vein), GSV (Great saphenous vein), POPV (poplitiear vein), General, SSV (Small
saphenous vein), etc.
All vascular measurements are taken using the same methods, which are identical to the
basic measurement methods. It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the
Spectral Doppler image.
[Figure 5.12 Vascular Measurement Menu]
▌ Vascular Measurements
1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the vascular measurement menu
2. Select the menu to measure and a cursor appears on the screen.

Trace –Auto, Limited, Manual Doppler Waveform Trace
PSV Velocity
Vascular(Carotid
EDV Velocity
Artery)
%StA Calculation
General
%StD Calculation
Vessel Area Area
IMT (Intima Media Thickness) Distance
Rt./ Lt. Subclavian Same as above Same as above

Rt./Lt. Prox CCA
(Proximal Common Carotid Artery)
Vascular(Carotid Artery)
Rt./Lt. Mid CCA Same as above Same as above

Rt./Lt. Distal CCA Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Bulb Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Prox ICA
(Proximal Internal Carotid Artery)
Rt./Lt. Mid ICA Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Distal ICA Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. ECA
(External Carotid Artery)
Rt./Lt. Vertebral Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. CIA (Common Iliac Artery Same as above Same as above

Rt./Lt. IIA (Internal IA) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. EIA (External IA) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. CFA
(Common Femoral Artery)
Lower Extremity
Rt./Lt. SFA (Superficial FA) Same as above Same as above

Rt./Lt. DFA (Deep FA) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. POPA (Popliteal Artery) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. ATA (Anterior Tibial Artery) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. PTA (Posterior Tibial Artery) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Peroneal A
(Peroneal Artery)
Rt./Lt. DPA (Dorsalis Pedis Artery) Same as above Same as above
General Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Subclavian A Same as above Same as above

Rt./Lt. Cephalic A Same as above Same as above
Upper Extremity
Rt./Lt. Auxiliary A
Rt./Lt. Brachial A Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Basilic A Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Radial A Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. Ulnar A Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. SPA
(Superficial Palmar Arches)

Trace –Auto, Limited, Manual Doppler Waveform Trace
Peak V Velocity
Rt./Lt. FV (Femoral Vein)
Dur T Time
Varicose
Rt./Lt. GSV (Great Saphenous

Vein)
Rt./Lt. POPV (Poplitiear Vein) Same as above Same as above
Rt./Lt. SSV
(Small Saphenous Vein)
■ The user can obtain various values such as PSV, EDV, Vmean, Gmean, Gpeak, S/D,
PI and RI from the spectral waveform in a Spectral Doppler image. For more
information on measurement methods, refer to “Measuring Doppler Spectrum”.
■ The Volume Flow and Stenosis % values for each measurement area can be obtained.
For more information on measurement methods, refer to “Measuring Volume Flow” and
“Measuring Stenosis%." The user can obtain the Volume Flow value using the TAM (Time
Average Mean Velocity) value obtained from the spectral waveform.
Cardiac Calculations
▌ Before Obtaining Cardiac Calculations
Enter the information required for cardiac diagnosis in the Patient Information screen. Basic
Information for cardiac includes Height, Weight and HR (Heart Rate). When the patient's
height and weight are entered, BSA (Body Surface Area) is automatically calculated and
displayed.
For more information on the patient information menu items and method for entering patient
information, refer to “Entering Patient Information” in “Chapter 3 Settings” in this manual.
[Figure 5.13 Cardiac Measurement Menu]
Measurement methods are the same as the basic measurement methods.
2D Measure, Ao/LA (Aorta/Left Atrium), LV (Left Ventricle) mass,

2D Mode
Simpson, Vol A/L (Area Length), LA (Left Atrial) Volume
AoV (Aortic Valve) Regurgitation, MV (Mitral Valve) Regurgitation, TV

Color Doppler Mode
(Tricuspid Valve) Regurgitation, PV (Pulmonary Valve) Regurgitation
Ao/LA (Aorta/Left Atrium), Lt. (Left) Ventricle, MV (Mitral Valve), Heart

M Mode
Rate
AoV (Aortic Valve) Systolic, AoV (Aortic Valve) Regurgitation, LVOT Dop-
pler, MV (Mitral Valve) Inflow, MV (Mitral Valve) Regurgitation, TV (Tri -
Spectral
cuspid Valve) Inflow, TV (Tricuspid Valve) Regurgitation, PV (Pulmonary
Doppler Mode
Valve) Systolic, PV (Pulmonary Valve) Regurgitation, Tei Index, Tissue
Doppler, Pulmonary Veins, Qp:Qs, Hepatic Vein, Heart Rate
▌ Cardiac Measurements in 2D Mode

1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the cardiac measurement menu will
IVSd (Inter Ventricular Septal thickness Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)

IVSs (Inter Ventricular Septal thickness Systolic) Distance (Thickness)
2D Measure
LVPWd (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)
LVPWs (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension Systolic) Distance (Thickness)
Ao-LA (Aorta-Left Atrium) Length
Ao/LA
LVOT Dia (Left Venticle Outflow Tract Diameter) Length
(Aorta/Left
Atrium) Ao Root Dia (Aorta Root Diameter) Length
LA Dia (Left Atrium Dimension) Length
Epi. Area (Epicardial) Area
LV (Left
Endo. Area (Endocardial) Area
Ventricle) Mass
LV Length (Left Ventricle Length) Distance
A4C Diastole 20 Diameter & Length
A4C Systole 20 Diameter & Length
Simpson
A2C Diastole 20 Diameter & Length
A2C Systole 20 Diameter & Length
Vol. A/L (Volume LV Vol. Diastole Area & Length
Area/Length) LV Vol. Systole Area & Length
A-P Distance
LA (Left
S-I Distance
Atrium) Vol.
M-L Distance
[2D Measure]
Take measurements for 2D Measure sub-menu items.
- IVSd and IVSs measure AIVS and PIVS at the diastolic and systolic phases
respectively.
- LVDd and LVDs measure ENDO at the diastolic and systolic phases respectively.
- LVPWd and LVPWs measure EPI at the diastolic and systolic phases respectively.
NOTE AIVS: Anterior Interventricular Septum

PIVS: Posterior Interventricular Septum

ENDO: Endocardinal Surface of Left Ventricular Wall
EPI: Epicardial Surface of Left Ventricular Wall
[Ao/LA]
The sub-menus of Ao/LA are measured as shown below.
- The Ao-LA menu measures Ao Root Dia and LA Dia.
- LVOT Dia measures the point of Aortic Valve Annulus.
- Ao Root Dia measures the distance between the Anterior Aortic Wall and Posterior
Aortic Wall.
- LA Dia measures the distance between the Posterior Aortic Wall and Left Arterial Wall.
[LV Mass]
When measuring LV Mass, the user can obtain the images at different angles needed for
the sub-menus by using the Freeze button on the control panel. Dual Mode is useful for
measuring LV Mass as it shows two images simultaneously.
- LV (Left Ventricle) is used only when measuring mass. It can be measured only in the
case of the diastole of Left Ventricle.
- Myocardial thickness = SQRT(Dia.A / Pi) – SQRT(Sys.A / Pi)
[Simpson] and [Vol. A/L]

Measures the cardiac circumference and axis.
- 20 Diameter & Length: Trace the cardiac circumference when the cursor for tracing
area appears, and draw the cardiac axis when the cursor for measuring length
appears. The heart is divided in 20 sections from the axis for calculation.
- [LA Vol.]
Measures the left arterial volume. The sub-menus Diam1, Diam2 and Diam3 measure
anterior-posterior, inferior-superior and lateral-medial distances for the left atrium,
respectively.
▌ Cardiac Measurements in M Mode

3. Use the Trackball and the Set button on the control panel to take measurements. The
user can measure all items in one instance or select and measure the specific items in
M Mode.
Ao Root Dia (Aortic Root Dimension) Distance

AoV Cusp Sep. (Aortic Valve Cusp Separation) Distance
Ao/LA
LA Dia (Left Atrial Dimension) Distance
(Aorta/Left
Atrium) LV PET (Left Ventricle Pre Eject Time) Time
LV ET (Left Ventricle Eject Time) Time
All Same as above
IVSd (Inter Ventricular Septal thickness Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)
LVPWd (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)
IVSs (Inter Ventricular Septal thickness Systolic) Distance (Thickness)
Lt. Ventricle
LVPWs (Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension Systolic) Distance (Thickness)
RVDd (Right Ventricle Diameter Diastolic) Distance (Thickness)
All Same as above
A-C Interval Time interval
D-E (D – E Excursion) Distance
MV (Mitral
E-F Slope Slope (Velocity)
Valve)
EPSS (E Point Septal Separation) Distance (Thickness)
All Points Same as above
Time interval
Heart Rate Heart Rate
& No. of beats
[Ao/LA]
- Ao Root Dia measures the distance between the Anterior Aortic Wall and Posterior
Aortic Wall.
- AoV Cusp Sep. measures the distance between the Coronary Cusp and Non
Coronary Cusp.
- LA Dia measures the distance between the Posterior Aortic Wall and Left Arterial Wall.
- LV PET measures the distance between the ECG's Q Wave and Aortic Valve Opening.
- LV ET measures the distance between the Aortic Valve Opening and Aortic Valve
Closing.
[Lt. Ventricle]
- The Lt. Ventricle sub-menus are measured in the same way as in 2D Measure.
- RVDd is measured in the same way as in LVDd.
[MV]
- A-C Interval calculates the time duration by measuring the distance between the A
point and C point in the Mitral Valve measurement screen.
- D-E measures the distance between the E point of the Anterior Mitral Valve and the D
point of the Mitral Valve Opening.

- E-F Slope calculates the velocity by measuring the distance between the E point and
F point in the Mitral Valve measurement screen.
- EPSS measures the distance between the E point in the Mitral Valve and Posterior
Interventricular Septum. The user can measure only in the upper direction of the E
point, and only in the lower direction in Apex.
[Figure 5.14 Cardiac Measurement Menu – M Mode]
▌ Cardiac Measurements in Color Doppler Mode

AoV (Aortic Valve) PISA (Proximal Isovelocity Surface Area) Radius Distance
Regurg PISA-Alias Vel. Velocity
MV (Mitral Valve) PISA-Radius Distance
Regurg PISA-Alias Vel. Velocity
TV (Tricuspid PISA Radius Distance
Valve) Regurg PISA-Alias Vel. Velocity
PV (Pulmonary PISA Radius Distance
Valve) Regurg PISA-Alias Vel. Velocity
[PISA-Radius]
Measures the distance between Valve and First Isovelocity.
[PISA-Alias Vel.]
Multiplies the result value of PISA-Radius by the regurgitated peak velocity.
The velocity value is needed to measure the items above. So select Velocity or Vel + Var as
the color display. For more information on settings, refer to “Changing Color Image Format”
in “Chapter 4. Diagnosis Modes” in this manual.
[Figure 5.15 Cardiac Measurement Menu – Color Doppler Mode]
▌ Cardiac Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode


Peak V (Velocity) Velocity
PHT (Pressure Half Time) Time or Calculated from Trace
AoV (Aortic Valve)
VTI (Velocity Time Integral) Calculated
Systolic
Acc (Acceleration) Time Time or Calculated from Trace
Ejection (Ejection) Time Time
R-R Interval (Rate-Rate Interval) Time Interval & No. of beats
Trace –Limited, Manual Doppler Waveform Trace
AoV (Aortic Valve) Peak V (Velocity) Velocity
Regurg VTI (Velocity Time Integral) Calculated
LVOT (Left Trace – Auto, Limited, Manual Doppler Waveform Trace
Ventricular Outflow Peak V (Velocity) Velocity
Tract) Doppler
Dia (Diameter) Distance

Peak E Velocity
Peak A Velocity
E (Peak) – DT (Dec Time) - A (Peak) Velocity & Time
MV (Mitral Valve)
Acc (Acceleration Time) Time or Calculated from Trace
Inflow
Dec (Deceleration Time) Time or Calculated from Trace
IVRT (IsoVolumic Relaxation Time) Time
MV (Mitral Valve)
Regurg
Peak E Velocity
Peak A Velocity
TV (Tricuspid
Valve) Inflow
TV (Tricuspid
Valve) Regurg
PV Systolic PHT (Pressure Half Time) Time or Calculated from Trace
PV Regurg
MCO Time
Tei Index Ejection Time Time
All Time
Tissue Doppler Peak E’ Velocity
Tissue Doppler Peak A’ Velocity
Peak S Velocity

IVCT (IsoVolume Contraction Time) Time or Calculated from Trace
IVRT (IsoVolume Relaxation Time) Time or Calculated from Trace
Dias Vel. (Diastolic Velocity) Velocity
Plum. Veins Sys Vel. (Systolic Velocity) Velocity
(Pulmonary Veins) A. Rev Vel. (Artery Reversal Velocity) Velocity
A. Rev Dur. (Artery Reversal Duration) Time
Sys. VTI ([Systemic] Flow Area Trace) Calculated
Sys. HR ([Systemic] Heart Rate) Heart Rate
Sys. Dia ([Systemic] Outflow Tract Diameter) Diameter
Qp:Qs
Pulm. VTI ([Pulmonic] Flow Area Trace) Calculated
Pulm. HR ([Pulmonic] Heart Rate) Heart Rate
Pulm. Dia ([Pulmonic] Outflow Tract Diameter) Diameter
All Diastolic, Systolic, Reversal
Diastolic Velocity
Hepatic Vein
Systolic Velocity
Reversal Velocity
Heart Rate Heart Rate Time interval & No. of beats
NOTE The Auto Trace function is not provided in MV Inflow and TV Inflow.
■ There are four ways to measure LVOT Doppler, MV Inflow / MV Regurgitation, AoV
Systolic / AoV Regurgitation, TV Inflow / TV Regurgitation, PV Systolic / PV
Regurgitation: Auto Trace, Limited Trace, Manual Trace, Measurement Each Item One
by One.
PI, RI, SV and CO. For more information on measurement methods, refer to
“Measuring Doppler Spectrum”.
■ Peak values, Acc Time, Dec Time, Ejection Time, VTI, PHT, R-R Interval, etc. are
automatically measured by tracing the PW Spectral Doppler image. Each item can
also be selectively measured.
- E-DT-A measures Peak E, Dec Time, and Peak A in one instance.
- Peak V: Measures the Higher Velocity value.
- Peak E: Measures the Ventricular Systolic peak.
- Peak A: Measures the Atrial Systolic peak.
- Acc Time measures the time duration when blood flow is accelerated and Dec
Time measures the time duration when blood flow is decelerated.
- Ejection: Measures the time duration by measuring the distance between the
Aortic Valve Opening and Aortic Valve Closing.
- VTI: Calculates the value using the formula of VTI = Sum of Vi ( (t after tracing
the Spectral Doppler image.

- PHT: Calculates Half-Time using the Pressure gradient value obtained between
the E point of Valve and the baseline.
- R-R Interval: Measures the distance between consecutive R waves on the ECG.
■ [LVOT Doppler]
Measure Left Ventricular Outflow. Its sub-menu Dia measures the Aortic Valve
Annulus point in the 2D image.
■ In the sub-menus of [Tei Index], [MCO] measures the mitral valve closed-open time,
and [ET] measures the ejection time.
■ In the sub-menu of Tissue Doppler, Peak S measures the systolic peak, and IVCT and IVRT
measure Isovolumic Contraction and Isovolumic Relaxation phases, respectively.
■ The sub-menus of Plum. Veins are measured as shown below:
- Dias Vel. and Sys Vel. measure the velocity at the diastole and systolic phases.
- A. Rev Vel. measures the Peak Velocity at Atrial Reversal.
- A. Rev Dur. measures the time duration by measuring the distance between the
Mitral Valve Closing and the heart diastole phase.
■ The sub-menus of Qp:Qs are measured as shown below.
- Sys. VTI and Pulm. VTI measure the VTI by tracing LVOT Flow and RVOT Flow
respectively.
- Sys. HR and Plum. HR measure the heart rate by measuring the diastole phase
and systolic phase respectively in LVOT Flow and RVOT Flow.
- Sys. Dia and Plum. Dia measures the Outflow Tract distance in the 2D images
of LVOT Flow and RVOT Flow, respectively.
■ Hepatic Vein is the menu used for measuring hepatic vein.
- Diastolic, Systolic and Reversal measure the peak velocity at diastolic phase,
systolic phase, and reversal phase respectively.
[Figure 5.16 Cardiac Measurement Menu – Spectral Doppler Mode]

Radiology Calculation
Aorta, Celiac Artery, Hepatic Artery, Splenic Artery, Spleen Volume, SMA (Superior
Mesenteric Artery), IMA (Inferior Mesenteric Artery), IVC (Inferior Vena Cave), Lt. Kidney
Volume, Rt. Kidney Volume, Lt. Renal Artery, Rt. Renal Artery, Lt. Arcuate Artery, Rt.
Arcuate Artery, Heart Rate
All measurements are taken using the same methods, which are identical to the basic
measurement methods.
It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
[Figure 5.17 Radiology Measurement Menu]
▌ Radiology Measurements
1. Press the Manual button on the control panel and the radiology measurement menu

PSV Velocity
EDV Velocity
Aorta %StA Calculation
%StD Calculation
Vessel Area Area
Celiac Artery Same as above Same as above

Hepatic Artery Same as above Same as above
Splenic Artery Same as above Same as above
SMA (Superior Mesenteric Artery) Same as above Same as above
IMA (Inferior Mesenteric Artery) Same as above Same as above
IVC (Inferior Mesenteric Artery) Same as above Same as above
Right / Left Renal Artery Same as above Same as above
Right / Left Arcuate Artery Same as above Same as above
All
Height Distance
Spleen Volume
Width Distance
Length Distance
Right / Left Kidney Volume Same as above Same as above
PI and RI from the spectral waveform in a Spectral Doppler image. For more
information on measurement methods, refer to “Measuring Doppler Spectrum”.
■ The Volume Flow and Stenosis % values for each measurement area can be obtained.
For more information on measurement methods, refer to “Measuring Volume Flow” and
“Measuring Stenosis%." The user can obtain the Volume Flow value using the TAM (Time
Average Mean Velocity) value obtained from the spectral waveform.
Report
Measurement and calculation results can be viewed in the report for each application.
■ Press the Report button on the control panel to check the report of a specific
application.
■ Select Next App. on the touch screen to search/view reports for other applications.
Reports for applications that have not been measured will not be shown.
■ Select Exit on the main screen to close the report and return to diagnosis mode.
Alternatively, press the Exit button on the control panel or the Exit button on the touch
screen.
■ The following figure shows a report example.
[Figure 5.18 Report Screen]
Report Functions
▌ Viewing Report
The measurement items and their calculation results are displayed.
When the report screen has two or more pages, use PgUp and PgDn at the bottom of the
report screen to navigate through the pages.
▌ Editing Report
Select Edit at the report screen or on the touch screen and then edit desired information.
After editing, press OK to return to the original report screen, and the edited values will be
shown in the [ ] brackets in the report.
▌ Adding Comments on Report

Press the Comment button at the report screen or on the touch screen to enter additional
information on the values shown in the report. After entering the information, press OK to
return to the report screen.
▌ Printing out Report

Select Print at the report screen or the touch screen.
▌ Transferring Report
■ This command transfers the report data over the RS232C communication cable. Press
the Transfer button at the report screen or on the touch screen after finishing
measurements.
■ Under the Peripherals tab at the Setting screen, select Open Line Transfer for Serial
Port, and then connect the RS232C cable to the port.
If the operating system of the PC connected to this system via
NOTE the RS-232C Cable is Windows XPTM, errors may be caused during
transferring.
▌ Saving Report
Select the Save button on the control panel. You can view and manage saved reports in
SonoView.
Graph Function
■ Press the Graph button at the report screen or on the touch screen to view Graph,
History, or SD information.
■ In order to view the information, patient ID and LMP must be entered in patient
information and range values must be set for GA table, Fetal Growth table, and Fetal
Growth table.
■ This function is used for displaying GA values such as BPD, HC, AC and FL, allowing
the user to diagnose fetal growth.
■ This function can be used only in OB reports.
[Figure 5.19 Graph]

Patient name, ID and LMP must be entered in order for graphs and reports
NOTE
to be saved in the HDD automatically.
▌ Viewing Graph
1. Recently measured values are displayed as graphs. Graphs are drawn against
gestation period (week) or fetal size (mm).
2. G.A. values, including the fetal weight, are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Use
the Trackball and the Set button to select a desired item and its graph will appear.
3. Press the Report button to return to the report screen.
4. Press the Exit button at the graph screen or the Exit button on the control panel to return
to diagnosis mode.
※ Standard Deviation & Percentile
Among OB information, the Growth Table and the typical fetal distribution for the same number
of weeks are used to determine the following information:
- The normal distribution curve.
- The measurements for an actual fetus or a position in EFW distribution.
- Whether a distribution point is within the normal range.
The reference number of weeks for the Growth Table can be set to LMP, Estab. DD or Average
US GA under [Pctl.Criteria]. The typical setting is LMP.
When LMP is not known or uncertain, or when the difference between LMP and Average US GA
is substantial, care must be taken, as selecting different [Pctl.Criteria] can result in a significant
difference.
When represented by SD, a point near the average indicates a value closer to ±0 SD and a poin
t away from the average indicates a value closer to the maximum or minimum value. The greate
r part of the range falls within ±3 SD, and ±1 SD represents 68.3% of the entire range. Thus it c
an be seen that most fetal measurements are tightly clustered around the average value.
The Percentile represents a point in distribution from between 0 and 100 inclusive. Therefore, th
e average point is represented as 50 Percentile.
[Figure 5.20 The distribution of the Growth Table for the selected number of weeks
(m: Average, σ: Standard Deviation)]
As shown in the figure, the average point corresponds to 0 SD (that is, 50 Percentile). If a point i
s in the range between -1 SD and +1 SD, it falls within 68.3% of the entire range. This means th
at the point falls within the range between 16 and 84.
Further, if a point is in the range between -2 SD and +2 SD, it falls within 95.5% of the entire ran
ge. Thus, the point falls in the range between 3 and 97.
SD and Percentile are interchangeable. Percentile can be used when a fetal measurement ranki
ng is desired, and SD can be used when the distance between actual fetal measurements and t
he average measurement is sought.
While the range of Growth Table references that are primarily used with OB measurement data
varies depending on the user, the typical range accepted by most users is as below:
1) When references are created based on SD:
-2.0 SD - +2.0 SD (when converted to Percentile: 2.28 Percentile - 97.72 Percentile)

2) When references are created based on Percentile:
2.5 Percentile - 97.5 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.96 SD - 1.96 SD)
Chapter 6
Image Management
REVIEWING IMAGES .................................................................................................... 2
Saving and Viewing Cine Images............................................................................................. 2
Reviewing Cine Images in Dual Live Mode .............................................................................. 3
Cine Image Function in Multi-Image......................................................................................... 4
Saving and Viewing Loop Images ............................................................................................ 4
ANNOTATING IMAGES ................................................................................................. 5

Typing Text ............................................................................................................................... 5
Displaying Body Marker............................................................................................................ 8
Displaying Indicator .................................................................................................................. 9
SAVING AND TRANSFERRING IMAGES ................................................................... 11

Saving Images ........................................................................................................................ 11
Transferring Images................................................................................................................ 11
PRINTING AND RECORDING IMAGES ...................................................................... 12

Printing Images ....................................................................................................................... 12
Recording Images................................................................................................................... 12
SONOVIEW.................................................................................................................. 14
Using SonoView ..................................................................................................................... 14
Patient Exam List .................................................................................................................... 15
Viewing Images – View Mode................................................................................................. 20
Tools ....................................................................................................................................... 22
Reviewing Images
2D Mode screens, M Mode screens, ECG information and other images can be saved on the
system automatically and be retrieved by the user whenever necessary.
Saving and Viewing Cine Images

Press the Freeze button after diagnosis to change to the Cine Memory function. Turn the
Trackball left/right at the frozen screen to navigate the previous images back/forward. Numbers
and locations of images saved so far are indicated across the top of the screen.
The Cine Image menu screen is illustrated below.
[Figure 6.1 Cine Image]
▌ Reviewing Cine Images

Manual Image Examination
Use the Trackball to review images manually. Turn the Trackball left/right to display the
images saved in Cine Memory frame by frame.
Automatic Image Examination

Press the Auto Run button on the touch screen to automatically review the images saved
in Cine Memory. The saved Cine images are displayed automatically.
Press the Auto Run button again to stop the automatic image examination.
Use the up-down switch below Run Speed on the touch screen to adjust the time for each
frame.
Chapter 6 Image Management 6 - 3
▌ Saving Cine Images

Press the Cine Save button on the touch screen to save Cine images. You can use
SonoView to search and/or manage Cine images.
The number of saved images is 256, including the currently frozen image.
Setting Range for Saving Cine Images

When saving Cine images, pres the Cine Edit button on the touch screen to set the save
range.
The progress bar indicating the save range will appear on the screen. Use the Trackball
and the Set button on the control panel to set the save range.
Use the Change button to select “Start Pos” and “End Pos” and then use the knob-buttons
below Start Pos and End Pos to set the save range.
To search Cine images easily and conveniently, use Position Step on the touch screen.
Set the step, and Cine image jumps according to the value of the step between start
position and end position.
Maximum of 2,048 images can be saved. Note that the saving process will take longer
when there are many images to save.
Saving ECG Position
If the Save with ECG Pos. button is selected, the ECG Cine mark will also be saved when
saving Cine images with ECG. The ECG Cine mark indicates the relative position of the
Cine image on the screen on the ECG wave.
▌ RD Zoom Function
Read Zoom is one of the image zooming functions. It works in 2D Mode, Color Doppler
Mode, and Power Doppler Mode but not in Dual Mode and Loop Mode.
Turn the knob-button below the menu to run the Read Zoom function and zoom the image
in Scan Mode.
▌ Display Function
When reviewing Cine images in Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler Mode, you can set
the images displayed as Color or B/W.
You can select Color + B/W, Color Only, or B/W Only for the display type.
Use the up-down switch below Display on the touch screen to change the display format.
Reviewing Cine Images in Dual Live Mode

You can use the same methods as in basic modes to review Cine images in Dual Live Mode.
You cannot review the image on the left and the image on the right individually because they
are identical to each other.
Cine Image Function in Multi-Image

In Dual Mode, both active and frozen images are displayed simultaneously on the screen.
The frozen image is displayed on the left in Dual Mode. Press the Freeze button while scanning
the image on the right. The image on the right will stop and the Cine image will be applied to the
image on the right. To apply the Cine image on the image on the left, press the Update button,
the Set button or the Dual button on the control panel to activate the image on the left.
Saving and Viewing Loop Images

Images examined in M Mode or PW Spectral Doppler Mode are saved as Loop images. Press the
Freeze button on the control panel to freeze the image being scanned and view the Loop image.
Press the Change button on the control panel select the Cine image function and the Loop
image function. The current function will be indicated at the upper left-hand corner of the screen.
Alternatively, you can select the functions by using the Cine button or the Loop button on the
touch screen.
The Loop Image menu screen is illustrated below.
[Figure 6.2 Loop Image]
▌ Reviewing Loop Images

Manual Image Examination
Use the Trackball to review images manually. Turn the Trackball left/right to display the
images saved in Loop Memory along the time axis.
Automatic Image Examination

Press the Auto Run button on the touch screen to automatically review the images saved
in Loop Memory. The saved Loop images are displayed automatically.
Press the Auto Run button again to stop the automatic image examination.
Annotating Images
Typing Text
Press the Text button on the control panel to enter Annotation Mode.
Use the alphanumeric keyboard on the control panel to input text and use the Trackball to
move the cursor.
After entering text, press the Exit button or the Text button on the control panel to exit
Annotation Mode.
[Figure 6.3 Annotation Mode]
▌ Positioning the Cursor

Functions of the arrow keys on the keyboard in Annotation Mode are listed below.
Moves the cursor position up by one row on the same

[↑] Key
column of the current cursor.
Moves the cursor position down by one row on the same
[↓] Key
column of the current cursor.
Moves the cursor position to the left by one column on
[←] Key
the same row of the current cursor.
Moves the cursor position to the right by one column on
[→] Key
the same row of the current cursor.
- Use the up-down switch below Home Set to save the current position. The saved
position will remain unchanged after the system restarts.
- Use the up-down switch below Home to move the cursor to the saved position.
- You can select a text block and move it with the Trackball.
▌ Selecting Font
- Selecting Font: Use the knob-button below Font Name. The available fonts are Arial,
Comic Sans MS, Courier New, Georgia, Impact, Lucida Console, Microsoft Sans Serif
Regular, Palatino Linotype, Tahoma, Times New Roman, Trebuchet MS and Verdana.
- Changing Font Size: Use the knob-button below Font Size. The available font sizes
are 11pt - 30pt.
- Changing Font Color: Use the up-down switch below Font Color. The available font
colors are Black, Green, Olive, Navy, Purple, Teal, Gray, Silver, Red, Lime, Yellow,
Blue, Aqua and White.
▌ Deleting Text
Press the Text Clear button on the touch screen to delete text on the screen.
- When waiting for text input, all text on the screen is deleted.
- While text is being typed in, only the word with the cursor on it is deleted.
- When a text block is selected, only the selected text is deleted.
Pressing the Clear button on the control panel deletes all text on the screen.
▌ Annotating from Touch Screen

You can enter a frequently used word via the touch screen without having to type it.
Press one of the buttons displayed on the touch screen to enter a desired word.
Each measurement category has its own set of words as shown in the table below. These
words can also be user-edited.
Lt Rt Liver
GB Pancreas Spleen
Abdomen
Kidney Aorta IVC
CBD Mass Cirrhosis
Lt Rt Amnion
Uterus Ovary Placenta
OB & GYN
Umblical A Uterian A MCA
Tumor Cyst Myoma
Lt Rt Thyroid
Breast Testis Scrotum
Small Part
Muscle Ligament Tendon
Mass Cyst Nodule
Lt Rt Vertebral
CCA ECA ICA
Vascular
Artery Vein IMT
Aneurysm Varicosis Stenosis
Lt Rt Hand
Face Lip Foot
3D
Heart Bladder Spine
Cord Eye Ear
Editing Touch Screen Word List

- Press the Application button on the touch screen to select the exam category that
contains the word to edit.
- The words provided for each application appear on the screen.
- Select the button for the word to edit and press the Text Edit button.
- After editing the word, press the OK button to save the change.
Editing the name of application on the Touch Screen

- Press the Application button on the touch screen. Text Application screen is
appeared on the touch screen.
- Press the Name Edit and select the application to change its name.
- The window of Enter Application Name is showed up on the monitor. Change or Edit
the name of application.
- Press the Ok to save and finish the change. Or press the Cancel to cancel and exit
the editing name.
[Figure 6.4 Text Edit]
▌ Annotating with Brief Word Function

The Brief Word function is provided to facilitate easier annotation task. This function allows
you to enter texts faster and easier.
For example, if using the Brief Word function to entering the text “Tumor,” you only need to
enter “Tu” and the system will automatically search for the word “Tumor” from the brief word
list and enter it.
To use the Brief Word function in Annotation Mode, select Brief under the Misc. tab on the
Setting screen.
If the Brief Word function is in use, the brief word window shown below will appear on the
screen.
Editing Brief Word List

You can add, modify or delete the default brief word list provided with the system.
- To edit the brief word list, press the Brief Edit button below the Misc. tab on the
Setting screen.
- Press the New button to add a new brief word, or press the Delete button to delete a
brief word.
- Select a brief word to modify and modify the word at the input field at the bottom of the
screen. Changes will be applied immediately.
[Figure 6.5 Brief Edit Dialog Box]
Displaying Body Marker

Press the Body Marker button on the control panel to switch to Body Marker Input Mode.
[Figure 6.6 Body Marker Input Mode]
NOTE Refer to ‘ Chapter 3. Settings’ for how to setup the body marker.
Body markers will appear on the touch screen. When the number of body markers is over one
page, you can change the page of the body marker by using the up-down switch below the
Page.
The types of body markers displayed on the touch screen will vary depending on the application
selected. Change the application with the up-down switch below the Application, and the types
of body markers on the touch screen will be changed.
Press the Body Marker button and the body marker will be placed on the image.
- Use the Trackball to move the probe cursor to the position where body marker will be
placed.
- Use the Angle knob-button on the control panel to adjust the angle of the probe cursor.
- Press the Set button or the Exit button on the control panel to exit Body Marker Mode.
▌ Changing Body Marker Position

Press the Change button on the control panel.
Use the Trackball to move the body marker to a desired position.
Press the Change button on the control panel again to confirm the new position.
▌ Deleting Body Marker

Press the Clear button on the control panel or the touch screen.
Displaying Indicator
Press the Indicator button on the control panel and the arrow-shaped indicator will appear.
- To change the shape of the indicator, select a desired cursor on the touch screen.
- Use the knob-button below Rotate on the touch screen to adjust the indicator direction.
- Press the Exit button or the Indicator button on the control panel to exit Indicator
Mode.
[Figure 6.7 Indicator]

▌ Deleting Indicator
To delete all indicators on the screen, press the Clear button on the control panel or the
Indicator Clear button on the touch screen.
To delete indicators one by one, use the up-down switch below Undo on the touch screen.
Flip the up-down switch up and down to delete recently entered indicators one by one in
order.
Once deleted, indicators cannot be restored.
Saving and Transferring Images
Saving Images
Images are saved and managed independently for each patient. If you press the Save button on
the control panel without having entered the basic patient information, the Patient Information
screen will appear. Normal images and 3D images can be saved. You can edit and/or manage
the images from SonoView.
▌ Saving an Image with Text

For more information on entering text on images, refer to “Annotating Images” in this
chapter.
Saving images with descriptions can make the retrieving process much
NOTE
easier and faster.
Transferring Images
There are two methods for transferring images using DICOM. One is to transferring the
scanned images one by one immediately after they are scanned, and the other is to scan all the
images first and then to transfer the selected ones only. For more information on DICOM server
settings and DICOM operation, refer to the section “DICOM Settings” in “Chapter 3. Settings.”
▌ Transferring Images in Real Scan Mode

Press the Save button on the control panel to save the image and at the same time transfer
it to the server via DICOM. Note that the image will be transferred automatically only when
“Acquisition in progress” is selected under the DICOM tab at the Setting screen.
▌ Transferring Images from SonoView

Select Exam at Exam List to transfer all the images in Exam. In View Mode, select and
transfer images one by one.
Printing and Recording Images
Printing Images
Press the Echo Print button on the control panel to print the scanned images via an echo-
printer. For more information on printer settings, refer to “Chapter 3. Settings.”
Recording Images
To record images with the VCR during scanning, press the recording button on the VCR
connected. Alternatively, press the VCR button on the control panel.
If Panasonic MD830 (or Sony SVO 9500MD) is connected on Serial Port, the VCR Counter
value will appear on the screen.
For more information on VCR settings and Serial Port settings, refer to “Chapter 3. Settings.”
▌ VCR Function
The VCR function allows the user to review recorded images on the system. Before using
the VCR function, make sure that the VCR is properly connected to the system.
To enter VCR Mode, select the VCR button in the Utility menu. Alternatively, press the VCR
The VCR menu below will appear on the touch screen.
[Figure 6.8 VCR Menu]
- To view the VCR playback screen on this system, select the Play button on the touch
screen and then press the Play button the VCR.
- To stop the VCR playback, press the Stop button on the VCR and then press the
Stop button on the touch screen.
- If Panasonic MD830 (or Sony SVO 9500MD) is connected on Serial Port, press the
Play, Stop, Pause, Rew, and FF buttons to control the VCR.
- Press the Counter button on the touch screen to adjust the VCR Counter value. Press
the Counter button and the window below will appear on the screen.
- Press the Search button on the touch screen to move to a specific position using the
search dialog box.
▌ Measuring in VCR Images

Basic measurements can be taken on VCR images. During the VCR image playback, press
the Freeze button on the control panel and you will be able to take various measurements
using the buttons on the touch screen.
[Figure 6.9 VCR Calibration]
- Use the up/down buttons on the touch screen to adjust the factor for each menu value.
- Set factors for 2D Mode Depth, M Mode Time, M Mode Depth, PW Mode Velocity
(Frequency), and PW Mode Time, and then press the Caliper button on the touch
screen to take basic measurements such as distance, area and volume.
- If taking measurements again, factors must be set again.
- Press the Freeze button to finish taking measurements and return to the VCR image.
SonoView
SonoView is a total image management system which provides saving/filing, previewing and
deleting of images, as well as exporting of data for data exchange with standard PCs.
The image format used in this system complies with the international standard DICOM (Digital
Imaging and Communication in Medicine) image format. Therefore, PACS (Picture Archiving
Communication System) can be implemented with no extra costs, allowing image data
exchange with other institutes and other devices.
* DICOM and PACS are well established in advanced countries but are currently in an introductory stage in
Korea.
This system supports the Bitmap file format (*.bmp files), which is the most commonly used on
standard PCs, for maximum image data exchange.
It is therefore possible to use SonoView in systematic management and research of patient
medical history.
All images containing patient information are identified by patient IDs. For
NOTE efficient management, it is recommended that you use the patient’s chart
number or a part of the social security number as the patient ID.
Using SonoView
SonoView Starts SonoView.
Store Saves the image in SonoView.
* Exams are identified with the patient ID. If the patient information has not been entered, the
Patient Information screen will appear.
You must enter the patient ID because all images are saved according to
the patient ID entered.
WARNING
Failure to enter the patient ID may result in loss and/or critical error(s) on
previously saved images.
Images are saved on HDD (Hard Disk Drive), MO (Magneto Optical), or

ODD (Optical Disk Drive). The term ODD refers to drives that can access
NOTE CD-R (Compact Disc Recordable), CD-RW (Compact Disc Rewritable), or
DVD-R (Digital Versatile Disc Recordable). Such media are collectively
referred to as Optical Discs.
Once SonoView starts, the screen will appear where SonoView settings can be edited and
Exam List can be accessed. Use the Trackball and the Set button on the control panel or use
the menu on the touch screen to select the menu.
[Figure 6.10 SonoView]
Patient Exam List
▌ Exam List Execution

Press the Open button to view Exam List saved in SonoView.
The Exam List screen shows patient ID, name, recent examination date, etc. Displayed on the
upper right-hand corner of the screen are the total number of exams, the number of exams
currently selected, and the number and size of images contained in them.
[Figure 6.11 Exam List Screen]

▌ Selecting Patient Exam

Use the Trackball and the Set button to select a desired exam. Multiple exams can be
selected at one time. Press the Set button again to deselect exams. Press the Select All
button to select all exams in one instance, or press the Deselect All button to deselect all
exams.
Displayed on the upper left-hand corner of the Exam List screen is the free space on each
storage drive. Select HDD, MO, or ODD to check the free space and saved exams on the
selected medium. Use the up-down switch below the touch screen to change the drive.
▌ Sorting Patient Exam

Press a column header on Exam List to sort exams by the column. For example, press ID to
sort the list by ID.
▌ Searching Patient Exam

You can perform a search by entering the patient ID or name at the Exam List screen.
* Enter one or more letter/number to search.
After entering the search condition in the patient ID, name, and date fields, press the
Search button to display exams that are identical or similar to the condition entered.
Press the All button to show all saved exams.
You can specify a period and search for exams for the period specified. “All” shows exams
for all dates.
▌ Viewing Patient Exam

Select an exam to view and press the Review button. While images are displayed in a 640 x
480 area on the screen, the full 800 x 600 area will be used if the exam list or a message window
is displayed on the screen.
▌ Deleting Patient Exam

Select an exam to delete and press the Delete button. Once deleted, exams cannot be restored. To
delete some of the images, select the images to delete in View Mode and then press the Del key on
the keyboard.
To select more than one image, select the images while holding down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
▌ Transferring Patient Exam

You can transfer patient exams over the DICOM network to a DICOM server. Note that the
Send button will not be activated if the DICOM function has not been configured. Select an
exam to transfer and press the Send button.
[Figure 6.12 DICOM Storage Setup Screen]
- To add a new server after selecting an exam, press the Add button at the DICOM Send
window. Enter the required information and then press the OK button.
- To check or modify the server information after selecting an exam, press the Modify
button.
- To delete a server after selecting an exam, press the Delete button. To check the
connection between the Server and DICOM, press the Test button.
- After finishing all tasks, press the Send button to transfer the selected exams to the
desired server.
▌ Printing Patient Exam

This function uses a printer connected on the DICOM network. Note that the Print button
will not be activated if the DICOM function has not been configured. Select an exam to and
press the Print button.
Procedures for setting and printing exams are the same as for transferring exams.
[Figure 6.13 DICOM Print Setup Screen]
▌ Exporting Patient Exam

After selecting an exam, press the Export button to save the images contained in the exam
as BMP, JPEG, TIFF, DICOM or AVI files in the selected medium.
Multiple exams can be selected and exported in one instance.
[Figure 6.14 Exam Export]
All the images in the same exam are given the same file name. If there are several images
in one exam, serial numbers are attached to the back of the file names.
The Directory box displays the directory structure of the selected drive. Press the Create
button to create a new folder on the drive, or press the Delete button to delete
the selected folder.
Selecting Export Options
- 3D Volume Data transfers 3D images along with 3D Volume Data.

- 2D Cine converts the saved Cine images into AVI files and transfers them.
- 3D and Live Cine converts 3D Cine or Live Cine images into AVI files and transfers
them.
- Hide Patient Information removes patient ID, patient name, institute name and other
patient information from the images being transferred.
▌ Patient Exam Backup

You can use MO Drive or ODD to back up the images in DICOMDIR in accordance to the
DICOM 3.0 standard.
1. Select an exam and press the Backup button. Insert the backup medium in the drive
and wait until the LED goes off.
2. At the media selection window, press the MO button or the ODD button.
3. Select whether to delete the exam after the backup. Once deleted, images cannot be
restored.
4. Images can be appended additionally to CR-R and CD-RW media because they
support multi-session. CD-RW media can be reused over and over by deleting images
on them.
5. For optical discs, backup images must not use more than 95% of the medium capacity
because additional files with backup information are saved on them.
▌ Restoring Patient Exam

1. Insert the medium with backup information in the drive and wait until the LED goes off.
2. Use the drive selection function at the upper left-hand corner of the screen to select MO
or ODD.
3. When the list of exams saved on the medium appears, select a desired image and
perform various functions such as Review, Delete, Send, Restore, and Print. Note that
DVD and CD-R medium do not support the Delete function.

4. To transfer the exams saved in the medium to the system hard disk, select the exams
and press the Restore button.
Viewing Images – View Mode

▌ View Mode
Exam Mode
View all images of the selected exam in the order they were saved.
- Select an exam in View Mode using the combo box on the left side of the screen.
- In the preview window at the bottom of the screen, use the Trackball and the Set
button to select images and the images will be displayed according to the layout of the
image selection window.
- In some modes, the currently displayed image is highlighted with yellow borders in the
preview window across the bottom of the screen.
Compare Mode
Several images are compared.
- Select Compare using the combo box at the left side of the screen in View Mode.
- Select an image in the preview window across the bottom of the screen and its border
will blink.
- Assign the image display location in the image selection window and the selected image
will be displayed.
- Maximum of 4 images can be compared. (2 x 2)
▌ Exam navigator
You can use Exam Navigator to search exams and images faster and easier. For example,
select two exams from Exam List and load them, and their ID and other information will be
displayed Exam Navigator.
You can also make selections by using the knob-button below the touch screen.
▌ Preview Function
Preview images of the selected exam are displayed across the bottom of the screen.
If there are more than 7 images in the selected exam, press the ▽ button on the right-hand
side of the screen to view next images. Press the △ button to view previous images.
▌ Layout
You can set the layout for View Mode.
Press the Layout button to adjust the number of images displayed on the screen. Select
“User Defined” to set the number of columns and rows for the layout. Maximum of 4
columns and 4 rows can be used.
[Figure 6.15 Image Layouts]
▌ Viewing Full Screen Image

You can zoom images full screen.
Place the cursor on the image and press the Set button twice to zoom the image. Press the
Set button twice again to return to the previous state.
/ Use the / buttons to view previous/next images.
▌ 3D Mode
When viewing 3D images, the 3D button will appear at the lower right-hand corner of the
image. Press the 3D button to start 3D Mode.
▌ Cine Mode
When viewing Cine images, the Cine playback and search buttons will appear at the lower
left-hand corner of the image. Press the play button to play the Cine image. When paused,
you can use the search button to move frame by frame.
▌ Deleting Images
Select the images to delete in View Mode and press the Del key on the keyboard. To select
multiple images, select the images while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. Note
that images for the current exam cannot be deleted.
▌ Viewing Current Exam

Press the Current Exam button at the upper left-hand corner of the SonoView screen or the
Current Exam button on the touch screen to view the images saved for the current exam.
Tools
Various functions in SonoView are displayed with icons. Use the up-down switch below Tool
Category on the touch screen to select tool groups.
▌ Tool
[Figure 6.16 Tool]
Print
- You can perform the print setup in the Print Layouts window.
- Ink Save Mode inverts the dark background color and prints images.
- Press the OK button, and the image will appear with a brief report.
- Press the Echo Print button on the control panel to print the image.
[Figure 6.17 Print Setup]
Magnifier
- Select the magnifier function and the cursor will change to the magnifier icon. Place
the magnifier at a desired position and press the Set button to magnify the selected
part of the image. Move the Trackball while holding down the Set button to magnify
other parts of the image.
[Figure 6.18 Using Magnifier on Image]

- This function cannot be performed in full screen mode or when the layout is set as
Single.
Export
- Select the Export function and the cursor will change to the floppy disk icon. Place the
cursor over a desired image and press the Set button.
- After entering the folder name and the file names for the images, press the Export
button to convert and save the images as BMP, JPEG, TIFF, DICOM and AVI files.
- To save multiple images in one instance, press the Set button while holding down the
Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple images.
The Export function will not be activated if file name and folder name are not
NOTE
entered.
Report
- You can compose reports containing various information about exams.
- Press the OK button to save. Press the Cancel button to cancel saving.
[Figure 6.19 Report]

▌ Measure
[Figure 6.20 Measure]

Distance
- This function measures the distance between two points on a saved image.
- Press the Distance button and place the cursor on a desired image to zoom the
image full screen.
- Place the cursor at the start point and the end point of the distance measurement and
then press the Set button. You can reset the position of the measurement area by
pressing the Change button before pressing the Set button. Once the points are
assigned, the distance between the two points is displayed on the screen.
- Repeat the process to measure multiple distances.
- Press the Exit button to finish measurements. Measurement results are not saved.
Ellipse
- This function measures the circumference and area of desired areas on a saved
image.
- Press the Ellipse button and place the cursor on a desired image to zoom the image
full screen.
- Place the cursor at the start point and the end point of the distance measurement and
then press the Ellipse button. Pressing the Change button before pressing the Set
button allows the position of the measurement area to be reset. Use the Trackball to
adjust the shape and size of the ellipse and press the Set button. The circumference
and area of the ellipse will be displayed on the screen.
- Repeat the process to measure multiple ellipses.
- Press the Exit button to finish measurements. Measurement results are not saved.
Annotate
- This function allows entering of texts on the image.
- Press the Annotate button and capital A will appear on the image. Select an image to
zoom it full screen. A cursor will appear on the image.
- Position the cursor on a desired area and enter text.
- Press the Set button to confirm the text. Press the Exit button to finish entering texts.
▌ Network
[Figure 6.21 Network]
DICOM Selective Send (Option)

- You can use the DICOM network to transfer selected images to other servers. This
button will not be activated if the DICOM function has not been configured for the
system.
- Use the Ctrl key on the keyboard and the Set button on the control panel to select
images to transfer, and then press the DICOM Send button. The DICOM settings
screen will appear.
- Press the Send button to transfer images to the server. Images can be transferred to
maximum of 4 servers simultaneously.
DICOM Selective Print (Option)

- You can use printers connected on the DICOM network to print selected images. This
button will not be activated if the DICOM function has not been configured for the
system.
- Use the Ctrl key on the keyboard and the Set button on the control panel to select
images to print, and then press the DICOM Print button. The number of images
selected will be displayed on the screen for confirmation. The DICOM settings screen
will appear after that.
- Press the Print button to print images via the DICOM printer.
- For more information on DICOM printers, refer to the respective printer manual or the
DICOM Conformance Statement.
Email
- This function sends images as e-mail attachments.
- Use the Ctrl key on the keyboard and the Set button on the control panel to select images to
send as e-mail attachments, and then press the Email button. Enter the user name, e-mail
address, recipient’s e-mail address, subject, and message.
- Press the Send button after entering all the necessary information. Use the Set button
to select images at the Email composition screen and view the images attached.
- To use the email function, you must specify Email (SMTP) Server under Setting Tool
(SonoView) and the user must have a valid e-mail account on the server selected.
[Figure 6.22.Email Composition Screen]
If the mail server is working but e-mails cannot be sent:

- Make sure that the LAN cable is properly connected.
- Check the IP settings under peripheral devices settings at the Setting
NOTE
screen.
- Check that ICMP (ping) is open for the selected mail server. If ICMP
(ping) is closed, the e-mail function may not work correctly.
Settings
- The Text Annotation tab contains settings for text color, font, and size. (Previously
entered texts are not changed)
[Figure 6.23 Setting – Text Annotation]

- The ODD Recorder tab shows information for the Optical Disc Drive installed.
[Figure 6.24 Settings – ODD Recorder]
- The Misc. tab contains settings for sorting Exam Navigator. Patient ID or Patient’s
Name can be used for sorting.
[Figure 6.25 Setting – Misc.]

▌ Media Format
[Figure 6.26 Media Format]
Erase Optical Disc

This function erases all data saved in the optical disc.
Data on DVD or CD-R media cannot be erased. In general, a CD-RW medium can be
erased and reused about 1,000 times.
Format MO
This function formats MO disks.
Eject MO
This function ejects the MO disk from the MO drive.
Chapter 7
Maintenance
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE............................................................................................. 2
Installation Requirements ..................................................................................................... 2
Cleaning and disinfection ...................................................................................................... 2
Fuse Replacement ................................................................................................................ 3
ADMINISTRATION OF INFORMATION........................................................................ 5
User Setting Back up ............................................................................................................ 5
Patient information Back-up .................................................................................................. 5
SOFTWARE .......................................................................................................................... 5
System Maintenance
The user must ensure that the safety inspections are performed every 2
years according to the requirements of safety standard EN 60601-1. Only
NOTE
trained persons are allowed to perform the safety inspections mentioned
above.
Installation Requirements
When installing:
■ Optimal conditions for the system are temperatures of 10 ~ 35 C and humidity of
30% ~ 75%.
■ Avoid humidity.
■ Avoid direct sunlight.
■ Avoid places with extreme temperature variations.
■ Avoid heat sources.
■ Avoid dusty and unventilated areas.
■ Avoid places where the system is likely to be exposed to vibration or impacts.
■ Avoid places where the system is likely to be exposed to chemical substances or gases.
Placing the system near generators, X-Ray machines, or broadcast cables

CAUTION may result in screen noise and abnormal visual images. Using the power
source with other electric devices may also induce noise.
Cleaning and disinfection

▐ Cleaning
Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting
WARNING
the equipment.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Use a soft cloth lightly dampened in a mild soap or detergent solution to clean exterior
surfaces on the system.
Chapter 7. Maintenance 7 -3
▐ Disinfection
CAUTION Use only recommended disinfectants on system surfaces.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet.
2. The following disinfectants are recommended because of both their biological

effectiveness (as qualified through the FDA 510(k) process) and their chemical
compatibility with MEDISON ultrasound product materials. Mix the disinfection solution
compatible with your system according to label instructions for solution strength. A
disinfectant qualified by the FDA 510(k) process is recommended.
Solutions Country Type Active Ingredient FDA 510(k)
Cidex USA Liquid Gluteraldehyde K924434
Cidex Plus USA Liquid Gluteraldehyde K923744
3. Wipe the system surfaces with the disinfectant solution, following the disinfectant label
instructions for wipe durations, solution strength, and disinfectant contact duration.
4. Air dry or towel dry with a sterile cloth according to the instructions on the disinfectant
label.
Fuse Replacement
The power protection fuse protects the product from excess current. If the power monitoring
protection circuit detects excess current, it shuts off the current to the equipment in order to
prevent overheating and to restrict the ultrasound power output.
If the fuse blows, replace it as shown below.
To avoid risk of electric shock, always disconnect the plug from the system
DANGER
prior to fuse replacement.
[Figure 7.1 Fuse replacement]
1. Disconnect the power cord from the system. (See )

2. Take the fuse out by pressing the middle of fuse. (See )
3. Insert the fuse holder into the appliance inlet.
4. After installing the new fuse, connect the power cord to the system.
Fuse information is shown in the following table.
Input Ratings Fuse Ratings Company Order No.
100-120VAC 12.5A/250V Schurter 0001.2515
200-240VAC 10A/250V Orisel 55T210000

Chapter 7. Maintenance 7 -5
Administration of Information
You may lose information files on user settings or patients, because of

CAUTION
shock on the product or internal error. Thus, back-up on a regular basis.
User Setting Back up

- Always keep a backup copy of all information related to the user settings in case of data
loss.
- Clients cannot back-up the user settings of the product. Contact the MEDISON Customer
Service Department to attain support for back-up.
- However, clients may back up the user setting on GA Table used in obstetrics diagnosis.
For further information please refer to “Chapter 3. Settings”.
Patient information Back-up

The SonoView program can be used for backing up patients’ basic information and scanned
images. The user can choose to save the data, and the data is also saved in the system by
default. If the system needs to be reinstalled due to product failure, etc., the MEDISON
customer support staff will restore the patients’ basic information and scanned images that are
saved in the system. For more information on this, see “Chapter 6 Image Managements.”
SOFTWARE
The product software may be updated to enhance performance. The user cannot make any changes to
the software. Please contact the MEDISON customer service representative for help in software changes.
Minor software updates may be carried out without the prior notice from the
CAUTION
manufacturer.
Should errors occur in the operating system (Linux), and should you desire to upgrade the
operating system, please follow the instructions of the operating system manufacturer.
Chapter 8
Probes
PROBES .........................................................................................................................2
Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel ............................................................................4
Sheaths.....................................................................................................................................5
Probe Precautions ....................................................................................................................6
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe ........................................................................................7
BIOPSY .........................................................................................................................12
Biopsy KIT Components .........................................................................................................12
Using the Biopsy Kit................................................................................................................13
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kit......................................................................................14
Assembling the Biopsy Kit ......................................................................................................15

Probes
The probe is a device that sends and receives ultrasound for acquiring image data. It is also
called a Transducer or Scanhead.
The system limits patient contact temperature to 43 degrees Celsius, and acoustic power values
to their respective U.S. FDA limits. A power protection fuse circuit protects against over-current
conditions. If the power monitor protection circuit senses an over-current condition, then the
drive current to the probe is shut off immediately, preventing overheating of the probe surfaces
and limiting acoustic output. Validation of the power protection fuse circuit is performed under
normal system operation. For invasive probes, additional protections are designed to keep
patient contact surface temperature under 43 degrees Celsius in the event of a single fault
failure.
The ultrasonographic image scanner uses the image data received by the probe to display the
images of each organ on the screen. For best quality images, select the appropriate probe for
the each application.
The applications for each probe are shown below.
Probe Applications
General, Vascular (Cerebr. Carotid, Periph. Arterial, Periph. Venous), Small Parts
L5-12IM (Thyroid, Testicle, Bowel), Breast (Breast1), Pediatric, Musculoskeletal (Shoulder
Knee, Hand Foot)
L6-12IS (Thyroid, Testicle, Bowel), Breast (Breast1), Pediatric, Musculoskeletal (Shoulder
Knee, Hand Foot)
L8-15IS (Thyroid, Testicle, Bowel), Breast (Breast1), Pediatric, Musculoskeletal (Shoulder
Knee, Hand Foot)
L5-9EE (Thyroid, Testicle, Bowel), Breast (Breast1), Pediatric, Musculoskeletal (Shoulder
Knee, Hand Foot)
L4-7EL (Thyroid, Testicle, Bowel), Breast (Breast1), Pediatric, Musculoskeletal (Shoulder
Knee, Hand Foot)
C3-7IM General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early
C2-6IC General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart (Fetal Heart1), OB Early
Chapter 8. Probes 8-3
C5-2EL General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early, Contrast Agent
C1-4EC General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal heart, OB Early, Contrast Agent
General, Abdomen, Pediatric, Vascular (Cerebr. Carotid, Periph. Arterial, Periph.

C4-9ED
Venous), Neonatal
EC4-9ES General, Gynecology, OB, Urology
EC4-9IS General, Gynecology, OB, Urology
VAW3-5 General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early
VAW4-7 General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early
VNA6-12 (Thyroid, Testicle, Bowel), Breast (Breast1), Pediatric, Musculoskeletal (Shoulder
Knee, Hand Foot)
VDW5-8 General, Gynecology, OB, Urology
3D3-5EK General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early
3D4-7EK General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early
3D4-8ET General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, Fetal Heart, OB Early

3D5-8EK General, Gynecology, OB, Urology
3D2-6ET General, Gynecology, Abdomen, OB, Renal, FetalHeart, OB Early
P2-4AC General, Abdomen, Cardiac, TCD, Pediatric Cardiology

P3-5AC General, Abdomen, Cardiac, TCD, Pediatric Cardiology
P3-7AC General, Cardiac, Neonatal, Pediatric Cardiology, Pediatric Abdomen
CW2.0 General, Cardiac
CW4.0 General, Pediatric, Cardiac
▌ TI Table
The TI (Thermal Index) information on the screen varies depending on the probe and
application.
APPLICATION
PEDIATRIC CARDIOLOGY
MUSCULOSKELETAL
PEDIATRIC ABDOMEN
CONTRAST AGENT
GYNECOLOGY
FETAL HEART
SMALL PART
VASCULAR
PEDIATRIC
NEONATAL
ABDOMEN
UROLOGY
OB EARLY
GENERAL
CARDIAC
BREAST
RENAL
TCD
OB
PROBE
L5-12IM ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L6-12IS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L8-15IS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L5-9EE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L4-7EL ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
C3-7IM ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ●
C2-6IC ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ●
C5-2EL ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ● ○
C1-4EC ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ● ○
C4-9ED ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
EC4-9ES ○ ○ ● ○
EC4-9IS ○ ○ ● ○
VA3-5 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ●
VA4-7 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ●
VN6-12 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
VD5-8B ○ ○ ● ○
3D3-5EK ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ○
3D4-7EK ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ○
3D4-8ET ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ○
3D5-8EK ○ ○ ● ○
3D2-6ET ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ● ○
P2-4AC ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○
P3-5AC ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○
P3-7AC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CW2.0 ○ ○
CW4.0 ○ ○ ○
The preset TI information is as follows: Tis (Soft tissue):○ Tib (Bone) :● Tic (Cranial bone):◎.
Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel

Using an inappropriate ultrasound gel may damage the probe. For proper transmission of the
acoustic beam, only use ultrasound transmission gel only approved by MEDISON.
■ Do not use mineral oil, oil-based solutions, or other non-approved

material as they may cause damage to the probe.
■ Do not use gels that contain any of the following agents:

- Acetone
WARNING - Methanol
- Denatured Ethyl Alcohol
- Mineral Oil
- Iodine
- Lanoline
- Any lotions or gels containing perfume
Sheaths
Sheaths are recommended for clinical applications of an invasive nature, including
intraoperative, transrectal, transvaginal, and biopsy procedures. MEDISON does not supply
sheaths so that you should purchase appropriate ones on your own.
■ Always keep sheaths in a sterile state.
■ Sheaths are disposable. Do not reuse them.
■ If sheaths are torn or soiled after use, wash and disinfect the probe.
■ In neurosurgical applications, a disinfected probe must be used with

sterile gel and a sterile pyrogen-free sheath.
WARNING
■ If the sterile sheath becomes compromised during neurosurgical
applications involving a patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, the probe
cannot be successfully sterilized by any disinfection method.
■ Some sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc, which can cause
allergic reactions in some individuals. Please refer to the FDA Medical
Alert released on March 29, 1991.
▌ Installing the Sheath

1. Use sterile gloves.
2. Unpack the sheath and fill it with acoustic coupling gel.
3. Insert the probe into the sheath and pull the latex tip to cover the probe completely. If
possible, cover the probe cable as well.
4. Ensure that there is no air bubble within the ultrasound gel.
5. If necessary, secure the sheath to the probe and the probe cable.
6. Dispose of the sheath after use.
Probe Precautions
The probe can easily be damaged by improper use or by contacting certain chemical
substances. Always follow the instructions in the user manual to inspect the probe cable, case
and lens before and after each use.
Check for cracks, broken parts, leaks and sharp edges. If there is any damage, immediately
stop using the probe and contact the MEDISON Customer Support Department. Using
damaged probes may result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or users.
■ Do not apply mechanical shock to the probe.

■ Do not place the probe cable on the floor where the cable can be run over
by equipment wheels, etc. Do not apply excessive force to bend or pull
CAUTION the cable.
■ Do not immerse the probe into any inappropriate substances such as
alcohol, bleach, ammonium chloride, and hydrogen peroxide.
■ Do not expose the probe to temperatures of +50°C or higher.
▌ Use and Infection Control of the Probe

The ultrasonographic image scanner uses ultrasound, and it makes direct contact with the
patient when in use. Depending on the types of examinations, such contact can be made
to a wide variety of locations including the ordinary skin or the location of blood
transfusion during a surgery.
The most effective method to prevent infection among patients is to use each probe only
once. However, probes may need to be re-used as they are complex in design and
expensive. Consequently, protective devices such as sheaths must be used, and the
safety instructions must be folowed carefully in order to minimize the risk of infection
among patients.
No neurosurgical treatments or examinations should be carried out on a

patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (critical brain disease caused by virus).
WARNING
If the probe has been used on such a patient, it cannot be sterilized by any
method whatsoever.
Sufficient washing and disinfecting must be carried out for preventing

infection. This is the responsibility of the user who manages and maintains
CAUTION the disinfection procedures for the equipment. Always use legally approved
detergents and sheaths.
▌ Electric Shocks
The probe uses electrical energy. If it touches conductive materials, there are risks of
electric shocks to the patient or the user.
■ Regularly receive short-circuit examination from the MEDISON Customer

Support Department.Do not immerse the probe into liquid.
■ Do not immerse the probe into liquid
■ Do not drop the probe or apply mechanical shocks.
■ Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for
any functional problem before and after each use.
■ Do not apply excessive force to twist, pull or bend the probe cable. It may
WARNING result in a short circuit.
■ The power protection fuse protects the probe and the product from excess
current. If the power monitoring protection circuit detects excess current, it
immediately shuts off the current to the probe in order to prevent the
probe surface from overheating and to restrict the ultrasound power
output.
■ The temperature of the product for making contact with patients is limited
under 43°C. The ultrasound power output (AP&I) is in compliance with US
FDA standards.
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe

Using an inappropriate detergent or disinfectant may damage the probe.
WARNING
probes.
▌ Information of Detergent, Disinfectant and Ultrasound Gel

Use an appropriate one with following tables. The information is also listed on the
Medison web site. (http://www.medison.com)
NOTE The information on the website is prior to the information in this manual.
Disinfectants
Sekusept Extra
Gigasept AF 3)
2,3)
Gigasept FF
Cidex Plus2)
T-Spray Ⅱ
Sani-Cloth
Metricide2)
Sporox Ⅱ
Omnicide
Wavicide
Cidex OPA
Nuclean
T-Spray
Names
-01 3)
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Spray
Spray
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Wipe
Type
Hydrogen Peroxide
Succindialdeh-yde,
Glutaraldehyde
Ammonium(N-
Bersteinsaure
formaldehyde
Quaternary
Alkyl)
Active Ingredient
3D3-5EK x x x ● x x x x x x x
3D4-8ET x x x ● x x x x x ●
3D
VA3-5 x x x ● x x x x x x x
VA4-7 x x x ● x x x x x x x
VN6-12 x x x ● x x x x x x x
VD5-8B x x x ● x x x x x x x
C1-4EC ● ● ● ★ ★ ● ● ● ● ● ●
C5-2EL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
CA C2-6IC ● ● ● ★ ● ● ● ● ● x x ★
C3-7IM ● ● ● ● x ● x
C4-9ED ● ● ● ● ● ● ● x
EC4-9ES ● ● ● ★ ● x x ●
EC
EC4-9IS ● ● ● ★ ● x x ●
L4-7EL ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
L5-9EE ● ●
LA L5-12IM ● ● ● ● x ● x
L6-12IS ● ● ● ★ ● ● x x ●
L8-15IS ● ● ● ★ ● ● x x ●
P2-4AC ● ● ● ★ ● ● ● ● ● x x ★
PA P3-5AC ● ● ● ★ ● ● ● ● ● x x ★
P3-7AC ● ● ● ★ x ● ● ★ ● x x ★
CW CW 2.0 ● ● ● ★ ● ● x x ●
Cleaner Gel
Names Isoproppyl Aquasonics
Enzol Klenzyme Metrizyme
alcohol(70%) 1003)
Type NA Liquid Liquid
Dodecylphenole
-thoxylate, Proteolytic Propylene Gel
Active Ingredient Alcohol
Sodium Xylene Enzymes Glycol
Sulfonate
3D3-5EK ●
3D4-7EK ●
3D4-8ET ● ● ●
3D5-8EK ●
3D
VA3-5 ●
VA4-7 ●
VN6-12 ●
VD5-8B ●
C1-4EC ● ● ● ●
C5-2EL ● ● ● ● ●
CA C2-6IC ● ● x ● ●
C3-7IM x ● x ● ●
C4-9ED ● ● x ● ●
EC4-9ES ● ● x ● ●
EC
EC4-9IS ● ● x ● ●
L4-7EL ● ● ● ● ●
L5-9EE ●
LA L5-12IM x ● x ● ●
L6-12IS ● ● x ● ●
L8-15IS ● ● x ● ●
P2-4AC ● ● x ● ●
PA
P3-5AC ● ● x ● ●
CW CW 2.0 ● ● x ● ●
x = Not compatible(DO NOT USE)

● = Compatible
Blank = Untested (DO NOT USE)
★ = Staining may occur on housing parts; however, the acoustic performance
and image quality are not affected.
NOTE (1) Compatible but no EPA Registration
(2) FDA 510(k) qualified
(3) Has CE mark
(4) Discontinued
(5) Under Development
▌ Information about manufacturer(or Distributor) of Detergent,

Disinfectant and Ultrasound Gel
Product Manufacturer or Distributor Telephone number

Aquasonics Packer Co. +1-800-631-8888(USA)
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
Cidex CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
Enzol CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
GIgasept AF S&M(Schulke&mayr) Co. +44-114-254-3500(UK)
Gigasept FF S&M(Schulke&mayr) Co. +44-114-254-3500(UK)
Isoproppyl alcohol (70%) Local drugstore None
Klenzyme Steris Co. +1-800-548-4873(USA)
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
Metricide CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Metrizyme Metrex Research Corp. +1-800-841-1428(USA)
Milton Product & Gamble Australia Pty. Ltd. +61-1800-028-280(Australia)
+1-800-526-3867(USA)
Nuclean Nation Diagonostics Co.
+44(0)-148-264-6020(UK)
Omnicide Cottrell Ltd. +1-800-THE-EDGE(USA)
Sani-cloth PDI Nice/Pak Products Co. +1-914-365-1602(USA)
Sekusept Extra Henkel Hygiene GmbH. +49-0211-797-0(Germany)
Sporox II Sultan Chemist Inc. +1-800-637-8582(USA)
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
T-Spray CIVCO Co.
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Virkon Antec International LTD. +1-403-286-1771(USA)
Wavicide Wave Energy System Inc. +1-800-252-1125(USA)
▌ Cleaning
Cleaning is an important procedure that is carried out before disinfecting the probe. The
probe must be cleaned after each use.
■ Do not use a surgical brush when cleaning probes. The use of even soft
brushes can damage the probe.
■ During cleaning and disinfection, keep the parts of the probe that must
CAUTION
remain dry higher than the other parts during wetting until all parts are dry.
This will help prevent liquid from entering non-liquid-tight areas of the
probe.
1. Disconnect the probe from the system.

2. Remove any biopsy adapters or biopsy needle guides. (Biopsy adapters are re-usable
and can be disinfected).
Chapter 8. Probes 8 - 11
3. Discard sheaths. (Sheaths are single-use items).

4. Use a soft cloth lightly dampened with mild soap or compatible cleaning solution to
remove any particulate matter and body fluid that remain on the probe or cable.
5. To remove remaining particulates, rinse with water up to the immersion point.
6. Wipe with a dry cloth.
7. If necessary, wipe first with a water-dampened clothe to remove soap residue.
▌ Disinfection
Only disinfect vaginal and rectal probes. A 10-6 reduction in pathogens should be reached
following the disinfection procedures in this Manual and using the following MEDISON
recommended solutions. The following disinfectants are recommended because of both
their biological effectiveness (as qualified through the FDA 510(k) process) and their
chemical compatibility with MEDISON ultrasound product materials.
■ If a pre-mixed solution is used, be sure to observe the solution expiration date.
■ The type of tissue it will contact during use dictates the level of disinfection
CAUTION required for a device. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of contact
are appropriate for disinfection.
■ Using a non-recommended disinfectant or not following the recommended

disinfection method can damage and/or discolor the probe and will void the
probe warranty.
CAUTION ■ Do not immerse probes for longer than one hour, unless they are sterilizable.
■ Only sterilize probes using liquid solutions. Avoid using autoclave, gas (EtO), or
other non-MEDISON-approved methods.
1. Follow the instructions on the disinfectant label for storage, use and disposition of the
disinfectant. We recommend the use of disinfectants that are FDA 510(k) approved.
2. Mix the disinfectant compatible with your probe according to lavel instructions for
solution strength.
3. Immerse the probe into the disinfectant as shown in the illustration below.
4. Using the instructions on the disinfectant, rinse the probe after the immersion process
is complete.
5. Air dry the probe or towel it dry with a clean cloth.
[Figure 8.1 Disinfection]

Biopsy
A biopsy is an examination method that surgically extracts tissue from the patient for
examination. The probe and the biopsy kit are used together when conducting a biopsy with the
ultrasonographic image scanner.
The ultrasound system shows the needle, which penetrates through the skin surface and veins,
along with the examination location, minimizing the risk to the patient.
Biopsy KIT Components

The biopsy kit consists of the adaptor, needle guide and needle. The components vary
depending on the probe type. The components and accessories can be purchased from
MEDISON.
[Figure 8.2 Biopsy Kit Components]
- Adaptor: Secures the needle guide to the probe tightly.

- Needle Guide: Guides the angle (direction) of the needle so that it can reach the
examination location accurately. It also secures the needle so that the needle is not
loose.
- Needle: This is the needle that is inserted into the patient’s body.
- Sheath: Prevents the probe and adaptor from getting soiled by any unwanted
substances during the examination (blood and other body fluids).
- Ultrasound Gel: The space between the probe and the sheath is filled with the
ultrasound gel to obtain images of the best quality.
Using the Biopsy Kit

■ Verify the condition of the biopsy needle before use. Do not use a bent
biopsy needle.
■ The biopsy needle may bend during tissue penetration. The precise
location of the needle must be checked by monitoring the echo generated
WARNING from the needle.
■ Never use the biopsy kit to biopsy prostate tissue.
■ Verify the condition of the biopsy needle before use. Do not use a bent
biopsy needle.
▌ Before Using Biopsy Kit

Ultrasonographic scanning using the biopsy kit must be conducted by medical doctors or
experienced medical staff with appropriate qualifications. Always, without fail, verify all
safety prevention procedures and disinfection.
Use only MEDISON-approved biopsy kits. Other bands may not properly fit MEDISON
probes. Improper installation may result in patient discomfort.
Inspect all components. Ensure that the biopsy kit you are using is the correct one for the
probe, the system, and system software.
■ Do not attempt to use the biopsy until you read the instructions for
installing the sheath and verifying alignment of the needle guide.
■ Always ensure that the probe and the needle guide are secured on both
WARNING
the left and the right.
■ Do not use in IVF, CVS, or PUBS procedures.
▌ Biopsy Procedure
The system generates a needle guideline though the displayed real-time ultrasound images
to indicate the anticipated path of the needle. You can use this guideline to ensure that the
needle or instrument is following the correct path.
1. Ready the patient according to the procedure appropriate for the examination objectives.
2. Install the sheath and the biopsy kit.
3. Set the system controls for the biopsy procedure.
4. If necessary, apply acoustic gel to the patient.
5. Begin scanning the patient. Adjust the patient so that the location for examination fits
into the needle guideline on the screen.
6. Insert the needle into the needle guide.
7. Perform the puncture by sliding the needle through the groove in the guide until the
needle intercepts the target.
8. To keep the needle securely in the needle guide, press down on the top of the biopsy
adapter with your index finger.
9. When the examination location is reached, take the needle out of the needle guide.
10. Detach the needle guide, adapter and sheath from the probe.
11. Dispose of the components that are not designed for reuse.
▌ Needle Guide Alignment

Alignment of the needle guide displayed on the system is for the purpose of verifying
whether the needle and the needle guide are properly installed. This must be done prior to
the biopsy examination. Do not use the needle guide if the needle is not following the
intended path. Contact MEDISON Customer Service Department for service.
Reverberation or other tissue artifacts may produce false needle images which can cause
confusion. Ensure the needle path is along the guideline, and that you are not using a false
needle image to locate the needle.
■ The needle used for this alignment verification must not be used for the
actual procedure. Always use a new, sterile needle for each biopsy
procedure.
WARNING
■ To assist in accurate projection of the needle, use a straight, new needle
for each alignment procedure.
1. Attach the biopsy kit.

2. Set the system depth for the procedure to be performed and select the Biopsy menu.
3. Immerse the probe into the water bath, and insert the needle into the needle guide.
4. Confirm that the needle image is on the needle guidelines. If so, the needle guide is
properly aligned.
5. If the needle image is out of the needle guideline, check the needle guide or the probe adapter.
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kit

Wash and disinfect the biopsy kit to reduce pathogens to the level of 10-6. Some components of
the biopsy kit may be disposable. Please read the biopsy kit user manual carefully before use.
Only disinfect vaginal and rectal probes. A 10-6 reduction in pathogens should be reached
following the disinfection procedures in this manual and using the following MEDISON
recommended solutions. The following disinfectants are recommended because of both their
biological effectiveness (as qualified through the FDA 510(k) process) and their chemical
compatibility with MEDISON ultrasound product materials.
WARNING biopsy kit.
▌ Cleaning and disinfection of stainless steel biopsy kit
Cleaning
1. After use, remove the biopsy kit from the probe.
2. Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts, if applicable.
3. Using a small brush and water, scrub each part to remove trapped material from the
biopsy kit.
4. Rinse with water to remove remaining particulates.
Disinfection
1. Disinfect the adapter by autoclaving (Steam) or using gas (Ethylene Oxide).
2. After disinfection, follow the proper post-disinfection procedure for the disinfection
method used. (Please refer to the disinfection user manual, etc.)
3. Inspect the biopsy kit for damage such as cracks, rust or breakage. If damage is
evident, discontinue use of the biopsy kit and contact MEDISON Customer Service
Department.
▌ Cleaning and Disinfection of plastic biopsy kit
Cleaning
1. After use, remove the biopsy kit from the probe.
2. Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts, if applicable. Discard the single-
use parts. These parts cannot be disinfected.
3. Using a small brush and water, scrub each part to remove trapped material from the
reusable components.
4. Rinse with water to remove remaining particulates.
Disinfection
1. Check the disinfection duration (generally 10 hours) and temperature of the
disinfectant.
2. After disinfection, follow the proper post-disinfection procedure for the disinfection
method used.
3. Inspect the components for damage such as cracks, rust or breakage. If damage is
evident, discontinue use of the biopsy kit and contact MEDISON Customer Service
Department.
CAUTION biopsy kit.
Assembling the Biopsy Kit

▌ C3-7IM Biopsy guide
■ Specification
Model name BP-C3-7IM

Adapter 1EA
Component
Box 1EA
Material Stainless (non-disposable)
Available Gauges 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 19G, 20G, 21G, 22G
■ Biopsy Kit Configuration
■ Installation
1. Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel.
Sheath Gel inside Sheath

2. Mount the Adapter onto the probe.
3. Install the needle guide onto the adapter.

4. Place the sheath on the adapter and insert the needle into the needle guide.
▌ VAW3-5 / VAW4-7 / 3D3-5EK / 3D4-7EK Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name PEC-51

Biopsy KIT(Adapter&Guide) 1EA
Component Case 1EA
User Manual 1EA
Available Gauges 16G, 18G, 22G

■ Installation

▌ VNW6-12 Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name PEC-54

Inner diameters 1.0mm, 1.4mm, 2.2mm
■ Installation
▌ VDW5-8B / 3D5-8EK Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name PEC-47

Component Case 1EA
User Manual 1EA
■ Installation
2. Fix the biopsy adapter to the probe turning the knob.

▌ EC4-9ES / EC4-9IS Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name BPKIT-003

Adapter 1EA
Component
Box 1EA
Material PUR 2160
Available Gauges 17G
Biopsy Adapter Needle Guide
■ Installation

2. Place the cover supplied with the kit all the way down to the adapter and then
secure the guide.
▌ L5-12IM Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name BP-L5-12IM

Adapter 1EA
Component
Box 1EA
Available Gauges 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 19G, 20G, 21G, 22G
■ Installation
1. Mount the biopsy adaptor onto the probe as shown below.
▶
2. Fill the sheath with sterile acoustic coupling gel and pulling the sheath to completely
cover the adaptor.
3. Mount the needle guide & clip onto the adaptor and insert the needle into the needle
guide as shown below.
▌ C5-2EL Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name BPK-C2-5EL

Biopsy Adapter 1EA
Component
Box 1EA
Material Acetal Copolymer
Available Gauges 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
Biopsy Adapter
Needle Guide Clip (Left) Clip (Right)

■ Installation
2. Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel.
4. Installing the Needle Guide Clip.

▌ C2-6IC Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name BPK-C2-6IC

Adapter 1EA
Component
Box 1EA
Available Gauges 14G, 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 19G, 20G, 21G, 22G, 23G
Biopsy Adapter Needle Guide Clip
■ Installation

2. Insert gel into probe cover. And cover it.
4. Installing the Needle Guide Clip.

▌ L6-12IS / L8-15IS Biopsy guide

■ Specification
Model name BP-KIT-012

Adapter 1EA
Component Box 1EA
Needle Guide Pack 24 EA
Available Gauges 14G, 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 19G, 20G, 21G, 22G, 23G
■ Installation
2. Selecting Bracket Angle (& Locking).

4. Installing the Needle Guide and Clip.

▌ L5-9EE Biopsy guide

■ Specification

Component Case 1EA
User Manual 1EA
Material Acetal Copolymer
Biopsy Adapter Needle
Needle Guide Kit
■ Installation

4. Lock the needle guide.
5. Press the needle guide and install the needle into the needle guide.
▌ C1-4EC Biopsy guide

■ Specification

Component Case 1EA
User Manual 1EA
Material Polyphenolsulfone
Available Gauges 14G, 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 20G, 21G, 22G, 23G
■ Installation
2. Insert gel into the cover for the Kit and cover the adaptor completely.
3. Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor along the groove.
▌ C4-7EL Biopsy guide

■ Specification

Component
BOX 1EA
Material Polyurethane
Available Gauges 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G, 25G

■ Installation
3. Mount the needle guide onto the adaptor.

4. Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor.
5. Insert a needle into the needle guide and start using it.
▌ 3D2-6ET Biopsy guide
■ Specification
Biopsy Adapter 1 EA
Component Needle Guide Pack
Box 1 EA
Material Polyurethane
Available Gauges 16 G, 18G, 22G
Biopsy Adapter
Needle Guide Kit

■ Installation
3. Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor.
4. Lock the needle guide.
(a) (b)
(c)
5. Press the needle guide like figure (c) and install the needle into the needle guide.
Table of Contents
OB REFERENCE ........................................................................................................... 5
ESTIMATED FETAL WEIGHT FORMULA ........................................................................... 5
Method using (BPD, AC) ...................................................................................................... 5
Method using (BPD, FL, FTA) .............................................................................................. 6
Method using (BPD, APTD, TTD, FL) .................................................................................. 6
Method using (BPD, APTD, TTD, SL) .................................................................................. 6
Method using (BPD, TTD) .................................................................................................... 6
Method using (AC, FL) ......................................................................................................... 7
Method using (BPD, AC, FL)................................................................................................ 7
Method using (HC, AC, FL) .................................................................................................. 8
Method using (BPD, HC, AC, FL)......................................................................................... 9
Method using (AC) ............................................................................................................... 9
Method using (BPD, AC) ...................................................................................................... 9
Method using (AC, HC) ...................................................................................................... 10
Method using (BPD, APTD, TTD) ...................................................................................... 10
GESTATIONAL AGE FORMULA AND TABLE LIST ............................................................ 11
Abdominal Circumference(AC) : KOREAN ........................................................................ 11
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : HADLOCK ..................................................................... 12
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : HANSMANN.................................................................. 13
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : MERZ ............................................................................ 15
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : JEANTY......................................................................... 19
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : TOKYO.......................................................................... 20
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CHITTY (D) ................................................................... 22
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CHITTY (M) ................................................................... 23
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CAMPBELL ................................................................... 24
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : ASUM(SCW) ................................................................. 26
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CFEF ............................................................................. 27
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : KOREAN................................................................................ 28
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : HANSMANN .......................................................................... 29
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : HADLOCK ............................................................................. 31
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : MERZ..................................................................................... 32
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : JEANTY ................................................................................. 35
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : SABBAGHA ........................................................................... 37
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : TOKYO .................................................................................. 38
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : OSAKA .................................................................................. 40
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CHITTY (OUT-IN) .................................................................. 45
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CHITTY (OUT-OUT) .............................................................. 47
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CAMPBELL............................................................................ 49
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : KURTZ ................................................................................... 50
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : ASUM(SCW).......................................................................... 52
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : BESSIS .................................................................................. 53
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CFEF...................................................................................... 54
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : KOREAN ............................................................................. 55
2 GA Tables & References
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : ROBINSON..........................................................................56

Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : HANSMANN ........................................................................57
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : TOKYO ................................................................................60
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : NELSON ..............................................................................62
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : HADLOCK............................................................................63
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : OSAKA.................................................................................65
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : ASUM(SCW)........................................................................67
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : REMPEN..............................................................................68
Femur Length (FL) : KOREAN............................................................................................70
Femur Length (FL) : HADLOCK .........................................................................................71
Femur Length (FL) : MERZ.................................................................................................72
Femur Length (FL) : HANSMANN ......................................................................................74
Femur Length (FL) : HOHLER ............................................................................................76
Femur Length (FL) : JEANTY .............................................................................................77
Femur Length (FL) : TOKYO ..............................................................................................79
Femur Length (FL) : OSAKA...............................................................................................81
Femur Length (FL) : CHITTY ..............................................................................................85
Femur Length (FL) : CAMPBELL........................................................................................87
Femur Length (FL) : ASUM(SCW)......................................................................................89
Femur Length (FL) : DOUBILET .........................................................................................90
Femur Length (FL) : BESSIS ..............................................................................................91
Femur Length (FL) : CFEF..................................................................................................92
Anterior Posterior Thoracic Diameter (APTD) : HANSMANN.............................................93
Anterior Posterior Thoracic Diameter (APTD) and Thorax Transverse Diameter (TTD) :
SHINOZUKA .......................................................................................................................95
Thorax Transverse Diameter (TTD) : HANSMANN ............................................................97
Gestational Sac (GS) : KOREAN........................................................................................99
Gestational Sac (GS) : HANSMANN ................................................................................100
Gestational Sac (GS) : HELLMAN....................................................................................101
Gestational Sac (GS) : NYBERG......................................................................................102
Gestational Sac (GS) : TOKYO ........................................................................................103
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : HANSMANN..............................................................104
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : KOREAN ...................................................................106
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : ASUM(SCW) .............................................................107
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : MERZ ........................................................................108
Inner Ocular Distance (IOD) : HASNMANN......................................................................110
Outer Ocular Distance (OOD) : JENATY..........................................................................111
Outer Ocular Distance (OOD) : HANSMANN ...................................................................112
Humerus (HUM) : JENATY ...............................................................................................113
Humerus (HUM) : KOREAN..............................................................................................115
Humerus (HUM) : MERZ...................................................................................................116
Humerus (HUM) : OSAKA ................................................................................................118
Humerus (HUM) : ASUM(SCW)........................................................................................120
Tibia (TIB) : JENATY ........................................................................................................121
Tibia (TIB) : MERZ ............................................................................................................123
Tibia (TIB) : HANSMANN..................................................................................................125
Cerebellum : HILL .............................................................................................................126
ACCUVIX XQ Reference manual 3
Cerebellum : CHITTY ....................................................................................................... 127

Cerebellum : GOLDSTEIN ............................................................................................... 128
Ulna : JEANTY ................................................................................................................. 129
Ulna : MERZ ..................................................................................................................... 131
Ulna : HANSMANN .......................................................................................................... 132
Head Circumference (HC) : KOREAN ............................................................................. 133
Head Circumference (HC) : HANSMANN ........................................................................ 134
Head Circumference (HC) : HADLOCK ........................................................................... 136
Head Circumference (HC) : MERZ................................................................................... 137
Head Circumference (HC) : CHITTY (D).......................................................................... 141
Head Circumference (HC) : CHITTY (M) ......................................................................... 143
Head Circumference (HC) : CAMPBELL ......................................................................... 145
Head Circumference (HC) : ASUM(SCW) ....................................................................... 146
Head Circumference (HC) : CFEF ................................................................................... 147
Fetal Age Table (FTA) : OSAKA ...................................................................................... 148
Clavicle (CLAV) : YARKONI............................................................................................. 152
Length of Vertebral (Vertebral) : TOKYO ......................................................................... 154
Radius Length (RAD) : MERZ .......................................................................................... 155
Radius Length (RAD) : JEANTY ...................................................................................... 156
Radius Length (RAD) : HANSMANN................................................................................ 157
Mean Abdominal Diameter (MAD) : EIK-NESSH............................................................. 158
Mid Cerebral Artery(MCA)-Resistance Index(RI) : SHINOZUKA..................................... 160
Mid Cerebral Artery(MCA)-Pulsatility Index(PI) : SHINOZUKA ....................................... 161
Umbilical Artery(UmA)-Resistance Index(RI) : SHINOZUKA........................................... 162
Umbilical Artery(UmA)- Pulsatility Index(PI) : SHINOZUKA ............................................ 163
Anterior Posterior Abdominal Diameter (APD): BESSIS.................................................. 164
Transverse Abdominal Diameter (TAD) : CFEF............................................................... 165
Thoracic Circumference (ThC): CHITKARA..................................................................... 166
Fibula Length (FIB): JEANTY........................................................................................... 167
Fibula Length (FIB): HANSMANN .................................................................................... 168
Nuchal Thickness (NT) : YAGEL...................................................................................... 169
Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI) : MOORE ............................................................................... 170
Head Circumference(HC) / Abdominal Circumference(AC): Campbell ........................... 171
Femur Length/Head Circumference (FL/HC) : HADLOCK .............................................. 172
ESTIMATED FETAL WEIGHT GROWTH REFERENCE..................................................... 173
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : BRENNER ...................................................................... 173
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : DOUBILET...................................................................... 174
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : OSAKA ........................................................................... 175
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : HADLOCK ...................................................................... 178
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : TOKYO ........................................................................... 179
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : WILLIAMS ...................................................................... 180
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : YARKONI (TWINS) ........................................................ 181
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : HANSMANN ................................................................... 182
VASCULAR REFERENCE ........................................................................................ 183
UROLOGY REFERENCE .......................................................................................... 185

FETAL ECHO REFERENCE ......................................................................................187
CARDIOLOGY REFERENCE ....................................................................................190

CARDIOLOGY 2D.......................................................................................................190
CARDIOLOGY C MODE ...............................................................................................195
CARDIOLOGY M MODE...............................................................................................197
CARDIOLOGY DOPPLER .............................................................................................201
ACOUSTIC POWER TABLES .................................................................................205
OB Reference
Estimated Fetal Weight Formula
Method using (BPD, AC)

Shepard Method [grams]
[Equation]
1000×10(-1.7492+0.166×(BPD)+0.046×(AC)-0.002646×(AC) ×(BPD))
[Input Range]
AC :15.5~40.0 cm
BPD : 3.1~10.0 cm
EFW : 224~4925 g
[Reference]
Shepard MJ, et al, “ An Evaluation of Two Equations for Predicting Fetal Weight by Ultrasound,”
American Journal of Ob & Gyn, January 1982; 142(1):47-54
Hadlock Method [grams]
[Equation]
10(1.11+(0.05845×AC)-(0.000604×AC^2)-(0.007365×BPD^2)+(0.000595×BPD×AC)+(0.1694×BPD))
[Reference]
Hadlock F, et al, “Sonographic Estimated of Fetal Weight,” Radiology 1984:150:535-540
Merz Method [grams]
[Equation]
EFW = (157.07 × AC) + (15.9 × BPD2) - 3200.4
[Reference]
E. Merz, W. Goldhofer, E. Timor-Tritsch “Ultrasound in Gynecology and Obstetrics” Textbook and Atlas,
1991, Georg Thieme Verlag, 308-338
Method using (BPD, FL, FTA)

Osaka university [grams]
[Equation]
EFW = (1.25647 ( BPD³) + (3.50665 ( FTA ( FL) + 6.3
[Reference]
Mineo Aoki. “The Diagnosis and Treatment of IUGR” Perineitaru Kea (JapaneseJournal of Perinatal
Care), 1990; Vol.9 NO.5, p407-422 (in Japanese)
Method using (BPD, APTD, TTD, FL)

Tokyo 2 university Method [grams]
[Equation]
1.07*BPD³+3.42*APTD*TTD*FL
[Reference]
Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol.23. No.12 (1996)
Method using (BPD, APTD, TTD, SL)

Shinozuka 2 Method [grams]
[Equation]
1.07*BPD³+2.91*APTD*TTD*SL
[Reference]
Shinozuka, N et, al, Am J Obstet Gynecol 157:1140, 1987
Method using (BPD, TTD)

Hansmann’s fetal weight [grams]
[Equation]
((-1.05775×BPD)+(0.649145×TTD)+(0.0930707×BPD2)-(0.020562×TTD2)+(0.515263))×1000.0
[Low Range]
BPD : 5.9cm ~ ∞
TTD : 5.6cm ~ ∞
EFW : 500g ~ ∞
[Reference]
Hansmann, Hackeloer, Staudach, Wittman, “Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and

Gynecology,” Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986
Method using (AC, FL)

Hadlock 1 Method [grams]
[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.05281 x AC) + (0.1938 x FL) – (0.004 x AC x FL) + 1.304
±2SD=16%
[Reference]
Frank P. Hadlock, R. B. Harrist, Ralph S. Sharman, Russell L. Deter, Seung K. Park.

"Estimation of fetal weight with the use of head, body, and femur measurement-A prospective
study" American Journal of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Vol 151. No.3:333-337, February 1,
1985
Ferrero [grams]
[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.13244 x AC) - (0.12996 x FL) - (0.00173588 x AC2)
+ (0.00309212 x FL x AC) + (2.18984 x FL / AC) + 0.77125
[Reference]
Ferrero A, Maggi E, Giancotti A, et al: Regression formula for estimation of fetal weight with use
of abdominal circumference and femur length: A prospective study. J Ultrasound Med 13:823,
1994
Method using (BPD, AC, FL)

[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.0316 x BPD) + (0.0457 x AC) + (0.1623 x FL) - (0.0034 x AC x FL) + 1.335
±2SD=15%
[Reference]

1985
Shinozuka 1 Method [grams]

[Equation]
1.07 x BPD^3 + 0.30 x AC^2 x FL
[Reference]
Shinozuka, N et, al, Am J Obstet Gynecol 157:1140, 1987
Woo [grams]
[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.15549 x BPD) + (0.04864 x AC) - (0.00279682 x BPD x AC)
+ (0.037769 x FL) - (0.000494529 x AC x FL) + 1.13705
[Reference]
Woo JS, Wan CW, Cho KM: Computer-assisted evaluation of ultrasonic fetal weight prediction
using multiple regression equations with and without the fetal femur length, J Ultrasound Med
4:65, 1985
Method using (HC, AC, FL)

[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.0107 x HC) + (0.0438 x AC) + (0.158 x FL) - (0.00326 x AC x FL) + 1.326
±2SD=15%
[Reference]

1985
Weiner2 [grams]
[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.02253 x HC) + (0.01645 x AC) + (0.06439 x FL) + 1.6961
[Reference]
Weiner CP, Sabbagha RE, Vaisrub N, et al: Ultrasonic fetal weight prediction: Role of head
circumference and femur length. Obstet Gynecol 65:812, 1985
Method using (BPD, HC, AC, FL)

[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.0064 x HC) + (0.0424 x AC) + (0.00061 x BPD x AC)

+ (0.174 x FL) - (0.00386 x AC x FL) + 1.3596
±2SD=14.8%
[Reference]

1985
Method using (AC)

Campbell’s fetal weight [grams]
[Equation]
1000 x 10 (0.282 x AC - 0.00331 x AC2 – 4.564)
[Input Range]
AC :21.0 ~ 40.0cm
EFW : 903 ~ 4137g
[Reference]
Campbell, S., Wilkin, D. “Ultrasonic Measurement of Fetal Abdomen Circumference in the

Estimation of Fetal Weight.” British Journal of OB & GYN, 82, 9: 689-697, September 1975
Higginbottom [grams]
[Equation]
EFW = AC3 x 0.0816
[Reference]
Higginbottom J, Slater J. Porter G, et al: Estimation of fetal weight from ultrasonic measurement
of trunk circumference. Br J Obstet Gynecol 82:698, 1975
Method using (BPD, AC)

Thurnau [grams]
[Equation]
EFW = (9.337 x BPD x AC) - 229
[Reference]
Thurnau GR, Tamura RK, Sabbagha R, et al: A simple estimated fetal weight equation based
on real-time ultrasound measurements of fetuses less than thirty-four weeks' gestation. Am J
Obstet Gynecol 145:557, 1983
Warsof [grams]
[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = {(0.144 x BPD) + (0.032 x AC) - (0.000111 x AC x BPD2) - 1.599)} x 1000
[Reference]
Warsof SL, Gohari P, Berkowitz RL, et al: The estimation of fetal weight by computer-assisted
analysis. Am J Obstet Gynecol 120:881, 1977
Method using (AC, HC)

Weiner1 [grams]
[Equation]
Log10(EFW) = (0.04035 x HC) + (0.01285 x AC) + 1.6575
[Reference]
Weiner CP, Sabbagha RE, Vaisrub N, et al: Ultrasonic fetal weight prediction: Role of head
circumference and femur length. Obstet Gynecol 65:812, 1985
Method using (BPD, APTD, TTD)

Tokyo 1 university Method [grams]
[Equation]
1.73 x BPD^3 + 28 x APTD x TTD - 217
[Reference]
Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol.23. No.12 (1996)

Gestational Age Formula and Table List
Abdominal Circumference(AC) : KOREAN
GA Table
Y.G Park.“ The Standardization of Fetal body parts according to the normal Korean Gestational
Age in Ultrasound” Korean Ultrasound Institute, Vol. 14, No.2, 1995
GA = 7.403506 + 0.76191 × AC + 0.004492304 × AC2

Output Unit : w(weeks)
Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 5.9 cm
Max Range : 35.2 cm
Fetal Growth Table

AC = 13.554085 x MA - 0.059973 x MA2 - 94.588168

Output Unit : cm
Input Unit : w(week)
Min Range : 12cm
Max Range : 40cm
Age Growth ±SD 32 27.738 0.799
(W) (cm) (cm) 34 29.578 0.771
12 5.932 0.794 36 31.731 0.583
16 10.793 0.728 38 33.514 0.370
20 15.086 0.742 40 34.490 1.608
24 19.300 1.258
28 23.988 0.870
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : HADLOCK
GA Table
Frank P. Hadlock, Russell L.Deter, Ronald B. Harrist, Seung K. Park,. "Estimating Fetal Age: Computer-Assisted
Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth Parameters" Radiology, 1984; 152:497-501.
GA = 8.14 + 0.753 × AC + 0.0036 × AC2

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 4.83cm
Max Range : 38.04 cm
Standard Deviation :
Min (w) Max (w) ±2SD
12 18 1.66
18 24 2.06
24 30 2.18
30 36 2.96
36 42 3.04
Fetal Growth Table

Hadlock, F., Deter, R.L., Harrist, R.B., Park, S.K. "Estimating Fetal Age: Computer-Assisted
Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth Parameters" Radiology, 1984, 152: 497-501. (Biometric Age
and Growth Equations)
Graph = 1.61 x MA - 0.00998 x MA2 - 13.3

Output Unit : cm
Input Unit : w(weeks)
Min Range : 12 cm
Max Range : 40 cm
Standard Deviation : 2SD = 2.68 cm
Min Range(w) Max Range(w) SD(w)
0 100 2.68
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Hansmann, Hackeloer, Staudach, Wittman "Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and
Gynecology" Springer- Verlag, New York, 1986, p.431.
AC GA 19.1 26w0d
(cm) (wd) 20.2 27w0d
5.3 12w0d 21.1 28w0d
6.3 13w0d 22.2 29w0d
7.5 14w0d 23.0 30w0d
8.5 15w0d 24.0 31w0d
9.7 16w0d 24.9 32w0d
10.7 17w0d 25.8 33w0d
11.6 18w0d 26.8 34w0d
12.6 19w0d 27.7 35w0d
13.5 20w0d 28.7 36w0d
14.5 21w0d 29.6 37w0d
15.5 22w0d 30.6 38w0d
16.5 23w0d 31.5 39w0d
17.3 24w0d 32.0 40w0d
18.3 25w0d
Fetal Growth Table

GA Growth 27 20.20
(W) (cm) 28 21.10
12 5.30 29 22.20
13 6.30 30 23.00
14 7.50 31 24.00
15 8.50 32 24.90
16 9.70 33 25.80
17 10.70 34 26.80
18 11.60 35 27.70
19 12.60 36 28.70
20 13.50 37 29.60
21 14.50 38 30.60
22 15.50 39 31.50
23 16.50 40 32.00
24 17.30
25 18.30
26 19.10
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : MERZ
GA Table
E. Merz, W. Goldhofer, E. Timor-Tritsch "Ultrasound in Gynecology and Obstetrics" Text book
and Atlas, 1991 Georg Thieme Verlag, 308-338
AC GA 5% 95% 10.6 16w6d 15w4d 18w2d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 10.8 17w1d 15w5d 18w3d
5.6 12w1d 10w6d 13w2d 11.0 17w2d 15w6d 18w4d
5.8 12w2d 11w1d 13w4d 11.2 17w3d 16w0d 18w6d
6.0 12w4d 11w2d 13w5d 11.4 17w4d 16w1d 19w0d
6.2 12w5d 11w4d 13w6d 11.6 17w6d 16w3d 19w1d
6.4 12w6d 11w5d 14w1d 11.8 18w0d 16w4d 19w3d
6.6 13w1d 11w6d 14w2d 12.0 18w1d 16w6d 19w4d
6.8 13w2d 12w0d 14w4d 12.2 18w3d 17w0d 19w6d
7.0 13w4d 12w1d 14w5d 12.4 18w4d 17w1d 20w0d
7.2 13w4d 12w3d 14w6d 12.6 18w6d 17w2d 20w1d
7.4 13w6d 12w4d 15w1d 12.8 19w0d 17w4d 20w3d
7.6 14w0d 12w6d 15w2d 13.0 19w1d 17w5d 20w4d
7.8 14w1d 12w6d 15w4d 13.2 19w2d 17w6d 20w6d
8.0 14w3d 13w1d 15w5d 13.4 19w4d 18w0d 21w0d
8.2 14w4d 13w2d 15w6d 13.6 19w5d 18w1d 21w1d
8.4 14w6d 13w4d 16w1d 13.8 19w6d 18w3d 21w3d
8.6 15w0d 13w5d 16w2d 14.0 20w1d 18w4d 21w4d
8.8 15w1d 13w6d 16w4d 14.2 20w2d 18w6d 21w6d
9.0 15w3d 14w0d 16w5d 14.4 20w4d 19w0d 22w0d
9.2 15w4d 14w1d 16w6d 14.6 20w5d 19w1d 22w1d
9.4 15w5d 14w3d 17w1d 14.8 20w6d 19w2d 22w3d
9.6 15w6d 14w4d 17w2d 15.0 21w1d 19w4d 22w4d
9.8 16w1d 14w6d 17w4d 15.2 21w1d 19w5d 22w6d
10.0 16w2d 14w6d 17w5d 15.4 21w3d 19w6d 23w0d
10.2 16w4d 15w1d 17w6d 15.6 21w4d 20w1d 23w1d
10.4 16w5d 15w2d 18w1d 15.8 21w6d 20w1d 23w3d

16.0 22w0d 20w3d 23w4d 22.6 28w2d 26w3d 30w1d
16.2 22w1d 20w4d 23w6d 22.8 28w4d 26w4d 30w2d
16.4 22w3d 20w6d 24w0d 23.0 28w5d 26w6d 30w4d
16.6 22w4d 21w0d 24w1d 23.2 28w6d 27w0d 30w5d
16.8 22w6d 21w1d 24w3d 23.4 29w0d 27w1d 30w6d
17.0 23w0d 21w2d 24w4d 23.6 29w1d 27w3d 31w1d
17.2 23w1d 21w4d 24w6d 23.8 29w3d 27w4d 31w2d
17.4 23w2d 21w5d 25w0d 24.0 29w4d 27w5d 31w4d
17.6 23w4d 21w6d 25w1d 24.2 29w6d 27w6d 31w5d
17.8 23w5d 22w1d 25w3d 24.4 30w0d 28w1d 31w6d
18.0 23w6d 22w1d 25w4d 24.6 30w1d 28w2d 32w1d
18.2 24w1d 22w3d 25w6d 24.8 30w3d 28w3d 32w2d
18.4 24w2d 22w4d 26w0d 25.0 30w4d 28w4d 32w4d
18.6 24w4d 22w6d 26w1d 25.2 30w6d 28w6d 32w5d
18.8 24w5d 23w0d 26w3d 25.4 30w6d 29w0d 32w6d
19.0 24w6d 23w1d 26w4d 25.6 31w1d 29w1d 33w1d
19.2 25w0d 23w2d 26w6d 25.8 31w2d 29w3d 33w2d
19.4 25w1d 23w4d 27w0d 26.0 31w4d 29w4d 33w4d
19.6 25w3d 23w5d 27w1d 26.2 31w5d 29w5d 33w5d
19.8 25w4d 23w6d 27w3d 26.4 31w6d 29w6d 33w6d
20.0 25w6d 24w1d 27w4d 26.6 32w1d 30w1d 34w1d
20.2 26w0d 24w2d 27w6d 26.8 32w2d 30w2d 34w2d
20.4 26w1d 24w3d 27w6d 27.0 32w4d 30w4d 34w4d
20.6 26w3d 24w4d 28w1d 27.2 32w5d 30w4d 34w5d
20.8 26w4d 24w6d 28w2d 27.4 32w6d 30w6d 34w6d
21.0 26w6d 25w0d 28w4d 27.6 33w0d 31w0d 35w1d
21.2 27w0d 25w1d 28w5d 27.8 33w1d 31w1d 35w2d
21.4 27w1d 25w2d 28w6d 28.0 33w3d 31w3d 35w4d
21.6 27w2d 25w4d 29w1d 28.2 33w4d 31w4d 35w5d
21.8 27w4d 25w5d 29w2d 28.4 33w6d 31w5d 35w6d
22.0 27w5d 25w6d 29w4d 28.6 34w0d 31w6d 36w1d
22.2 27w6d 26w1d 29w5d 28.8 34w1d 32w1d 36w2d
22.4 28w1d 26w2d 29w6d 29.0 34w3d 32w2d 36w4d

29.2 34w4d 32w4d 36w5d 32.2 37w3d 35w1d 39w4d
29.4 34w5d 32w4d 36w6d 32.4 37w4d 35w3d 39w6d
29.6 34w6d 32w6d 37w1d 32.6 37w6d 35w4d 40w0d
29.8 35w1d 33w0d 37w1d 32.8 38w0d 35w5d 40w1d
30.0 35w2d 33w1d 37w3d 33.0 38w1d 35w6d 40w3d
30.2 35w4d 33w3d 37w4d 33.2 38w3d 36w1d 40w4d
30.4 35w5d 33w4d 37w6d 33.4 38w4d 36w2d 40w6d
30.6 35w6d 33w5d 38w0d 33.6 38w5d 36w4d 41w0d
30.8 36w1d 33w6d 38w1d 33.8 38w6d 36w5d 41w1d
31.0 36w2d 34w1d 38w3d 34.0 39w1d 36w6d 41w3d
31.2 36w4d 34w2d 38w4d 34.2 39w2d 37w0d 41w4d
31.4 36w4d 34w4d 38w6d 34.4 39w4d 37w1d 41w6d
31.6 36w6d 34w4d 39w0d 34.6 39w5d 37w3d 42w0d
31.8 37w0d 34w6d 39w1d 34.8 39w6d 37w4d 42w1d
32.0 37w1d 35w0d 39w3d

Fetal Growth Table

E. Merz, W. Goldhofer, E. Timor-Tritsch "Ultrasound in Gynecology and Obstetrics" Textbook
Age Growth 5% 95% 26 20.2 17.7 22.7
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 21.2 18.7 23.8
12 5.8 4 7.6 28 22.3 19.7 24.8
13 6.8 5 8.7 29 23.3 20.7 25.9
14 7.9 6 9.8 30 24.3 21.7 27
15 8.9 6.9 10.9 31 25.3 22.7 28
16 9.9 7.9 11.9 32 26.4 23.7 29.1
17 11 8.9 13 33 27.4 24.6 30.2
18 12 9.9 14.1 34 28.4 25.6 31.2
19 13 10.8 15.2 35 29.5 26.6 32.3
20 14 11.8 16.2 36 30.5 27.6 33.4
21 15.1 12.8 17.3 37 31.5 28.6 34.4
22 16.1 13.8 18.4 38 32.5 29.6 35.5
23 17.1 14.8 19.5 39 33.6 30.6 36.5
24 18.2 15.8 20.5 40 34.6 31.6 37.6
25 19.2 16.7 21.6

Abdominal Circumference (AC) : JEANTY
Fetal Growth Table

Jeanty, P., Cousaert, E., Cantraine, F., "Normal Growth of the Abdominal Perimeter"
American Journal of Perinatalogy, 1:129, 1984
Age Growth Min Max 26 20.50 18.30 22.70
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 21.50 19.30 23.80
12 5.70 3.50 8.00 28 22.50 20.30 24.80
13 6.70 4.50 9.00 29 23.50 21.30 25.70
14 7.70 5.50 10.00 30 24.40 22.20 26.70
15 8.80 6.50 11.00 31 25.40 23.10 27.60
16 9.80 7.60 12.00 32 26.20 24.00 28.50
17 10.90 8.60 13.10 33 27.10 24.80 29.30
18 11.90 9.70 14.20 34 27.90 25.60 30.10
19 13.00 10.80 15.20 35 28.60 26.40 30.90
20 14.10 11.90 16.30 36 29.30 27.10 31.60
21 15.20 12.90 17.40 37 30.00 27.80 32.20
22 16.30 14.00 18.50 38 30.60 28.30 32.80
23 17.30 15.10 19.60 39 31.10 28.90 33.30
24 18.40 16.20 20.60 40 31.60 29.40 33.80
25 19.50 17.20 21.70

Abdominal Circumference (AC) : TOKYO
GA Table
Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23. No. 12 (1996)
AC GA Min Max 21.50 27w0d 25w2d 28w5d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 22.00 27w3d 25w5d 29w1d
10.00 15w3d 14w2d 16w4d 22.50 28w0d 26w2d 29w5d
10.50 16w0d 14w6d 17w1d 23.00 28w4d 26w6d 30w2d
11.00 16w4d 15w3d 17w5d 23.50 29w0d 27w2d 30w5d
11.50 17w0d 15w6d 18w1d 24.00 29w4d 27w5d 31w3d
12.00 17w4d 16w2d 18w6d 24.50 30w1d 28w2d 32w0d
12.50 18w0d 16w5d 19w2d 25.00 30w5d 28w6d 32w4d
13.00 18w4d 17w2d 19w6d 25.50 31w2d 29w3d 33w1d
13.50 19w0d 17w5d 20w2d 26.00 31w6d 30w0d 33w5d
14.00 19w4d 18w2d 20w6d 26.50 32w3d 30w4d 34w2d
14.50 20w0d 18w5d 21w2d 27.00 33w1d 31w2d 35w0d
15.00 20w3d 19w0d 21w6d 27.50 33w5d 31w5d 35w5d
15.50 21w0d 19w4d 22w3d 28.00 34w2d 32w2d 36w2d
16.00 21w3d 20w0d 22w6d 28.50 35w0d 33w0d 37w0d
16.50 22w0d 20w4d 23w3d 29.00 35w4d 33w4d 37w4d
17.00 22w3d 21w0d 23w6d 29.50 36w2d 34w2d 38w2d
17.50 22w6d 21w3d 24w2d 30.00 37w0d 35w0d 39w0d
18.00 23w3d 21w6d 25w0d 30.50 37w5d 35w5d 39w5d
18.50 23w6d 22w2d 25w3d 31.00 38w2d 36w1d 40w3d
19.00 24w3d 22w6d 26w0d 31.50 39w0d 36w6d 41w1d
19.50 24w6d 23w2d 26w3d 32.00 39w6d 37w5d 42w0d
20.00 25w3d 23w6d 27w0d 32.50 40w4d 38w3d 42w5d
20.50 25w6d 24w2d 27w3d 33.00 41w2d 39w1d 43w3d
21.00 26w3d 24w5d 28w1d

Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 30 24.70 22.20 27.10
16 10.90 9.50 12.40 31 25.60 23.00 28.10
17 12.00 10.40 13.50 32 26.50 23.80 29.00
18 13.00 11.40 14.60 33 27.30 24.50 29.90
19 14.00 12.30 15.70 34 28.10 25.30 30.70
20 15.10 13.30 16.80 35 28.90 26.00 31.60
21 16.10 14.20 17.80 36 29.70 26.60 32.40
22 17.10 15.10 18.90 37 30.40 27.30 33.20
23 18.10 16.10 20.00 38 31.10 27.90 34.00
24 19.10 17.00 21.10 39 31.80 28.50 34.70
25 20.10 17.90 22.10 40 32.40 29.10 35.40
26 21.00 18.80 23.10 41 33.00 29.60 36.10
27 22.00 19.70 24.20 42 33.60 30.10 36.70
28 22.90 20.50 25.20

Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CHITTY (D)
Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell, "Charts of Fetal Size: 3. Abdominal Measurement"
British Journal of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, February 1994. Vol 101. Pp125-131
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 23.06 21.29 24.82
12 5.58 5.05 6.11 29 24.05 22.22 25.89
13 6.74 6.13 7.34 30 25.04 23.12 26.96
14 7.89 7.2 8.57 31 26.01 24.02 28.01
15 9.03 8.27 9.79 32 26.97 24.9 29.04
16 10.16 9.33 11 33 27.91 25.76 30.06
17 11.29 10.38 12.21 34 28.84 26.61 31.06
18 12.41 11.42 13.4 35 29.75 27.44 32.05
19 13.52 12.45 14.59 36 30.64 28.26 33.02
20 14.62 13.48 15.77 37 31.51 29.06 33.97
21 15.71 14.49 16.94 38 32.37 29.84 34.91
22 16.8 15.5 18.1 39 33.21 30.6 35.82
23 17.87 16.49 19.25 40 34.04 31.35 36.72
24 18.93 17.48 20.38 41 34.84 32.08 37.6
25 19.98 18.45 21.51 42 35.62 32.78 38.46
26 21.02 19.41 22.63

Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CHITTY (M)
Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell, "Charts of Fetal Size: 3. Abdominal Measurement" British
Journal of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, February 1994. Vol 101. Pp125-131
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 23.91 22.21 25.61
12 5.89 5.13 6.66 29 24.94 23.18 26.7
13 7.09 6.26 7.91 30 25.96 24.14 27.78
14 8.27 7.39 9.15 31 26.96 25.08 28.84
15 9.45 8.5 10.39 32 27.95 26.01 29.89
16 10.62 9.62 11.62 33 28.92 26.93 30.92
17 11.78 10.72 12.84 34 29.88 27.82 31.93
18 12.93 11.82 14.05 35 30.82 28.7 32.93
19 14.08 12.9 15.25 36 31.74 29.57 33.91
20 15.21 13.98 16.45 37 32.64 30.41 34.88
21 16.34 15.05 17.63 38 33.53 31.24 35.82
22 17.46 16.1 18.81 39 34.4 32.05 36.75
23 18.56 17.15 19.97 40 35.25 32.84 37.66
24 19.66 18.19 21.12 41 36.08 33.62 38.54
25 20.74 19.21 22.27 42 36.89 34.37 39.41
26 21.81 20.22 23.39

Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CAMPBELL
GA Table
Campbell Professor Campbell's Group at Harris Birthright Centre, King's College Hospital
AC GA ±SD 23.10 27w0d 02w6d
(cm) (wd) (wd) 24.20 28w0d 02w6d
9.00 14w0d 02w0d 25.30 29w0d 02w6d
10.10 15w0d 02w1d 26.40 30w0d 03w0d
11.20 16w0d 02w1d 27.50 31w0d 03w1d
12.30 17w0d 02w1d 28.60 32w0d 03w1d
13.40 18w0d 02w1d 29.70 33w0d 03w4d
14.50 19w0d 02w1d 30.80 34w0d 04w0d
15.60 20w0d 02w2d 31.70 35w0d 04w2d
16.70 21w0d 02w2d 32.50 36w0d 04w2d
17.80 22w0d 02w2d 33.10 37w0d 04w2d
18.80 23w0d 02w3d 33.80 38w0d 04w2d
19.90 24w0d 02w4d 34.40 39w0d 0w0d
21.00 25w0d 02w5d 35.00 40w0d 0w0d
22.10 26w0d 02w5d

Fetal Growth Table

Chitty, L., Campbell, S., “Charts of Fetal Size : Abdominal measurements,”
British J of OB and Gyn., February 1994, vol. 101, ppl 125-131, Table1.
Age Growth 27 w0d 22.62
(wd) (cm) 28 w0d 24.12
12w0d 6.00 29 w0d 25.35
13 w0d 7.02 30 w0d 26.22
14 w0d 8.43 31 w0d 27.30
15 w0d 9.43 32 w0d 27.98
16 w0d 10.96 33 w0d 29.21
17 w0d 11.75 34 w0d 30.14
18 w0d 13.06 35 w0d 31.09
19 w0d 14.44 36 w0d 31.85
20 w0d 15.20 37 w0d 32.94
21 w0d 16.53 38 w0d 33.10
22 w0d 17.03 39 w0d 34.26
23 w0d 18.51 40 w0d 36.04
24 w0d 19.54 41 w0d 36.89
25 w0d 20.46
26 w0d 21.54
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

Australasian Society for Ultrasound in Medicine
Policies and Statements - [D7] Statement On Normal Ultrasonic Fetal Measurements (Revised
May 2001)
Age Growth ±SD 26 223.00 25.00
(w) (mm) (mm) 27 230.00 25.00
28 242.00 25.00
11 52.00 10.00
29 259.00 25.00
12 63.00 10.00
30 262.00 25.00
13 74.00 10.00
31 272.00 30.00
14 84.00 10.00
32 283.00 30.00
15 96.00 10.00
33 294.00 30.00
16 106.00 10.00
34 305.00 30.00
17 120.00 15.00
35 315.00 30.00
18 131.00 15.00
36 325.00 35.00
19 140.00 15.00
37 333.00 35.00
20 151.00 15.00
38 342.00 35.00
21 164.00 20.00
39 356.00 35.00
22 176.00 20.00
40 362.00 35.00
23 186.00 20.00
41 367.00 35.00
24 201.00 20.00
25 212.00 20.00
Abdominal Circumference (AC) : CFEF
Fetal Growth Table

J.Créquat, M. Duyme, G. Brodaty
Biométrie 2000. Tables de croissance foetale par le Collège Français d'Echographie Foetale
( CFEF ) et l'Inserm U155
Gynecol Obstet Fertil 2000 Jun;28(6):435-45
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 29 24.40 22.40 26.40
15 9.50 8.50 10.40 30 25.40 23.30 27.40
16 10.60 9.60 11.70 31 26.30 24.20 28.40
17 11.80 10.70 12.90 32 27.20 25.00 29.40
18 12.90 11.70 14.10 33 28.10 25.80 30.40
19 14.00 12.80 15.30 34 29.00 26.70 31.40
20 15.10 13.80 16.50 35 29.90 27.50 32.30
21 16.20 14.80 17.60 36 30.70 28.30 33.30
22 17.30 15.80 18.80 37 31.60 29.00 34.20
23 18.40 16.80 19.90 38 32.50 29.80 35.10
24 19.40 17.80 21.00 39 33.20 30.50 36.00
25 20.40 18.70 22.10 40 33.90 31.10 36.70
26 21.50 19.70 23.20
27 22.50 20.60 24.30

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = 1.20007 x BPD + 0.2076 × BPD2 + 9.209216

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 1.9 cm
Max Range : 9.4 cm
Fetal Growth Table

BPD = 5.106104 x MA - 0.046719 x MA2 - 35.053334

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12cm
Max Range : 40cm
Age Growth ±SD 32 8.122 0.263
(W) (cm) (cm) 34 8.496 0.244
12 1.970 0.219 36 8.849 0.225
16 3.483 0.213 38 9.093 0.121
20 4.783 0.231 40 9.401 0.188
24 5.978 0.287
28 7.164 0.256
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Hansmann, Hackeloer, Staudach, Wittman. "Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obsterics and
Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p.440-441.
BPD GA Min Max 5.6 22w0d 20w5d 23w2d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 5.7 22w2d 21w0d 23w4d
2.9 13w3d 12w2d 14w3d 5.8 22w5d 21w3d 23w6d
3.0 13w5d 12w5d 14w5d 5.9 23w0d 21w4d 24w3d
3.1 14w0d 12w6d 15w1d 6.0 23w2d 21w6d 24w4d
3.2 14w2d 13w2d 15w3d 6.1 23w4d 22w1d 25w0d
3.3 14w4d 13w3d 15w6d 6.2 24w0d 22w4d 25w3d
3.4 15w0d 13w5d 16w2d 6.3 24w2d 22w6d 25w4d
3.5 15w2d 14w1d 16w3d 6.4 24w4d 23w1d 26w0d
3.6 15w4d 14w3d 16w6d 6.5 24w6d 23w4d 26w2d
3.7 16w0d 14w6d 17w1d 6.6 25w1d 23w6d 26w5d
3.8 16w2d 15w0d 17w4d 6.7 25w3d 24w1d 27w1d
3.9 16w4d 15w3d 17w6d 6.8 25w6d 24w3d 27w2d
4.0 17w0d 15w5d 18w1d 6.9 26w1d 24w6d 27w4d
4.1 17w2d 16w0d 18w4d 7.0 26w3d 25w0d 27w6d
4.2 17w4d 16w3d 18w6d 7.1 26w5d 25w2d 28w3d
4.3 17w6d 16w4d 19w1d 7.2 27w1d 25w4d 28w4d
4.4 18w1d 16w6d 19w3d 7.3 27w3d 26w0d 29w2d
4.5 18w4d 17w2d 19w6d 7.4 27w6d 26w1d 29w4d
4.6 18w6d 17w4d 20w1d 7.5 28w1d 26w3d 29w6d
4.7 19w1d 17w6d 20w4d 7.6 28w4d 26w5d 30w2d
4.8 19w3d 18w0d 20w6d 7.7 28w6d 27w1d 30w5d
4.9 19w5d 18w1d 21w1d 7.8 29w2d 27w2d 31w3d
5.0 20w0d 18w4d 21w1d 7.9 29w5d 27w3d 32w0d
5.1 20w3d 19w0d 21w6d 8.0 30w0d 27w6d 32w1d
5.2 20w5d 19w2d 22w1d 8.1 30w3d 28w2d 32w4d
5.3 21w0d 19w3d 22w4d 8.2 31w0d 28w6d 33w1d
5.4 21w3d 20w0d 22w6d 8.3 31w2d 29w0d 33w5d
5.5 21w5d 20w2d 23w0d 8.4 31w6d 29w3d 34w2d

8.5 32w2d 29w6d 34w4d 9.6 38w6d 35w2d 41w3d

8.6 32w5d 30w1d 35w1d 9.7 39w0d 35w6d 42w0d
8.7 33w2d 30w2d 36w1d 9.8 39w2d 36w3d 42w0d
8.8 33w5d 31w0d 36w3d 9.9 39w3d 36w4d 42w4d
8.9 34w2d 31w4d 37w0d 10.0 39w4d 36w5d 42w2d
9.0 34w5d 32w0d 37w3d 10.1 39w5d 37w1d 42w4d
9.1 35w1d 32w1d 38w5d 10.2 39w6d 37w1d 42w2d
9.2 35w6d 33w2d 39w2d 10.3 40w0d 37w2d 42w2d
9.3 36w5d 33w5d 39w5d 10.4 40w1d 37w3d 42w2d
9.4 37w3d 34w5d 40w1d 10.5 40w2d 37w6d 42w2d
9.5 38w3d 35w2d 41w0d
Fetal Growth Table
Hansmann, Hackeloer, Stauch, Wittman "Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obsterics and Gynecology"

Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986. p.176
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 26 6.70 6.20 7.10

27 7.00 6.50 7.40
10 1.40 0.90 1.80
28 7.20 6.80 7.70
11 1.70 1.30 2.20
29 7.50 7.00 7.90
12 2.10 1.60 2.50
30 7.70 7.30 8.20
13 2.40 2.00 2.90
31 7.90 7.50 8.40
14 2.80 2.30 3.20
32 8.20 7.70 8.60
15 3.10 2.70 3.60
33 8.40 7.90 8.80
16 3.50 3.00 3.90
34 8.60 8.10 9.00
17 3.80 3.40 4.30
35 8.70 8.30 9.20
18 4.20 3.70 4.60
36 8.90 8.40 9.30
19 4.50 4.00 4.90
37 9.00 8.60 9.50
20 4.80 4.40 5.30
38 9.10 8.70 9.60
21 5.10 4.70 5.60
39 9.30 8.80 9.70
22 5.50 5.00 5.90
40 9.30 8.90 9.80
23 5.80 5.30 6.20
24 6.10 5.60 6.50
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : HADLOCK
GA Table
GA = 9.54 + 1.482 × BPD + 0.1676 × BPD2

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 1.36 cm
Max Range : 10.18 cm
Min Range(w) Max Range(w) ±2SD(w)
12 18 1.19
18 24 1.73
24 30 2.18
30 36 3.08
36 42 3.20
Fetal Growth Table

Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth Parameters" Radiology, 1984, 152: 497-501.
Equation = 0.41 x MA – 0.000061 x MA3 – 3.08

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12 cm
Max Range : 40 cm
Min Range(cm) Max Range(cm) SD(cm)
0 100 0.6
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : MERZ
GA Table
BPD GA 5% 95% 4.6 19w1d 17w3d 21w0d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 4.7 19w3d 17w4d 21w1d
2.1 12w1d 10w5d 13w5d 4.8 19w5d 17w6d 21w4d
2.2 12w3d 10w6d 13w6d 4.9 20w0d 18w1d 21w6d
2.3 12w5d 11w1d 14w1d 5.0 20w3d 18w4d 22w1d
2.4 13w0d 11w4d 14w4d 5.1 20w5d 18w6d 22w4d
2.5 13w1d 11w5d 14w5d 5.2 21w0d 19w1d 22w6d
2.6 13w4d 12w0d 15w0d 5.3 21w2d 19w3d 23w1d
2.7 13w6d 12w1d 15w3d 5.4 21w4d 19w5d 23w4d
2.8 14w1d 12w4d 15w5d 5.5 21w6d 20w0d 23w6d
2.9 14w2d 12w5d 15w6d 5.6 22w1d 20w2d 24w1d
3.0 14w4d 13w0d 16w1d 5.7 22w4d 20w4d 24w3d
3.1 14w6d 13w2d 16w4d 5.8 22w6d 20w6d 24w5d
3.2 15w1d 13w4d 16w6d 5.9 23w1d 21w1d 25w1d
3.3 15w3d 13w6d 17w0d 6.0 23w4d 21w4d 25w4d
3.4 15w5d 14w0d 17w3d 6.1 23w6d 21w6d 25w6d
3.5 16w0d 14w2d 17w5d 6.2 24w1d 22w1d 26w1d
3.6 16w2d 14w4d 18w0d 6.3 24w4d 22w4d 26w4d
3.7 16w4d 14w6d 18w1d 6.4 24w6d 22w6d 26w6d
3.8 16w6d 15w1d 18w4d 6.5 25w1d 23w1d 27w1d
3.9 17w1d 15w3d 18w6d 6.6 25w4d 23w4d 27w4d
4.0 17w3d 15w5d 19w1d 6.7 25w6d 23w6d 27w6d
4.1 17w5d 15w6d 19w4d 6.8 26w1d 24w1d 28w2d
4.2 18w0d 16w1d 19w6d 6.9 26w4d 24w3d 28w4d
4.3 18w2d 16w4d 20w1d 7.0 26w6d 24w5d 28w6d
4.4 18w4d 16w6d 20w3d 7.1 27w1d 25w1d 29w2d
4.5 18w6d 17w1d 20w5d 7.2 27w4d 25w4d 29w5d

7.3 27w6d 25w6d 30w0d 8.9 34w1d 31w6d 36w4d
7.4 28w2d 26w1d 30w3d 9.0 34w4d 32w2d 36w6d
7.5 28w4d 26w4d 30w5d 9.1 35w1d 32w6d 37w3d
7.6 29w0d 26w6d 31w1d 9.2 35w4d 33w1d 37w6d
7.7 29w3d 27w1d 31w4d 9.3 35w6d 33w4d 38w1d
7.8 29w6d 27w4d 32w0d 9.4 36w3d 34w0d 38w6d
7.9 30w1d 27w6d 32w2d 9.5 36w6d 34w4d 39w2d
8.0 30w4d 28w2d 32w5d 9.6 37w2d 34w6d 39w5d
8.1 30w6d 28w5d 33w1d 9.7 37w6d 35w3d 40w1d
8.2 31w2d 29w1d 33w4d 9.8 38w2d 35w6d 40w5d
8.3 31w5d 29w4d 33w6d 9.9 38w6d 36w3d 41w1d
8.4 32w1d 29w6d 34w2d 10.0 39w2d 36w6d 41w6d
8.5 32w4d 30w2d 34w5d 10.1 39w6d 37w2d 42w2d
8.6 32w6d 30w5d 35w1d 10.2 40w2d 37w6d 42w6d
8.7 33w2d 31w0d 35w4d
8.8 33w6d 31w4d 36w1d

Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth 5% 95% 26 6.9 6.3 7.4
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 7.2 6.6 7.7
12 2 1.5 2.4 28 7.4 6.9 8
13 2.4 1.9 2.8 29 7.7 7.1 8.3
14 2.8 2.3 3.2 30 7.9 7.4 8.5
15 3.1 2.7 3.6 31 8.2 7.6 8.8
16 3.5 3 4 32 8.4 7.8 9
17 3.9 3.4 4.4 33 8.6 8 9.2
18 4.3 3.8 4.8 34 8.9 8.2 9.5
19 4.6 4.1 5.1 35 9.1 8.4 9.7
20 5 4.5 5.5 36 9.3 8.6 9.9
21 5.3 4.8 5.8 37 9.4 8.8 10.1
22 5.6 5.1 6.2 38 9.6 9 10.3
23 6 5.4 6.5 39 9.8 9.1 10.4
24 6.3 5.7 6.8 40 9.9 9.3 10.6
25 6.6 6 7.1
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : JEANTY
GA Table
Jeanty, P., Romero, R. "Obstetrical Ultrasound" McGraw-Hill Book Company, pages 57-61, 1984.
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.70 16w3d 13w5d 19w1d
1.00 09w1d 06w4d 11w6d 3.80 16w5d 14w0d 19w3d
1.10 09w4d 06w6d 12w1d 3.90 17w0d 14w2d 19w5d
1.20 09w5d 07w0d 12w3d 4.00 17w2d 14w4d 19w6d
1.30 10w0d 07w2d 12w5d 4.10 17w4d 14w6d 20w1d
1.40 10w2d 07w4d 12w6d 4.20 17w6d 15w1d 20w4d
1.50 10w4d 07w6d 13w1d 4.30 18w1d 15w3d 20w6d
1.60 10w6d 08w1d 13w3d 4.40 18w3d 15w5d 21w1d
1.70 11w1d 08w3d 13w5d 4.50 18w5d 16w0d 21w3d
1.80 11w2d 08w4d 14w0d 4.60 19w0d 16w2d 21w5d
1.90 11w4d 08w6d 14w1d 4.70 19w2d 16w4d 22w0d
2.00 11w6d 09w1d 14w4d 4.80 19w4d 16w6d 22w2d
2.10 12w1d 09w3d 14w6d 4.90 19w6d 17w1d 22w4d
2.20 12w3d 09w5d 15w0d 5.00 20w2d 17w4d 22w6d
2.30 12w4d 09w6d 15w2d 5.10 20w4d 17w6d 23w1d
2.40 12w6d 10w1d 15w4d 5.20 20w6d 18w1d 23w4d
2.50 13w1d 10w4d 15w6d 5.30 21w1d 18w4d 23w6d
2.60 13w3d 10w5d 16w1d 5.40 21w4d 18w6d 24w1d
2.70 13w5d 11w0d 16w3d 5.50 21w6d 19w1d 24w4d
2.80 14w0d 11w2d 16w4d 5.60 22w1d 19w4d 24w6d
2.90 14w1d 11w4d 16w6d 5.70 22w4d 19w6d 25w1d
3.00 14w4d 11w6d 17w1d 5.80 22w6d 20w1d 25w4d
3.10 14w6d 12w1d 17w3d 5.90 23w1d 20w4d 25w6d
3.20 15w1d 12w2d 17w5d 6.00 23w4d 20w6d 26w1d
3.30 15w2d 12w4d 18w0d 6.10 23w6d 21w1d 26w4d
3.40 15w4d 12w6d 18w2d 6.20 24w1d 21w4d 26w6d
3.50 15w6d 13w1d 18w4d 6.30 24w4d 21w6d 27w1d

6.40 24w6d 22w1d 27w4d 8.10 31w4d 28w6d 34w2d
6.50 25w2d 22w4d 27w6d 8.20 32w0d 29w2d 34w5d
6.60 25w4d 22w6d 28w2d 8.30 32w4d 29w6d 35w1d
6.70 26w0d 23w2d 28w4d 8.40 32w6d 30w1d 35w4d
6.80 26w3d 23w5d 29w0d 8.50 33w3d 30w5d 36w0d
6.90 26w5d 24w0d 29w3d 8.60 33w6d 31w1d 36w4d
7.00 27w1d 24w3d 29w6d 8.70 34w2d 31w4d 37w0d
7.10 27w4d 24w6d 30w1d 8.80 34w6d 32w1d 37w3d
7.20 27w6d 25w1d 30w4d 8.90 35w2d 32w4d 37w6d
7.30 28w2d 25w4d 30w6d 9.00 35w5d 33w0d 38w3d
7.40 28w5d 26w0d 31w2d 9.10 36w1d 33w4d 38w6d
7.50 29w1d 26w3d 31w5d 9.20 36w5d 34w0d 39w3d
7.60 29w4d 26w6d 32w1d 9.30 37w1d 34w4d 39w6d
7.70 29w6d 27w1d 32w4d 9.40 37w5d 35w0d 40w3d
7.80 30w2d 27w4d 33w0d 9.50 38w2d 35w4d 40w6d
7.90 30w5d 28w0d 33w3d
8.00 31w1d 28w4d 33w6d

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : SABBAGHA
GA Table
Sabbagha, R.E., et. al. "Standardization of Sonar Cephalometry and Gestational Age"
Obstetrics and Gynecology, Vol. 52, No.4: 403, October, 1978
BPD GA ±SD 7.20 28w0d 2w0d
(cm) (wd) (wd) 7.50 29w0d 3w0d
3.70 16w0d 1w0d 7.80 30w0d 3w0d
4.00 17w0d 1w3d 8.00 31w0d 3w0d
4.30 18w0d 1w3d 8.30 32w0d 3w0d
4.50 19w0d 1w3d 8.50 33w0d 3w0d
4.70 20w0d 1w3d 8.70 34w0d 3w0d
5.00 21w0d 1w3d 8.80 35w0d 3w0d
5.30 22w0d 1w3d 9.00 36w0d 3w0d
5.60 23w0d 1w3d 9.20 37w0d 3w0d
5.90 24w0d 1w3d 9.30 38w0d 3w0d
6.20 25w0d 1w3d 9.40 39w0d 3w0d
6.60 26w0d 1w3d 9.50 40w0d 3w0d
6.90 27w0d 2w0d

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : TOKYO
GA Table
Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23 No. 12 (1996)
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 4.10 18w3d 17w4d 19w2d
1.30 10w1d 09w4d 10w5d 4.20 18w5d 17w6d 19w4d
1.40 10w3d 09w6d 11w0d 4.30 19w0d 18w1d 19w6d
1.50 10w5d 10w1d 11w2d 4.40 19w2d 18w3d 20w1d
1.60 11w0d 10w3d 11w4d 4.50 19w4d 18w5d 20w3d
1.70 11w2d 10w5d 11w6d 4.60 20w0d 19w0d 21w0d
1.80 11w4d 11w0d 12w1d 4.70 20w2d 19w2d 21w2d
1.90 11w6d 11w2d 12w3d 4.80 20w4d 19w4d 21w4d
2.00 12w1d 11w4d 12w5d 4.90 20w6d 19w6d 21w6d
2.10 12w3d 11w6d 13w0d 5.00 21w1d 20w1d 22w1d
2.20 12w6d 12w2d 13w3d 5.10 21w3d 20w3d 22w3d
2.30 13w1d 12w3d 13w6d 5.20 21w6d 20w6d 22w6d
2.40 13w3d 12w5d 14w1d 5.30 22w1d 21w0d 23w2d
2.50 13w5d 13w0d 14w3d 5.40 22w3d 21w2d 23w4d
2.60 14w0d 13w2d 14w5d 5.50 22w5d 21w4d 23w6d
2.70 14w2d 13w4d 15w0d 5.60 23w1d 22w0d 24w2d
2.80 14w4d 13w6d 15w2d 5.70 23w3d 22w2d 24w4d
2.90 14w6d 14w1d 15w4d 5.80 23w5d 22w4d 24w6d
3.00 15w1d 14w3d 15w6d 5.90 24w1d 23w0d 25w2d
3.10 15w3d 14w5d 16w1d 6.00 24w3d 23w1d 25w5d
3.20 15w5d 15w0d 16w3d 6.10 24w5d 23w3d 26w0d
3.30 16w0d 15w2d 16w5d 6.20 25w1d 23w6d 26w3d
3.40 16w2d 15w4d 17w0d 6.30 25w3d 24w1d 26w5d
3.50 16w4d 15w6d 17w2d 6.40 25w5d 24w3d 27w0d
3.60 16w6d 16w0d 17w5d 6.50 26w1d 24w6d 27w3d
3.70 17w1d 16w2d 18w0d 6.60 26w3d 25w0d 27w6d
3.80 17w4d 16w5d 18w3d 6.70 26w6d 25w3d 28w2d
3.90 17w6d 17w0d 18w5d 6.80 27w2d 25w6d 28w5d

6.90 27w4d 26w1d 29w0d
7.00 28w0d 26w4d 29w3d 8.10 32w5d 31w0d 34w3d

7.10 28w3d 27w0d 29w6d 8.20 33w1d 31w2d 35w0d
7.20 28w5d 27w1d 30w2d 8.30 33w5d 31w6d 35w4d
7.30 29w1d 27w4d 30w5d 8.40 34w2d 32w3d 36w1d
7.40 29w4d 28w0d 31w1d 8.50 34w6d 33w0d 36w5d
7.50 30w0d 28w3d 31w4d 8.60 35w3d 33w3d 37w3d
7.60 30w3d 28w6d 32w0d 8.70 36w0d 34w0d 38w0d
7.70 30w6d 29w1d 32w4d 8.80 36w5d 34w5d 38w5d
7.80 31w2d 29w4d 33w0d 8.90 37w4d 35w4d 39w4d
7.90 31w5d 30w0d 33w3d 9.00 38w3d 36w2d 40w4d
8.00 32w1d 30w3d 33w6d
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 6.87 6.38 7.36
10 1.43 1.08 1.77 28 7.14 6.64 7.63
11 1.76 1.41 2.12 29 7.39 6.88 7.89
12 2.10 1.74 2.47 30 7.63 7.11 8.14
13 2.44 2.07 2.82 31 7.85 7.33 8.38
14 2.78 2.40 3.16 32 8.06 7.53 8.60
15 3.12 2.73 3.51 33 8.26 7.72 8.80
16 3.46 3.06 3.86 34 8.45 7.90 8.99
17 3.80 3.39 4.20 35 8.61 8.06 9.17
18 4.13 3.72 4.55 36 8.76 8.20 9.33
19 4.46 4.04 4.88 37 8.90 8.32 9.47
20 4.79 4.36 5.22 38 9.01 8.43 9.59
21 5.11 4.67 5.55 39 9.11 8.52 9.70
22 5.42 4.97 5.87 40 9.18 8.59 9.78
23 5.73 5.27 6.18 41 9.24 8.63 9.85
24 6.03 5.56 6.49 42 9.28 8.66 9.89
25 6.32 5.85 6.79

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : OSAKA
GA Table
Osaka University Method 1989, 3 by Univ. Of Osaka
BPD G.A 3.90 17w1d 6.80 26w3d
(cm) (wd) 4.00 17w3d 6.90 26w5d

4.10 17w5d 7.00 27w1d
1.30 10w0d
4.20 18w0d 7.10 27w4d
1.40 10w1d
4.30 18w2d 7.20 27w6d
1.50 10w3d
4.40 18w4d 7.30 28w2d
1.60 10w5d
4.50 18w6d 7.40 28w4d
1.70 11w0d
4.60 19w2d 7.50 29w0d
1.80 11w1d
4.70 19w4d 7.60 29w3d
1.90 11w3d
4.80 19w6d 7.70 29w6d
2.00 11w5d
4.90 20w1d 7.80 30w2d
2.10 12w0d
5.00 20w3d 7.90 30w4d
2.20 12w2d
5.10 20w5d 8.00 31w0d
2.30 12w4d
5.20 21w1d 8.10 31w3d
2.40 12w6d
5.30 21w3d 8.20 32w0d
2.50 13w1d
5.40 21w5d 8.30 32w3d
2.60 13w3d
5.50 22w0d 8.40 32w6d
2.70 13w5d
5.60 22w3d 8.50 33w3d
2.80 14w0d
5.70 22w5d 8.60 33w6d
2.90 14w1d
5.80 23w0d 8.70 34w0d
3.00 14w3d
5.90 23w3d 8.80 35w0d
3.10 14w5d
6.00 23w5d 8.90 35w4d
3.20 15w0d
6.10 24w0d 9.00 36w2d
3.30 15w2d
6.20 24w3d 9.10 37w0d
3.40 15w4d
6.30 24w5d 9.20 37w6d
3.50 16w0d
6.40 25w0d 9.30 39w0d
3.60 16w2d
6.50 25w3d 9.40 40w0d
3.70 16w4d
6.60 25w5d
3.80 16w6d
6.70 26w0d
Fetal Growth Table

GA Growth ±SD 14w0d 2.82 0.23
(wd) (cm) (cm) 14w1d 2.87 0.23
10w0d 1.33 0.19 14w2d 2.93 0.23
10w1d 1.38 0.19 14w3d 2.98 0.23
10w2d 1.44 0.19 14w4d 3.03 0.24
10w3d 1.50 0.19 14w5d 3.08 0.24
10w4d 1.55 0.19 14w6d 3.13 0.24
10w5d 1.61 0.19 15w0d 3.18 0.24
10w6d 1.66 0.20 15w1d 3.23 0.24
11w0d 1.72 0.20 15w2d 3.28 0.24
11w1d 1.77 0.20 15w3d 3.33 0.24
11w2d 1.83 0.20 15w4d 3.38 0.25
11w3d 1.88 0.20 15w5d 3.42 0.25
11w4d 1.93 0.20 15w6d 3.47 0.25
11w5d 1.99 0.21 16w0d 3.52 0.25
11w6d 2.04 0.21 16w1d 3.57 0.25
12w0d 2.09 0.21 16w2d 3.62 0.25
12w1d 2.15 0.21 16w3d 3.67 0.25
12w2d 2.20 0.21 16w4d 3.72 0.25
12w3d 2.25 0.21 16w5d 3.77 0.26
12w4d 2.31 0.21 16w6d 3.81 0.26
12w5d 2.36 0.22 17w0d 3.86 0.26
12w6d 2.41 0.22 17w1d 3.91 0.26
13w0d 2.46 0.22 17w2d 3.96 0.26
13w1d 2.52 0.22 17w3d 4.01 0.26
13w2d 2.57 0.22 17w4d 4.05 0.26
13w3d 2.62 0.22 17w5d 4.10 0.27
13w4d 2.67 0.23 17w6d 4.15 0.27
13w5d 2.72 0.23 18w0d 4.20 0.27
13w6d 2.77 0.23 18w1d 4.24 0.27

18w2d 4.29 0.27 23w0d 5.79 0.31
18w3d 4.34 0.27 23w1d 5.83 0.31
18w4d 4.39 0.27 23w2d 5.87 0.31
18w5d 4.43 0.27 23w3d 5.92 0.31
18w6d 4.48 0.28 23w4d 5.96 0.31
19w0d 4.53 0.28 23w5d 6.00 0.31
19w1d 4.57 0.28 23w6d 6.05 0.32
19w2d 4.62 0.28 24w0d 6.09 0.32
19w3d 4.67 0.28 24w1d 6.13 0.32
19w4d 4.71 0.28 24w2d 6.17 0.32
19w5d 4.76 0.28 24w3d 6.22 0.32
19w6d 4.80 0.28 24w4d 6.26 0.32
20w0d 4.85 0.29 24w5d 6.30 0.32
20w1d 4.90 0.29 24w6d 6.34 0.32
20w2d 4.94 0.29 25w0d 6.39 0.32
20w3d 4.99 0.29 25w1d 6.43 0.32
20w4d 5.03 0.29 25w2d 6.47 0.33
20w5d 5.08 0.29 25w3d 6.51 0.33
20w6d 5.12 0.29 25w4d 6.55 0.33
21w0d 5.17 0.29 25w5d 6.59 0.33
21w1d 5.21 0.29 25w6d 6.63 0.33
21w2d 5.26 0.30 26w0d 6.67 0.33
21w3d 5.30 0.30 26w1d 6.71 0.33
21w4d 5.35 0.30 26w2d 6.75 0.33
21w5d 5.39 0.30 26w3d 6.80 0.33
21w6d 5.44 0.30 26w4d 6.84 0.33
22w0d 5.48 0.30 26w5d 6.88 0.33
22w1d 5.52 0.30 26w6d 6.92 0.34
22w2d 5.57 0.30 27w0d 6.95 0.34
22w3d 5.61 0.30 27w1d 6.99 0.34
22w4d 5.66 0.31 27w2d 7.03 0.34
22w5d 5.70 0.31 27w3d 7.07 0.34
22w6d 5.74 0.31 27w4d 7.11 0.34

27w5d 7.15 0.34 32w3d 8.31 0.36
27w6d 7.19 0.34 32w4d 8.34 0.37
28w0d 7.23 0.34 32w5d 8.37 0.37
28w1d 7.27 0.34 32w6d 8.40 0.37
28w2d 7.30 0.34 33w0d 8.43 0.37
28w3d 7.34 0.34 33w1d 8.46 0.37
28w4d 7.38 0.35 33w2d 8.48 0.37
28w5d 7.42 0.35 33w3d 8.51 0.37
28w6d 7.45 0.35 33w4d 8.54 0.37
29w0d 7.49 0.35 33w5d 8.57 0.37
29w1d 7.53 0.35 33w6d 8.60 0.37
29w2d 7.56 0.35 34w0d 8.62 0.37
29w3d 7.60 0.35 34w1d 8.65 0.37
29w4d 7.64 0.35 34w2d 8.68 0.37
29w5d 7.67 0.35 34w3d 8.70 0.37
29w6d 7.71 0.35 34w4d 8.73 0.37
30w0d 7.74 0.35 34w5d 8.75 0.37
30w1d 7.78 0.35 34w6d 8.78 0.37
30w2d 7.81 0.35 35w0d 8.80 0.37
30w3d 7.85 0.36 35w1d 8.83 0.38
30w4d 7.88 0.36 35w2d 8.85 0.38
30w5d 7.92 0.36 35w3d 8.87 0.38
30w6d 7.95 0.36 35w4d 8.90 0.38
31w0d 7.98 0.36 35w5d 8.92 0.38
31w1d 8.02 0.36 35w6d 8.94 0.38
31w2d 8.05 0.36 36w0d 8.96 0.38
31w3d 8.08 0.36 36w1d 8.98 0.38
31w4d 8.12 0.36 36w2d 9.00 0.38
31w5d 8.15 0.36 36w3d 9.02 0.38
31w6d 8.18 0.36 36w4d 9.04 0.38
32w0d 8.21 0.36 36w5d 9.06 0.38
32w1d 8.24 0.36 36w6d 9.08 0.38
32w2d 8.27 0.36 37w0d 9.10 0.38

37w1d 9.12 0.38 38w5d 9.28 0.39
37w2d 9.14 0.38 38w6d 9.29 0.39
37w3d 9.15 0.38 39w0d 9.30 0.39
37w4d 9.17 0.38 39w1d 9.31 0.39
37w5d 9.18 0.38 39w2d 9.32 0.39
37w6d 9.20 0.38 39w3d 9.33 0.39
38w0d 9.21 0.38 39w4d 9.34 0.39
38w1d 9.23 0.38 39w5d 9.35 0.39
38w2d 9.24 0.38 39w6d 9.36 0.39
38w3d 9.26 0.39 40w0d 9.36 0.39
38w4d 9.27 0.39

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CHITTY (OUT-IN)
GA Table
Altman DG, Chitty LS: New Charts for ultrasound dating of pregnancy. Ultrasound in Obstetrics
and Gynecology, Vol. 10: 174-191, 1997
BPD G.A Min Max 4.60 19w6d 18w3d 21w4d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 4.70 20w2d 18w5d 22w0d
2.10 12w5d 11w6d 13w5d 4.80 20w4d 19w0d 22w2d
2.20 13w0d 12w1d 14w0d 4.90 20w6d 19w2d 22w5d
2.30 13w2d 12w3d 14w2d 5.00 21w1d 19w4d 23w0d
2.40 13w4d 12w4d 14w4d 5.10 21w4d 19w6d 23w3d
2.50 13w6d 12w6d 14w6d 5.20 21w6d 20w1d 23w5d
2.60 14w1d 13w1d 15w1d 5.30 22w1d 20w3d 24w1d
2.70 14w3d 13w3d 15w3d 5.40 22w4d 20w5d 24w4d
2.80 14w5d 13w4d 15w5d 5.50 22w6d 21w0d 24w6d
2.90 14w6d 13w6d 16w0d 5.60 23w1d 21w2d 25w2d
3.00 15w1d 14w1d 16w2d 5.70 23w4d 21w4d 25w4d
3.10 15w3d 14w3d 16w5d 5.80 23w6d 21w6d 26w0d
3.20 15w5d 14w4d 17w0d 5.90 24w1d 22w1d 26w3d
3.30 16w0d 14w6d 17w2d 6.00 24w4d 22w3d 26w6d
3.40 16w2d 15w1d 17w4d 6.10 24w6d 22w5d 27w1d
3.50 16w4d 15w3d 17w6d 6.20 25w2d 23w1d 27w4d
3.60 16w6d 15w5d 18w2d 6.30 25w4d 23w3d 28w0d
3.70 17w1d 15w6d 18w4d 6.40 26w0d 23w5d 28w3d
3.80 17w3d 16w1d 18w6d 6.50 26w2d 24w0d 28w6d
3.90 17w6d 16w3d 19w2d 6.60 26w5d 24w2d 29w1d
4.00 18w1d 16w5d 19w4d 6.70 27w0d 24w4d 29w4d
4.10 18w3d 17w0d 19w6d 6.80 27w3d 25w0d 30w0d
4.20 18w5d 17w2d 20w2d 6.90 27w5d 25w2d 30w3d
4.30 19w0d 17w4d 20w4d 7.00 28w1d 25w4d 30w6d
4.40 19w2d 17w6d 20w6d 7.10 28w3d 25w6d 31w2d
4.50 19w4d 18w1d 21w2d 7.20 28w6d 26w2d 31w5d

7.30 29w2d 26w4d 32w1d 8.20 32w5d 29w4d 36w1d
7.40 29w4d 26w6d 32w4d 8.30 33w1d 30w0d 36w4d
7.50 30w0d 27w2d 33w0d 8.40 33w3d 30w2d 37w0d
7.60 30w2d 27w4d 33w3d 8.50 33w6d 30w5d 37w3d
7.70 30w5d 27w6d 33w6d 8.60 34w2d 31w0d 38w0d
7.80 31w1d 28w2d 34w2d 8.70 34w5d 31w2d 38w3d
7.90 31w4d 28w4d 34w5d 8.80 35w1d 31w5d 38w6d
8.00 31w6d 28w6d 35w1d 8.90 35w4d 32w0d 39w3d
8.10 32w2d 29w2d 35w5d
Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell. "Charts of Fetal Size: 2. Head Measurement" British
Journal of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, January 1994. Vol 101. Pp35-43
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 7.05 6.65 7.46
12 1.83 1.57 2.09 29 7.31 6.90 7.73
13 2.2 1.93 2.47 30 7.57 7.15 7.99
14 2.56 2.28 2.84 31 7.81 7.38 8.24
15 2.93 2.64 3.22 32 8.04 7.60 8.48
16 3.28 2.99 3.58 33 8.26 7.81 8.71
17 3.63 3.33 3.94 34 8.47 8.02 8.93
18 3.98 3.66 4.30 35 8.67 8.21 9.14
19 4.32 4.00 4.64 36 8.86 8.38 9.33
20 4.65 4.32 4.99 37 9.03 8.55 9.52
21 4.98 4.64 5.32 38 9.20 8.70 9.69
22 5.3 4.95 5.65 39 9.35 8.85 9.85
23 5.61 5.25 5.97 40 9.48 8.97 9.99
24 5.92 5.55 6.29 41 9.61 9.09 10.12
25 6.21 5.84 6.59 42 9.72 9.19 10.24
26 6.50 6.12 6.89

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CHITTY (OUT-OUT)
GA Table
D.G. Altman, L.S. Chitty. "New Charts for Ultrasound Dating of Pregnancy" Ultrasound in
Obstetrics and Gynecology, Vol.10, p174-191, 1997
BPD G.A Min Max 4.70 19w4d 18w0d 21w2d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 4.80 19w6d 18w2d 21w4d
2.20 12w4d 11w5d 13w4d 4.90 20w1d 18w4d 22w0d
2.30 12w6d 12w0d 13w6d 5.00 20w3d 18w5d 22w2d
2.40 13w1d 12w1d 14w1d 5.10 20w5d 19w0d 22w4d
2.50 13w3d 12w3d 14w3d 5.20 21w1d 19w2d 23w0d
2.60 13w4d 12w5d 14w5d 5.30 21w3d 19w4d 23w2d
2.70 13w6d 12w6d 15w0d 5.40 21w5d 19w6d 23w5d
2.80 14w1d 13w1d 15w2d 5.50 22w0d 20w1d 24w0d
2.90 14w3d 13w3d 15w4d 5.60 22w2d 20w3d 24w3d
3.00 14w5d 13w4d 15w6d 5.70 22w5d 20w5d 24w5d
3.10 15w0d 13w6d 16w1d 5.80 23w0d 21w0d 25w1d
3.20 15w2d 14w1d 16w3d 5.90 23w2d 21w2d 25w4d
3.30 15w4d 14w3d 16w5d 6.00 23w5d 21w4d 25w6d
3.40 15w5d 14w4d 17w0d 6.10 24w0d 21w6d 26w2d
3.50 16w0d 14w6d 17w2d 6.20 24w2d 22w1d 26w5d
3.60 16w2d 15w1d 17w5d 6.30 24w5d 22w4d 27w0d
3.70 16w4d 15w3d 18w0d 6.40 25w0d 22w6d 27w3d
3.80 16w6d 15w4d 18w2d 6.50 25w2d 23w1d 27w6d
3.90 17w1d 15w6d 18w4d 6.60 25w5d 23w3d 28w2d
4.00 17w3d 16w1d 19w0d 6.70 26w0d 23w5d 28w4d
4.10 17w5d 16w3d 19w2d 6.80 26w3d 24w0d 29w0d
4.20 18w0d 16w4d 19w4d 6.90 26w5d 24w2d 29w3d
4.30 18w2d 16w6d 19w6d 7.00 27w1d 24w4d 29w6d
4.40 18w4d 17w1d 20w2d 7.10 27w3d 25w0d 30w2d
4.50 19w0d 17w3d 20w4d 7.20 27w6d 25w2d 30w4d
4.60 19w2d 17w5d 20w6d 7.30 28w1d 25w4d 31w0d

7.40 28w4d 25w6d 31w3d 8.40 32w2d 29w1d 35w6d
7.50 28w6d 26w2d 31w6d 8.50 32w5d 29w4d 36w2d
7.60 29w2d 26w4d 32w2d 8.60 33w1d 29w6d 36w5d
7.70 29w5d 26w6d 32w5d 8.70 33w3d 30w1d 37w1d
7.80 30w0d 27w1d 33w1d 8.80 33w6d 30w4d 37w4d
7.90 30w3d 27w4d 33w4d 8.90 34w2d 30w6d 38w1d
8.00 30w5d 27w6d 34w0d 9.00 34w5d 31w1d 38w4d
8.10 31w1d 28w1d 34w3d 9.10 35w1d 31w4d 39w0d
8.20 31w4d 28w3d 34w6d
8.30 31w6d 28w6d 35w2d
Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell, "Charts of Fetal Size: 2. Head Measurement" British Journal of Obstetrics and
Gynaecology, January 1994. Vol 101. Pp35-43
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 7.34 6.93 7.74
12 1.97 1.68 2.25 29 7.60 7.19 8.01
13 2.35 2.06 2.65 30 7.86 7.43 8.28
14 2.73 2.43 3.03 31 8.10 7.67 8.53
15 3.10 2.80 3.41 32 8.33 7.90 8.77
16 3.47 3.16 3.79 33 8.55 8.11 9.00
17 3.83 3.51 4.16 34 8.76 8.31 9.21
18 4.19 3.86 4.52 35 8.96 8.5 9.42
19 4.54 4.2 4.88 36 9.15 8.68 9.61
20 4.88 4.54 5.23 37 9.32 8.84 9.79
21 5.22 4.86 5.57 38 9.48 8.99 9.96
22 5.55 5.19 5.91 39 9.62 9.13 10.11
23 5.87 5.5 6.23 40 9.75 9.26 10.25
24 6.18 5.80 6.55 41 9.87 9.36 10.37
25 6.48 6.10 6.86 42 9.97 9.46 10.48
26 6.78 6.38 7.17

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CAMPBELL
GA Table
Professor Campbell’s Group at Harris birthright Centre, King’s College Hospital
(cm) (wd) (wd) 7.50 28w0d 01w4d
2.40 13w0d 0w0d 7.80 29w0d 01w4d
2.80 14w0d 01w0d 8.00 30w0d 01w5d
3.20 15w0d 01w0d 8.30 31w0d 01w6d
3.70 16w0d 01w0d 8.50 32w0d 02w0d
4.10 17w0d 01w0d 8.70 33w0d 02w1d
4.40 18w0d 01w0d 8.90 34w0d 02w3d
4.70 19w0d 01w1d 9.10 35w0d 02w5d
5.10 20w0d 01w1d 9.30 36w0d 02w6d
5.40 21w0d 01w1d 9.50 37w0d 03w0d
5.80 22w0d 01w1d 9.70 38w0d 0w0d
6.10 23w0d 01w2d 9.90 39w0d 0w0d
6.40 24w0d 01w2d 10.00 40w0d 0w0d
6.70 25w0d 01w2d
7.00 26w0d 01w3d

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : KURTZ
GA Table
Kurtz AB,et.al., ”Analysis of biparietal diameter as an accurate indicator of gestational age”
Journal of Clinical Ultrasound, 8:319-326, August 1980
(cm) (wd) (wd) 4.60 19w3d 2w0d
2.00 12w0d 0w0d 4.70 19w5d 1w6d
2.10 12w0d 0w0d 4.80 20w0d 1w6d
2.20 12w5d 0w4d 4.90 20w2d 1w5d
2.30 13w0d 0w4d 5.00 20w4d 1w4d
2.40 13w1d 0w4d 5.10 20w6d 1w4d
2.50 13w4d 0w4d 5.20 21w1d 1w5d
2.60 13w5d 0w4d 5.30 21w4d 1w5d
2.70 14w0d 0w4d 5.40 21w6d 1w6d
2.80 14w2d 0w5d 5.50 22w1d 1w6d
2.90 14w4d 0w5d 5.60 22w4d 1w6d
3.00 14w6d 0w5d 5.70 22w6d 1w5d
3.10 15w1d 0w6d 5.80 23w1d 1w5d
3.20 15w2d 0w6d 5.90 23w4d 1w4d
3.30 15w4d 0w6d 6.00 23w6d 1w5d
3.40 15w6d 0w6d 6.10 24w1d 1w5d
3.50 16w1d 1w0d 6.20 24w4d 1w4d
3.60 16w3d 1w0d 6.30 24w6d 1w4d
3.70 16w5d 1w1d 6.40 25w2d 1w4d
3.80 17w0d 1w1d 6.50 25w4d 1w4d
3.90 17w2d 1w1d 6.60 26w0d 1w4d
4.00 17w4d 1w1d 6.70 26w3d 1w3d
4.10 17w6d 1w3d 6.80 26w5d 1w3d
4.20 18w1d 1w4d 6.90 27w1d 1w2d
4.30 18w3d 1w6d 7.00 27w4d 1w1d
4.40 18w6d 1w6d 7.10 27w6d 1w1d

7.20 28w2d 1w1d 8.60 34w2d 1w6d
7.30 28w5d 1w1d 8.70 35w0d 1w4d
7.40 29w1d 1w0d 8.80 35w3d 1w5d
7.50 29w4d 1w0d 8.90 36w1d 1w5d
7.60 30w0d 1w0d 9.00 36w4d 1w5d
7.70 30w2d 1w2d 9.10 37w1d 1w2d
7.80 30w4d 1w2d 9.20 37w6d 1w1d
7.90 31w1d 1w3d 9.30 38w2d 1w0d
8.00 31w4d 1w3d 9.40 39w0d 1w1d
8.10 32w1d 1w3d 9.50 39w5d 1w1d
8.20 32w4d 1w3d 9.60 40w2d 1w1d
8.30 33w0d 1w4d 9.70 41w0d 1w1d
8.40 33w3d 1w5d 9.80 41w6d 1w2d
8.50 34w0d 1w5d

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

May 2001)
Age Growth ±SD 26 67.00 4.00
(W) (mm) (mm) 27 68.00 5.00
28 72.00 4.00
11 16.00 2.00
29 75.00 4.00
12 20.00 4.00
30 76.00 4.00
13 24.00 4.00
31 80.00 6.00
14 28.00 4.00
32 81.00 4.00
15 31.00 4.00
33 84.00 6.00
16 36.00 5.00
34 86.00 6.00
17 39.00 5.00
35 88.00 6.50
18 42.00 4.00
36 90.00 6.00
19 45.00 5.00
37 92.00 6.50
20 47.00 4.00
38 93.00 6.00
21 49.00 4.00
39 95.00 8.00
22 52.00 5.00
40 96.00 8.00
23 57.00 5.00
41 98.00 8.00
24 60.00 6.00
25 64.00 6.00
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : BESSIS
GA Table
The data are those provided by Dr. Bessis to M. Le Bel.(Same as SIGMA 20, see memo from
Ch. Gahwiler dated , June 23, 1983)
BPD GA ±SD
(cm) (wd) (wd)
1.90 11w4d 0w6d
2.35 13w0d 0w6d
3.65 17w0d 0w6d
4.90 21w0d 1w0d
6.05 25w0d 1w2d
7.20 29w0d 1w5d
8.15 33w0d 2w4d
8.75 37w0d 4w4d
9.70 39w6d 4w4d

Biparietal Diameter (BPD) : CFEF
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 6.90 6.40 7.30
11 1.50 1.30 1.80 28 7.10 6.70 7.60
12 1.90 1.70 2.20 29 7.40 6.90 7.80
13 2.30 2.10 2.60 30 7.60 7.10 8.00
14 2.70 2.40 3.00 31 7.80 7.30 8.30
15 3.10 2.80 3.40 32 8.00 7.50 8.50
16 3.50 3.10 3.80 33 8.20 7.70 8.70
17 3.80 3.50 4.10 34 8.40 7.90 8.90
18 4.20 3.80 4.50 35 8.60 8.10 9.10
19 4.50 4.10 4.90 36 8.80 8.30 9.20
20 4.80 4.50 5.20 37 8.90 8.50 9.40
21 5.10 4.80 5.50 38 9.10 8.60 9.50
22 5.50 5.10 5.80 39 9.20 8.70 9.70
23 5.80 5.30 6.20 40 9.30 8.90 9.80
24 6.00 5.60 6.50 41 9.40 8.90 9.90
25 6.30 5.90 6.70

Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = CRL × 1.08815 + 6.321988

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 0.9 cm
Max Range : 5.4 cm
Fetal Growth Table

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 7w
Max Range : 11w
Age Growth ±SD

(W) (cm) (cm)
7 1.045 0.287
8 1.589 0.304
9 2.339 0.291
10 3.307 0.297
11 4.286 0.346
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : ROBINSON
GA Table
Robinson HP, Fleming JEE British Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology 82:702-710, September
1975
GA = 8.052 × CRL + 23.73
Output Unit : d(days)
Input Unit : mm
Min Range : 0.70 cm
Max Range : 7.96 cm
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p.439.
CRL GA Min Max 3.60 10w6d 09w5d 12w0d

(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.80 11w1d 09w6d 12w2d
0.60 06w1d 05w1d 07w0d 4.00 11w2d 10w1d 12w3d
0.70 06w2d 05w3d 07w2d 4.20 11w3d 10w2d 12w4d
0.80 06w4d 05w4d 07w3d 4.40 11w4d 10w3d 12w6d
0.90 06w6d 05w6d 07w6d 4.60 11w6d 10w5d 13w0d
1.00 07w0d 06w1d 08w0d 4.80 12w0d 10w6d 13w2d
1.10 07w2d 06w2d 08w1d 5.00 12w1d 10w6d 13w3d
1.20 07w3d 06w3d 08w3d 5.20 12w2d 11w0d 13w4d
1.30 07w4d 06w5d 08w4d 5.40 12w3d 11w0d 13w5d
1.40 07w6d 06w6d 08w6d 5.60 12w4d 11w1d 13w6d
1.50 08w0d 07w0d 09w0d 5.80 12w5d 11w2d 14w0d
1.60 08w2d 07w2d 09w1d 6.00 12w6d 11w3d 14w1d
1.70 08w3d 07w3d 09w2d 6.30 13w0d 11w4d 14w3d
1.80 08w4d 07w4d 09w4d 6.60 13w2d 11w5d 14w5d
1.90 08w5d 07w5d 09w5d 7.00 13w3d 12w0d 15w0d
2.00 08w6d 07w6d 09w6d 7.30 13w5d 12w1d 15w1d
2.10 09w0d 08w0d 10w0d 7.60 13w6d 12w2d 15w3d
2.20 09w1d 08w1d 10w1d 8.00 14w1d 12w4d 15w5d
2.30 09w2d 08w2d 10w2d 8.30 14w2d 12w5d 16w0d
2.40 09w3d 08w3d 10w3d 8.60 14w4d 12w6d 16w2d
2.60 09w5d 08w5d 10w5d 9.00 14w6d 13w1d 16w4d
2.80 10w0d 08w6d 11w1d 9.30 15w1d 13w3d 16w6d
3.00 10w2d 09w1d 11w2d 9.60 15w3d 13w4d 17w1d
3.20 10w3d 09w2d 11w4d 10.00 15w5d 13w6d 17w3d
3.40 10w5d 09w4d 11w5d 10.30 16w0d 14w1d 17w6d

10.60 16w2d 14w3d 18w1d 13.30 19w1d 17w0d 21w2d
11.00 16w4d 14w5d 18w4d 13.60 19w4d 17w3d 21w6d
11.30 17w0d 15w0d 19w0d 14.00 20w0d 17w6d 22w2d
11.60 17w2d 15w2d 19w2d 14.30 20w3d 18w1d 22w5d
12.00 17w4d 15w4d 19w4d 14.60 20w6d 18w4d 23w1d
12.30 18w0d 16w0d 20w0d 15.00 21w3d 19w0d 23w5d
12.60 18w2d 16w2d 20w3d
13.00 18w6d 16w5d 20w6d

Fetal Growth Table

Hansmann, Hackeloer, Staudach, Wittmann. "Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and
Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986
Age Growth Min Max 12w2d 5.56 4.00 7.13
(wd) (cm) (cm) (cm) 12w4d 5.94 4.32 7.55
06w1d 0.69 0.23 1.15 12w6d 6.31 4.64 7.98
06w2d 0.76 0.28 1.25 13w2d 6.88 5.13 8.63
06w3d 0.83 0.32 1.34 13w4d 7.26 5.56 9.06
06w4d 0.90 0.36 1.43 13w6d 7.63 5.78 9.48
06w5d 0.96 0.39 1.52 14w2d 8.18 6.25 10.11
06w6d 1.02 0.43 1.61 14w4d 8.54 6.56 10.52
07w0d 1.08 0.47 1.69 14w6d 8.89 6.86 10.92
07w1d 1.14 0.50 1.78 15w2d 9.39 7.28 11.50
07w2d 1.21 0.54 1.87 15w4d 9.71 7.55 11.87
07w3d 1.27 0.58 1.96 15w6d 10.01 7.80 12.22
07w4d 1.33 0.62 2.05 16w2d 10.44 8.15 12.73
07w5d 1.40 0.66 2.14 16w4d 10.70 8.36 13.04
07w6d 1.47 0.70 2.24 16w6d 10.95 8.56 13.34
08w0d 1.54 0.75 2.34 17w2d 11.30 8.83 13.77
08w1d 1.62 0.80 2.44 17w4d 11.51 8.99 14.04
08w3d 1.78 0.91 2.65 17w6d 11.72 9.15 14.29
08w5d 1.96 1.03 2.88 18w2d 12.00 9.35 14.65
09w0d 2.15 1.17 3.12 18w4d 12.19 9.48 14.89
09w2d 2.36 1.33 3.39 18w6d 12.37 9.62 15.12
09w4d 2.59 1.51 3.66 19w1d 12.55 9.75 15.36
09w6d 2.83 1.70 3.96 19w3d 12.74 9.89 15.60
10w2d 3.24 2.03 4.44 19w5d 12.94 10.03 15.85
10w4d 3.53 2.27 4.79 20w0d 13.16 10.20 16.12
10w6d 3.83 2.52 5.14 20w1d 13.28 10.29 16.26
11w2d 4.32 2.93 5.71 20w2d 13.40 10.40 16.41
11w4d 4.66 3.22 6.13
11w6d 5.02 3.53 6.51

Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : TOKYO
GA Table
CRL Age ±SD

(cm) (wd) (wd)
0.50 06w3d 00w3d
1.00 07w3d 00w4d
1.50 08w1d 00w5d
2.00 08w6d 00w6d
2.50 09w4d 00w6d
3.00 10w2d 01w0d
3.50 10w6d 01w1d
4.00 11w3d 01w1d
4.50 11w6d 01w2d
5.00 12w2d 01w3d

Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth Min Max 10w0d 2.80 1.99 3.61
(wd) (cm) (cm) (cm) 10w1d 2.93 2.09 3.76
07w0d 0.79 0.51 1.07 10w2d 3.05 2.19 3.91
07w1d 0.86 0.55 1.17 10w3d 3.18 2.29 4.06
07w2d 0.93 0.60 1.27 10w4d 3.31 2.40 4.22
07w3d 1.01 0.65 1.37 10w5d 3.44 2.51 4.38
07w4d 1.09 0.71 1.47 10w6d 3.58 2.62 4.54
07w5d 1.17 0.76 1.58 11w0d 3.71 2.73 4.70
07w6d 1.25 0.82 1.69 11w1d 3.85 2.84 4.86
08w0d 1.34 0.88 1.80 11w2d 4.00 2.96 5.03
08w1d 1.43 0.95 1.91 11w3d 4.14 3.08 5.20
08w2d 1.52 1.01 2.03 11w4d 4.29 3.20 5.37
08w3d 1.61 1.08 2.15 11w5d 4.44 3.33 5.55
08w4d 1.71 1.15 2.27 11w6d 4.59 3.45 5.73
08w5d 1.81 1.22 2.39 12w0d 4.74 3.58 5.91
08w6d 1.91 1.30 2.52 12w1d 4.90 3.72 6.09
09w0d 2.01 1.38 2.65 12w2d 5.06 3.85 6.27
09w1d 2.12 1.46 2.78 12w3d 5.22 3.99 6.46
09w2d 2.23 1.54 2.91 12w4d 5.39 4.13 6.65
09w3d 2.34 1.63 3.05 12w5d 5.55 4.27 6.84
09w4d 2.45 1.72 3.18 12w6d 5.72 4.41 7.03
09w5d 2.57 1.81 3.32 13w0d 5.89 4.56 7.23
09w6d 2.68 1.90 3.47

Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : NELSON
GA Table
Nelson, L. "Comparison of Methods for Determining Crown-Rump Measurement by Real-Time
Ultrasound." Journal of Clinical Ultrasound, 9:67-70, February, 1981.
GAdays = 51.0008 + 0.6 × CRLmm

Output Unit : d(days)
Input Unit : mm
Min Range : 0.67 cm
Max Range : 8.24 cm
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : HADLOCK
GA Table
Frank P. Hadlock, Yogesh P. Shah, Donna J. Kanon, Joshua V. Lindsey,. "Fetal Crown-Rump
Length: Reevaluation of Relation to Menstrual Age(5-18 weeks) with High-Resolution Real-Time
US" Radiology, 1992; 182:501-505
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.0 9w6d 9w1d 10w5d

3.1 10w0d 9w1d 10w6d
0.2 5w5d 5w2d 6w1d
3.2 10w1d 9w2d 10w6d
0.3 5w6d 5w3d 6w3d
3.3 10w1d 9w3d 11w0d
0.4 6w1d 5w4d 6w4d
3.4 10w2d 9w3d 11w1d
0.5 6w1d 5w5d 6w5d
3.5 10w3d 9w4d 11w2d
0.6 6w3d 5w6d 6w6d
3.6 10w4d 9w5d 11w2d
0.7 6w4d 6w1d 7w1d
3.7 10w4d 9w5d 11w3d
0.8 6w5d 6w1d 7w2d
3.8 10w5d 9w6d 11w4d
0.9 6w6d 6w2d 7w3d
3.9 10w6d 10w0d 11w5d
1.0 7w1d 6w4d 7w5d
4.0 10w6d 10w0d 11w5d
1.1 7w1d 6w4d 7w5d
4.1 11w0d 10w1d 11w6d
1.2 7w3d 6w6d 8w0d
4.2 11w1d 10w1d 12w0d
1.3 7w4d 6w6d 8w1d
4.3 11w1d 10w2d 12w1d
1.4 7w5d 7w1d 8w2d
4.4 11w1d 10w2d 12w1d
1.5 7w6d 7w2d 8w4d
4.5 11w2d 10w3d 12w1d
1.6 8w0d 7w3d 8w4d
4.6 11w3d 10w3d 12w2d
1.7 8w1d 7w3d 8w5d
4.7 11w4d 10w4d 12w3d
1.8 8w2d 7w4d 9w0d
4.8 11w4d 10w5d 12w4d
1.9 8w3d 7w5d 9w1d
4.9 11w5d 10w5d 12w4d
2.0 8w4d 7w6d 9w2d
5.0 11w5d 10w5d 12w4d
2.1 8w5d 8w0d 9w3d
5.1 11w6d 10w6d 12w5d
2.2 8w6d 8w1d 9w4d
5.2 11w6d 11w0d 12w6d
2.3 9w0d 8w2d 9w5d
5.3 12w0d 11w0d 13w0d
2.4 9w1d 8w3d 9w6d
5.4 12w0d 11w0d 13w0d
2.5 9w1d 8w3d 10w0d
5.5 12w1d 11w1d 13w0d
2.6 9w3d 8w5d 10w1d
5.6 12w1d 11w2d 13w1d
2.7 9w4d 8w5d 10w2d
5.7 12w2d 11w2d 13w2d
2.8 9w4d 8w6d 10w3d
5.8 12w2d 11w2d 13w2d
5.9 12w3d 11w3d 13w3d 9.1 15w0d 13w6d 16w1d

6.0 12w4d 11w4d 13w4d 9.2 15w1d 13w6d 16w2d
6.1 12w4d 11w4d 13w4d 9.3 15w1d 14w0d 16w3d
6.2 12w4d 11w4d 13w4d 9.4 15w2d 14w1d 16w4d
6.3 12w5d 11w5d 13w5d 9.5 15w2d 14w1d 16w4d
6.4 12w6d 11w5d 13w6d 9.6 15w3d 14w1d 16w4d
6.5 12w6d 11w5d 13w6d 9.7 15w4d 14w2d 16w5d
6.6 12w6d 11w6d 14w0d 9.8 15w4d 14w2d 16w6d
6.7 13w0d 12w0d 14w0d 9.9 15w5d 14w3d 17w0d
6.8 13w1d 12w0d 14w1d 10.0 15w6d 14w4d 17w1d
6.9 13w1d 12w0d 14w1d 10.1 16w0d 14w5d 17w2d
7.0 13w1d 12w1d 14w2d 10.2 16w1d 14w6d 17w3d
7.1 13w2d 12w2d 14w3d 10.3 16w1d 14w6d 17w3d
7.2 13w3d 12w2d 14w3d 10.4 16w2d 15w0d 17w4d
7.3 13w3d 12w2d 14w3d 10.5 16w3d 15w1d 17w5d
7.4 13w4d 12w3d 14w4d 10.6 16w4d 15w1d 17w6d
7.5 13w4d 12w4d 14w5d 10.7 16w4d 15w2d 17w6d
7.6 13w5d 12w4d 14w6d 10.8 16w5d 15w3d 18w0d
7.7 13w6d 12w5d 14w6d 10.9 16w6d 15w3d 18w1d
7.8 13w6d 12w5d 14w6d 11.0 16w6d 15w4d 18w2d
7.9 13w6d 12w6d 15w0d 11.1 17w0d 15w4d 18w3d
8.0 14w0d 12w6d 15w1d 11.2 17w1d 15w5d 18w3d
8.1 14w1d 13w0d 15w2d 11.3 17w1d 15w6d 18w4d
8.2 14w1d 13w0d 15w2d 11.4 17w2d 15w6d 18w5d
8.3 14w1d 13w0d 15w2d 11.5 17w3d 16w0d 18w6d
8.4 14w2d 13w1d 15w3d 11.6 17w4d 16w1d 18w6d
8.5 14w3d 13w2d 15w4d 11.7 17w4d 16w1d 19w0d
8.6 14w4d 13w2d 15w5d 11.8 17w5d 16w2d 19w1d
8.7 14w4d 13w3d 15w5d 11.9 17w6d 16w3d 19w2d
8.8 14w5d 13w4d 15w6d 12.0 17w6d 16w3d 19w2d
8.9 14w6d 13w4d 16w0d 12.1 18w0d 16w4d 19w3d
9.0 14w6d 13w5d 16w1d
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : OSAKA
GA Table
CRL GA 2.60 09w4d 4.60 11w3d
(cm) (wd) 2.70 09w5d 4.70 11w3d
0.90 07w1d 2.80 09w6d 4.80 11w4d
1.00 07w3d 2.90 09w6d 4.90 11w5d
1.10 07w4d 3.00 10w0d 5.00 11w6d
1.20 07w6d 3.10 10w1d 5.10 11w6d
1.30 08w0d 3.20 10w1d 5.20 11w6d
1.40 08w1d 3.30 10w2d 5.30 12w0d
1.50 08w2d 3.40 10w3d 5.40 12w1d
1.60 08w3d 3.50 10w3d 5.50 12w1d
1.70 08w4d 3.60 10w4d 5.60 12w2d
1.80 08w5d 3.70 10w4d 5.70 12w2d
1.90 08w6d 3.80 10w5d 5.80 12w3d
2.00 09w0d 3.90 10w6d 5.90 12w3d
2.10 09w0d 4.00 10w6d 6.00 12w4d
2.20 09w1d 4.10 11w0d 6.10 12w5d
2.30 09w2d 4.20 11w0d 6.20 12w5d
2.40 09w3d 4.30 11w1d 6.30 12w6d
2.50 09w3d 4.40 11w2d
4.50 11w2d
Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth ±SD

(W) (cm) (cm)
6 0.52 0.10
7 0.90 0.14
8 1.41 0.19
9 2.11 0.24
10 2.99 0.28
11 4.06 0.31
12 5.32 0.31
Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

May 2001)
Age Growth 08w2d 19.00 11w4d 52.00
(wd) (mm) 08w3d 20.00 11w5d 55.00
05w2d 1.00 08w4d 21.00 11w6d 56.00
05w3d 2.00 08w5d 22.00 12w0d 57.00
05w4d 3.00 08w6d 22.00 12w1d 58.00
05w5d 3.00 09w0d 23.00 12w2d 60.00
05w6d 4.00 09w1d 24.00 12w3d 61.00
06w0d 4.00 09w2d 26.00 12w4d 63.00
06w1d 5.00 09w3d 27.00 12w5d 64.00
06w2d 6.00 09w4d 28.00 12w6d 65.00
06w3d 7.00 09w5d 29.00 13w0d 68.00
06w4d 8.00 09w6d 31.00 13w1d 70.00
06w5d 9.00 10w0d 34.00 13w2d 72.00
06w6d 10.00 10w1d 36.00 13w3d 74.00
07w0d 11.00 10w2d 37.00 13w4d 76.00
07w1d 11.00 10w3d 38.00 13w5d 77.00
07w2d 12.00 10w4d 39.00 13w6d 80.00
07w3d 12.00 10w5d 39.00 14w0d 81.00
07w4d 13.00 10w6d 40.00 14w1d 84.00
07w5d 14.00 11w0d 44.00 14w2d 85.00
07w6d 15.00 11w1d 45.00 14w3d 86.00
08w0d 17.00 11w2d 47.00 14w4d 87.00
08w1d 18.00 11w3d 48.00

Crown-Rump Length (CRL) : REMPEN
GA Table
Rempen A. “Biometrie in der Fruhgraviditat (I. Trimenon)” Der Frauenarzt, 32:425, 1991

(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 2.8 9w3d 8w4d 10w2d
0.2 6w0d 5w1d 6w6d 2.9 9w3d 8w4d 10w2d
0.3 6w1d 5w2d 7w0d 3.0 9w4d 8w5d 10w3d
0.4 6w2d 5w3d 7w1d 3.1 9w5d 8w6d 10w4d
0.5 6w3d 5w4d 7w2d 3.2 9w6d 9w0d 10w5d
0.6 6w4d 5w5d 7w3d 3.3 9w6d 9w0d 10w5d
0.7 6w5d 5w6d 7w4d 3.4 10w0d 9w1d 10w6d
0.8 6w6d 6w0d 7w5d 3.5 10w1d 9w2d 11w0d
0.9 7w0d 6w1d 7w6d 3.6 10w2d 9w3d 11w1d
1.0 7w1d 6w2d 8w0d 3.7 10w2d 9w3d 11w1d
1.1 7w2d 6w3d 8w1d 3.8 10w3d 9w4d 11w2d
1.2 7w3d 6w4d 8w2d 3.9 10w4d 9w5d 11w3d
1.3 7w4d 6w5d 8w3d 4.0 10w5d 9w6d 11w4d
1.4 7w5d 6w6d 8w4d 4.1 10w5d 9w6d 11w4d
1.5 7w6d 7w0d 8w5d 4.2 10w6d 10w0d 11w5d
1.6 7w6d 7w0d 8w5d 4.3 11w0d 10w1d 11w6d
1.7 8w0d 7w1d 8w6d 4.4 11w0d 10w1d 11w6d
1.8 8w1d 7w2d 9w0d 4.5 11w1d 10w2d 12w0d
1.9 8w2d 7w3d 9w1d 4.6 11w2d 10w3d 12w1d
2.0 8w3d 7w4d 9w2d 4.7 11w2d 10w3d 12w1d
2.1 8w4d 7w5d 9w3d 4.8 11w3d 10w4d 12w2d
2.2 8w5d 7w6d 9w4d 4.9 11w4d 10w5d 12w3d
2.3 8w5d 7w6d 9w4d 5.0 11w4d 10w5d 12w3d
2.4 8w6d 8w0d 9w5d 5.1 11w5d 10w6d 12w4d
2.5 9w0d 8w1d 9w6d 5.2 11w5d 10w6d 12w4d
2.6 9w1d 8w2d 10w0d 5.3 11w6d 11w0d 12w5d

5.4 12w0d 11w1d 12w6d 6.7 13w0d 12w1d 13w6d
5.5 12w0d 11w1d 12w6d 6.8 13w0d 12w1d 13w6d
5.6 12w1d 11w2d 13w0d 6.9 13w1d 12w2d 14w0d
5.7 12w1d 11w2d 13w0d 7.0 13w1d 12w2d 14w0d
5.8 12w2d 11w3d 13w1d 7.1 13w2d 12w3d 14w1d
5.9 12w3d 11w4d 13w2d 7.2 13w2d 12w3d 14w1d
6.0 12w3d 11w4d 13w2d 7.3 13w3d 12w4d 14w2d
6.1 12w4d 11w5d 13w3d 7.4 13w3d 12w4d 14w2d
6.2 12w4d 11w5d 13w3d 7.5 13w4d 12w5d 14w3d
6.3 12w5d 11w6d 13w4d 7.6 13w4d 12w5d 14w3d
6.4 12w5d 11w6d 13w4d 7.7 13w4d 12w5d 14w3d
6.5 12w6d 12w0d 13w5d 7.8 13w5d 12w6d 14w4d
6.6 12w6d 12w0d 13w5d

Femur Length (FL) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = FL × 2.36855 + 0.2089 × FL2 + 10.513242

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 0.7 cm
Max Range : 7.3 cm
Fetal Growth Table

FL = 4.221513 x MA - 0.035314 x MA2 - 38.929993

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12cm
Max Range : 40cm
Age Growth ±SD

(W) (cm) (cm)
12 0.790 0.142
16 1.900 0.133
20 3.000 0.204
24 4.100 0.198
28 5.100 0.209
32 6.100 0.205
34 6.461 0.226
36 6.710 0.222
38 7.013 0.245
40 7.287 0.216
Femur Length (FL) : HADLOCK
GA Table
GA = 10.35 + 2.460 × FL + 0.170 × FL2

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 0.64 cm
Max Range : 8.20 cm
Min Range(w) Max Range(w) ±2SD(w)
12 18 1.38
18 24 1.80
24 30 2.08
30 36 2.96
36 42 3.12
Fetal Growth Table

Equation = 0.427 x MA - 0.0034 x MA2 - 3.91

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12 cm
Max Range : 40 cm
0 100 0.6
Femur Length (FL) : MERZ
GA Table
FL GA Min Max 3.5 21w1d 19w4d 22w6d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.6 21w4d 20w0d 23w1d
1.0 12w2d 11w1d 13w4d 3.7 21w6d 20w2d 23w4d
1.1 12w5d 11w4d 13w6d 3.8 22w2d 20w5d 23w6d
1.2 13w0d 11w6d 14w1d 3.9 22w5d 21w0d 24w3d
1.3 13w2d 12w1d 14w4d 4.0 23w1d 21w3d 24w6d
1.4 13w5d 12w3d 15w0d 4.1 23w3d 21w5d 25w1d
1.5 14w0d 12w5d 15w2d 4.2 23w6d 22w1d 25w4d
1.6 14w3d 13w1d 15w5d 4.3 24w1d 22w4d 25w6d
1.7 14w5d 13w3d 16w0d 4.4 24w4d 22w6d 26w3d
1.8 15w1d 13w6d 16w3d 4.5 25w0d 23w1d 26w6d
1.9 15w3d 14w1d 16w5d 4.6 25w3d 23w4d 27w1d
2.0 15w6d 14w4d 17w1d 4.7 25w6d 24w0d 27w4d
2.1 16w1d 14w6d 17w3d 4.8 26w1d 24w3d 28w0d
2.2 16w4d 15w1d 17w6d 4.9 26w4d 24w5d 28w2d
2.3 16w6d 15w3d 18w1d 5.0 26w6d 25w1d 28w5d
2.4 17w1d 15w6d 18w4d 5.1 27w2d 25w4d 29w1d
2.5 17w4d 16w1d 19w1d 5.2 27w5d 25w6d 29w4d
2.6 17w6d 16w3d 19w3d 5.3 28w1d 26w1d 30w0d
2.7 18w2d 16w6d 19w6d 5.4 28w4d 26w4d 30w4d
2.8 18w4d 17w1d 20w1d 5.5 29w0d 27w0d 31w0d
2.9 19w0d 17w4d 20w4d 5.6 29w3d 27w3d 31w3d
3.0 19w3d 17w6d 20w6d 5.7 29w6d 27w6d 31w6d
3.1 19w5d 18w1d 21w1d 5.8 30w1d 28w1d 32w1d
3.2 20w1d 18w4d 21w4d 5.9 30w4d 28w4d 32w4d
3.3 20w4d 18w6d 22w1d 6.0 31w0d 29w0d 33w0d
3.4 20w6d 19w1d 22w3d 6.1 31w4d 29w4d 33w4d

6.2 31w6d 29w6d 33w6d 7.2 36w2d 34w1d 38w3d
6.3 32w2d 30w2d 34w2d 7.3 36w6d 34w4d 39w0d
6.4 32w6d 30w6d 34w6d 7.4 37w2d 35w1d 39w4d
6.5 33w1d 31w1d 35w1d 7.5 37w5d 35w4d 39w6d
6.6 33w4d 31w4d 35w4d 7.6 38w1d 36w0d 40w3d
6.7 34w1d 32w0d 36w1d 7.7 38w5d 36w4d 40w6d
6.8 34w4d 32w3d 36w4d 7.8 39w1d 37w0d 41w3d
6.9 35w0d 32w6d 37w1d 7.9 39w4d 37w3d 41w6d
7.0 35w3d 33w2d 37w4d 8.0 40w1d 37w6d 42w2d
7.1 35w6d 33w6d 38w0d
Fetal Growth Table

Merz, E., Grupner, A., Kern, F. “Mathematical Modeling of Fetal Limb Growth.” Journal of
Clinical Ultrasound. 17: 179-185, March/April, 1989
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 5.10 4.60 5.60
12 0.90 0.50 1.30 28 5.30 4.90 5.80
13 1.20 0.80 1.60 29 5.60 5.10 6.10
14 1.50 1.10 1.90 30 5.80 5.30 6.30
15 1.80 1.40 2.20 31 6.00 5.60 6.50
16 2.10 1.70 2.50 32 6.30 5.80 6.80
17 2.40 2.00 2.80 33 6.50 6.00 7.00
18 2.70 2.20 3.10 34 6.70 6.20 7.20
19 3.00 2.50 3.40 35 6.90 6.40 7.40
20 3.20 2.80 3.70 36 7.10 6.60 7.60
21 3.50 3.10 4.00 37 7.30 6.80 7.80
22 3.80 3.40 4.20 38 7.50 6.90 8.00
23 4.10 3.60 4.50 39 7.60 7.10 8.20
24 4.30 3.90 4.80 40 7.80 7.30 8.40
25 4.60 4.10 5.10

Femur Length (FL) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p431.
FL GA 4.9 27w0d
(cm) (wd) 5.1 28w0d
1.0 13w0d 5.4 29w0d
1.2 14w0d 5.6 30w0d
1.6 15w0d 5.9 31w0d
1.8 16w0d 6.1 32w0d
2.2 17w0d 6.3 33w0d
2.5 18w0d 6.5 34w0d
2.8 19w0d 6.7 35w0d
3.1 20w0d 6.9 36w0d
3.4 21w0d 7.1 37w0d
3.6 22w0d 7.3 38w0d
3.9 23w0d 7.4 39w0d
4.1 24w0d 7.5 40w0d
4.4 25w0d
4.7 26w0d
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.90 4.50 5.40
12 0.80 0.40 1.30 28 5.20 4.70 5.60
13 1.10 0.60 1.60 29 5.40 5.00 5.90
14 1.40 0.90 1.80 30 5.60 5.20 6.10
15 1.70 1.20 2.10 31 5.90 5.40 6.30
16 2.00 1.50 2.40 32 6.10 5.60 6.50
17 2.30 1.80 2.70 33 6.30 5.80 6.70
18 2.50 2.10 3.00 34 6.50 6.00 6.90
19 2.80 2.40 3.30 35 6.70 6.20 7.10
20 3.10 2.60 3.60 36 6.80 6.40 7.30
21 3.40 2.90 3.80 37 7.00 6.50 7.40
22 3.60 3.20 4.10 38 7.10 6.70 7.60
23 3.90 3.50 4.40 39 7.30 6.80 7.70
24 4.20 3.70 4.60 40 7.40 7.00 7.90
25 4.40 4.00 4.90

Femur Length (FL) : HOHLER
GA Table
Hohler, C.W., Quetel, T.A. "Fetal Femur Length: Equations for Computer Calculation of
Gestational Age from Ultrasound Measurements." American Journal of Obsterics and
Gynecology, Vol. 143, No. 4: 479-481, June 15, 1982
GA = 9.18 + 2.67 × FL + 0.16 × FL2
Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 1.0 cm
Max Range : 8.0 cm
Femur Length (FL) : JEANTY
GA Table
Jeanty et al,. "Estimation of Gestational Age from Measurements of Fetal Long Bones" Journal
of Ultrasound in Medicine, February 1984. Vol 3. Pp75-79
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.6 21w4d 19w3d 23w6d
1.0 12w4d 10w3d 14w6d 3.7 22w0d 19w6d 24w1d
1.1 12w6d 10w5d 15w1d 3.8 22w3d 20w1d 24w4d
1.2 13w2d 11w1d 15w4d 3.9 22w5d 20w4d 24w6d
1.3 13w4d 11w3d 15w6d 4.0 23w1d 20w6d 25w2d
1.4 13w6d 11w5d 16w1d 4.1 23w4d 21w2d 25w5d
1.5 14w1d 12w0d 16w3d 4.2 23w6d 21w5d 26w1d
1.6 14w4d 12w3d 16w6d 4.3 24w2d 22w1d 26w4d
1.7 14w6d 12w5d 17w1d 4.4 24w5d 22w4d 26w6d
1.8 15w1d 13w0d 17w3d 4.5 25w0d 22w6d 27w1d
1.9 15w4d 13w3d 17w6d 4.6 25w3d 23w1d 27w4d
2.0 15w6d 13w5d 18w1d 4.7 25w6d 23w4d 28w0d
2.1 16w2d 14w1d 18w4d 4.8 26w1d 24w0d 28w3d
2.2 16w4d 14w3d 18w6d 4.9 26w4d 24w3d 29w6d
2.3 16w6d 14w5d 19w1d 5.0 27w0d 24w6d 29w1d
2.4 17w2d 15w1d 19w4d 5.1 27w3d 25w1d 29w4d
2.5 17w4d 15w3d 19w6d 5.2 27w6d 25w4d 30w0d
2.6 18w0d 15w6d 20w1d 5.3 28w1d 26w0d 30w3d
2.7 18w2d 16w1d 20w4d 5.4 28w4d 26w3d 30w6d
2.8 18w5d 16w4d 20w6d 5.5 29w1d 26w6d 31w2d
2.9 19w0d 16w6d 21w1d 5.6 29w4d 27w2d 31w5d
3.0 19w3d 17w1d 21w4d 5.7 29w6d 27w5d 32w1d
3.1 19w6d 17w4d 22w0d 5.8 30w2d 28w1d 32w4d
3.2 20w1d 17w6d 22w2d 5.9 30w5d 28w4d 32w6d
3.3 20w4d 18w2d 22w5d 6.0 31w1d 28w6d 33w2d
3.4 20w6d 18w5d 23w1d 6.1 31w4d 29w3d 33w6d

6.2 32w0d 29w6d 34w1d 7.2 36w3d 34w1d 38w4d
6.3 32w3d 30w1d 34w4d 7.3 36w6d 34w4d 39w0d
6.4 32w6d 30w5d 35w1d 7.4 37w2d 35w1d 39w4d
6.5 33w2d 31w1d 35w4d 7.5 37w5d 35w4d 39w6d
6.6 33w5d 31w4d 35w6d 7.6 38w1d 36w0d 40w3d
6.7 34w1d 32w0d 36w3d 7.7 38w4d 36w3d 40w6d
6.8 34w4d 32w3d 36w6d 7.8 39w1d 36w6d 41w2d
6.9 35w0d 32w6d 37w1d 7.9 39w4d 37w2d 41w5d
7.0 35w4d 33w2d 37w5d 8.0 40w0d 37w6d 42w1d
7.1 35w6d 33w5d 38w1d
Fetal Growth Table

Jeanty, P. "Fetal Limb Biometry" (Letter) Radiology, 147:602, 1983
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 5.10 4.50 5.70
11 0.60 0.60 0.60 28 5.30 4.50 5.70
12 0.90 0.90 0.90 29 5.60 4.90 6.20
13 1.20 0.60 1.90 30 5.80 4.90 6.20
14 1.50 0.50 1.90 31 6.00 5.30 6.70
15 1.90 1.10 2.60 32 6.20 5.30 6.70
16 2.20 1.30 2.40 33 6.40 5.60 7.10
17 2.50 2.00 2.90 34 6.50 5.70 7.00
18 2.80 1.90 3.10 35 6.70 6.10 7.30
19 3.10 2.30 3.80 36 6.90 6.10 7.40
20 3.30 2.20 3.90 37 7.10 6.40 7.70
21 3.60 2.70 4.50 38 7.20 6.20 7.90
22 3.90 2.90 4.400 39 7.40 6.40 8.30
23 4.10 3.50 4.80 40 7.50 6.60 8.10
24 4.40 3.40 4.90
25 4.60 3.80 5.40

Femur Length (FL) : TOKYO
GA Table
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 4.60 26w2d 24w6d 27w5d

4.70 26w5d 25w2d 28w1d
2.00 16w1d 15w2d 17w0d
4.80 27w2d 25w6d 28w5d
2.10 16w3d 15w4d 17w2d
4.90 27w5d 26w2d 29w1d
2.20 16w6d 16w0d 17w5d
5.00 28w2d 26w6d 29w5d
2.30 17w1d 16w1d 18w1d
5.10 28w5d 27w2d 30w1d
2.40 17w3d 16w3d 18w3d
5.20 29w2d 27w5d 30w6d
2.50 17w6d 16w6d 18w6d
5.30 29w5d 28w1d 31w2d
2.60 18w1d 17w1d 19w1d
5.40 30w2d 28w5d 31w6d
2.70 18w3d 17w3d 19w3d
5.50 30w5d 29w1d 32w2d
2.80 18w6d 17w6d 19w6d
5.60 31w2d 29w5d 32w6d
2.90 19w1d 18w1d 20w1d
5.70 31w6d 30w2d 33w3d
3.00 19w4d 18w3d 20w5d
5.80 32w3d 30w6d 34w0d
3.10 20w0d 18w6d 21w1d
5.90 33w0d 31w2d 34w5d
3.20 20w2d 19w1d 21w3d
6.00 33w3d 31w5d 35w1d
3.30 20w5d 19w4d 21w6d
6.10 34w0d 32w2d 35w5d
3.40 21w1d 20w0d 22w2d
6.20 34w4d 32w6d 36w2d
3.50 21w3d 20w2d 22w4d
6.30 35w1d 33w3d 36w6d
3.60 21w6d 20w5d 23w0d
6.40 35w5d 34w0d 37w3d
3.70 22w2d 21w0d 23w4d
6.50 36w2d 34w4d 38w0d
3.80 22w5d 21w3d 24w0d
6.60 37w0d 35w2d 38w5d
3.90 23w1d 21w6d 24w3d
6.70 37w4d 35w5d 39w3d
4.00 23w3d 22w1d 24w5d
6.80 38w1d 36w2d 40w0d
4.10 24w0d 22w5d 25w2d
6.90 38w5d 36w6d 40w4d
4.20 24w3d 23w1d 25w5d
7.00 39w3d 37w4d 41w2d
4.30 24w6d 23w4d 26w1d
4.40 25w3d 24w1d 26w5d
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 30 5.48 5.01 5.95
16 2.14 1.74 2.54 31 5.68 5.21 6.16
17 2.40 1.99 2.80 32 5.87 5.39 6.35
18 2.65 2.25 3.06 33 6.05 5.57 6.54
19 2.91 2.50 3.32 34 6.22 5.73 6.71
20 3.16 2.74 3.58 35 6.38 5.89 6.88
21 3.41 2.99 3.84 36 6.53 6.03 7.03
22 3.66 3.23 4.09 37 6.67 6.17 7.18
23 3.91 3.47 4.34 38 6.80 6.29 7.31
24 4.15 3.71 4.59 39 6.91 6.40 7.43
25 4.39 3.94 4.83 40 7.01 6.49 7.53
26 4.62 4.17 5.07 41 7.10 6.57 7.62
27 4.84 4.39 5.30 42 7.17 6.64 7.70
28 5.06 4.61 5.52

Femur Length (FL) : OSAKA
GA Table
FL GA 2.90 19w4d 5.10 28w3d
(cm) (wd) 3.00 20w0d 5.20 28w6d
0.90 13w0d 3.10 20w2d 5.30 29w2d
1.00 13w2d 3.20 20w5d 5.40 29w6d
1.10 13w4d 3.30 21w0d 5.50 30w2d
1.20 13w6d 3.40 21w3d 5.60 30w6d
1.30 14w1d 3.50 21w5d 5.70 31w3d
1.40 14w4d 3.60 22w1d 5.80 31w6d
1.50 14w6d 3.70 22w4d 5.90 32w3d
1.60 15w1d 3.80 23w1d 6.00 32w6d
1.70 15w3d 3.90 23w2d 6.10 33w4d
1.80 15w5d 4.00 23w5d 6.20 34w1d
1.90 16w1d 4.10 24w1d 6.30 34w4d
2.00 16w3d 4.20 24w4d 6.40 35w2d
2.10 16w6d 4.30 25w0d 6.50 35w5d
2.20 17w1d 4.40 25w3d 6.60 36w3d
2.30 17w3d 4.50 25w6d 6.70 36w6d
2.40 18w0d 4.60 26w2d 6.80 37w1d
2.50 18w1d 4.70 26w4d 6.90 38w3d
2.60 18w4d 4.80 27w1d 7.00 39w1d
2.70 18w6d 4.90 27w4d 7.10 39w6d
2.80 19w2d 5.00 28w0d

Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth ±SD 17w0d 2.18 0.23
(wd) (cm) (cm) 17w1d 2.22 0.23
13w0d 0.94 0.21 17w2d 2.26 0.23
13w1d 0.98 0.21 17w3d 2.30 0.23
13w2d 1.03 0.21 17w4d 2.34 0.23
13w3d 1.07 0.21 17w5d 2.39 0.23
13w4d 1.12 0.21 17w6d 2.43 0.23
13w5d 1.17 0.21 18w0d 2.47 0.23
13w6d 1.21 0.22 18w1d 2.51 0.23
14w0d 1.26 0.22 18w2d 2.55 0.23
14w1d 1.30 0.22 18w3d 2.59 0.23
14w2d 1.35 0.22 18w4d 2.63 0.23
14w3d 1.39 0.22 18w5d 2.67 0.23
14w4d 1.44 0.22 18w6d 2.71 0.23
14w5d 1.48 0.22 19w0d 2.75 0.24
14w6d 1.53 0.22 19w1d 2.79 0.24
15w0d 1.57 0.22 19w2d 2.83 0.24
15w1d 1.61 0.22 19w3d 2.87 0.24
15w2d 1.66 0.22 19w4d 2.91 0.24
15w3d 1.70 0.22 19w5d 2.95 0.24
15w4d 1.75 0.22 19w6d 2.99 0.24
15w5d 1.79 0.22 20w0d 3.03 0.24
15w6d 1.83 0.22 20w1d 3.07 0.24
16w0d 1.88 0.22 20w2d 3.11 0.24
16w1d 1.92 0.22 20w3d 3.15 0.24
16w2d 1.96 0.22 20w4d 3.19 0.24
16w3d 2.01 0.23 20w5d 3.23 0.24
16w4d 2.05 0.23 20w6d 3.27 0.24
16w5d 2.09 0.23 21w0d 3.30 0.24
16w6d 2.13 0.23 21w1d 3.34 0.24

21w2d 3.38 0.24 26w0d 4.56 0.26
21w3d 3.42 0.24 26w1d 4.59 0.26
21w4d 3.46 0.25 26w2d 4.62 0.26
21w5d 3.49 0.25 26w3d 4.65 0.26
21w6d 3.53 0.25 26w4d 4.69 0.26
22w0d 3.57 0.25 26w5d 4.72 0.27
22w1d 3.61 0.25 26w6d 4.75 0.27
22w2d 3.64 0.25 27w0d 4.78 0.27
22w3d 3.68 0.25 27w1d 4.82 0.27
22w4d 3.72 0.25 27w2d 4.85 0.27
22w5d 3.75 0.25 27w3d 4.88 0.27
22w6d 3.79 0.25 27w4d 4.91 0.27
23w0d 3.83 0.25 27w5d 4.91 0.27
23w1d 3.86 0.25 27w6d 4.97 0.27
23w2d 3.90 0.25 28w0d 5.01 0.27
23w3d 3.93 0.25 28w1d 5.04 0.27
23w4d 3.97 0.25 28w2d 5.07 0.27
23w5d 4.01 0.25 28w3d 5.10 0.27
23w6d 4.04 0.25 28w4d 5.13 0.27
24w0d 4.08 0.25 28w5d 5.16 0.27
24w1d 4.11 0.26 28w6d 5.19 0.27
24w2d 4.15 0.26 29w0d 5.22 0.27
24w3d 4.18 0.26 29w1d 5.25 0.27
24w4d 4.22 0.26 29w2d 5.28 0.28
24w5d 4.25 0.26 29w3d 5.31 0.28
24w6d 4.28 0.26 29w4d 5.34 0.28
25w0d 4.32 0.26 29w5d 5.37 0.28
25w1d 4.35 0.26 29w6d 5.40 0.28
25w2d 4.39 0.26 30w0d 5.43 0.28
25w3d 4.42 0.26 30w1d 5.46 0.28
25w4d 4.45 0.26 30w2d 5.49 0.28
25w5d 4.49 0.26 30w3d 5.52 0.28
25w6d 4.52 0.26 30w4d 5.54 0.28

30w5d 5.57 0.28 35w4d 6.46 0.30

30w6d 5.60 0.28 35w5d 6.48 0.30
31w0d 5.63 0.28 35w6d 6.50 0.30
31w1d 5.66 0.28 36w0d 6.53 0.30
31w2d 5.69 0.28 36w1d 6.55 0.30
31w3d 5.71 0.28 36w2d 6.57 0.30
31w4d 5.74 0.28 36w3d 6.60 0.30
31w5d 5.77 0.28 36w4d 6.62 0.30
31w6d 5.80 0.29 36w5d 6.64 0.30
32w0d 5.82 0.29 36w6d 6.66 0.30
32w1d 5.85 0.29 37w0d 6.69 0.31
32w2d 5.88 0.29 37w1d 6.71 0.31
32w3d 5.90 0.29 37w2d 6.73 0.31
32w4d 5.93 0.29 37w3d 6.75 0.31
32w5d 5.96 0.29 37w4d 6.77 0.31
32w6d 5.98 0.29 37w5d 6.79 0.31
33w0d 6.01 0.29 37w6d 6.82 0.31
33w1d 6.04 0.29 38w0d 6.84 0.31
33w2d 6.06 0.29 38w1d 6.86 0.31
33w3d 6.09 0.29 38w2d 6.88 0.31
33w4d 6.11 0.29 38w3d 6.90 0.31
33w5d 6.14 0.29 38w4d 6.92 0.31
33w6d 6.16 0.29 38w5d 6.94 0.31
34w0d 6.19 0.29 38w6d 6.96 0.31
34w1d 6.21 0.29 39w0d 6.98 0.31
34w2d 6.24 0.29 39w1d 7.00 0.31
34w3d 6.26 0.30 39w2d 7.02 0.31
34w4d 6.29 0.30 39w3d 7.04 0.31
34w5d 6.31 0.30 39w4d 7.06 0.32
34w6d 6.34 0.30 39w5d 7.08 0.32
35w0d 6.36 0.30 39w6d 7.10 0.32
35w1d 6.39 0.30 40w0d 7.12 0.32
35w2d 6.41 0.30
35w3d 6.43 0.30
Femur Length (FL) : CHITTY
GA Table
D.G. Altman, L.S. Chitty, "New Charts for Ultrasound Dating of Pregnancy" Ultrasound in

(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.50 21w0d 19w3d 22w5d
1.00 13w0d 12w1d 13w6d 3.60 21w3d 19w5d 23w1d
1.10 13w2d 12w3d 14w1d 3.70 21w5d 20w1d 23w4d
1.20 13w4d 12w5d 14w4d 3.80 22w1d 20w3d 24w0d
1.30 13w6d 13w0d 14w6d 3.90 22w4d 20w5d 24w3d
1.40 14w1d 13w1d 15w1d 4.00 22w6d 21w1d 24w6d
1.50 14w3d 13w3d 15w3d 4.10 23w2d 21w3d 25w2d
1.60 14w5d 13w5d 15w6d 4.20 23w5d 21w6d 25w5d
1.70 15w0d 14w0d 16w1d 4.30 24w1d 22w1d 26w1d
1.80 15w2d 14w2d 16w3d 4.40 24w3d 22w4d 26w4d
1.90 15w5d 14w4d 16w6d 4.50 24w6d 22w6d 27w1d
2.00 16w0d 14w6d 17w1d 4.60 25w2d 23w2d 27w4d
2.10 16w2d 15w1d 17w3d 4.70 25w5d 23w4d 28w0d
2.20 16w4d 15w3d 17w6d 4.80 26w1d 24w0d 28w3d
2.30 16w6d 15w5d 18w1d 4.90 26w4d 24w3d 29w0d

2.40 17w2d 16w0d 18w4d 5.00 27w0d 24w5d 29w3d
2.50 17w4d 16w2d 18w6d 5.10 27w3d 25w1d 30w0d
2.60 17w6d 16w4d 19w2d 5.20 27w6d 25w4d 30w3d
2.70 18w2d 16w6d 19w5d 5.30 28w2d 26w0d 31w0d
2.80 18w4d 17w1d 20w0d 5.40 28w5d 26w2d 31w3d
2.90 18w6d 17w4d 20w3d 5.50 29w2d 26w5d 32w0d
3.00 19w2d 17w6d 20w5d 5.60 29w5d 27w1d 32w3d
3.10 19w4d 18w1d 21w1d 5.70 30w1d 27w4d 33w0d
3.20 20w0d 18w3d 21w4d 5.80 30w4d 28w0d 33w4d
3.30 20w2d 18w5d 22w0d 5.90 31w1d 28w3d 34w1d

6.00 31w4d 28w6d 34w4d 6.50 34w1d 31w0d 37w3d
6.10 32w1d 29w2d 35w1d 6.60 34w4d 31w3d 38w0d
6.20 32w4d 29w5d 35w5d 6.70 35w1d 32w0d 38w5d
6.30 33w1d 30w1d 36w2d
6.40 33w4d 30w4d 36w6d
Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell, "Charts of Fetal Size: 4. Femur Length" British Journal
of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, February 1994. Vol 101. Pp132-135

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 5.27 4.93 5.62
12 0.77 0.55 1.00 29 5.50 5.14 5.85
13 1.09 0.86 1.33 30 5.71 5.35 6.07
14 1.41 1.17 1.65 31 5.92 5.55 6.29
15 1.72 1.47 1.97 32 6.12 5.74 6.49
16 2.03 1.77 2.28 33 6.31 5.93 6.69
17 2.33 2.07 2.59 34 6.49 6.10 6.88
18 2.63 2.36 2.90 35 6.66 6.26 7.06
19 2.92 2.64 3.20 36 6.82 6.42 7.23
20 3.21 2.92 3.49 37 6.97 6.56 7.38
21 3.49 3.20 3.78 38 7.11 6.69 7.53

22 3.76 3.46 4.06 39 7.24 6.81 7.67
23 4.03 3.72 4.34 40 7.36 6.92 7.79
24 4.29 3.98 4.61 41 7.46 7.02 7.90
25 4.55 4.23 4.87 42 7.56 7.11 8.01
26 4.80 4.47 5.13

Femur Length (FL) : CAMPBELL
GA Table
FL GA ±SD 5.40 28w0d 01w4d
(cm) (wd) (wd) 5.60 29w0d 01w5d
1.80 15w0d 00w6d 5.80 30w0d 01w6d
2.20 16w0d 00w6d 6.10 31w0d 02w0d
2.50 17w0d 00w6d 6.30 32w0d 02w1d
2.80 18w0d 01w0d 6.50 33w0d 02w3d
3.00 19w0d 01w0d 6.60 34w0d 02w4d
3.30 20w0d 01w0d 6.80 35w0d 02w6d
3.60 21w0d 01w0d 6.90 36w0d 03w1d
3.90 22w0d 01w1d 7.10 37w0d 00w0d
4.20 23w0d 01w1d 7.20 38w0d 00w0d
4.40 24w0d 01w1d 7.40 39w0d 00w0d
4.70 25w0d 01w2d 7.50 40w0d 00w0d
4.90 26w0d 01w3d
5.20 27w0d 01w3d

Fetal Growth Table

Chitty, I., Campbell, Stuart, “Charts of Fetal Size : 4 Femur Length,”
British J of OB and Gyn., February 1994, Vol. 101, pp. 132-135, Table1.
Age Growth 27w0d 5.02
(wd) (cm) 28w0d 5.24
12w0d 0.85 29w0d 5.63
13w0d 1.10 30w0d 5.80
14w0d 1.41 31w0d 5.97
15w0d 1.71 32w0d 6.13
16w0d 2.05 33w0d 6.28
17w0d 2.27 34w0d 6.43
18w0d 2.69 35w0d 6.62
19w0d 2.98 36w0d 6.83
20w0d 3.22 37w0d 6.99
21w0d 3.54 38w0d 7.08
22w0d 3.72 39w0d 7.17
23w0d 4.06 40w0d 7.47
24w0d 4.35 41w0d 7.48
25w0d 4.61 42w0d 7.60
26w0d 4.69
Femur Length (FL) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

May 2001)
Age Growth ±SD 26 49.00 5.00
(W) (mm) (mm) 27 50.00 5.00
28 54.00 4.00
11 8.00 2.00
29 55.00 5.50
12 10.00 2.50
30 58.00 6.00
13 11.00 2.50
31 59.00 5.50
14 15.00 3.00
32 62.00 6.00
15 17.00 3.50
33 65.00 4.00
16 22.00 4.00
34 66.00 4.00
17 25.00 4.00
35 67.00 6.00
18 28.00 5.00
36 69.00 6.00
19 30.00 5.00
37 72.00 5.00
20 32.00 6.00
38 73.00 5.50
21 34.00 6.00
39 75.00 6.00
22 37.00 5.00
40 76.00 4.00
23 43.00 5.00
41 77.00 5.00
24 45.00 4.00
25 48.00 5.00
Femur Length (FL) : DOUBILET
GA Table
Doubilet PM, Benson CB. “Improved Prediction of Gestational Age in the Late Third Trimester”
Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine, 12;647-653, 1993
FL GA 3.20 19w5d 5.60 29w3d
(cm) (wd) 3.30 20w1d 5.70 29w6d
1.00 13w5d 3.40 20w3d 5.80 30w3d
1.10 13w6d 3.50 20w5d 5.90 30w6d
1.20 14w1d 3.60 21w1d 6.00 31w3d
1.30 14w3d 3.70 21w3d 6.10 31w6d
1.40 14w4d 3.80 21w6d 6.20 32w4d
1.50 14w6d 3.90 22w1d 6.30 33w0d
1.60 15w1d 4.00 22w4d 6.40 33w4d
1.70 15w3d 4.10 22w6d 6.50 34w1d
1.80 15w4d 4.20 23w2d 6.60 34w5d
1.90 15w6d 4.30 23w5d 6.70 35w2d
2.00 16w1d 4.40 24w1d 6.80 35w6d
2.10 16w3d 4.50 24w4d 6.90 36w4d
2.20 16w5d 4.60 24w6d 7.00 37w1d
2.30 17w0d 4.70 25w2d 7.10 37w5d
2.40 17w2d 4.80 25w5d 7.20 38w2d
2.50 17w4d 4.90 26w1d 7.30 39w0d
2.60 17w6d 5.00 26w4d 7.40 39w4d
2.70 18w1d 5.10 27w0d 7.50 40w2d
2.80 18w4d 5.20 27w4d 7.60 40w6d
2.90 18w6d 5.30 28w0d 7.70 41w4d
3.00 19w1d 5.40 28w3d 7.80 42w0d
3.10 19w3d 5.50 28w6d

Femur Length (FL) : BESSIS
GA Table
FL GA ±SD
(cm) (wd) (wd)
1.04 13w0d 1w0d
2.22 17w0d 1w1d
3.37 21w0d 1w1d
4.45 25w0d 1w3d
5.42 29w0d 1w4d
6.42 33w0d 2w1d
6.90 37w0d 2w6d
7.34 41w0d 4w0d

Femur Length (FL) : CFEF
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 5.30 4.90 5.70
12 0.60 0.40 0.90 29 5.50 5.10 5.90
13 1.00 0.70 1.20 30 5.70 5.30 6.10
14 1.30 1.10 1.60 31 5.90 5.50 6.30
15 1.70 1.40 1.90 32 6.10 5.70 6.50
16 2.00 1.70 2.30 33 6.30 5.90 6.70
17 2.30 2.00 2.60 34 6.50 6.10 6.90
18 2.60 2.30 2.90 35 6.60 6.20 7.10
19 2.90 2.60 3.20 36 6.80 6.40 7.20
20 3.20 2.90 3.50 37 7.00 6.50 7.40
21 3.50 3.20 3.80 38 7.10 6.70 7.50
22 3.80 3.40 4.10 39 7.20 6.80 7.70
23 4.10 3.70 4.40 40 7.40 6.90 7.80
24 4.30 4.00 4.70 41 7.40 7.00 7.90
25 4.60 4.20 4.90
26 4.80 4.40 5.20

Anterior Posterior Thoracic Diameter (APTD) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Hansmann, Hackeloer, Staudach, Wittman “Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and
Gynecology” Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986
APTD GA 6.39 28w
(cm) (W) 6.70 29w
2.25 14w 7.01 30w
2.58 15w 7.25 31w
2.85 16w 7.62 32w
3.11 17w 7.93 33w
3.46 18w 8.15 34w
3.75 19w 8.40 35w
4.00 20w 8.75 36w
4.34 21w 9.02 37w
4.65 22w 9.30 38w
4.90 23w 9.53 39w
5.15 24w 9.68 40w
5.48 25w 9.84 41w
5.80 26w 9.91 42w
6.15 27w
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 29 6.70 5.70 7.70
14 2.25 2.25 2.25 30 7.01 6.01 8.01
15 2.58 2.21 2.95 31 7.25 6.10 8.40
16 2.85 2.45 3.25 32 7.62 6.52 8.72
17 3.11 2.61 3.61 33 7.93 6.81 9.05
18 3.46 3.02 3.90 34 8.15 6.90 9.40
19 3.75 3.25 4.25 35 8.40 7.08 9.72
20 4.00 3.40 4.60 36 8.75 7.40 10.10
21 4.34 3.76 4.92 37 9.02 7.62 10.42
22 4.65 4.04 5.26 38 9.30 7.90 10.70
23 4.90 4.20 5.60 39 9.53 8.06 11.00
24 5.15 4.35 5.95 40 9.68 8.16 11.20
25 5.48 4.68 6.28 41 9.84 8.32 11.35
26 5.80 4.95 6.65 42 9.91 8.41 11.40
27 6.15 5.30 7.00

Anterior Posterior Thoracic Diameter (APTD) and Thorax Transverse

Diameter (TTD) : SHINOZUKA
GA Table
Norio Shinozuka, Haruo Masuda, Hideyuki Kagawa, and Yuji Taketani. Department of
Obstetrics and Gynecoogy, Faculty of Medicine, University of Tokyo. Jpn J Med Ultrasonics
23(12) 877-888,1996
APTD x GA ±SD 50.00 29w0d 01w5d
TTD (cm2) (wd) (wd) 52.00 29w3d 01w6d
10.00 16w1d 01w1d 54.00 30w0d 01w6d
12.00 17w0d 01w1d 56.00 30w3d 01w6d
14.00 17w6d 01w1d 58.00 31w0d 02w0d
16.00 18w4d 01w1d 60.00 31w3d 02w0d
18.00 19w3d 01w1d 62.00 31w6d 02w0d
20.00 20w1d 01w1d 64.00 32w3d 02w1d
22.00 20w6d 01w2d 66.00 32w6d 02w1d
24.00 21w4d 01w2d 68.00 33w3d 02w1d
26.00 22w2d 01w2d 70.00 33w6d 02w2d
28.00 22w6d 01w2d 72.00 34w2d 02w2d
30.00 23w4d 01w2d 74.00 34w6d 02w3d
32.00 24w1d 01w3d 76.00 35w3d 02w3d
34.00 24w5d 01w3d 78.00 35w6d 02w3d
36.00 25w2d 01w3d 80.00 36w3d 02w4d
38.00 25w6d 01w3d 82.00 37w0d 02w4d
40.00 26w3d 01w4d 84.00 37w4d 02w4d
42.00 27w0d 01w4d 86.00 38w1d 02w4d
44.00 27w3d 01w4d 88.00 38w5d 02w5d
46.00 28w0d 01w5d 90.00 39w2d 02w5d
48.00 28w4d 01w5d

Fetal Growth Table

Norio Shinozuka, Haruo Masuda, Hideyuki Kagawa, and Yuji Taketani. Department of
Obstetrics and Gynecoogy, Faculty of Medicine, University of Tokyo. Jpn J Med Ultrasonics
23(12) 877-888,1996
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 30 55.70 46.20 65.30
16 11.20 7.90 14.60 31 59.70 49.60 69.90
17 13.30 9.70 17.00 32 63.80 53.00 74.50
18 15.60 11.60 19.60 33 67.80 56.50 79.20
19 18.10 13.70 22.40 34 71.90 59.90 83.90
20 20.80 16.10 25.50 35 75.90 63.30 88.60
21 23.60 18.50 28.80 36 79.90 66.60 93.30
22 26.70 21.20 32.20 37 83.90 69.80 97.90
23 29.90 23.90 35.90 38 87.70 72.90 102.50
24 33.20 26.80 39.70 39 91.50 76.00 107.00
25 36.70 29.80 43.60 40 95.10 78.90 111.40
26 40.30 33.00 47.70 41 98.60 81.60 115.70
27 44.10 36.20 52.00 42 102.00 84.10 119.80
28 47.90 39.40 56.30

Thorax Transverse Diameter (TTD) : HANSMANN
GA Table
TTD GA 6.2 26w0d
(cm) (wd) 6.5 27w0d
1.7 12w0d 6.9 28w0d
2.0 13w0d 7.2 29w0d
2.4 14w0d 7.4 30w0d
2.7 15w0d 7.8 31w0d
3.1 16w0d 8.1 32w0d
3.4 17w0d 8.3 33w0d
3.7 18w0d 8.6 34w0d
4.0 19w0d 8.9 35w0d
4.4 20w0d 9.2 36w0d
4.7 21w0d 9.4 37w0d
5.0 22w0d 9.7 38w0d
5.3 23w0d 9.9 39w0d
5.6 24w0d 10.1 40w0d
5.9 25w0d
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 6.90 6.20 7.70
12 1.70 1.70 1.70 29 7.20 6.40 8.00
13 2.00 2.00 2.00 30 7.40 6.70 8.30
14 2.40 2.00 2.80 31 7.80 7.00 8.60
15 2.70 2.30 3.10 32 8.10 7.30 8.90
16 3.10 2.70 3.50 33 8.30 7.50 9.30
17 3.40 3.00 3.80 34 8.60 7.80 9.60
18 3.70 3.30 4.20 35 8.90 8.00 9.90
19 4.00 3.60 4.60 36 9.20 8.30 10.20
20 4.40 3.90 4.90 37 9.40 8.50 10.50
21 4.70 4.20 5.30 38 9.70 8.70 10.80
22 5.00 4.50 5.60 39 9.90 8.90 11.10
23 5.30 4.80 6.00 40 10.10 9.10 11.40
24 5.60 5.00 6.30 41 10.20 9.20 11.70
25 5.90 5.30 6.70
26 6.20 5.60 7.00

Gestational Sac (GS) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = GS × 0.71887 + 6.156004
Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 2.5 cm
Max Range : 6.1 cm
Gestational Sac (GS) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Hansmann, Hackeloer, Staudach and Wittman. "Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and
Gynecology" Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986; P.36
GS Age
(cm) (wd)
0.7 4w6d
0.9 5w5d
1.0 6w0d
1.3 6w2d
1.5 6w5d
2.4 7w3d
2.8 8w2d
3.4 9w0d
Gestational Sac (GS) : HELLMAN
GA Table
Hellman LM, Kobayashi M, Fillisti L, et al, "Growth and development of the human fetus prior to
the twentieth week of gestation" American Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology, 103:789-800,
1969
.GS Age 2.6 7w2d 4.4 9w6d
(cm) (wd) 2.7 7w3d 4.5 10w0d
1.0 5w0d 2.8 7w4d 4.6 10w1d
1.1 5w1d 2.9 7w5d 4.7 10w2d
1.2 5w2d 3.0 7w6d 4.8 10w3d
1.3 5w3d 3.1 8w0d 4.9 10w4d
1.4 5w4d 3.2 8w1d 5.0 10w5d
1.5 5w5d 3.3 8w2d 5.1 10w6d
1.6 5w6d 3.4 8w3d 5.2 11w0d
1.7 6w0d 3.5 8w4d 5.3 11w1d
1.8 6w1d 3.6 8w5d 5.4 11w2d
1.9 6w2d 3.7 8w6d 5.5 11w3d
2.0 6w3d 3.8 9w0d 5.6 11w4d
2.1 6w4d 3.9 9w1d 5.7 11w5d
2.2 6w5d 4.0 9w2d 5.8 11w6d
2.3 6w6d 4.1 9w3d 5.9 12w0d
2.4 7w0d 4.2 9w4d 6.0 12w1d
2.5 7w1d 4.3 9w5d

Gestational Sac (GS) : NYBERG
GA Table
Nyberg, David, A., Hill, Lyndon, M., Bohm-Vele, Marcela., Mendelson, Ellen, B. "Transvaginal
Ultrasound." Mosby Yearbook, 76. 1992
GA = 0.132 × GSmm + 4.299

Input Unit : mm
Min Range : 0.14 cm
Max Range : 5.54 cm
Gestational Sac (GS) : TOKYO
GA Table
Tokyo University Takashi Okai, et al. Japan Society of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Vol.38, No.8
GS GA ±SD
(W) (wd) (wd)
1.0 4w0d 1w0d
1.6 5w0d 1w1d
2.2 6w0d 1w4d
2.7 7w0d 1w5d
3.4 8w0d 1w6d
4.1 9w0d 2w0d
4.8 10w0d 2w1d
5.7 11w0d 2w2d
6.7 12w0d 2w3d

Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p.431.
OFD GA 8.8 27w0d
(cm) (wd) 9.1 28w0d
3.1 14w0d 9.5 29w0d
3.8 15w0d 9.8 30w0d
4.1 16w0d 10.0 31w0d
4.6 17w0d 10.3 32w0d
5.0 18w0d 10.5 33w0d
5.4 19w0d 10.7 34w0d
5.8 20w0d 10.9 35w0d
6.3 21w0d 11.1 36w0d
6.7 22w0d 11.2 37w0d
7.2 23w0d 11.3 38w0d
7.6 24w0d 11.4 39w0d
8.0 25w0d 11.5 40w0d
8.4 26w0d
Fetal Growth Table


26 8.00 7.30 8.70
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
27 8.30 7.60 9.00
10 1.40 0.70 2.10
28 8.70 8.00 9.40
11 1.80 1.10 2.50
29 9.00 8.30 9.70
12 2.30 1.60 3.00
30 9.30 8.60 10.00
13 2.70 2.00 3.40
31 9.60 8.90 10.30
14 3.10 2.40 3.80
32 9.90 9.20 10.60
15 3.60 2.90 4.30
33 10.20 9.50 10.80
16 4.00 3.30 4.70
34 10.40 9.70 11.10
17 4.40 3.70 5.10
35 10.60 9.90 11.30
18 4.80 4.10 5.50
36 10.90 10.20 11.60
19 5.30 4.60 6.00
37 11.10 10.40 11.80
20 5.70 5.00 6.40
38 11.20 10.50 11.90
21 6.10 5.40 6.80
39 11.40 10.70 12.10
22 6.50 5.80 7.20
40 11.50 10.80 12.20
23 6.90 6.20 7.60
24 7.20 6.50 7.90
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = OFD ×1.55941 + 0.07730580 × OFD2 + 7.937391

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 2.4 cm
Max Range : 12.4 cm
Fetal Growth Table

OFD = 5.956658 x MA - 0.045874 x MA2 - 40.707331

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12cm
Max Range : 40cm
Age Growth ±SD

(W) (cm) (cm)
12 2.503 0.391
16 4.250 0.269
20 5.918 0.303
24 7.479 0.564
28 9.173 0.393
32 10.283 0.357
34 10.716 0.390
36 11.553 0.365
38 12.053 0.233
40 12.059 0.598
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

May 2001)
Age Growth ±SD 26 84.00 4.50
(W) (mm) (mm) 27 86.00 4.50
28 95.00 5.00
11 21.00 2.00
29 97.00 5.50
12 24.00 2.00
30 98.00 5.50
13 29.00 3.00
31 101.00 5.00
14 34.00 3.00
32 102.00 5.00
15 38.00 3.00
33 107.00 5.50
16 46.00 3.00
34 108.00 5.50
17 50.00 3.00
35 109.00 5.50
18 54.00 3.50
36 112.00 5.50
19 57.00 3.50
37 113.00 6.00
20 61.00 3.50
38 116.00 5.50
21 63.00 4.00
39 119.00 6.00
22 68.00 3.50
40 120.00 6.00
23 76.00 4.00
41 122.00 6.00
24 79.00 4.00
25 82.00 4.50
Occipital Frontal Diameter (OFD) : MERZ
GA Table
OFD G.A 8.20 25w5d
(cm) (wd) 8.40 26w0d
3.00 12w5d 8.60 26w5d
3.20 13w0d 8.80 27w0d
3.40 13w5d 9.00 27w5d
3.50 14w0d 9.10 28w0d
3.70 14w5d 9.30 28w5d
3.90 15w0d 9.40 29w0d
4.10 15w5d 9.60 29w5d
4.30 16w0d 9.70 30w0d
4.50 16w5d 9.90 30w5d
4.70 17w0d 10.00 31w0d
5.00 17w5d 10.10 31w5d
5.20 18w0d 10.20 32w0d
5.40 18w5d 10.40 32w5d
5.60 19w0d 10.50 33w0d
5.80 19w5d 10.60 33w5d
6.00 20w0d 10.70 34w0d
6.30 20w5d 10.80 34w5d
6.50 21w0d 10.90 35w0d
6.70 21w5d 11.00 35w5d
6.90 22w0d 11.10 36w5d
7.10 22w5d 11.20 37w0d
7.30 23w0d 11.30 38w0d
7.50 23w5d 11.40 39w0d
7.70 24w0d 11.50 41w5d
7.90 24w5d
8.10 25w0d
Fetal Growth Table
Age Growth 5% 95% 27 8.8 8.2 9.3

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 9.1 8.6 9.7
13 3.2 2.8 3.6 29 9.4 8.9 10.0
14 3.5 3.1 4.0 30 9.7 9.2 10.3
15 3.9 3.5 4.3 31 10.0 9.4 10.6
16 4.3 3.9 4.8 32 10.2 9.7 10.8
17 4.7 4.3 5.2 33 10.5 9.9 11.1
18 5.2 4.7 5.6 34 10.7 10.1 11.3
19 5.6 5.1 6.1 35 10.9 10.3 11.5
20 6.0 5.6 6.5 36 11.0 10.4 11.6
21 6.5 6.0 6.9 37 11.2 10.5 11.8
22 6.9 6.4 7.4 38 11.3 10.6 11.9
23 7.3 6.8 7.8 39 11.4 10.7 12.0
24 7.7 7.2 8.2 40 11.4 10.8 12.1
25 8.1 7.5 8.6 41 11.5 10.8 12.1
26 8.4 7.9 9.0
Inner Ocular Distance (IOD) : HASNMANN
Fetal Growth Table

Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p.177
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 1.70 1.40 2.00
12 0.80 0.40 1.10 29 1.70 1.40 2.00
13 0.80 0.50 1.10 30 1.80 1.50 2.10
14 0.90 0.60 1.20 31 1.80 1.50 2.10
15 1.00 0.60 1.30 32 1.90 1.50 2.20
16 1.00 0.70 1.30 33 1.90 1.60 2.20
17 1.10 0.80 1.40 34 1.90 1.60 2.20
18 1.10 0.80 1.50 35 2.00 1.60 2.30
19 1.20 0.90 1.50 36 2.00 1.70 2.30
20 1.30 1.00 1.60 37 2.00 1.70 2.30
21 1.30 1.00 1.60 38 2.10 1.70 2.40
22 1.40 1.10 1.70 39 2.10 1.80 2.40
23 1.40 1.10 1.70 40 2.10 1.80 2.40
24 1.50 1.20 1.80
25 1.50 1.20 1.90
26 1.60 1.30 1.90

Outer Ocular Distance (OOD) : JENATY
GA Table
Jeanty, P., Rodesch, F., Delbeke, D., Dumont, J. "Estimation of Gestational Age from
Measurements of Fetal Long Bones" Journal of Ultrasound Medicine, 3: 75-79, February, 1984
OOD GA Min Max 4.00 25w2d 22w0d 28w4d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 4.10 25w6d 23w1d 29w1d
1.50 10w3d 07w1d 13w6d 4.20 26w4d 23w4d 29w6d
1.60 11w0d 07w5d 14w3d 4.30 27w1d 23w6d 30w3d
1.70 11w4d 08w2d 15w0d 4.40 27w5d 24w3d 31w0d
1.80 12w1d 08w6d 15w4d 4.50 28w2d 25w0d 31w4d
1.90 12w6d 09w4d 16w1d 4.60 28w6d 25w4d 32w1d
2.00 13w3d 10w1d 16w5d 4.70 29w4d 26w1d 32w6d
2.10 14w0d 10w5d 17w2d 4.80 30w1d 26w6d 33w3d
2.20 14w4d 11w2d 17w6d 4.90 30w5d 27w2d 34w0d
2.30 15w1d 11w6d 18w4d 5.00 31w2d 27w6d 34w4d
2.40 15w6d 12w4d 19w1d 5.10 31w6d 28w4d 35w1d
2.50 16w3d 13w1d 19w5d 5.20 32w4d 29w1d 35w6d
2.60 17w0d 13w5d 20w2d 5.30 33w0d 29w5d 36w3d
2.70 17w4d 14w2d 20w6d 5.40 33w4d 30w2d 37w0d
2.80 18w1d 14w6d 21w4d 5.50 34w1d 30w6d 37w4d
2.90 18w6d 15w4d 22w1d 5.60 34w6d 31w4d 38w1d
3.00 19w3d 16w1d 22w5d 5.70 35w3d 32w1d 38w5d
3.10 20w0d 16w4d 23w2d 5.80 36w0d 32w5d 39w2d
3.20 20w4d 17w1d 23w6d 5.90 36w4d 33w2d 39w6d
3.30 21w1d 17w6d 24w4d 6.00 37w1d 33w6d 40w4d
3.40 21w5d 18w3d 25w1d 6.10 37w6d 34w4d 41w1d
3.50 22w2d 19w0d 25w5d 6.20 38w3d 35w1d 41w4d
3.60 22w6d 19w4d 26w2d 6.30 39w0d 35w5d 42w2d
3.70 23w4d 20w1d 26w6d 6.40 39w4d 36w2d 42w6d
3.80 24w1d 20w6d 27w3d 6.50 40w1d 36w6d 43w4d
3.90 24w5d 21w3d 28w0d

Outer Ocular Distance (OOD) : HANSMANN
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.50 4.00 4.90
12 1.60 1.10 2.00 28 4.60 4.20 5.10
13 1.80 1.40 2.30 29 4.80 4.30 5.20
14 2.00 1.60 2.50 30 4.90 4.50 5.30
15 2.30 1.80 2.70 31 5.00 4.60 5.50
16 2.50 2.00 2.90 32 5.20 4.70 5.60
17 2.70 2.20 3.10 33 5.30 4.90 5.70
18 2.90 2.40 3.30 34 5.40 5.00 5.80
19 3.10 2.60 3.50 35 5.50 5.10 6.00
20 3.30 2.80 3.70 36 5.60 5.20 6.10
21 3.50 3.00 3.90 37 5.70 5.30 6.20
22 3.60 3.20 4.10 38 5.80 5.40 6.30
23 3.80 3.40 4.30 39 5.90 5.50 6.40
24 4.00 3.50 4.40 40 6.00 5.60 6.40
25 4.20 3.70 4.60

Humerus (HUM) : JENATY
GA Table
Jeanty et al,. "Estimation of Gestational Age from Measurements of Fetal Long Bones" Journal of
Ultrasound in Medicine, February 1984. Vol 3. Pp75-79
HUM GA Min Max 3.5 22w0d 19w2d 24w6d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.6 22w4d 19w5d 25w1d
1.0 12w4d 9w6d 15w2d 3.7 22w6d 20w1d 25w5d
1.1 12w6d 10w1d 15w4d 3.8 23w3d 20w4d 26w1d
1.2 13w1d 10w3d 15w6d 3.9 23w6d 21w1d 26w4d
1.3 13w4d 10w6d 16w1d 4.0 24w2d 21w4d 27w1d
1.4 13w6d 11w1d 16w4d 4.1 24w6d 22w0d 27w4d
1.5 14w1d 11w3d 16w6d 4.2 25w2d 22w4d 28w0d
1.6 14w4d 11w6d 17w2d 4.3 25w5d 23w0d 28w4d
1.7 14w6d 12w1d 17w4d 4.4 26w1d 23w4d 29w0d
1.8 15w1d 12w4d 18w0d 4.5 26w5d 24w0d 29w4d
1.9 15w4d 12w6d 18w2d 4.6 27w1d 24w4d 30w0d
2.0 15w6d 13w1d 18w5d 4.7 27w5d 25w0d 30w4d
2.1 16w2d 13w4d 19w1d 4.8 28w1d 25w4d 31w0d
2.2 16w5d 13w6d 19w3d 4.9 28w6d 26w0d 31w4d
2.3 17w1d 14w2d 19w6d 5.0 29w2d 26w4d 32w0d
2.4 17w3d 14w5d 20w1d 5.1 29w6d 27w1d 32w4d
2.5 17w6d 15w1d 20w4d 5.2 30w2d 27w4d 33w1d
2.6 18w1d 15w4d 21w0d 5.3 30w6d 28w1d 33w4d
2.7 18w4d 15w6d 21w3d 5.4 31w3d 28w5d 34w1d
2.8 19w0d 16w2d 21w6d 5.5 32w0d 29w1d 34w5d
2.9 19w3d 16w5d 22w1d 5.6 32w4d 29w6d 35w2d
3.0 19w6d 17w1d 22w4d 5.7 33w1d 30w2d 35w6d
3.1 20w2d 17w4d 23w0d 5.8 33w4d 30w6d 36w3d
3.2 20w5d 18w0d 23w4d 5.9 34w1d 31w3d 36w6d
3.3 21w1d 18w3d 23w6d 6.0 34w6d 32w0d 37w4d
3.4 21w4d 18w6d 24w2d 6.1 35w2d 32w4d 38w1d

6.2 35w6d 33w1d 38w5d 6.7 38w6d 36w1d 41w5d
6.3 36w4d 33w6d 39w2d 6.8 39w4d 36w6d 42w2d
6.4 37w1d 34w3d 39w6d 6.9 40w1d 37w3d 42w6d
6.5 37w5d 35w0d 40w4d
6.6 38w2d 35w4d 41w1d
Fetal Growth Table

Jeanty, P. “Fetal Limb Biometry” (Letter) Radiology, 147:602, 1983

26 4.50 3.6 4.90
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
27 4.60 4.20 5.10
11 0.60 0.60 0.60
28 4.80 4.10 5.20
12 0.90 0.30 1.00
29 5.00 4.40 5.60
13 1.30 0.50 2.00
30 5.20 4.40 5.60
14 1.60 0.50 2.00
31 5.30 4.70 5.90
15 1.80 1.10 2.60
32 5.50 4.70 5.90
16 2.10 1.20 2.50
33 5.60 5.00 6.20
17 2.40 1.90 2.90
34 5.70 5.00 6.20
18 2.70 1.80 3.00
35 5.80 5.20 6.50
19 2.90 2.20 3.60
36 6.00 5.30 6.30
20 3.20 2.30 3.60
37 6.10 5.70 6.40
21 3.40 2.80 4.00
38 6.10 5.50 6.60
22 3.60 2.80 4.00
39 6.20 5.60 6.90
23 3.80 3.20 4.50
40 6.30 5.60 6.90
24 4.10 3.10 4.60
Humerus (HUM) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = HUM x 3.02718 + 0.2005 x HUM2 + 9.907522

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 0.7 cm
Max Range : 7.3 cm
Fetal Growth Table

HUM = 3.679948 x MA - 0.029359 x MA2 - 33.413660

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12cm
Max Range : 40cm
Age Growth ±SD

(W) (cm) (cm)
12 0.690 0.118
16 1.796 0.122
20 2.803 0.129
24 3.802 0.169
28 4.605 0.178
32 5.495 0.212
34 5.800 0.253
36 6.114 0.249
38 6.396 0.256
40 6.579 0.316
Humerus (HUM) : MERZ
GA Table
Merz, Eberband, “Ultrasonic Mensuration of Fetal Limb Bones in the Second and Third
Trimesters.” J Clin Ultrasound 15: 175-183, Table 1, March/April 1987
Humerus G.A 4.50 27w0d
(cm) (wd) 4.70 28w0d
1.00 13w0d 4.80 29w0d
1.20 14w0d 5.00 30w0d
1.40 15w0d 5.30 31w0d
1.70 16w0d 5.40 32w0d
2.00 17w0d 5.60 33w0d
2.30 18w0d 5.80 34w0d
2.60 19w0d 5.90 35w0d
2.90 20w0d 6.00 36w0d
3.20 21w0d 6.10 37w0d
3.30 22w0d 6.40 38w0d
3.70 23w0d 6.50 39w0d
3.80 24w0d 6.60 40w0d
4.20 25w0d
4.30 26w0d
Fetal Growth Table

Merz, Eberband, “Ultrasonic Mensuration of Fetal Limb Bones in the Second and Third
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.60 4.20 5.00
12 0.80 0.40 1.10 28 4.80 4.40 5.20
13 1.10 0.70 1.40 29 5.00 4.60 5.40
14 1.40 1.00 1.70 30 5.20 4.80 5.60
15 1.60 1.30 2.00 31 5.40 4.90 5.80
16 1.90 1.60 2.30 32 5.50 5.10 6.00
17 2.20 1.80 2.60 33 5.70 5.30 6.20
18 2.50 2.10 2.80 34 5.90 5.40 6.30
19 2.70 2.40 3.10 35 6.00 5.50 6.50
20 3.00 2.60 3.40 36 6.10 5.70 6.60
21 3.20 2.90 3.60 37 6.30 5.80 6.70
22 3.50 3.10 3.90 38 6.40 5.90 6.90
23 3.70 3.30 4.10 39 6.50 6.00 7.00
24 4.00 3.60 4.40 40 6.60 6.20 7.10
25 4.20 3.80 4.60

118 태령표 및 참고자료
Humerus (HUM) : OSAKA
GA Table
Humerus G.A 3.60 23w0d
(cm) (wd) 3.70 23w3d
1.00 13w0d 3.80 23w6d
1.10 13w2d 3.90 24w2d
1.20 13w5d 4.00 24w6d
1.30 14w0d 4.10 25w3d
1.40 14w2d 4.20 26w0d
1.50 14w5d 4.30 26w3d
1.60 15w0d 4.40 26w6d
1.70 15w3d 4.50 27w3d
1.80 15w5d 4.60 28w0d
1.90 16w1d 4.70 28w4d
2.00 16w3d 4.80 29w1d
2.10 16w5d 4.90 29w5d
2.20 17w2d 5.00 30w3d
2.30 17w4d 5.10 31w0d
2.40 18w0d 5.20 31w5d
2.50 18w3d 5.30 32w3d
2.60 18w6d 5.40 33w1d
2.70 19w1d 5.50 33w6d
2.80 19w4d 5.60 34w4d
2.90 20w0d 5.70 35w3d
3.00 20w3d 5.80 36w2d
3.10 20w5d 5.90 37w1d
3.20 21w2d 6.00 38w1d
3.30 21w4d 6.10 39w2d
3.40 22w1d 6.20 40w0d
3.50 22w4d
Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth ±SD 27 4.48 0.42
(W) (cm) (cm) 28 4.67 0.41
13 1.12 0.21 29 4.86 0.40
14 1.33 0.24 30 5.03 0.39
15 1.56 0.27 31 5.19 0.38
16 1.81 0.30 32 5.34 0.37
17 2.06 0.33 33 5.48 0.36
18 2.32 0.36 34 5.61 0.34
19 2.57 0.38 35 5.72 0.33
20 2.83 0.40 36 5.83 0.32
21 3.09 0.41 37 5.93 0.31
22 3.34 0.42 38 6.03 0.29
23 3.59 0.43 39 6.11 0.28
24 3.83 0.43 40 6.19 0.28
25 4.05 0.43
26 4.27 0.47
Humerus (HUM) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

May 2001)
Age Growth ±SD 26 44.00 4.00
(W) (mm) (mm) 27 47.00 4.00
28 50.00 5.00
11 8.00 3.00
29 51.00 5.00
12 9.00 2.00
30 52.00 5.00
13 11.00 3.00
31 54.00 5.00
14 14.00 4.00
32 56.00 5.00
15 17.00 5.50
33 57.00 6.00
16 21.00 4.00
34 59.00 5.50
17 25.00 5.00
35 60.00 6.00
18 27.00 5.50
36 62.00 5.00
19 29.00 5.00
37 63.00 6.00
20 31.00 5.00
38 64.00 6.00
21 32.00 6.00
39 65.00 5.50
22 35.00 6.00
40 66.00 6.00
23 38.00 4.00
41 68.00 6.00
24 40.00 6.00
25 43.00 5.00
Tibia (TIB) : JENATY
GA Table
Jeanty et al,. "Estimation of Gestational Age from Measurements of Fetal Long Bones” Journal
of Ultrasound in Medicine, February 1984. Vol 3. Pp75-79
Tibia G.A Min Max 3.50 23w1d 20w1d 26w0d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 3.60 23w4d 20w4d 26w3d
1.00 13w3d 10w4d 16w2d 3.70 23w6d 21w0d 26w6d
1.10 13w5d 10w6d 16w4d 3.80 24w3d 21w4d 27w2d
1.20 14w1d 11w1d 17w0d 3.90 24w6d 21w6d 27w5d
1.30 14w3d 11w4d 17w2d 4.00 25w2d 22w3d 28w1d
1.40 14w6d 11w6d 17w5d 4.10 25w5d 22w6d 28w4d
1.50 15w1d 12w1d 18w0d 4.20 26w1d 23w2d 29w1d
1.60 15w4d 12w4d 18w3d 4.30 26w4d 23w5d 29w4d
1.70 15w6d 13w0d 18w6d 4.40 27w1d 24w1d 30w0d
1.80 16w1d 13w2d 19w1d 4.50 27w4d 24w4d 30w4d
1.90 16w4d 13w5d 19w4d 4.60 28w0d 25w1d 30w6d
2.00 17w0d 14w1d 19w6d 4.70 28w4d 25w4d 31w3d
2.10 17w3d 14w4d 20w2d 4.80 29w0d 26w1d 31w6d
2.20 17w6d 14w6d 20w5d 4.90 29w3d 26w4d 32w2d
2.30 18w1d 15w1d 21w1d 5.00 29w6d 27w0d 32w6d
2.40 18w4d 15w4d 21w3d 5.10 30w3d 27w4d 33w2d
2.50 18w6d 16w0d 21w6d 5.20 30w6d 28w0d 33w6d
2.60 19w2d 16w3d 22w1d 5.30 31w3d 28w4d 34w2d
2.70 19w5d 16w6d 22w4d 5.40 31w6d 29w0d 34w6d
2.80 20w1d 17w1d 23w0d 5.50 32w3d 29w4d 35w2d
2.90 20w4d 17w4d 23w4d 5.60 32w6d 30w0d 35w6d
3.00 21w0d 18w1d 23w6d 5.70 33w3d 30w4d 36w2d
3.10 21w3d 18w4d 24w2d 5.80 33w6d 31w0d 36w6d
3.20 21w6d 18w6d 24w5d 5.90 34w3d 31w4d 37w2d
3.30 22w1d 19w2d 25w1d 6.00 34w6d 32w0d 37w6d
3.40 22w4d 19w5d 25w4d 6.10 35w3d 32w4d 38w2d

6.20 35w6d 33w0d 38w6d 6.70 38w4d 35w5d 41w4d
6.30 36w4d 33w4d 39w3d 6.80 39w1d 36w1d 42w0d
6.40 37w0d 34w1d 39w6d 6.90 39w5d 36w6d 42w4d
6.50 37w4d 34w4d 40w3d
6.60 38w0d 35w1d 41w0d
Fetal Growth Table


26 4.30 3.30 4.90
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
27 4.50 3.90 5.10
11 0.40 0.40 0.40
28 4.70 3.80 5.20
12 0.70 0.70 0.70
29 4.90 4.00 5.70
13 1.00 0.40 1.70
30 5.10 4.10 5.60
14 1.30 0.20 1.90
31 5.20 4.60 5.80
15 1.60 0.50 2.70
32 5.40 4.60 5.90
16 1.90 0.70 2.50
33 5.60 4.90 6.20
17 2.20 1.50 2.90
34 5.70 4.70 6.40
18 2.40 1.40 2.90
35 5.90 4.80 6.90
19 2.70 1.90 3.50
36 6.00 4.90 6.80
20 2.90 1.90 3.50
37 6.10 5.20 7.10
21 3.20 2.40 3.90
38 6.20 5.40 6.90
22 3.40 2.50 3.90
39 6.40 5.80 6.90
23 3.60 3.00 4.30
40 6.50 5.80 6.90
24 3.90 2.80 4.50
Tibia (TIB) : MERZ
GA Table
Merz, E., et al. “Ultrasonic Mensuration of Fetal Limb Bones in the Second and Third
Tibia GA 4.50 28w0d
(cm) (wd) 4.60 29w0d
0.90 13w0d 4.80 30w0d
1.00 14w0d 5.10 31w0d
1.30 15w0d 5.20 32w0d
1.60 16w0d 5.40 33w0d
1.80 17w0d 5.70 34w0d
2.20 18w0d 5.80 35w0d
2.50 19w0d 6.00 36w0d
2.70 20w0d 6.10 37w0d
3.00 21w0d 6.20 38w0d
3.20 22w0d 6.40 39w0d
3.60 23w0d 6.50 40w0d
3.70 24w0d 6.60 41w0d
4.00 25w0d 6.80 42w0d
4.20 26w0d
4.40 27w0d
Fetal Growth Table

Merz, E., Grupner, A., Kern, F. “Mathematical Modeling of Fetal Limb Growth.” Journal of
Clinical Ultrasound. 17: 179-185, March/April, 1989.
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.50 4.00 4.90
12 0.70 0.40 1.00 28 4.70 4.20 5.10
13 1.00 0.60 1.30 29 4.90 4.40 5.30
14 1.20 0.90 1.60 30 5.00 4.60 5.50
15 1.50 1.20 1.90 31 5.20 4.80 5.70
16 1.80 1.40 2.10 32 5.40 5.00 5.80
17 2.10 1.70 2.40 33 5.60 5.10 6.00
18 2.30 2.00 2.70 34 5.70 5.30 6.20
19 2.60 2.20 3.00 35 5.90 5.40 6.30
20 2.80 2.50 3.20 36 6.00 5.60 6.50
21 3.10 2.70 3.50 37 6.20 5.70 6.60
22 3.30 2.90 3.70 38 6.30 5.90 6.80
23 3.60 3.20 4.00 39 6.40 6.00 6.90
24 3.80 3.40 4.20 40 6.60 6.10 7.00
25 4.00 3.60 4.40

Tibia (TIB) : HANSMANN
Fetal Growth Table


27 4.40 3.90 4.90
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
28 4.60 4.10 5.10
12 0.70 0.70 0.70
29 4.80 4.30 5.30
13 1.00 1.00 1.00
30 5.00 4.50 5.50
14 1.20 0.70 1.70
31 5.20 4.70 5.70
15 1.50 0.90 2.00
32 5.40 4.80 5.90
16 1.70 1.20 2.20
33 5.50 5.00 6.00
17 2.00 1.50 2.50
34 5.70 5.20 6.20
18 2.20 1.70 2.70
35 5.80 5.30 6.40
19 2.50 2.00 3.00
36 6.00 5.50 6.50
20 2.70 2.20 3.30
37 6.10 5.60 6.70
21 3.00 2.50 3.50
38 6.30 5.80 6.80
22 3.20 2.70 3.80
39 6.40 5.90 6.90
23 3.50 3.00 4.00
40 6.60 6.10 7.10
24 3.70 3.20 4.20
25 4.00 3.40 4.50
Cerebellum : HILL
GA Table
Hill LM, David G, Fries J, Hixson J, Dawn R. "The Transverse Cerebellar Diameter in Estimating
Gestational Age in the Large for Gestational Age Fetus" Obstetrics and Gynecology,75:981-985,
June 1990
CEREB G.A ±SD 3.50 29w3d 2w0d
(cm) (wd) (wd) 3.60 30w0d 2w3d
1.40 15w1d 1w0d 3.70 30w4d 2w3d
1.50 15w6d 1w0d 3.80 31w1d 2w3d
1.60 16w4d 1w0d 3.90 31w6d 2w3d
1.70 17w1d 1w0d 4.00 32w2d 2w3d
1.80 17w6d 1w0d 4.10 32w6d 2w3d
1.90 18w4d 1w6d 4.20 33w3d 2w3d
2.00 19w2d 1w6d 4.30 33w6d 2w3d
2.10 20w0d 1w6d 4.40 34w3d 2w3d
2.20 20w5d 1w6d 4.50 34w6d 2w3d
2.30 21w3d 1w6d 4.60 35w2d 2w3d
2.40 22w1d 1w6d 4.70 35w5d 2w3d
2.50 22w6d 1w6d 4.80 36w1d 3w1d
2.60 23w4d 1w6d 4.90 36w4d 3w1d
2.70 24w1d 2w0d 5.00 36w6d 3w1d
2.80 24w6d 2w0d 5.10 37w1d 3w1d
2.90 25w4d 2w0d 5.20 37w4d 3w1d
3.00 26w1d 2w0d 5.40 38w0d 3w1d
3.10 26w6d 2w0d 5.50 38w2d 3w1d
3.20 27w4d 2w0d 5.60 38w4d 3w1d
3.30 28w1d 2w0d
3.40 28w6d 2w0d

Cerebellum : CHITTY
GA Table
CEREB GA Min Max 2.50 24w2d 22w2d 26w3d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 2.60 25w0d 23w0d 27w3d
1.30 14w3d 13w1d 16w0d 2.70 25w6d 23w4d 28w2d
1.40 15w2d 14w0d 16w6d 2.80 26w4d 24w1d 29w2d
1.50 16w2d 14w6d 17w5d 2.90 27w2d 24w5d 30w2d
1.60 17w0d 15w4d 18w4d 3.00 28w0d 25w1d 31w2d
1.70 17w6d 16w3d 19w3d 3.10 28w6d 25w5d 32w2d
1.80 18w5d 17w2d 20w2d 3.20 29w4d 26w1d 33w3d
1.90 19w4d 18w0d 21w1d 3.30 30w2d 26w4d 34w4d
2.00 20w3d 18w6d 22w0d 3.40 31w0d 26w6d 35w5d
2.10 21w1d 19w4d 22w6d 3.50 31w5d 27w2d 36w6d
2.20 22w0d 20w2d 23w5d 3.60 32w3d 27w4d 38w1d
2.30 22w5d 21w0d 24w4d
2.40 23w4d 21w5d 25w4d

Cerebellum : GOLDSTEIN
Fetal Growth Table

Cerebellar measurements with ultrasonography in the evaluation of fetal growth and
development
AM J. Obstet. Gynecol. 156:1065-1069, 1987
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 3.10 2.70 3.40
15 1.40 1.00 1.60 29 3.40 2.90 3.80
16 1.60 1.40 1.70 30 3.50 3.10 4.00
17 1.70 1.60 1.80 31 3.80 3.20 4.30
18 1.80 1.70 1.90 32 3.80 3.30 4.20
19 1.90 1.80 2.20 33 4.00 3.20 4.40
20 2.00 1.80 2.20 34 4.00 3.30 4.40
21 2.20 1.90 2.40 35 4.05 3.10 4.70
22 2.30 2.10 2.40 36 4.30 3.60 5.50
23 2.40 2.20 2.60 37 4.50 3.70 5.50
24 2.50 2.20 2.80 38 4.85 4.00 5.50
25 2.80 2.30 2.90 39 5.20 5.20 5.50
26 2.90 2.50 3.20

Ulna : JEANTY
GA Table
Jeanty P, Rodesch F, Delbeke D, Mumont J, “Estimation of Gestational Age from
Measurements of Fetal Long Bones.” J Ultrasound Med 3:75-79, 1984
Ulna GA Min Max 3.70 24w4d 21w4d 27w5d

3.80 25w1d 22w1d 28w1d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd)
3.90 25w4d 22w4d 28w5d
1.00 13w1d 10w1d 16w1d
4.00 26w1d 23w1d 29w1d
1.10 13w4d 10w4d 16w4d
4.10 26w5d 23w4d 29w5d
1.20 13w6d 10w6d 16w6d
4.20 27w1d 24w1d 30w2d
1.30 14w1d 11w1d 17w2d
4.30 27w5d 24w5d 30w6d
1.40 14w4d 11w4d 17w5d
4.40 28w2d 25w1d 31w2d
1.50 15w0d 11w6d 18w0d
4.50 28w6d 25w6d 31w6d
1.60 15w3d 12w2d 18w3d
4.60 29w3d 26w2d 32w3d
1.70 15w5d 12w5d 18w6d
4.70 29w6d 26w6d 33w0d
1.80 16w1d 13w1d 19w1d
4.80 30w4d 27w3d 33w4d
1.90 16w4d 13w4d 19w4d
4.90 31w1d 28w0d 34w1d
2.00 16w6d 13w6d 20w0d
5.00 31w4d 28w4d 34w5d
2.10 17w2d 14w2d 20w3d
5.10 32w1d 29w1d 35w2d
2.20 17w5d 14w5d 20w6d
5.20 32w6d 29w5d 35w6d
2.30 18w1d 15w1d 21w1d
5.30 33w3d 30w2d 36w2d
2.40 18w4d 15w4d 21w4d
5.40 34w0d 30w6d 37w0d
2.50 19w0d 16w0d 22w1d
5.50 34w4d 31w4d 37w5d
2.60 19w3d 16w3d 22w4d
5.60 35w1d 32w1d 38w2d
2.70 19w6d 16w6d 22w6d
5.70 35w6d 32w6d 38w6d
2.80 20w2d 17w2d 23w2d
5.80 36w3d 33w3d 39w4d
2.90 20w6d 17w5d 23w6d
5.90 37w1d 34w0d 40w1d
3.00 21w1d 18w1d 24w2d
6.00 37w5d 34w4d 40w6d
3.10 21w5d 18w4d 24w6d
6.10 38w2d 35w2d 41w3d
3.20 22w1d 19w1d 25w1d
6.20 39w0d 35w6d 42w0d
3.30 22w5d 19w4d 25w5d
6.30 39w4d 36w4d 42w5d
3.40 23w1d 20w1d 26w1d
6.40 40w2d 37w1d 43w2d
3.50 23w4d 20w4d 26w5d
3.60 24w1d 21w1d 27w1d
Fetal Growth Table


26 4.10 3.40 4.40
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
27 4.30 3.70 4.80
11 0.50 0.50 0.50
28 4.40 3.70 4.80
12 0.80 0.80 0.80
29 4.60 4.00 5.10
13 1.10 0.30 1.80
30 4.70 3.80 5.40
14 1.30 0.40 1.70
31 4.90 3.90 5.90
15 1.60 1.00 2.20
32 5.00 4.00 5.80
16 1.90 0.80 2.40
33 5.20 4.30 6.00
17 2.10 1.10 3.20
34 5.30 4.40 5.90
18 2.40 1.30 3.00
35 5.40 4.70 6.10
19 2.60 2.00 3.20
36 5.50 4.70 6.10
20 2.90 2.10 3.20
37 5.60 4.90 6.20
21 3.10 2.50 3.60
38 5.70 4.80 6.30
22 3.30 2.40 3.70
39 5.70 4.90 6.60
23 3.50 2.70 4.30
40 5.80 5.00 6.50
24 3.70 2.90 4.10
Ulna : MERZ
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.30 3.90 4.70
12 0.60 0.30 0.90 28 4.50 4.10 4.90
13 0.90 0.50 1.20 29 4.70 4.30 5.10
14 1.20 0.80 1.50 30 4.80 4.40 5.20
15 1.40 1.10 1.80 31 5.00 4.60 5.40
16 1.70 1.40 2.10 32 5.10 4.70 5.50
17 2.00 1.70 2.30 33 5.30 4.90 5.70
18 2.30 1.90 2.60 34 5.40 5.00 5.80
19 2.50 2.20 2.90 35 5.50 5.10 6.00
20 2.80 2.40 3.10 36 5.60 5.20 6.10
21 3.00 2.70 3.40 37 5.70 5.30 6.20
22 3.30 2.90 3.60 38 5.80 5.40 6.30
23 3.50 3.100 3.90 39 5.90 5.50 6.40
24 3.70 3.30 4.10 40 6.00 5.60 6.50
25 3.90 3.50 4.30

Ulna : HANSMANN
Fetal Growth Table


27 4.40 3.90 4.90
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
28 4.60 4.10 5.10
12 0.70 0.70 0.70
29 4.80 4.30 5.30
13 1.00 0.50 1.50
30 4.90 4.40 5.40
14 1.30 0.80 1.80
31 5.10 4.60 5.60
15 1.60 1.10 2.10
32 5.30 4.80 5.80
16 1.80 1.30 2.30
33 5.40 4.90 5.90
17 2.10 1.60 2.60
34 5.60 5.10 6.10
18 2.40 1.90 2.90
35 5.70 5.20 6.20
19 2.60 2.10 3.10
36 5.80 5.30 6.30
20 2.90 2.40 3.40
37 6.00 5.50 6.50
21 3.10 2.60 3.60
38 6.10 5.60 6.60
22 3.30 2.80 3.80
39 6.20 5.70 6.70
23 3.60 3.10 4.10
40 6.30 5.80 6.80
24 3.80 3.30 4.30
25 4.00 3.50 4.50
Head Circumference (HC) : KOREAN
GA Table
GA = HC × 1.43245 - 0.010208 × HC2 - 0.342015

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 7.4 cm
Max Range : 35.4 cm
Fetal Growth Table

HC = 15.843955 x MA - 0.112149 x MA2 - 99.924727

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12cm
Max Range : 40cm
Age Growth ±SD

(W) (cm) (cm)
12 7.246 0.791
16 12.505 0.746
20 17.188 0.743
24 21.522 1.250
28 25.989 0.870
32 29.231 0.798
34 30.578 0.771
36 32.239 0.577
38 33.522 0.297
40 37.283 1.389
Head Circumference (HC) : HANSMANN
GA Table
Gynecology." Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986, p431.
HC GA 26.3 27w0d
(cm) (wd) 27.4 28w0d
10.6 14w0d 28.4 29w0d
11.5 15w0d 29.3 30w0d
12.7 16w0d 30.3 31w0d
14.0 17w0d 31.1 32w0d
15.2 18w0d 31.8 33w0d
16.4 19w0d 32.5 34w0d
17.6 20w0d 33.2 35w0d
19.0 21w0d 33.7 36w0d
20.3 22w0d 34.0 37w0d
21.5 23w0d 34.4 38w0d
22.6 24w0d 34.7 39w0d
24.0 25w0d 34.9 40w0d
25.1 26w0d
Fetal Growth Table


26 24.20 21.80 26.60
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
27 25.20 22.80 27.70
10 5.00 2.60 7.40
28 26.20 23.80 28.60
11 6.30 3.80 8.70
29 27.10 24.70 29.60
12 7.50 5.10 10.00
30 28.10 25.60 30.50
13 8.80 6.40 11.20
31 28.90 26.50 31.30
14 10.10 7.60 12.50
32 29.70 27.30 32.20
15 11.30 8.90 13.80
33 30.50 28.10 32.90
16 12.60 10.10 15.00
34 31.20 28.80 33.60
17 13.80 11.40 16.30
35 31.90 29.40 34.30
18 15.10 12.60 17.50
36 32.50 30.00 34.90
19 16.30 13.80 18.70
37 33.00 30.60 35.50
20 17.50 15.00 19.90
38 33.50 31.10 35.90
21 18.70 16.20 21.10
39 33.90 31.50 36.40
22 19.80 17.40 22.30
40 34.30 31.90 36.70
23 21.00 18.50 23.40
24 22.10 19.60 24.50
Head Circumference (HC) : HADLOCK
GA Table
GA = 8.96 + 0.54 × HC + 0.0003 × HC3

Input Unit : cm
Min Range : 5.5 cm
Max Range : 35.7 cm
Min Range(w) Max Range(w) SD(w)
12 18 1.19
18 24 1.48
24 30 2.06
30 36 2.98
36 42 2.70
Fetal Growth Table

Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth Parameters" Radiology, 1984, 152: 497-501.
Equation = 1.56 x MA - 0.0002548 x MA3 - 11.48

Output Unit : cm
Min Range : 12 cm
Max Range : 40 cm
Standard Deviation : 2SD=2.00cm
0 100 2.00
Head Circumference (HC) : MERZ
GA Table
E. Merz, W. Goldhofer, E. Timor-Tritsch "Ultrasound in Gynecology and Obstetrics" Text book
HC GA 5% 95% 11.8 15w2d 14w0d 16w4d

(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 12.0 15w3d 14w1d 16w5d
7.2 12w1d 11w0d 13w1d 12.2 15w4d 14w1d 17w0d
7.4 12w2d 11w1d 13w4d 12.4 15w5d 14w2d 17w1d
7.6 12w3d 11w1d 13w4d 12.6 15w6d 14w3d 17w1d
7.8 12w4d 11w2d 13w5d 12.8 16w0d 14w4d 17w3d
8.0 12w5d 11w4d 13w6d 13.0 16w1d 14w5d 17w4d
8.2 12w6d 11w4d 14w0d 13.2 16w2d 14w6d 17w5d
8.4 12w6d 11w5d 14w1d 13.4 16w3d 15w0d 17w6d
8.6 13w1d 11w6d 14w2d 13.6 16w4d 15w1d 18w0d
8.8 13w1d 12w0d 14w3d 13.8 16w5d 15w2d 18w1d
9.0 13w2d 12w1d 14w4d 14.0 16w6d 15w4d 18w2d
9.2 13w4d 12w2d 14w5d 14.2 17w0d 15w4d 18w3d
9.4 13w4d 12w3d 14w6d 14.4 17w1d 15w6d 18w4d
9.6 13w5d 12w4d 14w6d 14.6 17w2d 15w6d 18w5d
9.8 13w6d 12w5d 15w1d 14.8 17w4d 16w0d 19w0d
10.0 14w0d 12w6d 15w1d 15.0 17w4d 16w1d 19w1d
10.2 14w1d 12w6d 15w4d 15.2 17w6d 16w2d 19w2d
10.4 14w2d 13w0d 15w4d 15.4 17w6d 16w3d 19w3d
10.6 14w3d 13w1d 15w5d 15.6 18w1d 16w4d 19w4d
10.8 14w4d 13w2d 15w6d 15.8 18w1d 16w5d 19w5d
11.0 14w5d 13w3d 16w0d 16.0 18w3d 16w6d 19w6d
11.2 14w6d 13w4d 16w1d 16.2 18w4d 17w0d 20w0d
11.4 15w0d 13w5d 16w2d 16.4 18w5d 17w1d 20w1d
11.6 15w1d 13w6d 16w3d 16.6 18w6d 17w2d 20w2d
16.8 19w0d 17w4d 20w4d 22.8 24w0d 22w1d 25w6d
17.0 19w1d 17w4d 20w4d 23.0 24w1d 22w3d 26w0d
17.2 19w2d 17w6d 20w6d 23.2 24w3d 22w4d 26w1d
17.4 19w3d 17w6d 20w6d 23.4 24w4d 22w5d 26w2d
17.6 19w4d 18w0d 21w1d 23.6 24w5d 22w6d 26w4d
17.8 19w6d 18w1d 21w3d 23.8 24w6d 23w1d 26w5d
18.0 19w6d 18w2d 21w4d 24.0 25w1d 23w2d 26w6d
18.2 20w1d 18w4d 21w5d 24.2 25w2d 23w4d 27w1d
18.4 20w1d 18w4d 21w6d 24.4 25w4d 23w5d 27w2d
18.6 20w3d 18w6d 22w0d 24.6 25w5d 23w6d 27w4d
18.8 20w4d 19w0d 22w1d 24.8 25w6d 24w1d 27w5d
19.0 20w5d 19w1d 22w2d 25.0 26w0d 24w1d 27w6d
19.2 20w6d 19w2d 22w4d 25.2 26w1d 24w3d 28w0d
19.4 21w1d 19w4d 22w5d 25.4 26w3d 24w4d 28w1d
19.6 21w1d 19w4d 22w6d 25.6 26w4d 24w6d 28w3d
19.8 21w3d 19w5d 23w0d 25.8 26w6d 25w0d 28w4d
20.0 21w4d 19w6d 23w2d 26.0 27w0d 25w1d 28w6d
20.2 21w5d 20w0d 23w3d 26.2 27w1d 25w3d 29w0d
20.4 21w6d 20w1d 23w4d 26.4 27w3d 25w4d 29w1d
20.6 22w1d 20w3d 23w6d 26.6 27w4d 25w6d 29w3d
20.8 22w1d 20w4d 23w6d 26.8 27w6d 26w0d 29w4d
21.0 22w3d 20w5d 24w1d 27.0 28w1d 26w1d 30w0d
21.2 22w4d 20w6d 24w2d 27.2 28w2d 26w3d 30w1d
21.4 22w5d 21w0d 24w3d 27.4 28w4d 26w4d 30w3d
21.6 22w6d 21w1d 24w4d 27.6 28w5d 26w6d 30w4d
21.8 23w1d 21w3d 24w6d 27.8 28w6d 27w0d 30w6d
22.0 23w2d 21w4d 25w0d 28.0 29w1d 27w1d 31w0d
22.2 23w4d 21w6d 25w1d 28.2 29w2d 27w3d 31w1d
22.4 23w4d 21w6d 25w2d 28.4 29w4d 27w5d 31w4d
22.6 23w6d 22w1d 25w4d 28.6 29w6d 27w6d 31w5d

28.8 30w0d 28w1d 31w6d 32.8 34w6d 32w6d 37w0d
29.0 30w1d 28w2d 32w1d 33.0 35w1d 33w1d 37w2d
29.2 30w4d 28w4d 32w3d 33.2 35w4d 33w2d 37w5d
29.4 30w5d 28w6d 32w4d 33.4 35w6d 33w4d 38w0d
29.6 30w6d 29w0d 32w6d 33.6 36w1d 33w6d 38w2d
29.8 31w1d 29w1d 33w0d 33.8 36w3d 34w1d 38w4d
30.0 31w3d 29w3d 33w3d 34.0 36w4d 34w3d 38w6d
30.2 31w4d 29w4d 33w4d 34.2 36w6d 34w5d 39w1d
30.4 31w6d 29w6d 33w6d 34.4 37w1d 35w0d 39w3d
30.6 32w1d 30w1d 34w1d 34.6 37w4d 35w2d 39w5d
30.8 32w2d 30w2d 34w2d 34.8 37w6d 35w4d 40w1d
31.0 32w4d 30w4d 34w4d 35.0 38w1d 35w6d 40w4d
31.2 32w6d 30w6d 34w6d 35.2 38w4d 36w1d 40w6d
31.4 33w1d 31w1d 35w1d 35.4 38w6d 36w4d 41w1d
31.6 33w3d 31w3d 35w3d 35.6 39w1d 36w6d 41w3d
31.8 33w4d 31w4d 35w4d 35.8 39w4d 37w1d 41w6d
32.0 33w6d 31w6d 36w0d 36.0 39w6d 37w4d 42w1d
32.2 34w1d 32w0d 36w1d 36.2 40w1d 37w6d 42w3d
32.4 34w3d 32w2d 36w4d 36.4 40w4d 38w1d 42w6d
32.6 34w5d 32w4d 36w6d

Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth 5% 95% 26 24.9 23.3 26.6
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 25.9 24.3 27.7
12 7.6 6.3 9.0 28 26.9 25.3 28.7
13 9.0 7.7 10.4 29 27.9 26.2 29.6
14 10.4 9.0 11.8 30 28.8 27.1 30.6
15 11.7 10.4 13.2 31 29.6 27.9 31.5
16 13.1 11.7 14.6 32 30.5 28.8 32.3
17 14.4 13.0 15.9 33 31.3 29.6 33.2
18 15.7 14.2 17.2 34 32.1 30.3 34.0
19 16.9 15.5 18.5 35 32.8 31.1 34.7
20 18.2 16.7 19.7 36 33.6 31.8 35.5
21 19.4 17.9 21 37 34.2 32.4 36.2
22 20.5 19.0 22.2 38 34.9 33.1 36.8
23 21.7 20.1 23.3 39 35.5 33.7 37.5
24 22.8 21.2 24.5 40 36.1 34.3 38.1
25 23.9 22.3 25.6

Head Circumference (HC) : CHITTY (D)
GA Table
HC GA Min Max 20.00 22w2d 21w0d 23w5d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 20.50 22w5d 21w3d 24w2d
8.00 12w4d 11w3d 13w5d 21.00 23w1d 21w5d 24w5d
8.50 12w6d 11w6d 14w1d 21.50 23w4d 22w1d 25w1d
9.00 13w2d 12w2d 14w4d 22.00 24w0d 22w4d 25w5d
9.50 13w5d 12w4d 15w0d 22.50 24w3d 22w6d 26w1d
10.00 14w1d 13w0d 15w3d 23.00 24w6d 23w2d 26w5d
10.50 14w4d 13w3d 15w5d 23.50 25w3d 23w5d 27w1d
11.00 15w0d 13w6d 16w1d 24.00 25w6d 24w1d 27w5d
11.50 15w3d 14w2d 16w4d 24.50 26w2d 24w3d 28w2d
12.00 15w6d 14w5d 17w0d 25.00 26w5d 24w6d 28w6d
12.50 16w2d 15w1d 17w3d 25.50 27w2d 25w2d 29w3d
13.00 16w4d 15w4d 17w6d 26.00 27w5d 25w5d 30w0d
13.50 17w0d 15w6d 18w2d 26.50 28w2d 26w1d 30w4d
14.00 17w3d 16w2d 18w5d 27.00 28w6d 26w4d 31w2d
14.50 17w6d 16w5d 19w1d 27.50 29w3d 27w0d 32w0d
15.00 18w2d 17w1d 19w3d 28.00 30w0d 27w3d 32w4d
15.50 18w5d 17w4d 19w6d 28.50 30w4d 27w6d 33w3d
16.00 19w1d 17w6d 20w2d 29.00 31w1d 28w3d 34w1d
16.50 19w3d 18w2d 20w5d 29.50 31w5d 28w6d 35w0d
17.00 19w6d 18w5d 21w1d 30.00 32w3d 29w3d 35w6d
17.50 20w2d 19w1d 21w4d 30.50 33w1d 30w0d 36w5d
18.00 20w5d 19w3d 22w0d 31.00 33w6d 30w3d 37w4d
18.50 21w1d 19w6d 22w3d 31.50 34w4d 31w0d 38w4d
19.00 21w4d 20w2d 22w6d 32.00 35w3d 31w5d 39w4d
19.50 22w0d 20w4d 23w2d

Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell, "Charts of Fetal Size: 2. Head Measurement" British
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 26.25 24.91 27.58

12 6.81 5.96 7.67 29 27.18 25.82 28.55
13 8.22 7.33 9.11 30 28.07 26.68 29.47
14 9.60 8.69 10.52 31 28.92 27.50 30.35
15 10.97 10.02 11.92 32 29.73 28.27 31.18
16 12.31 11.34 13.29 33 30.49 29.00 31.97
17 13.64 12.63 14.64 34 31.20 29.69 32.72
18 14.93 13.89 15.97 35 31.87 30.32 33.41
19 16.20 15.14 17.27 36 32.48 30.90 34.05
20 17.45 16.35 18.54 37 33.04 31.44 34.64
21 18.66 17.54 19.79 38 33.55 31.92 35.18
22 19.85 18.69 21.00 39 34.00 32.34 35.67
23 21.00 19.81 22.19 40 34.40 32.71 36.10
24 22.12 20.91 23.34 41 34.74 33.02 36.47
25 23.21 21.96 24.45 42 35.03 33.27 36.78
26 24.26 22.98 25.53
Head Circumference (HC) : CHITTY (M)
GA Table
HC GA Min Max 20.50 22w3d 20w6d 24w1d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 21.00 22w6d 21w2d 24w4d
8.50 12w6d 12w1d 13w4d 21.50 23w2d 21w5d 25w0d
9.00 13w2d 12w4d 14w0d 22.00 23w5d 22w0d 25w4d
9.50 13w5d 12w6d 14w3d 22.50 24w1d 22w3d 26w0d
10.00 14w0d 13w2d 14w6d 23.00 24w4d 22w6d 26w3d
10.50 14w3d 13w4d 15w2d 23.50 25w0d 23w1d 27w0d
11.00 14w6d 14w0d 15w6d 24.00 25w3d 23w4d 27w3d
11.50 15w2d 14w3d 16w2d 24.50 25w6d 24w0d 28w0d
12.00 15w5d 14w5d 16w5d 25.00 26w3d 24w3d 28w3d
12.50 16w1d 15w1d 17w1d 25.50 26w6d 24w6d 29w0d
13.00 16w3d 15w3d 17w4d 26.00 27w3d 25w2d 29w4d
13.50 16w6d 15w6d 18w0d 26.50 27w6d 25w5d 30w1d
14.00 17w2d 16w1d 18w3d 27.00 28w3d 26w2d 30w5d
14.50 17w5d 16w4d 18w6d 27.50 29w0d 26w5d 31w2d
15.00 18w1d 17w0d 19w2d 28.00 29w4d 27w2d 32w0d
15.50 18w3d 17w2d 19w5d 28.50 30w1d 27w5d 32w4d
16.00 18w6d 17w5d 20w1d 29.00 30w5d 28w2d 33w2d
16.50 19w2d 18w0d 20w4d 29.50 31w2d 28w6d 34w0d
17.00 19w5d 18w3d 21w0d 30.00 32w0d 29w3d 34w5d
17.50 20w0d 18w5d 21w3d 30.50 32w5d 30w0d 35w3d
18.00 20w3d 19w1d 21w6d 31.00 33w3d 30w5d 36w2d
18.50 20w6d 19w3d 22w2d 31.50 34w1d 31w2d 37w1d
19.00 21w2d 19w6d 22w6d 32.00 34w6d 32w0d 38w0d
19.50 21w5d 20w1d 23w2d 32.50 35w5d 32w5d 38w6d
20.00 22w0d 20w4d 23w5d

Fetal Growth Table

L.S. Chitty, D.G. Altman, S. Campbell, "Charts of Fetal Size: 2. Head Measurement" British
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 28 26.62 25.32 27.91
12 6.96 6.13 7.78 29 27.57 26.24 28.89
13 8.37 7.52 9.22 30 28.48 27.12 29.83
14 9.77 8.89 10.65 31 29.34 27.96 30.73
15 11.15 10.24 12.06 32 30.16 28.75 31.58
16 12.51 11.57 13.45 33 30.94 29.50 32.38
17 13.85 12.88 14.81 34 31.67 30.20 33.14
18 15.16 14.16 16.15 35 32.35 30.85 33.85
19 16.44 15.41 17.47 36 32.98 31.45 34.51
20 17.70 16.64 18.76 37 33.56 32.00 35.12
21 18.93 17.84 20.02 38 34.08 32.49 35.68
22 20.13 19.01 21.25 39 34.56 32.94 36.18
23 21.30 20.15 22.44 40 34.97 33.32 36.62
24 22.43 21.26 23.61 41 35.33 33.65 37.01
25 23.53 22.33 24.74 42 35.63 33.93 37.34
26 24.60 23.36 25.83

Head Circumference (HC) : CAMPBELL
GA Table
HC GA ±SD 26.00 27w0d 02w5d
(cm) (wd) (wd) 27.10 28w0d 02w5d
11.50 14w0d 01w3d 28.10 29w0d 02w6d
12.60 15w0d 01w3d 29.00 30w0d 03w0d
13.70 16w0d 01w4d 29.90 31w0d 03w1d
14.80 17w0d 01w5d 30.80 32w0d 03w4d
15.90 18w0d 01w6d 31.50 33w0d 03w6d
17.00 19w0d 02w0d 32.00 34w0d 04w1d
18.10 20w0d 02w1d 32.50 35w0d 04w1d
19.20 21w0d 02w2d 33.00 36w0d 04w2d
20.40 22w0d 02w3d 33.50 37w0d 04w2d
21.50 23w0d 02w3d 34.00 38w0d 05w0d
22.70 24w0d 02w3d 34.30 39w0d 00w0d
23.80 25w0d 02w3d 34.50 40w0d 00w0d
24.90 26w0d 02w4d

Head Circumference (HC) : ASUM(SCW)
Fetal Growth Table

May 2001)
Age Growth ±SD 26 238.00 20.00
(W) (mm) (mm) 27 250.00 20.00
28 263.00 20.00
11 59.00 15.00
29 269.00 25.00
12 70.00 15.00
30 274.00 25.00
13 84.00 15.00
31 284.00 25.00
14 96.00 15.00
32 288.00 25.00
15 108.00 15.00
33 300.00 25.00
16 128.00 15.00
34 305.00 25.00
17 141.00 15.00
35 310.00 25.00
18 151.00 20.00
36 317.00 25.00
19 160.00 20.00
37 321.00 25.00
20 170.00 20.00
38 328.00 25.00
21 176.00 20.00
39 336.00 25.00
22 188.00 20.00
40 340.00 25.00
23 210.00 20.00
41 344.00 25.00
24 220.00 20.00
25 231.00 20.00
Head Circumference (HC) : CFEF
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 29 26.30 24.60 28.00

16 12.10 11.10 13.10
30 27.10 25.40 28.80
17 13.40 12.40 14.50
31 27.80 26.10 29.60
18 14.80 13.60 15.90
32 28.50 26.70 30.40
19 16.00 14.90 17.20
33 29.20 27.30 31.00
20 17.20 16.00 18.50
34 29.80 27.90 31.70
21 18.40 17.10 19.70
35 30.40 28.40 32.30
22 19.60 18.20 20.90
36 30.90 28.90 32.90
23 20.70 19.20 22.00
37 31.40 29.30 33.40
24 21.70 20.30 23.10
38 31.80 29.70 33.90
25 22.70 21.20 24.20
39 32.20 30.10 34.30
26 23.70 22.20 25.20
40 32.40 30.30 34.60
27 24.60 23.00 26.20
Fetal Age Table (FTA) : OSAKA
GA Table
FTA GA 32.00 24w5d 61.00 32w5d
(cm2) (wd) 33.00 25w0d 62.00 33w0d

34.00 25w2d 63.00 33w2d
5.60 14w0d
35.00 25w4d 64.00 33w4d
6.00 14w2d
36.00 25w6d 65.00 33w6d
7.00 14w5d
37.00 26w1d 66.00 34w0d
8.00 15w3d
38.00 26w3d 67.00 34w2d
9.00 16w1d
39.00 26w5d 68.00 34w4d
10.00 16w3d
40.00 27w0d 69.00 34w6d
11.00 16w5d
41.00 27w2d 70.00 35w1d
12.00 17w3d
42.00 27w4d 71.00 35w3d
13.00 17w6d
43.00 27w6d 72.00 35w5d
14.00 18w2d
44.00 28w1d 73.00 36w0d
15.00 18w4d
45.00 28w3d 74.00 36w2d
16.00 19w1d
46.00 28w5d 75.00 36w4d
17.00 19w4d
47.00 29w0d 76.00 36w6d
18.00 19w6d
48.00 29w2d 77.00 37w1d
19.00 20w2d
49.00 29w4d 78.00 37w3d
20.00 20w5d
50.00 29w6d 79.00 37w5d
21.00 21w0d
51.00 30w1d 80.00 37w6d
22.00 21w3d
52.00 30w3d 81.00 38w2d
23.00 21w5d
53.00 30w5d 82.00 38w4d
24.00 22w1d
54.00 30w6d 83.00 39w0d
25.00 22w3d
55.00 31w1d 84.00 39w1d
26.00 22w5d
56.00 31w3d 85.00 39w3d
27.00 23w1d
57.00 31w5d 86.00 39w6d
28.00 23w3d
58.00 32w0d 86.60 40w0d
29.00 23w5d
59.00 32w2d
30.00 24w0d
60.00 32w3d
31.00 24w2d
Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth ±SD 18w0d 13.50 2.00
(wd) (cm2) (cm2) 18w1d 13.80 2.10
14w0d 5.60 1.20 18w2d 14.10 2.10
14w1d 5.80 1.20 18w3d 14.50 2.10
14w2d 6.00 1.20 18w4d 14.80 2.20
14w3d 6.30 1.30 18w5d 15.20 2.20
14w4d 6.50 1.30 18w6d 15.50 2.20
14w5d 6.80 1.30 19w0d 15.80 2.30
14w6d 7.10 1.30 19w1d 16.20 2.30
15w0d 7.30 1.40 19w2d 16.60 2.30
15w1d 7.60 1.40 19w3d 16.90 2.40
15w2d 7.80 1.40 19w4d 17.30 2.40
15w3d 8.10 1.50 19w5d 17.60 2.50
15w4d 8.40 1.50 19w6d 18.00 2.50
15w5d 8.70 1.50 20w0d 18.40 2.50
15w6d 8.90 1.50 20w1d 18.70 2.60
16w0d 9.20 1.60 20w2d 19.10 2.60
16w1d 9.50 1.60 20w3d 19.50 2.60
16w2d 9.80 1.60 20w4d 19.90 2.70
16w3d 10.10 1.70 20w5d 20.20 2.70
16w4d 10.40 1.70 20w6d 20.60 2.80
16w5d 10.70 1.70 21w0d 21.00 2.80
16w6d 11.00 1.80 21w1d 21.40 2.80
17w0d 11.30 1.80 21w2d 21.80 2.90
17w1d 11.60 1.80 21w3d 22.20 2.90
17w2d 11.90 1.90 21w4d 22.60 3.00
17w3d 12.20 1.90 21w5d 23.00 3.00
17w4d 12.50 1.90 21w6d 23.40 3.00
17w5d 12.80 2.00 22w0d 23.80 3.10
17w6d 13.20 2.00 22w1d 24.20 3.10

22w2d 24.70 3.20 27w0d 39.90 4.70
22w3d 25.10 3.20 27w1d 40.40 4.80
22w4d 25.50 3.30 27w2d 40.90 4.80
22w5d 25.90 3.30 27w3d 41.40 4.90
22w6d 26.40 3.30 27w4d 41.90 4.90
23w0d 26.80 3.40 27w5d 42.40 5.00
23w1d 27.20 3.40 27w6d 42.90 5.00
23w2d 27.70 3.50 28w0d 43.40 5.10
23w3d 28.10 3.50 28w1d 44.00 5.10
23w4d 28.50 3.60 28w2d 44.50 5.20
23w5d 29.00 3.60 28w3d 45.00 5.20
23w6d 29.40 3.70 28w4d 45.50 5.30
24w0d 29.90 3.70 28w5d 46.00 5.30
24w1d 30.30 3.70 28w6d 46.60 5.40
24w2d 30.80 3.80 29w0d 47.10 5.40
24w3d 31.30 3.80 29w1d 47.60 5.50
24w4d 31.70 3.90 29w2d 48.10 5.60
24w5d 32.20 3.90 29w3d 48.70 5.60
24w6d 32.60 4.00 29w4d 49.20 5.70
25w0d 33.10 4.00 29w5d 49.70 5.70
25w1d 33.60 4.10 29w6d 50.20 5.80
25w2d 34.10 4.10 30w0d 50.80 5.80
25w3d 34.50 4.20 30w1d 51.30 5.90
25w4d 35.00 4.20 30w2d 51.80 5.90
25w5d 35.50 4.30 30w3d 52.40 6.00
25w6d 36.00 4.30 30w4d 52.90 6.10
26w0d 36.50 4.40 30w5d 53.40 6.10
26w1d 36.90 4.40 30w6d 54.00 6.20
26w2d 37.40 4.50 31w0d 54.50 6.20
26w3d 37.90 4.50 31w1d 55.00 6.30
26w4d 38.40 4.60 31w2d 55.60 6.40
26w5d 38.90 4.60 31w3d 56.10 6.40
26w6d 39.40 4.70 31w4d 56.70 6.50

31w5d 57.20 6.50 36w0d 73.20 8.40
31w6d 57.70 6.60 36w1d 73.70 8.50
32w0d 58.30 6.70 36w2d 74.20 8.60
32w1d 58.80 6.70 36w3d 74.70 8.60
32w2d 59.40 6.80 36w4d 75.20 8.70
32w3d 59.90 6.80 36w5d 75.70 8.80
32w4d 60.40 6.90 36w6d 76.20 8.80
32w5d 61.00 7.00 37w0d 76.80 8.90
32w6d 61.50 7.00 37w1d 77.30 9.00
33w0d 62.10 7.10 37w2d 77.70 9.10
33w1d 62.60 7.10 37w3d 78.20 9.10
33w2d 63.10 7.20 37w4d 78.70 9.20
33w3d 63.70 7.30 37w5d 79.20 9.30
33w4d 64.20 7.30 37w6d 79.70 9.30
33w5d 64.70 7.40 38w0d 80.20 9.40
33w6d 65.30 7.50 38w1d 80.70 9.50
34w0d 65.80 7.50 38w2d 81.10 9.60
34w1d 66.40 7.60 38w3d 81.60 9.60
34w2d 66.90 7.60 38w4d 82.10 9.70
34w3d 67.40 7.70 38w5d 82.60 9.80
34w4d 67.90 7.80 38w6d 83.00 9.80
34w5d 68.50 7.80 39w0d 83.50 9.90
34w6d 69.00 7.90 39w1d 83.90 10.00
35w0d 69.50 8.00 39w2d 84.40 10.10
35w1d 70.10 8.00 39w3d 84.80 10.10
35w2d 70.60 8.10 39w4d 85.30 10.20
35w3d 71.10 8.20 39w5d 85.70 10.30
35w4d 71.60 8.20 39w6d 86.10 10.40
35w5d 72.20 8.30 40w0d 86.60 10.40
35w6d 72.70 8.40

Clavicle (CLAV) : YARKONI
GA Table
Yarkoni, S., et. al. "Clavicular Measurement: A New Biometric Parameter for Fetal Evaluation."
Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine 4:467-470, September, 1985.
CLAV Growth Min Max 2.80 27w6d 22w3d 31w2d
(cm) (wd) (wd) (wd) 2.90 28w5d 23w2d 32w1d
1.10 13w6d 8w3d 17w2d 3.00 29w4d 24w0d 34w0d
1.20 14w4d 9w1d 18w1d 3.10 29w2d 25w6d 34w6d
1.30 14w3d 10w0d 19w6d 3.20 30w1d 26w5d 35w4d
1.40 15w2d 11w6d 20w5d 3.30 31w0d 27w4d 35w3d
1.50 16w1d 12w5d 21w4d 3.40 32w6d 27w3d 36w2d
1.60 18w0d 12w3d 21w3d 3.50 33w5d 28w1d 37w1d
1.70 18w5d 13w2d 22w2d 3.60 33w3d 29w0d 39w0d
1.80 19w4d 14w1d 23w0d 3.70 34w2d 30w6d 39w5d
1.90 19w3d 16w0d 24w6d 3.80 35w1d 31w5d 40w4d
2.00 20w2d 16w6d 25w5d 3.90 37w0d 32w4d 40w3d
2.10 21w1d 17w4d 26w4d 4.00 37w6d 32w2d 41w2d
2.20 22w6d 17w3d 26w2d 4.10 38w4d 33w1d 42w0d
2.30 23w5d 18w2d 27w1d 4.20 38w3d 35w0d 43w6d
2.40 24w4d 19w1d 28w0d 4.30 39w2d 35w6d 44w5d
2.50 24w3d 21w0d 29w6d 4.40 40w1d 36w5d 45w4d
2.60 25w1d 21w5d 30w5d 4.50 41w6d 36w3d 45w3d
2.70 26w0d 22w4d 30w3d

Fetal Growth Table

Yarkoni, S., Schmidt, W., Jeanty, P. et. al. (1985) Clavicle measurement: A new biometric
parameter for fetal evaluation. J. Ultrasound Med., 4, 467-470
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 29 3.00 2.50 3.50
15 1.60 1.10 2.10 30 3.10 2.60 3.60
16 1.70 1.20 2.20 31 3.20 2.70 3.70
17 1.80 1.30 2.30 32 3.30 2.80 3.80
18 1.90 1.40 2.40 33 3.40 2.90 3.90
19 2.00 1.50 2.50 34 3.50 3.00 4.00
20 2.10 1.60 2.60 35 3.60 3.10 4.10
21 2.20 1.70 2.70 36 3.70 3.20 4.20
22 2.30 1.80 2.80 37 3.80 3.30 4.30
23 2.40 1.90 2.90 38 3.90 3.40 4.40
24 2.50 2.00 3.00 39 4.00 3.50 4.50
25 2.60 2.10 3.10 40 4.10 3.60 4.60
26 2.70 2.20 3.20
27 2.80 2.30 3.30

Length of Vertebral (Vertebral) : TOKYO
GA Table
Tokyo University Takashi Okai, et al. Japan Society of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Vol.38, No.8
Vertebral Age ±SD 6.93 32w0d 04w3d
(cm) (wd) (wd) 7.13 33w0d 04w6d
4.05 21w0d 01w0d 7.32 34w0d 05w0d
4.39 22w0d 01w2d 7.51 35w0d 05w3d
4.71 23w0d 01w4d 7.70 36w0d 05w5d
5.01 24w0d 01w5d 7.89 37w0d 06w0d
5.30 25w0d 02w0d 8.08 38w0d 06w2d
5.57 26w0d 02w3d 8.27 39w0d 06w4d
5.82 27w0d 02w5d 8.47 40w0d 06w6d
6.06 28w0d 03w0d
6.30 29w0d 03w3d
6.51 30w0d 03w4d
6.72 31w0d 04w0d

Radius Length (RAD) : MERZ
Fetal Growth Table


27 3.80 3.40 4.30
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
28 4.00 3.60 4.40
12 0.50 0.10 0.80
29 4.10 3.70 4.60
13 0.70 0.40 1.10
30 4.30 3.80 4.70
14 1.00 0.70 1.40
31 4.40 4.00 4.90
15 1.30 0.90 1.60
32 4.50 4.10 5.00
16 1.50 1.20 1.90
33 4.70 4.20 5.10
17 1.80 1.40 2.10
34 4.80 4.30 5.20
18 2.00 1.60 2.40
35 4.90 4.40 5.30
19 2.20 1.90 2.60
36 5.00 4.50 5.40
20 2.50 2.10 2.90
37 5.10 4.60 5.50
21 2.70 2.30 3.10
38 5.10 4.70 5.60
22 2.90 2.50 3.30
39 5.20 4.70 5.70
23 3.10 2.70 3.50
40 5.30 4.80 5.80
24 3.30 2.90 3.70
25 3.50 3.10 3.90
Radius Length (RAD) : JEANTY
Fetal Growth Table

Jeanty, P. “Fetal Limb Biometry” (Letter) Radiology, 147:602, 1983
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 3.90 3.30 4.50

11 0.50 0.50 0.50 28 4.00 3.30 4.50
12 0.70 0.70 0.70 29 4.20 3.60 4.70
13 1.00 1.00 1.00
30 4.30 3.40 4.90
14 1.30 0.80 1.30
31 4.40 3.40 5.30
15 1.50 1.20 1.90
32 4.50 3.70 5.10
16 1.80 0.90 2.10
33 4.60 4.10 5.10
17 2.00 1.10 2.90
34 4.70 3.90 5.30
18 2.20 1.40 2.60
19 2.40 2.00 2.90 35 4.80 3.80 5.70
20 2.70 2.10 2.80 36 4.80 4.10 5.40
21 2.90 2.50 3.20 37 4.90 4.50 5.30
22 3.10 2.40 3.40 38 4.90 4.50 5.30

23 3.20 2.60 3.90 39 5.00 4.60 5.40
24 3.40 2.70 3.80 40 5.00 4.60 5.40
25 3.60 3.10 4.00
Radius Length (RAD) : HANSMANN
Fetal Growth Table


27 3.90 3.30 4.50
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
28 4.00 3.30 4.80
12 0.70 0.70 0.70
29 4.20 3.60 4.70
13 1.00 0.60 1.40
30 4.30 3.60 4.90
14 1.30 0.80 1.70
31 4.40 3.80 5.00
15 1.50 1.10 2.00
32 4.50 3.70 5.30
16 1.80 1.30 2.20
33 4.60 4.10 5.10
17 2.00 1.40 2.60
34 4.70 4.00 5.30
18 2.20 1.50 2.90
35 4.80 4.10 5.40
19 2.40 2.00 2.90
36 4.80 4.90 5.70
20 2.70 2.20 3.20
37 4.90 4.50 5.30
21 2.90 2.40 3.30
38 4.90 4.50 5.40
22 3.10 2.70 3.40
39 5.00 4.50 5.40
23 3.20 2.60 3.90
40 5.00 4.60 5.50
24 3.40 2.60 4.20
25 3.60 3.10 4.10
Mean Abdominal Diameter (MAD) : EIK-NESSH
GA Table
Eik-Nes SH, Jorgensen NP, Grottum P, Lokvik B. Normal range curves for the intrauterine
growth of the fetal abdominal diameters, Submitted JCU.
MAD G.A 5.90 24w1d 8.50 31w3d
(cm) (wd) 6.00 24w3d 8.60 31w5d
3.60 16w0d 6.10 24w5d 8.70 32w0d
3.70 16w3d 6.20 25w0d 8.80 32w2d
3.80 16w6d 6.30 25w2d 8.90 32w4d
3.90 17w3d 6.40 25w4d 9.00 32w6d
4.00 17w6d 6.50 25w6d 9.10 33w1d
4.10 18w2d 6.60 26w1d 9.20 33w4d
4.20 18w4d 6.70 26w3d 9.30 33w6d
4.30 19w0d 6.80 26w5d 9.40 34w1d
4.40 19w3d 6.90 27w0d 9.50 34w3d
4.50 19w5d 7.00 27w2d 9.60 34w6d
4.60 20w1d 7.10 27w3d 9.70 35w1d
4.70 20w3d 7.20 27w5d 9.80 35w3d
4.80 20w5d 7.30 28w0d 9.90 35w6d
4.90 21w1d 7.40 28w2d 10.00 36w1d
5.00 21w3d 7.50 28w4d 10.10 36w4d
5.10 21w5d 7.60 28w6d 10.20 37w0d
5.20 22w0d 7.70 29w1d 10.30 37w3d
5.30 22w2d 7.80 29w3d 10.40 37w6d
5.40 22w5d 7.90 29w5d 10.50 38w2d
5.50 23w0d 8.00 30w0d 10.60 38w5d
5.60 23w2d 8.10 30w2d 10.70 39w1d
5.70 23w4d 8.20 30w4d 10.80 39w5d
5.80 23w6d 8.30 30w6d
8.40 31w1d
Fetal Growth Table

Eik-Nes SH, Jorgensen NP, Grottum P, Lokvik B. Normal range curves for the intrauterine
growth of the fetal abdominal diameters, Submitted JCU.
Age Growth 25w0d 6.20 32w6d 9.00
(wd) (cm) 25w2d 6.30 33w1d 9.10
16w0d 3.60 25w4d 6.40 33w4d 9.20
16w3d 3.70 25w6d 6.50 33w6d 9.30
16w6d 3.80 26w1d 6.60 34w1d 9.40
17w3d 3.90 26w3d 6.70 34w3d 9.50
17w6d 4.00 26w5d 6.80 34w6d 9.60
18w2d 4.10 27w0d 6.90 35w1d 9.70
18w4d 4.20 27w2d 7.00 35w3d 9.80
19w0d 4.30 27w3d 7.10 35w6d 9.90
19w3d 4.40 27w5d 7.20 36w1d 10.00
19w5d 4.50 28w0d 7.30 36w4d 10.10
20w1d 4.60 28w2d 7.40 37w0d 10.20
20w3d 4.70 28w4d 7.50 37w3d 10.30
20w5d 4.80 28w6d 7.60 37w6d 10.40
21w1d 4.90 29w1d 7.70 38w2d 10.50
21w3d 5.00 29w3d 7.80 38w5d 10.60
21w5d 5.10 29w5d 7.90 39w1d 10.70
22w0d 5.20 30w0d 8.00 39w5d 10.80
22w2d 5.30 30w2d 8.10
22w5d 5.40 30w4d 8.20
23w0d 5.50 30w6d 8.30
23w2d 5.60 31w1d 8.40
23w4d 5.70 31w3d 8.50
23w6d 5.80 31w5d 8.60
24w1d 5.90 32w0d 8.70
24w3d 6.00 32w2d 8.80
24w5d 6.10 32w4d 8.90

Mid Cerebral Artery(MCA)-Resistance Index(RI) : SHINOZUKA
Fetal Growth Table
N.Shinozuka & H.Kagawa 1996. http://www.shinozuka.com
Age
10% 90%
(W)
21 0.77 0.86
22 0.78 0.89
23 0.79 0.91
24 0.80 0.92
25 0.80 0.93
26 0.80 0.94
27 0.80 0.94
28 0.80 0.95
29 0.80 0.94
30 0.79 0.94
31 0.79 0.93
32 0.78 0.92
33 0.77 0.91
34 0.76 0.90
35 0.75 0.89
36 0.73 0.88
37 0.72 0.87
38 0.70 0.86
39 0.68 0.85
40 0.66 0.84
41 0.64 0.83
Mid Cerebral Artery(MCA)-Pulsatility Index(PI) : SHINOZUKA
Fetal Growth Table
Age
10% 90%
(W)
21 1.51 2.02
22 1.56 2.19
23 1.59 2.34
24 1.62 2.46
25 1.64 2.54
26 1.65 2.60
27 1.65 2.63
28 1.65 2.63
29 1.63 2.61
30 1.61 2.57
31 1.58 2.52
32 1.54 2.45
33 1.49 2.38
34 1.44 2.30
35 1.38 2.21
36 1.32 2.13
37 1.25 2.05
38 1.19 1.98
39 1.12 1.92
40 1.05 1.87
41 0.99 1.83
Umbilical Artery(UmA)-Resistance Index(RI) : SHINOZUKA
Fetal Growth Table
Age 27 0.60 0.75

10% 90%
(W) 28 0.59 0.75
13 0.76 0.96 29 0.58 0.74
14 0.73 0.92 30 0.57 0.74
15 0.71 0.89 31 0.56 0.73
16 0.69 0.86 32 0.55 0.72
17 0.67 0.84 33 0.54 0.71
18 0.66 0.83 34 0.53 0.70
19 0.65 0.81 35 0.52 0.70
20 0.64 0.80 36 0.51 0.69
21 0.64 0.79 37 0.50 0.68
22 0.63 0.78 38 0.50 0.67
23 0.62 0.78 39 0.50 0.67
24 0.62 0.77 40 0.50 0.67
25 0.61 0.77 41 0.50 0.67
26 0.61 0.76
Umbilical Artery(UmA)- Pulsatility Index(PI) : SHINOZUKA
Fetal Growth Table
Age 27 0.90 1.27

10% 90%
(W) 28 0.88 1.25
13 1.29 2.58 29 0.87 1.23
14 1.20 2.22 30 0.85 1.21
15 1.13 1.97 31 0.82 1.19
16 1.08 1.79 32 0.80 1.16
17 1.05 1.66 33 0.78 1.14
18 1.02 1.57 34 0.75 1.12
19 1.00 1.50 35 0.73 1.10
20 0.99 1.45 36 0.70 1.08
21 0.97 1.41 37 0.68 1.06
22 0.96 1.37 38 0.67 1.05
23 0.95 1.35 39 0.66 1.04
24 0.94 1.33 40 0.66 1.03
25 0.92 1.31 41 0.67 1.03
26 0.91 1.29
Anterior Posterior Abdominal Diameter (APD): BESSIS
GA Table
APD GA ±SD
(cm) (wd) (wd)
2.50 14w0d 01w1d
7.00 28w5d 02w1d
7.50 30w5d 02w3d
8.00 32w4d 03w1d
8.20 33w4d 03w1d
8.40 34w3d 03w4d
8.60 35w5d 04w1d
8.80 37w1d 04w6d

Transverse Abdominal Diameter (TAD) : CFEF
Fetal Growth Table


27 6.70 6.10 7.30
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm)
28 7.00 6.40 7.70
11 1.40 1.10 1.60
29 7.30 6.60 8.00
12 1.70 1.40 2.00
30 7.60 6.90 8.30
13 2.10 1.70 2.40
31 7.90 7.20 8.70
14 2.40 2.00 2.80
32 8.20 7.40 9.00
15 2.80 2.40 3.20
33 8.50 7.70 9.30
16 3.10 2.70 3.60
34 8.80 7.90 9.60
17 3.50 3.00 3.90
35 9.00 8.10 9.90
18 3.80 3.40 4.30
36 9.20 8.30 10.20
19 4.20 3.70 4.60
37 9.50 8.50 10.50
20 4.50 4.00 5.00
38 9.70 8.60 10.80
21 4.80 4.30 5.30
39 9.90 8.70 11.10
22 5.20 4.70 5.70
40 10.20 8.90 11.50
23 5.50 4.90 6.00
41 10.30 8.90 11.70
24 5.80 5.20 6.30
25 6.10 5.50 6.70
Thoracic Circumference (ThC): CHITKARA
Fetal Growth Table

Chitkara U, Rosenberg J, Chervenak FA, et al. "Prenatal Sonographic Assessment of the Fetal
Thorax: Normal Values" American Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology, 156:1069, 1987
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 29 21.00 18.20 23.70
16 9.10 6.40 11.90 30 21.90 19.10 24.60
17 10.00 7.30 12.80 31 22.80 20.00 25.50
18 11.00 8.20 13.70 32 23.70 20.90 26.40
19 11.90 9.10 14.60 33 24.60 21.80 27.30
20 12.80 10.00 15.50 34 25.50 22.80 28.20
21 13.70 11.00 16.40 35 26.40 23.70 29.10
22 14.60 11.90 17.30 36 27.30 24.60 30.00
23 15.50 12.80 18.20 37 28.20 25.50 30.90
24 16.40 13.70 19.10 38 29.10 26.40 31.90
25 17.30 14.60 20.00 39 30.00 27.30 32.80
26 18.20 15.50 21.00 40 30.90 28.20 33.70
27 19.10 16.40 21.90

Fibula Length (FIB): JEANTY
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.10 3.50 4.70
11 0.20 0.20 0.20 28 4.30 3.60 4.70
12 0.50 0.50 0.50 29 4.50 4.00 5.00
13 0.80 0.80 0.80 30 4.70 3.80 5.20
14 1.10 0.60 1.10 31 4.80 4.00 5.70
15 1.40 1.00 1.80 32 5.00 4.00 5.60
16 1.70 0.60 2.20 33 5.10 4.30 5.90
17 1.90 0.70 3.10 34 5.20 4.60 5.60
18 2.20 1.00 2.80 35 5.40 5.10 5.70
19 2.40 1.80 3.00 36 5.50 5.10 5.60
20 2.70 1.80 3.00 37 5.60 5.50 5.80
21 2.90 2.40 3.40 38 5.70 5.40 5.90
22 3.10 2.10 3.70 39 5.80 5.50 6.20
23 3.30 2.30 4.40 40 5.90 5.40 6.20
24 3.50 2.60 4.10
25 3.70 3.30 4.20

Fibula Length (FIB): HANSMANN
Fetal Growth Table

Gynecology" Springer-Verlag,
New York, 1986; P.182
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 27 4.40 3.70 5.00
12 0.60 0.60 0.60 28 4.50 3.80 5.30
13 0.90 0.90 0.90 29 4.70 4.10 5.40
14 1.20 0.60 1.90 30 4.90 4.30 5.60
15 1.50 0.90 2.10 31 5.10 4.20 5.90
16 1.80 1.30 2.30 32 5.20 4.20 6.30
17 2.10 1.30 2.80 33 5.40 4.60 6.20
18 2.30 1.50 3.10 34 5.50 4.60 6.50
19 2.60 1.90 3.30 35 5.70 5.10 6.20
20 2.80 2.10 3.60 36 5.80 5.40 6.30
21 3.10 2.40 3.70 37 5.90 5.40 6.50
22 3.30 2.70 3.90 38 6.10 5.60 6.50
23 3.50 2.80 4.20 39 6.20 5.60 6.70
24 3.70 2.90 4.50 40 6.30 5.90 6.70
25 4.00 3.40 4.50

Nuchal Thickness (NT) : YAGEL
Fetal Growth Table

Yagel S, Anteby EY, Rosen L, et al : Assessment of first tirmester nuchal translucency by daily
reference intervals. Ultrasound Obstet Gynecol 11:262, 1998
0.19 0.11 0.29

Age Meas Min Max 83
(d) (cm) (cm) (cm) 84 0.20 0.12 0.30
0.10 0.04 0.19 85 0.21 0.12 0.31

60
0.10 0.04 0.19 86 0.22 0.13 0.32
61
0.11 0.04 0.19 87 0.22 0.14 0.33
62
0.11 0.04 0.19 88 0.23 0.14 0.34
63
0.11 0.04 0.19 89 0.24 0.15 0.35
64
0.11 0.04 0.19 90 0.25 0.16 0.36
65
0.11 0.05 0.20 91 0.26 0.17 0.38
66
0.12 0.05 0.20 92 0.27 0.18 0.39
67
0.12 0.05 0.20 93 0.28 0.19 0.40
68
0.12 0.05 0.21 94 0.29 0.19 0.41
69
0.13 0.05 0.21 95 0.31 0.20 0.43
70
0.13 0.06 0.22 96 0.32 0.22 0.44
71
0.13 0.06 0.22 97 0.33 0.23 0.46
72
0.14 0.06 0.22 98 0.35 0.24 0.48
73
0.14 0.07 0.23 99 0.36 0.25 0.49
74
0.15 0.07 0.24 100 0.38 0.26 0.51
75
0.15 0.08 0.24 101 0.39 0.28 0.53
76
0.16 0.08 0.25 102 0.41 0.29 0.55
77
0.16 0.08 0.25 103 0.43 0.30 0.57
78
0.17 0.09 0.26 104 0.44 0.32 0.59
79
0.17 0.09 0.27 105 0.46 0.34 0.62
80
81 0.18 0.10 0.28
82 0.19 0.10 0.28

Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI) : MOORE
Fetal Growth Table

Moore TR, Cayle JE: The amniotic fluid index in normal human pregnancy.Am J Obstet Gynecol
162:1168, 1990
Age Meas Min Max 29 14.50 9.20 23.10
(W) (cm) (cm) (cm) 30 14.50 9.00 23.40
16 12.10 7.90 18.50 31 14.40 8.80 23.80
17 12.70 8.30 19.40 32 14.40 8.60 24.20
18 13.30 8.70 20.20 33 14.30 8.30 24.50
19 13.70 9.00 20.70 34 14.20 8.10 24.80
20 14.10 9.30 21.20 35 14.00 7.90 24.90
21 14.30 9.50 21.40 36 13.80 7.70 24.90
22 14.50 9.70 21.60 37 13.50 7.50 24.40
23 14.60 9.80 21.80 38 13.20 7.30 23.90
24 14.70 9.80 21.90 39 12.70 7.20 22.60
25 14.70 9.70 22.10 40 12.30 7.10 21.40
26 14.70 9.70 22.30 41 11.60 7.00 19.40
27 14.60 9.50 22.60 42 11.00 6.90 17.50
28 14.60 9.40 22.80

Head Circumference(HC) / Abdominal Circumference(AC): Campbell
Fetal Growth Table

Campbell HC/AC Fetal Growth Tabel for Uranus
Campbell, s. “Ultasound Measurement of the Fetal Head to Abdomen Circumference Ratio in
the Assessment of Growth Retardation.” Br J Obstetrics and Gynecology, Vol. 84. 165-174.
March 1977.
Age HC /AC Min Max 28 1.13 1.05 1.22
(W) (None) (None) (None) 29 1.10 0.99 1.21
13 1.23 1.14 1.31 30 1.10 0.99 1.21
14 1.23 1.14 1.31 31 1.07 0.96 1.17
15 1.22 1.05 1.39 32 1.07 0.96 1.17
16 1.22 1.05 1.39 33 1.04 0.96 1.11
17 1.18 1.07 1.29 34 1.04 0.96 1.11
18 1.18 1.07 1.29 35 1.02 0.93 1.11
19 1.18 1.09 1.26 36 1.02 0.93 1.11
20 1.18 1.09 1.26 37 0.98 0.92 1.05
21 1.15 1.06 1.25 38 0.98 0.92 1.05
22 1.15 1.06 1.25 39 0.97 0.87 1.06
23 1.13 1.05 1.21 40 0.97 0.87 1.06
24 1.13 1.05 1.21 41 0.96 0.93 1.00
25 1.13 1.04 1.22 42 0.96 0.93 1.00
26 1.13 1.04 1.22
27 1.13 1.05 1.22

Femur Length/Head Circumference (FL/HC) : HADLOCK
Fetal Growth Table

Hadlock FP, Harrist RB, Shah Y, Park SK. "The Femur Length/Head Circumference Relation in
Obstetric Sonography" Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine, 3(10), October 1984, Pp.439-442
Age FL/HC ±SD 29 20.2 1.2
(W) (%) (%) 30 20.3 2.2
15 16.2 1.8 31 20.3 2.0
16 14.9 3.2 32 20.2 2.2
17 16.1 3.0 33 20.7 1.6
18 16.9 2.2 34 20.6 2.4
19 17.2 2.2 35 21.2 2.2
20 18.3 3.0 36 21.1 2.0
21 18.1 4.4 37 21.7 1.8
22 19.3 1.8 38 21.8 1.8
23 20.0 1.6 39 22.0 2.8
24 19.8 2.2 40 21.6 1.8
25 19.5 1.6 41 22.4 1.6
26 19.5 1.8 42 22.0 3.8
27 19.5 1.8
28 19.7 1.8
Estimated Fetal Weight Growth Reference
Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : BRENNER
Fetal Growth Table

A Standard of Fetal Growth for the United States of America. Brenner WE, Edelman DA,
Hendricks CH. American Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology 126;555-564, November 1976
Age Growth Min Max 33 2010 1480 2690
(W) (g) (g) (g) 34 2220 1670 2880
21 410 280 860 35 2430 1870 3090
22 480 320 920 36 2650 2190 3290
23 550 370 990 37 2870 2310 3470
24 640 420 1080 38 3030 2510 3610
25 740 490 1180 39 3170 2680 3750
26 860 570 1320 40 3280 2750 3870
27 990 660 1470 41 3360 2800 3980
28 1150 770 1660 42 3410 2830 4060
29 1310 890 1890 43 3420 2840 4100
30 1460 1030 2100 44 3390 2790 4110
31 1630 1180 2290
32 1810 1310 2500

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : DOUBILET
Fetal Growth Table

Improved Birth Weight Table for Neonates Developed from Gestations Dated by Early
Ultrasonography. Peter M. Doubilet, MD, PhD, Carol B. Benson, MD, Allan S. Nadel, MD,
Steven A. Ringer, MD, PhD. by the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine J Ultrasound
Med 16:241-249, 1997
(W) (g) (g) (g) 35 2383 1919 2959
25 660 490 889 36 2622 2129 3230
26 760 568 1016 37 2859 2340 3493
27 875 660 1160 38 3083 2544 3736
28 1005 765 1322 39 3288 2735 3952
29 1153 884 1504 40 3462 2904 4127
30 1319 1020 1706 41 3597 3042 4254
31 1502 1171 1928 42 3685 3142 4322
32 1702 1338 2167 43 3717 3195 4324
33 1918 1519 2421

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : OSAKA
Fetal Growth Table

Age Growth ±SD 19w5d 327 48
(W) (g) (g) 19w6d 337 49
16w0d 137 29 20w0d 347 50
16w1d 142 29 20w1d 358 51
16w2d 147 29 20w2d 368 53
16w3d 153 29 20w3d 379 54
16w4d 158 30 20w4d 390 56
16w5d 164 30 20w5d 401 57
16w6d 170 30 20w6d 413 58
17w0d 176 31 21w0d 425 60
17w1d 182 31 21w1d 436 61
17w2d 188 32 21w2d 449 63
17w3d 195 33 21w3d 461 65
17w4d 202 33 21w4d 474 66
17w5d 209 34 21w5d 486 68
17w6d 216 35 21w6d 499 69
18w0d 223 35 22w0d 513 71
18w1d 231 36 22w1d 526 73
18w2d 238 37 22w2d 540 74
18w3d 246 38 22w3d 553 76
18w4d 254 39 22w4d 568 78
18w5d 263 40 22w5d 582 80
18w6d 271 41 22w6d 596 81
19w0d 280 42 23w0d 611 83
19w1d 289 43 23w1d 626 85
19w2d 298 44 23w2d 641 87
19w3d 308 45 23w3d 656 89
19w4d 317 46 23w4d 672 91

23w5d 688 92 28w3d 1318 162
23w6d 704 94 28w4d 1340 164
24w0d 720 96 28w5d 1363 167
24w1d 736 98 28w6d 1385 169
24w2d 753 100 29w0d 1407 171
24w3d 770 102 29w1d 1430 174
24w4d 787 104 29w2d 1453 176
24w5d 804 106 29w3d 1476 178
24w6d 822 108 29w4d 1499 181
25w0d 839 110 29w5d 1522 183
25w1d 857 112 29w6d 1545 185
25w2d 875 114 30w0d 1568 188
25w3d 893 116 30w1d 1592 190
25w4d 912 118 30w2d 1615 192
25w5d 930 120 30w3d 1639 195
25w6d 949 123 30w4d 1663 197
26w0d 968 125 30w5d 1687 200
26w1d 987 127 30w6d 1711 202
26w2d 1007 129 31w0d 1735 204
26w3d 1026 131 31w1d 1759 207
26w4d 1046 133 31w2d 1783 209
26w5d 1066 135 31w3d 1808 212
26w6d 1086 138 31w4d 1832 214
27w0d 1106 140 31w5d 1857 217
27w1d 1127 142 31w6d 1881 219
27w2d 1147 144 32w0d 1906 222
27w3d 1168 146 32w1d 1930 224
27w4d 1189 149 32w2d 1955 227
27w5d 1210 151 32w3d 1980 229
27w6d 1232 153 32w4d 2005 232
28w0d 1253 155 32w5d 2029 234
28w1d 1275 158 32w6d 2054 237
28w2d 1296 160 33w0d 2079 239

33w1d 2104 242 36w5d 2720 311
33w2d 2129 244 36w6d 2744 314
33w3d 2154 247 37w0d 2767 317
33w4d 2179 250 37w1d 2791 320
33w5d 2204 252 37w2d 2814 323
33w6d 2229 255 37w3d 2837 326
34w0d 2254 257 37w4d 2860 329
34w1d 2279 260 37w5d 2883 332
34w2d 2304 263 37w6d 2906 335
34w3d 2329 265 38w0d 2928 339
34w4d 2354 268 38w1d 2950 342
34w5d 2379 271 38w2d 2973 345
34w6d 2403 274 38w3d 2995 348
35w0d 2428 276 38w4d 3016 352
35w1d 2453 279 38w5d 3038 355
35w2d 2478 282 38w6d 3059 358
35w3d 2502 285 39w0d 3080 362
35w4d 2527 288 39w1d 3101 365
35w5d 2551 290 39w2d 3121 369
35w6d 2576 293 39w3d 3142 372
36w0d 2600 296 39w4d 3162 376
36w1d 2624 299 39w5d 3182 379
36w2d 2648 302 39w6d 3201 383
36w3d 2672 305 40w0d 3220 387
36w4d 2696 308

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : HADLOCK
Fetal Growth Table

Hadlock, F., Harrist, R.B., Martinez-Poyer, J. "In-utero Analysis of Fetal Growth: A Sonographic
Weight Standard" Radiology. 1991, 181: 129-133.
(W) (g) (g) (g) 26 913 758 1068
10 35 29 41 27 1055 876 1234
11 45 37 53 28 1210 1004 1416
12 58 48 68 29 1379 1145 1613
13 73 61 86 30 1559 1294 1824
14 93 77 109 31 1751 1453 2049
15 117 97 137 32 1953 1621 2285
16 146 121 171 33 2162 1794 2530
17 181 150 212 34 2377 1973 2781
18 223 185 261 35 2595 2154 3036
19 273 227 319 36 2813 2335 3291
20 331 275 387 37 3028 2513 3543
21 399 331 467 38 3236 2686 3786
22 478 398 559 39 3435 2851 4019
23 568 471 665 40 3619 3004 4234
24 670 556 784

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : TOKYO
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (g) (g) (g) 31 1720 1404 2035
18 216 163 269 32 1892 1551 2233
19 279 211 348 33 2068 1701 2434
20 349 264 434 34 2244 1851 2638
21 427 324 529 35 2420 1999 2841
22 513 392 634 36 2592 2143 3041
23 609 469 748 37 2758 2280 3236
24 714 555 873 38 2915 2407 3422
25 830 651 1009 39 3059 2521 3596
26 956 756 1156 40 3187 2618 3756
27 1092 870 1313 41 3296 2695 3896
28 1237 993 1481
29 1391 1123 1658

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : WILLIAMS
Fetal Growth Table

Williams RL, Creasy RK, Cunningham GC, et al: Fetal growth and perinatal viability in California.
Obstet Gynecol 1982 May; 59(5): 624-32
(W) (g) (g) (g) 34 2394 1728 3132
22 513 320 746 35 2628 1974 3333
23 589 365 861 36 2849 2224 3521
24 675 417 989 37 3052 2455 3706
25 773 477 1132 38 3227 2642 3867
26 882 546 1289 39 3364 2790 3994
27 1005 627 1463 40 3462 2881 4080
28 1143 720 1653 41 3524 2946 4127
29 1298 829 1859 42 3589 3011 4185
30 1484 955 2136 43 3626 3044 4221
31 1695 1100 2402 44 3633 3043 4233
32 1920 1284 2673

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : YARKONI (TWINS)
Fetal Growth Table

Yarkoni S, Reece EA, Holford T, et al: Estimated fetal weight in the evaluation of growth in twin
gestations: A prospective longitudinal study. Obstet Gynecol 69:636, 1987.
(W) (g) (g) (g) 28 1244 789 1774
16 154 132 207 29 1395 900 1883
17 215 173 249 30 1546 1011 1992
18 276 214 291 31 1693 1198 2392
19 300 223 412 32 1840 1385 2793
20 324 232 534 33 2032 1491 3000
21 432 275 705 34 2224 1597 3208
22 540 319 876 35 2427 1703 3336
23 598 347 880 36 2631 1809 3465
24 656 376 885 37 2824 2239 3679
25 793 549 1118 38 3017 2669 3894
26 931 722 1352

Estimate Fetal Weight (EFW) : HANSMANN
Fetal Growth Table

(W) (g) (g) (g) 26 1000 626 1374
9 45 44 46 27 1139 711 1567
10 48 45 51 28 1288 802 1774
11 54 48 60 29 1448 899 1997
12 63 54 72 30 1618 1003 2233
13 77 63 91 31 1798 1113 2483
14 96 74 118 32 1984 1226 2742
15 122 90 154 33 2176 1342 3010
16 155 111 199 34 2369 1460 3278
17 197 136 258 35 2557 1575 3539
18 247 166 328 36 2734 1682 3786
19 307 203 411 37 2890 1776 4004
20 377 246 508 38 3016 1849 4183
21 456 294 618 39 3099 1888 4310
22 545 348 742 40 3131 1887 4375
23 644 409 879
24 753 475 1031

Vascular Reference
Resistivity Index
Vsystolic − Vdiastolic
RI =
Vsystolic
Reference : Burns, Peter N., “ The Physical principles of Doppler Spectral Analysis,” Journal of
Clinical Ultrasound, Nov./Dec. 1987, Vol.15, No.9,p.586
Pulsatility Index
PI =
Vmean
SD (systolic, diastolic ratio)
Vsystoic
SD = × 100 (%)
Vdiastolic
Reference : Ameriso S, et al., “Pulseless Transcranial Doppler Finding in Takayasu’s Arteritis,”
J Clin Ultrasound, September 1990; 18:592-6
Gradient
P = 4 × V 2 (mmHg)
where, P : pressure gradient V : the maximum instantaneous velocity(m/sec)
%STA
StenosisArea
% STA = × 100 (%)
BloodVesselArea
Reference : Jacob, Normaan M et, al., “ Duplex Carotid Sonography : Crieteria for Stenosis,
Accuracy, and Pitfalls,” Radiology 154: 385~391, 1985.
%STD
StenosisDi st
% STD = × 100 (%)
BloodVesse lDist
Reference : Taylor K. J. W., Burns P. N., Breslau P., “Clinical Applications of Doppler
Ultrasound”, Raven Press, N.Y., pages 130-136.
Volume Flow(Area)
VolumeFlow = Area × TAM × 60 (ml/min)
Volume Flow(Dist.)
π ×d2
VolumeFlow = × TAM × 60 (ml/min)
4
Urology Reference
Resistivity Index
RI =
Vsystolic
Reference : Burns, Peter N., “The Physical principles of Doppler Spectral Analysis,” Journal of
Clinical Ultrasound, Nov./Dec. 1987, Vol.15, No.9, p.586
Pulsatility Index
PI =
Vmean
Reference : Burns, Peter N., “The Physical principles of Doppler Spectral Analysis,” Journal of
Clinical Ultrasound, Nov./Dec. 1987, Vol.15, No.9, p.585
S/D (systolic, diastolic ratio)
Vsystolic
S/D =
Vdiastolic
Reference : Ameriso S, et al., “Pulseless Transcranial Doppler Finding in Takayasu’s Arteritis,”
J Clin Ultrasound, September 1990; 18:592-6
Gradient
4 × PSV2 (mmHg)
Where, P: pressure gradient V: the maximum instantaneous velocity (m/sec)
Volume Flow (Area)
VolumeFlow = Area × TAM × 60 (ml/min)
Volume Flow (Dist.)
π ×d2
VolumeFlow = × TAM × 60 (ml/min)
4
Prostate Vloume (3 Distances)
4 1stDia 2ndDia 3rdDia

π⋅ ⋅ ⋅ (ml)
3 2 2 2
Prostate Vloume (3 Distances x Factor)
1stDia ⋅ 2ndDia ⋅ 3rdDia ⋅Factor
Prostate Vloume (Ellipsoid)
4 MainDia ⎛ BesideDia ⎞ 2
π⋅ ⋅⎜ ⎟
3 2 ⎝ 2 ⎠
Prostate Vloume (Sum of 20 Disks)
π n
L
Vol. =
4
∑ai =1
2
i ⋅
n
where n = 20
Prostate Spec. Antigen

PSAD = PSA / ProstateVolume
Residual Volume
Vres = Vpost – Vpre
%STA
StenosisArea
%STA = × 100 (%)
BloodVesselArea
Reference : Jacob, Normaan M et, al., “ Duplex Carotid Sonography : Criteria for Stenosis,
Accuracy, and Pitfalls,” Radiology 154: 385~391, 1985.
%STD
StenosisDi st
% STD = × 100 (%)
BloodVesse lDist
Reference : Taylor K. J. W., Burns P. N., Breslau P., “Clinical Applications of Doppler
Fetal Echo Reference
Stroke Volume (SV)
SV = ( EDV − ESV ) (ml)
where, EDV : End Diastolic Volume ESV : End Systolic Volume
Cardiac Output (CO)
( SV * HR )
CO = l/min
1000
Ejection Fraction (EF)
( EDV − ESV )
EF = *100 %
EDV
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B., Tajik, A.J. “The Echo Manual” Boston: Little, Brown and
Company, 1994; 43
Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio (CTAR)
CTAR=(HAPD*HTD)/(ThAPD*ThTD)*100 %
LV Vol. d (LV Volume Diastolic)
7.0
Teichholz EDV = ⋅ LVDd 3
2.4 + LVDd
Reference : Teichholz, L.E., Kreulen, T., Herman, M.V., et. al. “Problems in echocardiographic
volume determinations: echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in the presence or
absence of asynergy.” American Journal of Cardiology, 1976, 37:7.
Cubed EDV = LVDd 3

Reference : Pombo, J.F., et. al. “Left Ventricular Volumes and Ejection Fractioin by
Echocardiography.” Circulation, Vol. XLIII, 482, April, 1971.
Gibson EDV = 0.52 * (0.98 * LVDd + 5.90) * LVDd 2
Reference : “Basic Echocardiography” Iowa Heart Center, Mark J. Harry R.D.C.S., R.V.T. Jan,
1997 p. 30
LV Vol. s (LV Volume Systolic)
7.0
Teichholz ESV = ⋅ LVDs 3
2.4 + LVDs
volume determinations: echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in the presence or
absence of asynergy.” American Journal of Cardiology, 1976, 37:7.
Cubed EDV = LVDs 3
Gibson EDV = 0.52 * (1.14 * LVDs + 4.18) * LVDs 2
1997 p. 30
LV Mass
LVmass(grams) = 1.04 ⋅ [( LVDd + LVPWd + IVSd ) − LVDd ] * 0.8 + 0.6

3 3
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B. The Echo Manual. Boston: Little, Brown and company, 1994,
p.43.
Fractional Shortening of Left Ventricle Internal diameter
A percent change in LV cavity dimension with systolic contraction
LVDd − LVDs
FS = * 100 (%)
LVDd
Harvey Feigenbaum, “ Echocardiography”, 1995 fifth edition
Resistivity Index
RI =
Vsystolic
Pulsatility Index
PI =
Vmean
SD (systolic, diastolic ratio)
Vsystoic
SD = × 100 (%)
Vdiastolic
Reference : Ameriso S, et al., “Pulseless Transcranial Doppler Finding in Takayasu’s Arteritis,” J

Clin Ultrasound, September 1990; 18:592-6
Preload Index
Atrial Reversal Flow/Systolic Flow

Cardiology Reference
Cardiology 2D
BSA(Body Surface Area)
BSA can be calculated by entering patient’s weight and height in New Patient Input Screen.
BSA = H0.725 * W0.425 * 0.007184 (m2)
where, H : centimeters W : kilograms
Reference : Grossman,W.”Cardiac Catheterization and Angiography.” Blood Flow

Measurement : Hemodynamic Principles, 1980. Chapter8, page 90.
Simpson’s method
Simpson’s protocol is used for calculation left ventricular volume from measurements taken in
two scan planes. The calculation of volume for both methods (2-chamber or the 4-chamber
view) results from summation of areas from diameters of 20 cylinders or discs of equal height,
apportioned over the left ventricular length
LV Vol. A/L
LV Volume: Single Plane Area Length
Stroke Volume (SV)

Stroke Volume Index(SI)

SI = SV / BSA
Cardiac Output (CO)

( SV * HR )
CO = l/min
1000
Cardiac Index (CI)
CI = CO / BSA

( EDV − ESV )
EF = *100 %
EDV
Reference : Harvey Feigenbaum, “Echocardiography”, 1995 fifth edition Chapter3 p

144 ,Lea&Febiger
2D Measure
7.0
2.4 + LVDd
Reference : Teichholz, L.E., Kreulen, T., Herman, M.V., et. al. “Problems in
echocardiographic volume determinations: echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in
the presence or absence of asynergy.” American Journal of Cardiology, 1976, 37:7.
Cubed EDV = LVDd 3
Reference : “Basic Echocardiography” Iowa Heart Center, Mark J. Harry R.D.C.S., R.V.T.
Jan, 1997 p. 30
7.0
2.4 + LVDs
Reference : Teichholz, L.E., Kreulen, T., Herman, M.V., et. al. “Problems in
echocardiographic volume determinations: echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in
the presence or absence of asynergy.” American Journal of Cardiology, 1976, 37:7.
Cubed EDV = LVDs 3


Reference : “Basic Echocardiography” Iowa Heart Center, Mark J. Harry R.D.C.S., R.V.T.
Jan, 1997 p. 30
LV Mass
Lvmass (grams) = 1.04 ⋅ [( LVDd + LVPWDd + IVSd ) − LVDd ] * 0.8 + 0.6

3 3
LVDd : Left Ventricle Dimension Diastole

LVPWd : Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Dimension Diastole
LVSd : Interventricular Septal Thickness Diastole

Stroke Volume (SV)
SI = SV / BSA (ml/m2)
Cardiac Output (CO)
( SV * HR )
CO = l/min
1000
Cardiac Index (CI)
CI = CO / BSA (l/m/m2)
( EDV − ESV )
EF = *100 %
EDV
Reference : Harvey Feigenbaum, “ Echocardiography”, 1995 fifth edition Chapter3 p

144 ,Lea&Febiger
Fraction Shortening (FS)
( LVDd − LVDs )
FS = *100 (%)
LVDd
LV MASS
⎡⎛ 5 ⎞ ⎛5 ⎞⎤
LVmass = 105
. * ⎢⎜ * A1 * L1⎟ − ⎜ * A2 * L2⎟ ⎥ grams
⎣⎝ 6 ⎠ ⎝6 ⎠⎦
where, A1 : short axis area, Epicardinal (cm2) A2 : short axis area, Endocardinal (cm2)
L1 : long axis Epicardinal length (cm) L2 : long axis Endocardinal length (cm)
Epicardial Volume
Epi.V = 5/6 x A1 x L1 (ml)
Endocardial Volume
5
Endo.V = * A2 * L2 (ml)
6
Reference : Harvey Feigenbaum, “ Echocardiography”, 1995 fifth edition Chapter3 p 158,
Lea&Febiger
Myocardial Thickness
Tmy = Epi. Area / π − Endo. Area / π (cm)

LV Mass Index
LV Mass Index = LV Mass / BSA (g/m2)
Cardiology C mode
MV Regurg, TV Regurg
PISA(Proximal Isovelocity Surface Area) Radius
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B., Tajik, A.J. The Echo Manual. Boston: Little, Brown
and Company, 1994, p.106.
Schmailzl, K., Omerod, O., Editors. Ultrasound in Cardiology. Blackwell Science, 1994,
p.125.
PISA-Radios is the radial distance of the isovelocity shell from the orifice (Figure -
Regurgitant Flow-PISA Radius)
PISA = 2πr2
where : PISA = Proximal Isovelocity surface area in cm2

r = Radial distance of the isovelocity shell from the orifice in cm
Figure - Regurgitant Flow-PISA Radius
PISA(Proximal Isovelocity Surface Area) Alias Velocity
Reference : Schmailzl. K., Omerod, O., Editors. Ultrasound in Cardiology. Blackwell

Science, 1994, p.125.
PISA-Alias Velocity is the peak velocity of the regurgitant jet on the Doppler display
(Figure – Regurgitant Flow-PISA Alias Velocity)
Figure – Regurgitant Flow-PISA Alias Velocity
Regurgitant Volume Flow Rate (Rate)
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B., Tajik, A.J. The Echo Manual. Boston:Little, Brown and
Company, 1994, p. 106
Rate is calculated in milliliters/sec.
Rate = PISA*Vr
Where: PISA = Proximal isovelocity surface area in cm^2
Vr = Color flow velocity at radius r in cm/sec measured at the mitral orifice on

the Color display
Effective Regurgitant Orifice(ERO)
Company, 1994, pp. 108-109
Vmr is the peak velocity of the mitral regurgitant jet measured on the Doppler display.
ERO = Rate/Vmr
Regurgitant Volume (Vol)
Company, 1994, pp. 108-109
Vol = ERO*VTImr
Where: Vol = Regurgitant volume in milliliters
ERO = Effective Regurgitant area in cm^2
VTImr = Velocity integral of the Regurgitant flow measured on the Doppler
display
Cardiology M mode
Left Ventricle
Reference : Harvey Feigenbaum, “ Echocardiography”, 1995 fifth edition

7.0
2.4 + LVDd
volume determinations: echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in the presence or absence
of asynergy.” American Journal of Cardiology, 1976, 37:7.
Cubed EDV = LVDd 3
1997 p. 30
7.0
2.4 + LVDs
volume determinations: echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in the presence or absence
of asynergy.” American Journal of Cardiology, 1976, 37:7.
Cubed EDV = LVDs 3
1997 p. 30
Stroke Volume (SV)

SI = SV / BSA (ml/m2)
Cardiac Output (CO)
( SV * HR )
CO = l/min
1000
Cardiac Index (CI)
CI = CO / BSA (l/m/m2)
( EDV − ESV )
EF = *100 %
EDV
Reference : Harvey Feigenbaum, “ Echocardiography”, 1995 fifth edition Chapter3 p
144 ,Lea&Febiger
Fraction Shortening (FS)

( LVDd − LVDs )
FS = *100 (%)
LVDd
LV Mass
LVmass(grams) = 1.04 ⋅ [( LVDd + LVPWDd + IVSd ) − LVDd ] * 0.8 + 0.6

3 3
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B. The Echo Manual. Boston: Little, Brown and company, 1994,
p.43.
LV Mass Index
LV Mass Index = LV Mass / BSA (g/m2)
MV (Mitral Valve)
Definition for the Mitral Valve
D : end of systolic, immediately before the opening of the Mitral Valve
E : the arterial leaflet of the Mitral valve open, it peaks at E
F : lowest point of the initial diastolic closing
A : In atrial systole, blood is propelled through the Mitral orifice and the Mitral leaflets reopen
the peak of this phase of Mitral valve motion is indicated as A
C : complete closure occurs after the onset of ventricular systole
Mitral Valve D-E Excursion (unit : cm)
Distance between the onset of the opening of the Mitral valve at D and the maximum opening of
the anterior Mitral valve leaflet at E
Mitral Valve D-E Slope (unit : cm/sec)
Automatically calculated from the D-E excursion the rate of change that exists between two
point(D, E)
Mitral Valve E-F Slope (unit : cm/sec)
The rate of change that exists between two point(E, F)
EPSS ( Mitral Valve E Point Septal Separation ) ( unit : cm)
Distance between the Mitral Valve E point and posterior edge of the interventricular septum at
the same point in time
A-C interval (unit : msec)
The distance between the A point and the C point
Figure - Mitral Valve M mode Waveform
Ao/LA
Aortic Root Diameter (unit:cm) : Ao Root Dia.
The distance between the leading echo of the anterior aortic wall and the leading echo
of the posterior aortic wall at R wave of the electrocardiogram
Aortic Valve Cusp Separation (Ao Cusp Sep.)
The distance between the trailing echo of the anterior aortic valve leaflet and the leading echo of
the posterior aortic valve leaflet in early diastole
Left Atrial Diameter (unit:cm) : LA Dia.
The distance between the trailing edge of the posterior aortic wall echo and the leading edge of
the posterior left atrial wall echo at the level of aortic wall at the R wave of the electrocardiogram.
Cardiology Doppler
Mitral Valve, Tricuspid Valve

Pressure Gradient
Pg = 4 × V 2 (mmHg)
where, V : Velocity (m/sec)
PHT ; Pressure Half Time
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B., Tajik, A.J. The Echo Manual. Boston: Little, Brown and
Company, 1994, p.59-60
Pressure half-time (PHT) is the time it takes for the peak pressure gradient to fall to half to half
of its peak value. DT is deceleration time in centimeters per second form the peak velocity to the
baseline.
Mitral Valve area
MVA = 220 PHT (cm2)
where ; PHT is Pressure Half Time (milliseconds)
Reference : John H. Phillipse, “ Practical Quantitative Doppler Echocardiography”, p47,

chapter6, CRC press, 1991
VTI(Velocity Time Integral)
VTI = Mean velocity(cm/sec) * Ejection time(sec) = L (cm)
ACC(Acceleration), DEC(Deceleration)
V 2 −V1 2
T 2 − T1 ( m/sec )
cm/s E
AT DT sec
AT :Acceleration Time, DT : Deceleration Time
E point : Early Diastolic Flow, A point : Atrial contraction
Aortic Valve, LVOT Doppler

HR(Heart Rate)
HR = #beats*60 /time (bpm : bit/minute)
CONT(Continuity Equation)
When there is a constant flow in a flow channel with a Stenosis, the flow volume at the Stenosis
portion equals that at nonstenotic portions .
This equation is valid not only in a constant flow, but also in a pulsality flow channel .
SV1 = SV2
where, SV1 : stroke volume in the nonstenotic area

SV2: stroke volume in the stenotic area
V1
AVA = LVOTareaX cm2
V2
where, AVA(1) : Aortic Valve Area by Velocity
AVA(2) : Aortic Valve Area by VTI
LVOTarea : π * DiaLVOT2 / 4
VTI1 : Left Ventricle output track VTI
VTI2 : Aortic valve VTI
V1 : Left Ventricle output track velocity
V2: Aortic valve velocity
Figure - Continuity Equation
CSA(Cross Sectional Area)
Area = π × ( D 2 ) 2
where, D: diameter
Pulmonic Veins
Reference : Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B., Tajik, A.J. The Echo Manual. Boston: Little, Brown and
Company, 1994, p.48
Diastolic Velocity
Velocity measured at diastole.
Systolic Velocity
Velocity measured at systole.
Artrial Reversal Velocity (A. Rev Vel)
Atrial reversal velocity is the peak velocity of the atrial reversal component.
Pulmonary Atrial Reversal Duration (A. Rev Dur)
Pulmonary atrial flow reversal duration is the time between the diastolic component of
pulmonary venous flow and the closure of the mitral valve.
Sys/Dia (Systole/Diastole)
Ratio of the velocity measured at systole and the velocity measured at diastole.
Shunt Ratio QP : QS
The equations that follows area derieve dfrom the following source:
Oh, J.K., Seward, J.B., Tajik, A.J. The Echo Manual, Boston: Little, Brown, and Company, 1994.
QP : QS = Pulmonic Cardiac Output / Sysemic Cardiac Output
CO = Pulm SV * Pulm HR / 1000
Outflow Trace Area = π * (Pulm Dia / 2)2

Dim of Aaprt the –12 dB OUTPUT BEAM DIMENSIONS. The active

apertu-re dimensions in the azimuthal and elevational
Acoustic Power Tables directions. (cent-imeters). For scanned modes, the ‘X_dim’ is
the length of the entire scanned aperture.
fawf the ACOUSTIC WORKING FREQUENCY. Center frequency.

IEC Tables (megahertz)
▐ Symbols and Definitions Focal Length The nominal focal points, azimuthal (FLx) and elevational (FLy),
for the operating condition. (centimeters).
Standard 60601-2-37 published by the International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) requires the declaration of acoustic output information. The definitions and Ipa,α at max. MI the ATTENUATED PULSE-AVERAGE INTENSITY at the
units of the symbols in those tables are listed below, and are consistent with IEC depth of reported MI, zat_max_Ipi,α . (watts per square
60601-2-37 and IEC 62359. Definitions for CAPITALIZED parameters, if not centimeter).
found here, can be found in the reference documents.
All table entries have been obtained at the operating conditions that give rise to Ita, α (z) the ATTENUATED TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY at
the Maximum Index Value (shown in the second row of the table). Due to the axial distance z. (milliwatts per square centimeter)
complexities of the system user interface, it may be difficult to exactly replicate
MI the displayed parameter representing potential cavitation bio-
the declared condition. Contact Medison for further information as needed.
effects. (unit-less)
Note that Medison provides information for both of the TIS non-scanned columns.
2 2
The ‘Aaprt≤1’ (cm ) column is an ‘at_surface’ TIS value and the ‘Aaprt>1’ (cm ) P the time-average ultrasonic OUTPUT POWER radiated by the
column is a ‘below surface’ TIS value. The tables will provide additional transducer for the transmit pattern(s) associated with the
informational flags (‘**’) in the event that the largest TIS non-scanned value is an report-ed Index. For TIS_non_scan and TIB_non_scan this is
2
‘at_surface’ value with Aaprt > 1 cm , or if the largest TIS non-scanned value is a the total acoustic power of the non-scanned beam(s). For TIC
2
‘below_surface’ value with Aaprt ≤ 1 cm case (very rare). it is the total acoustic power of the contributing modes (which
will be list-ed separately, for the reader to sum). The reported
Aaprt the –12 dB OUTPUT BEAM AREA, or transmit aperture area,
maximum TIS_scan value may (likely) come from a
of the ultrasonic beam. Derived from the –12 dB OUTPUT
combinational mode. In this case, P = P1 + P1x1. P1 is the
BEAM DIMENSIONS. (centimeters squared)
BOUNDED OUTPUT POWER (the maximum power emitted
deq at max. Ipi the EQUIVALENT BEAM DIAMETER at the point where the from a one cm width of the active (scanned) transmit aperture
free-field (non-attenuated), PULSE INTENSITY INTEGRAL is a of the transducer in the scan plane direction) of each the
maximum (centimeters). scanned transmit modes. For instance in 2D color mode
P1_2D and P1_Col will be listed. P1x1 is the ma-ximum
deq(zb) the EQUIVALENT BEAM DIAMETER at axial distance zb. contribution from any one square centimeter of the non-
0.5
Equal to [(4/п)(Pα(zb) / Ita,α(zb))] . (centimeters) scanned transmit mode(s) active aperture. (milliwatts).
206 Acoustic Power Tables
Pα(z) the (ultrasonic) ATTENUATED OUTPUT POWER at axial dist- zb the distance where TIB_non-scan is determined. For non-
ance zs, for the non-scanned modes or TRANSMIT PATTERNS. scanned modes, Distance along the beam axis to the plane
(milliwatts) where the product of the ATTENUATED OUTPUT POWER
and ATTENUATED TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY (Pα(z)
Pr,α the ATTENUATED PEAK-RAREFACTIONAL ACOUSTIC x Ita,α(z)) maximizes. (centimeters)
PRESSURE associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to
the reported value of MI. (megapascals) zbp value equal to 1.5 times the EQUIVALENT APERTURE
Pr at max. Ipi the PEAK-RAREFACTIONAL ACOUSTIC PRESSURE at the DIAMETER (Deq). Also equals 1.69 * Aaprt . (centimeters)
point where the free-field (non-attenuated), PULSE INTENSITY
zs the distance where TIS_non-scan is determined. The axial
INTEGRAL is a maximum (megapascals).
distance corresponding to the location of max[min(Pα(z),
2
prr the PULSE REPETITION RATE associated with the transmit Ita,α(z)x1 cm )], where z >= zbp. (centimeters)
pattern giving rise to the reported value of MI (pulses per
second).
▐ Explanatory Notes
TIB the BONE THERMAL INDEX for applications, such as fetal
(a) This index is not required to this operating mode.
(second and third trimester) or neonatal cephalic (through the
(b) This probe is not intended for adult transcranial uses.
fontanelle), in which the ultrasound beam passes through soft
(c) This formulation for TIS is less than that for an alternate formulation in this
tissue and a focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone.
mode.
(unit-less)
(d) The maximum index value is less than 1.0
TIC the CRANIAL BONE THERMAL INDEX.
* If the MI comes from a scanning mode Transmit Pattern (pulse), the ‘prr’
TISscan the SOFT TISSUE THERMAL INDEX in a scanning mode. listed is the average per second for the 'worst case' scan line. ‘prr’ for
(unit-less) scanning modes is the product of the frame rate and the number of pulse
per line of the Transmit Pattern .
TISnon-scan the SOFT TISSUE THERMAL INDEX in a non-auto scanning
** The max TIS unscanned value is an ‘at_surface’ value and occurs for
mode. (unit-less)
aperture > 1.0 cm^2, OR The max TIS unscanned value is a
td the PULSE DURATION associated with the TRANSMIT ‘below_surface’ value and occurs for aperture <= 1.0 cm^2.
PATTERN giving rise to the reported value of MI. + The max TIB for this combinational mode = the at_surface TIS_scanned
(microseconds) value. The non-scanned_TIB value indicated is the below_surface max. A
“+” is used when the TIB value is less than the TIS_scanned value for the
z_at_max_Ipi,α the axial distance from the transducer where the operating condition.
ATTENUATED PULSE INTENSITY INTEGRAL Ipi,α is
maximum.
▐ C1-4EC
C1-4EC: 2D& 2D+M mode C1-4EC: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA
TIS TIB TIC TIS TIB TIC
Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non- Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non-
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Maximum Index Value 1.56 1.43 0.04** 0.08 0.19+ (b) Maximum Index Value 1.55 1.59 0.76** 1.46 4.09 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 2.29 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 2.52 - - - - -
P (mW) - 2D P1:140 M P1x1:4.37 M P:6.23 (b) 2D P1:8.33 PD PD
P
(z ),I α (mW) - (b)
Min.of [Pα s ta, Col P1:120 P1x1:58.4 P:238
(mW) - - - 8.18 - -
α
(zs)x1cm^2]
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
zs (mW) - - - 150 - -
(cm) - - - 4.20 - - (zs)x1cm^2]
Associated zbp (cm) - - - 4.16 - - zs (cm) - - - 3.84 - -

Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 4.74 - Associated zbp (cm) - - - 3.77 - -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 4.02 - - - - - Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 4.74 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.37 - Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 2.04 - - - - -
fawf (MHz) 2.15 2.15 2.14 2.12 2.14 (b) deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.67 -
X (cm) 2.74 0.86 4.32 1.63 (b) fawf (MHz) 2.66 2D:1.94 Col:2.65 2.72 2.04 2.04 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 (b) X (cm) 2D:4.27 Col:2.74 0.86 3.55 2.69 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
td (µsec) 0.80 - - - - - Y (cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 (b)
Other prr (pulses/sec) 58.2* - - - - - td (µsec) 0.90 - - - - -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.81 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 65.7* - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.36 - Pr at max. Ipi
Information (MPa) 2.85 - - - - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 288 deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.56 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 17.5 - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 266
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 5.00 5.00 - - FLx (cm) - - 3.50 14.5 - -
Focal Length
- - FLy (cm) - - 5.00 5.00 - -
Control 1 MI - -
Operating Control 2 TIS_as Control 1 MI
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 5 TIB_bs Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:58.18

Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:103.0 Control 1: 2D+Color mode, 2D:1.8Mhz, Col:2.8Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm, FR:6.57
Control 3: 2D+M mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:31.10 Control 2: 2D+Color mode, 2D:1.8Mhz, Col:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm, FR:6.89
Control 4: 2D+M mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Focus:17.5Cm , FR:13.83 Control 3: Triple mode, 2D:1.8Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Col:2.0Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm, FR:1.81
Control 5: Triple mode, 2D:1.8Mhz , PD:2.0Mhz, Col:2.0Mhz, Focus:11.0Cm, FR:1.69
C1-4EC: Pulsed Doppler &2D+Pulsed Doppler ▐ C2-6IC

C2-6IC: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non-
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Maximum Index Value 1.53 0.85 0.94** 2.13 4.97 (b)
Maximum Index Value 1.44 1.77 0.06 0.09 0.15+ (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 2.18 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 2.31 - - - - -
P 2D P1:5.33 PD
(mW) - PD P: 376 (b) P (mW) - 2D P1:132 M P1x1:4.57 M P:4.47 (b)
PD P1x1:75.1 P1x1:73.3
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α (mW) - - - 6.97 - -
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 218 - - (zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 3.84 - - (cm) - - - 3.20 - -
Associated zbp
Associated zbp (cm) - - - 3.77 - - (cm) - - - 3.14 - -
Acoustic zb
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 4.02 - (cm) - - - - 3.50 -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 3.66 - - - - - Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 3.50 - - - - -

deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.96 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.33 -
2D:1.93 fawf (MHz) 2.57 2.82 2.81 2.79 2.69 (b)
fawf (MHz) 2.05 2.68 2.05 2.05 (b)
PD:2.72 X (cm) 2.31 0.81 2.87 0.94 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
2D:6.14 Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
X (cm) 2.11 3.55 3.55 (b)
Dim of Aaprt PD:0.86
td (µsec) 0.68 - - - - -
Y (cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 (b)
Other prr (pulses/sec) 58.7* - - - - -
td (µsec) 1.59 - - - - - Pr at max. Ipi
Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.32 -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.49 - - - - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 313
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.82 -
FLx (cm) - - 5.00 17.5 - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 240 Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - -
FLx (cm) - - 8.80 14.5 - -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 5.00 5.00 - - - -
- - Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI Control 2 TIS_as

Operating Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U Control 4 TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.0Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:2.4Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:58.68
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:1.8Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm, FR:7.27 Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:2.8Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:103.9
Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:8.8Cm Control 3: 2D+M mode , 2D:2.8Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:31.37
Control 5: 2D+M mode , 2D:2.6Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:31.37
C2-6IC: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA C2-6IC: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Maximum Index Value 1.42 1.67 0.88 1.06 2.90 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.38 1.03 1.04 1.64 3.83 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 2.30 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 2.24 - - - - -
P 2D P1:3.44 PD PD P 2D P1:5.46 PD PD P:
(mW) - (b) (mW) - (b)
Col P1:130 P1x1:70.9 P:70.9 PD P1x1:93.9 P1x1:83.6 221
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 86.3 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 134 - -
zs zs
(cm) - - - 2.80 - - (cm) - - - 2.80 - -
Associated zbp (cm) - - - 2.74 - - Associated zbp (cm) - - - 2.74 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.30 - Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 4.40 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.42 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.58 -
2D:2.51 2D:2.49
fawf (MHz) 2.62 2.60 2.58 2.60 (b) fawf (MHz) 2.61 2.61 2.57 2.57 (b)
Col:2.63 PD:2.58
2D:3.96 2D:5.99
X (cm) 0.50 2.18 0.50 (b) X (cm) 0.69 2.18 2.18 (b)
Dim of Aaprt Col:2.22 Dim of Aaprt PD:1.75
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b) Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
td (µsec) 1.01 - - - - - td (µsec) 1.42 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 76.0* - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.28 - - - - - Information (MPa) 2.48 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.42 - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.56 -
2
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 210 Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm ) 183
FLx (cm) - - 2.00 11.0 - - Focal FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - - Length FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - -
- - - -
Control 1 MI Operating Control 1 MI

Operating Control 2 TIS_as Control Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 4 TIS_bs Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control 1: 2D+Color mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Col:2.6Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:5.85 Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.6Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm
Control 2: 2D+Color mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Col:2.6Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:6.38 Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:2.2Mhz, PD:2.6Mhz, Focus:8.8Cm, FR:5.58
Control 3: Triple mode, 2D:2.2Mhz, PD:2.6Mhz, Col:2.6Mhz, Focus:11.0Cm, FR:1.55 Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.6Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm
▐ C3-7IM C3-7IM:: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

C3-7IM: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non-
Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non- Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.20 1.25 0.80** 0.71 2.41 (b)
Maximum Index Value 1.27 0.90 1.36** 1.32 2.89 (b) Pr,α (MPa) 1.98 - - - - -
P 2D P1:4.11 PD PD
Pr,α (MPa) 2.14 - - - - - (mW) - (b)
Col P1:89.0 P1x1:59.6 P:56.5
P 2D P1:3.36 PD P:
(mW) - PD P1x1:102 (b) Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
PD P1x1:70.5 94.3 (mW) - - - 53.4 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
(mW) - - - 99.0 - - zs
(zs)x1cm^2] (cm) - - - 1.94 - -
zs Associated zbp (cm) - - - 2.33 - -
(cm) - - - 1.58 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.56 -
Associated zbp (cm) - - - 2.08 - -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 0.60 - - - - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.44 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.38 -
2D:2.56
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.52 - fawf (MHz) 2.71 2.81 2.81 2.84 (b)
Col:2.82
fawf (MHz) 2.83 2D:2.71 PD:2.81 2.80 2.80 2.83 (b)
2D:6.91
X (cm) 2D:6.91 PD:1.01 1.01 1.37 0.65 (b) X (cm) 1.01 1.73 0.65 (b)
Dim of Aaprt Col:4.68
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 (b) Y (cm) 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 (b)
td (µsec) 1.24 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.69 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 4.37* - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
Information (MPa) 2.46 - - - - - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.09 - - - - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 200 Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 112 -
FLx (cm) - - 5.00 6.80 - - FLx (cm) - - 5.00 8.80 - -

Focal Length Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 7.50 7.50 - - FLy (cm) - - 7.50 7.50 - -
- - - - -
Control 1 MI Control 1 MI
Control 2 TIS_as
Control 2 TIS_as Operating
Operating Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 3 TIS_as_U Control
Control Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 1: 2D+Color mode , 2D:2.6Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm , FR:4.37
Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:2.6Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm, FR:7.27
Control 3: Triple mode, 2D:2.6Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Col:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm, FR:1.47
C3-7IM:: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ C4-9ED

TIS TIB TIC C4-9ED: 2D& 2D+M mode
Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non- TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non-
Maximum Index Value 1.27 0.90 1.36** 1.32 2.89 (b) Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Pr,α (MPa) 2.14 - - - - - Maximum Index Value 1.52 1.17 0.02 0.01** 0.05+ 1.34
P 2D P1:3.36
(mW) - PD P1x1:102 PD P: 94.3 (b) Pr,α (MPa) 3.39 - - - - -
PD P1x1:70.5
P 2D M
(z ),I α (mW) - M P:0.79 M P:52.2
Min.of [Pα s ta,
(mW) - - - 99.0 - - P1:50.1 P1x1:0.80
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs (mW) - - - 0.55 - -
(cm) - - - 1.58 - - (zs)x1cm^2]
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.44 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.24 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.52 -
2D:2.71
fawf (MHz) 2.83 2.80 2.80 2.83 (b) deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.23 -
PD:2.81
fawf (MHz) 4.96 4.92 4.96 4.96 4.91 4.92
2D:6.91
X (cm) - 1.01 1.37 0.65 (b) X (cm) 1.24 0.59 0.59 0.59 1.24
Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) - 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 (b) Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
td (µsec) 1.24 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.20 - - - - -

Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 35.8* - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi Pr at max. Ipi
Information (MPa) 2.46 - - - - - Information (MPa) 4.13 - - - - -
2
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm ) 200 - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 526 -
Focal FLx (cm) - - 5.00 6.80 - - FLx (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
Focal Length
Length FLy (cm) - - 7.50 7.50 - - FLy (cm) - - 3.80 3.80 - -
- - - - - -
Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Operating Control 2 TIS_as TIC_as
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs

Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:6.2Mhz , Focus:1.5Cm , FR:66.48
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:2.6Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm, FR:7.27 Control 3: 2D+M mode , 2D:7.7Mhz , Focus:1.5Cm , FR:35.76
Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm
C4-9ED 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA C4-9ED: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Maximum Index Value 1.40 1.41 0.77 0.46** 1.94 1.68 Maximum Index Value 1.62 1.03 1.16 0.72** 1.85 1.19
Pr,α (MPa) 3.14 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 3.43 - - - - -
P 2D P1:1.25 PD PD 2D P1:2.06 P 2D P1:1.52 PD PD P: PD

(mW) - (mW) -
Col P1:57.2 P1x1:32.2 P:29.3 Col P1:94.4 PD P1x1:26.3 P1x1:49.0 27.7 P:45.2
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
(mW) - - - 19.3 - - (mW) - - - 30.3 - -
α (zs)x1cm^2] (zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 1.48 - - (cm) - - - 1.40 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.21 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.21 -
2D:4.93 2D:4.93 2D:4.68
fawf (MHz) 5.05 5.04 5.04 4.42 fawf (MHz) 4.46 4.96 4.96 4.43 4.96
Col:5.08 Col:5.05 PD:5.03
2D:1.91 2D:2.69
X (cm) 1.18 1.18 0.80 2.69 X (cm) 1.60 1.60 0.80 1.18
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
td (µsec) 0.50 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.80 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 64.1* - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
2
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 487 - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm ) 562 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - - Focal FLx (cm) - - 4.00 4.00 - -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 3.80 3.80 - - Length FLy (cm) - - 3.80 3.80 - -
- - - - - -
Control 1 MI TIC_as Control 1 MI

Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIC_as
Control 1: 2D+Color mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, Col:5.1Mhz, Focus:1.5Cm, FR:4.93 Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:4.4Mhz , Focus:1.5Cm
Control 2: 2D+Color mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, Col:5.1Mhz, Focus:1.5Cm, FR:7.94 Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, PD:5.1Mhz, Focus:4.0Cm, FR:7.33
Control 4: Triple mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, PD:4.4Mhz, Col:4.4Mhz, Focus:2.0Cm, FR:1.52 Control 4: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, PD:4.4Mhz, Focus:2.0Cm, FR:7.22
▐ C5-2EL C5-2EL: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

C5-2EL: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.43 1.81 0.87** 1.40 2.89 (b)
Maximum Index Value 1.54 2.24 0.02** 0.04 0.06+ (b) Pr,α (MPa) 2.29 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 2.37 - - - - - P 2D P1:4.77 PD

(mW) - PD P:162 (b)
P Col P1:146 P1x1:72.2
(mW) - 2D P1:191 M P1x1:1.68 M P:2.92 (b)
(z ),I α
Min.of [Pα s ta, α Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(mW) - - - 2.67 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 117 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 3.50 - - (cm) - - - 1.90 - -
Associated zbp
Acoustic zb
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 5.20 - (cm) - - - - 3.60 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.40 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.68 -
fawf (MHz) 2.38 2.46 2.87 2.75 2.74 (b) 2D:2.25

fawf (MHz) 2.54 2.55 2.52 2.52 (b)
X (cm) 2.14 0.82 2.88 1.40 (b) Col:2.53
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) 2D:4.00
X (cm) 0.82 1.81 1.81 (b)
td (µsec) 0.85 - - - - -
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 3.13 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.98 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.38 - Other prr (pulses/sec) 67.6* - - - - -

Pr at max. Ipi
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 201 Information (MPa) 2.62 - - - - -
FLx (cm) - - 5.00 17.5 - - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.48 -

Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 196
FLx (cm) - - 5.00 11.0 - -
- - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
Control 1 MI
- -
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control 1 MI
Operating
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 5 TIB_bs Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs

C5-2EL: Pulsed Doppler &2D+Pulsed Doppler ▐ EC4-9ES

EC4-9ES: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.37 1.16 1.32 1.85 3.61 (b) Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Pr,α (MPa) 2.18 - - - - - Maximum Index Value 1.34 1.41 0.03 0.02** 0.07+ (b)
P 2D P1:10.6 PD PD PD P: Pr,α (MPa) 3.16 - - - - -

(mW) - (b)
P1x1:113 P1x1:108 207 M
P (mW) - 2D P1:47.1 M P:0.98 (b)
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α P1x1:0.99
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 155 - -
zs (mW) - - - 0.64 - -
(cm) - - - 3.00 - - (zs)x1cm^2]

2D:2.19 deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.20 -
fawf (MHz) 2.54 2.55 2.51 2.51 (b)
PD:2.51
fawf (MHz) 5.55 6.30 6.30 6.30 5.24 (b)
2D:5.27
X (cm) 0.66 1.81 1.81 (b) X (cm) 1.18 0.56 0.56 0.56 (b)
Dim of Aaprt PD:1.81 Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 0.24 - - - - -
td (µsec) 1.27 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.20 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.54 -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 409 -
FLx (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - - Focal Length
Focal Length FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
- - -
- -
Operating Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI
Operating Control Control 2 TIS_as
Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
Control Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 4 TIS_bs
EC4-9ES: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA EC4-9ES: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler

Maximum Index Value 1.43 1.31 0.64 0.38** 1.39 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.49 0.95 0.97 0.56 1.83 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 3.22 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 3.14 - - - - -
P 2D P1:1.09 PD P 2D P1:1.35 PD
(mW) - PD P:26.3 (b) (mW) - PD P: 37.8 (b)
Col P1:52.4 P1x1:26.3 PD P1x1:32.5 P1x1:40.4
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 15.6 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 23.4 - -
zs zs
(cm) - - - 1.47 - - (cm) - - - 1.47 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.24 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.28 -
2D:5.36 2D:5.11
Col:5.14 PD:5.08
2D:1.82 2D:2.56
X (cm) 1.16 1.16 1.16 (b) X (cm) 1.56 2.16 1.16 (b)
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.50 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.83 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 63.8* - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec 999 - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 446 - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 310 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - - FLx (cm) - - 4.00 5.50 - -
FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - - FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
- - - - -
Operating Control 1 MI Operating Control 1 MI

Control Control 2 TIS_as Control Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U
▐ EC4-9IS EC4-9IS: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

EC4-9IS: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.51 1.15 0.59 0.36** 1.23 (b)
Maximum Index Value 1.49 1.02 0.05 0.03** 0.10+ (b) Pr,α (MPa) 3.33 - - - - -
P 2D P1:2.15 PD PD
Pr,α (MPa) 3.21 - - - - - (mW) - (b)
Col P1:48.0 P1x1:25.8 P:19.1
P 2D M
(mW) - M P:1.29 (b) Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
P1:36.8 P1x1:1.67 (mW) - - - 15.7 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
(mW) - - - 1.13 - - zs
(zs)x1cm^2] (cm) - - - 1.50 - -
zs Associated zbp (cm) - - - 1.49 - -
(cm) - - - 1.00 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 2.20 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 0.90 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.17 -
2D:4.60
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.21 - fawf (MHz) 4.86 4.81 4.81 4.85 (b)
Col:4.85
fawf (MHz) 4.66 5.81 5.70 5.70 4.66 (b)
2D:1.85
X (cm) - 1.26 0.54 0.54 0.41 (b) X (cm) 1.30 1.30 0.97 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) - 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.38 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.60 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 37.4* - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 82.8* - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
FLx (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - - FLx (cm) - - 4.00 4.00 - -

FLy (cm) - - 3.50 3.50 - - FLy (cm) - - 3.50 3.50 - -
- - - - - -
Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control 2 TIS_as
Control 3 TIB_bs
Operating Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 3: 2D+M mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm , FR:37.40 Control 4: Triple mode , 2D:4.1Mhz , PD:4.7Mhz , Col:4.7Mhz , Focus:3.0Cm , FR:2.43
EC4-9IS: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ L4-7EL

TIS TIB TIC L4-7EL: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 1.52 0.80 0.95 0.58** 1.84 (b) Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
P 2D P1:2.04 PD P: Pr,α (MPa) 2.82 - - - - -

(mW) - PD P1x1:41.6 (b)
PD P1x1:25.6 39.6 2D P1:25.6 M
P
(z ),I α
(mW) - M P1x1:1.54 (b)
Min.of [Pα s ta, M P1x1:0.94 P:1.54
(mW) - - - 25.4 - -
α
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs (mW) - - - 0.94 - -
(cm) - - - 1.50 - - (zs)x1cm^2]

2D:4.56 deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.49 -
fawf (MHz) 4.75 4.78 4.78 4.83 (b)
PD:4.78 fawf (MHz) 4.39 4.21 4.21 4.21 4.21 (b)
2D:2.59 2D:3.84
X (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) X (cm) 1.62 1.62 1.62 (b)
Dim of Aaprt PD:1.30 Dim of Aaprt M:1.62
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.80 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.28 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 167* - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
2
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm ) 480 - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 313 -
Focal FLx (cm) - - 4.00 4.00 - - FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Focal Length
Length FLy (cm) - - 3.50 3.50 - - FLy (cm) - - 1.70 1.70 - -
- - - -
Operating Control 1 MI Operating Control 1 MI TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control Control 2 TIS_as Control
Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs

L4-7EL: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA L4-7EL: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler

Maximum Index Value 1.50 1.90 1.52 0.99 2.09 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.40 1.34 1.29** 0.93 2.69 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 2.86 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 2.67 - - - - -

2D P1:0.38 P 2D P1:2.18 PD PD P:
P PD (mW) - (b)
(mW) - PD P1x1:44.0 PD P:69.3 (b) PD P1x1:30.4 P1x1:51.2 72.2
P1x1:69.3
Col P1:17.4 Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(mW) - - - 36.9 - -
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α α (zs)x1cm^2]
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 45.5 - - zs (cm) - - - 1.60 - -

zs (cm) - - - 2.00 - - Associated zbp (cm) - - - 1.93 - -
Associated zbp (cm) - - - 1.93 - - Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.64 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 2.00 - Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 2.28 - - - - -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 1.72 - - - - - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.39 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.39 - fawf (MHz) 3.63 2D:4.01 PD:5.31 5.31 5.31 3.60 (b)
2D:4.29 X (cm) 2D:3.84 PD:2.16 2.16 2.16 1.56 (b)
fawf (MHz) 3.65 PD:4.61 4.61 4.58 4.61 (b) Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
Col:4.55
td (µsec) 1.02 - - - - -
2D:3.84
X (cm) PD:1.56 1.56 2.16 1.56 (b)
Dim of Aaprt Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 3.56 - - - - -
Col:3.39
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.32 -
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.70 - - - - -
FLx(cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 64.9* - - - - - Focal Length
FLy cm) - - 1.70 1.70 - -
- - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 428 - Operating Control 1 MI
FLx (cm) - - 4.70 6.50 - - Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIS_bs

Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 1.70 1.70 - - Conditions Control 3 TIB_bs
- - -
Operating Control 1 MI Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:3.6Mhz , Focus:3.2Cm

Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_bs Control 3: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:8.8Mhz, PD:3.6Mhz, Focus:4.7Cm, FR:7.17

▐ L5-9EE L5-9EE: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

L5-9EE: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Pr,α (MPa) 2.95 - - - - - 2D P1:0.17
P PD PD
P (mW) - PD P1x1:20.5 (b)
(mW) - 2D P1:27.0 M P1x1:0.97 M P:0.53 (b)
P1x1:31.5 P:26.2
(z ),I α Col P1:7.14
Min.of [Pα s ta,
(mW) - - - 0.62 - -
(zs)x1cm^2] Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(mW) - - - 19.6 - -
zs α (zs)x1cm^2]
(cm) - - - 1.60 - -
zs
fawf (MHz) 5.08 5.52 4.15 4.15 4.75 (b) deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
X (cm) 1.75 2.11 2.11 0.78 (b) 2D:5.04

Dim of Aaprt fawf (MHz) 4.90 PD:4.92 4.92 4.92 4.93 (b)
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
Col:4.89
td (µsec) 0.23 - - - - -
2D:4.99
Pr at max. Ipi X (cm) PD:1.56 1.56 1.56 1.01 (b)
Information (MPa) 3.69 - - - - - Dim of Aaprt
Col:3.90
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.19 -
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
td (µsec) 0.43 - - - - -
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Focal Length Other prr (pulses/sec) 76.5* - - - - -
FLy (cm) - - 1.80 1.80 - -
- - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.20 -
Control 1 MI Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 510 -
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as FLx (cm) - - 4.70 4.70 - -
Control
Focal Length
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs FLy (cm) - - 1.80 1.80 - -
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs
- - -
Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:7.7Mhz , Focus:1.7Cm , FR:63.39 Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:8.8Mhz , Focus:1.7Cm , FR:111.9 Conditions Control 3 TIB_bs
Control 1: 2D+Color mode, 2D:6.8Mhz, Col:5.1Mhz, Focus:1.0Cm, FR:4.78
L5-9EE: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ L5-12IM

L5-12IM: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.45 0.97 1.07 0.69** 1.63 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.56 2.48 0.07 0.04** 0.08+ (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 3.23 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 3.82 - - - - -

P
2D P1:1.10 PD PD P: (mW) - 2D P1:86.3 M P1x1:2.20 M P:0.86 (b)
P (mW) - (b) α
PD P1x1:26.4 P1x1:45.5 33.5 Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 1.43 - -
(mW) - - - 29.3 - - zs
(zs)x1cm^2] (cm) - - - 1.00 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.10 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.40 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.17 -
fawf (MHz) 6.03 6.03 6.24 6.24 5.23 (b)
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.29 - X (cm) 1.26 2.16 2.16 0.56 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
fawf (MHz) 4.92 2D:4.78 PD:4.88 4.92 4.92 4.91 (b) Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
X (cm) 2D:4.99 PD:1.56 2.11 2.11 1.01 (b) td (µsec) 0.26 - - - - -

Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Other prr 64.0* - - - - -
(pulses/sec)
td (µsec) 0.61 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec 999 - - - - - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.17 -
Pr at max. Ipi
Information (MPa) 3.55 - - - - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 793 - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.21 - Focal FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 485 - Length FLy (cm) - - 1.80 1.80 - -
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - - - -

Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 1.80 1.80 - - Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
- - - Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 1 MI
Control 4 TIB_bs
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:1.0Cm , FR:63.99
Control 4 TIB_bs Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:1.0Cm , FR:113.0
L5-12IM: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA L5-12IM: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Maximum Index Value 1.58 1.72 1.40 0.96** 1.91 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.45 1.82 2.26 1.67** 2.56 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 3.39 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 3.23 - - - - -
P 2D P1:6.45 PD P 2D P1:6.91 PD PD P:
(mW) - PD P:30.7 (b) (mW) - (b)
Col P1:66.0 P1x1:60.0 PD P1x1:32.2 P1x1:94.1 67.6
(z ),I α α
Min.of [Pα s ta, Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 41.3 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 69.9 - -
zs zs
(cm) - - - 1.10 - - (cm) - - - 0.80 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.26 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.40 -
2D:4.96 fawf (MHz) 4.97 2D:4.60 PD:5.02 5.04 5.01 4.97 (b)
fawf (MHz) 4.63 4.91 4.91 4.98 (b)
Col:5.00 X (cm) - 2D:3.84 PD:2.16 2.16 2.16 1.04 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
2D:2.22 Y (cm) - 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
Dim of Aaprt X (cm) 2.16 2.16 0.80 (b)
Col:1.18 td (µsec) 0.75 - - - - -
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - -
td (µsec) 0.55 - - - - - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 3.88 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 74.6* - - - - - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.32 -
Pr at max. Ipi
Information (MPa) 4.08 - - - - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 612 - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.20 - FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Focal Length
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 733 - - FLy (cm) - - 1.80 1.80 - -
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Focal Length - -
FLy (cm) - - 1.80 1.80 - -
Control 1 MI
- - Control 2 TIS_as
Control 1 MI Operating Control 3 TIS_as_U
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control Control 4 TIS_bs
Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Conditions Control 5 TIB_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs

▐ L6-12IS L6-12IS: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

L6-12IS: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.53 2.99 2.66 1.73** 2.73+ (b)
Maximum Index Value 1.52 2.61 0.11 0.07** 0.10+ (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 3.78 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 4.22 - - - - - 2D P1:1.99
P - 2D P1:83.1 M P1x1:3.29 M P:3.12 (b) PD PD PD
(mW) P (mW) - (b)
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α P1x1:42.3 P1x1:89.6 P:89.6
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 2.32 - - Col P1:10.9
zs - - - 0.70 - -
(cm) (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 58.3 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 0.80 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.00 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.48 -
fawf (MHz) 7.71 6.60 6.78 6.71 5.90 (b)
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.49 -
X (cm) 1.72 2.14 1.62 1.62 (b)
Dim of Aaprt 2D:5.46
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
fawf (MHz) 6.08 PD:6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23 (b)
td (µsec) 0.17 - - - - - Col:5.31
Other prr (pulses/sec) 64.6* - - - - - 2D:3.80
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 4.89 - - - - - X (cm) PD:2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
- - - - 0.48 - Col:3.80
deq at max. Ipi (cm)
772 - - Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2)
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - - td (µsec) 0.41 - - - - -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 72.5* - - - - -
- - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 4.29 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.47 -

Control 1 MI
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 516 - -
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - -
Control 5 TIB_bs - -
Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:8.8Mhz , Focus:1.0Cm , FR:64.60 Operating Control 1 MI

Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:3.2Cm , FR:88.52 Control
Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control 3: 2D+M mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:6.5Cm , FR:30.97 Conditions
Control 4: 2D+M mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:6.5Cm , FR:30.97 Control 1: 2D+Color mode , 2D:5.1Mhz , Col:6.2Mhz , Focus:3.2Cm , FR:5.58
L6-12IS: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ L8-15IS

TIS TIB TIC L8-15IS: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.66 2.90 3.32 2.58** 3.39 (b)
P 2D P1:9.31 PD P:
(mW) - PD P1x1:114 (b) Pr,α (MPa) 4.23 - - - - -
PD P1x1:42.3 109 P (mW) - 2D P1:61.7 M P1x1:2.21 M P:2.01 (b)
(mW) - - - 88.4 - - (z ),I α
(zs)x1cm^2] Min.of [Pα s ta,
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 1.28 - -
zs - - - 0.60 - -
(cm) zs (cm) - - - 0.87 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.10 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 0.87 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.48 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.45 -
fawf (MHz) 6.14 2D:5.46 PD:6.23 6.12 6.12 5.25 (b) fawf (MHz) 7.83 8.81 9.05 9.05 8.25 (b)
2D:3.80 PD:2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 (b) X (cm) 1.74 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b)
X (cm) Dim of Aaprt
Dim of Aaprt Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
td (µsec) 0.17 - - - - -
td (µsec) 0.57 - - - - -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 4.63 - - - - - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.45 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.47 - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 1266 -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 623 - - FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -

Focal Length
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - - FLy (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - - - -
Control 1 MI
- - Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control 1 MI Control
Operating Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control 4 TIB_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control 4 TIB_bs
L8-15IS: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA L8-15IS: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler

Maximum Index Value 1.52 1.80 1.47 0.93** 1.65+ (b) Maximum Index Value 1.32 2.18 2.17 1.38** 2.47 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 4.14 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 3.64 - - - - -
P 2D P1:0.32 PD PD P 2D P1:0.51 PD PD P:
(mW) - (b) (mW) - (b)
Col P1:49.9 P1x1:40.5 P:40.5 PD P1x1:27.6 P1x1:59.9 59.6
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 25.6 - - (mW) - - - 38.0 - -
α (zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 0.87 - - (cm) - - - 0.87 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.35 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.34 -
2D:7.32 2D:7.68
Col:7.52 PD:7.63
X (cm) 2.56 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b) 2D:2.56
Dim of Aaprt X (cm) 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b)
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Dim of Aaprt PD:2.16
td (µsec) 0.34 - - - - - Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)

Other prr (pulses/sec) 76.8* - - - - - td (µsec) 0.58 - - - - -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 5.56 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.35 - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 4.40 - - - - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 1608 - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.34 -
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 780 -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - - FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Focal Length
- - FLy (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
Operating Control 1 MI - -
Control Control 2 TIS_as Control 1 MI
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs Operating
Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions
Control 1: 2D+Color mode, 2D:7.7Mhz, Col:7.7Mhz, Focus:1.7Cm, FR:4.80 Control 4 TIS_bs
▐ P2-4AC P2-4AC: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

P2-4AC: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.09 1.01 0.74 0.77 2.64 2.24
Maximum Index Value 1.22 1.86 0.05** 0.08 0.17+ 2.91 Pr,α (MPa) 1.71 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 1.78 - - - - - 2D P1:2.75 2D P1:2.15
P PD PD
(mW) - PD P1x1:66.7 PD P1x1:48.4
P 2D P1:125 M 2D P:90.6 P1x1:63.6 P:63.6
(mW) - M P:5.80 Col P1:27.3 Col P1:28.8
M P1x1:4.09 P1x1:3.75 M P:2.62
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α (mW) - - - 66.7 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 5.62 - -
zs (cm) - - - 2.10 - -
zs (cm) - - - 2.40 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.20 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 5.10 -
z_at_max_Ipi,
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 5.40 - - - - - Parameters (cm) 1.20 - - - - -
α
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.32 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.44 -
fawf (MHz) 2.14 3.05 3.05 2.88 2.54 2.56 2D:1.90 2D:1.90
fawf (MHz) 2.45 PD:2.44 2.45 2.44 2.45 PD:2.45
X (cm) 0.78 0.78 1.92 1.92 0.36
Dim of Aaprt Col:2.08 Col:2.08
Y (cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 2D:0.78 2D:0.36
td (µsec) 0.72 - - - - - X (cm) PD:0.78 0.66 1.92 0.66 PD:0.36
Other prr (pulses/sec) 199* - - - - -
Y (cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
td (µsec) 1.49 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.30 -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 273 - Pr at max. Ipi
FLx (cm) - - 4.00 10.0 - -
Focal Length deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.44 -
FLy (cm) - - 8.50 8.50 - -
- - FLx (cm) - - 2.00 12.0 - -
Focal Length
Control 1 MI FLy (cm) - - 8.50 8.50 - -
Operating Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U - -
Control Control 3 TIS_bs Control 1 MI TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Operating
Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 5 TIC_as Control 3 TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIC_as
Control 5: 2D+M mode , 2D:2.5Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm , FR:82.09 Control 4: Triple mode , 2D:1.7Mhz, PD:2.5Mhz, Col:2.0Mhz, Focus:2.0Cm, FR:4.93
P2-4AC: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler P2-4AC: CW

Maximum Index Value 1.38 0.95 0.95** 1.24 3.06 2.32
Maximum Index Value 0.06 (a) 0.70** 0.67 2.70 1.73
Pr,α (MPa) 2.16 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 0.09 - - - - -
P 2D P1:11.2 PD PD P: 2D P:9.09
(mW) - P - (a) 67.2 82.4 90.3
PD P1x1:79.7 P1x1:81.9 89.4 PD P:65.3 (mW)
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α α
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 107 - - (mW) - - - 63.6 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs (cm) - - - 2.10 - - zs (cm) - - - 1.70 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 2.00 -
z_at_max_Ipi, Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.70 -
Parameters (cm) 2.10 - - - - -
α Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 1.70 - - - - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.46 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.53 -
2D:1.90 2D:1.91
fawf (MHz) 2.45 2.44 2.44 2.44 fawf (MHz) 2.20 (a) 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20
PD:2.44 PD:2.45
X (cm) 0.78 0.78 1.92 0.78 0.36 X (cm) (a) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
Dim of Aaprt Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 Y (cm) (a) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
td (µsec) 1.51 - - - - - td (µsec) cw - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) cw - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.43 -
FLx (cm) - - 4.00 12.0 - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 0.28 -

Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 8.50 8.50 - - FLx (cm) - - 16.0 2.00 - -
Focal Length
- - FLy (cm) - - 8.50 8.50 - -
Control 1 MI - -
Operating Control 1 MI TIS_bs TIB_bs TIC_as
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Control
Control 2 TIS_as_U
Control 5 TIC_as Conditions
Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:5.1Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm Control 1: CW mode, CW:2.2Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:5.1Mhz, PD:5.1Mhz, Focus:6.5Cm, FR:7.27 Control 2: CW mode, CW:2.2Mhz , Focus:16.0Cm

TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.38 1.86 0.07** 0.08 0.20+ 3.33
Pr,α (MPa) 2.04 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 2.35 - - - - - 2D P1:3.46 2D P1:4.92
P PD PD
P 2D P1:132 M M (mW) - PD P1x1:78.1 PD P1x1:111
(mW) - M P:134 P1x1:65.8 P:55.6
M P1x1:3.91 P1x1:5.40 P:5.21 Col P1:27.8 Col P1:39.6
α Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, (mW) - - - 72.5 - -
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 6.34 - - (zs)x1cm^2]
zs
zs (cm) - - - 1.90 - -
(cm) - - - 1.90 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.40 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 3.60 -
z_at_max_Ipi,
α
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.36 -
fawf (MHz) 2.89 2.89 2.78 2.78 2.89 2.90
2D:2.27 2D:2.27
X (cm) 1.32 1.41 1.41 1.32 0.66 fawf (MHz) 2.27 PD:3.24 3.24 3.23 2.27 PD:3.24
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 Col:2.33 Col:2.33
td (µsec) 0.43 - - - - - X (cm) 1.41 1.41 1.41 0.66 1.41

Dim of Aaprt
Other prr (pulses/sec) 139* - - - - - Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.28 - 1874

Other prr (pulses/sec) - - - - -
*
Pr at max. Ipi
FLx (cm) - - 16.0 16.0 - -
FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - -
- -
FLx (cm) - - 10.0 12.0 - -
Operating Control 1 MI Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - -
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
- -
Operating Control 1 MI TIB_bs
Control 4 TIC_as
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIC_as
Control 4: 2D mode , 2D:3.1Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm , FR:139.1 Control 2: Triple mode, 2D:1.9Mhz, PD:3.4Mhz, Col:2.2Mhz, Focus:10.0Cm, FR:4.8

Maximum Index Value 0.07 (a) 1.83 1.20** 4.09 3.60
Pr,α (MPa) 2.86 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 0.12 - - - - -
P 2D P1:16.9 PD PD P: 2D P:24.0
(mW) - P - (a) 150 135 150
PD P1x1:91.5 P1x1:86.5 59.6 PD P:130 (mW)
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 96.6 - - (mW) - - - 98.2 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs (cm) - - - 1.80 - - zs (cm) - - - 1.80 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.40 -

2D:2.23 2D:2.23 deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.49 -
fawf (MHz) 3.23 3.23 3.21 2.27
PD:3.21 PD:3.21
fawf (MHz) 2.57 (a) 2.57 2.57 2.57 2.57
X (cm) 1.41 1.41 1.41 0.66 1.41
Dim of Aaprt X (cm) (a) 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 Dim of Aaprt
td (µsec) 1.17 - - - - - Y (cm) (a) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - - td (µsec) cw - - - - -

Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 4.10 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec) cw - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.36 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.47 -
FLx (cm) - - 10.0 12.0 - -
Focal Length Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 0.47 -
FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - -
- - FLx (cm) - - 14.0 2.00 - -

Focal Length
Control 1 MI FLy (cm) - - 7.00 7.00 - -
Operating Control 2 TIS_as TIC_as - -

Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Operating Control 1 MI TIC_as
Control 5 TIB_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_bs TIB_bs

Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:1.9Mhz, PD:3.4Mhz, Focus:14.0Cm, FR:9.35 Control 1: CW mode, CW:2.6Mhz , Focus:4.0Cm

TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.16 1.28 0.97 0.69** 1.53 1.59
Maximum Index Value 1.46 1.75 0.12 0.09** 0.14+ 2.17
Pr,α (MPa) 2.49 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 3.04 - - - - - P 2D P1:4.85 PD PD 2D P1:4.75
(mW) -
2D P1:82.7 M 2D P:85.3 Col P1:56.9 P1x1:45.1 P:43.2 Col P1:46.8
P (mW) - M P:5.94 Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α
M P1x1:3.09 P1x1:5.94 M P:3.19 (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 32.2 - -
zs
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 4.68 - - (cm) - - - 1.08 - -
Associated zbp
zs (cm) - - - 1.53 - -
(cm) - - - 0.84 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 2.52 -
z_at_max_Ipi,
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 0.84 - Parameters (cm) 1.20 - - - - -
α
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 1.20 - - - - - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.28 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.76 - 2D:3.79 2D:3.78
fawf (MHz) 4.58 4.53 4.53 4.58
fawf (MHz) 4.32 4.28 4.11 4.11 4.11 4.28 Col:4.40 Col:3.69
X (cm) 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 0.64
X (cm) 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 Dim of Aaprt
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Y (cm) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
td (µsec) 0.54 - - - - -
td (µsec) 0.28 - - - - -
Pr at max. Ipi
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.26 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.61 -
FLx (cm) - - 16.0 16.0 - -
FLy (cm) - - 5.00 5.00 - -
- -
- -
Control 1 MI
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIC_as
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs
Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIC_as
Control 4: Triple mode, 2D:3.6Mhz, PD:4.7Mhz, Col:3.6Mhz, Focus:4.0Cm , FR:3.80

Pr,α (MPa) 3.29 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 0.07 - - - - -
P 2D P1:11.9 PD PD PD P: PD
(mW) - P - (a) 66.1 57.2 66.1
P1x1:49.1 P1x1:62.0 63.0 P:65.1 (mW)
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 44.2 - - (mW) - - - 32.8 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs (cm) - - - 1.08 - - zs (cm) - - - 2.10 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 3.00 -
z_at_max_Ipi, Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 2.70 -
α Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 2.80 - - - - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.33 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.46 -
2D:3.80
fawf (MHz) 4.61 4.53 4.53 3.66 3.62 fawf (MHz) 3.85 (a) 3.85 3.85 3.85 3.85
PD:4.53
X (cm) 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 X (cm) (a) 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48
Y (cm) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Y (cm) (a) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
td (µsec) 0.78 - - - - - td (µsec) cw - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) cw - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.31 -
FLx (cm) - - 16.0 16.0 - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 0.16 -

Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 5.00 5.00 - - FLx (cm) - - 14.0 2.00 - -
Focal Length
- - FLy (cm) - - 5.00 5.00 - -
Control 1 MI - -
Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 5 TIC_as Conditions
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode,2D:3.6Mhz, PD:4.7Mhz,Focus:12.0Cm,FR:10.95 Control 2: CW mode, CW:3.9Mhz , Focus:14.0Cm
▐ 3D2-6ET 3D2-6ET: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

3D2-6ET: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.08 0.96 0.62 0.60 1.94 (b)
Maximum Index Value 1.49 1.51 0.05** 0.06 0.18+ (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 1.66 - - - - -
2.29 P 2D P1:2.67 PD PD
Pr,α (MPa) - - - - - (mW) - (b)
Col P1:68.7 P1x1:45.3 P:58.3
P α
(mW) - 2D P1:139 M P1x1:4.37 M P:5.94 (b) Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
α
(mW) - - - 44.0 - -
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, (zs)x1cm^2]
(mW) - - - 5.80 - -
(zs)x1cm^2] zs (cm) - - - 1.60 - -
zs (cm) - - - 3.20 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.30 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 4.40 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.37 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.54 -
fawf (MHz) 2.37 2.28 2.28 2.15 2.22 (b) 2D:2.21
fawf (MHz) 2.38 2.88 2.86 2.37 (b)
X (cm) - 2.36 0.83 2.68 1.66 (b) Col:2.84
Y (cm) - 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) X (cm) - 0.46 1.66 0.83 (b)
td (µsec) 0.64 - - - - -
Y (cm) - 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 356 Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 1.74 - - - - -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - -
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 89.0
- -
FLx (cm) - - 2.00 6.80 - -
Control 1 MI Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U - -
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Operating Control 1 MI TIS_as_U
Control 5 TIB_bs Control Control 2 TIS_as

Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:2.3Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:39.43 Control 4 TIB_bs
3D2-6ET: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ 3D3-5EK

TIS TIB TIC 3D3-5EK: 2D& 2D+M mode
Pr,α (MPa) 2.25 - - - - -
2D P1:3.54 PD PD P: Pr,α (MPa) 2.24 - - - - -
P (mW) - (b) P
PD P1x1:65.5 P1x1:69.5 69.6 (mW) - 2D P1:96.0 M P1x1:3.26 M P:2.67 (b)
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 65.5 - - (mW) - - - 4.57 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs (cm) - - - 1.60 - - zs (cm) - - - 3.60 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.44 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.42 -
fawf (MHz) 2.84 2D:2.21 PD:2.89 2.90 2.86 2.87 (b) fawf (MHz) 2.27 2.31 2.46 2.14 2.36 (b)
X (cm) 2D:5.91 PD:0.46 0.46 1.66 0.46 (b) X (cm) 2.14 0.65 3.44 0.37 (b)
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 1.31 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.77 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec 39.8* - - - - -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 3.18 - - - - - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.83 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.42 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.44 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 17.5 - -
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
- -
- -
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI
Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs

3D3-5EK: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA 3D3-5EK: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler

Pr,α (MPa) 2.30 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 2.35 - - - - -

P 2D P1:4.35 PD P 2D P1:3.11 PD PD P:
(mW) - PD P:57.2 (b) (mW) - (b)
Col P1:103 P1x1:67.4 PD P1x1:71.4 P1x1:71.4 61.6
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 71.4 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 98.3 - -
zs zs
(cm) - - - 3.10 - - (cm) - - - 3.10 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.42 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.42 -
2D:2.20 2D:2.21
Col:2.49 PD:2.47
2D:3.67 2D:5.95
X (cm) 0.74 2.42 0.37 (b) X (cm) 0.74 2.42 0.37 (b)
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 0.96 - - - - - td (µsec) 1.36 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) 97.7* - - - - - Other prr (pulses/sec 999 - - - - -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.36 - - - - - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.40 - - - - -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - - FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - -
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - - FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
- - - -
Operating Control 2 TIS_as Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs Control 5 TIB_bs
▐ 3D4-7EK 3D4-7EK: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

3D4-7EK: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.43 2.13 0.06 0.04 0.13+ (b) Pr,α (MPa) 2.50 - - - - -
Pr,α (MPa) 2.32 - - - - - 2D P1:8.34 PD PD
P
P (mW) - (b)
(mW) - 2D P1:153 M P1x1:4.00 M P:4.89 (b) Col P1:173 P1x1:94.1 P:94.1
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 3.16 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 76.1 - -
zs zs
(cm) - - - 2.90 - - (cm) - - - 1.10 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.43 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.54 -
fawf (MHz) 2.62 2.92 2.92 2.89 2.57 (b) 2D:2.62
fawf (MHz) 2.77 2.79 2.79 2.79 (b)
X (cm) 1.99 0.76 2.37 1.91 (b) Col:2.77
Dim of Aaprt
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b) 2D:3.55
X (cm) 0.38 0.38 0.38 (b)
td (µsec) 0.62 - - - - - Dim of Aaprt Col:1.80
Other prr (pulses/sec) 57.0* - - - - - Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 167 - Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 3.15 - - - - -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - - deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.51 -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - - Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 291 -
- - FLx (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - -
Focal Length
Control 1 MI FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - -
Operating Control 2 TIS_as - -
Control Control 2 TIS_as
Control 5 TIB_bs

Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:3.1Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:102.1 Control 1: 2D+Color mode , 2D:2.5Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:5.84
3D4-7EK: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ 3D4-8ET

3D4-8ET: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.42 1.39 1.48 1.20** 3.82 (b) Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Pr,α (MPa) 2.37 - - - - - Maximum Index Value 1.31 0.95 0.03 0.03 0.08+ (b)
P 2D P1:5.26 PD PD P: Pr,α (MPa) 2.39 - - - - -
(mW) - (b)
PD P1x1:99.9 P1x1:112 112 P (mW) - 2D P1: 53.3 M P1x1: 1.62 M P:1.62 (b)
(mW) - - - 90.4 - - Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
α (zs)x1cm^2]
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 2.01 - -
zs (cm) - - - 1.10 - - zs (cm) - - - 4.00 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.10 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 0.80 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.53 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.34 -
2D:2.65 fawf (MHz) 3.35 3.74 3.69 3.41 3.69 (b)
fawf (MHz) 2.78 2.78 2.78 2.78 (b)
PD:2.79
X (cm) - 1.65 0.45 4.35 0.45 (b)
2D:4.89 Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) 0.38 0.38 0.38 (b) Y (cm) - 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 0.41 - - - - -
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
Other prr (pulses/sec 40.3* - - - - -
td (µsec) 1.17 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.34 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.50 -
FLx (cm) - - 2.00 17.5 - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 312 - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - -
FLx (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - -
Focal Length - -
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - -
Control 1 MI
- -
Operating Control 1 MI Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control Control 2 TIS_as Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm Control 1: 2D mode, 3.6MHz, Focus:5cm, FR:40.34
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:2.5Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:2.0Cm, FR:7.33 Control 2: 2D mode, 4.4MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:74.50
Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm Control 3: 2D + M mode, 4.4MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:21.04
Control 4: 2D + M mode, 3.9MHz, Focus:17.5cm, FR:9.38
Control 5: 2D + M mode, 4.4MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:21.04
3D4-8ET: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA 3D4-8ET: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler

Pr,α (MPa) 2.52 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 2.27 - - - - -
P 2D P1:6.53 PD P1x1: P 2D P1:9.21 PD P1x1: PD P:

(mW) - PD P:24.0 (b) (mW) - (b)
Col P1:37.9 24.0 PD P1x1:26.7 35.3 32.9
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 17.3 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 29.2 - -
zs zs
(cm) - - - 3.70 - - (cm) - - - 1.40 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.30 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
2D:3.13 fawf (MHz) 4.05 2D:3.20 PD:4.03 4.00 4.00 4.07 (b)
fawf (MHz) 3.05 4.07 4.01 4.08 (b)
Col:3.9 2D:4.80
2D:3.64 X (cm) - 0.825 1.20 0.45 (b)
X (cm) 0.45 3.60 0.45 (b) Dim of Aaprt PD:0.825
Y (cm) - 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 0.94 - - - - -
td (µsec) 0.46 - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec 999 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 5.00 - -
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - -
- -
- -
Control 1 MI TIB_bs
Control 1 MI Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 1: PD mode, 4.1MHz, Focus:2cm

Control 1: 2D + Color mode, 2D 3.2MHz, Col 5.6MHz, Focus:3.5cm, FR:7.43
Control 2: 2D + PD mode, 2D 3.2MHz, PD 4.1MHz, Focus:3.5cm, FR:21.04
Control 2: 2D + Color mode, 2D 3.2MHz, Col 4.1MHz, Focus:5cm, FR:5.90 Control 3: PD mode, 4.1MHz, Focus:3.5cm
Control 3: Tripple mode, 2D 3.2MHz, PD 4.1MHz, Col 4.1MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:8.85
Control 4: Tripple mode,2D 3.2MHz, PD 4.1MHz, Col 4.1MHz, Focus:14.5cm,FR:4.50

Pr,α (MPa) 2.21 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 2.11 - - - - -
M M P 2D P1:2.67 PD PD
P (mW) - (b)
(mW) - 2D P1:38.6 (b) Col P1:47.0 P1x1:25.2 P:25.2
P1x1:1.24 P:1.19
(mW) - - - 1.02 - - (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 18.2 - -
(zs)x1cm^2]
zs
zs (cm) - - - 0.60 - - (cm) - - - 1.00 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.21 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.22 -
fawf (MHz) 4.43 4.69 4.67 4.67 4.43 (b) 2D:4.28

fawf (MHz) 4.68 4.70 4.70 4.70 (b)
Col:4.67
X (cm) 0.96 0.32 0.32 0.64 (b)
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) X (cm) 0.48 0.48 0.48 (b)
td (µsec) 0.49 - - - - -
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.67 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.20 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.22 -
FLx (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
Focal Length Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 272 -
FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
FLx (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
- - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
- -
Control 3: Triple mode , 2D:4.1Mhz , PD:4.7Mhz , Col:4.7Mhz , Focus:1.5Cm ,
FR:1.75
3D5-8EK: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ VAW3-5

VAW3-5: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 1.32 0.66 0.61 0.44** 1.65 (b) Maximum Index Value 0.99 0.29 0.03 0.04 0.07+ (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 2.87 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 1.49
P 2D P1:2.92 PD P
(mW) - PD P: 27.3 (b) (mW) 2D P1:27.0 M P1x1:2.06 M P:3.93 (b)
PD P1x1:26.7 P1x1:27.3 α
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, α (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 2.68 - -
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 19.7 - -
zs (cm) - - - 5.00 - -
zs (cm) - - - 1.00 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 5.20 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.50 -
z_at_max_Ipi,
α
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.23 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - 0.47 -
2D:4.32
fawf (MHz) 4.68 4.69 4.69 4.69 (b) fawf (MHz) 2.25 2.22 3.05 2.76 2.75 (b)
PD:4.70
X (cm) 6.02 0.75 3.20 1.50 (b)
2D:2.56 Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) 0.48 0.48 0.48 (b) Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 0.63 - - - - -
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.80 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - 0.47 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.22 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 14.5 - -
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 510 - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
FLx(cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
Focal Length - -
Fly(cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
Control 1 MI
- -
Control 5 TIB_bs

VAW3-5: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA VAW3-5: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Maximum Index Value 1.01 1.16 0.55 0.50 1.50 (b) Maximum Index Value 0.94 0.69 0.70** 1.00 2.55 (b)
Pr,α (MPa) 1.55 Pr,α (MPa) 1.48
2D P1:0.68 PD P 2D P1:0.78 PD PD P:
P (mW) (b)
(mW) PD P:45.6 (b)
Col P1:100 P1x1:45.6 PD P1x1:72.2 P1x1:58.0 110
(z ),I Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
Min.of [Pα s ta,
(mW) - - - 42.4 - - (mW) - - - 82.7 - -
α (zs)x1cm^2] α (zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 4.00 - - (cm) - - - 1.80 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - 1.60 - Acoustic zb (cm) - - - 5.20 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - 0.52 - deq(zb) (cm) - - 0.40 -
2D:3.14 2D:3.38
Col:2.41 PD:2.51
2D:6.02 2D:6.02
X (cm) 0.75 2.44 0.75 (b) X (cm) 1.50 1.50 1.50 (b)
Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) Y (cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
td (µsec) 1.05 - - - - - td (µsec) 1.23 - - - - -

Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 1.39 - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - 0.38 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - 0.48
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 81.9 -
FLx (cm) - - 6.80 6.80 - -
FLy (cm) - - 8.00 8.00 - -
- -
- -
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 1: 2D+Color mode , 2D:4.4Mhz , Col:2.4Mhz , Focus:6.8Cm , FR:1.24 Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, PD:2.6Mhz,Focus:6.8Cm, FR:24.82
Control 2: CPA mode , 2D:4.4Mhz , Col:2.6Mhz , Focus:11.0Cm , FR:12.89 Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.6Mhz , Focus:6.8Cm
Control 3: Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.4Mhz,PD:2.6Mhz,Col:2.6Mhz,Focus:11.0Cm,FR:1.72
Control 4: Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.4Mhz,PD:2.6Mhz,Col:2.6Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm, FR:1.72
▐ VAW4-7 VAW4-7: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

VAW4-7: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.34 0.55 0.07 0.10 0.12+ (b) Pr,α (MPa) 2.30
Pr,α (MPa) 2.28 2D P1:1.13 PD
P (mW) PD P:140 (b)
P M Col P1:110 P1x1:56.1
(mW) 2D P1:29.0 M P:8.41 (b)
P1x1:3.74 Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(z ),I α
(mW) - - - 79.2 - -
Min.of [Pα s ta, α (zs)x1cm^2]
(mW) - - - 6.14 - -
(zs)x1cm^2] zs (cm) - - - 3.00 - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - 4.00 -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - 1.40 -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 3.80 - - - -
z_at_max_Ipi,
Parameters (cm) 3.40 - - - - deq(zb) (cm) - - 0.61 -
α
2D:3.98
deq(zb) (cm) - - 1.10 - fawf (MHz) 2.76 2.77 2.75 2.75 (b)
Col:2.74
fawf (MHz) 2.89 4.00 3.89 3.26 3.26 (b)
2D:4.86
X (cm) 4.86 0.76 1.90 1.90 (b) X (cm) 0.76 2.36 2.36 (b)
Dim of Aaprt Dim of Aaprt Col:3.42
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
td (µsec) 0.50 - - - - -
td (µsec) 0.94 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - 0.62 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - 0.56
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 8.80 - -
Focal Length FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - -
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - -
- -
- -
Control Control 2 TIS_as Operating Control 1 MI
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U Control Control 2 TIS_as
Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:2.9Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:19.72 Control 1:2D+Color mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:6.8Cm , FR:2.52
Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , Focus:17.5Cm , FR:37.11 Control 2:CPA mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:8.8Cm , FR:13.78
Control 3: 2D+M mode , 2D:3.6Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:26.00 Control 3:Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.7Mhz,PD:2.8Mhz,Col:2.8Mhz,Focus:3.5Cm,FR:3.56
Control 4: 2D+M mode , 2D:3.6Mhz , Focus:8.8Cm , FR:19.32 Control 4:Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.7Mhz,PD:2.8Mhz,Col:2.8Mhz,Focus:11.0Cm,FR:3.56
VAW4-7: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ VNA6-12

TIS TIB TIC VNA6-12: 2D& 2D+M mode
Pr,α (MPa) 2.03 Maximum Index Value 1.62 1.84 0.09 0.07** 0.10+ (b)
P 2D P1:1.13 PD Pr,α (MPa) 3.85 - - - - -

(mW) PD P: 195 (b)
PD P1x1:69.9 P1x1:69.9 P 2D P1:63.1 M
(z ),I (mW) - M P:3.34 (b)
Min.of [Pα s ta, M P1x1:1.76 P1x1:3.33
(mW) - - - 110 - -
α (zs)x1cm^2]
zs (zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 2.50 - -

(cm) - - - 3.00 - -
zs
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - 4.60 - Associated zbp (cm) - - - 1.57 - -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 3.40 - - - - Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 0.70 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - 0.57 - z_at_max_Ipi,

2D:3.99 α
fawf (MHz) 2.77 2.79 2.78 2.78 (b) deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.54 -
PD:2.79
2D:4.86 fawf (MHz) 5.65 5.88 5.94 5.94 5.32 (b)
X (cm) 0.76 2.36 2.36 (b)
Dim of Aaprt PD:0.76 2D:3.84
X (cm) 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b)
Y (cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b) Dim of Aaprt M:1.44
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
td (µsec) 1.32 - - - - -
td (µsec) 0.27 - - - - -
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 2.73 - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - 0.50
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.53 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 11.0 - -
Focal Length FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
FLy (cm) - - 6.00 6.00 - - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - -
- -
- -
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 4 TIB_bs

Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode , 2D:4.1Mhz , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:24.48
Control 3: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:24.48
VNA6-12: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA VNA6-12: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Pr,α (MPa) 3.37 - - - - - Pr,α (MPa) 3.23 - - - - -
2D P1:4.77 PD P 2D P1:8.34 PD PD P:
P (mW) - (b)
(mW) - PD P1x1:21.4 (b)
Col P1:60.2 P:14.8 PD P1x1:39.0 P1x1:101 101
(z ),I Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
Min.of [Pα s ta,
(mW) - - - 16.2 - - (mW) - - - 79.2 - -
α (zs)x1cm^2] α (zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 0.80 - - (cm) - - - 0.70 - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.30 - deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.50 -
2D:5.00 2D:5.00
Col:4.99 PD:5.04
2D:3.84 2D:3.84
X (cm) 2.16 2.16 1.16 (b) X (cm) 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b)
Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Y (cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
td (µsec) 0.52 - - - - - td (µsec) 0.73 - - - - -

deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.49 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.22 -
499
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) - FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - -
Focal Length
FLx (cm) - - 6.50 6.50 - - FLy (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - -
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 2.00 2.00 - - - -
- - Operating Control 1 MI
Control 4 TIB_bs
▐ VDW5-8B VDW5-8B: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

VDW5-8B: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Pr,α (MPa) 2.95 - - - - - 2D P1:2.62 PD
P
P (mW) - PD P1x1:21.1 (b)
(mW) - 2D P1:45.0 M P1x1:1.50 M P:1.40 (b) Col P1:45.6 P:21.0
(zs)x1cm^2] (mW) - - - 1.15 - - (mW) - - - 16.2 - -
α (zs)x1cm^2]
zs zs
(cm) - - - 0.60 - - (cm) - - - 0.80 - -
z_at_max_Ipi,
Parameters (cm) 1.80 - - - - - Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 1.80 - - - - -
α
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.24 -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.33 -
2D:4.02
fawf (MHz) 4.80 5.22 4.80 4.80 4.80 (b) fawf (MHz) 4.74 4.76 4.76 4.76 (b)
Col:4.74
X (cm) 0.92 0.66 0.31 0.31 (b)
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) X (cm) 0.47 0.47 0.66 (b)
td (µsec) 0.28 - - - - - Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
td (µsec) 0.61 - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.33 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.23 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.00 1.50 - -
Focal Length Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 168 -
FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
FLx (cm) - - 1.50 1.50 - -
- - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
- -
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U Operating Control 1 MI
Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs Control Control 2 TIS_as

Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:6.8Mhz , Focus:3.0Cm , FR:26.66 Control 4 TIB_bs

VDW5-8B: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ CW2.0

TIS TIB TIC CW2.0: CW mode
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.23 0.66 0.66 0.48** 1.44 (b) Index Label M.I. scan non- scan non-
Pr,α (MPa) 2.69 - - - - - Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
P 2D P1:2.44 PD PD P: Maximum Index Value 0.04 (a) 0.32 (c) 1.20 (b)
(mW) - (b)
PD P1x1:27.0 P1x1:29.4 27.0
(z ),I Pr,α (MPa) 0.05 - - - - -
Min.of [Pα s ta,
(mW) - - - 21.1 - - P - (a) 34.3 34.3 (b)
α (zs)x1cm^2] (mW)
zs Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita,
(cm) - - - 0.80 - -
(mW) - - - (c) - -
α (zs)x1cm^2]
zs (cm) - - - (c) - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.60 -
Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 1.60 - - - - - Associated zbp (cm) - - - (c) - -
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.24 - Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.30 -
2D:4.06
fawf (MHz) 4.73 4.74 4.76 4.76 (b) Parameters z_at_max_Ipi,α (cm) 1.90 - - - - -
PD:4.76
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.57 -
2D:2.50
X (cm) 0.97 0.47 0.66 (b) 1.92 (a) 1.92 (c) 1.92 (b)
Dim of Aaprt PD:0.66 fawf (MHz)
Y (cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) X (cm) (a) 0.90 (c) 0.90 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
td (µsec) 0.81 - - - - - Y (cm) (a) 0.65 (c) 0.65 (b)
Other prr (pulses/sec) 999 - - - - - td (µsec) CW - - - - -
Other prr (pulses/sec) CW - - - - -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.23 -
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.52 -
FLx (cm) - - 3.00 1.50 - -
Focal Length Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 0.11
FLy (cm) - - 3.00 3.00 - -
FLx (cm) - - 5.50 (c) - -
- - Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 5.50 (c) - -
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs - -
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U Operating

Control 4 TIS_bs Control Control 1 MI TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Conditions
Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:4.7Mhz , Focus:3.0Cm Control 1: Set Output to Maximum.
▐ CW4.0
CW4.0: CW mode
FDA Tables
▐ Explanatory Notes
TIS TIB TIC

(a) This index is not required to this operating mode.
(b) This probe is not intended for adult transcranial uses.
(c) This formulation for TIS is less than that for an alternate formulation in
Maximum Index Value 0.02 (a) 0.11 (c) 0.38 (b)
this mode.
Pr,α (MPa) 0.05 - - - - - (d) The maximum index value is less than 1.0
P (mW) - (a) 6.35 6.35 (b)
Min.of [Pα(zs),Ita, * PRF for scanning modes is the product of the frame rate and the number of pulse
(mW) - - - (c) - -
α (zs)x1cm^2] per line
zs (cm) - - - (c) - -
Associated zbp (cm) - - - (c) - -
Acoustic zb (cm) - - - - 1.20 - ▐ Notes

- The following system Control settings are all at the maximum allowable
deq(zb) (cm) - - - - 0.29 -
transmit voltages for those settings.
fawf (MHz) 3.85 (a) 3.85 (c) 3.85 (b)
- The transmit focal zone (FZ) for the ACCUVIX XQ is designated as FZ 0,
X (cm) (a) 0.90 (c) 0.90 (b)
Dim of Aaprt tightest and nearest, through to FZ 7, the deepest and furthest zone.
Y (cm) (a) 0.65 (c) 0.65 (b)
- The units for PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) and FR (Frame Rate) are in
td (µsec) CW - - - - - Hertz.
Other prr (pulses/sec) CW - - - - - - Generally, the tables for 2D (B) mode and 2D + M simultaneous mode are
Information Pr at max. Ipi (MPa) 0.06 - - - - - reported on one table. The 2D Color mode, Triple mode, CPA mode, Triple
deq at max. Ipi (cm) - - - - 0.29 - mode with CPA mode, and Color M mode indices are reported together on
Ipa,α at max. MI (W/cm2) 0.07 one table. The Pulse Doppler mode and 2D + Pulse Doppler mode indices
FLx (cm) - - 3.50 (c) - - are reported on one table. The CW mode is reported on one table.
Focal Length
FLy (cm) - - 3.50 (c) - - - The values reported in the tables for Wo are more definitively (Wo1+Wo1x1)
for TIS-scan, Wo1x1 for TIS-non-scan, and Wo for TIB and TIC respectively.
- -
Operating
Control Control 1 MI TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Conditions
Control 1: Set Output to Maximum.

▐ Symbols and Definitions W.3(z1) the derated ultrasonic power at axial distance z1 (milliwatts).
All table entries have been obtained at the same operating conditions that give ITA.3(z1) the derated spatial-peak, temporal-average intensity at axial
rise to the maximum Index Value in the second row. Due to the complexities of distance z1 (milliwatts per square centimeter).
the system user interface, it may be difficult to exactly replicate the declared z1 the axial distance corresponding to the location of
condition. Contact Medison for further information. 2
max[min(W.3(z), ITA.3(z) x 1 cm )], where z = zbp (centimeters).
zbp 1.69 Aaprt (centimeters).
Symbols used in the table are described below.
zsp For MI, the axial distance at which pr.3 is measured for TIB,
MI the Mechanical Index.
the axial distance at which TIB is a maximum (i.e., zsp = zB.3)
TISscan the Soft Tissue Thermal Index in an auto-scanning mode.
(centimeters).
TISnon-scan the Soft Tissue Thermal Index in a non-auto-scanning mode.
deq(z) the equivalent beam diameter as a function of axial distance z,
TIB the Bone Thermal Index. 0.5
and is equal to [(4/ )(Wo/ITA(z))] where ITA(z) is the
TIC the Cranial Thermal Index.
temporal-average intensity as a function of z (centimeters).
Aaprt the area of the active aperture (square centimeters).
fc is the center frequency (MHz). For MI, fc is the center
pr.3 the derated peak rarefactional pressure associated with the frequency associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to the
transmit pattern giving rise to the value reported under MI maximum reported value of MI. For TI, for combined modes
(megapascals). involving transmit patterns of unequal center frequency, fc is
Wo For TIB and TIC: time average acoustic power at the source, in defined as the overall range of center frequencies of the
milliwatts. (Also see the definitions for W01 and W01x1 that respective transmit patterns.
follow.) Dim. of Aaprt the active aperture dimensions for the azimuthal and
For TIS scan, Wo = Wo1 + Wo1x1 elevational planes (centimeters).
For TIS non–scan, Wo = Wo1x1 PD the pulse duration (microseconds) associated with the transmit
Wo1: F or scanning modes and/or scanning components of
pattern giving rise to the reported value of MI.
combinational modes: time average acoustic power at the
PRF the pulse repetition frequency associated with the transmit
source, per cm, in milliwatts. This is the acoustic power
emitted from the central 1–cm length, in the scan direction, pattern giving rise to the reported value of MI (Hz).
of the aperture corresponding to the scanned pulses. pr@PIImax the peak rarefactional pressure at the point where the freefield,
Wo1x1:For non–scanning modes and/or non–scanning spatial-peak pulse intensity integral is a maximum
components of combinational modes: time average (megapascals). See Section 6.2.4.1 of the Output Display
2
acoustic power at the source, per cm , in milliwatts. This is
2
Standard, entitled "Measurement Methodology for Mechanical
the acoustic power emitted from the central 1 cm of the
and Thermal Indices".
active non–scanned aperture through which the highest
acoustic power is being transmitted. deq@PIImax the equivalent beam diameter at the point where the freefield,
spatial-peak pulse intensity integral is a maximum ▐ C1-4EC

(centimeters). See Section 6.2.5.1 of the Output Display C1-4EC: 2D& 2D+M mode
Standard, entitled "Measurement Methodology for Mechanical TIS TIB TIC

and Thermal Indices".
FL the focal length, or azimuthal and elevational lengths, if
different (centimeters). Pr.3 (MPa) 2.29
IPA.3@MImax the derated pulse average intensity at the point of maximum Wo (mW) 2D P1:140 M P1x1:4.37 M P:6.23 (b)
reported MI (Watts per square centimeter). min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 8.18
z1
Measurement uncertainties for acoustic quantities (power, pressure, intensities (cm) 4.20
Assoc Zbp
and center frequency) should be provided. (cm) 4.16
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 4.02 4.74
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.37
fc
▐ Explanatory Notes (MHz) 2.15 2.15 2.14 2.12 2.14 (b)
X(cm) 2.74 0.86 4.32 1.63 (b)
(e) This index is not required to this operating mode. Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 (b)
(f) This probe is not intended for adult transcranial uses.
PD (µsec) 0.80
(g) This formulation for TIS is less than that for an alternate formulation in this
PRF (Hz) 58.2*
mode. Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.81
(h) The maximum index value is less than 1.0 Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.36
Information Focal FLx(cm)
5.00 3.50 17.5 (b)
* If the MI comes from a scanning mode Transmit Pattern (pulse), the ‘prr’ Length FLy(cm)
5.00 5.00 5.00 (b)
listed is the average per second for the 'worst case' scan line. ‘prr’ for Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 288
scanning modes is the product of the frame rate and the number of pulse
per line of the Transmit Pattern . Control 1 MI
** The max TIS unscanned value is an ‘at_surface’ value and occurs for Operating Control 2 TIS_as
aperture > 1.0 cm^2, OR The max TIS unscanned value is a Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
‘below_surface’ value and occurs for aperture <= 1.0 cm^2. Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
+ The max TIB for this combinational mode = the at_surface TIS_scanned Control 5 TIB_bs
value. The non-scanned_TIB value indicated is the below_surface max. A
“+” is used when the TIB value is less than the TIS_scanned value for the Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:58.18
operating condition. Control 2: 2D mode , 2D:2.2Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm , FR:103.0
C1-4EC: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA C1-4EC: Pulsed Doppler &2D+Pulsed Doppler

Maximum Index Value 1.55 1.59 0.76** 1.46 4.09 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.53 0.85 0.94** 2.13 4.97 (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.52 Pr.3 (MPa) 2.18
2D P1:8.33 PD
Wo (mW) Wo (mW) 2D P1:5.33 PD
PD P:238 (b) PD P: 376 (b)
Col P1:120 P1x1:58.4 PD P1x1:75.1 P1x1:73.3
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 150 - - - - 218 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1 (cm) 3.84 - z1 (cm) - - - 3.84 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 3.77 - Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 3.77 -
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 2.04 4.74 Acoustic Zsp (cm) 3.66 4.02
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.67 Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.96
fc (MHz) 2D:1.94 fc (MHz) 2D:1.93
2.66 2.72 2.04 2.04 (b) 2.05 2.68 2.05 2.05 (b)
Col:2.65 PD:2.72
X(cm) 2D:4.27 X(cm) 2D:6.14
0.86 3.55 2.69 (b) 2.11 3.55 3.55 (b)
Y(cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 (b) Y(cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.90 - PD (µsec) 1.59 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 65.7* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.85 - Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.49 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.56 Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.82
5.00 3.50 14.5 (b) Information Focal FLx(cm)
3.50 8.80 14.5 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
5.00 5.00 5.00 (b) Length FLy(cm)
5.00 5.00 5.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 266 Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 240
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI
Operating Control 2 TIS_as Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Conditions
Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 2: 2D+Color mode, 2D:1.8Mhz, Col:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm, FR:6.89 Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:1.8Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm, FR:7.27
Control 5: Triple mode, 2D:1.8Mhz , PD:2.0Mhz, Col:2.0Mhz, Focus:11.0Cm, FR:1.69
▐ C2-6IC C2-6IC: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

C2-6IC: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.44 1.77 0.06 0.09 0.15+ (b) Pr.3 (MPa) 2.30
Wo
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.31 (mW) 2D P1:3.44 PD
PD P:70.9 (b)
Wo (mW) 2D P1:132 M P1x1:4.57 M P:4.47 (b) Col P1:130 P1x1:70.9
min of min of
6.97 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 86.3 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1
z1 (cm) 3.20 (cm) 2.80 -
Assoc Zbp
Assoc Zbp (cm) 3.14 (cm) 2.74 -
Acoustic Zsp
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 3.50 3.50 (cm) 1.40 1.30

fc
fc (MHz) 2.57 2.82 2.81 2.79 2.69 (b) (MHz) 2D:2.51
2.62 2.60 2.58 2.60 (b)
Col:2.63
X(cm) 2.31 0.81 2.87 0.94 (b)
Dim of Aaprt X(cm) 2D:3.96
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b) 0.50 2.18 0.50 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.68
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
PRF (Hz) 58.7*
Pr@PIImax PD (µsec) 1.01 -
(MPa) 3.17
PRF (Hz) 76.0* -
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.32 Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.28 -
5.00 5.00 17.5 (b)
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.42
Length FLy(cm)
7.00 7.00 7.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax 5.00 2.00 11.0 (b)
(W/cm2) 313
Length FLy(cm)
7.00 7.00 7.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 210
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs

C2-6IC: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ C3-7IM

TIS TIB TIC C3-7IM: 2D& 2D+M mode
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.24 Maximum Index Value 1.21 1.41 0.05** 0.04 0.06+ (b)
2D P1:5.46 PD
Wo (mW) Pr.3 (MPa) 2.38
PD P: 221 (b)
PD P1x1:93.9 P1x1:83.6 Wo (mW) M
2D P1:76.2 M P:1.78 (b)
min of P1x1:2.45
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 134 -
min of
z1 2.55
(cm) - - - 2.80 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 2.74 -

z1 (cm) 2.33
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 0.90 4.40 Assoc Zbp (cm) 2.33
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.58 Acoustic Zsp (cm) 1.81 1.68
fc (MHz) 2D:2.49 Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.45
2.61 2.61 2.57 2.57 (b)
PD:2.58 fc (MHz) 3.91 3.88 3.88 3.58 3.91 (b)
X(cm) 2D:5.99 X(cm) 2.95 1.01 1.73 0.65 (b)
0.69 2.18 2.18 (b) Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 (b)
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.17
PD (µsec) 1.42 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 152*
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - - Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.92
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.48 - - - -
3.50 5.00 8.80 (b)
8.80 3.50 11.0 (b) Length FLy(cm)
7.50 7.50 7.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
7.00 7.00 7.00 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 366
Control 1 MI TIB_bs
Control 1 MI Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control
Conditions
Control 3 TIS_as_U

C3-7IM:: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA C3-7IM:: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Maximum Index Value 1.20 1.25 0.80** 0.71 2.41 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.27 0.90 1.36** 1.32 2.89 (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
1.98 (MPa) 2.14
2D P1:3.36
Wo (mW) 2D P1:4.11 PD
Wo (mW) PD P:
PD P:56.5 (b) PD P1x1:102 (b)
Col P1:89.0 P1x1:59.6 PD P1x1:70.5 94.3
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 53.4 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 99.0 -
z1 (cm) z1
1.94 - (cm) - - - 1.58 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) Assoc Zbp
2.33 - (cm) - - - 2.08 -
Acoustic Zsp (cm) Acoustic Zsp
0.60 1.56 (cm) 1.44 1.44
fc (MHz) 2D:2.56 fc (MHz) 2D:2.71
2.71 2.81 2.81 2.84 (b) 2.83 2.80 2.80 2.83 (b)
Col:2.82 PD:2.81
X(cm) 2D:6.91 X(cm) 2D:6.91
1.01 1.73 0.65 (b) 1.01 1.37 0.65 (b)
Y(cm) 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 (b) Y(cm) 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.69 - PD (µsec) 1.24 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 4.37* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) Pr@PIImax
2.09 - (MPa) 2.46 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax (cm) Other deq@PIImax
0.37 (cm) 0.52
Information Focal FLx(cm) Information Focal FLx(cm)
14.5 5.00 8.80 (b) 5.00 5.00 6.80 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
7.50 7.50 7.50 (b) Length FLy(cm)
7.50 7.50 7.50 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) Ipa.3 @MImax
112 (W/cm2) 200
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 1: 2D+Color mode , 2D:2.6Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm , FR:4.37 Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm
Control 3: Triple mode, 2D:2.6Mhz, PD:2.8Mhz, Col:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm, FR:1.47 Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode, PD:2.8Mhz, Focus:5.0Cm
▐ C4-9ED C4-9ED 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

C4-9ED: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan Maximum Index Value 1.40 1.41 0.77 0.46** 1.94 1.68
Maximum Index Value 1.52 1.17 0.02 0.01** 0.05+ 1.34 Pr.3 (MPa) 3.14
2D P1:1.25 PD 2D P1:2.06
Wo
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.39 (mW)
PD P:29.3
Wo (mW) 2D P1:50.1 M P1x1:0.80 M P:0.79 M P:52.2 Col P1:57.2 P1x1:32.2 Col P1:94.4
min of min of
0.55 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 19.3 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1
z1 (cm) 1.08 (cm) 1.48 -
Assoc Zbp
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.01 (cm) 1.42 -
Acoustic Zsp

fc
fc (MHz) 4.96 4.92 4.96 4.96 4.91 4.92 (MHz) 2D:4.93 2D:4.93
5.05 5.04 5.04 4.42
Col:5.08 Col:5.05
X(cm) 1.24 0.59 0.59 0.59 1.24
Dim of Aaprt X(cm) 2D:1.91
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 1.18 1.18 0.80 2.69
PD (µsec) 0.20
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
PRF (Hz) 35.8*
(MPa) 4.13
PRF (Hz) 64.1* -
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.22 Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.88 -
1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Length FLy(cm)
3.80 3.80 3.80 3.80
Ipa.3 @MImax 1.50 3.00 3.00 1.50
(W/cm2) 526
Length FLy(cm)
3.80 3.80 3.80 3.80
Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as TIC_as
Control Control 1 MI TIC_as
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Operating
Conditions Control 2 TIS_as
Control 4 TIB_bs Control
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs
C4-9ED: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ C5-2EL

TIS TIB TIC C5-2EL: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.43
2D P1:1.52 PD PD P: PD
Wo (mW)
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.37
PD P1x1:26.3 P1x1:49.0 27.7 P:45.2
Wo (mW) 2D P1:191 M P1x1:1.68 M P:2.92 (b)
min of
- - - 30.3 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 2.67
z1 (cm) - - - 1.40 -
z1 (cm) 3.50
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.66 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 3.28
fc Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.40
(MHz) 4.46 2D:4.68 PD:5.03 4.96 4.96 4.43 4.96
fc (MHz) 2.38 2.46 2.87 2.75 2.74 (b)
X(cm) 2D:2.69 PD:1.60 1.60 1.60 0.80 1.18
Dim of Aaprt X(cm) 2.14 0.82 2.88 1.40 (b)
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.80 - - - -
PD (µsec) 0.85
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax PRF (Hz) 58.2*
(MPa) 4.04 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.13
4.00 4.00 4.00 3.00
Length FLy(cm) 5.00 5.00 17.5 (b)
3.80 3.80 3.80 3.80
Ipa.3 @MImax Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
(W/cm2) 562
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI
Control 5 TIC_as
Control 5 TIB_bs

C5-2EL: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA C5-2EL: Pulsed Doppler &2D+Pulsed Doppler

Maximum Index Value 1.43 1.81 0.87** 1.40 2.89 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.37 1.16 1.32 1.85 3.61 (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.29 Pr.3 (MPa) 2.18
2D P1:4.77 PD
Wo (mW) Wo (mW) 2D P1:10.6 PD
PD P:162 (b) PD P: 207 (b)
Col P1:146 P1x1:72.2 PD P1x1:113 P1x1:108
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 117 - - - - 155 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1 (cm) 1.90 - z1 (cm) - - - 3.00 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 2.60 - Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 2.60 -
fc (MHz) 2D:2.25 fc (MHz) 2D:2.19
2.54 2.55 2.52 2.52 (b) 2.54 2.55 2.51 2.51 (b)
Col:2.53 PD:2.51
X(cm) 2D:4.00 X(cm) 2D:5.27
0.82 1.81 1.81 (b) 0.66 1.81 1.81 (b)
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.98 - PD (µsec) 1.27 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 67.6* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.62 - Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.51 - - - -
11.0 3.50 11.0 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b) Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 196 Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 202
Operating Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
Control Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs Control 4 TIS_bs
▐ EC4-9ES EC4-9ES: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

EC4-9ES: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.34 1.41 0.03 0.02** 0.07+ (b) Pr.3 (MPa) 3.22
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.16 Wo (mW) 2D P1:1.09 PD
Wo PD P:26.3 (b)
(mW) 2D P1:47.1 M P1x1:0.99 M P:0.98 (b) Col P1:52.4 P1x1:26.3
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 0.64 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 15.6 -
z1
z1 (cm) 1.02 (cm) 1.47 -
Assoc Zbp
Assoc Zbp (cm) 0.98 (cm) 1.41 -
Acoustic Zsp
fc
fc (MHz) 5.55 6.30 6.30 6.30 5.24 (b) (MHz) 2D:5.36
5.10 5.10 5.10 5.10 (b)
X(cm) 1.18 0.56 0.56 0.56 (b) Col:5.14
Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) X(cm) 2D:1.82
1.16 1.16 1.16 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.24
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
PRF (Hz) 34.9*
(MPa) 3.97
PRF (Hz) 63.8* -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 4.04 -
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b)
Other deq@PIImax
Length FLy(cm) (cm) 0.21
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax 1.50 3.00 3.00 (b)
(W/cm2) 409
Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control Operating Control 1 MI
Conditions Control Control 2 TIS_as
Control 4 TIB_bs

EC4-9ES: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ EC4-9IS

EC4-9IS: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 1.49 0.95 0.97 0.56 1.83 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.49 1.02 0.05 0.03** 0.10+ (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.14 Pr.3 (MPa) 3.21
2D P1:1.35 PD
Wo (mW) Wo (mW) 2D P1:36.8 M P1x1:1.67 M P:1.29 (b)
PD P: 37.8 (b)
PD P1x1:32.5 P1x1:40.4
min of
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 1.13
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 23.4 -
z1 (cm) 1.00
z1 (cm) - - - 1.47 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 0.96
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.93 -
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.28 fc (MHz) 4.66 5.81 5.70 5.70 4.66 (b)
fc (MHz) 2D:5.11
4.43 5.03 5.04 5.08 (b) X(cm) 1.26 0.54 0.54 0.41 (b)
PD:5.08 Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
X(cm) 2D:2.56
1.56 2.16 1.16 (b) PD (µsec) 0.38
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) PRF (Hz) 37.4*
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.79
PD (µsec) 0.83 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax 2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
(MPa) 3.76 - - - -
Length FLy(cm)
3.50 3.50 3.50 (b)
3.00 4.00 5.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 310 Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 1 MI Conditions
Operating Control 4 TIB_bs
Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:4.4Mhz , Focus:1.5Cm , FR:37.40
EC4-9IS: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA EC4-9IS: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
3.33 (MPa) 3.32
2D P1:2.15 PD 2D P1:2.04 PD
Wo (mW) Wo (mW)
PD P:19.1 (b) PD P: 39.6 (b)
Col P1:48.0 P1x1:25.8 PD P1x1:25.6 P1x1:41.6
min of min of
z1 (cm) z1
1.50 - (cm) - - - 1.50 -
1.49 - (cm) - - - 1.49 -
1.50 2.20 (cm) 2.10 2.00
fc (MHz) 2D:4.60 fc (MHz) 2D:4.56
4.86 4.81 4.81 4.85 (b) 4.75 4.78 4.78 4.83 (b)
Col:4.85 PD:4.78
X(cm) 2D:1.85 X(cm) 2D:2.59
1.30 1.30 0.97 (b) 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.60 - PD (µsec) 0.80 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 82.8* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
4.19 - (MPa) 4.59 - - - -
0.16 (cm) 0.20
1.50 4.00 4.00 (b) 4.00 4.00 4.00 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
3.50 3.50 3.50 (b) Length FLy(cm)
3.50 3.50 3.50 (b)
531 (W/cm2) 480
Operating Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control 4: Triple mode , 2D:4.1Mhz , PD:4.7Mhz , Col:4.7Mhz , Focus:3.0Cm , FR:2.43 Control 4: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:4.7Mhz , Focus:4.0Cm
▐ L4-7EL L4-7EL: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

L4-7EL: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 1.35 0.54 0.03 0.02** 0.04+ (b) Maximum Index Value 1.50 1.90 1.52 0.99 2.09 (b)
Pr.3
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.82 (MPa) 2.86
2D P1:0.38
Wo
Wo (mW) 2D P1:25.6 M (mW)
M P:1.54 (b) PD
M P1x1:0.94 P1x1:1.54 PD P1x1:44.0 PD P:69.3 (b)
P1x1:69.3
Col P1:17.4
min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 0.94 min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 45.5 -
z1 (cm) 1.70
z1 (cm) 2.00 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.67
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.93 -
fc Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.39
(MHz) 4.39 4.21 4.21 4.21 4.21 (b)
fc (MHz) 2D:4.29
X(cm) 2D:3.84
1.62 1.62 1.62 (b) 3.65 PD:4.61 4.61 4.58 4.61 (b)
Dim of Aaprt M:1.62
Col:4.55
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
X(cm) 2D:3.84
PD (µsec) 0.28
PD:1.56 1.56 2.16 1.56 (b)
PRF (Hz) 167* Dim of Aaprt
Col:3.39
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.89 Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.45 PD (µsec) 0.70 -
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b) PRF (Hz) 64.9* -
Length FLy(cm)
1.70 1.70 1.70 (b) Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.57 -
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 313 Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.29
4.70 4.70 6.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
1.70 1.70 1.70 (b)
Operating Control 1 MI TIS_bs TIB_bs
Ipa.3 @MImax
Control (W/cm2) 428
Conditions Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Control 1: 2D+M mode , 2D:8.8Mhz , Focus:3.2Cm , FR:47.27 Conditions Control 3 TIS_bs

L4-7EL: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ L5-9EE

L5-9EE: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.40 1.34 1.29** 0.93 2.69 (b) Aaprt≤1 Aaprt>1 scan
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.67 Maximum Index Value 1.31 0.71 0.02 0.01** 0.03+ (b)
2D P1:2.18 PD
Wo (mW) Pr.3 (MPa) 2.95
PD P: 72.2 (b)
PD P1x1:30.4 P1x1:51.2 Wo (mW) 2D P1:27.0 M P1x1:0.97 M P:0.53 (b)
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 36.9 - 0.62
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1 (cm) - - - 1.60 - z1 (cm) 1.60
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.93 - Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.55
fc (MHz) 2D:4.01 fc (MHz) 5.08 5.52 4.15 4.15 4.75 (b)
3.63 5.31 5.31 3.60 (b)
PD:5.31
X(cm) 1.75 2.11 2.11 0.78 (b)
X(cm) 2D:3.84 Dim of Aaprt
2.16 2.16 1.56 (b) Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.23
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
PRF (Hz) 63.4*
PD (µsec) 1.02 - - - - Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.69
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax
Pr@PIImax (cm) 0.19
(MPa) 3.56 - - - -
1.70 6.50 6.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
1.80 1.80 1.80 (b)
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 395
Length FLy(cm)
1.70 1.70 1.70 (b)
Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Operating Control 1 MI Control
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIS_bs Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs

L5-9EE: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA L5-9EE: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
TIS TIB TIC

TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.23
(MPa) 3.37
2D P1:1.10 PD
Wo (mW) PD P:
2D P1:0.17
Wo (mW) (b)
PD PD P1x1:26.4 P1x1:45.5 33.5
PD P1x1:20.5 PD P:26.2 (b)
P1x1:31.5 min of
Col P1:7.14 - - - 29.3 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 19.6 - z1 (cm) - - - 1.30 -
Assoc Zbp
z1 (cm) 1.40 - (cm) - - - 1.55 -
Acoustic Zsp
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.34 - (cm) 0.90 1.40
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 0.80 1.40 Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.29

fc
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.29 (MHz) 4.92 2D:4.78 PD:4.88 4.92 4.92 4.91 (b)
fc (MHz) 2D:5.04 X(cm) 2D:4.99 PD:1.56 2.11 2.11 1.01 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
4.90 PD:4.92 4.92 4.92 4.93 (b) Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
Col:4.89 PD (µsec) 0.61 - - - -
X(cm) 2D:4.99 PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
PD:1.56 1.56 1.56 1.01 (b) Pr@PIImax (MPa)
Dim of Aaprt 3.55 - - - -
Col:3.90
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
4.70 6.50 6.50 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.43 - Length FLy(cm)
1.80 1.80 1.80 (b)
PRF (Hz) 76.5* - Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 485
Control 1 MI
4.70 4.70 4.70 (b) Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Length FLy(cm)
1.80 1.80 1.80 (b) Control
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 510 Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:6.8Mhz, PD:5.1Mhz, Focus:4.7Cm, FR:7.17
Conditions Control 3 TIB_bs Control 3: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:5.1Mhz , Focus:6.5Cm
▐ L5-12IM L5-12IM: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

L5-12IM: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.56 2.48 0.07 0.04** 0.08+ (b) Pr.3 (MPa) 3.39
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.82
2D P1:6.45 PD
Wo (mW) PD
Wo (mW) M M (b)
2D P1:86.3 (b) Col P1:66.0 P1x1:60.0 P:30.7
P1x1:2.20 P:0.86
min of
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 41.3 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 1.43
z1 (cm) 1.10 -
z1 (cm) 1.00
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.57
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.17 fc (MHz) 2D:4.96
fc (MHz) 6.03 6.03 6.24 6.24 5.23 (b) 4.63 4.91 4.91 4.98 (b)
Col:5.00
X(cm) 1.26 2.16 2.16 0.56 (b) X(cm) 2D:2.22
Dim of Aaprt 2.16 2.16 0.80 (b)
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Dim of Aaprt Col:1.18
PD (µsec) 0.26 Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PRF (Hz) 64.0* PD (µsec) 0.55 -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 4.44 PRF (Hz) 74.6* -
Other deq@PIImax
1.00 6.50 6.50 (b) (cm) 0.20
Length FLy(cm)
1.00 6.50 6.50 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 793 Length FLy(cm)
1.80 1.80 1.80 (b)
Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control 1 MI
Control Operating
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Control
Control 4 TIB_bs Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs

L5-12IM: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ L6-12IS

L6-12IS: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.23 Pr.3 (MPa) 4.22
2D P1:6.91 PD
Wo (mW) PD P:
(b) Wo (mW)
PD P1x1:32.2 P1x1:94.1 67.6 2D P1:83.1 M P1x1:3.29 M P:3.12 (b)
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 69.9 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 2.32
z1 (cm) - - - 0.80 - z1 (cm) 0.70
fc (MHz) 2D:4.60 fc (MHz) 7.71 6.60 6.78 6.71 5.90 (b)
4.97 5.04 5.01 4.97 (b)
PD:5.02 X(cm) 1.72 2.14 1.62 1.62 (b)
Dim of Aaprt
X(cm) 2D:3.84 Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
2.16 2.16 1.04 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.17
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PRF (Hz) 64.6*
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.88 - - - -
3.20 6.50 6.50 (b)
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.32 Length FLy(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 772
Length FLy(cm)
1.80 1.80 1.80 (b)
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI
Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs
L6-12IS: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA L6-12IS: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Pr.3 Pr.3
(MPa) 3.78 (MPa) 4.11
2D P1:1.99 2D P1:9.31
Wo (mW) Wo (mW) PD P:
PD PD P1x1:114 (b)
PD P1x1:42.3 PD P:89.6 (b) PD P1x1:42.3 109
P1x1:89.6
Col P1:10.9 min of
- - - 88.4 -
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 58.3 - z1 (cm) - - - 0.60 -
z1 (cm) 1.00 - Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.57 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.57 - Acoustic Zsp (cm) 0.60 1.10
fc 6.14 6.12 6.12 5.25 (b)
(MHz) 2D:5.46 PD:6.23
6.08 PD:6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23 (b) X(cm) 2D:3.80
2.14 2.14 2.14 (b)
Col:5.31 Dim of Aaprt PD:2.14
X(cm) 2D:3.80 Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PD:2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 (b) PD (µsec)
Dim of Aaprt 0.57 - - - -
Col:3.80
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Pr@PIImax (MPa) 4.63 - - - -
PD (µsec) 0.41 -
PRF (Hz) 72.5* -
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b)
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 4.29 - Length FLy(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.47 Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 623
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax Control 1 MI
(W/cm2) 516 Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Conditions
Operating Control 1 MI Control 4 TIB_bs
Control
TIS_as_
Conditions Control 2 TIS_as TIS_bs TIB_bs Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:6.2Mhz , Focus:3.2Cm
U
▐ L8-15IS L8-15IS: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

L8-15IS: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 1.51 2.59 0.10 0.06** 0.06+ (b) Maximum Index Value 1.52 1.80 1.47 0.93** 1.65+ (b)
Pr.3
Pr.3 (MPa) 4.23 (MPa) 4.14
Wo
Wo (mW) M M (mW) 2D P1:0.32 PD
2D P1:61.7 (b) PD P:40.5 (b)
P1x1:2.21 P:2.01 Col P1:49.9 P1x1:40.5
min of min of
1.28 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 25.6 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1
z1 (cm) 0.87 (cm) 0.87 -
Assoc Zbp
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.57 (cm) 1.57 -
Acoustic Zsp

fc
fc (MHz) 7.83 8.81 9.05 9.05 8.25 (b) (MHz) 2D:7.32
7.47 7.64 7.64 7.64 (b)
Col:7.52
X(cm) 1.74 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b)
Dim of Aaprt X(cm) 2.56 2.16 2.16 2.16 (b)
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.17
PD (µsec) 0.34 -
PRF (Hz) 64.6*
Pr@PIImax PRF (Hz) 76.8* -
(MPa) 5.78
2.50 6.50 6.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm) 3.20 6.50 6.50 (b)
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b)
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b)
(W/cm2) 1266
Control 1 MI
Operating Operating Control 1 MI
Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control 4 TIB_bs

L8-15IS: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ P2-4AC

TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.64 Pr.3 (MPa) 1.78
2D P1:0.51
Wo (mW) PD PD P: Wo
(b) (mW) 2D P1:125 M 2D P:90.6
PD P1x1:27.6 P1x1:59.9 59.6 M P1x1:3.75
M P1x1:4.09 P:5.80 M P:2.62
min of
- - - 38.0 - min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 5.62
z1 (cm) - - - 0.87 - z1 (cm) 2.40
fc (MHz) 2D:7.68 fc (MHz) 2.14 3.05 3.05 2.88 2.54 2.56
7.57 7.62 7.60 7.63 (b)
PD:7.63
X(cm) 0.78 0.78 1.92 1.92 0.36
2.16 2.16 2.16 (b) Y(cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
PD (µsec) 0.72
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PRF (Hz) 199*
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax
Pr@PIImax (cm) 0.30
(MPa) 4.40 - - - -
4.00 4.00 10.0 2.00
Length FLy(cm)
8.50 8.50 8.50 8.50
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 273
Length FLy(cm)
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b)
Control 1 MI
Operating Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U
Control 1 MI
Operating Control Control 3 TIS_bs
Control Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions Control 5 TIC_as
Control 4 TIS_bs

P2-4AC: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA P2-4AC: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Maximum Index Value 1.09 1.01 0.74 0.77 2.64 2.24 Maximum Index Value 1.38 0.95 0.95** 1.24 3.06 2.32
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
1.71 (MPa) 2.16
2D P1:2.75 2D P1:2.15 2D P1:11.2 PD PD P: 2D P:9.09
Wo (mW) Wo (mW)
PD
PD P1x1:66.7 PD P1x1:63.6 PD P1x1:48.4 PD P1x1:79.7 P1x1:81.9 89.4 PD P:65.3
P:63.6
Col P1:27.3 Col P1:28.8 min of
- - - 107 -
min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 66.7 -
z1 (cm) - - - 2.10 -
z1 (cm) 2.10 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 2.78 -
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.44 fc (MHz) 2D:1.90 2D:1.91
2.45 2.44 2.44 2.44
2D:1.90 2D:1.90
fc (MHz) PD:2.44 PD:2.45
2.45 PD:2.44 2.45 2.44 2.45 PD:2.45 X(cm) 0.78 0.78 1.92 0.78 0.36
Col:2.08 Col:2.08 Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
X(cm) 2D:0.78 2D:0.36
PD:0.78 0.66 1.92 0.66 PD:0.36 PD (µsec) 1.51 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Y(cm) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.44 - - - -
PD (µsec) 1.49 -
PRF (Hz) 1874* -
4.00 4.00 12.0 2.00
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 1.88 - Length FLy(cm)
8.50 8.50 8.50 8.50
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.44 Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 224
4.00 2.00 12.0 2.00
Length FLy(cm)
8.50 8.50 8.50 8.50
Ipa.3 @MImax Control 1 MI
(W/cm2) 122
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Control 1 MI TIS_as_U TIB_bs Conditions Control 4
Operating TIS_bs
Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control 5 TIC_as
Control 3 TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIC_as
Control 4: Triple mode , 2D:1.7Mhz, PD:2.5Mhz, Col:2.0Mhz, Focus:2.0Cm, FR:4.93
P2-4AC: CW ▐ P3-5AC
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 0.06 (a) 0.70** 0.67 2.70 1.73
Pr.3 (MPa) 0.09 Pr.3
Wo (MPa) 2.35
(mW) (a) 67.2 82.4 90.3
2D P1:132
Wo (mW) M M
min of M P1x1:5.40
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 63.6 - M P1x1:3.91 P:5.21 P:134
min of
z1 (cm) - - - 1.70 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 6.34
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.96 - z1 (cm) 1.90
Assoc Zbp (cm) 2.20
fc (MHz) 2.20 (a) 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20
X(cm) (a) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 fc
Dim of Aaprt (MHz) 2.89 2.89 2.78 2.78 2.89 2.90
Y(cm) (a) 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
X(cm) 1.32 1.41 1.41 1.32 0.66
PD (µsec) cw - - - - Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
PRF (Hz) cw - - - -
PD (µsec) 0.43
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 0.10 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 139*
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.53 Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.75
(a) 16.0 2.00 16.0
Length FLy(cm)
(a) 8.50 8.50 8.50
4.00 16.0 16.0 2.00
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 0.28 Length FLy(cm)
7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00

Control Control 1 MI
Operating
Conditions Control 2 TIS_as_U Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
Control
Conditions
Control 1: CW mode, CW:2.2Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm Control 4 TIC_as
Control 2: CW mode, CW:2.2Mhz , Focus:16.0Cm

Maximum Index Value 1.36 1.36 1.01** 1.12 2.74 2.65 Maximum Index Value 1.59 1.35 1.33** 1.47 2.92 2.63
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
2.04 (MPa) 2.86
Wo
Wo (mW) 2D P1:3.46 2D P1:4.92 (mW) 2D P1:16.9 PD PD P: 2D P:24.0
PD PD
PD P1x1:78.1 PD P1x1:111 PD P1x1:91.5 P1x1:86.5 59.6 PD P:130
P1x1:65.8 P:55.6
Col P1:27.8 Col P1:39.6 min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 96.6 -
min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 72.5 - z1 (cm) - - - 1.80 -
Assoc Zbp
z1 (cm) 1.90 - (cm) - - - 2.20 -
Acoustic Zsp
Assoc Zbp (cm) 2.20 - (cm) 4.30 1.40

fc
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.36 (MHz) 2D:2.23 2D:2.23
3.23 3.23 3.21 2.27
fc PD:3.21 PD:3.21
(MHz) 2D:2.27 2D:2.27
X(cm) 1.41 1.41 1.41 0.66 1.41
2.27 PD:3.24 3.24 3.23 2.27 PD:3.24 Dim of Aaprt
Col:2.33 Col:2.33 Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
X(cm) 1.41 1.41 1.41 0.66 1.41 PD (µsec) 1.17 - - - -

Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax
PD (µsec) 1.53 - (MPa) 4.10 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax
PRF (Hz) 1874* - (cm) 0.36
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.27 - 14.0 10.0 12.0 14.0

7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
Ipa.3 @MImax
10.0 10.0 12.0 10.0 (W/cm2) 373
Length FLy(cm)
7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
Operating Control 2 TIS_as TIC_as
Operating Control 1 MI TIB_bs Control Control 3 TIS_as_U

Control Control 2 TIS_as TIS_as_U TIC_as Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Conditions Control 3 TIS_bs Control 5 TIB_bs
P3-5AC: CW ▐ P3-7AC
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.46 1.75 0.12 0.09** 0.14+ 2.17
Pr.3 (MPa) 0.12 Pr.3
Wo (MPa) 3.04
(mW) (a) 150 135 150
2D P1:82.7M 2D P:85.3
Wo (mW)
min of M P1x1:5.94 M P:5.94
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 98.2 - P1x1:3.09 M P:3.19
min of
z1 (cm) - - - 1.80 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 4.68
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.56 - z1 (cm) 0.84
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.53
fc (MHz) 2.57 (a) 2.57 2.57 2.57 2.57
X(cm) (a) 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 fc
Dim of Aaprt (MHz) 4.32 4.28 4.11 4.11 4.11 4.28
Y(cm) (a) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
X(cm) 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02
PD (µsec) cw - - - - Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
PRF (Hz) cw - - - -
PD (µsec) 0.28
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 0.17 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 143*
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.47 Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.61
(a) 14.0 2.00 14.0
Length FLy(cm)
(a) 7.00 7.00 7.00
4.00 16.0 16.0 4.00
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 0.47 Length FLy(cm)
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
Operating Control 1 MI TIC_as
Conditions Control 3 TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIC_as
Maximum Index Value 1.16 1.28 0.97 0.69** 1.53 1.59 Maximum Index Value 1.53 1.31 1.34 0.95** 2.00 1.59
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
2.49 (MPa) 3.29
Wo (mW) Wo
2D P1:4.85 PD PD 2D P1:4.75 (mW) 2D P1:11.9 PD PD P: PD
Col P1:56.9 P1x1:45.1 P:43.2 Col P1:46.8 PD P1x1:49.1 P1x1:62.0 63.0 P:65.1
min of min of
z1 (cm) z1
1.08 - (cm) - - - 1.08 -
1.53 - (cm) - - - 1.53 -
1.20 2.52 (cm) 1.20 3.00
fc (MHz) 2D:3.79 2D:3.78 fc (MHz) 2D:3.80
4.58 4.53 4.53 4.58 4.61 4.53 4.53 3.66 3.62
Col:4.40 Col:3.69 PD:4.53
X(cm) 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 0.64 X(cm) 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02
Y(cm) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Y(cm) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80
PD (µsec) 0.54 - PD (µsec) 0.78 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 129* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
3.01 - (MPa) 3.98 - - - -
0.26 (cm) 0.31
12.0 16.0 16.0 2.00 12.0 16.0 16.0 10.0
Length FLy(cm)
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 Length FLy(cm)
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
223 (W/cm2) 386
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs Conditions Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIC_as Control 5 TIC_as
Control 2: 2D+Color mode , 2D:3.6Mhz , Col:4.7Mhz , Focus:12.0Cm , FR:8.06 Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode,2D:3.6Mhz, PD:4.7Mhz,Focus:12.0Cm,FR:10.95
Control 4: Triple mode, 2D:3.6Mhz, PD:4.7Mhz, Col:3.6Mhz, Focus:4.0Cm , FR:3.80 Control 4: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:3.6Mhz , Focus:8.0Cm
P3-7AC: CW ▐ 3D2-6ET
3D2-6ET: 2D& 2D+M mode
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3 (MPa) 0.07 Pr.3
Wo (MPa) 2.29
(mW) (a) 66.1 57.2 66.1 Wo (mW) 2D P1:139 M P1x1:4.37 M P:5.94 (b)
min of
- - - 32.8 - min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 5.80
z1 (cm) - - - 2.10 - z1 (cm) 3.20
fc (MHz) 3.85 (a) 3.85 3.85 3.85 3.85 fc (MHz) 2.37 2.28 2.28 2.15 2.22 (b)
X(cm) (a) 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48 X(cm) 2.36 0.83 2.68 1.66 (b)
Y(cm) (a) 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
PD (µsec) cw - - - - PD (µsec) 0.64
PRF (Hz) cw - - - - PRF (Hz) 39.4*
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 0.10 - - - - Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.92
(a) 14.0 2.00 14.0 Information Focal FLx(cm)
3.50 3.50 11.0 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
(a) 5.00 5.00 5.00 Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 0.16 Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 356
Operating Control 1 MI TIS_bs TIB_bs TIC_as Control 1 MI

Control Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Control 2 TIS_as_U Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 5 TIB_bs
3D2-6ET: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA 3D2-6ET: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
1.66 (MPa) 2.25
Wo
Wo (mW) 2D P1:2.67 PD PD (mW) 2D P1:3.54 PD PD P:
(b) (b)
Col P1:68.7 P1x1:45.3 P:58.3 PD P1x1:65.5 P1x1:69.5 69.6
min of min of
44.0 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 65.5 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1
z1 (cm) - - - 1.60 -
(cm) 1.60 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 2.49 -
fc
fc (MHz) 2D:2.21
(MHz) 2D:2.21 2.84 2.90 2.86 2.87 (b)
2.38 2.88 2.86 2.37 (b) PD:2.89
Col:2.84
X(cm) 2D:5.91
X(cm) 2D:3.88 0.46 1.66 0.46 (b)
0.46 1.66 0.83 (b) Dim of Aaprt PD:0.46
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
PD (µsec) 1.31 - - - -
PD (µsec) 1.09 -
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 27.9* -
Pr@PIImax
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.18 - - - -
(MPa) 1.74 -
2.00 2.00 6.80 (b)
3.50 2.00 6.80 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax
(W/cm2) 89.0
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI TIS_as_U
Operating Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 3 TIS_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs


TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.24 Wo (mW) 2D P1:4.35 PD PD
(b)
Wo (mW) Col P1:103 P1x1:67.4 P:57.2
2D P1:96.0 M P1x1:3.26 M P:2.67 (b)
min of
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 71.4 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 4.57
z1
z1 (cm) 3.10 -
(cm) 3.60
Assoc Zbp (cm) 3.58
fc (MHz) 2D:2.20
fc (MHz) 2.27 2.31 2.46 2.14 2.36 (b) 2.50 2.47 2.45 2.50 (b)
Col:2.49
X(cm) 2.14 0.65 3.44 0.37 (b) X(cm) 2D:3.67
Dim of Aaprt 0.74 2.42 0.37 (b)
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) Dim of Aaprt Col:1.53
PD (µsec) 0.77 Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
PRF (Hz) 39.8* PD (µsec) 0.96 -

Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.83 PRF (Hz) 97.7* -
Pr@PIImax
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.42 (MPa) 2.36 -
Other deq@PIImax
3.50 3.50 17.5 (b) (cm) 0.42
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b) 3.50 3.50 11.0 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 222 Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Control 1 MI
Operating Control 2 TIS_as Control 1 MI
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Operating Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 5 TIB_bs Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs

Control 5 TIB_bs

3D3-5EK: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ 3D4-7EK

Maximum Index Value 1.49 0.87 0.84 1.15 3.09 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.43 2.13 0.06 0.04 0.13+ (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.35 Pr.3 (MPa) 2.32
(mW) 2D P1:3.11 PD PD P: Wo (mW)
Wo
(b) 2D P1:153 M P1x1:4.00 M P:4.89 (b)
PD P1x1:71.4 P1x1:71.4 61.6 min of
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 3.16
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 98.3 -
z1 (cm) 2.90
z1 (cm) - - - 3.10 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 2.85
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 3.00 -
fc (MHz) 2D:2.21
2.50 2.47 2.45 2.48 (b) X(cm) 1.99 0.76 2.37 1.91 (b)
X(cm) 2D:5.95 Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
0.74 2.42 0.37 (b)
Dim of Aaprt PD:0.74 PD (µsec) 0.62
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) PRF (Hz) 57.0*
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - - Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.42
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.40 - - - - Information Focal FLx(cm)
3.50 3.50 11.0 (b)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b)
3.50 3.50 11.0 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 167
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Control 1 MI
Control 1 MI Control Control 3 TIS_as_U
Operating Control 2 TIS_as Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control 5 TIB_bs
Control 5 TIB_bs Control 1: 2D mode , 2D:2.5Mhz , Focus:2.0Cm , FR:57.03
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.50 2.39 1.25 1.01** 3.19 (b) Pr.3 (MPa) 2.37
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.50 Wo (mW) 2D P1:5.26
PD P1x1:112 PD P: 112 (b)
PD P1x1:99.9
Wo (mW) 2D P1:8.34 PD
PD P:94.1 (b)
Col P1:173 P1x1:94.1 min of
- - - 90.4 -
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 76.1 - z1 (cm) - - - 1.10 -
z1 (cm) 1.10 - Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.15 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 1.15 - Acoustic Zsp (cm) 3.40 1.10
fc 2.78 2.78 2.78 2.78 (b)
(MHz) 2D:2.62 PD:2.79
2.77 2.79 2.79 2.79 (b)
Col:2.77 X(cm) 2D:4.89
0.38 0.38 0.38 (b)
X(cm) 2D:3.55 Dim of Aaprt PD:0.38
0.38 0.38 0.38 (b)
Dim of Aaprt Col:1.80 Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b) PD (µsec) 1.17 - - - -
PD (µsec) 0.91 - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 75.9* - Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.22 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.15 - Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.50
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.51 Information Focal FLx(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
Information Focal FLx(cm) Length
5.00 2.00 2.00 (b) FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 312
Operating Control 1 MI Control Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control 2 TIS_as Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs

▐ 3D4-8ET 3D4-8ET: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

3D4-8ET: 2D& 2D+M mode TIS TIB TIC
Wo
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.39 - - - - - (mW) 2D P1:6.53 PD P1x1: PD
Wo (b)
(mW) - 2D P1: 53.3 M P1x1: 1.62 M P:1.62 (b) Col P1:37.9 24.0 P:24.0
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 2.01 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 17.3 -
z1 (cm) 4.00 z1 (cm) 3.70 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 4.03 Assoc Zbp (cm) 3.66 -
fc (MHz) 3.35 3.74 3.69 3.41 3.69 (b) fc (MHz) 2D:3.13
3.05 4.07 4.01 4.08 (b)
X(cm) - 1.65 0.45 4.35 0.45 (b) Col:3.9
Dim of Aaprt
Y(cm) - 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) X(cm) 2D:3.64
0.45 3.60 0.45 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.41 Dim of Aaprt Col:3.38
PRF (Hz) 40.3* Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)

Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.30 PD (µsec) 0.46 -
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.34 PRF (Hz) 7.43* -

Pr@PIImax
2.00 2.00 17.5 (b) (MPa) 3.25 -
Other deq@PIImax
Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b) (cm) 0.29
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 167 2.00 2.00 14.5 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b)
Control 1 MI
Control Control 3 TIS_as_U Control 1 MI
Operating
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 5 TIB_bs Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 1: 2D mode, 3.6MHz, Focus:5cm, FR:40.34

Control 2: 2D mode, 4.4MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:74.50 Control 1: 2D + Color mode, 2D 3.2MHz, Col 5.6MHz, Focus:3.5cm, FR:7.43
Control 3: 2D + M mode, 4.4MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:21.04 Control 2: 2D + Color mode, 2D 3.2MHz, Col 4.1MHz, Focus:5cm, FR:5.90
Control 4: 2D + M mode, 3.9MHz, Focus:17.5cm, FR:9.38 Control 3: Tripple mode, 2D 3.2MHz, PD 4.1MHz, Col 4.1MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:8.85
Control 5: 2D + M mode, 4.4MHz, Focus:2cm, FR:21.04 Control 4: Tripple mode,2D 3.2MHz, PD 4.1MHz, Col 4.1MHz, Focus:14.5cm,FR:4.50
3D4-8ET: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler ▐ 3D5-8EK

TIS TIB TIC 3D5-8EK: 2D& 2D+M mode
Pr.3 (MPa) 2.27 Maximum Index Value 1.05 0.86 0.03 0.02** 0.07+ (b)
2D P1:9.21 PD P1x1:
Wo (mW) PD P: Pr.3 (MPa) 2.21
(b)
PD P1x1:26.7 35.3 32.9 Wo (mW) 2D P1:38.6 M P1x1:1.24 M P:1.19 (b)
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 29.2 - 1.02
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1 (cm) - - - 1.40 - z1 (cm) 0.60
fc (MHz) 2D:3.20 fc (MHz) 4.43 4.69 4.67 4.67 4.43 (b)
4.05 4.00 4.00 4.07 (b)
PD:4.03
X(cm) 0.96 0.32 0.32 0.64 (b)
- 0.825 1.20 0.45 (b) Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.49
Y(cm) - 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
PRF (Hz) 207*
PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax
Pr@PIImax (cm) 0.20
(MPa) 2.54 - - - -
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
3.50 3.50 5.00 (b) Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 226
Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b)
Control 1 MI TIB_bs
Operating Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs
Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions Control 1: 2D+M mode , 2D:4.4Mhz , Focus:3.0Cm , FR:26.66
Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 2: 2D + PD mode, 2D 3.2MHz, PD 4.1MHz, Focus:3.5cm, FR:21.04
Control 3: PD mode, 4.1MHz, Focus:3.5cm

Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
2.11 (MPa) 2.87
2D P1:2.92 PD
Wo (mW) 2D P1:2.67 PD Wo (mW)
PD P:25.2 (b) PD P: 27.3 (b)
Col P1:47.0 P1x1:25.2 PD P1x1:26.7 P1x1:27.3
min of min of
z1 (cm) z1
1.00 - (cm) - - - 1.00 -
0.91 - (cm) - - - 0.91 -
1.80 1.60 (cm) 1.70 1.50
fc (MHz) 2D:4.28 fc (MHz) 2D:4.32
4.68 4.70 4.70 4.70 (b) 4.68 4.69 4.69 4.69 (b)
Col:4.67 PD:4.70
X(cm) 2D:2.56 X(cm) 2D:2.56
0.48 0.48 0.48 (b) 0.48 0.48 0.48 (b)
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.67 - PD (µsec) 0.80 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 70.7* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
2.77 - (MPa) 3.49 - - - -
0.22 (cm) 0.22
2.00 1.50 1.50 (b) 3.00 1.50 1.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b) Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
272 (W/cm2) 510
Operating Control 1 MI Operating Control 1 MI

Control Control 2 TIS_as Control Control 2 TIS_as
Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs Conditions Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control 3: Triple mode , 2D:4.1Mhz , PD:4.7Mhz , Col:4.7Mhz , Focus:1.5Cm , Control 3: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:4.1Mhz, PD:4.7Mhz, Focus:1.5Cm, FR:7.27
FR:1.75
▐ VAW3-5
VAW3-5: 2D& 2D+M mode VAW3-5: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Maximum Index Value 1.01 1.16 0.55 0.50 1.50 (b)
Pr.3
Pr.3 (MPa) 1.55
(MPa) 1.49
Wo
Wo (mW) (mW) 2D P1:0.68 PD PD
2D P1:27.0 M P1x1:2.06 M P:3.93 (b) (b)
min of Col P1:100 P1x1:45.6 P:45.6
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 2.68
min of
z1 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 42.4 -
(cm) 5.00
z1
Assoc Zbp (cm) 3.45 (cm) 4.00 -
Assoc Zbp
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 5.00 5.20 (cm) 3.02 -
Acoustic Zsp
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.47 (cm) 4.80 1.60
fc (MHz) 2.25 2.22 3.05 2.76 2.75 (b) Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.52
fc
X(cm) 6.02 0.75 3.20 1.50 (b) (MHz) 2D:3.14
Dim of Aaprt 2.32 2.51 2.49 2.51 (b)
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) Col:2.41
X(cm) 2D:6.02
PD (µsec) 0.63 0.75 2.44 0.75 (b)
PRF (Hz) 45.8*
Pr@PIImax Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b)
(MPa) 1.97
PD (µsec) 1.05 -
PRF (Hz) 19.8* -
11.0 3.50 14.5 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Other deq@PIImax
Ipa.3 @MImax (cm) 0.48
(W/cm2) 140
11.0 3.50 11.0 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Control 1 MI Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 135
Control 1 MI
Conditions Control 4 TIS_bs Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control 5 TIB_bs Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs
Control 4: 2D+M mode , 2D:3.9Mhz , Focus:14.5Cm , FR:14.58 Control 2: CPA mode , 2D:4.4Mhz , Col:2.6Mhz , Focus:11.0Cm , FR:12.89
Control 5: 2D+M mode , 2D:3.9Mhz , Focus:6.8Cm , FR:24.00 Control 3: Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.4Mhz,PD:2.6Mhz,Col:2.6Mhz,Focus:11.0Cm,FR:1.72
Control 4: Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.4Mhz,PD:2.6Mhz,Col:2.6Mhz, Focus:3.5Cm, FR:1.72
▐ VAW4-7
VAW3-5: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler VAW4-7: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 0.94 0.69 0.70** 1.00 2.55 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.34 0.55 0.07 0.10 0.12+ (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) 1.48 Pr.3 (MPa) 2.28
2D P1:0.78 PD
Wo (mW) Wo
PD P: 110 (b) (mW) 2D P1:29.0 M P1x1:3.74 M P:8.41 (b)
PD P1x1:72.2 P1x1:58.0
min of
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 6.14
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 82.7 -
z1 (cm) 1.40
z1 (cm) - - - 1.80 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 2.56
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 2.37 -
fc (MHz) 2D:3.38
2.51 2.54 2.54 2.51 (b) X(cm) 4.86 0.76 1.90 1.90 (b)
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
X(cm) 2D:6.02
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b) PD (µsec) 0.50
Y(cm) 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30 (b) PRF (Hz) 19.7*
Pr@PIImax
PD (µsec) 1.23 - - - - (MPa) 3.18
Other deq@PIImax
PRF (Hz) (cm) 0.62
999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 1.39 - - - - 17.5 3.50 8.80 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax
Information Focal FLx(cm) (W/cm2) 315
6.80 6.80 6.80 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
8.00 8.00 8.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax (W/cm2) 81.9 Control 1 MI
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 1 Control 3 TIS_as_U
Operating MI Conditions
Control Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode, 2D:4.4Mhz, PD:2.6Mhz,Focus:6.8Cm, FR:24.82
VAW4-7: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA VAW4-7: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
2.30 (MPa) 2.03
2D P1:1.13 PD
Wo (mW) 2D P1:1.13 PD PD Wo (mW) PD P:
(b) (b)
Col P1:110 P1x1:56.1 P:140 PD P1x1:69.9 P1x1:69.9 195
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 79.2 - [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 110 -
z1 (cm) z1
3.00 - (cm) - - - 3.00 -
2.85 - (cm) - - - 2.85 -
3.80 4.00 (cm) 3.40 4.60
fc (MHz) 2D:3.98 fc (MHz) 2D:3.99
2.76 2.77 2.75 2.75 (b) 2.77 2.79 2.78 2.78 (b)
Col:2.74 PD:2.79
X(cm) 2D:4.86 X(cm) 2D:4.86
0.76 2.36 2.36 (b) 0.76 2.36 2.36 (b)
Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b) Y(cm) 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.94 - PD (µsec) 1.32 - - - -
PRF (Hz) 40.3* - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
3.23 - (MPa) 2.73 - - - -
0.56 (cm) 0.50
8.80 3.50 11.0 (b) 3.50 3.50 11.0 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b) Length FLy(cm)
6.00 6.00 6.00 (b)
267 (W/cm2) 222
Operating Operating
Control 2 TIS_as Control 2 TIS_as
Control Control
Control 3 TIS_as_U Control 3 TIS_as_U
Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs
Control 1:2D+Color mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:6.8Cm , FR:2.52 Control 1: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:5.0Cm
Control 2:CPA mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , Col:2.8Mhz , Focus:8.8Cm , FR:13.78 Control 2: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode , 2D:4.1Mhz , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:24.48
Control 3:Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.7Mhz,PD:2.8Mhz,Col:2.8Mhz,Focus:3.5Cm,FR:3.56 Control 3: 2D+Pulsed Doppler mode , 2D:4.7Mhz , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:3.5Cm , FR:24.48
Control 4:Triple+CPA mode,2D:4.7Mhz,PD:2.8Mhz,Col:2.8Mhz,Focus:11.0Cm,FR:3.56 Control 4: Pulsed Doppler mode , PD:2.8Mhz , Focus:11.0Cm
▐ VNA6-12
VNA6-12: 2D& 2D+M mode VNA6-12: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA
TIS TIB TIC
TIS TIB TIC
Pr.3
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.37
(MPa) 3.85
Wo (mW) 2D P1:4.77 PD PD
2D P1:63.1
Wo (mW) (b)
M P1x1:3.33 M P:3.34 (b) Col P1:60.2 P1x1:21.4 P:14.8
M P1x1:1.76
min of
min of 16.2 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 2.50 [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
z1
z1 (cm) 0.80 -
(cm) 0.70
Assoc Zbp
Assoc Zbp (cm) (cm) 1.57 -
1.57
fc
fc (MHz) 2D:5.00
(MHz) 5.65 5.88 5.94 5.94 5.32 (b) 5.05 5.00 5.00 5.04 (b)
Col:4.99
X(cm) 2D:3.84
2.16 2.16 2.16 (b) X(cm) 2D:3.84
Dim of Aaprt M:1.44 2.16 2.16 1.16 (b)
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.27
PD (µsec) 0.52 -
PRF (Hz) 55.0*
Pr@PIImax PRF (Hz) 75.0* -
(MPa) 4.28
4.40 6.50 6.50 (b)
3.60 6.50 6.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
Control 1 MI
Control 2 TIS_as Operating
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control
Control 4 TIB_bs Conditions
Control 4 TIB_bs

▐ VDW5-8B
VNA6-12: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler VDW5-8B: 2D& 2D+M mode
Maximum Index Value 1.44 2.22 2.43 1.91** 3.59 (b) Maximum Index Value 1.34 1.12 0.03 0.03** 0.08+ (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) 3.23 Pr.3 (MPa) 2.95
2D P1:8.34
Wo (mW) Wo
PD P1x1:101 PD P: 101 (b) (mW) 2D P1:45.0 M P1x1:1.50 M P:1.40 (b)
PD P1x1:39.0
min of
min of [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) 1.15
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 79.2 -
z1 (cm) 0.60
z1 (cm) - - - 0.70 -
Assoc Zbp (cm) 0.73
Assoc Zbp (cm) - - - 1.57 -
fc (MHz) 2D:5.00
5.05 5.05 5.05 5.05 (b) X(cm) 0.92 0.66 0.31 0.31 (b)
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
X(cm) 2D:3.84
2.16 2.16 2.16 (b) PD (µsec) 0.28
Y(cm) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 (b) PRF (Hz) 26.7*
Pr@PIImax
PD (µsec) 0.73 - - - - (MPa) 4.09
Other deq@PIImax
PRF (Hz) (cm) 0.33
999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 3.89 - - - - 1.50 3.00 1.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
Ipa.3 @MImax
Information Focal FLx(cm) (W/cm2) 282
6.50 6.50 6.50 (b)
Length FLy(cm)
2.00 2.00 2.00 (b)
Operating
Control 2 TIS_as
Control
Control 1 Control 3 TIS_as_U
Operating MI Conditions
Control Control 2 TIS_as Control 4 TIS_bs TIB_bs
VDW5-8B: 2D+Color, Triple, CPA & Triple CPA

TIS TIB TIC
VDW5-8B: Pulsed Doppler & 2D + Pulsed Doppler
Pr.3 Maximum Index Value 1.23 0.66 0.66 0.48** 1.44 (b)
(MPa) 1.98
Pr.3
Wo (mW) 2D P1:2.62 PD PD (MPa) 2.69
(b)
2D P1:2.44 PD
Wo
Col P1:45.6 P1x1:21.1 P:21.0 (mW) PD P:
(b)
min of PD P1x1:27.0 P1x1:29.4 27.0
16.2 -
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) - - - 21.1 -
z1 (cm) 0.80 -
z1
Assoc Zbp (cm) 0.90 - (cm) - - - 0.80 -
Assoc Zbp
Acoustic Zsp (cm) 1.80 1.60 (cm) - - - 0.90 -
Acoustic Zsp
Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.24 (cm) 1.60 1.60
fc (MHz) 2D:4.02 Parameter deq(zsp) (cm) 0.24
4.74 4.76 4.76 4.76 (b) fc
Col:4.74 (MHz) 2D:4.06
4.73 4.74 4.76 4.76 (b)
X(cm) 2D:2.50 PD:4.76
0.47 0.47 0.66 (b)
Dim of Aaprt Col:1.48 X(cm) 2D:2.50
0.97 0.47 0.66 (b)
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b) Dim of Aaprt PD:0.66
Y(cm) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 (b)
PD (µsec) 0.61 -
PRF (Hz) 63.5* - PD (µsec) 0.81 - - - -
Pr@PIImax (MPa) 2.66 - PRF (Hz) 999 - - - -
Pr@PIImax
Other deq@PIImax (cm) 0.23 (MPa) 3.41 - - - -
Other deq@PIImax
1.50 1.50 1.50 (b) (cm) 0.23
Length FLy(cm)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b) 2.00 3.00 1.50 (b)
3.00 3.00 3.00 (b)
(W/cm2) 168
Control 1 MI
Operating Control 1
Control 2 TIS_as MI
Control Operating
Control 3 TIS_as_U TIS_bs Control 2 TIS_as TIB_bs
Conditions Control
Control 4 TIB_bs Control 3 TIS_as_U
Conditions
Control 4 TIS_bs

▐ CW2.0 ▐ CW4.0
CW2.0: CW mode CW4.0: CW mode

Maximum Index Value 0.04 (a) 0.32 (c) 1.20 (b) Maximum Index Value 0.02 (a) 0.11 (c) 0.38 (b)
Pr.3 (MPa) Pr.3
0.05 - - - - - (MPa) 0.05 - - - - -
Wo (mW) Wo
- (a) 34.3 34.3 (b) (mW) - (a) 6.35 6.35 (b)
min of min of
[W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) (c) [W .3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW) (c)
z1 (cm) z1
(c) (cm) (c)
(c) (cm) (c)
1.90 1.30 (cm) 1.20 1.20
fc (MHz) fc
1.92 (a) 1.92 (c) 1.92 (b) (MHz) 3.85 (a) 3.85 (c) 3.85 (b)
X(cm) (a) 0.90 (c) 0.90 (b) X(cm) (a) 0.90 (c) 0.90 (b)
Y(cm) (a) 0.65 (c) 0.65 (b) Y(cm) (a) 0.65 (c) 0.65 (b)
PD (µsec) CW PD (µsec) CW
PRF (Hz) CW PRF (Hz) CW
0.07 (MPa) 0.06
0.52 (cm) 0.29
5.50 5.50 (c) (b) 3.50 3.50 (c) (b)
Length FLy(cm)
5.50 5.50 (c) (b) Length FLy(cm)
3.50 3.50 (c) (b)
0.11 (W/cm2) 0.07
Operating Operating
Control Control 1 MI TIS_as_U TIB_bs Control Control 1 MI TIS_as_U TIB_bs
Control 1: Set Output to Maximum. Control 1: Set Output to Maximum.

Accuvix XQ User Manual v1 English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accuvix XQ User Manual v1 English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Empty Page)

MEDISON’s systems contain MEDISON’s proprietary software in machine-readable form.

This is CSA symbol for Canada and United States of America

This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with

This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with

* Electromechanical safety standards met:

Describes precautions necessary to prevent user hazards of great

A piece of information useful for installing, operating and maintaining a

System Upgrades and Manual Set Updates

If You Need Assistance

SAFETY SIGNS......................................................................................................... 1-2

CHAPTER 2. INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION

WHAT IS ACCUVIX XQ?........................................................................................... 2-2

SELECTING PROBE AND APPLICATION ................................................................3-3

UTILITY SETUP ...................................................................................................... 3-44

CHAPTER 4. DIAGNOSIS MODES

DIAGNOSIS MODE TYPES AND CONTROL ........................................................... 4-3

CHAPTER 5. MEASUREMENTS AND CALCULATIONS

MEASUREMENT RANGE AND ACCURACY ............................................................................5-2

CHAPTER 6. IMAGE MANAGEMENT

REVIEWING IMAGES ............................................................................................... 6-2

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 7-2

MEDISON IS PROVIDING AN ADDITIONAL ACCUVIX XQ REFERENCE MANUAL. GA TABLES AND

ELECTRICAL SAFETY .................................................................................................. 5

ECG-Related Information ......................................................................................................... 6

MECHANICAL SAFETY ............................................................................................... 14

Safety Note ............................................................................................................................. 14

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .............................................................................. 26

AC (alternating current) voltage source

Indicates a caution for risk of electric shock.

Isolated patient connection (Type BF applied part).

Power switch (Supplies/cuts the power for product)

Refer to the User Manual.

Identifies an equipotential ground.

Indicates dangerous voltages over 1000V AC or over 1500V DC.

Identifies the point where the system safety ground is fastened to

Input/Output (I/O) port

Left and right Audio / Video input

Left and right Audio / Video output

Remote print output

Foot switch connector

Protection against the effects of immersion.

Protection against dripping water.

[Label 1. Marked on the sides of the product]

[Label 2. Marked on the bottom of the product]

[Label 3. Marked below OUTLET]

 As for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured

Prevention of Electric Shock

[Figure 1.1 Equipotential bonding]

■ The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to

In cases where EMI is causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate

▐ Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emission

Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment -guidance

The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its

▐ Approved Cables, Transducers and Accessories for EMC

Cables connected to this product may affect its emissions;

Cable Type Length

VGA Shielded Normal

2. Approved Transducer for Electromagnetic Compliance

3. Approved Accessories for Electromagnetic Compliance

When connecting other customer-supplied accessories to the system, such as

Floors should be wood,

Electrical fast ±2 KV ±2KV

<5% Uт for 0.5cycle <5% Uт for 0.5cycle

As for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured

Feedback Information: Displays a variety of system information, such as the